(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "tektronix :: scope :: 070-3831-00 2465svc Oct84"

Ttektronix 



2465 

OSCILLOSCOPE 

SERVICE 

INSTRUCTION MANUAL 



Tfektronix 



® 

COMMITTED TO EXCELLENCE 



WARNING 

THE FOLLOWING SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS 
ARE FOR USE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY. 
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, DO NOT 
PERFORM ANY SERVICING OTHER THAN THAT 
CONTAINED IN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 
UNLESS YOU ARE QUALIFIED TO DO SO. 



PLEASE CHECK FOR CHANGE INFORMATION 
AT THE REAR OF THIS MANUAL 



2465 

OSCILLOSCOPE 

SERVICE 



INSTRUCTION MANUAL 



Tektronix, Inc. 

P.O. Box 500 

Beaverton, Oregon 97077 Serial Number 



070-3831-00 First Printing JAN 1983 

PrnHnrt Rrmin 3fl Revised OPT 1984 



Copyright © 1983 Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. 
Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any 
form without the written permission of Tektronix, Inc. 

Products of Tektronix, Inc. and its subsidiaries are covered 
by U.S. and foreign patents and/or pending patents. 




TEKTRONIX, TEK, SCOPE-MOBILE, and Wl% are 
registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc. TELEQUIPMENT 
is a registered trademark of Tektronix U.K. Limited. 

Printed in U.S.A. Specification and price change privileges 
are reserved. 



INSTRUMENT SERIAL NUMBERS 

Each instrument has a serial number on a panel insert, tag, 
or stamped on the chassis. The first number or letter 
designates the country of manufacture. The last five digits 
of the serial number are assigned sequentially and are 
unique to each instrument. Those manufactured in the 
United States have six unique digits. The country of 
manufacture is identified as follows: 

B000000 Tektronix, Inc., Beaverton, Oregon, USA 

100000 Tektronix Guernsey, Ltd., Channel Islands 

200000 Tektronix United Kingdom, Ltd., London 

300000 Sony/Tektronix, Japan 

700000 Tektronix Holland, NV, Heerenveen, 

The Netherlands 



2465 Service 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 



Page 

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS iv 

LIST OF TABLES v 

OPERATORS SAFETY SUMMARY vi 

SERVICING SAFETY SUMMARY vii 

SECTION 1 SPECIFICATION 

INTRODUCTION 1-1 

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS .. . 1-1 



SECTION 2 OPERATING INFORMATION 

PREPARATION FOR USE 2-1 

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 2-1 

LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION .... 2-1 

LINE FUSE 2-1 

POWER CORD 2-1 

INSTRUMENT COOLING 2-2 

START-UP 2-2 

REPACKAGING FOR 

SHIPMENT 2-2 

CONTROLS, CONNECTORS, 

AND INDICATORS 2-4 

POWER AND DISPLAY 2-4 

VERTICAL 2-5 

HORIZONTAL AND DELTA 

MEASUREMENT 2-7 

TRIGGER 2-10 

REAR PANEL 2-12 

READOUT DISPLAY 2-13 

OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS. . . . 2-15 

GRATICULE 2-15 

TIME AND VOLTAGE 

MEASUREMENTS 2-15 

GROUNDING . 2-15 

SIGNAL CONNECTIONS 2-16 

INPUT-COUPLING 

CAPACITOR PRECHARGING .... 2-16 

EXTERNALTRIGGERING 2-16 



Page 

OPERATOR'S CHECKS 

AND ADJUSTMENTS 2-17 

INTRODUCTION 2-17 

INITIAL SETUP 2-17 

TRACE ROTATION 

ADJUSTMENT 2-17 

ASTIGMATISM ADJUSTMENT . . . 2-18 

AUTO DC BALANCE 

ADJUSTMENT 2-18 

PROBE LOW-FREQUENCY 

COMPENSATION 2-18 

MATCHING CHANNEL 2 

DELAY 2-19 

AMPLITUDE CHECK 2-20 

TIMING CHECK 2-20 



SECTION 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 

INTRODUCTION 3-1 

SECTION ORGANIZATION 3-1 

HYBRID AND INTEGRATED 

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS 3-1 

BLOCK DIAGRAM 3-1 

BLOCK DESCRIPTION 3-1 

DETAILED CIRCUIT 

DESCRIPTION 3-5 

INTRODUCTION 3-5 

PROCESSOR AND DIGITAL 

CONTROL 3-5 

ANALOG CONTROL 3-9 

FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS 3-12 

ATTENUATORS AND 

PREAMPLIFIERS 3-14 

DISPLAY SEQUENCER, 

TRIGGERS, AND SWEEPS 3-17 

VERTICAL CHANNEL SWITCH 

AND OUTPUT AMPLIFIERS 3-23 

READOUT 3-27 

HIGH VOLTAGE POWER 

SUPPLY AND CRT 3-35 

LOW VOLTAGE POWER 

SUPPLY 3-40 



2465 Service 



TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont) 



Page 
SECTION 3 THEORY OF OPERATION (cont) 

LOW VOLTAGE 

REGULATORS 3-45 

POWER DISTRIBUTION 3-47 

INTERCONNECTIONS 3-47 



SECTION 4 PERFORMANCE CHECK AND 
FUNCTIONAL VERIFICATION 
PROCEDURE 

INTRODUCTION 4-1 

PREPARATION 4-1 

VERTICAL 4-4 

TRIGGERING 4-14 

HORIZONTAL 4-18 

CALIBRATOR, EXTERNAL 

Z-AXIS AND GATE OUTPUTS 4-26 

ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL 
VERIFICATION 4-28 



SECTION 5 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 

INTRODUCTION 5-1 

PARTIAL PROCEDURES 5-1 

POWER SUPPLIES 5-2 

CRT ADJUSTMENTS 5-4 

DACREF, CH 1 AND CH 2 
INPUT CAPACITANCE, AND 
VERTICAL READOUT JITTER 

ADJUSTMENTS 5-7 

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION 
CONSTANTS, HORIZONTAL 
AND VERTICAL GAIN, 
CENTERING, AND TRANSIENT 

RESPONSE ADJUSTMENTS 5-9 

CAL01-HORIZONTAL 5-9 

CAL02-VERTICAL 5-12 

CAL03-TRIGGERING 5-14 

CAL04-CH2 DELAY 
ENABLE/DISABLE. . 5-15 



Page 



DYNAMIC CENTERING, 

CRT TERMINATION, 

VERTICAL GAIN, 

VERTICAL CENTERING, 

TRANSIENT RESPONSE, HF ADJ, 

READOUT JITTER, 

DC BALANCE, AND 

X-Y PHASE DIFFERENTIAL 

ADJUSTMENTS 



5-16 



SECTION 6 MAINTENANCE 

STATIC-SENSITIVE 

COMPONENTS 6-1 

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 6-2 

INTRODUCTION 6-2 

GENERAL CARE 6-2 

INSPECTION AND 

CLEANING 6-2 

LUBRICATION 6-4 

SEMICONDUCTOR CHECKS 6-4 

PERIODIC READJUSTMENT 6-4 

TROUBLESHOOTING 6-5 

INTRODUCTION 6-5 

TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS 6-5 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

EQUIPMENT 6-6 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

TECHNIQUES 6-6 

DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES 6-9 

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 6-18 

INTRODUCTION 6-18 

MAINTENANCE 

PRECAUTIONS 6-18 

OBTAINING REPLACEMENT 

PARTS 6-18 

MAINTENANCE AIDS 6-18 

INTERCONNECTIONS 6-19 

TRANSISTORS, INTEGRATED 
CIRCUITS, AND HYBRID 

CIRCUITS 6-20 

SOLDERING TECHNIQUES 6-20 

REMOVAL AND 
REPLACEMENT 
INSTRUCTIONS 6-22 



2465 Service 






Page 



SECTION 7 OPTIONS 



INTRODUCTION 7-1 

OPTION 11 7-1 

OPTION 22 7-1 

OPTION 1R 7-1 

POWER CORD OPTIONS 7-1 

FUTURE OPTIONS 7-2 



SECTION 8 REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS 

SECTION 9 DIAGRAMS 

SECTION 10 REPLACEABLE MECHANICAL PARTS 
ACCESSORIES 

CHANGE INFORMATION 



III 



2465 Service 



LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 



Figure Page 

The 2465 Oscilloscope viii 

2-1 Line selector switch, line fuse, and detachable power cord 2-2 

2-2 Power and display controls 2-4 

2-3 Vertical controls and CH 1 OR X and CH 2 connectors 2-5 

2-4 Channel 3 and Channel 4 controls and connectors and CALIBRATOR output 2-6 

2-5 Horizontal and delta measurement controls 2-7 

2-6 Trigger controls and indicators 2-10 

2-7 Rear-panel controls and connectors 2-13 

2-8 Readout display locations 2-14 

2-9 Graticule measurement markings 2-15 

2-10 Probe low-frequency compensation 2-19 

3-1 Block diagram 3-2 

3-2 Address decoding 3-7 

3-3 Accept address timing 3-11 

3-4 Front-Panel Switch matrix 3-13 

3-5 Scale Illumination circuit 3-17 

3-6 Sweep generator 3-22 

3-7 Developing the readout display 3-28 

3-8 Readout display priorities 3-32 

3-9 Timing of Refresh Prioritizer 3-33 

3-10 Dc Restorer circuit 3-38 

3-1 1 Timing relationships of the Inverter Drive signals 3-42 

3-12 Simplified schematic of control network 3-43 

6-1 Multipin connector orientation 6-6 

6-2 Rear panel removal 6-23 

6-3 Ribbon cable removal 6-24 

9-1 Color codes for resistors and capacitors. 

9-2 Semiconductor lead configurations. 

9-3 Locating components on schematic diagrams and circuit board illustrations. 

9-4 2465 block diagram. 

9-5 A5-Control board. 

9-6 A6— Front Panel and A7— Front Panel Variable boards. 

9-7 Circuit view of A6— Front Panel. 

9-8 A1-Main and A8-Scale Illumination boards. 

9-9 A14— Dynamic Centering board. 

9-10 A4-Readout board. 

9-1 1 A9-High Voltage board. 

9-12 A2-Reguiator and A3-lnverter boards. 

9-13 A10-Fan Motor board. 



IV 



2465 Service 



^ |^J | ^^ | | f^u l m J^ t r^J 



Table Page 

1-1 Electrical Characteristics 1-2 

1-2 Environmental Characteristics 1-10 

1-3 Mechanical Characteristics 1-11 

2-1 Voltage, Fuse, and Power-Cord Data 2-3 

3-1 Intensity Control 3-20 

3-2 Trigger Source Selection 3-21 

3-3 Vertical Display Selection 3-24 

3-4 Horizontal Display Selection 3-26 

3-5 Blanking and Intensity Control Selection 3-27 

3-6 Readout Display Mode Selection 3-31 

3-7 Operation of Prioritizer Shift Register 3-32 

4-1 Test Equipment Required 4-2 

4-2 Accuracy Limits 4-7 

4-3 CH 3 and CH 4 Accuracy Limits 4-8 

4-4 CH 1 or CH 2 Triggering Conditions 4-15 

4-5 CH 3 or CH 4 Triggering Conditions 4-15 

4-6 Settings for A and B Timing Accuracy Checks and A Cursor Accuracy Limits 4-20 

4-7 Horizontal Timing Accuracy Checked Against the Graticule 4-21 

4-8 Delta Time Display Accuracy 4-22 

4-9 Delayed Sweep Delta Time Accuracy 4-23 

5-1 Power Supply Voltage and Ripple Tolerances 5-3 

5-2 Horizontal Timing 5-11 

5-3 Horizontal Timing 5-12 

5-4 Vertical Calibration Signals 5-13 

5-5 Vertical Calibration Signals 5-13 

6-1 Susceptibility to Static Discharge Damage 6-1 

6-2 External Inspection Check List 6-2 

6-3 Internal Inspection Check List 6-3 

6-4 Sequence of Diagnostic Tests and Exerciser Routines 6-11 

6-5 Kernel Test Failure Codes 6-13 

6-6 Front-Panel LED Option Codes 6-13 

6-7 Front-Panel LED Device Codes 6-13 

6-8 Potentiometer Code Numbers 6-15 

6-9 DAC Multiplexer "D" Codes 6-15 

6-10 Pots and Switches Column and Row Code Definitions 6-16 

6-1 1 Maintenance Aids 6-19 



2465 Service 



OPERATORS SAFETY SUMMARY 



777e general safety information in this part of the summary is for both operating and servicing personnel. Specific warnings 
and cautions will be found throughout the manual where they apply and do not appear in this summary. 



Terms in This Manual 

CAUTION statements identify conditions or practices 
that could result in damage to the equipment or other 
property. 

WARNING statements identify conditions or practices 
that could result in personal injury or loss of life. 



Grounding the Product 

This product is grounded through the grounding conductor 
of the power cord. To avoid electrical shock, plug the 
power cord into a properly wired receptacle before con- 
necting to the product input or output terminals. A 
protective ground connection by way of the grounding 
conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation. 



Terms as Marked on Equipment 

CAUTION indicates a personal injury hazard not imme- 
diately accessible as one reads the markings, or a hazard to 
property, including the equipment itself. 

DANGER indicates a personal injury hazard immediately 
accessible as one reads the marking. 



Symbols in This Manual 



A 



This symbol indicates where applicable 
cautionary or other information is to be 
found. For maximum input voltage see 
Table 1-1. 



Symbols as Marked on Equipment 

j£ DANGER - High voltage. 

MH Protective ground (earth) terminal. 
/\ ATTENTION - Refer to manual. 



Power Source 

This product is intended to operate from a power source 
that does not apply more than 250 volts rms between the 
supply conductors or between either supply conductor and 
ground. A protective ground connection by way of the 
grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe 
operation. 



Danger Arising From Loss of Ground 

Upon loss of the protective-ground connection, all acces- 
sible conductive parts (including knobs and controls that 
may appear to be insulating) can render an electric shock. 



Use the Proper Power Cord 

Use only the power cord and connector specified for 
your product. 

Use only a power cord that is in good condition. 

For detailed information on power cords and connectors 
see Table 2-1. 



Use the Proper Fuse 

To avoid fire hazard, use only a fuse of the correct type, 
voltage rating and current rating as specified in the parts 
list for your product. 



Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmospheres 

To avoid explosion, do not operate this product in an 
explosive atmosphere unless it has been specifically cer- 
tified for such operation. 



Do Not Remove Covers or Panels 

To avoid personal injury, do not remove the product 
covers or panels. Do not operate the product without the 
covers and panels properly installed. 



VI 



2465 Service 



^£I^Y!oIIM\3 ^^^^ I Y o vJ IVl IVI /\ ri i 

FOR QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY 

Refer also to the preceding Operators Safety Summary. 



Do Not Service Alone 

Do not perform internal service or adjustment of this 
product unless another person capable of rendering first 
aid and resuscitation is present. 



Use Care When Servicing With Power On 

Dangerous voltages exist at several points in this product. 
To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed connec- 
tions or components while power is on. 



Disconnect power before removing protective panels, 
soldering, or replacing components. 



Power Source 

This product is intended to operate from a power source 
that does not apply more than 250 volts rms between the 
supply conductors or between either supply conductor 
and ground. A protective ground connection by way of the 
grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for 
safe operation. 



vn 



2465 Service 







The 2465 Oscilloscope. 



viii 



Section 1—2465 Service 



SPECIFICATION 



INTRODUCTION 



The TEKTRONIX 2465 Oscilloscope is a portable 
300-MHz instrument having a four-channel vertical deflec- 
tion system. Channel 1 and Channel 2 provide calibrated 
deflection factors from 2 mV per division to 5 V per 
division. For each of these channels, input impedance is 
selectable between two values: either 1 MO, in parallel 
with 15 pF, or 50 fi internal termination. Input-signal 
coupling with 1-M£2 impedance can be selected as either 
AC or DC. Channel 3 and Channel 4 have deflection factors 
of either 0.1 V or 0.5 V per division. Each of these channels 
has an input impedance of 1 M£2 in parallel with 15 pF, 
with DC input-signal coupling. Trigger circuits enable stable 
triggering over the full bandwidth of the vertical system. 



For part numbers and further information about both 
standard and optional accessories, refer to either "Options 
and Accessories" (Section 7) in the Operators manual or 
the Accessories information at the rear of this manual. 
Your Tektronix representative or local Tektronix Field 
Office can also provide accessories information and 
ordering assistance. 



PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS 



The horizontal deflection system provides calibrated 
sweep speeds from 1 .5 s per division to 500 ps per division. 
Drive for the horizontal deflection system is obtained from 
a choice of A, B delayed, A alternated with B delayed 
sweeps, or CH 1 (for the X-Y display mode). 



The following electrical characteristics (Table 1-1) 
are valid for the 2465 when it has been adjusted at an 
ambient temperature between +20° C and +30° C, has had 
a warm-up period of at least 20 minutes, and is operating 
at an ambient temperature between — 15°C and +55°C 
(unless otherwise noted). 



The 2465 incorporates alphanumeric crt readouts of the 
vertical and horizontal scale factors, the trigger levels, 
time-difference measurement values, voltage-difference 
measurement values, and certain auxiliary information. 



The 2465 Oscilloscope is shipped with the following 
standard accessories: 



Items listed in the "Performance Requirements" column 
are verifiable qualitative or quantitative limits that define 
the measurement capabilities of the instrument. 



2 Probe packages 

1 Snap-lock accessories pouch 

1 Zip-lock accessories pouch 

1 Operators manual 

1 Service manual 

1 Dnorotncc r\nn\sQ + ra-£arar\r*a r«arrl 

1 Fuse 

1 Power cord (installed) 

1 Blue plastic crt filter (installed) 

1 Clear plastic crt filter 

1 Prnnt.nanal r*r\\tar 



Environmental characteristics are given in Table 1-2. 
The 2465 Oscilloscope meets the environmental require- 
ments of MIL-T-28800C for Type III, Class 3, Style C 
equipment, with the humidity and temperature require- 
ments defined in paragraphs 3.9.2.2, 3.9.2.3, and 3.9.2.4. 



Mechanical characteristics of the 2465 are listed in 



1-1 



Specification— 2465 Service 



Table 1-1 
Electrical Characteristics 



Characteristics 



Performance Requirements 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM-CHANNEL 1 AND CHANNEL 2 



Deflection Factor 
Range 


2 mV per division to 5 V per division in a 1-2-5 sequence of 1 1 steps. 


Accuracy 

+15°Cto+35°C 


Within ±2% at any VOLTS/DIV setting for a 4- or 5-division signal 
centered on the screen. 


-15°C to +15°C and +35° C to +55° C 


Add 1% to +15°C-to-+35°C specification. 


AV Accuracy (using cursors over entire 
graticule area) 

+15°Cto+35°C 


± (1 .25% of reading + 0.03 division + signal aberrations). 


-15°Cto +15°C and +35° C to +55° C 
AV Range 


Add 1% of reading to +15°C-to-+35 C specification. 3 
± 8 times the VOLTS/DIV switch setting. 3 


Variable Range 


Continuously variable between VOLTS/DIV switch settings. Extends 
deflection factor of the 5-V-per-division setting to at least 12.5 V 
per division. 


Frequency Response 


Six-division reference signal from a terminated 50-12 system, with 
VAR VOLTS/DIV control in calibrated detent. 




VOLTS/DIV 
setting 


— 3 dB bandwidth 

with standard-accessory 

probe or internal 

50-12 termination 


-4.7 dB bandwidth 

with 50-Q external 

termination on 

1-MQ input 


-15°Cto+55°C 


2mV 


DC to 100 MHz 


DC to 100MHz a 


-15°Cto+35°C 


5 mV or greater 


DC to 300 MHz 


DC to 300 MHz a 


+35°Cto+55°C 


5 mV or greater 


DC to 250 MHz 3 


DC to 250 MHz a 


AC Coupled Lower -3 dB Point 
1X Probe 


10 Hz or less. 3 


1 0X Probe 


1 Hz or less. 


Step Response 
Rise Time 


1.17 ns or less for VOLTS/DIV switch settings of 5 mV and up 
(calculated). 3 

3.5 ns or less for VOLTS/DIV switch setting of 2 mV (calculated). 3 

Rise time calculated from: bandwidth x rise time = 0.35. 



Performance Requirement not checked in manual. 



1-2 



REV DEC 1983 



Specification— 2465 Service 



Table 1-1 (cont) 



Characteristics 



Performance Requirements 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM-CHANNEL 1 AND CHANNEL 2 (cont) 



Common-mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR) 


At least 20:1 at 50 MHz for common-mode signals of eight divisions 
or less, with VAR VOLTS/DIV control adjusted for best CMRR at 
50 kHz at any VOLTS/DIV switch setting from 5 mV to 5 V per 
division; at least 20:1 at 20 MHz for the 2-mV-per-division switch 
setting. 


Channel isolation 


100:1 or greater attenuation of the deselected channel at 100 MHz; 
50:1 or greater attenuation at 300 MHz, for an eight-division input 
signal from 2 mV per division to 500 mV per division, with equal 
VOLTS/DIV switch settings on both channels. 


Displayed Channel 2 Signal Delay with Respect 
to Channel 1 Signal 


Adjustable through a range of at least —500 ps to +500 ps. 


Input R and C (1 Mft) 
Resistance 


1 Mft ±0.5%. a 


Capacitance 


15pF±2pF. a 


Maximum Input Voltage /K 


400 V (dc + peakac); 

800 V p-p ac at 10 kHz or less. 3 


Input R (50 ft) 
Resistance 


50ft±1%. a 


VSWR (DC to 300 MHz) 


1.3:1 or less. 3 


Maximum Input Voltage /\ 
(Dc Coupling Only) 


5 V rms; 0.5 W-seconds during any 1-s interval for instantaneous 
voltage from 5 V to 50 V. 


Cascaded Operation 
Bandwidth 


Dcto 50 MHz or greater. 


Deflection Factor 


400 juV per division ±10%. 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM-CHANNEL 3 AND CHANNEL 4 



Deflection Factor 
Values 


0.1 V per division and 0.5 V per division. 


Accuracy 


Within ±10%. 


Frequency Response 


Six-division reference signal, from a terminated 50-ft system. 




— 3-d B bandwidth 
with standard-accessory probe 


-4.7-dB bandwidth 
with external 50-ft termination 


-15°Cto+35°C 


DC to 300 MHz 


DC to 300 MHz 


+35°Cto+55°C 


DC to 250 MHz 


DC to 250 MHz 



Performance Requirement not checked in manual. 



REV MAY 1984 



1-3 



Specification— 2465 Service 



Table 1-1 (cont) 



Characteristics 



Performance Requirements 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM-CHANNEL 3 AND CHANNEL 4 (cont) 



Step Response 
Rise Time 


1.17 ns or less (calculated from bandwidth). 3 


Channel Isolation 


50:1 or greater attenuation of the deselected channel at 100 MHz 
with an eight-division input signal. 


Input R and C 
Resistance 


1 Mfi±1%. a 


Capacitance 


15pF±3pF. a 


Maximum Input Voltage /K 


400 V (dc + peak ac); 

800 V p-p ac at 10 kHz or less. 3 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM-ALL CHANNELS 



Low-frequency Linearity 


0.1 division or less compression or expansion of a two-division, center- 
screen signal when positioned anywhere within the graticule area. 


Bandwidth Limiter 


Reduces upper 3-dB bandpass to a limit of 13 MHz to 24 MHz. 


Vertical Signal Delay 


At least 20 ns of the sweep is displayed before the triggering event 
is displayed. 3 


Chopped Mode Switching Rate 


Vertical display switches sequentially through the selected channels 
at the chop switching rate. If the B SEC/DIV switch is set to sweep 
speeds outside the range of 20 jus per division to 2 jus per division, 
the switching rate is 1 MHz ±0.2% (dual-channel cycle rate of 
500 kHz). If the B SEC/DIV switch is set within the range of 20 jus 
per division to 2 [is per division, the switching rate is 2.5 MHz ±0.2% 
(dual-channel cycle rate of 1.25 MHz). At all sweep speeds, the 
chop switching rate is desynchronized with the sweep frequency to 
minimize waveform breaks when viewing repetitive signals. 3 



TRIGGERING 



Minimum P-P Signal Amplitude for Stable Triggering 
from Channel 1 or Channel 2 Source 

DC Coupled 


0.35 division from dc to 50 MHz, increasing to 1 division at 300 MHz, 
1.5 divisions at 500 MHz in ADD MODE. 


NOISE REJ Coupled 


1 .2 divisions or less from dc to 50 MHz, increasing to 3 divisions at 
300 MHz, 4.5 divisions at 500 MHz in ADD MODE. 


AC Coupled 


0.35 division from 60 Hz to 50 MHz, increasing to 1 division at 
300 MHz, 1.5 divisions at 500 MHz in ADD MODE. Attenuates 
signals below 60 Hz. 


HF REJ Coupled 


0.5 division from dc to 30 kHz. 


LF REJ Coupled 


0.5 division from 80 kHz to 50 MHz, increasing to 1 division at 
300 MHz, 1.5 divisions at 500 MHz in ADD MODE. 



Performance Requirement not checked in manual. 



1-4 



REV MAY 1984 



Specification— 2465 Service 



Table 1-1 (cont) 



Characteristics 



Performance Requirements 



TRIGGERING (cont) 



Minimum P-P Signal Amplitude for Stable 
Triggering from Channel 3 or Channel 4 Source 


Amplitudes are one-half of Channel 1 or Channel 2 source 
specification. 


Minimum P-P Signal Amplitude for Stable 
Triggering from Composite, Multiple Channel 
Source in ALT Vertical Mode 


Add 1 division to single-channel source specification. 


Maximum P-P Signal Rejected by NOISE REJ 
COUPLING for Signals Within the Vertical Bandwidth 

Channel 1 or Channel 2 Source 


0.4 division or greater for VOLTS/DIV switch settings of 10 mV and 
higher. Maximum noise amplitude rejected is reduced at 2 mV and 
5 mV per division. 


Channel 3 or Channel 4 Source 


0.2 division or greater. 


Jitter 


Less than 50 ps at 300 MHz with A and B SEC/DIV switch set to 
5 ns, X10 MAG on, and 5 divisions of amplitude. 


LEVEL Control Range 

Channel 1 or Channel 2 Source 


± 18 times the VOLTS/DIV switch setting. 3 


Channel 3 or Channel 4 Source 


± 9 times the VOLTS/DIV switch setting. 3 


LEVEL Control Readout Accuracy (for triggering sig- 
nals with transition times greater than 20 ns) 

Channel 1 or Channel 2 Source 

DC Coupled 

+ 15°Cto +35°C 


Within ± [3% of setting + 3% of p-p signal + 0.2 division + 0.5 mV 
+ (0.5 mV x probe attenuation factor)]. 


-15°Cto+55°C 
(excluding +15°C to +30°C) 


Add (1.5 mV x probe attenuation factor) to the specification listed 
for+15°Cto+30°C. 


NOISE REJ Coupled 


Add ±0.6 division to the DC Coupled specification. 


Channel 3 or Channel 4 Source (DC Coupled) 
NOISE REJ Coupled 


Within ± [3% of setting + 4% of p-p signal + 0.1 division + (0.5 mV 
x probe attenuation factor)]. 

Within ± [3% of setting + 4% of p-p signal + 0.4 division + (0.5 mV 
x probe attenuation factor)]. 


SLOPE Selection 


Conforms to trigger-source waveform or ac power-source waveform. 


AUTO LVL Mode Maximum Triggering Signai Period 
A SEC/DIV Switch Setting Less than 10 ms 


At least 20 ms. 3 


A SEC/DIV Switch Setting from 10 ms to 50 ms 


At least four times the A SEC/DIV switch setting. 3 


A SEC/DIV Switch Setting from 100 ms to 500 ms 


At least 200 ms. 3 



Performance Requirement not checked in manual. 



REV MAY 1984 



1-5 



Specification— 2465 Service 



Table 1-1 (cont) 



Characteristics 



Performance Requirements 



TRIGGERING (cont) 



AUTO Mode Maximum Triggering Signal Period 
A SEC/DIV Switch Setting Less than 10 ms 


At least 80 ms. a 


A SEC/DIV Switch Setting from 10 ms to 50 ms 


At least 16 times the A SEC/DIV switch setting. 3 


A SEC/DIV Switch Setting from 100 ms to 500 ms 


At least 800 ms. a 


AUTO LVL Mode Trigger Acquisition Time 


Eight to 100 times the AUTO LVL Mode maximum triggering-signal 
period, depending on the triggering-signal period and waveform. 3 



HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM 



A Sweep Time Base Range 



0.5 s per division to 5 ns per division in a 1-2-5 sequence of 25 steps. 
X10 MAG feature extends maximum sweep speed to 0.5 ns per 
division. 



B Sweep Time Base Range 



50 ms per division to 5 ns per division in a 1-2-5 sequence of 
22 steps. X10 MAG feature extends maximum sweep speed to 
0.5 ns per division. 



SEC/DIV VAR Control 



Continuously variable and calibrated between settings of the SEC/ 
DIV switch. Extends slowest A Sweep speed to 1.5 s per division. 
Operates in conjunction with the A SEC/DIV switch when A and B 
are locked together; operates in conjunction with the B SEC/DIV 
switch when A and B are not locked together. 



Timing Accuracy (+15°Cto +35° C, SEC/DIV 
switch set to 0.1 s per division or less) 

A and B Sweep Accuracy, Time Intervals 
Measured at Vertical Center with SEC/DIV 
VAR Control in Detent 



Unmagnified 



± (0.7% of time interval 
+ 0.6% of full scale). 



Magnified 



± (1.2% of time interval 
+ 0.6% of full scale). 



0.6% of full scale is 0.06 division. 



At Accuracy, Time Intervals Measured with 
Cursors, Anywhere on the Graticule 
(A Sweep Only) 



Unmagnified 



± (0.5% of time interval 
+ 0.3% of full scale). 



Magnified 



± (1% of time interval 
+ 0.3% of full scale). 



At Accuracy, Time Intervals Measured with 
Delayed B Sweep with Both Delays Set at 1% 
or More of Full Scale from Minimum Delay 
(no ? displayed in readout) 



± (0.3% of time interval + 0.1% of full scale). 



Delay Accuracy, A Sweep Trigger Point to Start 
of B Sweep 



± (0.3% of delay setting + 0.6% of full scale) +0 to -25 ns. 



Timing Accuracy (A SEC/DIV switch set to 0.5 s or 
0.2 s per division) 



Add ±0.5% of time interval to all accuracy specifications. 



Performance Requirement not checked in manual. 



1-6 



Specification— 2465 Service 



Table 1-1 (cont) 



Characteristics 



Performance Requirements 



HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM (cont) 



Timing Accuracy (SEC/DIV VAR control out of 
detent) 


Add 2% of time interval to the A and B Sweep Accuracy 
specification. 


Timing Accuracy (-15°C to +15°C and +35°C 
to+55°C) 


Add ±0.2% of time interval to all At and delay specifications. Add 
±0.5% of time interval to A and B Sweep accuracy specifications. 3 


At Readout Resolution 


Greater of either 10 ps or 0.025% of full scale. 3 


At Range 


± 10 times the A SEC/DIV switch setting. 3 


Delay Pickoff Jitter 


Within 0.004% (one part or less in 25,000) of the maximum 
available delay, plus 100 ps. 


Delay Time Position Range 


to 9.95 times the A SEC/DIV switch setting. Main sweep triggering 
event is observable on delayed sweep with zero delay setting. 3 


X-Y Operation 

X-Axis Deflection Factor 
Range 


Same as Channel 1. a 


Accuracy 


Same as Channel 1. 


Variable Range 


Same as Channel 1. a 


X-Axis Bandwidth 


Dcto3 MHz. 


Input R and C 


Same as Channel 1. a 


Phase Difference Between X 
Bandwidth 


and Y with Normal 


1° or less from dc to 1 MHz; 
3° or less from 1 MHz to 2 MHz. 


X-Axis Low-Frequency Linearity 


0.2 division or less compression or expansion of a two-division, 
center-screen signal when positioned within the display area. 



CURSOR AND FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY 



Cursor Position Range 
Delta Volts (AV) 


At least the center 7.6 vertical divisions. 


Delta Time (At) 


At least the center 9.6 horizontal divisions. 


Minimum Setup Time Required to Maintain 
Front-panel Settings at Power-down 


10 seconds or less. 3 



Performance Requirement not checked in manual. 



1-7 



Specification— 2465 Service 



Table 1-1 (cont) 



Characteristics 



Performance Requirements 



Z-AXIS INPUT 



Sensitivity 
Dc to 2 MHz 


Positive voltage decreases intensity; +2 V blanks a maximum- 
intensity trace. 


2 MHz to 20 MHz 


+2 V modulates a normal-intensity trace. 3 


Input Resistance 


9kft±10%. 3 


Maximum Input Voltage /j\ 


±25 V peak; 25 V p-p ac at 10 kHz or less. 3 









SIGNAL OUTPUTS 


CALIBRATOR (A SEC/DIV sw 
per division) 

Voltage 

1 MSI Load 


itch set to 1 ms 




0.4 V±1%. 


50 £2 Load 


0.2 V±1.5%. 3 


Current (short-circu 


it load) 






8mA±1.5%. 3 


Repetition Period 
Accuracy 


Two times the A SEC/DIV switch setting within the range of 200 ns 
to 200 ms. 

±0.1% during sweep time. 


Symmetry 








Duration of high portion of output cycle is 50% of output period 



± (lesser of 500 ns or 25% of period). 3 



Jitter of Pulse Period or Pulse Width 


10 nsor less. 3 


CH 2 SIGNAL OUT 
Output Voltage 


20 mV per division ±10% into 1 Mfi; 
10 mV per division ±10% into 50 Q,. 


Offset 


±5 mV into 50 SI, when dc balance has been performed within 
±5°C of the operating temperature. 


A GATE OUT and B GATE OUT 
Output Voltage 


2.4 V to 5 V positive-going pulse, starting at V to 0.4 V. 


Output Drive 


Will supply 400 juA during HI state; will sink 2 mA during LO state. 3 



CRT 



Display 


80 mm x 100mm. a 


Standard Phosphor 


P31. 3 


Nominal Accelerating Potential 


16 kV. 3 



'Performance Requirement not checked in manual. 



1-8 



Table 1-1 (cont) 



Specification— 2465 Service 



Characteristics 



Performance Requirements 



AC POWER SOURCE 



Source Voltage 
Ranges 
115V 


90 V to 132 V. a 


230 V 


180 Vto250V. a 


Source Frequency 


48 Hz to 440 Hz. a 


Fuse Rating 


2 A, 250 V, AGC/3AG, Fast blow; 

or 1.6 A, 250 V, 5 x 20 mm, Quick-acting (F). a 


Power Consumption 
Typical 


70 W (140 VA). a 


Maximum 


120 W (180 VA). a 


Primary Circuit Dielectric Voltage Withstand Test 


1500 V rms, 60 Hz for 10 s without breakdown. 3 


Primary Grounding 


Type test to 0.1 Q, maximum. Routine test to check grounding 
continuity between chassis ground and protective earth ground. 3 



Performance Requirement not checked in manual. 



1-9 



Specification— 2465 Service 



Table 1-2 
Environmental Characteristics 



Characteristics 


Performance Requirements 


Temperature 
Operating 


The 2465 Oscilloscope meets the environmental requirements of 
MIL-T-28800CforType III, Class 3, Style C equipment, with the 
humidity and temperature requirements defined in paragraphs 
3.9.2.2, 3.9.2.3, and 3.9.2.4. 

-15°Cto+55°C. 


Nonoperating (storage) 


-62°Cto+85°C. 


Altitude 
Operating 


To 15,000 ft. Maximum operating temperature decreases 1°C for 
each 1 ,000 ft above 5,000 ft. 


Nonoperating (storage) 


To 50,000 ft. 


Humidity (operating and nonoperating) 


Stored at 95% relative humidity for five cycles (120 hours) from 
30°C to 60°C, with operational performance checks at 30°C and 
55°C. 


Vibration (operating) 


15 minutes along each of three axes at a total displacement of 
0.025 inch p-p (4 g at 55 Hz), with frequency varied from 10 Hz to 
55 Hz in one-minute sweeps. Held 10 minutes at each major 
resonance, or if none existed, held 10 minutes at 55 Hz (75 minutes 
total test time). 


Shock (operating and nonoperating) 


50 g, half-sine, 1 1-ms duration, three shocks on each face, for a 
total of 18 shocks. 


Transit Drop (not in shipping package) 


12-inch drop on each corner and each face (MIL-T-28800C, 
para 3.9.5.2 and 4.5.5.4.2). 


Bench Handling (with and without cabinet installed) 


MIL-STD-810C, Method 516.2, Procedure V (MIL-T-28800C, 
paragraph 4.5.5.4.3). 


EMI (electromagnetic interference) 


Meets MIL-T-28800C; MIL-STD-461B, part 4 (CE-03 and CS-02), 
part 5 (CS-06 and RS-02), and part 7 (CS-01, RE-02, and RS-03- 
limited to 1 GHz); VDE 0871, Catagory B; Part 15 of FCC Rules 
and Regulations, Subpart J, Class A; and Tektronix Standard 
. 062-2866-00. 



Topple (operating with cabinet installed) 


Set on rear feet and allowed to topple over onto each of four 
adjacent faces . 


Packaged Transportation Drop 


Meets the limits of the National Safe Transit Association test 
procedure 1A-B-2; 10 drops of 36 inches . 


Packaged Transporation Vibration 


Meets the limits of National Safe Transit Association test 
procedure 1A-B-1; excursion of 1 inch p-p at 4.63 Hz (1.1 g) for 
30 minutes 



1-10 



REV MAY 1984 



Specification-2465 Service 



Table 1-3 
Mechanical Characteristics 



Characteristics 


Description 


Weight 

With Accessories and Pouch 


10.2 kg (22.4 lb). 


Without Accessories and Pouch 


9.3 kg (20.5 lb). 


Domestic Shipping Weight 


12.8 kg (28.2 lb). 


Height 

With Feet and Accessories Pouch 


190 mm (7.5 in). 


Without Accessories Pouch 


160 mm (6.3 in). 


Width (with handle) 


330 mm (13.0 in). 


Depth 

With Front-Panel Cover 


434 mm (17.1 in). 


With Handle Extended 


505 mm (19.9 in). 


Cooling 


Forced-air circulation. 


Finish 


Tektronix Blue vinyl-clad material on aluminum cabinet. 


Construction 


Aluminum-alloy chassis (sheet metal). Plastic-laminate front 
panel. Glass-laminate circuit boards. 



1-11 



Section 2-2465 Service 



OPERATING INFORMATION 



This section of the manual provides information on instrument installation and power requirements, and the functions 
of controls, connectors, and indicators are described. Operating considerations, intended to familiarize the operator with 
basic measurement techniques, and operator's checks and adjustments for the 2465 are included. For additional operating 
information, refer to the 2465 Operators Manual. 



PREPARATION FOR USE 



SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 

Refer to the Safety Summaries at the front of this 
manual for power source, grounding, and other safety 
considerations pertaining to the use of the instrument. 
Before connecting the oscilloscope to a power source, 
read entirely both this section and the Safety Summaries. 




This instrument may be damaged if operated with 
the LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch set for the 
wrong applied ac input-source voltage or if the 
wrong line fuse is installed. 



2. Pull the cap (with the attached fuse inside) out of 
the fuse holder. 



3. Verify proper fuse value (see Table 2-1). 

4. Install the proper fuse and reinstall the fuse-holder 
cap. 

NOTE 

The two types of fuses listed are not directly inter- 
changeable; they require different types of fuse caps. 



LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION 

The 2465 operates from either a 115-V or a 230-V 
nominal ac power-input source having line frequency 
ranging from 48 Hz to 440 Hz. Before connecting the 
power cord to a power-input source, verify that the LINE 
VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch, located on the rear panel 
(see Figure 2-1), is set for the correct nominal ac input- 
source voltage. To convert the instrument for operation 
from one line-voltage range to the other, move the LINE 
VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch to the correct nominal 
ac source-voltage setting (see Table 2-1). The detachable 
power cord may have to be changed to match the particular 
power-source output. 



POWER CORD 

This instrument has a detachable, three-wire power cord 
with a three-contact plug for connection to both the power 
source and protective ground. The power cord is secured to 
the rear panel by a cord-set-securing clamp. The protective- 
ground contact on the plug connects (through the power- 
cord protective grounding conductor) to the accessible 
metal parts of the instrument. For electrical-shock pro- 
tection, insert this plug into a power-source outlet that has 
a properly grounded protective-ground contact. 



LINE FUSE 

To verify that the instrument power-input fuse is of 
proper value for the nominal ac source voltage selected, 
perform the following procedure: 

1. Press in the fuse-holder cap and release it with a 
slight counterclockwise rotation. 



Instruments are shipped with the required power cord 
as ordered by the customer. Available power-cord infor- 
mation is presented in Table 2-1. Part numbers are iisted 
both in the "Accessories" information at the rear of this 
manual and in the "Options and Accessories" section of 
the Operators Manual (Section 7). Contact your Tektronix 
representative or local Tektronix Field Office for additional 
power-cord information. 



2-1 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



LINE FUSE 



LINE SELECTOR 
SWITCH 




3831-31 



Figure 2-1. Line selector switch, line fuse, and detachable power cord. 



INSTRUMENT COOLING 

To prevent instrument damage from overheated com- 
ponents, adequate internal airflow must be maintained at 
all times. Before turning on the power, first verify that both 
the air-intake holes on the bottom of the cabinet and the 
fan-exhaust holes in the rear panel are free of any obstruc- 
tion to airflow. 



failure, press the A/B TRIG button. If the instrument then 
functions for your particular measurement requirement, it 
may be used, but refer it to a qualified service technician 
for repair of the problem at the earliest convenience. 
Additional information on the power-up tests may be 
found in the "Maintenance" section of this manual and in 
Appendix A of the Operators Manual. Consult your service 
department, your local Tektronix Service Center, or nearest 
Tektronix representative if additional assistance is needed. 



START-UP 

The 2465 automatically performs power-up tests each 
time the instrument is turned on. The purpose of these 
tests is to provide the user with the highest possible con- 
fidence level that the instrument is fully functional. If no 
faults are encountered, the power-up tests normally will be 
completed in under five seconds, after which the instru- 
ment will enter the normal operating mode. A failure of 
any of the power-up tests will be indicated by either a 
flashing TRIG'D indicator on the instrument front panel or 
a bottom-line readout on the crt in the form: TEST XX 
FAIL YY (where XX is the test number and YY is the 
failure code of the failed test). 



REPACKAGING FOR SHIPMENT 

If this instrument is to be shipped by commercial 
transportation, it is recommended that it be packaged in 
the original manner. The carton and packaging material in 
which your instrument was shipped to you should be saved 
and used for this purpose. 



If the original packaging is unfit for use or is not avail- 
able, repackage the instrument as follows: 



If a failure of any power-up test occurs, the instrument 
may still be usable for some applications. To put the 
instrument into the operating mode after a power-up test 



1. Obtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton 
having inside dimensions at least six inches greater 
than the instrument dimensions and having a carton 
test strength of at least 275 pounds. 



2-2 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



If the instrument is to be shipped to a Tektronix 
Service Center for service or repair, attach a tag to 
the instrument showing the following: owner of the 
instrument (with address), the name of a person at 
your firm who can be contacted, complete instru- 
ment type and serial number, and a description of the 
service required. 



4. Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly packing 
dunnage or urethane foam between the carton and 
the instrument, allowing three inches on each side. 



5. Seal the carton with shipping tape or with an indus- 
trial stapler. 



3. Wrap the instrument with polyethylene sheeting or 
equivalent to protect the outside finish and prevent 
entry of packing materials into the instrument. 



6. Mark the address of the Tekronix Service Center and 
your return address on the carton in one or more 
prominent locations. 



Table 2-1 
Voltage, Fuse, and Power-Cord Data 



Plug 
Configuration 









Category 



U.S. 
Domestic 
Standard 



Option A1 



Option A2 



Option A3 



Option A4 



Option A5 



Power Cord 

And 
Plug Type 



U.S. 
120V 
15A 



EURO 

240V 

10-1 6A 



UK a 

240V 

6A 



Australian 
240V 
10A 



Line 
Voltage 
Selector 
Setting 



115V 



230V 



>30V 



230V 



North 

American 

240V 

15A 



Switzerland 

220V 

6A 



230V 



230V 



Voltage 

Range 

(AC) 



90V to 
132V 



1 80V to 
250V 



180V to 
250V 



1 80V to 
250V 



1 80V to 
250V 



Factory 

Installed 

Instrument 

Fuse 



2A, 250V 
AGC/3AG 
Fast- blow 
(UL 198.6) 



1.6A, 250V 
5x20 mm 
Slow-blow 
(I EC 127) 



1.6A, 250V 
5x20 mm 
Slow-blow 
( I EC 1 27) 



1 .6A, 250V 
5x20 mm 
Slow-blow 
(I EC 127) 



1 80V to 



2A, 250V 
AGC/3AG 
Slow-blow 
(UL 198.6) 



Fuse 

Holder 

Cap 



Reference 
Standards 6 



AGC/3AG 



5x20 mm 



5x20 mm 



5x20 mm 



1 .6A, 250V 
5x20 mm 
Slow-blow 
(IEC 127) 



AGC/3AG 



ANSI C73.11 
NEMA5-15-P 
IEC 83 
UL 198.6 



CEE(7), II, IV, VII 
IEC 83 
IEC 127 



BS 1363 
IEC 83 
IEC 127 



ASC112 
IEC 127 



5x20 mm 



ANSI C73.20 
NEMA6-15-P 
IEC 83 
UL 198.6 



SEV 
IEC 127 



A 6A, Type C fuse is also installed inside the plug of the Option A2 power cord 

Reference Standards Abbreviations: 

ANSI— American National Standards Institute 
AS— Standards Association of Australia 
BS— British Standards Institution 
CEE— International Commission on Rules for 
the Approval of Electrical Equipment 



IEC— international Eiectrotechnicai Commission 
NEMA— National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 
SEV— Schweizevischer Elektrotechischer Verein 
UL— Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 



(3832-02)3831-25 



REV JUL 1984 



2-3 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



CONTROLS, CONNECTORS, 
AND INDICATORS 



The following descriptions are intended to familiarize 
the operator with the location and function of the instru- 
ment's controls, connectors, and indicators. 



POWER AND DISPLAY 

Refer to Figure 2-2 for location of items 1 through 9. 

(T) INTENSITY Control-Adjusts brightness of the crt 
trace display. This control does not affect intensity of 
the crt readout display. 

(Y) BEAM FIND Switch-When held in, compresses the 
display to within the graticule area. Aids the operator 
in locating off-screen displays. 



(T) SCALE ILLUM Control-Adjusts the 

the graticule illumination. 



light level of 



(8 J POWER Switch— Turns instrument power on and off. 
Press in for ON; press again for OFF. An internal 
indicator in the switch shows green when the switch 
is on and black when it is off. Front-panel settings 
that were unchanged for at least 10 seconds prior to 
power-off will be returned when power is reapplied to 
the instrument- 



© 



CRT— Has an 80-mm vertical and 100-mm horizontal 
display area. Internal graticule lines eliminate parallax- 
viewing error between the trace and the graticule 
lines. Rise-time measurement points are indicated 
at the left edge of the graticule. 



(Zj FOCUS Control -Adjusts the display for optimum 
definition. 



© 



TRACE ROTATION Control-Operator-adjusted 
screwdriver control used to align the crt trace with 
the horizontal graticule lines. Once adjusted, it does 
not require readjustment during normal operation of 
the instrument. 



(T) READOUT INTENSITY Control-Adjusts the inten- 
sity of the crt readout display. This control is also 
used to either enable or disable the scale-factor 
display. Setting the control to MIN reduces the 
readout intensity to minimum. Clockwise rotation 
from midrange increases the readout intensity and 
enables the scale-factor display; counterclockwise 
rotation from midrange also increases the intensity 
but disables the scale-factor display. Delta Volts and 
Delta Time readouts and control messages will 
continue to be enabled even when the scale-factor 
display is disabled. 



© 



ASTIG Control-Operator-adjusted screwdriver con- 
trol used in conjunction with the FOCUS control to 
obtain a well-defined display over the entire graticule 
area. Once adjusted, it does not require readjustment 
during normal operation of the instrument. 




,LE ILLUM Ml POWER 



(I 



m 



00®0®®©(«) 



3832-04 



Figure 2-2. Power and display controls. 



2-4 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



VERTICAL 



Refer to Figure 2-3 for location of items 10 through 17. 



® 



CH 1 OR X and CH 2 Input Connectors-Provide 

for application of external signals to the inputs of 
Channel 1 and Channel 2 vertical attenuators. A 
signal applied to the CH 1 OR X connector provides 
the horizontal deflection for an X-Y display. Any 
one or all of the channels (including Channel 1) 
may supply the signal for the X-Y display vertical 
ucii8ction. iii6ss connectors eacn inciUde a covjing- 
ring contact that activates the scale-factor-switching 
circuitry whenever a scale-factor-switching probe 
is connected. The internal circuitry recognizes 
Tektronix attenuation-coded probes. 



coupling is selected, input coupling will revert to 
1 M£2 GND and a crt readout will indicate the 
overloaded condition. Moving the input coupling 
switch of the affected channel removes the over- 
load message. While power is off, coupling is at 
1 M12GND. 



@ Channel 1 and Channel 2 VOLTS/DIV Switches- 
Select vertical deflection factor settings in a 1-2-5 
sequence with 1 1 positions. The VAR control must 
be in the detent (fully clockwise) position to obtain 
a calibrated deflection factor. Basic deflection factors 
are from 2 mV per division to 5 V per division. 
Deflection factors shown in the crt readout reflect 
actual deflection factors in use when Tektronix 
attenuation-coded probes are connected to the 
inputs. 



© 



Input Coupling Switches and Indicators— Select the 

method of coupling input signals to the Channel 1 
and Channel 2 vertical attenuators and indicate the 
selection made. If the Channel 1 and Channel 2 input 
signals are both AC coupled and if both input cou- 
pling switches are pushed up together, the instrument 
automatically performs a dc balance of Channel 1 
and Channel 2 vertical circuitry. 



1 M£2 AC— Input signal is capacitively coupled to 
the vertical attenuator. The dc component of the 
input signal is blocked. The low-frequency limit 
(—3 dB point) is 10 Hz or less when using either 
a 1X probe or a coaxial cable and is 1 Hz or less 
when using a properly compensated 10X probe. 



1 M£~2 GND— The input of the vertical amplifier 
is grounded to provide a zero (ground) reference- 
voltage display. Input resistance is 1 M£l to ground. 
This position of the switch allows precharging of 
the input-coupling capacitor to prevent a sudden 
shift of the trace if AC input coupling is selected 
later. 



1 Mfi DC— All frequency components of the input 
signal are coupled to the vertical attenuator. Input 
resistance is 1 Mfi to ground. 



1 MD, GND— In this position, the switch operates 
exactly the same as previously described. 



50 £2 DC— All frequency components of the input 
signal are coupled to the vertical attenuator, with 
the input terminated by 50 £2 to ground. If exces- 
sive signal is applied to either the CH 1 or the 
CH 2 input connector while 50 £1 DC input 



M3) VAR Controls— Provide continuously variable, un- 
calibrated deflection factors between the calibrated 
settings of the VOLTS/DIV switches. These controls 
vary the deflection factors from calibrated (fully 
clockwise detent position) to at least 2.5 times the 
calibrated deflection factor (fully counterclockwise 
position). When out of the calibrated detent, a greater 
than (>) sign appears in front of the associated 
VOLTS/DIV readout display. 




DDOD 

ADC INVERT 

a a 




3832-05 



Figure 2-3. Vertical controls and CH 1 OR X and CH 2 connectors. 



2-5 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



® 



MODE Switches— Select the indicated channel(s) 
for display when latched in. Any combination of the 
five possible signal selections can be displayed by 
pressing in the appropriate push buttons. The Chan- 
nel 1 signal will be displayed if none of the MODE 
switches are latched in. 

The algebraic sum of Channel 1 and Channel 2 is 
displayed when the ADD push button is latched in. 
When both ADD and INVERT buttons are latched in, 
the waveform displayed is the difference between the 
Channel 1 and Channel 2 signals. The INVERT 
button also inverts the polarity of the signal output 
at the CH 2 SIG OUT connector on the rear panel. 
At the same time, the Channel 2 trigger-signal 
polarity is inverted so that if CH 2 is selected as the 
TRIGGER SOURCE, the displayed slope will agree 
with the TRIGGER SLOPE switch setting. 

When multiple channels are selected, they are dis- 
played sequentially in order of priority. The estab- 
lished priority order is: CH 1, CH 2, ADD, CH 3, 
then CH4. 



The position of this switch has no effect on the 
switching rate of multiple X-Y displays. When more 
than one X-Y display is selected, switching occurs 
at 2.5 MHz. 



@ 20 MHz BW LIMIT Switch-Reduces upper 3 dB 
bandpass of the vertical deflection system to a limit 
of 13 to 24 MHz when latched in. Full instrument 
bandwidth is available when push button is out. 

Refer to Figure 2-4 for location of items 18 through 22. 



® 



CH 3 and CH 4 Input Connectors— Provide for 
application of external signals to Channel 3 and 
Channel 4. Input coupling from these connectors is 
DC only. Coding-ring contacts, identical in operation 
to the CH 1 OR X and CH 2 input connectors, are 
also provided. Channel 3 and Channel 4 are most 
useful as digital signal and trigger signal input chan- 
nels, given their limited choice of deflection factors. 



(J5) POSITION Controls-Set vertical position of the 
Channel 1 and Channel 2 signal displays. Clockwise 
rotation of a control moves the associated trace 
upward. When the X-Y display feature is in use, 
Channel 1 POSITION control moves the display 
horizontally; clockwise moves it to the right. The 
Channel 2, Channel 3, and Channel 4 vertical POSI- 
TION controls move the associated X-Y display 
vertically. 



(j?) CHOP-OUT: ALT Switch -Selects the vertical display 
mode for multiple-channel displays. 



U9) POSITION Controls-Set vertical position of the 
Channel 3 and Channel 4 signal displays. The controls 
operate identically to the Channel 2 POSITION con- 
trol, but with less range on their associated traces. 



® 



Channel 3 and Channel 4 VOLTS/DIV Switches- 
Select either of two basic deflection factors for Chan- 
nel 3 and Channel 4. With the push button OUT, the 
basic deflection factor {using a 1X probe or a coaxial 
cable input connection) is 0.1 V per division; when it 
is latched IN, deflection factor is 0.5 V per division. 



CHOP (latched in)— When more than one channel 
is selected, the vertical display switches sequen- 
tially through the selected channels at the chop- 
switching rate. 

The chop frequency changes between i MHz and 
2.5 MHz, depending on the SEC/DIV switch 
setting. At all sweep speeds, the chop-switching 
rate is desynchronized with the sweep frequency 
to minimize waveform breaks when viewing 
repetitive signals. 



OUT: ALT (released out)— When more than one 
channel is selected, the vertical display switches 
sequentially through the selected channels. Alter- 
nate switching occurs during sweep-retrace times. 
If both A and B Sweeps are displayed, alternate 
switching occurs at the completion of the B Sweep. 



®- 




O POSITION V9LTS/SJV ^position 

-tffi) no <£%« 



Kini6|lF<400Vplc j COWmOBfJIim i IMS) 15pF < 400V pk 




■® 



<S) 



3832-06 



Figure 2-4. Channel 3 and Channel 4 controls and connectors 
and CALIBRATOR output. 



2-6 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



© 



CALIBRATOR Connector-Provides a 0.4-V p-p 
square-wave signal into a 1-M£2 load, a 0.2-V p-p 
square-wave signal into a 50-fi dc-coupled load, or 
an 8-mA p-p square-wave current signal into a short 
circuit at a sweep speed of 1 ms per division. The 
CALIBRATOR output signal is useful for checking 
the sweep, the delays, and the vertical deflection 
accuracies, as well as compensating voltage probes 
and checking the accuracy of current probes. The 
repetition rate of the square wave changes with the 
setting of the A SEC/DIV switch. For all sweep-speed 
settings from 100 ms per division to 100 ns per 
division, the A Sweep display, as seen on the instru- 
ment supplying the CALIBRATOR signal, will be 
five cycles per 10 divisions. At 100 ms per division 
and slower, the CALIBRATOR frequency will be 
5 Hz; at 100 ns per division and faster, the frequency 
will be 5 MHz. The signal amplitude at 5 MHz will be 
at least 50% of the signal amplitude obtained when 
the sweep speed is set to 1 ms per division. 



NOTE 

Due to internal circuitry constraints, the 
calibrator signal is not synchronized during 
trace holdoff. This does not affect the accuracy 
of the calibrator signal that is present during 
a trace display. However, if the 2465 CALI- 
BRATOR signal is used to calibrate other 
instruments, the sweep of the 2465 must be 
shut off. If it is not, the signal will appear to 
jitter and will give false (low) frequency counts. 
The sweep of the 2465 is easily shut off by set- 
ting the TRIGGER MODE switch to SGL SEQ. 



(22) Auxiliary Ground Jack— Provides an auxiliary signal 
ground when interconnecting equipment under test 
and the oscilloscope. Hookup is made via a banana-tip 
connector. 



® 



HORIZONTAL AND 
DELTA MEASUREMENT 

Refer to Figure 2-5 for location of items 23 through 33. 

(23) A SEC/DIV Switch -Selects 25 calibrated A Sweep 
speeds from 0.5 s per division to 5 ns per division, 
or delay ranges from 5 s to 100 ns, in a 1-2-5 
sequence. Extreme counterclockwise switch rotation 
selects the X-Y display mode. In X-Y, the signal 
applied to the CH 1 OR X input connector drives 
the horizontal deflection system. 



B SEC/DIV Switch -Selects 22 calibrated B Sweep 
speeds from 50 ms per division to 5 ns per division in 
a 1-2-5 sequence. This switch also controls Horizontal 
Display Mode switching, as explained in the following 
descriptions. 



Knobs Locked-When both the A SEC/DIV and 
B SEC/DIV switches are set to the same sweep 
speed and the B SEC/DIV knob is pushed in, the 
two knobs are locked together; in this position, 
only the A Sweep is displayed on the crt. 



PULL-INTEN-Pulling the B SEC/DIV knob to the 
out position intensifies the A Sweep display for 
the duration of the B Sweep time. When both the 
A SEC/DIV and B SEC/DIV switches are set to the 
same sweep speed, the B Sweep is not displayed, 
but it runs at one of two speeds: either 100 times 
faster than the A Sweep speed or at 5 ns per 
division, whichever is slower. The A and B SEC/ 
DIV knobs are interlocked to prevent the B SEC/ 
DIV switch from ever being set to a slower sweep 
speed than the A SEC/DIV switch setting. 



The position of the intensified zone on the A 
Sweep indicates the delay time between the start 
of the A Sweep and start of the B Sweep interval. 
Its position is controlled by the A REF OR DLY 
POS control. 

For single-trace displays, when either the Delta 
Time (At) or the reciprocal Delta Time (1/At) 
function is activated, two intensified zones will 
appear on the A Sweep if the B TRIGGER MODE 



POSITION 
' 1(\\ "^V WK X10M«G s ^. 

W^ >^ q, (Jg) 

®* : A7*>^. At T RACKIN G '■■ f~^ 

— Hq J3... DH — (S) 

','■ AREfOROLYPOS A 

® — HO — @ 

A AfiDB SEC/DIV 

(25/- ; '»1\ ^SpTB' -*->_ s~\ 



3832-07 



Figure 2-5. Horizontal and delta measurement controls. 



2-7 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



is set to RUN AFT DLY. When the B TRIGGER 
MODE is set to TR IG AFT DLY, intensified zones 
appear on the A Sweep only if proper B Sweep 
triggering occurs before the end of the A Sweep. 
When set to RUN AFT DLY, the position of the 
Reference zone is controlled by the A REF OR 
DLY POS control as before, and the position of 
the Delta zone is controlled by the A control. In 
TR IG AFT DLY mode, if the B Sweep is triggered, 
the positions of both intensified zones are deter- 
mined by the first triggering events that occur 
after delay times set by the A REF OR DLY POS 
and the A controls have elapsed. 



When more than one trace is displayed using ALT 
VERT MODE, and if the A Sweep is being trig- 
gered from a single source, with the At or 1/At 
function selected, the Reference zone will appear 
on the first selected trace from the following 
sequence: CH 1, CH 2, ADD, CH 3, then CH 4. 
The Delta zone appears on the second selected 
trace, and both zones appear on any additional 
traces. With CHOP VERT MODE or multiple- 
channel triggering, both zones appear on all traces. 

Pulling the B SEC/DIV knob to the out position 
will cancel the Delta Volts (AV) function, if it is 
activated. Pushing in the B SEC/DIV knob to 
the locked position will cancel the NO AV WITH 
DELAY message on the crt readout, if it is being 
displayed. 



PULL-ADJ CH 2 DLY-When the A SEC/DIV 
switch is set to 5 ns per division, pulling the 
B SEC/DIV knob to the out position activates 
the Channel 2 delay -offset (CH 2 DLY) adjust- 
ment feature. See "Matching Channel 2 Delay" in 
Section 5, "Operator's Checks and Adjustments," 
to use this feature. 



TURN-ALT-Pulling the B SEC/DIV knob to the 
out position, then turning it to a faster sweep- 
speed setting than the A SEC/DIV sweep-speed 
setting, produces the Alternate (ALT) Horizontal 
Display Mode. The A Sweep with an intensified 
zone will be alternately displayed with the B 
Sweep, provided the B TRIGGER MODE is set 
either to RUN AFT DLY or to TRIG AFT DLY 
with a proper B triggering signal occurring before 
the end of the A Sweep. The position of the 
intensified zone on the A Sweep indicates the 
approximate delay of the B Sweep, and the length 
of the intensified zone indicates the approximate 
B Sweep duration set by the B SEC/DIV switch. 

If either At or 1/At is also activated, intensified 
zones and associated B Sweeps will be established 



in the same manner as described in "PULL- 
INTEN." 



PUSH-B-Pushing in the B SEC/DIV knob when 
the B SEC/DIV switch is set to a faster sweep 
speed than the A SEC/DIV switch presents only 
the B Sweep trace(s) on the crt display. 



(25) SEC/DIV VAR Control-Continuously varies the 
sweep speed between settings of either the A or the 
B SEC/DIV switch. This control affects the A Sweep 
speed when the A and B SEC/DIV switches are 
locked together. When any of the delayed-sweep 
horizontal modes are displayed, the control affects 
only the B Sweep speed. 



Fully counterclockwise rotation extends the sweep 
speed of the slowest A SEC/DIV switch setting 
(0.5 s per division) to 1.5 s per division. Fully clock- 
wise rotation (detent position) produces the sweep 
speed indicated by the position of the SEC/DIV 
switches. The crt readout displays the actual time- 
per-division scale factor for all settings of the VAR 
control. 



This control produces fine resolution over a portion 
of its range, after which it changes to coarse reso- 
lution. It reenters the fine-resolution range upon 
reversing the direction of rotation. 



(26) TRACE SEP Control-Provides for vertical position- 
ing of the B trace downward from the A trace when 
TURN-ALT Horizontal Display Mode is selected. 
Counterclockwise rotation moves the B trace down- 
ward. At the fully clockwise stop position of the 
control, there is no separation between the A and B 
traces. When the PUSH-B Horizontal Display Mode 
is selected and when either At or 1/At measurement 
mode is active, the TRACE SEP control provides for 
vertical positioning of the trace or traces associated 
with the A control. 



@ 



Horizontal POSITION Control-Sets the horizontal 
position of the sweep displays on the crt. Clockwise 
rotation of the control positions the display to the 
right. This control produces fine resolution over a 
portion of its range, after which it changes to coarse 
resolution. It reenters the fine-resolution range upon 
reversing the direction of rotation. The Horizontal 
POSITION control does not affect the X-Y display 
position on the crt. 



2-8 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



(28) X10 MAG Switch-Horizontally magnifies the por- 
^""^ tion of the sweep display positioned at the center 
vertical graticule line by a factor of 10 when pressed 
in. When the A trace and the B trace are displayed 
alternately (TURN-ALT Horizontal Display Mode 
selected), only the B trace is magnified. Using X10 
magnification extends the fastest sweep speed to 
500 ps per division. The push button must be pressed 
in a second time to release it and regain the X1 sweep- 
speed magnification. 



(S) AV Switch-Activates the Delta Volts (AV) measure- 
ment function, when momentarily pressed in alone, 
and cancels any other Delta measurement function 
in effect. In the A Sweep mode (A and B SEC/DIV 
switches locked together), two horizontal cursors 
are superimposed on the crt display. The crt readout 
displays the equivalent voltage represented by the 
separation between the two cursors. The position of 
one cursor on the display is set by the A REF OR 
DLY POS control and the position of the other is 
set by the A control. With multiple-channel displays, 
the deflection factor of the first channel selected in 
the display sequence determines the scale factor of 
the Delta Volts readout on the crt. The Delta Volts 
readout is displayed as a percentage ratio if either one 
of the following conditions exists: (1)the channel 
determining the scale factor is uncalibrated (VAR 
control out of detent), or (2) ADD is displayed alone 
when the Channel 1 and Channel 2 deflection factors 
are not the same (VOLTS/DIV switches are at dif- 
ferent settings or are uncalibrated). Either pressing in 
the AV switch or pulling the B SEC/DIV knob to 
the out position when the Delta Volts function is 
active, cancels it. Attempting to activate the Delta 
Volts function while the A and B SEC/DIV knobs 
are unlocked causes the message NO AV WITH 
DELAY to appear in the top row of the crt readout. 
If displayed, the error message will be canceled 
(removed from the display) by any of the following 
actions: pressing either the AV or At switch; pushing 
in the B SEC/DIV if it is out or pulling it out if it is 
in; or locking the A and B SEC/DIV knobs together 
(set to the same sweep speed with the B SEC/DIV 
knob in). 






function and cancels any other Delta measurements 
in effect, when momentarily pressed in alone. When 
the Delta Time function is active, momentarily 
pressing in the At push button cancels the function. 

When the A and B SEC/DIV knobs are locked together 
(A trace only), two vertical cursors are superimposed 
on the crt display while the Delta Time function is 
active. In any of the delay-time Horizontal Display 
modes (PULL-INTEN, TURN-ALT, or PUSH-B), 



two separate delay times are established by the 
Delta Time function. One cursor position (or delay 
time) is set by the A REF OR DLY POS control, 
and the other is set by the A control. The crt readout 
displays either the time difference between the two 
delays or the equivalent time difference between the 
two vertical cursors. 



If the SEC/DIV VAR control is not in the detent 
position. At cursor difference on the A trace only 
displays is expressed as a ratio, with five divisions 
corresponding to a 100% ratio. For the delay-time 
Horizontal Display modes, the SEC/DIV VAR 
control varies the B-sweep scale factor as it is rotated, 
but it has no effect on the delay time. 

Pressing in the AV and At push buttons together 
activates the 1/At measurement function and cancels 
any other Delta measurement functions in effect. The 
crt waveform display and operation of both the A 
REF OR DLY POS and A controls remain the same 
as explained for At operation. However, with 1/At 
selected, the crt readout shows the reciprocal of the 
time-difference measurement, with units being 
frequency (Hz, kHz, MHz, or GHz). 

For A trace only displays, with the SEC/DIV VAR 
control out of the detent (fully clockwise) position, 
the time difference between 1/At cursors is displayed 
in degrees of phase, with five divisions equal to 360 
degrees. As with At measurements, the position of 
the SEC/DIV VAR control has no effect on delay- 
time displays except to change the B Sweep scale 
factor, and the readout remains in units of frequency. 

When the 1/At function is active, pressing both the 
AV and the At push buttons together cancels the 
function and exits the Delta measurement mode. 
Pressing either AV or At alone cancels the 1/At 
function and activates the function associated with 
the button pressed. 



(3?) A REF OR DLY POS Control-Sets the reference B 
Sweep delay time or positions the Reference cursor 
when AV, At, or 1/At Measurement Mode is active. 



diiy 



H 



ui iz.ui 1 Lai 



(PULL-INTEN, TURN-ALT, or PUSH-B) is selected, 
the reference B Sweep delay time is determined by 
the rotation of the A REF OR DLY POS control in 
conjunction with the A SEC/DIV switch setting. 



This control produces fine resolution over a portion 
of its range, after which it changes to coarse reso- 
lution. It reenters the fine-resolution range upon 
reversing the direction of rotation. 



2-9 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



® 



A Control— Sets the alternate B Sweep delay time or 
positions the Delta-time cursor (vertical line) when 
either the At or 1/At Measurement Mode is active. 
When the AV Measurement Mode is active (A Sweep 
Horizontal Display Mode only), the control positions 
one of the two horizontal voltage cursors that appear 
on the crt display. 

This control produces fine resolution over a portion 
of its range, after which it changes to coarse reso- 
lution. It reenters the fine-resolution range upon 
reversing the direction of rotation. 



© 



TRACKING-OUT: INDEP Switch-Selects either the 
TRACKING or INDEP (independent) mode for the 
A REF OR DLY POS control. When in the TRACK- 
ING mode (push button latched in), the difference 
between alternate delay times or cursors (in either 
time or volts Measurement Mode) does not change 
with rotation of the A REF OR DLY POS control. 
When the A REF OR DLY POS control is rotated, 
the positions of both delays or of both cursors move 
equally until the limit of either is reached. 

If OUT: INDEP is selected (push button released), 
the cursors (or delay positions) are independently 
movable using the A REF OR DLY POS and A 
controls. In either mode (TRACKING or INDEP) 
the Delta cursor remains independently movable 
using the A control. 



TRIGGER 

Refer to Figure 2-6 for location of items 34 through 42. 



® 



MODE Switch and Indicators— Selects the trigger 
mode of either the A Sweep or the B Sweep. A single 
push of the switch steps the MODE selection once; 
holding the switch up or down causes the MODE 
selection to step repeatedly. Indicators show the 
selected trigger mode of either the A Sweep or the 
B Sweep according to the selected Horizontal Display 
Mode and as directed by the A/B TRIG switch. 

A Trigger Modes: 

AUTO LVL— Automatically establishes the trigger 
level on a triggering signal and free runs the sweep 
in the absence of a triggering signal. The LEVEL 
control covers a range between the positive and 
negative peaks of repetitive triggering signals. If 
the triggering signal amplitude changes, the trigger 
level does not change unless a trigger is no longer 
produced at the established level. The signal 
peak-reference levels and the trigger level are 
redefined whenever triggering ceases, whenever the 



LEVEL control is turned to either extreme, or 
when the MODE switch is pushed up. If the 
LEVEL control is set near either end position, the 
trigger level set by AUTO LVL will be near the 
corresponding signal peak. If the LEVEL control is 
set in the midrange between either end, the trigger 
level set by AUTO LVL will be near the midpoint 
of the trigger signal amplitude. The established 
trigger level remains in effect when switching 
to AUTO or NORM Trigger MODE unless the 
LEVEL control is moved. 

If VERT TRIGGER SOURCE is selected, the 
lowest-numbered displayed channel (or the 
algebraic sum of Channel 1 and Channel 2 if ADD 
vertical display is selected) becomes the trigger- 
signal source. If Trigger MODE is changed from 
AUTO LVL to AUTO while more than one 
channel is displayed, the single-channel trigger 
source is retained, and the VERT SOURCE 
indicator is turned off. To regain the VERT 
TRIGGER SOURCE, press up momentarily on 
the SOURCE switch. 

AUTO— Sweep free runs in the absence of a 
triggering signal. The triggering level changes only 
when the LEVEL control is adjusted to a new 
position. 

NORM— Sweep is triggered and runs when a 
triggering signal compatible with the LEVEL 
setting is applied. Sweep free runs either when the 
input coupling of the selected trigger SOURCE is 
set to GND or when the input coupling of both 
Channel 1 and Channel 2 is set to GND, with 
ADD VERTICAL MODE and VERT TRIGGER 
SOURCE selected. 




3832-08 



Figure 2-6. Trigger controls and indicators. 



2-10 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



SGL SEQ-When armed by pushing the MODE 
switch down momentarily, the sweep runs one or 
more times to produce a single sweep of each of 
the traces defined by the following controls: 
VERTICAL MODE, A and B SEC/DIV, and At. 
Each sweep requires a distinct A Sweep triggering 
event. The READY indicator remains illuminated 
until the final trace in the sequence is completed. 
At the end of the sequence the crt readout is 
written once to present scale factors and other 
readout data, and scale illumination flashes on 
momentarily for oscilloscope photography 
purposes. 



signal, and the respective LED indicator for each 
displayed channel is illuminated, except in the case 
of AUTO LVL MODE triggering. For AUTO LVL 
triggering or CHOP VERTICAL MODE, the lowest 
numbered channel, or ADD if it is displayed, is the 
triggering-signal source. The LED indicator for the 
lowest numbered channel displayed is illuminated, 
except if ADD is selected. Then, the CH 1, CH 2, 
and VERT indicators are illuminated. 



CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, or CH 4-A triggering signal is 
obtained from the corresponding vertical channel. 



® 



B Trigger Modes: 

RUN AFT DLY-The B Sweep runs immediately 
after the established delay time has elapsed. 
Delay time is set by the A SEC/DIV switch and 
the A POS OR DLY REF control when no Delta 
Time measurements are selected (neither At nor 
1/At). 



When either At or 1/At measurements are made, 
two delay times are established: one by the A 
REF OR DLY POS control and the other by the 
A control. 



TRIG AFT DLY-The B Sweep runs when trig- 
gered by a triggering signal after the established 
delay time has elapsed, provided the A Sweep has 
not terminated. Since the B Sweep runs at the 
time the triggering signal occurs, the display is 
stable, even with jittering signals; but the actual 
delay time is greater than the delay-time setting. 
Therefore, the crt readout shows a question mark 
in this mode. 



SOURCE Switch and Indicators— Selects the trigger 
signal source for either the A or the B Sweep. 
Indicators show the selection made. A single push of 
the switch steps the SOURCE selection once; holding 
the switch up or down causes the SOURCE selection 
to step repeatedly. Indicators do not illuminate for 
B triggering signals when RUN AFT DLY is selected. 



® 



LINE (A Trigger Only)— A triggering signal is 
obtained from a sample of the ac power-source 
waveform. This trigger source is useful when 
vertical input signals are time related (multiple or 
submultiple) to the frequency of the ac power- 
source voltage. 



COUPLING Switch and Indicators-Selects the 

method of coupling the triggering signal to the A and 
the B trigger generator circuitry. A single push of the 
switch steps the COUPLING selection once; holding 
the switch up or down causes the COUPLING selec- 
tion to step repeatedly. Indicators show the coupling 
method selected for either the A triggering signals 
(when an A TRIGGER MODE is in effect) or the B 
triggering signals when TRIG AFT DLY is selected 
for the B TRIGGER MODE. Indicators do not 
illuminate for B triggering signals when RUN AFT 
DLY is selected. 



DC— All frequency components of the signal are 
coupled to the trigger-generator circuitry. This 
coupling method is useful for triggering on most 
signals. 



NOISE REJ— All frequency components of the 
input signal are coupled to the trigger-generator 
circuitry, but the peak-to-peak signal amplitude 
required to produce a trigger event is increased. 
This coupling method is useful for improving 
trigger stability on signals accompanied by low- 
level noise. 



VERT— The sweep triggers on the displayed 
channel when only one channel is selected. If 
multiple vertical displays are selected, both the 
Trigger MODE in use and position of the CHOP/ 
ALT button affect the trigger-source selection. 
When ALT VERTICAL MODE is selected, each 
displayed channel in turn provides the triggering 



HF REJ— Attenuates high-frequency triggering- 
signal components above 50 kHz. This coupling 
method is useful for eliminating radio-frequency 
interference and high-frequency noise components 
from the signal applied to the trigger-generator 
circuitry; it allows stable triggering on the low- 
frequency components of a complex waveform. 



2-11 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



LF REJ— Signals are capacitively coupled, and the 
dc component of the triggering signal is blocked. 
Attenuates the low-frequency signal components 
below 50 kHz. This coupling method is useful for 
producing stable triggering on the high-frequency 
components of a complex waveform. Low- 
frequency components such as power-supply hum 
are removed from the signal applied to the trigger- 
generator circuitry. 



AC— Signals are capacitively coupled. Frequency 
components below 60 Hz are attenuated, and the 
dc component of the input signal is blocked. This 
coupling method is useful for signals that are 
superimposed on slowly changing dc voltages. 
This method will work for most signals when 
trigger-level readout is not desired. 



(37) A/B TRIG Switch -Directs the MODE, SOURCE, 
COUPLING, SLOPE, and LEVEL controls to either 
the A Trigger or the B Trigger, under the allowed 
switching conditions. Controls are normally directed 
to the A Trigger when the A and B SEC/DIV knobs 
are locked together (A Sweep display only). Controls 
are normally directed to the B Trigger when the 
B TRIGGER MODE is set to TRIG AFT DLY and 
the A and B SEC/DIV knobs are unlocked (PULL- 
INTEN, TURN-ALT, or PUSH-B Horizontal Display 
Mode). Pressing and holding in the A/B TRIG switch 
will direct the trigger controls away from their 
normal trigger direction, but releasing the A/B TRIG 
switch will redirect the trigger controls back to the 
original triggers. 



If the A and B SEC/DIV knobs are unlocked and 
either the B TRIGGER MODE is set to RUN AFT 
DLY or the A TRIGGER MODE is set to SGL SEQ, 
the A/B TRIG switch will direct the trigger controls 
to the opposite trigger each time it is momentarily 
pressed and released. 



Locking the A and B SEC/DIV knobs together will 
switch the trigger controls to the A Trigger if they 
are currently directed to the B Trigger. Pulling the 
B SEC/DIV knob to the out position will cause the 
trigger controls to revert to the B Trigger if the B 
TRIGGER MODE is set to TRIG AFT DLY. How- 
ever, if the B TRIGGER MODE is set to RUN AFT 
DLY when the B SEC/DIV knob is unlocked from 
the A SEC/DIV knob, the trigger controls remain 
directed to the A Trigger until the B Trigger is 
reselected by the A/B TRIG switch. 



\2a) LEVEL Control— Sets the amplitude point on the 
triggering signal at which either A or B Sweep 



triggering occurs. This control produces fine resolu- 
tion for a portion of its range, after which it changes 
to coarse resolution. It reenters the fine-resolution 
range upon reversing the direction of rotation. 



When the A TRIGGER MODE is set to AUTO LVL, 
the effect of the LEVEL control is spread over the 
A Sweep triggering-signal amplitude from peak to 
peak. In this case, rotating the control to either 
extreme causes the triggering level to be redefined 
by the AUTO LVL circuitry. 



(39) SLOPE Switch and Indicators-Select the slope of 
the signal that triggers either the A Sweep or the 
B Sweep. Indicators illuminate to show slope selec- 
tion made for the A Sweep and for TRIG AFT DLY 
B Sweeps. The + and — indicators do not illuminate 
for B triggering when RUN AFT DLY is selected. 

UO) A SWP TRIG'D Indicator-Illuminates to indicate 
that the A Sweep is triggered. It extinguishes after 
a nominal length of time when a triggering signal is 
not received following completion of the sweep. 



® 



© 



READY Indicator-Illuminates when SGL SEQ 
MODE is selected and the A Sweep is armed and 
waiting for a triggering event to occur. It extinguishes 
following the completion of all the traces selected 
for the SGL SEQ display. 



HOLDOFF Control-Varies the amount of holdoff 
time between the end of the sweep and the time a 
triggering signal can initiate the next sweep. The 
ability to obtain stable triggering on some aperiodic 
signals is improved using this control. In the B ENDS 
A position (fully clockwise) trigger holdoff time is 
reduced to minimum, and the A Sweep terminates 
immediately at the end of the B Sweep. This enables 
the fastest possible sweep-repetition rate at slow A 
Sweep speeds. 



REAR PANEL 



Refer to Figure 2-7 for location of items 43 through 50. 



® 



A GATE OUT and B GATE OUT Connectors- 
Provide TTL-compatible, positive-going gate signals 
that are HI during their respective sweeps and LO 
while the sweep is not running. When the A SEC/ 
D!V switch is set to 5 ns per division, an output 
gate is present at both the A GATE OUT and the 
B GATE OUT connectors. 



2-12 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



(44) CH 2 SIGNAL OUT Connector-Provides an output 
signal that is a normalized representation of the 
Channel 2 input signal. The output amplitude into a 
1-M£2 load is approximately 20 mV per division 
of input signal. Into a 50-£2 load, the output ampli- 
tude is approximately 10 mV per division of input 
signal. 



EXT Z-AXIS IN Connector-Provides an input con- 
nection point to apply external Z-axis modulation 
signals to the Z-Axis Amplifier. Either the sweep or 
the X-Y display may be intensity modulated. Positive- 
going signals decrease the intensity. From dc to 
2 MHz, an input-signal amplitude of +2 V will blank 
a maximum-intensity trace; from 2 MHz to 20 MHz, 
an input-signal amplitude of +2 V will produce 
noticeable modulation on a normal-intensity trace. 



(47) Fuse Holder— Contains the ac power-source fuse. 

(48) Detachable Power Cord Receptacle— Provides the 

connection point for the ac power source to the 
instrument. 



® 



LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR Switch -Selects the 

nominal instrument operating voltage range. When 
set to 115V, the instrument operates from a power- 
source voltage having a range of 90 V to 132 V ac. 
Set to 230V, the instrument operates on an input- 
voltage range of 180 V to 250 V ac. 



Mjd) Mod Slots— Contain the identification numbers of any 
installed instrument modifications. 



Modulating signals with fast rise and fall times produce 
the most abrupt intensity changes. External Z-axis 
signals must be time related to the displayed signal 
frequency to obtain a stable intensity-modulation 
pattern on the crt. 



(46) Optional PROBE POWER Connectors-Provide out- 
put power for using Tektronix active probes. 



READOUT DISPLAY 

The Readout System provides an alphanumeric display 
of information on the crt along with the analog waveform 
display. The readout is displayed in two rows of 32 char- 
acters each. One row is within the top graticule division, 
and the other row is within the bottom graticule division. 




3831-37 



Figure 2-7. Rear-panel controls and connectors. 



2-13 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



The locations and types of information displayed under 
normal operating modes are illustrated in Figure 2-8. 



NOTE 

Other information is displayed when the instrument 
is in a diagnostic mode or has experienced a fault. 
The diagnostic displays are explained in the "Main- 
tenance" section of this manual. 



The Trigger-Level readout shows the signal voltage 
(at the probe tip of encoded probes) that will initiate 
the sweep. The readout appears only if the following con- 
ditions exist: a single vertical channel is selected as the 
trigger source, the vertical input coupling is not AC, the 
VOLTS/DIV VAR control of the source channel is in the 
calibrated detent, and trigger coupling is either DC or 
NOISE REJ. 



If the bottom row of the readout contains dots in 
the normally blank spaces, a wrong calibration 
constant has been encountered. The instrument must 
be readjusted to remove the incorrect calibration 
constant from the EAROM. 



Each of the scale-factor displays appears when the 
respective vertical channel or sweep is displayed. When X-Y 
mode is selected, the Channel 1 scale factor is displayed, 
and CH 1 X appears in place of the A Sweep scale factor. 



A question mark may appear in a DLY (delay time), a 
At (delta time), or a 1/At readout when the SEC/DIV 
knobs are unlocked (not with cursors). This indicates that 
either the delay time (or one of the two delay times) is set 
at less than 0.5% of the maximum delay or the B TRIG- 
GER MODE is set to TRIG AFT DLY. A question mark 
will also appear in a 1/At display readout when the 
difference between the two delays (or the distance between 
the two cursors displayed when the A and B SEC/DIV 
knobs are locked together) is less than 1% of full scale. 



Special characters or abbreviations are displayed to 
indicate GND or AC coupling of Channel 1 or Channel 2 
signals, ADD, CH 2 INVERT, Vertical bandwidth limited, 
or HOLDOFF not set to minimum. 



The 50 O OVERLOAD display appears if excessive signal 
is applied to either the CH 1 or the CH 2 input connector 
while 50 £2 DC input coupling is selected. The readout will 
return to the normal display when the input coupling of the 
overloaded channel is switched. 



TRIGGER LEVEL INDICATOR 



50 n OVERLOAD 
INDICATION 



TRIGGER SOURCE 
(1,2, 3, OR 4) 



TRIGGER CURRENTLY UNDER 
CONTROL (A OR B 



ADD INDICATOR (+) 



CHANNEL 1 
SCALE FACTOR 




SWEEP DELAY TIME 

DELTA VOLTAGE 

DELTA TIME 

1/DELTATIME 



INVERT INDICATOR (|) 



HOLDOFF INDICATOR (HO) 



B SWEEP SCALE FACTOR 



A SWEEP SCALE FACTOR 



CHANNEL 4 SCALE FACTOR 



CHANNEL 2 
SCALE FACTOR 



CHANNEL 3 
SCALE FACTOR 



3832-10 



Figure 2-8. Readout display locations. 



2-14 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS 



This part contains basic operating information and 
techniques that should be considered before attempting to 
make any measurements with your instrument. 



TIME AND VOLTAGE 
MEASUREMENTS 



GRATICULE 

The graticule is internally marked on the faceplate of 
the crt to eliminate parallax-viewing error and to enable 
accurate measurements (see Figure 2-9). It is marked with 
eight vertical and ten horizontal major divisions. In addition, 
each major division is divided into five subdivisions. The 
vertical deflection factors and horizontal timing are cali- 
brated to the graticule so that accurate measurements 
can be made directly from the crt. Also, percentage marks 
for the measurement of rise and fall times are located on 
the left side of the graticule. 



1ST OR LEFT 

VERTICAL 

GRATICULE 

LINE 



11TH OR RIGHT 
VERTICAL 
GRATICULE 
LINE/ 




oo ;■■■■;■■■■;■■■■! ; ■ ■ ■ 

i .... 

10 1— ' — - — — -t -\- — ■ — — — 

!•■*■ 



RISE AND 

FALL TIME 

MEASUREMENT 

PERCENTAGE 

MARKERS 



CENTER 

VERTICAL 

GRATICULE 

LINE 



CENTER 

HORIZONTAL 

GRATICULE 

LINE 



4207-09 



The 2465 provides three basic ways to make time 
measurements and two basic ways to make voltage measure- 
ments. These methods require varying degrees of time and 
care and can result in varying degrees of accuracy. 



Using graticule markings for determining voltage or time 
values produces the least accurate measurement values. 
This method should be used only for measuring very-low- 
repetition-rate signals or for single-shot measurements 
which require a photograph for viewing. 



The At and AV cursors provide for better accuracy and 
easier operation than using the graticule, and they should 
be used in most measurement situations. Use of the cursors 
avoids vertical- and horizontal-gain errors and crt-linearity 
errors. Cursors also eliminate the inconvenience of counting 
and interpolating graticule markings. 



The Delayed Sweep mode provides the highest accuracy 
for making time measurements. This method avoids errors 
introduced either by visual-resolution limits or by slight 
mismatches between the sweep and the cursors. 



More details relating to various measurement techniques 
are contained in "Basic Applications," Section 6 of the 
Operators Manual. 



Figure 2-9. Graticule measurement markings. 



GROUNDING 



i ne most renaDie signal measurements are maae wnen 
the 2465 and the unit under test are connected by a com- 
mon reference (ground lead) in addition to the signal 
lead or probe. The probe's ground lead provides the best 
grounding method for signal interconnection and ensures 
the maximum amount of signai-iead shielding in the probe 
cable. A separate ground lead can also be connected from 
the unit under test to the oscilloscope ground receptacle on 
the front panel. 



2-15 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



SIGNAL CONNECTIONS 

Probes 

Generally, probes offer the most convenient means of 
connecting an input signal to the instrument. Shielded 
to prevent pickup of electromagnetic interference, the 
standard 10X probes supplied with this instrument offer 
a high input impedance that minimizes circuit loading. This 
allows the circuit under test to operate with a minimum of 
change from the normal, unloaded condition. Also, the 
subminiature body of these probes has been designed for 
ease of use either when probing circuitry containing close 
lead spacing or when probing in a confined space. 



Both the probe itself and the probe accessories should 
be handled carefully at all times to prevent damage. Avoid 
dropping the probe body. Striking a hard surface can cause 
damage to both the probe body and the probe tip. Exercise 
care to prevent the cable from being crushed or kinked. 
Do not place excessive strain on the cable by pulling. 



The standard-accessory probe is a compensated 10X 
voltage divider. It is a resistive voltage divider for low 
frequencies and a capacitive voltage divider for high- 
frequency signal components. Inductance introduced by 
either a long signal or ground lead forms a series-resonant 
circuit. This circuit will affect system bandwidth and will 
ring if driven by a signal containing significant frequency 
components at or near the circuit's resonant frequency. 
Oscillations (ringing) can then appear on the oscilloscope 
display and distort the true signal waveform. Always keep 
both the ground lead and the probe signal-input connec- 
tions as short as possible to maintain the best waveform 
fidelity. 



Misadjustment of probe compensation is a common 
source of measurement error. Due to variations in oscillo- 
scope input characteristics, probe compensation should 
be checked and adjusted, if necessary, whenever the probe 
is moved from one oscilloscope to another or between 
channels of a multichannel oscilloscope. See the procedure 
in the "Operator's Checks and Adjustments" part of this 
section or consult the probe instruction manual. 



Coaxial Cables 

Cables may also be used to connect signals to the input 
connectors, but they may have considerable effect on the 
accuracy of a displayed waveform. To maintain the original 



frequency characteristics of an applied signal, only high- 
quality, low-loss coaxial cables should be used. Coaxial 
cables should be terminated at both ends in their char- 
acteristic impedance. If this is not possible, use suitable 
impedance-matching devices. 



INPUT-COUPLING CAPACITOR 
PRECHARGING 

When the input coupling switch is set to GND, the input 
signal is connected to ground through the input-coupling 
capacitor in series with a 1-M£2 resistor to form a pre- 
charging network. This network allows the input-coupling 
capacitor to charge to the average dc voltage level of the 
signal applied to the probe. Thus, any large voltage tran- 
sients that may accidentally be generated will not be 
applied to the amplifier input when input coupling is 
switched from GND to AC. The precharging network also 
provides a measure of protection to the external circuitry 
by reducing the current levels that can be drawn from the 
external circuitry during capacitor charging. 



EXTERNAL TRIGGERING 



Both the A and the B trigger signals may be independ- 
ently obtained from any of the four vertical input channels. 
When viewing signals that require a trigger source different 
from one of the displayed vertical signals (traditionally 
referred to as "external triggering"), any free vertical 
channel may be used to input a trigger signal. The signal 
can be viewed on the crt to aid in setting the trigger circuit 
controls by selecting that respective channel for the vertical 
display (replaces the usual "trigger view" feature). After 
establishing the correct triggering, the trigger signal display 
can then be removed from the vertical signal display or 
allowed to remain, at the operator's descretion. 



Channel 1 and Channel 2 can condition a wide range of 
signals to produce triggers— over the full vertical deflection 
range of the channel from millivolts to hundreds of volts 
in amplitude. Channel 3 and Channel 4 inputs have a much 
more limited choice of vertical deflection ranges available 
(0.1 volt and 0.5 volt per division without external attenu- 
ation) and are more useful for digital signal amplitudes. 
However, signals much larger can be processed, provided 
they do not exceed the maximum-rated signal amplitude 
for the input. 



2-16 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



OPERATOR'S CHECKS 
AND ADJUSTMENTS 



INTRODUCTION 



This part contains procedures that may be used to verify 
the operation and basic accuracy of your instrument before 
making measurements. Adjustment procedures provided 
enable the user to optimize the display for viewing as well 
as compensate several of the oscilloscope control functions 
for variations in ambient operating temperature. Adjust- 
ments beyond the scope of "Operator's Checks and Adjust- 
ments" are in the "Adjustment Procedures," Section 5 of 
this manual. 



Before proceeding with these instructions, refer to 
"Preparation for Use" in this section for first-time start-up 
considerations. 



Verify that the POWER switch is OFF (push button 
is out), then plug the power cord into the power outlet. 



Horizontal 

A AND BSEC/DIV 
SEC/DIV VAR 
POSITION 
1 0X MAG 



Trigger 

HOLDOFF 

LEVEL 

MODE 

SOURCE 

COUPLING 

SLOPE 



Locked together at 1 ms 

Calibrated detent 

Midrange 

Off (button out) 



Fully counterclockwise 

Midrange 

AUTO LVL 

VERT 

DC 

+ 



3. Adjust the INTENSITY and READOUT INTENSITY 
controls for desired display and readout brightness and best 
trace definition. 



INITIAL SETUP 



4. Adjust the Vertical and Horizontal POSITION 
controls to position the trace within the graticule area. 



1. Press in the POWER switch button (ON) and allow 
the instrument to warm up (20 minutes is recommended 
for maximum accuracy). 



2. Set instrument controls to obtain a baseline trace: 



Display 




READOUT 




INTENSITY 


Midrange between MIN 




and fully clockwise 


FOCUS 


Midrange 


Vertical 




POSITION 


Midrange 


iv/i/-\r> r- 

iviuuc 


/-"LI 1 


BW LIMIT 


Off (button out) 


CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 


10 mV 


CH 1 Input Coupling 


1 MfiGND 



TRACE ROTATION ADJUSTMENT 



1. Preset instrument controls and obtain a baseline trace 
as described in "Initial Setup." 



2. Use the Channel 1 POSITION control to move the 
baseline trace to the center horizontal graticule line. 



NOTE 

Normally, the resulting trace will be parallel to the 
center horizontal graticule line, and the Trace Rota- 
tion adjustment should not be required. 



2-17 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



3. If the trace is not parallel to the center horizontal 
graticule line, use a small-bladed screwdriver to adjust the 
TRACE ROTATION control (see Figure 2-2) and align the 
trace with the center horizontal graticule line. 



ASTIGMATISM ADJUSTMENT 



1. Preset instrument controls and obtain a baseline 
trace as described in "Initial Setup." Set 20 MHz BW 
LIMIT On (in) 



2. Connect a 10X probe to the CH 1 OR X input 
connector and connect the probe tip to the CALIBRATOR 
output. 



3. Adjust the Channel 1 POSITION control to center 
the display on the screen. 



AUTO DC BALANCE ADJUSTMENT 

The 2465 can automatically perform a dc-balance 
adjustment of Channel 1 and Channel 2. This adjustment 
assures that the trace shifts associated with attenuator 
stepping, changing the variable volts per division setting, 
and switching Channel 2 between noninverted and inverted 
operation are within nominal limits. The dc balance 
attained by the Auto DC Balance adjustment remains 
valid as long as the instrument is operating within 5°C of 
the ambient temperature at which the adjustment was 
performed provided a 20-minute warm-up period is allowed 
before performing the adjustment. To initiate the adjust- 
ment, set both the Channel 1 and Channel 2 input coupling 
switches to AC. Then simultaneously push up on both 
switches. An alternate method of entering the auto- 
adjustment mode is possible with only one of the input 
coupling switches set to AC. Press up and hold the input 
coupling switch that is not set to AC, then press up the 
other input coupling switch. With either method, the 
instrument will enter an auto-adjustment mode for about 
ten seconds. When the Auto DC Balance adjustment cycle 
is complete, the instrument will return to the normal 
operating mode. 



4. Set A and B SEC/DIV controls at 1 jxs. 



5. Slowly adjust the FOCUS control to its optimum 
setting (best-defined display). 



NOTE 

If the ASTIG adjustment is correctly set already, 
all portions of the trace will come into sharpest focus 
at the same position of the FOCUS control. 



6. If focusing is not uniform over the entire graticule 
area, use a small-bladed screwdriver to adjust the ASTIG 
control (see Figure 2-2). 



7. Since the ASTIG and FOCUS adjustments interact, 
repeat steps 5 and 6 until the best-defined display over the 
entire graticule area is obtained. 



NOTE 

Once it is set, the ASTIG adjustment should be 
correct for any display. However, it may be necessary 
to reset the FOCUS control slightly when the 
INTENSITY control setting is changed. 



NOTE 

If a circuit defect prevents accurate dc balance, the 
routine halts and LIMIT is displayed. Push the Trigger 
COUPLING switch up to continue balancing the 
remainder of the circuitry. 

If power to the instrument is interrupted before the 
balancing cycle is completed, an error will be detected 
by the next power-on self test. Press A/B TRIG to exit 
the diagnostic monitor and restart the Auto DC Bal- 
ance adjustment to allow the cycle to be completed. 



PROBE LOW-FREQUENCY 
COMPENSATION 

Misadjustment of probe compensation is one of the 
sources of measurement error. The attenuator probes 
are equipped with compensation adjustments. To ensure 
optimum measurement accuracy, always check probe 
compensation before making measurements. Probe low- 
frequency compensation is accomplished as follows: 

1. Preset instrument controls and obtain a baseline trace 
as described in "Initial Setup." Set 20 MHz BW LIMIT 
On (in). 

2. Connect the two 10X probes (supplied with the 
instrument) to the CH 1 OR X and the CH 2 input con- 
nectors. Observe that the CHANNEL 1 SCALE FACTOR 
on the readout display changes from 10 mV to 100 mV 
when the 10X probe is attached. 



2-18 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



3. Connect the Channel 1 probe (using the probe hook 
tip) to the oscilloscope CALIBRATOR output. 



4. Set triggering controls for a stable display. The dis- 
play should be five cycles of the CALIBRATOR square- 
wave signal, with an amplitude of four divisions. Center the 
display on the screen. 



5. Check the waveform for overshoot and rolloff (see 
Figure 2-10). if necessary, use a smail-biaded screwdriver to 
adjust the probe low-frequency compensation for a square 
front corner on the waveform. 



MATCHING CHANNEL 2 DELAY 

The apparent signal delay in Channel 2 may be adjusted 
up to ±500 ps to match the apparent delay present in any 
of the other three channels. This adjustment is most com- 
monly used to eliminate delay differences between Chan- 
nel 1 and Channel 2 that may be introduced by the probes 
and has no effect on common-mode rejection when ADD 
VERTICAL MODE is selected. Matching Channel 1 and 
Channel 2 delay is accomplished as follows: 



1. Preset the instrument controls and obtain a baseline 
trace as described in "Initial Setup." 



6. Release the CH 1 VERTICAL MODE switch, select 
CH 2 VERTICAL MODE, and connect the Channel 2 probe 
input to the CALIBRATOR output. Observe that the 
CH 2 SCALE FACTOR on the readout display indicates 
100 mV with the 10X probe attached. 



7. Use the Channel 2 POSITION control to vertically 
center the display and repeat step 5 for the Channel 2 
orobe. 



2. Connect the two 10X probes (supplied with the 
instrument) to the CH 1 OR X and CH 2 input connectors. 



3. Check and adjust, if necessary, the probes' low- 
frequency compensation. Refer to "Probe Low-Frequency 
Compensation" in this section. 



4. Connect both probes via hook tips to a pulse gener- 
ator fast-rise output. 



NOTE 

Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the 
probe for more complete information about low- 
frequency and high-frequency compensation of 
the probes. 



5. Press in both the CH 1 and CH 2 VERTICAL MODE 
switches. 



6. Set oscilloscope triggering controls for a stable 
display. 



100 mV 




3832-12 



Figure 2-10. Probe low-frequency compensation. 



7. Set the A AND B SEC/DIV switches to 5 ns. 



8. Adjust the Channel 1 and Channel 2 POSITION 
controls to vertically overlay the two displayed signals. 



9. Pull out the B SEC/DIV switch and observe the 
message CH 2 DELAY - TURN A in the upper right-hand 
corner of the screen. 



NOTE 

The 2465 can be set to preclude operator adjustment 
of Channel 2 delay. If the delay-offset feature is 
disabled, the message CH 2 DLY DISABLED appears 
in the top row of the readout when attempting to 
activate the feature. Refer the instrument to a 
qualified service technician if adjustment of the 
delay matching is required. 



2-19 



Operating Information— 2465 Service 



10. Set X10 MAG ON (button in) and adjust the A 
control until the two signals are overlaid horizontally. 



TIMING CHECK 



NOTE 

The A REF OR DL Y POS control may also be used 
to make the Channel 2 delay-offset adjustment when 
the feature is enabled. 



The CALIBRATOR signal on the 2465 automatically 
changes repetition rate with the setting of the A SEC/DIV 
switch within the range of 100 ms to 100 ns. This feature 
allows the operator to make a quick and easy check of the 
basic operation and adjustment of the oscilloscope timing. 
Use the following procedure: 



11. Push in the B SEC/DIV switch. 



1. Preset instrument controls and obtain a baseline trace 
as described in "Initial Setup." 



AMPLITUDE CHECK 

1. Preset instrument controls and obtain a baseline 
trace as described in "Initial Setup." 



2. Connect a 10X probe to the CH 1 OR X input con- 
nector and connect the probe tip to the CALIBRATOR 
output. 



3. Adjust the Channel 1 POSITION control to center 
the display on the screen. 



4. Adjust triggering controls to obtain a stable display. 



5. CHECK-Amplitude of the CALIBRATOR signal is 
between 3.88 and 4.12 divisions as measured on the center 
vertical graticule line. 



6. Repeat this procedure using the Channel 2 connector 
and controls. 



2. Connect a 10X probe to the CH 1 OR X input con- 
nector and connect the probe tip to the CALIBRATOR 
output. 



3. Adjust the Channel 1 POSITION control to center 
the display on the screen. 



4. Adjust triggering controls to obtain a stable display. 



5. CHECK— Timing accuracy by confirming that five 
complete cycles of the square-wave signal are displayed 
over 10 major divisions (±0.1 division) along the center 
horizontal graticule line for all A SEC/DIV settings from 
100 ms to 100 ns. Confirm that the number of cycles 
displayed in 10 divisions goes to 2 1/2 and 1 for respective 
A SEC/DIV settings of 50 ns and 20 ns and that the 
displayed transition time of the signal remains approxi- 
mately the same when the A SEC/DIV switch is changed to 
10 ns and 5 ns. (The horizontal divisions in which the 
transition time of the signal at 10 ns per division is 
displayed should be two times the horizontal divisions 
occupied by the transition at 20 ns per division. At 5 ns per 
division, the transition time should occupy four times the 
horizontal divisions seen at 20 ns per division.) Return the 
A SEC/DIV switch to 1 ms and confirm that the display 
changes to 1/2 cycle over 10 divisions when the X10 MAG 
switch is pressed in. 



2-20 



Section 3-2465 Service 






INTRODUCTION 



SECTION ORGANIZATION 

This section contains a functional description of the 
2465 Oscilloscope circuitry. The discussion begins with an 
overview of the instrument functions and continues with 
detailed explanations of each major circuit. Reference is 
made to supporting schematic and block diagrams which 
will facilitate understanding of the text. These diagrams 
show interconnections between parts of the circuitry, 
identify circuit components, list specific component values, 
and indicate interrelationships with front-panel controls. 



The detailed block diagram and the schematic diagrams 
are located in the tabbed "Diagrams" section at the rear of 
this manual, while smaller functional diagrams are con- 
tained within this section near the associated text. The 
particular schematic diagram associated with each circuit 
description is identified in the text, and the diagram 
number is shown (enclosed within a diamond symbol) 
on the tab of the appropriate foldout page. For optimum 
understanding of the circuit being described, refer to both 
the applicable schematic diagram and the functional block 
diagram. 



HYBRID AND INTEGRATED 
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS 



Digital Logic Conventions 

Digital logic circuits perform many functions within this 
instrument. The operation of these circuits is represented 
by specific iogic symboiogy and terminology. Most iogic- 
function descriptions contained in this manual use the 
positive-logic convention. Positive logic is a system of 
notation whereby the more positive of two levels is the 
TRUE (or 1) state; the more negative level is the FALSE 
(or 0) state. In the iogic descriptions, the TRUE state is 
referred to as HI, and the FALSE state is referred to as LO. 
The specific voltages which constitute a HI or a LO vary 
between individual devices. For specific device character- 
istics, refer to the manufacturer's data book. 



Hybrids 

Some of the circuits in this instrument are implemented 
in hybrid devices. The hybrids are specialized electronic 
devices combining thick-film and semiconductor tech- 
nologies. Passive, thick-film components and active, semi- 
conductor components are interconnected to form the 
circuit on a ceramic carrier. The end result is a relatively 
small "building block" with enhanced performance char- 
acteristics, all in one package. Hybrid circuits are shown 
on schematics simply as blocks with inputs and outputs 
identified. Information about hybrid functioning is 
contained in the related portion of the Detailed Circuit 
Description. 



Linear Devices 

The operation of individual linear integrated circuit 
devices is described in this section using waveforms or other 
graphic techniques to illustrate their operation. 



BLOCK DIAGRAM 

The following discussion is provided as an aid in under- 
standing overall operation of the 2465 Oscilloscope cir- 
cuitry before the individual circuits are discussed in detail. 
A simplified block diagram of the 2465 Oscilloscope, 
showing basic interconnections, is shown in Figure 3-1. 
The diamond-enclosed numbers in each block refer to the 
schematic diagram(s) at the rear of this manual in which 
the related circuitry is located. 



BLOCK DESCRIPTION 

The Low Voltage Power Supply is a high-efficiency, 
switching supply with active output regulation that trans- 
forms the ac source voltage to the various dc voltages 
required by the 2465. The High Voltage Power Supply 
circuit develops the high accelerating potentials required 
by the crt, using voltage multiplication techniques, and the 
DC Restorer provides interfacing for the low-potential 
intensity signals from the Z-Axis Amplifier to the crt 
control grid. 



3-1 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



FRONT-PANEL 
CONTROLS 



^> 



FRONT-PANEL 
INDICATORS 



^> 



ANALOG 

AND 
DIGITAL 
CONTROLS 



M P 



CH 3 IN (O; 
CH 4 IN (O 1 



CH 2 IN (O 1 



CH 1 IN (Or 



<§> 



CD (CONTROL DATA) 



AT AND AV 



REFERENCE VOLTAGES 



ROM 



RAM 



~ ) 



EAROM 

<§> 



7 



CH 3 

AND 

CH 4 

PREAMP 



AUXILLARY 
CONTROL 
REGISTER 



♦ 



CH 3 GAIN 



CH 4 GAIN 



n 



BWL 



CH 2 
ATTENUATOR 



♦ 



MAG LATCH 
RELAYS 



<3> 



^i 



LOW-VOLTAGE 
POWER 
SUPPLY 



CH 1 
ATTENUATOR 



LINE (60 Hz) 



CH 2 
OUT 



CH 2 
PREAMP 



T 

CD 



CD 



CH 1 
PREAMP 



. TO ALL 
CIRCUITS 



m 



CH 1 X 



3831 -10A 



Figure 3-1. Block diagram. 



3-2 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



BWL 



CD. 



READOUT -M. 



<$> 



ROR 



■lZ 



VERTICAL 
CHANNEL 
SWITCH 



<§> 



DELAY LINE 



-(jZ ns) »- 



VERTICAL 
AMPLIFIER 



<*> 



ROX 



ROA 



CD- 



DISPLAY 
SEQUENCER 



<^ 



a it ii 



A AND B 
TRIGGERS 



T 

CD 



HOLDOFF 



DLY 



SELECT 



A GATE 



REF 
MUX 



B GATE 



TRIG 



CD 



CD- 



A 
SWEEP 

<3> 



TRIG 



B 
SWEEP 



EXT Z IN 



Z-AXIS 
AMPLIFIER 



<^ 



DC 
RESTORER 



A GATE 



HORIZONTAL 
AMPLIFIER 



<8> 



B GATE 



CRT 



HIGH-VOLTAGE 
POWER-SUPPLY 



3831 -10B 



Figure 3-1. Block diagram (cont). 



3-3 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Most of the activities of the 2465 are directed by a 
Microprocessor. The Microprocessor, under firmware 
control (firmware is the programmed instructions contained 
in read-only memory that tells the processor how to 
operate), monitors instrument functions and sets up the 
operating modes according to the instructions received. 



Various types of data to and from the Microprocessor 
(program instructions, constants, control data, etc.) are 
transferred over a group of eight bidirectional signal lines 
called the Data Bus. The Data Bus is dedicated solely to 
Microprocessor-related data transfer. 



Another group of signal lines, called the Address Bus, 
are responsible for selecting or "addressing" the memory 
location or device that the Microprocessor wants to com- 
municate with. Typically, depending on the instruction 
being executed, the processor places an address on the 
Address Bus to identify the location the Microprocessor 
must communicate with. This address, along with some 
enabling logic, opens up an appropriate data path via the 
Data Bus; and data is then either read from or written to 
that location by the processor. 



While executing the control program, the Microprocessor 
retrieves previously stored calibration constants and front- 
panel settings and, as necessary, places program-generated 
data in temporary storage for later use. The EAROM 
(electrically-alterable read-only memory) and RAM 
(random-access memory) provide these storage functions 
respectively. 



When power is applied to the 2465, a brief initialization 
sequence is performed, and then the processor begins 
scanning the front-panel controls. The switch settings 
detected and the retrieved front-panel data from the 
EAROM causes the processor to set various control registers 
and control voltages within the instrument that define the 
operating mode of the instrument. These register settings 
and voltage levels control the vertical channel selection 
and deflection factors, the sweep rate, the triggering 
parameters, the readout activity, and sequencing of the 
display. Loading the control data into the various registers 
throughout the instrument is done using a common serial 
data line (CD). Individual control clock signals (CC) deter- 
mine which register is loaded from the common data line. 



Coordination of the vertical, horizontal, and E-Axis 
(intensity) components of the display most be done in real 
time. Due to the speed of these display changes and the 
precise timing relationships that must be maintained 
between display events, direct sequencing of the display is 
beyond the capabilities of the processor. Instead, control 
data from the processor is sent to the Display Sequencer 



(a specialized integrated circuit) which responds by setting 
up the various signals that control the stages handling the 
real-time display signals. The controlled stages are stepped 
through a predefined sequence that is determined by the 
control data. Typically, as the sequence is being executed, 
the Display Sequencer will be changing vertical signal 
sources, Z-Axis intensity levels, triggering sources, and 
horizontal sweep signal sources. The specific activities 
being carried out by the Display Sequencer depend on 
the display mode called for by the control data. 



Vertical deflection for crt displays comes from one or 
more of the four front-panel vertical inputs and, when 
displaying readout information, from the Readout circuitry. 
Signals applied to the front-panel Channel 1 and Channel 2 
inputs are connected to their respective Preamplifiers 
via processor-controlled Attenuator networks. Control data 
from the Microprocessor defining the attenuation factor 
selected for each channel is serially loaded into the 
Auxiliary Control Register and then strobed into the 
Attenuator Mag-Latch Relays in parallel. The relay switches 
of each Attenuator network are either opened or closed, 
depending on the data supplied to the Mag-Latch Relay 
Drivers. The relays are magnetically latched and remain as 
set until new control data is strobed in. The Auxiliary 
Control Register is therefore available, and different mode 
data is clocked into the register to set up the operating 
mode of other portions of the instrument. 



Attenuated Channel 1 and Channel 2 input signals are 
amplified by their respective Preamplifiers. The gain factor 
for the Channel 1 and Channel 2 Preamplifiers is settable 
by control data from the processor. The Channel 3 and 
Channel 4 input signals are amplified by their respective 
Preamplifiers by either of a choice of two gain factors set 
by control bits from the Auxiliary Control Register. All 
four of these preamplified signals are applied to the Vertical 
Channel Switch where they are selected by the Display 
Sequencer for display when required. 



Each of the vertical signals is also applied to the A and 
B Trigger circuitry via trigger pickoff outputs from the 
Preamplifier stages. Any one of the signals may be selected 
as the trigger SOURCE for either the A or the B Trigger 
circuitry as directed by the Display Sequencer. The line 
trigger signal provides an added trigger source for A Sweeps 
only. Control data from the Microprocessor is written to 
the Trigger circuitry to define the triggering LEVEL, 
SLOPE, and COUPLING criteria. When the selected trigger 
signal meets these requirements, a sweep can be initiated. 
The Trigger circuit initiates both the A Sweep and the B 
Sweep as required by the display mode selected. 



In the case of A Sweeps, the LO state of the trigger 
holdoff (THO) signal from the Display Sequencer enables 
the A Sweep circuit and the next A Trigger signai initiates 



3-4 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



the sweep. For B Sweeps, and in the case of intensified 
sweeps, the A Sweep Delay Gate signal (DG) enables the B 
Sweep circuit. Depending on the B Trigger mode selected, a 
B Sweep will be initiated either immediately (RUN AFT 
DLY) or on the next B Trigger signal (TRIG AFT DLY). 
The slope of the sweep ramp is dependent on Micro- 
processor-generated control data loaded into the internal 
control register of the A and B Sweep circuit hybrids. 



Sweep signals generated by each of the Sweep hybrids 
are applied to the Horizontal Amplifier. The Horizontal 
Amplifier is directed by the Display Sequencer to select 
one of the sweep ramps for amplification in sequence. 
In the case of Readout and X-Y displays, the X-Readout 
and CH 1 input signals are selected to be amplified, also 
under direction of the Display Sequencer. 



To control the display intensity, the Display Sequencer 
directs the Z-Axis circuit to unblank the display at the 
appropriate time for the sweeps and readout displays. When 
the display is unblanked, the Display Sequencer selects the 



display intensity for either waveform displays or for read- 
out displays by switching control of the Z-Axis beam 
current between the front-panel INTENSITY and READ- 
OUT INTENSITY potentiometers as appropriate. 



During readout displays, the vertical dot-position signal 
from the Readout circuitry is applied to the Vertical 
Amplifier via the Vertical Channel Switch. Horizontal 
dot-position deflection for the readout display is selected 
by internal switching in the Horizontal Amplifier. 



The vertical, horizontal, and Z-Axis signals are applied 
to their respective amplifiers where they are raised to crt- 
drive levels. The output signals from the Vertical and 
Horizontal Amplifiers are applied directly to the crt deflec- 
tion plates. The Z-Axis Amplifier output signal requires 
interfacing to the high-potential crt environment before 
application to the crt control grid. The necessary Z-Axis 
interfacing is provided by the DC Restorer circuit located 
on the High-Voltage circuit board. The resulting display 
may be of waveforms, alphanumeric readout, or a combina- 
tion of both. 



DETAILED CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 



INTRODUCTION 

The following discussion provides detailed information 
concerning the electrical operation and circuit relation- 
ships of the 2465 Oscilloscope. Circuitry unique to the 
2465 is described in detail, while circuits common in the 
electronics industry are not. The descriptions are accom- 
panied by supporting illustrations and tables. Diagrams 
identified in the text, on which associated circuitry is 
shown, are located at the rear of this manual in the tabbed 
foldout pages. 



PROCESSOR AND DIGITAL CONTROL 



transfer (DO through D7) and a 16-bit address bus (AO 
through A15) for selecting the source or destination of the 
data. Precise timing of instruction execution, addressing, and 
data transfer is provided by an external, crystal-controlled 
clock signal. 



The clock signal is developed by the Microprocessor 
Clock stage and applied to the Microprocessor at pin 39. 
Using the external clock as a reference, the Microprocessor 
generates synchronized control output signals [R/W (read- 
write), E (enable), and VMA (valid memory address)] 
that maintain proper timing relationships throughout the 
instrument. 



The Processor and Digital Control circuitry (diagram 1) 
directs the operation of most oscilloscope functions by 
following fimware control instructions stored in memory. 
These instructions direct the Microprocessor to monitor 
the front-panel controls and to send control signals that 
set up the various signal processing circuits accordingly. 



Microprocessor 

The Microprocessor (U2092) is the center of control 
activities. It has an eight-bit, bidirectional data bus for data 



Microprocessor Clock 

The Microprocessor Clock stage generates a 5-MHz 
square-wave clock signal to the Microprocessor and a 
10-MHz clock signal to portions of the Readout circuitry. 

Ini/artar I lOR^RA aMc ae an ncnillatnr vA/ith r»r\/etal VO^Rfi 

providing feedback at the resonant frequency. The required 
phase shift for oscillation to occur is produced by C2565, 
C2566, R2564, and the crystal. The RC network composed 
of R2571 , C2572, R2553, and R2573 biases input pin 1 of 
U2556A in the active region and establishes approximate 



REV OCT 1983 



3-5 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



symmetry of the oscillator output. The signal is buffered 
and inverted by U2556B to provide the 10-MHz clock 
signal. 



Fiip-flop U2468A is a divide-by-two circuit that reduces 
the 10-MHz clock down to a 5-MHz square-wave signal used 
to clock the Microprocessor and the Display Sequencer. 
The 10-MHz clock is supplied to the Readout Board for dot 
timing and is also available for use with option circuitry. 



Reset Control 

The Reset Control circuitry ensures that, at power-up, 
the Microprocessor begins program execution from a 
known point in memory and with all the processor registers 
in known states. It also allows the processor to reset itself 
when power is turned off so that the instrument powers 
down in a known state. 



As the operating voltages are falling, the Reset circuitry 
must not generate a false RESET signal to the processor. 
Such a restart when the power supply voltages are outside 
their normal operating range would produce unpredictable 
processor operation that could possibly alter the contents 
of the EAROM. When the processor has completed ali 
the other power-down tasks, it finally sets the PWR DOWN 
signal HI via U2208 (diagram 2). This signal is applied to 
inverter U2118A at pin 1. Pin 16 of U2118A goes LO and 
immediately pulls pin 10 of Reset Comparator U2435C LO 
to prevent a reset to the processor. This LO also forward 
biases CR2651, and C2661 begins discharging through 
CR2651 and R2552 to allow the voltage on pin 9 of the 
comparator to fall to zero. After about 1 ms, C2661 is fully 
discharged, and the processor sets the PWR DOWN signal to 
U21 18A LO. The output of inverter U21 18A then goes HI, 
and Reset Comparator U2435C immediately switches state 
to assert the RESET signal to the processor. The RESET 
signal is held LO until the power supplies have fully 
discharged. 



POWER-UP SEQUENCE. Operational amplifier U2435 
is configured as a comparator that generates the power-up 
reset. As power is applied to the instrument, the various 
power supplies start turning on and pull the noninverting 
input of U2435C (pin 10) above the inverting input level 
(pin 9). This action forces output pin 8 HI, and the refer- 
ence level for the comparator at pin 10 is set to +3.7 volts 
by the divider network of R2648, R2646, and R2647. The 
HI from U2435C pin 8 is inverted by U2656A and applied 
to the processor RESET input (pin 40). When all the power 
supplies are operating, the PWR UP signal from J251 pin 12 
goes HI, and capacitor C2661 begins charging positive 
through R2652. The time required for C2661 to charge to 
the comparator switching threshold is approximately 
100 ms. When the voltage across C2661 reaches the +3.7-V 
reference level, the comparator switches states and pin 8 of 
U2435C goes LO. The RESET signal to the processor then 
goes HI to enable normal execution to begin, and the pro- 
cessor is directed to the starting address of the power-up 
routine, which it then performs. 



POWER-DOWN SEQUENCE. When the instrument 
power switch is turned off, the PWR UP signal from J251 
pin 12 immediately goes LO. This LO generates the NMI 
(non-maskable interrupt) request to the processor on pin 6 
which causes the processor to branch to the power-down 
routine. Under direction of that routine, the processor 
begins shutting down the instrument in an orderly fashion 
before the power supply outputs can drop below the 
operating thresholds. This routine also places the EAROM 
in standby to prevent loss of data from the EAROM and 
disconnects the CH 1 and CH 2 50-12 input terminations to 
protect them from accidental application of excessive 
voltage during storage or bench handling. 



For diagnostic purposes, the PWR DOWN reset signal 
can be disabled. Moving jumper P503 to the DIAG (diag- 
nostic) position prevents C2661 from being discharged. 
The RESET signal is therefore held HI, and the processor 
can execute a free-running NOP (no operation) loop with- 
out interruption if the PWR DOWN bit is set HI while the 
Address Bus is incrementing. 



Data Bus 

Tri-state buffer U2194 is used to buffer the data signals 
to the Microprocessor from other devices on the bus. When 
not enabled, the device is switched to its high-impedance 
state to isolate the processor from the buffered Data Bus. 
Buffer U2194 is enabled via Read-Write Latch U2468B 
when the processor reads data from another device on the 
bus. 



When the processor writes data onto the bus, Octal 
Latch U2294 is enabled by Read-Write Latch U2468B. 
When the E (enable) signal at pin 11 of U2294 is HI, 
processor data bits are passed asynchronously through the 
latch to the buffered Data Bus. When the E signal goes LO, 
data bits meeting setup times are latched into the device. 
The latched Q outputs provide the required drive current 
to the various devices on the bus and ensure that data 
hold times are met for correct data transfer. When the 
Read-Write Latch places a HI on pin 1 of U2294, the 
latch is disabled, and the outputs are switched to their 
high-impedance state. 



Data transfer to and from the processor may be inter- 
rupted by removing Diag/Norm Jumper P503. This forces 
a NOP (no operation) condition that is useful for verifying 
the functionality of the processor (when a data-bus device 



3-6 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



is suspected of causing a system failure) or for trouble- 
shooting the Address Bus and Address Decode circuitry. 
Removing the jumper removes the operating power from 
both U2194 and U2294 to disconnect the Microprocessor 
from the buffered Data Bus. With the Data Bus discon- 
nected, a resistor network pulls the processor Data Bus lines 
(DO through D7) to a NOP (no operation) instruction. A 
NOP causes the Microprocessor to continuously increment 
through its address field. The Address Decode circuitry may 
then be checked to determine if it is operating properly. 



Address Decode 

The Address Decode circuitry generates enabling signals 
and strobes that allow the Microprocessor to control the 



various devices and circuit functions. The controlling signals 
are generated as a result of the Microprocessor placing 
specific addresses on the Address Bus. Figure 3-2 illustrates 
the enables and strobes generated by the Address Decode 
circuitry. 



Address decoding is performed by a series of three-line- 
to-eight-line decoders attached to the Address Bus. The 
three most significant address bits are decoded by U2480. 
This device initially separates the total addressable-memory 
space (64k-bytes) into eight, 8k-byte blocks. Addresses in 
the top 32k-bytes (address bit A15 HI) select one of four 
read-only memories (ROM), U2162, U2178, U2362, or 
U2378. When the VMA (Valid Memory Address) and E 
(Enable) outputs from the Microprocessor go HI, the 



HEX 
ADDRESS 

0000 
07FF 
0800 
0FFF 

1000 
7FFF 

8000 
9FFF 
A000 
BFFF 
C000 
DFFF 
E000 
FFFF 



DECODED BY 
U2480 AND U2770 



HEX 
ADDRESS 



DECODED BY 
U2580 



HEX 
ADDRESS 



RAM-U2496 



ADDRESS 
DECODING (U2580) 



RESERVED 
FOR OPTIONS 



R0M-U2162 



R0M-U2362 



R0M-U2378 



R0M-U2178 



0800 
083F 



0840 
087F 



0880 
08BF 



08C0 
08FF 



0900 
093F 



0940 
097F 

0980 
09BF 

09C0 
09FF 

0A00 
0BFF 

0C00 
0DFF 

^ 0E00 
\ 0FFF 



UNUSED 



DAC MSB CLK (087F) 



DAC LSB CLK (0880) 



PORT 1 CLK (08C0) 



ROS 1 CLK (0900) 



ROS 2 CLK (0940) 



PORT 2 CLK (0980) 



FURTHER ADDRESS 
DECODING (U2596) 



OVERLAY OF 
0800-09FF 



OVERLAY OF 
0800-09FF 



OVERLAY OF 
0800-09FF 



09C0 



09C1 



09C2 



09C3 



09C4 



09C5 



09C6 



09C7 



09C8 



09C9 



09CA 



09CB 



09CC 



09CD 



09CE 



09CF 

09D0 
09DF 

09E0 
09EF 
09F0 
09FF 



DECODED BY 
U2596 



UNUSED 



DMUX0 OFF 



DMUX0 ON 



PORT 3 IN 



DMUX1 OFF 



DMUX1 ON 



LED CLK 



DISP. SEQ. CLK 



ATTN. CLK 



CH 2 PA CLK 



CH 1 PA CLK 



B SWP CLK 



A SWP CLK 



B TRIG CLK 



A TRIG CLK 



TRIG STAT STRB 



OVERLAY OF 09C0-09CF 



OVERLAY OF 09C0-09CF 



OVERLAY OF 09C0-09CF 



3831-09 



Figure 3-2. Address decoding. 



3-7 



Theory of Operation-2465 Service 



selected ROM is enabled, and data from the selected 
address location is read out of the ROM. 



Of the bottom 32k-bytes of addresses, only the lowest 
8k-bytes are further decoded. When addresses in this 
8k-byte range are decoded, the YO output of U2480 
enables decoder U2770. This three-line-to-eight-line decoder 
separates the lowest 8k-byte address block into 2k-byte 
blocks. Any address falling into the lowest 2k-byte block 
of addresses will cause U2770 to generate an enable to the 
RAM (random-access memory) U2496. Addresses in the 
next highest 2k-byte block of addresses will enable U2580 
to do the next stage of address decoding. The remaining 
2k-byte blocks decoded by U2770 are not used. 



The level of decoding performed by U2580 uses address 
bits A6, A7, and A8 to separate the addresses within the 
2k-byte block of addresses 0800 to OFFF into 32 groups 
of 64 addresses each. Address bits A9 and A10 are not used 
in the decoding scheme, so each of these 32 blocks is not 
uniquely identified. This results in four duplicate sections 
within the address block, each consisting of eight groups 
of 64 addresses. The upper three sections in the address 
space are never used; therefore, decoding by U2580 may be 
more simply thought of as eight groups of 64 address 
locations. Addresses within these eight groups generate 
control signals to other portions of the instrument. 



The final level of address decoding is done by four-line- 
to-sixteen-line decoder U2596. When enabled by the Y7 
output of U2580, this decoder separates the highest 64- 
address group decoded by U2580 into 16 individual control 
signals. In this level of decoding, address bits A4 and A5 are 
not decoded, so that the 64 possible addresses consist of 
four overlayed blocks of 16 addresses each. 



Each of the control signals generated by the Address 
Decode circuitry are present only as long as the specific 
address defining that signal is present on the Address Bus. 
However, four of the addressable control signals decoded 
by U2596 are used to either set or reset flip-flops U2656B 
and U2656D. The control signals are, in effect, latched and 
remain present to enable multiplexers U2335 (diagram 2) 
and U170 (diagram 4). When enabled, these multiplexers 
route analog control signals from DAC (digital-to-analog 
converter) U2235 (diagram 2) to the various analog control 
circuits. 



Read-only Memory (ROM) 

The Read-only Memory consists of four, 8k-byte ROMs 
that contain the operating instructions (firmware) used to 
control processor (and thus oscilloscope) operation. 
Addresses from the Microprocessor that fall within the top 
32k-bytes of addressable space cause one of the four 
read-only memory integrated circuits to be enabled. (See 



Address Decode description.) Instructions are read out of 
the enabled ROM (or PROM) IC from the address location 
present on its 13 address input pins (A0 through A12). 
The eight-bit data byte from the addressed location is 
placed onto the buffered Data Bus (BDO through BD7) to 
be read by the Microprocessor. 



Random- Access Memory (RAM) 

The RAM consists of integrated circuit U2496 and 
provides the Microprocessor with 1k-byte of temporary 
storage space for data that is developed during the execu- 
tion of a routine. The RAM is enabled whenever an address 
in the lowest 2k-byte of addresses is placed on the Address 
Bus. When writing into the RAM, the write-enable signal 
(WE) on pin 21 of U2496 is set LO along with the chip 
enable (CE) signal on pin 18. At the same time, the output- 
enable signal (OE) on pin 20 is HI to disable the RAM out- 
put drivers. Data is then written to the location addressed 
by the Microprocessor. If data is to be read from the RAM, 
the WE signal is set HI to place the RAM in the read mode, 
and the OE signal is set LO to enable the output drivers. 
This places the data from the addressed location on the 
buffered Data Bus where it can be read by the Micro- 
processor. 



Timing Logic 

The Timing Logic circuit composed of U2468B, U2556F, 
U2556C, and U2656C generates time- and mode-dependent 
signals from control signals output from the Microprocessor. 
The enable (E) signal output from the Microprocessor is 
a 1.25-MHz square wave used to synchronize oscilloscope 
functions to processor timing. 



Data applied to the Address Bus, Data Bus, and various 
control signals are allowed to settle (become valid) before 
any of the addressed devices are enabled. This is accom- 
plished by switching the E signal HI a short time after each 
processor cycle begins. The delayed enable signal is inverted 
by U2556C to provide the active LO signal (E) that enables 
the Address Decode circuit after the Address Bus has 
settled. 



Read-Write Latch U2468B is used to delay the read/ 
write signal (R/W) from the Microprocessor to meet hold- 
time requirements of the RAM. At the same time, it gen- 
erates delayed read and write enabling signals of both 
polarities to meet the requirements of Buffer U2194 and 
Latch U2294 (in the Microprocessor Data Bus) and various 
other devices in the Readout circuitry (diagram 7). 



When R/W goes LO for a write cycle, Read-Write Latch 
U2468B is reset, and the Q output (pin 9) is held LO. 
Latch U2294 is in its transparent state at this time, and 



3-8 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



data from the Microprocessor is applied asynchronously 
to the buffered Data Bus. At the end of the write cycle, the 
R/W signal goes HI, and the reset to U2468B is removed. 
The E signal also goes through a negative transition, and 
data on the Microprocessor data bus lines is latched into 
U2294. The next positive transition of the 1.25-MHz E 
signal (1/2 E cycle after the R/W signal goes H!) clocks the 
HI level at U2468B pin 12 (the D input) to the Q output, 
and the Q output (pin 8) goes LO. The 1/2 E cycle delay 
between the time R/W goes HI and the time that the Q 
output of U2468B goes HI keeps Latch U2294 outputs 
on long enough to meet the data hold time for the RAM. 
At the end of that delay time, pin 1 of U2294 goes HI, 
and the Latch outputs are switched to the high-impedance 
state to isolate it from the buffered Data Bus. 



A write-enable signal to the RAM is generated by the 
circuit composed of U2656C and U2556F. The processor 
R/W signal is inverted by U2556F and NANDed with the 
enable signal (E) by U2656C. The write enable to the RAM 
at U2656C pin 9 is produced after the address data has 
settled. This action prevents writing to improper RAM 
address locations. 



If all the tasks are not completed at the end of one inter- 
rupt cycle, the real-time interrupt request restarts the 
analog updates, but as soon as those are accomplished, 
the Microprocessor will pick up with its additional tasks 
where it was before the interrupt occurred. This continues 
until all tasks are completed. If any pot or switch changes 
are detected, the Microprocessor updates the analog control 
voltages and the control register data to reflect those 
changes prior to reverting back to the mainline program 
instructions. 



ANALOG CONTROL 

The Analog Control circuitry (diagram 2), under Micro- 
processor control, reads the front-panel controls and sets 
various analog control voltages to reflect these front-panel 
settings. The calibration constants determined during 
instrument calibration and the last "stable" front-panel 
setup conditions (unchanged for approximately seven 
seconds) are stored in EAROM (elecrically-alterable read- 
only memory). At power-on the stored front-panel infor- 
mation is used to return the instrument to its previous 
operating state. 



READOUT FRAMING AND INTERRUPT TIMING. 

Binary Counter U2668 is used to generate a readout- 
framing clock to the Readout circuitry and a real-time 
interrupt request to the Microprocessor via inverter 
U2556E. The readout-framing clock is a regular square- 
wave signal obtained from U2668 pin 14 by dividing the 
1.25-MHz E signal from U2556C pin 6 by 1024 (2 10 ). This 
clock tells the readout circuitry to load the next block 
(subframe) of readout information to be displayed. (See 
"Readout" description for further information concerning 
the alphanumeric display.) The real-time interrupt request, 
which occurs every 3.3 ms, is obtained from pin 2 by 
dividing the E signal by 8192 (2 13 ). 



Status Buffer 

Data transfer from the Analog Control circuitry to 
the Microprocessor is via Status Buffer U2108. Data bits 
applied to the input pins are buffered onto the Data Bus 
when enabled by the Address Decode circuitry. Via the 
Status Buffer, the processor is able to (1) determine the 
settings of front-panel pot and switches, (2) read the 
EAROM data, (3) find out if the readout display should 
be switched on or off, (4) determine if a triggered sweep is 
in progress, and (5) read the contents of the Readout RAM. 
When disabled, the buffer outputs are switched to high 
impedance states to isolate them from the buffered Data 
Bus. 



When the real-time interrupt request occurs, IRQ (pin 4 
of U2092) goes LO, and the processor breaks from execu- 
tion of its mainline program. The Microprocessor first 
resets Binary Counter U2668 by setting pin 19 of U2043 
(diagram 2) HI (to generate the reset), then it resets pin 19 
LO to allow the counter to start again. At this time, the 
Microprocessor sets analog control voltages and reads 
trigger status from the Dispiay Sequencer (diagram 11). 
When this is completed, it reverts back to the mainline 
program. 



In addition to the analog control and trigger status 
update that occurs with each interrupt, on every fifth 
interrupt cycle, the Microprocessor also scans the front- 
panel potentiometers. Every tenth interrupt cycle, scanning 
the front-panel switches and checking the 50-£2 DC inputs 
for overloads is added to the previously mentioned tasks. 



Front Panel Switch Scanning 

The Front Panel Switches are arranged in a matrix of ten 
rows and five columns. Most of the row-column inter- 
sections contain a switch. When a switch is closed, one of 
the row lines is connected to one of the column lines 
through a diode. Reading of the switches is accomplished 
by setting a single row line LO and then checking each of 
the five column lines sequentially to determine if a LO is 
present (signifying that a switch is closed). After each of 
the five columns has been checked, the current row line 
is reset HI and the next row line is set LO for the next 
column scan cycle. A complete Front Panel Switch scan 
consists of setting aii ten row iines LO in sequence and 
performing a five-column scan for each of the rows. 



Row lines are set LO when the Microprocessor writes 
a LO to one of the flip-flops in octal registers U2034 and 



3-9 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



U2134. The Row data placed on the buffered Data Bus by 
the Microprocessor is clocked into the registers as two, 
eight-bit words by clocks from the Address Decode cir- 
cuitry (DAC LSB CLK for the lower eight bits and DAC 
MSB CLK for the upper eight bits). All eight outputs of 
register U2134 and two outputs of register U2034 drive the 
ten rows of the front-panel switch matrix (the eleventh 
line is not used in the matrix). Series resistors in the lines 
limit current flow and eliminate noise problems associated 
with excessive current flow. 



While each row is selected, the processor will scan each 
of the five lines in sequence. To scan the columns, the 
processor increments the three data select bits to U2034 
that define the column to be checked. Eight-line data 
selector U2456 connects the associated column line to 
Status Buffer U2108. As each line is selected, the Micro- 
processor reads the Status Buffer to determine if the 
associated switch is open or closed. 



In addition to the front-panel switches, the CAL/NO 
CAL jumper (P501) is checked to determine whether 
the instrument should be allowed to execute the calibration 
routines. The levels on U2456 pins 7 and 9 are read by 
scanning two additional columns at power-up. If the jumper 
is pulling the CAL bit LO, the operator will be allowed to 
use the calibration routines stored in firmware. If the NO 
CAL bit is pulled LO, the calibration routines may not be 
performed. If the jumper is removed, and neither bit is 
pulled LO, the Microprocessor is forced into a special 
diagnostic mode (CYCLE) used to record certain operating 
failures during long-term testing of the instrument. (See the 
"Maintenance" section of this manual for an explanation of 
the diagnostic modes.) Removing P501 or switching it 
between the CAL and NO CAL positions will not be 
recognized by the Microprocessor until the instrument is 
powered down and then turned back on. 



The SI (scope identification) bit is checked at power-up 
to determine if the instrument is a 2465. Some parts of the 
firmware are shared with a similar instrument, the 2445, 
and the check is necessary for the Microprocessor to 
distinguish between the two instruments. A LO on the SI 
bit indicates that the instrument is a 2465. 



The resistors in series with the input lines to U2456 are 
current-limiting resistors that protect the CMOS eight-line 
data selector from static discharges. The resistors con- 
nected from the input lines to the +5-V supply are pull-up 
resistors for the front-panel column lines. 



Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) 

DAC U2234 is used to set the various analog references 
in the instrument and is used to determine the settings of 



the front-panel potentiometer. The 12-bit digital values to 
be converted are written to octal registers U2034 and 
U2134 for application to the DAC input pins. The DAC 
then outputs two complementary analog currents that are 
proportional to the digital input data. (Complementary, in 
this case, means that the sum of the two output currents is 
always equal to a fixed value.) 



The maximum range of the output currents is estab- 
lished by a voltage-divider network composed of R2127, 
R2227, R2228, and R2229 connected to the positive and 
negative reference current inputs of the DAC (pins 14 and 
15 respectively). A +10-V reference voltage applied to the 
DAC through R2228 sets the basic reference current. 
Resistor R2229 and potentiometer R2127 provide a means 
to adjust this current over a small range for calibration 
purposes. The nominal reference current is 1 mA, and the 
DAC full-scale output current is 4 mA. The output currents 
flow through series resistors R2324 and R2325, connected 
to the +1.36-V reference, and proportional voltages result. 



Pot Scanning 

The Pot Scanning circuitry, in conjunction with the 
DAC, derives digital values for each of the various front- 
panel potentiometers. Scanning of the pots is accomplished 
by data selectors U2408 and U2418. Three bits are written 
to register U2208 and select the pot to be read. The bits are 
latched in the register and keep the pot selected until the 
register is reset. The Microprocessor writes a LO to the 
inhibit input (pin 6) of either U2408 or U2418 via register 
U2308 to enable the device. The enabled data selector 
connects the analog voltage at the wiper of the selected pot 
to comparator U2214. 



Comparator U2214 compares the analog voltage of each 
pot to the output voltage from the DAC (pin 18). To 
determine the potentiometer output voltage, the processor 
performs a binary search routine that changes the output 
voltage from the DAC in an orderly fashion until it most 
closely approximates the voltage from the pot. 



The conversion algorithm is similar to successive approx- 
imation and generates an eight-bit representation of the 
analog level. When the pot's value is determined, the Micro- 
processor stores that value in memory. Once all the pots 
have been read and the initial value of each has been stored, 
the processor uses a shorter routine to determine if any pot 
setting changes. To do this the DAC output is set to the last 
known value of the pot (plus and minus a small drift value), 
and the status bit is read to see that a HI and LO occurs. If 
within the limits, the processor assumes that the pot setting 
has not changed and scans the next pot. When the processor 
detects that a pot setting has changed, it does another 
binary search routine to find the new value of that pot. 



3-10 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Analog Control 

The operating mode and status of the 2465 requires 
that various analog voltages (for controlling instrument 
functions) be set and updated. The digital values of the 
controlling voltages are generated by the Microprocessor 
and converted by the DAC. Analog multiplexers U2335 (on 
diagram 2) and U170 (on diagram 4) route the DAC 
voltages to sample-and-hold circuits that maintain the 
control voltages between updates. 



i he microprocessor writes three selection bits to register 
U2034 that directs the DAC output to the appropriate 
sample-and-hold circuit and charges a capacitor (or cap- 
acitors) to the level of the DAC. When the processor 
disconnects the DAC voltage from the sample-and-hold 
circuit (by disabling the multiplexer) the capacitor(s) 
remains charged and holds the control voltage near the 
level set by the DAC. Due to the extremely high input 
impedance of the associated operational amplifiers, the 
charge on the capacitor(s) remains nearly constant between 
updates. 



EAROM 

EAROM (electrically-alterable read-only memory) 
U2008 provides nonvolatile storage for the calibration 
constants and the power-down front-panel settings. When 
power is applied to the 2465, the Microprocessor reads the 
calibration constants and generates control voltages to set 
up the analog circuitry. The front-panel settings that were 
present at power-off are recalled to return the instrument 
to that same operating mode. 



The EAROM is a metal-nitride-oxide-semiconductor 
device (MNOS) and requires a TTL-to-MNOS level shift of 
the input control and data signals. A MNOS-to-TTL level 
shift of the output data is also required. Inputs to U2008 
are shifted to MNOS levels by U2118B through U2118F 
and the associated components while output data is shifted 
back to TTL levels by Q2025, U21 18G, and the associated 
components. 



The EAROM data, address, and mode-control bits are 
written by the Microprocessor to five flip-flops of register 
U2208. The register outputs drive the level-shifting network 
in the associated line. Three of these latched bits define the 
EAROM mode and will direct data into and out of the device. 
These three mode control bits are applied to pins 7, 8, and 9 
of U2008 and set the mode to either Accept Address, Ac- 
cept Data, Write Data, Read Data, or Shift-Data-Out. 



When writing data into the EAROM, the mode is first set 
to Accept Address, then the address of the location to be 
altered is applied to the I/O port (pin 12) as a specially 
encoded sequence of 20 single bits via U21 18C, R2020, and 
CR2021. This sequence of bits is two, one-of-ten codes 
where the position of the first LO bit in the sequence 
represents the most-significant bit of the address (in 
decimal) and the position of the second LO represents the 
least-significant digit (see Figure 3-3). 



The processor clocks each of the 20 bits into the internal 
address register by clocking U2008 pin 6 via the clock level 
shifting network (U2118C and associated components). 



CLOCK 



: ^x^^TJ^_nLnjrLrLiTrLnjiJirLrLrLrLjrLnr 





CI 



C2 



C3 



1 



n 



i 



I/O 
PIN 



MOST SIGNIFICANT DIGIT 



^90^*80^70^60^50»»|««40*j««30»»|««20»»[*10»-j«" »->« 9 »»U 8 "•[* 7 »»U 6 »»U 5 »»U 4 »i* 3 »»U 2 »-U 1 ""U ■» 



LEAST SIGNIFICANT DIGIT 



NOTE: ADDRESSING IS VIA TWO CONSECUTIVE ONE-OF-TEN CODES. ADDRESS 99 IS ILLUSTRATED. 



3831-11 



Figure 3-3. Accept address timing. 



REV MAY 1984 



3-11 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Internal address decoding within U2008 then enables the 
selected address location. The three mode-control bits are 
then set to the Accept Data mode, and the new 14-bit serial 
data word is applied to the I/O pin. The data bits are 
clocked into a temporary data-storage register and the 
mode-control bits are set to the Write mode. A series of 
clock pulses then writes the data from the temporary data 
storage register to the addressed location. 



When reading from the EAROM, the processor first 
sets the three-bit mode-control word to Accept Address 
as in writing, and the 20-bit address is clocked into the 
EAROM. Now the mode-control word is set to Read Data, 
and a single clock pulse moves the data from the addressed 
location to the temporary data-storage register in parallel. 
The EAROM mode is then set to Shift Data Out, and the 
14-bit data word is clocked serially from the temporary 
storage register to the I/O pin. 



The output data is applied to Q2025, U2118G, and 
the associated components, to shift it to TTL levels. The 
Status Buffer U2108 applies the data to the Data Bus where 
the Microprocessor may read it. 



FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS 

The Front Panel is the operator's interface for control- 
ling the user-selectable oscilloscope functions. Along with 
the crt, it provides visual feedback to the user about the 
present operating state of the instrument. 



Most of the Front-Panel controls (diagram 3) are "cold" 
controls; they are not connected directly into the signal 
path. Therefore, associated circuits are not influenced by 
the physical parameters (such as capacitance, resistance, 
and inductance) of the controls. In addition, translating the 
analog output levels of some of the potentiometers to 
digital equivalents allows the processor to handle the data 
in ways that result in a variety of enhanced control 
features. 



To maintain the front-panei operating setup between 
uses of the instrument, the digitized values of the potenti- 
ometers and front-panel switch settings are stored in 
EAROM at regular intervals (approximately every seven 
seconds) so that when the instrument power is turned off, 
these control settings are not lost. Then, when power is 
next applied, the instrument will power up to the same 
configuration as when the power was last removed 
(assuming the settings of the nondigitized pots and switches 
remain the same). 



The Front-Panel controls also allow the user to initiate 
and direct the diagnostic routines (and when enabled, 



the calibration routines) programmed into the read-only 
memory (ROM). These routines are explained in the 
Maintenance section of this manual. 



Front Panel Switches 

The Front Panel Switches are arranged in a ten-row-by- 
five-column matrix, with each switch assigned a unique 
location within the matrix (see Figure 3-4). A closed switch 
connects a row and a column together through an isolating 
diode. To detect a switch closure, the switch matrix is 
scanned once every 32 ms (every tenth Microprocessor 
interrupt cycle). When scanning, the Microprocessor 
sequentially sets each individual row line LO. A closed 
switch enables the LO to be passed through the associated 
diode to a column line. When the processor checks each of 
the five column lines associated with the selected row, the 
LO column is detected. The intersection of the selected row 
and the detected column uniquely identifies the switch that 
is closed. Further information about switch scanning is 
found in the "Front-Panel Scanning" description located in 
the "Analog Control" discussion. 



As each switch is read, the processor compares the 
present state of the switch to its last-known state (stored 
in memory) and, if the same, advances to check the next 
switch. When a switch is detected as having changed, the 
processor immediately reconfigures the setup conditions 
to reflect the mode change and stores the new state of the 
switch in memory. The detected status of the switch on 
each of the following scan cycles is then compared against 
the new stored data to determine if the switch changes 
again. The 32-ms delay between the time a switch is 
detected as having changed and the next time it is read 
effectively eliminates the effects of switching noise (switch 
bounce) that may occur after the switch is actuated. 



Front-Panel Potentiometers 

The thirteen Front-Panel Potentiometers are "cold" 
controls that control the linear functions of the instrument. 
(SCALE ILLUM, READOUT INTENSITY, INTENSITY, 
and FOCUS are not considered part of the Front-Panel 
Control circuitry for the purposes of this description.) Of 
these, eight are digitized and control their functions indi- 
rectly. The remaining five potentiometers (four vertical 
POSITION pots and the TRACE SEP pot) control their 
respective circuit functions directly. Data Selectors U2048 
and U2148 in the Analog Control circuitry (diagram 2) 
route the wiper arm voltage of the pot being read to 
comparator U2214 where it is compared with the output of 
DAC U2234. The processor changes the DAC output until 
it most closely matches the output voltage of the pot, then 
stores the digital value of that "match". See the "Front- 
Panel Switch Scanning" description in the "Analog Control" 
discussion for further information on the reading of pot 
values. 



3-12 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Like the switch matrix scanning, the Front-Panel pot 
scanning routine is performed every 32 ms. When entered, 
the routine reads the settings of the last-moved pot and one 
unmoved pot. Each succeeding scan continues to read the 
last-moved pot, but a new unmoved pot is read. In this way, 
each pot is monitored, but most of the scan time is devoted 
to the pot that is most likely to still be moving (needing 
continuous updating). 



When producing the actual anaiog control ieveis, the 
processor can manipulate the digital values read for the 
various pots before sending the output data to the DAC. 
This allows many of the oscilloscope parameters to vary in 
an enhanced fashion. The pot data is manipulated by the 
processor in a manner that produces such features as 
variable resolution, continuous rotation, fine-resolution 
backlash, and electrically detented controls. 



As the initial pot settings are determined, a digital 
representation of each value is stored in memory. The pro- 
cessor then checks each pot against its last-known value to 
determine if a pot has moved. If a pot is detected as moving, 
the processor executes a routine that converts the move- 
ment (displacement from last-set value) into a corre- 
sponding control voltage. 



In the cases of the TRIGGER LEVEL, Horizontal POSI- 
TION, VOLTS/DIV VAR, and SEC/DIV VAR controls, the 
processor reads the magnitude and direction of pot rotation 
and produces variable-resolution control voltages. If a pot's 
direction of rotation changes, the magnitude of the change 
from the last-set position remains small, or if it was not the 



^5Vd 



+5V D 



+5V D 



<— t^o 



ROW — WV 



FROM DATA 
LATCHES U2034 < 
AND U2134 



ROW 1 — W\r 




V^3 



■{» — o \> .— 1> — o 



W — o r> "— W — o X) <•— W — o 



■!»— o 



ROW 9 — WV 




AAA — col 



J lc 



TO 



, CHANNEL 
AAAr— COL 1 I SWITCH 
? U2456 

AAA^ col aJ \y 



~l 




■t>h-o 




SWITCH MATRIX' 



'NOTE! NOT ALL MATRIX POSITIONS ARE USED 



3831-04 



Figure 3-4. Front-Panel Switch matrix. 



3-13 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



last pot moved, a fine-resolution control voltage results. 
In the fine-resolution range, a given rotational displacement 
will cause a small control voltage change. The same dis- 
placement farther away from the last-set reference will 
cause a proportionally larger control voltage change, pro- 
ducing a coarse-resolution effect. If the changing pot is 
the last one moved and the direction of rotation remains 
the same, the algorithm continues from where it left 
off during the preceding scan; producing control voltage 
changes with the same increment as it was last using. 



The delta reference controls (A REF OR DLY POS and 
A) are continuous-rotation potentiometers. They each 
consist of two pots ganged together with their wiper arms 
electrically oriented 180° apart. As the wiper of one pot is 
leaving its resistive element, the wiper of the other pot 
comes onto its element. The Microprocessor has the ability 
to watch the output voltage from each wiper and when it 
detects that the controlling wiper is nearing the end of its 
range, it will switch control over to the other wiper. The 
routine the processor uses to watch these pots sets the 
associated control voltage on the basis of relative voltage 
changes (AV) that occur. Switching between the pots to 
change control to the opposite wiper arm is based on the 
specific voltage levels being sensed. 



pattern to be displayed to the user. A LO at any Q output 
of the registers illuminates the corresponding front-panel 
LED. 



The TRIG'D LED is not driven by the LED-Status 
Register. It is driven by the Analog Control circuitry and 
illuminated whenever a triggered sweep is in progress. 

ATTENUATORS AND 
PREAMPLIFIERS 

The Attenuators and Preamplifiers circuitry (diagram 4) 
allows the operator to select the vertical deflection factors. 
The Microprocessor reads the Channel VOLTS/DIV 
switches and VOLTS/DIV VAR controls and then digitally 
switches the attenuators and sets the preamplifier gains 
accordingly. 



Channel 1 and Channel 2 Attenuators 

The Channel 1 and Channel 2 Attenuators are identical 
in operation, with corresponding circuitry in each channel 
performing the same function. Therefore, only the Chan- 
nel 1 circuitry is described. 



Sensing specific voltage levels is also used when reading 
the VOLTS/DIV VAR and SEC/DIV VAR controls. These 
pots have both a mechanical detent and a processor- 
generated electrical detent. As one of these controls is 
moved out of the mechanical detent position, the processor 
watches the analog voltage changes that occur; but the 
associated control voltage will not change until a specific 
voltage level (the electrical detent level) is reached. Once 
the electrical detent value is exceeded, the processor begins 
to vary the associated control voltage in response to further 
pot rotation. When returning to the mechanical detent 
position, the electrical detent level is reached first, and the 
variable voltage action is stopped before the mechanical 
detent is entered. 



Front-Panel Status LED 

Light-emitting diodes (LED) are used to provide visual 
feedback to the operator about the oscilloscope status and 
operating mode by backlighting front-panel nomenclature. 
A 32-bit status word, defining the diodes to be illuminated, 
is generated by the processor and then serially clocked into 
the four LED-Status Registers (U3300, U3325, U3350, 
and U3375). The registers hold the selected diodes on until 
the next update. Whenever the processor detects that a 
front-panel control has changed (and a different status 
display is required), a new status word is generated and 
applied to pin 1 of U3300. As each of the bits is clocked 
into the Q A position of U3300, the preceding bit is shifted 
to the next register position. After 32 bits have been 
clocked into (and 24 bits through) U3300, all four LED- 
Status registers are full and contain the LED illumination 



Input signals from the Channel 1 input connector are 
routed through an attenuator network by four pairs of 
magnetic-latch relay contacts. The position of the relays 
is set by Microprocessor data placed into Auxiliary Control 
Register U140. Relay buffer U110 provides the necessary 
drive current to the relays. 



Four input coupling modes (1 M£2 AC, GND, 1 M£2 DC, 
and 50 12 DC) and three attenuation factors (1X, -MO, and 
-MOO) may be selected by closing different combinations 
of relay contacts. The three attenuation factors, along 
with the variable gain factors of the Vertical Preamplifier, 
are used to obtain the crt deflection factors. The relays are 
magnetically latched and once set, remain in position until 
new attenuator-relay-setting data and strobes are generated. 
(See the "Auxiliary Control Register" description for a 
discussion of the relay-latching procedure.) 

The 50 £2 termination resistor has a thermal sensor 
associated with it that produces a dc voltage (CH 1 OVL) 
proportional to the input power. Should the input power 
exceed the normal safe-operating level for the 50 12 DC 
input, the termination resistor temperature will exceed the 
normal operating limit and will change the output voltage 
of the thermal sensor. The amplitude of this dc level is 
periodically checked via comparator U2214 and DAC 
U2234 (on diagram 2) and allows the Microprocessor to 
detect when an overload condition is present. When an 
overload occurs, the processor switches the input coupling 
to the 1 M£2 position to prevent damage to the attenuator 
and displays 50 O OVERLOAD on the crt. 



3-14 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Compensating capacitor C105 is adjusted at the time 
of calibration to normalize input capacitance of the pre- 
amplifier to the attenuator. 



A probe-coding ring around the BNC input connector 
passes probe-coding information (a resistance value to 
ground) to the Analog Control circuitry for detection of 
probe attenuation factors. The readout scale factors are set 
to reflect the detected attenuation factor of the attached 
probe. 



Auxiliary Control Register 

The Auxiliary Control Register allows the Micro- 
processor to control various mode and range dependent 
functions of the 2465. Included in these functions are: 
attenuation factors, Channel 3 and Channel 4 gains, vertical- 
bandwidth limiting, and the X-Y display mode. 



When the Microprocessor sets the input coupling mode 
and attenuation factors for Channel 1 and Channel 2, a 
series of eight, 16-bit control words are serially clocked 
into shift registers U140 and U150 (eight bits in each 
register). Each control word is used to set the position of 
one of the eight attenuator and coupling relays (four relays 
are in each attenuator assembly). Each control word will 
have only the bit corresponding to the specific relay con- 
tact to be closed set HI. Relay buffers U110 and U130A 
(for Channel 1) and U120 and U130B (for Channel 2) are 
Darlington configurations that invert the polarities of all 
bits. This results in a LO being applied to only the coil lead 
associated with the contact to be closed; all other coil leads 
are held HI. 



To set a relay once the control word is loaded, the 
Microprocessor generates a ATTN STRB (attenuator 
strobe) to U130G pin 7 via R129 and C130. The strobe 
pulses the output of U130G LO for a short time. This 
output pulse attempts to turn on both Q130 and Q131 
(relay drivers) via their identical base-bias networks. Due to 
the lower level from the turned on Darlington relay buffer 
(coupled through the associated coil diode and either 
CR130 or CR131 to one of the bias networks), one tran- 
sistor will turn on harder as the ATTN STRB pulse begins 
to forward bias the transistors. The more positive collector 
voltage of the transistor turning on harder is fed through 

+t-i^ u;^.^ rl',^rin /«-.«:„ „:.tU„„ /~»n 1 on /->r>ioiv .«._ i.... + i 

liic uiaa uiuuc \ayain ciliici oniou ui onioi; LU lurulfcJf 

turn off the opposite transistor. This action results in one 
transistor being fully on and the other one being fully off. 
The saturated transistor sources current through the two 
stacked relay coils to the LO output of either U140 or 
kj i uv \current sin</ to ciose tne selected contacts. Once 
set, the magnetic-latch feature will hold the relay set to this 
position until opposing data is clocked into the Auxiliary 
Control Register and strobed into the relay. All coil leads 
for the remaining relays are set HI, and only the selected 
relay will be set. 



To set the seven remaining Attenuator and coupling 
relays, the sequence just described is repeated seven more 
times. Whenever the Microprocessor determines that the 
attenuation factor or input coupling has changed, the entire 
relay-setting procedure is repeated for all eight relays. 



After the coupling and attenuator relays have been 
latched into position, the Auxiliary Control Register is 
free to be used for further circuit-controlling tasks. Eight 
more bits of control data are then clocked into U140 either 
to enable or disable the following functions: vertical 
bandwidth limiting (BWL).. triggered X-Y mode (TXY), the 
A and B Sweep Delay Comparators (BDCA and BDCB), and 
slow-speed intensity limit (SIL); or to alter the Channel 3 
and Channel 4 gain factors (GA3 and GA4). Two other 
bits are clocked into register U150: one to produce the 
CTC signal and the other to control the scale illumination 
circuit during SGL SEQ display mode. The CTC control 
bit is used to enable a sweep-start linearity circuit in the A 
Sweep circuitry (diagram 5) on the 2 ns and 20 ns per 
division sweeps. 



Analog Control Multiplexer 

When enabled by the Address Decode circuitry, Analog 
Control Multiplexer U170 directs the analog levels applied to 
pin 3 from DAC U2234 (diagram 2) to one of six sample- 
and-hold circuits. In the Preamplifier circuitry, the sample- 
and-hold circuits maintain the VAR gain and DC Bal 
control-voltage levels applied to both the Channel 1 and 
Channel 2 Preamplifiers U100 and U200 between updates. 
Two of the Multiplexer outputs direct analog levels to the 
Holdoff and Channel 2 Delay Offset sample-and-hold cir- 
cuits (diagram 5). Routing is determined by the three-bit ad- 
dress from register U2034 (diagram 2) applied to Multiplexer 
U170on pins 9, 10, and 11. 



Channel 1 Preamplifier 

Channel 1 Preamplifier U100 converts the single-ended 
input signal from the Channel 1 Attenuator to a differential 
output signal used to drive the Vertical Channel Switch. 
The device produces either amplification or attenuation in 
predefined increments, depending on the control data 
written to it from the Microprocessor. The Preamp also has 
provisions >or vAR gain, vertical positioning, and a trigger 
signal pickoff. 



The Channel 1 vertical input signal is applied to pin A of 

r>l-.^r.^^i 1 D-~„™.-, i unn r>„„4.„_i _i_j._ x ^.l. _ 

^iiainiGi i i icamp yj iuvj. isunuui udld I ! Ulll Hie prUUKSSOr 

is clocked into the internal control register of the device via 
pin 22 (CD) by the clock signal applied to pin 23 (CC). The 
data sets the device to have an input-to-output gain ratio 
of either 2.5 or 1 or to have an attenuation factor of 2, 4, 
or 10, depending on the VOLTS/DIV control setting. 



REV MAY 1984 



3-15 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Two analog control voltages set by the DAC and the 
Channel 1 vertical position dc level modify the differential 
output signal at pins 9 and 10. The front-panel Channel 1 
POSITION control supplies a dc level to U100 pin 17 that 
vertically positions the Channel 1 display on the crt. A DC 
Bal signal is applied to pin 2 of U100 from the DAC via the 
sample-and-hold circuit composed of U160A and C177. 
This DC Bal signal is a dc offset-null level that is determined 
during the automatic DC Bal procedure. The offset value 
is stored as a calibration constant in the EAROM and is 
recalled at regular intervals to set the DC Bal level, holding 
the Preamp in a dc balanced condition. 



The Channel 1 VOLTS/DIV VAR control is monitored 
by the Microprocessor during the front-panel scanning 
routine. When the processor has determined where the 
VOLTS/DIV VAR control is positioned, it causes DAC 
U2234 (diagram 2) to produce a corresponding control 
level and routes it to the VAR gain sample-and-hold circuit 
composed of U160D, C179, and associated components. 
The control voltage at the output of U160D (pin 14) sets 
the variable gain of the Preamp. 



A pickoff amplifier internal to U100 conditions the 
trigger signal and provides the proper signal level at pin 15 
to drive the A/B Trigger Generator (U500, diagram 5). 
The pickoff point for the trigger signal is prior to the 
addition of the vertical position offset, so the position of 
the signal on the crt has no effect on the trigger operation. 
However, the pickoff point is after the DC Bal and Variable 
gain signals have been added to the signal so both of these 
functions will affect trigger operation. 



Common-mode signals are rejected from the trigger 
signal by the circuitry composed of operational amplifier 
U450A and associated components. The inverting input of 
U450A (pin 6) is connected to the common-mode point 
between APO+ (pin 12) and TPO- (pin 15) of U100. Any 
common-mode signals present are inverted and applied to 
a common-mode point between R451 and R453 to cancel 
the signals from the differential output. A filter network 
composed of LR180 and the built-in circuit board capacitor 
(5.6 pF) reduces trigger noise susceptibility. Trigger signals 
for options are obtained by removing P100A and con- 
necting the appropriate connector. 



Channel 2 Preamplifier 

Operation of Channel 2 Preamplifier U200 is nearly 
identical to that of the Channel 1 Preamplifier just 
described. The exceptions are that the output polarity of 
the Channel 2 signal may be either normal or inverted and 
that the signal obtained from the BPO+ output (pin 11) is 
conditioned differently for a different purpose than in the 
Channel 1 Preamplifier circuitry. 



Inverting the Channel 2 signal for the CH 2 INVERT 
feature is accomplished by biasing on different amplifiers. 
The control data clocked into the internal control register 
from pin 22 sets up the necessary switching. 



The Channel 2 BPO+ signal at U200 pin 1 1 provides an 
accurate representation of the Channel 2 signal at the 
rear-panel CH 2 OUT connector. The BPO+ output signal 
is reduced by divider R460 and R461 and is applied to the 
emitter of Q460B. Transistor Q460B, configured as a diode, 
provides thermal compensation for the bias voltage of 
Q460A and reduces dc level shifts with varying temperature. 
Emitter-follower Q460A provides the drive and impedance 
matching to the CH 2 OUT connector and removes the 
diode drop added by Q460B. Clamp diodes CR460 and 
CR461 protect Q460B should a drive signal be accidentally 
applied to the CH 2 OUT connector. 



Channel 3 and Channel 4 Preamplifier 

The functions provided by the Channel 3 and Channel 
Preamplifier are similar to those provided by the Channel 1 
and Channel 2 Preamplifiers. The single-ended CH 3 and 
CH 4 input signals are converted to differential signals, and 
vertical gain and vertical positioning information is added 
to the output signals. Trigger pickoff signals are generated 
for both channels and are routed to the Trigger hybrid. 

Channel 3 and Channel 4 gains may be either 0.1 volt 
per division or 0.5 volt per division. The logic levels of 
control bits applied to U300 pin 30 (GA3) and pin 31 
(GA4) from Auxiliary Control Register U140 sets the gain 
of the Channel 3 and Channel 4 Preamplifiers respectively. 
Vertical positioning of the Channel 3 and Channel 4 signals 
on the crt is controlled by the variable voltage levels applied 
to pin 29 (POS3) and pin 30 (POS4) from the front-panel 
CH 3 and CH 4 POSITION potentiometers. 



The Channel 1 input signal used to provide the hori- 
zontal deflection for the X-Y displays is obtained from 
U100 pin 11. The components between pin 11 and the 
Horizontal Output Amplifier provide phase compensation 
of the signal. During instrument calibration, the delay 
produced by C1 15, C1 16, L115, R115, and variable cap- 
acitor C1 18 is matched to the 78-ns delay of the vertical 
delay line (DL100, diagram 6). 



Dc offsets in the output signal due to any tracking 
differences between the +5-V and the — 5-V supply to 
U300 are reduced by the tracking regulator circuit com- 
posed of U165A, Q190, and associated components. 
Operational amplifier U165A and Q190 is configured so 
that the output of voltage at the emitter of Q190 follows 
the —5-V supply applied to R198. This tracking arrange- 
ment ensures that the supply voltages are of equal magni- 
tudes to minimize dc offsets in the output signals. 



3-16 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Scale Illumination 

The Scale Illumination circuit consists of U130C, 
U130D, U130E, U130F, and associated components. The 
circuit enables the operator to adjust the illumination level 
of the graticule marks on the crt face plate using the 
SCALE ILLUM control. 



Components U130C through U130F, depicted on 
diagram 4 as inverters, are actually Darlington transistor 
pairs. Figure 3-5 is a simplified illustration of the Scale 
Illumination circuitry, redrawn to show U130C through 
F as Darlington transistor pairs for the purpose of the 
following description. 



Darlington transistors U130D and U130E control the 
current flow to scale-illumination lamps DS100, DS101, 
and DS102. Base drive current for U130D and U130E via 
R133 is set by the front-panel SCALE ILLUM pot R134. 
Voltage at the more negative end of the pot is set by the 
self-biasing configuration of U130F and R 135. The voltage 
level established by these two components is two diode 
drops above ground («* 1.2 V) so that, at full counter- 
clockwise rotation, the wiper voltage of the SCALE I LLUM 
pot will just match the turn-off point of U130D and 
U130E. The voltage at the other end of the pot is set by the 



collectors of U130D and U130E. As the SCALE ILLUM 
pot is advanced, the base drive to U130D and U130E 
increases, and the voltage on their collectors moves closer 
to ground potential. This increases the current through the 
scale-illumination lamps to make them brighter and pro- 
duces some negative feedback to the base circuit through 
the SCALE ILLUM pot. Negative feedback stabilizes the 
base drive to U130D and U130E to hold the illumination 
level constant at the selected setting of the SCALE ILLUM 
control. 



During SGL SEQ display mode, the graticule is illumi- 
nated only once during the sequence for photographic 
purposes. In this mode, a HI is initially written to Auxiliary 
Control Register U150 (bit Q H ). This turns on U130Cand 
shunts the base drive current of U130D and U130E to 
ground. At the point in the sequence when the graticule 
should be illuminated, the processor writes a LO to bit Q H , 
and U130C is turned off. This enables U130D and U130E 
to turn on the lamps to the illumination level set by the 
SCALE ILLUM pot. 



DISPLAY SEQUENCER, 
TRIGGERS, AND SWEEPS 



R135 
IK 



4© 



U130F 



+ 15V 



R134 
5K 

♦ — wv 



# — O 



SCALE 
ILLUM 



rh 



< R133 



SCALE 




5) DS100 
3) DS101 
5) DS102 



ILLUM /^Za 

DISABLE— «P) 

FROM \. Ky 

U150 U130C 

rh 




3831-13 



Figure 3-5. Scale Illumination circuit. 



The Display Sequencer circuitry (diagram 5) controls 
and sequences the "analog-type" oscilloscope functions 
in real time, dependent on control data it receives from 
the Microprocessor. The A/B Trigger circuitry, under 
control of the Display Sequencer, detects when triggering 
requirements are met and initiates the appropriate sweep. 
The A Sweep and B Sweep circuits generate sweep ramps 
under control of the Display Sequencer when triggered by 
the A/B Trigger circuitry. 



Display Sequencer 

The Display Sequencer stage consists primarily of 
integrated circuit U650. This IC accepts analog and digital 
control signals from various parts of the instrument and, 
depending on the control data string clocked into its 
internal control register from the Microprocessor, will 
change control signals that it sends to other, signal-handling 
circuits. 



Fifty-five bits of serial data from the processor defining 
the instrument's operating sequence are applied to the 
Display Sequencer data input, pin 25. The data string is 
clocked into U650 to the internal control register by the 
processor-generated control clock applied to pin 24. The 
data string is organized in several fields, with each field 
defining the operating mode of one specific instrument 
function. 



3-17 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Display Sequencer U650 controls the various functions 
defined by the data fields by setting the levels of the 
associated control lines. The functions and controlling 
signal lines for each function are as follows: 

Vertical Display Selection 

CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, CH 4 , ADD , and Readout Y signals 
are selected by the VS1, VS2, VS3, and VS4 control 
signals. See the Vertical Channel Switch description for 
further information. 

Horizontal Display Selection 

A Sweep, B Sweep, CH 1 (for X-Y displays) and Read- 
out X are selected by the HSA and HSB control signals 
See the Horizontal Output Amplifier description for 
further information. 



Trigger Source Selection 

CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, CH 4, ADD, Line, and a sample of 
the vertical output signal (for calibration purposes only) 
are selectable as the Trigger SOURCE by the SROA, 
SR1A, SR2A, SROB, SR1B, and SR2B control lines 
(pins 28, 27, 29, 32, 31, and 30 respectively). See the 
A/B Trigger description for further information. 



Trigger Holdoff 

Sweep recovery time and the circuit initialization time 
required when front-panel controls are changed are 
controlled by the THO (trigger holdoff) signal. 



Readout Control 

The vertical selection, horizontal selection, and intensity 
controls are all set to their readout modes either at the 
end of an A Sweep (SGA goes HI) or in response to a 
readout request (ROR) from the Readout circuitry 
(diagram 7). While in the readout mode, the BLANK 
control signal is driven by the readout blank (ROB) 
input signal on pin 5 (also from the Readout circuitry). 
The readout active line (ROA, pin 6), when set LO, 
tells the Readout circuitry that readout dots may be 
displayed if necessary. The ROA signal is always set 
LO at the start of the trigger holdoff time following 
sweeps, and it is held there until the holdoff time is 
almost over. This allows the majority of holdoff time 
to be used for displaying readout dots. The Display 
Sequencer will switch the ROA signal back to HI before 
the end of holdoff so that the readout display does not 
interfere with display of the vertical signal at the 
triggering event. 



Trace Separation 

Vertical separation between the A Sweep trace and the 
B Sweep traces (for alternate horizontal sweep displays), 
and between the reference B Sweep trace and the delta 
B Sweep trace (when delta time is selected in B Sweep 
only mode), is enabled by the TS1 + TS2 output. 



X10 Horizontal Magnification 

Horizontal X10 magnification is controlled by the MAG 
output. 



Delta Time (At) Delay Selection 

DLY REF or DLY REF 1 is selected by the DS (delay 
select) signal. 



Calibrator Timing 

The 5-Hz to 5-MHz drive signal to the Calibrator cir- 
cuitry is provided by the CT output. 



Trigger and Sweep Activity (Status) 

The activity of the Trigger and Sweep circuits, as 
indicated by the SGA, SGB, TSA, and TSB lines, is 
reported to the Microprocessor via the TSO (trigger 
status output) line when clocked by the TSS (trigger 
status strobe) signal. 



Intensity Control 

The readout intensity, display intensity, and display 
intensity compensation are controlled by the BRIGHT 
output level. 



In the course of developing waveform displays, the 
Display Sequencer selects one or more vertical channel, 
sets the trigger source, and selects the horizontal display 
mode. In most cases, the trigger selection does not change 
after it has been set unless a front-panel trigger control is 
changed. An exception is that in VERT TRIGGER MODE, 
the trigger source tracks the sequencing 
of the vertical channels (unless AUTO LVL MODE, or 
CHOP VERTICAL MODE is also selected). Trigger source 
selection lines are changed only during trigger holdoff time 
between sweeps. 



Display Blanking 

Display blanking for CHOP VERTICAL MODE, Read- 
out transitions, and front-panel control changes is 
controlled by the BLANK output. 



HOLDOFF RAMP. The holdoff ramp circuit, used to 
delay the start of a sweep until all circuits have recovered 
from the previous sweep, is made up of U165C, Q154, 
Q155, and associated components. Operational Amplifier 
U165C and capacitor C180 form a sample-and-hold buffer 



3-18 



Theory of Operation-2465 Service 



used to set the charging current for holdoff-ramp inte- 
grating capacitor C660. A control voltage from digital-to- 
analog converter (DAC) U2234 (diagram 2) via multiplexer 
U170 (diagram 4) is stored on C180. The stored voltage 
level sets the base voltage for both Q154 and Q155 via 
amplifier U165C. Transistors Q154 and Q155 form a 
current-mirror with nearly equal collector currents. 
Transistor Q154 is a current-to-voltage converter that 
provides negative feedback to U165C, setting loop gain. 
Transistor Q155 acts as a constantcurrent source that 
charges integrating capacitor C660, producing a linear 
holdoff ramp. 



A comparator circuit in U650 detects when the ramp 
crosses a predefined threshold voltage (approximately 
+3 V). When the threshold is reached, pin 10 of U650 
(HRR) goes LO and the integrating capacitor is discharged. 
At that same time, an internal counter that keeps track 
of the holdoff ramp cycles is incremented. The ramps 
continue to be generated and reset until the holdoff ramp 
counter has counted the number of ramp cycles defined 
by the sweep-rate-dependent holdoff data field stored in 
the Display Sequencer control register. At all sweep speeds 
except 5 ns per division, the count is at least two holdoff 
ramp cycles. The front-panel variable HOLDOFF control 
affects holdoff time by varying the HOLDOFF control 
voltage to U165C (from the DAC), changing the charging 
rate of integrating capacitor C660. 



When holdoff time requirements are met (determined 
by the number of ramps counted), the Display Sequencer 
sets the THO (trigger holdoff) signal LO. This enables both 
the A Sweep hybrid (U700) and the A Trigger circuitry 
in U500. The Trigger circuit begins monitoring the selected 
trigger source line and, when a triggering event is detected 
that meets the triggering requirements defined by the 
stored control data, initiates the A Sweep and sets the TSA 
(trigger status, A Sweep) line to Display Sequencer U650 
LO (indicating that the A Sweep has been triggered). 



As the A Sweep circuit (U700) responds to the trigger, 
it sets the SGA (sweep gate A) line LO (via U980A) 
indicating that an A Sweep is in progress. After the sweep 
has run to completion, U700 sets the SGA line HI signaling 
the end of sweep. The Display Sequencer then sets the THO 



Hi, 



(CSCLLIIiy uie /-\/ 



Sweep hybrid U700 in preparation for the next sweep. 



DELAY GATE OPERATION. Analog Switches U850B 
and U850C select the delay references for each sweep. 
Depending on the display mode and point in the display 
sequence, the DS control signal (U650 pin 40) routes one 
of the two analog delay references through U850B and 
U850C to the two sweep hybrids. The selected reference 
level is compared against the changing sweep ramp voltages 



to generate the delay gates that control each sweep's 
functions. 



After an A Sweep has been initiated by a trigger, a delay 
gate circuit within U700 compares the A Sweep ramp 
voltage to the selected delay reference. When the sweep 
ramp reaches the delay reference level, the DG (delay gate) 
output goes LO, enabling the B trigger portion of U500 and 
B Sweep hybrid U900. Then, when B triggering occurs (for 
TRIG AFT DLY mode), the A/B Trigger hybrid sets the 
TGB (trigger gate B) signal LO, initiating the B Sweep. In 
RUN AFT DLY mode, however, the TGB signal to U900 is 
held LO, and the B Sweep is initiated at the end of the A 
Sweep delay time when the A Sweep delay gate goes LO. 



STATUS MONITORING. As the Display Sequencer 
controls the display system in real time, it continually 
monitors the trigger and sweep operations and updates the 
internal trigger status register accordingly. The Micro- 
processor checks the contents of this register every 3.3 ms 
to determine the current status of the trigger and sweep 
circuitry. The Microprocessor reads the trigger status 
register by generating a series of trigger status strobe (TSS) 
pulses (U650 pin 19) to serially clock the contents of the 
register out to the TSO (trigger status output) line and onto 
the Data Bus (via Status Buffer U2108 on diagram 2). The 
system status information obtained by this check is used 
for AUTO LVL triggering, AUTO free-run triggering, 
detecting the completion of all the sweeps in a SGL SEQ 
display, and during instrument calibration. 



INTENSITY CONTROL, The Display Sequencer con- 
trols the intensity for both sweep and readout displays. 
The analog levels at pins 22 and 23 (set by the front-panel 
INTENSITY and READOUT INTENSITY controls) deter- 
mine the basic intensity level of the displays. Two inter- 
nally generated DAC currents (developed by multiplying 
the IREF current at pin 20 by two processor-generated 
numbers stored internally) are added to the basic intensity 
level currents to produce the display intensity seen on the 
crt (see Table 3-1). The two DAC currents added to the 
INTENSITY current are dependent on sweep speed, num- 
ber of channels being displayed, and whether or not the 
X10 MAG feature is in use. These added currents increase 
crt beam current and hold the display intensity some- 



consiaPiL 



^>/-\r-»r4i + i/-\r»e 



resulting current is applied to Z-Axis Amplifier U950 
(diagram 6) from the BRIGHT output of the Display 
Sequencer (pin 21). 



To produce the intensified zone on the A Sweep trace 
for A intensified by B Sweep displays, an additional current 
is added to the crt drive signal by the Z-Axis Amplifier 
during the concurrence of the SGAZ and SGBZ (sweep gate 
A and B z-axis) signals. 



3-19 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Table 3-1 
Intensity Control 



Type 
of 


Horizontal 
Selects 


Resulting Current 
at BRIGHT 


Display 


HSA 


HSB 


Output 


X/Y 


LO 


LO 


Dl (display intensity) only 


A Sweep 


LO 


HI 


Dl + A Swp DAC current 


B Sweep 


HI 


LO 


Dl + B Swp DAC current 


Readout 


HI 


HI 


ROI (readout intensity) only 



The readout intensity (ROI) level, controlled from the 
front-panel READOUT INTENSITY pot, is conditioned 
by U350A and associated components. Operational 
Amplifier U350A, configured as a full-wave rectifier, 
increases readout intensity when the pot is rotated either 
direction from center. Resistor R360 sets the minimum 
readout intensity current that occurs at the midpoint of the 
READOUT INTENSITY pot rotation. 



Readout On-Off Comparator U350B detects to which 
side of center the READOUT INTENSITY control is set. 
The Microprocessor reads the output of omparator U350B 
via Status Buffer U2108 (diagram 2) at regular intervals. 
Depending on the status received, the processor sets up the 
Readout circuitry (diagram 7) to display either all of the 
readout information or just the "delta type" readouts. 



Blanking of the crt display during CHOP VERTICAL 
MODE displays or when switching between dot positions 
in the readout displays is controlled by the Display 
Sequencer's BLANK output (pin 3). When the signal is LO, 
the crt z-axis is turned on to the selected intensity level; 
when HI, the crt display is blanked. 



READOUT CONTROL. Readout displays are controlled 
by the readout request (ROR) signal, the readout active 
(ROA) signal, and the readout blank (ROB) signal. During 
the first part of the holdoff time, up until one or two hold- 
off ramps before holdoff time ends (dependent on the 
sweep rate), the Display Sequencer sets the ROA signal 
line LO. While the ROA line is LO, the Readout circuitry 
may display readout character dots if necessary. During 
readout displays, the horizontal and vertical select signals 
(HSA, HSB, VST, VS2, VS3, and VS4) are all set HI. This 
deselects the waveform-related sweep and deflection signals 
and gives display control to the Readout circuitry. While 
readout information or cursors are being displayed, the 



BLANK output signal (pin 3) is controlled by the readout 
blank (ROB) signal from the Readout circuitry, and the 
readout intensity (ROI) signal (pin 23) controls the 
BRIGHT output level. 



During holdoff, the Display Sequencer always sets 
the readout active (ROA) line LO. As previously described, 
setting the ROA signal LO allows the Readout circuitry 
to display readout dots. In some settings of the SEC/DIV 
switch, with adequate trigger rates, holdoff time is provided 
for the Readout circuitry to display all the readout infor- 
mation without causing noticeable display flicker. 



In those cases where the holdoff time is insufficient 
to prevent flicker, a portion of the Readout circuitry will 
request display control by setting the readout request 
(ROR) signal LO. The Display Sequencer recognizes all 
readout requests immediately and switches the horizontal 
and vertical select lines to the readout display mode. The 
Readout circuitry displays one readout dot and then resets 
the readout request HI to switch back to the display of 
waveforms. Readout requests occur as required during 
sweep times to keep the readout display caught up. (See 
"Readout" description for further information). 



TRACE SEPARATION. The TRACE SEP feature is 
used to position the alternate B Delayed Sweep trace down- 
ward from the A Sweep when Alternate Horizontal Display 
Mode (TURN-ALT) is active. It is also used when either 
the At or 1/At measurement function is used with B Sweep 
only displays. In the latter case, the TRACE SEP control 
vertically positions the trace(s) associated with the A 
control. 



When the Display Sequencer determines that trace 
separation should be active, the LO TSIN level at pin 7 is 
routed to pins 9 and 8, the TS1 and TS2 outputs (con- 
nected together). This LO output turns off transistor 
Q600 (diagram 6), thereby enabling the trace separation 
voltage from the front-panel TRACE SEP pot to be applied 
to pin 42 of Vertical Output Amplifier U600. To disable 
the trace separation function, the Display Sequencer sets 
the TS1 + TS2 control line HI, turning on Q600 and 
shunting the trace separation signal to ground. 



X10 MAG SELECT. The MAG (sweep magnifier) output 
(pin 39) drives the magnifier control input (pin 14) of 
Horizontal Output hybrid U800 and the select input 
(pin 9) of analog switch U860C (diagram 6). Analog switch 
U860C routes a magnifier gain-control voltage to the 



Horizontal Amplifier to set the 
magnified displays. 



lorizontal 



3-20 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



CH 2 DELAY OFFSET. The VS2 (vertical select, chan- 
nel 2) output applied to analog switch U860B at pin 10 
routes a calibrated offset voltage from sample-and-hold 
buffer U165D to both sweep hybrids when the Channel 2 
vertical signal is being displayed. The offset voltage is used 
to eliminate the apparent propagation delay between the 
Channel 2 and the Channel 1 (or CH 2 and either one of the 
other channels). A step in the calibration procedure allows 
use of the front-panel Channel 2 Delay Offset feature to be 
either enabled or disabled. When enabled, the Channel 2 
offset may be adjusted up to ±500 ps (with respect to 
Channel 1 ) using the A control. 



CALIBRATOR TIMING. The Calibrator timing signal 
(CT) from the Display Sequencer is generated by an 
internal counter. The counter divides the 5-MHz clock 
input at pin TC (timing clock) by a value that is a function 
of sweep speed. The resulting square-wave output signal 
drives the Calibrator circuit. For ease of sweep rate 
verification, the Calibrator signal provides a display of five 
complete cycles on the crt at sweep speeds from 100 ms 
per division to 0.1 ids per division. Below 100 ms per 
division, the Calibrator output frequency remains at 5 Hz; 
and above 0.1 /xs per division, the Calibrator frequency 
remains at 5 MHz. 



When chopping between vertical channels, the Display 
Sequencer adds a 200-ns skew at the end of some sweeps 
to desynchronize the chop frequency from the sweep speed 
(to prevent the sweep from locking onto the chop fre- 
quency). Due to this, the Calibrator signal has an irregular 
pulse repetition characteristic between sweeps. This will not 
be apparent when observing the Calibrator signal on the crt 
of the 2465 since the skew is synchronized to the sweep, 
but may be observed when the Calibrator output signal is 
used with other instrumentation. The skew can be elimi- 
nated by setting the 2465 to SGL SEQ Mode (to shut off 
the sweeps). 



A/B Trigger 

The A/B Trigger hybrid (U500) and associated circuitry 
select the triggering signal source for each horizontal sweep 
as directed by the Display Sequencer. When the proper 
triggering criteria to initiate a sweep are detected, a trigger- 
ing gate signal is produced to start the selected sweep. 



Control data from the processor defining trigger mode, 
coupling, and slope parameters for each trigger is clocked 
into two storage registers internal to U500 for the A TRIG 
CLK signal on pin 23 (CCA) and the B TRIG CLK signal 
on pin 47 (CCB). The Display Sequencer selects the A 
trigger source with the SR0A, SR1A, and SR2A signa l 
lines; the B trigger source is selected using the SR0B, SR1B, 
and SR2B signal lines. Table 3-2 illustrates trigger source 
selection. 



Table 3-2 
Trigger Source Selection 



Select Inputs 










Trigger Source 


SR2A(B) 


SR1A(B) 


SR0A(B) 




H 


H 


L 


CH 1 


H 


L 


H 


CH2 


H 


L 


L 


ADD 


L 


H 


L 


CH3 


L 


L 


H 


CH4 


H 


H 


H 


LINE (orBWLB 3 ) 



During calibration routines from the Diagnostic Monitor. 



To initiate the A Sweep, the trigger hybrid compares 
the selected signal to the analog trigger level input at 
pin 13, TLA (trigger level A). B trigger signals are compared 
to the TLG (trigger level B) signal at pin 37 when triggered 
B Sweeps are required. When the proper trigger signal is 
detected, U500 outputs a trigger gate (TGA or TGB) to 
the appropriate sweep circuit to initiate that sweep. 



When an A Sweep is initiated, the trigger-status line 
(TSA) (trigger status A, U500 pin 20) goes LO to signal 
the Display sequencer that a trigger has occurred. Until 
the sweep is completed, the TGA signal on pin 18 (or TGB 
signal on pin 42 for B Sweeps) remains LO. After the A 
Sweep is completed, the A Sweep Gate (SGA) from A 
Sweep hybrid U700 (via U980A) will go HI, causing the 
Display Sequencer to set its THO (trigger holdoff) line 
(pin 13) HI. This resets the sweep hybrid and the trigger 
hybrid in preparation for the next trigger event. 



The B Trigger Holdoff input (THOB, U500 pin 39) is 
held HI (keeping the B Trigger reset) until the A Sweep 
Delay Gate (DG, U700 pin 41) goes LO (see the following 
A Sweep description). When DG goes LO, the B Trigger 
portion of U500 is enabled. The B Sweep Trigger functions 
in a manner similar to that of the A Sweep Trigger just 
described. 



A Sweep 

When properly triggered, the A Sweep circuit generates 
linear sweep ramps of selectable slopes. When amplified, 
these ramp signals horizontally sweep the crt beam across 
the face of the crt. The A Sweep circuitry consists of U700, 



3-21 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Q709, Q741, U860A, U910B, U980A, and associated 
components. 



The A Sweep ramp signal is derived by charging one 
of several selectable capacitors from a programmable 
constant-current source. Capacitor selection depends on 
the sweep-rate-dependent control data (CD) on pin 29 that 
is clocked into A Sweep hybrid U700 by the A SWP CLK 
on pin 28 (CC). This sweep-rate data causes some internal 
logic to select either hybrid-mounted capacitors CTO or 
CT1 or capacitor C708 at the CT2 (timing capacitor two) 
pin. An additional capacitor, C709, may be selected (via 
Q709) if the control data asserts the TCS (timing capacitor 
select) signal on pin 9. TCS will be HI for A Sweep speeds 
slower than 1 ms per division. Capacitor C707 and associ- 
ated circuitry form a linearity compensation circuit. 



current by a multiple "M" that is set by a control data 
field stored in the internal control register of U700. The 
derived output current (M x ITREF) is connected to 
another programmable current-mirror circuit, U910B, 
external to the hybrid. The output of U910B provides 
the actual charging current and is a control-data-seiected 
multiple of the M x ITREF current. 



At the time of calibration, the processor will vary the 
ITREF input current until the slope of the output ramp 
for specific current-mirror/timing capacitor combinations 
is precisely set. The values of A TIM REF at these settings 
allow the processor to precisely calculate the characteristics 
of the current-mirror circuits at their various multiplication 
factors and the charging characteristics of the timing 
capacitors. These values are stored as calibration constants 
in nonvolatile memory (EAROM U2008, diagram 2). 



The constant current to charge the selected capacitor 
is derived from the DAC-controlled voltage, A TIM REF 
(A timing reference), generated on the Control Board. The 
ITREF input (U700 pin 24) is held at zero volts by an 
internal programmable current-mirror circuit at that input 
(see Figure 3-6). The A TIM REF voltage is applied to the 
current mirror via series resistors R723 and R724 to 
establish the input reference current (ITREF). The output 
of this current mirror is related to the input reference 



M x ITREF 



ITREF 




24K 

O — W\H 

240K 
O Wv ' 



PROGRAMMABLE 
CURRENT 
MIRROR f-p 



CHARGING 

CURRENT TO 

CAPACITOR 

t SELECTION 

NETWORK 



3831-12 



Figure 3-6. Sweep generator. 



Once the calibration constants are set, any setting of the 
SEC/DiV switch causes the Microprocessor to recall the 
associated calibration constants from the EAROM. The 
processor then calculates the proper value of A TIM REF 
based on the selected timing capacitor and the current- 
mirror multiplication factors. 



If the SEC/DIV VAR control is out of the calibrated 
detent position, the processor will decrease the A TIM REF 
voltage from the maximum, in-detent value by an amount 
proportional to the position setting of the VAR control. 
At the maximum, fully counterclockwise setting of the 
VAR control, the ITREF current is one-third that of the 
normal, in-detent current. 



For A Sweep hybrid U700 to initiate a sweep at the 
selected rate, the AUXTRIG (auxiliary trigger) input 
(pin 3), the THO (trigger holdoff) line from the Display 
Sequencer (on pin 1), and the TRIG (trigger) line from the 
trigger hybrid (on pin 2) must all be LO. With these three 
inputs LO, the A SWEEP ramp begins, and the sweep gate 
(SG) output (pin 45) goes LO. The buffered sweep gate 
signal (SGA) at the output of U980A returns to the Display 
Sequencer through R981 to indicate that the A Sweep is 
active. The sweep gate signal is used by various other 
circuits for their timing activities and is held LO until the A 
SWEEP ramp ends. The buffered (negative) sweep gate is 
inverted and routed to the rear-panel A GATE output 
connector via U975B. 



Analog switch U860A and associated components form 
a switchable charging network that permits delaying the 
timing of end-of-A-Sweep gate signal (SGAZ) for B Sweep 
displays. For normal A Sweep operation with the HSA 
signal LO, the SGAZ signal will end quickly, since the 
capacitance associated with Z-Axis hybrid U950 input 



3-22 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



(diagram 6) wiil be charged positively through both R753 
and R754. For B Sweep operation (HSA is HI), the end of 
the SGAZ gate signal will be delayed slightly (with respect 
to the normal sweep gate) since charging of the Z-Axis 
input capacitance will be at a slower rate through R754 
only. This allows more of the B Sweep to be displayed than 
would otherwise be possible. 



(delta time) calibration. Output frequency is controlled by 
the Display Sequencer and is set to display five cycles 
across the ten crt graticule divisions at sweep speed settings 
from 100 ns per division to 100 ms per division. This 
feature allows quick and easy verification of the sweep 
rates. The Calibrator circuitry is essentially a voltage 
regulator that is alternately switched on and off, producing 
the square-wave output signal. 



The A Sweep Delay Gate (DG) signal acts as the trigger 
holdoff (THO) signal for the B Sweep and the B Trigger 
circuitry. It is generated by comparing the A SWEEP ramp 
voltage to the selected delay reference (DR) level from 
analog switch U850C. As the ramp voltage crosses the delay 
reference level, the delay gate (DG) output signal goes LO, 
removing the HI THO level to the B Sweep. This enables 
the B Sweep to run immediately in RUN AFT DLY B 
Trigger Mode or, when in TRIG AFT DLY B Trigger Mode, 
enables the B Sweep to run when a triggering event occurs. 



The BDCA (A Sweep bypass-delay comparator) input 
(pin 39) is a data bit from Auxiliary Control Register U140 
(diagram 4) that, when HI, sets the A Sweep DG output 
LO at the beginning of the A Sweep. This enables the B 
Sweep to run immediately at the start of the A Sweep and 
is used for calibration purposes and for options. 



When the timing signal (CAL) from the Display 
Sequencer to the base of U550D is LO, U550C (configured 
as a diode) is forward biased, shunting bias current away 
from Q550, keeping it turned off. When transistor Q550 is 
off, the front-panel CAL OUT connector is pulled to 
ground potential through R558, setting the lower limit of 
the CALIBRATOR output signal. 



As the CAL signal goes from LO to HI, the emitter of 
U550D is pulled HI to reverse bias U550C. Bias current for 
Q550 is established, and the transistor is turned on. The 
voltage at the emitter of Q550 rises to a level of +2.4 volts, 
determined by the voltage regulator composed of U165B, 
U550A, U550B, and associated components. This reg- 
ulated level is applied to the front-panel CALIBRATOR 
connector through a voltage-divider network composed of 
R557 and R558. This produces an output voltage of 
400 mV with an effective output impedance of 50 £2. 



The capacitive load (part of the etched-circuit board) 
at the RDA (retrace delay adjust) input (pin 4) is used to 
delay the retrace of the sweep until the Z-Axis drive is 
fully turned off in response to the SGAZ gate going HI. 
This delay prevents any part of the retrace from being 
seen. 



B Sweep 

Operation of B Sweep hybrid U900 is similar to that just 
described for the A Sweep with the following exceptions: 
The THO input (and thus sweep enabling) is controlled by 
the A Sweep hybrid and not the Display Sequencer (see 
the preceding A Sweep description). The timing capacitor 
select output, TCS, is not used, and only three timing 
capacitors are selectable (two on the B Sweep hybrid at 
CT0 and CT1 and one externally at CT2). Unlike the A 
Sweep, the delay reference (DR) input (pin 37) and the B 
Sweep bypass-delay comparator signal (BDCB) input (at pin 
39) are used only for factory calibration. 



Calibrator 

The Calibrator circuit, composed of Q550, U165B, 
U550A, B, C, and D, and associated components, generates 
a square-wave output of precise amplitude and frequency 
characteristics. The CALIBRATOR signal provided at the 
front-panel output connector is useful for adjusting probe 
compensation and verifying VOLTS/DIV, SEC/DIV, and At 



Since the frequency of the CALIBRATOR signal is 
controlled by the same divider chain that controls oper- 
ation of the vertical chopping rate, the intentional 200-ns 
shift added to the chop signal at the end of some sweeps 
(to desynchronize the chopping rate from the sweep 
rate) shows up on the CALIBRATOR signal as an irregular- 
width pulse. This shift is not apparent when viewing the 
CALIBRATOR signal on the instrument providing the 
signal (since the skew occurs during sweep-retrace time), 
but it should be taken into account when using the 2465 
CALIBRATOR signal with other instrumentation. The 
skew can be eliminated from the signal by setting the 2465 
TRIGGER MODEtoSGLSEQ (to shut off the sweeps). 



VERTICAL CHANNEL SWITCH 
AND OUTPUT AMPLIFIERS 



signal source for vertical deflection of the crt beam. The 
Vertical, Horizontal, and Z-Axis output amplifiers provide 
the signal amplification necessary to drive the crt. 



Vertical Channel Switch 

The Vertical Channel Switch circuitry consists of hybrid 
Channel Switch U400, that selects one of the vertical 
signals for application to the Vertical Output Amplifier, 



3-23 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



and a combined switch/amplifier circuit that converts the 
single-ended readout vertical signal into a differential signal 
for application to the Channel Switch. 



Channel selection is controlled by the Display Sequencer 
VS1 through VS4 signals applied to the vertical channel 
selection pins (pin 24, pin 25, pin 13, and pin 14 respec- 
tively). (See Table 3-3 for the Vertical Display Selection.) 
When a vertical select line is LO, the associated input signal 
pins are connected to the differential output (+OUT, pin 1 
and —OUT, pin 3). The CH 5 input signal (Readout 
Vertical) is added to the output whenever both the VS3 
and VS4 select signals are HI but will only contain readout 
information when the readout select logic (U970C and 
U975A) detects that the Display Sequencer has set both the 
Horizontal Select signals (HSA and HSB) HI (readout 
selected). 



biases the emitter-coupled pair U485A and B via R483. 
NAND-gate U975A inverts the LO and applies a HI to the 
junction of R497 and R485. The HI forward biases CR485, 
and the emitters of U485C and D are pulled to a level in 
excess of +2 V, reverse biasing the transistor pair. With 
U485C and D reverse biased, the ground reference level at 
the base of U485C is isolated from the output, while the 
readout vertical information is allowed to pass through the 
forward-biased transistor pair. 



When readout information is not being displayed, a HI 
is present at the output of NAND-gate U975C. The HI 
forward biases CR484 and, when inverted by U975A, 
reverse biases CR485. With the biasing conditions reversed, 
the transistor pair of U485C and D becomes forward biased 
and U485A and B become reverse biased. The ground 
reference level present at the base of U485C is coupled to 
the output, while the readout vertical signal is isolated. 



Table 3-3 
Vertical Display Selection 



Select Inputs 


Vertical 
Display 


VS1 


VS2 


VS3 


VS4 


L 


H 


H 


H 


CH 1 


H 


L 


H 


H 


CH2 


L 


L 


H 


H 


ADD 


H 


H 


L 


L 


CH3 


H 


H 


H 


L 


CH4 


H 


H 


H 


H 


Readout (Y) 



READOUT SWITCH/AMPLIFIER. Transistors U485A, 
U485B, U485C, U485D, and U475C, along with their 
associated components, make up an analog switch circuit 
that routes either the readout vertical signal at the base of 
U485A or the ground reference at the base of U485C 10 
the output at the emitter of U475C. The signal selected 
depends on the complementary voltages applied to the 
emitter junctions of the two emitter-coupled transistor 
pairs, U485A and B and U485C and D. The selection 
voltages are developed by voltage-divider networks on the 
complementary logic outputs of U975C and U975A. 



When readout information is to be displayed, the hori- 
zontal select inputs to U980B and U980C go HI and the 
output of NAND-gate U975C goes LO. The LO applied to 
the divider network of R498, R484, and R471 pulls the 
anode of CR484 low enough to reverse bias it. This forward 



The output signal (either the readout vertical signal or 
the ground reference level) is applied to the CH5+ input of 
Channel Switch U400 via R495 and R412. The inverting 
amplifier circuit composed of U475A, U475B, U475D, and 
associated components inverts the readout vertical signal 
for application to the CH5— input. The amplifier is an 
inverting unity-gain configuration with transistors U475A 
and U475B connected as an emitter-coupled pair. The base 
of U475A is referenced to ground through R482. The base 
of U475B is pulled to the same level by the negative feed- 
back from emitter-follower U475D through R478. The 
noninverted signal applied is to the base of U475B through 
R492 and will attempt to increase or decrease the current 
to the base of U475B, depending on the amplitude and 
polarity of the signal. However, the negative feedback 
from the collector of U475B (via U475D and R478) will 
hold the base of U475B at the ground reference level. 
The feedback current through R478 develops a voltage 
drop across R478 that is equal in amplitude but opposite in 
polarity to the noninverted vertical readout signal. The 
inverted readout signal is applied to the Channel Switch on 
pin 2 (CH5-) via R476 and R402. 



The RLC networks connected between the output pins 
of U400 are adjusted during calibration to obtain the 
correct overall high-frequency response of the vertical 
deflection system. The HF AD J (high-frequency adjust) pot 
R417 and resistor R416 (connected to pin 16) trim the 
high-frequency response of the Channel Switch hybrid. 



Delay Line 

Vertical deflection signals from the Vertical Channel 
Switch are delayed approximately 78 ns by Delay Line 
DL100. This delay allows the Sweep and Z-Axis circuits to 
turn on before the triggering event begins vertical deflection 
of the crt beam, thereby permitting the operator to view 
the triggering event. The bridged-T network, composed of 



3-24 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



inductors and capacitors built into the circuit board, 
corrects phase-distortion introduced by the delay line. 



Vertical Output Amplifier 

Vertical Output Amplifier U600 is a hybrid device that 
provides the final amplification of the selected vertical 
signal, raising it to the level required to drive the crt deflec- 
tion plates. The vertical signal from the Delay Line is 
applied to pins 10 and 3 of U600. The RL network con- 
nected between pins 8 and 5 (COMPA and COMPB) of 
U600 compensates the signal for the skin-effect losses 
associated with the delay line. 



transistor. The trace separation level set by front-panel 
TRACE SEP control R3190 is now applied to the TS input 
of U600, and a corresponding offset of the displayed trace 
will occur. 



BEAM FIND. As an aid in locating off-screen or over- 
scanned displays, the 2465 is provided with a beam-finding 
feature. When the front-panel BEAM FIND button is 
pushed, the beam-find input pin (BF, pin 15) of U600 will 
be pulled HI. While BF is HI, the dynamic range of Vertical 
Output Amplifier U600 is reduced, and all deflected traces 
will be held to within the vertical limits of the crt qraticule. 



Amplifier gain and vertical centering are adjusted by 
R638 and R639 respectively, primarily to match the 
amplifier hybrid to the crt installed in the instrument. 
An intensity-dependent correction current is sinked away 
from the vertical centering input at pin 39 by the Dynamic 
Centering circuit. The correction signal holds the vertical 
centering stable over a wide range of varying display 
intensity. Readout jitter adjustment pot R618 is used to 
minimize thermal distortion in the output amplifier to 
reduce jitter in the display readout. 



OUTPUT PROTECTION CIRCUIT. A current-limit 
circuit composed of transistors Q623 and Q624 protects 
the Vertical Output Amplifier from a short-circuited output 
or a bias-loss condition. Either of these fault conditions will 
cause excessive current to flow into pins 30 and 31 of 
U600. Current in FET Q624 is limited to the IDSS current, 
so the voltage at pins 24, 30, and 31 will drop. This 
decreases the forward bias on pass-transistor Q623 and 
lowers the voltage at pin 23 of U600 enough and provides 
some degree of protection for the device. 



The vertical output signal at pins 28 and 33 of U600 
(OUT A and OUT B) is applied to the vertical deflection 
plates of the crt (diagram 8) via L628 and L633. The 
deflection plates form a distributed-deflection structure 
that is terminated by a hybrid resistor network. One 
element of the terminating network is an adjustment 
potentiometer used to match the network impedance to 
that of the crt. 



BANDWIDTH LIMITING. Bandwidth-limiting coils 
L644 and L619, along with capacitors built into U600, 
form a three-pole filter used to roll off high-frequency 
response of the Vertical Output amplifier above 20 MHz. 
To limit the vertical bandwidth, the BWL (bandwidth limit) 
input to U600 (pin 16) is pulled LO. It may be set LO 
either by the BWL control data bit from Auxiliary Control 
Register U140 (diagram 4) when the operator selects the 
Bandwidth Limit feature or automatically by the output 
of NAND-gate U975A in the Vertical Channel Switch 
circuitry (via CR616) when the readout is being displayed. 



TRACE SEPARATION. The voltage applied to the TS 
(trace separation) input of U600 (pin 42) is used to offset 
the output levels of the hybrid to vertically shift the 
position of trace on the crt. During normal sweep displays, 
the TS1 + TS2 signal applied to the base of Q600 by the 
Display Sequencer (diagram 5) is HI, and the transistor is 
turned on. The TRACE SEP level at the junction of R642 
and CR600 is shunted to ground, and no offsetting of 
the output signal will occur. For those displays in which 
trace separation should occur, the Display Sequencer 
switches the base of Q600 to ground level to turn off the 



Horizontal Amplifier 

The Horizontal Amplifier circuitry consists of Hori- 
zontal Output Amplifier U800, a unity-gain buffer 
amplifier made up of the five transistors in U735, and 
associated components. 

UNITY-GAIN BUFFER AMPLIFIER. The amplifier 
circuit composed of U735A, B, C, D, and E along with 
their associated components, form a unity-gain amplifier 
that buffers the ramp signal from A Sweep Generator U700 
to the Horizontal Output Amplifier. Transistors U735C and 
D form a differential pair with the negative excursion of 
their emitters limited to —5 V (clamped by U735E). 
Negative feedback from the collector of U735C to its 
base is via emitter-followers U735A and B (in parallel) 
which drive to the A Sweep input (pin 18, A+) to Hori- 
zontal Output Amplifier U800. 



HORIZONTAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER. Integrated 
circuit U800 provides the final amplification of the selected 

I IUI iz.ui uaruci icuuui I oiyi lai i cl|uii cu iu ui i vc liic ^il. v/nc v^i 

the single-ended input signals applied to the four input pins 
is converted to a differential-output signal at the output 
pins of the amplifier. The four deflection signals to U800 
are: the A Sweep (pin 18, A+), the B Sweep (pin 16, 

r-i i > j-i o i_..j. ii : j._i _: i /„:„ 1 "7 C3/^i\ „„,-l +u^ 

Dt), liib neduuui nui i/.ui iidi uiynai VH'" ■'/ nuj, anu lug 

Channel 1 signal (used for horizontal deflection of the X-Y 
displays) at pin 20, the X+ input pin. Signal selection is 
done by an internal channel switch and is controlled by the 
HSA (horizontal select A) and HSB (horizontal select B) 
signals from the Display Sequencer (see Table 3-4). 



3-25 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Table 3-4 
Horizontal Display Selection 



Control Level 




HSA 


HSB 


Selected 
Signal 


H 


H 


Readout (X) 


H 


L 


B Sweep Ramp 


L 


H 


A Sweep Ramp 


L 


L 


X Input (from CH 1) 



(diagram 5) is amplified to the level required to drive the 
crt control grid (via the DC Restorer circuitry) and sets 
the crt beam intensity. The BLANK input signal applied to 
U950 pin 5, also from the Display Sequencer, blanks the 
trace during sweep retrace, chop switching, and readout 
blanking by reducing the VZOUT signal to a blanked level. 
Sweep gate z-axis signals (SGAZ and SGBZ) from the A 
Sweep and B Sweep hybrids (U700 and U900 respectively, 
diagram 5) are applied to the Z-Axis Amplifier on pins 4 
and 5. These signals turn the beam current on and off for 
the related displays and, when used in conjunction with the 
BLANK signal on pin 5, enable the sweeps to be blanked 
while still allowing the Readout circuitry to blank and 
unblank the crt for the readout displays. 



Switching between unmagnified (X1) gain and magnified 
(X10 gain) is also controlled by signals from the Display 
Sequencer. For normal horizontal deflection, the MAG 
signal on pin 14 of U800 is HI, and the gain of the output 
amplifier produces normal sweep deflection. Precise X1 
deflection gain is set by adjusting X1 Gain pot R860. 
When the X10 MAG feature is selected, amplifier gain for 
the magnified sweeps is increased by a factor of 10. The 
MAG signal from the Display Sequencer goes LO when 
magnified sweep is to be displayed. This switches the 
amplifier gain and switches analog switch U860C from the 
X1 position to the X10 position. Amplifier gain in the 
magnified mode is adjusted by adding or subtracting a 
small bias current using X10 Gain control R850. Dc offsets 
in the amplifier and crt are compensated for, using Horiz 
Centering pot R801 to precisely center the display. An 
intensity-dependent position correction signal, used to hold 
the horizontal centering stable over a wide range of varying 
display intensities, is added at this point by the Dynamic 
Centering circuitry. 



Control signals applied to U950 pin 48, pin 2, and 
pin 1 (HSA, HSB, and TXY respectively) switch some 
internal logic circuitry to enable or disable different input 
signals for the various types of displays. Table 3-5 illustrates 
the effects of the various input signals on the output signal 
for different combinations of HSA, HSB, and TXY. 



The Z-Axis hybrid has an internal limiter circuit that 
prevents the crt from being damaged during high-intensity, 
high-repetition-rate displays. For high-rep-rate displays, 
capacitor C956 is shunted to ground via U850A. A signal 
representative of the intensity setting and the sweep 
repetition rate is integrated on C957 and results in a control 
level at pin 7 of U950 used to limit intensity of the crt 
beam. For the slower repetition rate displays, the SIL bit 
(slow intensity limit) from Auxiliary Control Register U140 
(diagram 4) opens CMOS switch U850A, gently reducing 
the effective capacitance at pin 7. In this slow-sweep mode, 
limiting depends primarily on the intensity setting. 



Timing and linearity of the sweep is affected by the 
amplifier transient response; and Trans Resp pot R802, 
connected to pin 2, is adjusted during calibration for 
optimum accuracy of the high-speed sweeps. 

As with the Vertical Output Amplifier, the Beam Find 
feature reduces the dynamic range of the Horizontal 
Output Amplifier. While the front-panel BEAM FIND 
button is pressed in, a HI is placed on U800 pin 15 via 
pull-up resistor R615, and the horizontal deflection is 
reduced, moving horizontally off-screen displays to within 
the graticule viewing area. 



Z-Axis Amplifier 

Z-Axis Amplifier U950 turns the crt beam off and on at 
the desired intensity levels as the oscilloscope goes through 
its display sequence. The BRIGHT (brightness) signal 
applied to U950 pin 44 from the Display Sequencer U650 



Focus tracking for intensity (VZOUT) level changes is 
provided by the VQOUT (quadrapole output voltage) signal 
at pin 22 of U950. The VQOUT signal varies the focusing 
voltages (and thus the focusing strenth) of two quadrapole 
lenses in the crt (diagram 8). The VQOUT signal is related 
to the VZOUT level exponentially and provides the greatest 
auto-focus control at high-intensity levels. Gain of the 
VQOUT signal is set by the High-Drive Focus adjustment, 
R1842. The VQOUT signal also drives the Dynamic Cen- 
tering circuit and holds the display position stable during 
wide-range intensity level changes. 



Transient response of the Z-Axis Amplifier is adjusted 
by potentiometer R1834, connected to U950 at pin 13. 



Dynamic Centering 

The circuit composed of U3401, U3402, and associ- 
ated components generates compensating signals to offset 
positioning effects that occur in the crt when the intensity 



3-26 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Table 3-5 
Blanking and Intensity Control Selection 



Control Inputs 


intensity 

Affected 

By 


Blanking 

Affected 

By 


Typical 
Display 


TXY 


HSA 


HSB 


X a 


H 


H 


BRIGHT (RO level) 


BLANK 


Readout 




H 


L 


BRIGHT, Z EXT 






X 


BLANK, SGAZ, SGBZ 


Delayed Sweep 




L 


H 








X 


BRIGHT, SGBZ, Z EXT 


BLANK, SGAZ 


Main Sweep 




L 


L 




BLANK 




L 


BRIGHT, SGBZ, Z EXT 


X-Y 




L 


L 








H 


BRIGHT, SGBZ, Z EXT 


BLANK, SGAZ 


X-Y 



X = State doesn't matter. 



is varied over a wide range. The VQOUT signal from Z-Axis 
Amplifier U950 is exponentially proportional to the 
display intensity and dynamically controls the intensity- 
dependent offsets. 



code written to each location in RAM points to a block of 
addresses in Character ROM U2930. This block in the ROM 
contains the dot-position information for the specific 
character to be displayed at the associated crt position. 



Dynamic Centering adjustment pots R3401 and R3407 
set the gain and polarity of the signals at their related 
outputs by varying the current in the emitter circuit of 
one of two emitter-coupled pairs of transistors. Adjusting 
the bias level at pin 4 above = —10.6 volts (determined by 
R3410 and R3411 at the complementary input, pin 1) 
will generate an inverted signal, while adjusting the bias 
level below —10.6 volts will cause a noninverted signal. 
Amplitude of the resulting signal is dependent on how far 
from the — 10.6-volt reference the bias is set. The output 
signal is added or subtracted from the position voltage 
applied to the Vertical and Horizontal Output Amplifiers. 
Both pots are adjusted so that position shifts due to display 
intensity variations are minimized. 



READOUT 



The Readout circuitry (diagram 7) is responsible for 
displaying the alphanumeric readout characters on the crt. 
An eight-bit character code specifying each character (or 
cursor segment) to be displayed is written from the Micro- 
processor to a corresponding location in the Character 
RAM U2920 (a 128-x-8-bit, random-access memory 
integrated circuit). Each of the lower 64 locations in the 
RAM corresponds to one of the 64 possible character 
locations in the crt readout display (see Figure 3-7); 32 
locations in the upper graticule row and 32 in the lower 
graticule row. The upper 64 RAM locations are used to 
store cursor segment information for the display of the 
AV and At measurement cursors. The eight-bit character 



Each character is made up of zero (for a space character) 
or more dots displayed in an eight-wide by sixteen-high 
dot matrix. Specific blocks of ROM addresses contain all 
the X-Y offset coordinates for the dots in a particular 
character in the readout. The coordinates are referenced 
to the lower-left corner of the character dot matrix. Each 
individual data byte in the block of ROM addresses con- 
tains both the X and the Y coordinates for one dot of the 
associated character. 



To display a character, a combination of the character 
position on the crt (the RAM address) and the byte of X-Y 
position data from Character ROM U2930 (relative to that 
character position) is appled to Horizontal and Vertical 
DAC (digital-to-analog converters) circuits, U2910 and 
U2905 respectively. In these circuits, the X-Y position 
data is converted to analog deflection signals used to 
position each dot in the crt readout display. Each of the 
position bytes are read from the block of ROM defining 
the character under control of the readout timing and 
sequencing circuitry. The resulting dots, when displayed 
in sequence, iC 
the crt. 






neaaoui 

The Readout I/O circuitry, composed of U2860, U2865, 
U2960, and associated components, provides the interface 
between the Microprocessor and the Readout board. Two 
types of data. Readout mode data and character data, are 
written to the Readout board serially via data bus line BDO. 



3-27 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



STORING A CHARACTER. Displaying a character 
starts with serially clocking 15 of the 16 character data 
bits into a 16-bit shift register formed by registers U2960 
and U2860. The ROS1 strobe (readout strobe one) from 
the Address Decode circuitry (diagram 1) is the clocking 
signal. The first eight bits of the ioaded data indicate the 
character to be displayed, while the last seven bits select the 
location on the crt that the character is to be displayed. 



bit present at U2960 pin 9 



(Q SH ) into U2860. After 



15 ROS1 strobes have occurred, seven bits of character 
data are latched into U2860, and the eighth character bit 
and seven of the character address bits are latched into 
character address register U2960 (though they have not 
been shifted into their correct positions for addressing 
the RAM). 



On positive-going transitions of the ROS1 strobe, the 
data bit present on the BDO data line is shifted into the 
first latch of character address register U2960. The follow- 
ing negative-going edges of the ROS1 strobe are inverted by 
U2965A to produce a positive transition that shifts the data 



At this point, the last character bit remains to be shifted 
into the registers, but the operating mode must be set up 
first to ensure correct operation upon shifting the final bit. 
The eight bits of mode data are shifted into the mode 
control register U2865 by the ROS2 strobe. Bit Q 4 
(WRITE), along with the ROS2 and the R/W Dlyd signal 



8 HORIZONTAL DOT POSITIONS 

WITHIN EACH HORIZONTAL 
DISPLAY AREA-DETERMINED BY 
BITS 0-2 OF CHARACTER ROM 

, ^ ^ 



SMALL CHARACTERS 

ARE DISPLAYED IN 

TOP HALF OF A 

GIVEN DISPLAY AREA 



16 VERTICAL 

DOT POSITIONS 

ABOVE LINE 

REFERENCE- < 

DETERMINED BY 

BITS 3-6 OF 
CHARACTER ROM 



''CAS LINE 
REFERENCE 







■ 


■ 


■ 








I 




■ 








■ 






\ 












■ 














■ 


■ 














■ 
















■ 












































































































































\ 

























































SUBFRAME= 

8 CHARACTERS 

. /s . 



LARGE CHARACTERS 

REQUIRE 2 ADJACENT 

DISPLAY AREAS 



ONLY SMALL CHARACTERS 

MAY BE DISPLAYED ON 

BOTTOM LINE 



'NOTE: REFERENCE LEVEL IS 

WITH DD3, DD4, DD5 , AND 

DD6 ALL LO 



A1 



-001V 



- A 



H h 



I 



20OmM 



HBB 



m 



H 1- 



— *CA5 HI 
(LINE 
REFERENCE ) 



32 HORIZONTAL DISPLAY 

AREAS-DETERMINED BY 

CHARACTER COUNTER 



-*CA5 LO 
(LINE 
REFERENCE ) 



3831-02 



Figure 3-7. Developing the readout display. 



3-28 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



are applied to the RAM enabling circuitry and determine 
when new character information will be written into the 
Character RAM. With U2865 loaded with the mode data, a 



final ROS1 strobe clocks the eighth bit of character data 
from U2960 to U2860 on the negative edge, and the 
positive edge of the strobe clocks the eighth character 
address bit (an unused bit) into U2960. 



With control bit Q 4 from U2865 LO, the outputs 
of U2860 are enabled and the eight bits of character data 
(CDO through CD7) are written in parallel into the Char- 
acter RAM at the location selected by the seven-bit address 
from U2960. Register U2960 is enabled only when the 
Readout is not displaying characters (the REST signal at 
pin 15 of U2960isHI). 



The character data register U2860 also provides a means 
for the Microprocessor to read data from the Character 
RAM for partial verification of Readout circuit operation 
(during the power-up tests). The eight bits of parallel data 
from the Character RAM location selected by character 
address register U2960 are loaded into U2860 by setting 
bit Q„ of mode control register U2865 LO. Inverter 
U2965C converts the LO to a HI and applies it to character 
register U2860 at pin 1. The HI on pin 1, in combination 
with the fixed HI on pin 19 of U2860, switches the char- 
acter register to the Load mode. The next positive tran- 
sition of the ROS1 strobe loads the eight data bits placed 
on the CDO through CD7 bus lines into the register in 
parallel. Bit Q„ is then returned HI, and the next positive 
transition of the ROS1 strobe shifts the Q bit to pin 8 
(Q '), the RO DO (readout data out) line. Seven more 
ROS1 strobes shift the remaining seven bits of character 
data out onto the RO DO line to Status Buffer U2108 
(diagram 2) to be read, one at a time, by the processor. 



Character RAM 

Character RAM U2920 provides temporary storage of 
the readout character selection data. This character data is 
organized as 128 eight-bit words that define the character 
that should be displayed at any given readout position on 
the crt. Cursor information is also stored in U2920 when 
cursors are to be displayed. 



RAM iocations may be addressed either from the Read- 
out I/O stage by character address register U2960, as 
previously described, or by the Character Counter stage. 
The lower 64 address locations in RAM each correspond to 
a specific readout location on the crt, while the upper 64 
address locations store cursor information. The eight bits of 
data written to one of these locations from the Readout 
I/O stage is a code that identifies the specific character (or 
cursor segment) that should be displayed at the associated 
crt location. After the display data is written into the RAM, 
the Character Counter is allowed to address the RAM, 



incrementing through the RAM address field. The eight-bit 
character codes for each display location are output to 
Character ROM U2930 in sequence. 



Character Counter 

The Character Counter stage consists of two four-bit 
counters (U2940A and B) cascaded together to form an 
eight-bit counter (only seven of which are used) and tri- 
state buffer U2935 which drives the RAM address lines. 



As the Character Counter addresses each RAM location, 
a sequence of "dot display cycles" is performed in which 
the individual dots that make up the character are 
positioned on the crt and turned on. The EOCH (end of 
character) signal applied to U2885A prevents the counter 
from incrementing until all dots of the character have 
been displayed. As the last dot of a character is addressed, 
the EOC H bit at pin 2 of U2855A goes LO. The next 
GETDOT pulse increments U2940B, and the next RAM 
location is addressed to start the display of the next 
character. Space characters have the EOCH bit set LO for 
the first "dot" of the character and merely advance the 
Counter to the next character address without displaying 
any dots. See the Character ROM description for further 
explanation of the EOCH bit. 



Character ROM 

Character ROM U2930 contains the horizontal and 
vertical dot-position information for all of the possible 
characters (or cursor segments) that may be displayed. 
The eight bits of character data from the Character RAM 
are applied to the eight most-significant address inputs (A4 
through A11) of the Character ROM and select a block of 
dot-positioning data unique to the character to be displayed. 
The Dot Counter increments the four least-significant 
address lines (AO through A3), causing the ROM to output 
a sequence of eight-bit words, each defining dot position 
for the selected character. 



The three least-significant bits of a ROM dot-data word 
(DDO through DD2) select one of eight horizontal positions 
for the dot within an eight-by-sixteen character matrix (see 
Figure 3-7). The next four bits (DD3 through DD6) define 
the vertical position of the dot within the matrix. These 
dot-data bits are applied to the Horizontal and Vertical 
Character DACs, where they are converted to the analog 
voltages used to position the dot on the crt. 



The last dot-data bit DD7 is the EOCH (end of char- 
acter) bit and, when LO, indicates that the last dot of the 
character is addressed. It is used to reset the Dot Counter 
(via U2855B) and enables the Character Counter to be 
incremented (via U2855A) after the last dot of a character 
has been displayed. 



3-29 



Theory of Operation-2465 Service 



Two servicing jumpers, J401 and J402, have been pro- 
vided to disable the Character ROM and force the DD7 bit 



(EOCH) LO. In certain instances, these two conditions 
may be useful when troubleshooting the Readout circuitry. 
To prevent damage to the ROM output circuitry, J402 
should only be installed after J401 is installed (to disable 
the ROM). 



set LO. On the seventeenth character, the fifth counter bit 
(pin 3 of U2870A) will go HI to address the next 16-byte 
block of character data in ROM U2930. The lower four bits 
of the Dot Counter then sequence through this additional 
block in the normal manner until the EOCH bit is encoun- 
tered, resetting the counter. 



Dot Counter 

The Dot Counter consists of two four-bit counters 
(U2870A and B), OR-gate U2835A, inverter U2980D, and 
inverting input AND-gate U2855B. It sequences through a 
block of addresses containing dot-position data for a 
selected character. The Dot Counter is incremented when 
a dot is finished (via Inverter U2980D) by the GETDOT 
signal from the Dot Cycle Generator. 



Horizontal DAC 

The Horizontal DAC generates the voltages used to 
horizontally position dots of the readout display on the crt. 
Five data bits (CAO through CA4) from the Character 
Counter stage position a character to the correct column 
in the display (32 possible columns across the crt), while 
three data bits from Character ROM U2930 (DDO through 
DD2) horizontally position the dots within the eight-by- 
sixteen character matrix (see Figure 3-7). 



The counter increments through the block of dot- 
position data until the last byte of the block i s encountered 
(last dot). This last data byte has the EOCH (end of char- 
acter) bit (DD7) set LO. The dot is positione d and dis- 
played in the normal manner, but when the GETD OT 
signal occurs for the next dot display cycl e, the E OCH bit 
is latched into U2905 and generates the EOCH1 (end of 
character, delayed one dot) signal at U2905 pin 19. With 
EOCH and EOCH1 both LO, the HI reset pulse produced 
at pin 4 of NOR-gate U2855B resets the counter and, 
except for space characters, the EOCH bit returns HI. As 
the reset is removed from the Dot Counter, it is reenabled 
for display of the next character. For space characters, the 
EOCH bit will be detected as a LO when the first dot is 
read from the Character ROM, and the Character Counter 
will advance to the next character on the next rising edge of 
GETDOT. 



Counter U2870A and OR-gate U2835A enable char- 
acters of more than 16 dots to be displayed. Since most of 
the readout characters are small, using 16 dots or less, 
efficient data storage is achieved by storing the dot-position 
data as 16 consecutive bytes. For displaying these smaller 
characters, the four bits from U2870B are sufficient to 
address the 16 possible dot-position bytes. 



When larger characters (up to 32 dots) are to be dis- 
played, an additional bit of counter data must be used 
to address the ROM. This fifth bit comes from U2870A 
pin 3 and is ORed by U2835A with bit CDO from the 
Character RAM. The block address for these larger char- 
acters always has bit CDO set LO, so the counter bit from 
U2870A pin 3 is in control of the ROM address line at 
pin 4 of U2930. When displaying these larger characters, 
the dot count goes beyond 16 dots before the EOCH bit is 



The eight bits of position data are written to the perma- 
nently enabled DAC each time a new dot is requested by 
the Dot Cycle Generator. The GETDOT signal applied to 
pin 11 (Chip Select) enables the DAC to be written into, 
and the falling edge of the 5-MHz clock applied to pin 12 
(Write) writes the data at the eight DAC input pins into an 
internal latch. The voltage at the DAC output pin changes 
to reflect the data present in the latch. 



Vertical Character DAC 

The function of Vertical Character DAC U2905 is 
similar to that of the Horizontal DAC just described. It is 
responsible for vertically positioning each character dot on 
the crt. The Vertical DAC circuit is made up of five, D-type 
flip-flops (contained within U2905) and an accompanying 
resistor weighting network. The outputs of the flip-flop 
source different amounts of current to a summing node 
through a resistor weighting network. 



The five data bits are latched into U2905 on the rising 
edge of the GETDOT signal. One bit of character address 
data (CA5) from the Character Counter switches the 
vertical display position between the upper and lower 
readout display lines. When the display is to be in the 
bottom line, bit CA5 is set LO. With CA5 LO, zener diode 
VR2925 is biased off and a small current is sourced to the 
summing node via R2925. Vertical position above this 
reference is determined by dot data bits DD3 through DD6. 
When the top line is to be displayed, the CA5 bit is set HI, 
biasing VR2925 on. A larger current is now sourced into 
the summing node via R2925 and enough voltage is devel- 
oped across R2926 to move the display to the top row of 
the crt. As before, the individual dots are then positioned 
above this reference level by dot data bits DD3 through 
DD6. 



3-30 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Mode Select Logic 

The Mode Select Logic circuitry is composed of analog 
switches U2800 and U2805, buffers U2820A and B, gates 
U2810A, B, C, and D, U2900B and C, and part of U2905. 
It controls the readout display mode by selecting which 
deflection signals should drive the Horizontal and Vertical 
Deflection Amplifiers during a readout display. Five display 
modes are decoded by the Mode Select Logic: character 
display, vertical cursor 0, vertical cursor 1, horizontal 
cursor 0, and horizontal cursor 1. 



For normai character displays, cursor seiect bit CA6 
on U2800 pin 1 is LO. This LO signal passes through 
analog switch U2800 and is latched into U2905 when the 
GETDOT request from the Dot Cycle Generator goes HI. 
This latched LO selects the character display mode by 
forcing the outputs of U2900B and C and U2810A and 
B HI. The HI outputs of U2900B and C applied to the 
select input pins of analog switch U2805 cause the Hori- 
zontal DAC output signal applied to U2805 pin 11 to be 
routed to the Horizontal Amplifier (diagram 6) via buffer 
U2820B. The same HI logic levels cause NOR-gates U2810C 
and D to produce a LO at their outputs. This causes analog 
switch U2800 to route the Vertical DAC output signal 
applied to pin 12 to the Vertical Output Amplifier (also 
diagram 6) via buffer U2820A. 



For cursor displays, cursor select bit CA6 goes HI. 
This HI is routed through analog switch U2800 and latched 
into U2905 when GETDOT next goes HI. This produces a 
HI at U2905 pin 5, enabling the Mode Select Logic to 
decode output bits DD3, DD4, and DD5 (from U2905) to 
determine which of the four possible cursor modes is 



selected (see Table 3-6). Once one of the cursor modes is 
entered, analog switch U2800 routes a fixed HI from pin 5, 
pin 2, or pin 4 to U2905 to keep the Mode Select Logic 
enabled. Character display mode is reentered only when 
return-to-character-mode data is decoded (DD4 and DD5 
both LO). When that occurs, U2800 routes the CA6 bit to 
U2905 and, if the bit is LO, the cursor display mode is 
halted. 



CURSOR DEVELOPMENT. Cursors are displayed in 
short sections, alternating between both vertical positions 
(for the delta voltage cursors) or both horizontal positions 
(for the delta time cursors). When displaying delta voltage 
cursors, the DLY REF level is routed to the Vertical 
Amplifier by analog switch U2800. This level determines 
the vertical position of one of the voltage cursors. 
Horizontal-positioning voltages for one segment of the 
cursor are routed from Horizontal DAC through analog 
switch U2805 and buffer U2820B to horizontally position 
each of the dots making up the cursor segment. DLY 
REF 1 is then used to vertically position the second cursor, 
and the Horizontal DAC positions each of the dots for that 
cursor segment. The cycle is repeated until all segments of 
both cursors are displayed. 



Delta time cursor displays are similar in that the DLY 
REFO and DLY REF 1 signals are used to position the 
cursors. In this case, however, analog switch U2805 selects 
the DLY REFO and DLY REF 1 signals alternately to 
position the cursors horizontally, and the Horizontal DAC 
output is routed via analog switch U2800 and buffer 
U2820A to vertically position the dots within each cursor 
segment. 



Table 3-6 
Readout Display Mode Selection 



Control Bits 


Mode 
Selected 


Horizontal 
Signal 




CA6 
(Cursor Select) 


DD5 


DD4 


DD3 


Vertical 
Signal 


L 


X a 


X 


X 


Character Display 


Horiz DAC 


Vert DAC 


H 


L 


H 


L 


Vert Cursor 1 


Horiz DAC 


DLY REF 1 


H 


L 


H 


H 


Horiz Cursor 1 


DLY REF 1 


Horiz DAC 


H 


H 


L 


L 


Vert Cursor 


Horiz DAC 


DLY REFO 


H 


H 


L 


H 


Horiz Cursor Q 


DLY REFO 


Horiz DAC 


H 


L 


L 


X 


Return to Character Display Mode 



X = State doesn't matter. 



3-31 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Refresh Prioritizer 

The Refresh Prioritizer circuitry consists of U2850A 
and B, U2950A, U2990A, and U2985. It keeps track of 
how well the Readout circuitry is doing in displaying all the 
required readout information and maintains the overall 
refresh rate. Since the readout display must remain flicker- 
free and at a constant intensity over the entire sweep rate 
range, various modes of displaying readout information are 
provided. The Refresh Prioritizer keeps track of the display 
status and enables the various readout-display modes as 
required to produce minimal interference with the dis- 
played waveform trace(s). 



Ideally, readout information should be displayed only 
when the oscilloscope is not trying to display waveform 
traces. These times occur before a trace commences, after 
a trace is completed, or between consecutive traces. Dis- 
playing in this mode corresponds to "priority one" in 
Figure 3-8 and causes no interference with the displayed 
waveforms. If the Readout circuitry is able to display all 
the required readout dots during the holdoff time between 
sweeps, the prioritizer U2985 will turn off the Dot Start 
Governor until the next subframe of readout information 
is to be displayed. When the sweep times are either too fast 
to finish a readout display during holdoff (at 5 ns per 
division no identifiable holdoff time exists) or too slow to 
allow flicker-free readout, readout display modes other 
than priority one are initiated. 



indicates a higher demand of display time.) In priorities 
three and four, dot displays occur during the main portion 
of the waveform display. However, the waveform blanking 
associated with these displays is relatively random in nature 
and is usually not noticeable. 



To start a readout display, the ROSFRAME (readout 
subframe) request from the Timing Logic (diagram 1) 
clocks the Q output of flip-flop U2850A HI. ROSFRAME 
is a periodic clocking signal used to hold the overall refresh 
rate constant and occurs at regular intervals, regardless of 
the state of the display. 



As the Dot Cycle Generator runs, it resets U2830B in 
the Dot Timer at somewhat irregular intervals with the 
STARTDOT signal (via inverter U2890A). The Dot Timer 
then starts a timing sequence, and the rising edge of the 
REFRESH signal from U2830A pin 4 clocks the latched 
ROSFRAME request from U2850A pin 5 to the Q output 
(pin 9) of flip-flop U2850B. This HI, applied to the S1 
input (pin 10) of prioritizer U2985, sets it up to increment 
with the next REFRESH clock applied to its clock input 
(pin 11). The LO Q output of U2850B (pin 8) applied to 
the reset input of U2850A resets the latched ROSFRAME 
request. See Figure 3-9 for an illustration of the timing 
sequence involved. 



The next most desirable time for dots to be displayed 
is during "triggerable" time; that time between sweeps 
when the oscilloscope is waiting for a sweep trigger event 
to occur. This is designated priority two and may cause 
slight interference on the leading edge of the displayed 
trace if a dot is being displayed when the actual trigger 
occurs. 



Finally, the least desirable dot display time is during a 
waveform trace display. This display time is designated 
either priority three or priority four. (Priority four 



The next REFRESH clock increments the display 
priority to one by clocking a HI to the Q D output (pin 12) 
of prioritizer shift register U2985. (Table 3-7 illustrates 
the operation of U2985. The same clock latches the now 
LO ROSFRAME request at U2850B pin 12 to the Q 
output (pin 9), where it is applied to the S1 input (pin 10) 
of prioritizer U2985. The LO on the S1 input of the 
prioritizer will remain until another ROSFRAME request 
from the Timing Logic occurs, and the encoded priority 
at the output pins of U2985 will remain as it is presently 
set. 



DISPLAY _ 
PRIORITY 

SWEEP 
GATE 


1 


2 


3 OR 4 


1 


SWEEP 

H— TIME— +* 


VARIABLE 
HOLDOFF 

H— TIME— •» 


TRIGGERABLE 

H*— TIME— H 


VARIABLE 

HOLDOFF 

(-•-TIME — 

3831-05 



Table 3-7 
Operation of Prioritizer Shift Register 



Figure 3-8, Readout display priorities. 



Select Inputs 


Mode 


SO 


S1 




H 


H 


Parallel Load 


H 


L 


| L -> Q A (decrease priority) 


L 


H 


H -» Q D (increase priority) 


L 


L 


Hold Data 



3-32 



Theory of Operation-2465 Service 



10 MHz 



REFRESH 
(625 KHz) 



ROSFRAME 



U2850A-5 



U2850B-9 (S1 ) 

(INCREMENT 

ENABLE ) 



U2850B-8 




SETS 
PRIORITIZER 
TO INCREMENT 



* INCREMENTS 
PRIORITIZER 



*N0TEIF S0 IS ALSO HI AT THIS TIME, THE PRIORITY DOES NOT CHANGE. 



3831-06 



Figure 3-9. Timing of Refresh Prioritizer. 



As each of the consecutive dots of the readout frame are 
displayed, the Dot and Character Counters increment until 
all dots of the subframe have been displayed (eight char- 
acters). As the Character Counter increments to address 
the next character of the display (first character of the 
next frame), the fourth bit of counter U2940B goes HI 
and sets the SO input (pin 9) of prioritizer U2985 HI via 
exclusive-OR-gate U2990A. The Dot Timer then clocks the 
prioritizer with a REFRESH clock on pin 1 1 of U2985, and 
the priority is decremented back to zero (indicating that 
the subframe is completed). The next ROSFRAME request 
starts the process over again to display the next subframe of 
readout display. The sequence just described is the priority 
one display mode and is used when holdoff time between 
sweeps allows all dots of the subframe to be displayed 
before the next ROSFRAME request occurs. 



J DAPCDAMIC 

5C(junu nobi r»/-vivii_ 



ioc-+ r\r-r*nrc hofnro thg 

Character Counter indicates the end of the subframe (to 
decrement the prioritizer back to zero), input S1 of U2985 
will be set HI (while the SO input pin remains LO) and the 
Prioritizer will increment to priority two (outputs Q c 
and Q D go HI) on the next STARTDOT cycie. if this 
display priority still is inadequate to complete the subframe 
display before the next ROSFRAME request occurs, prior- 
ity two will be incremented up to priority three, or even to 
priority four should the condition persist. Priority four is 
operationally the same as priority three, but it is used to 



keep the readout circuitry continuously displaying readout 
data on through the next subframe, thus allowing the 
display to catch up. If priority four is in effect, the next 
decrement that occurs at the end of a subframe only 
returns the prioritizer to priority three, not to priority two. 



The circuit composed of flip-flop U2950A and exclusive- 
OR-gate U2990A enables either edge of the CA3 bit to 
decrement the priority of the display when a subframe 
is completed. Either a negative or positive transition on 
pin 2 of U2990A will cause the output at pin 3 to go HI 
since the Q output of U2950A is still at the opposite level. 
The HI from U2990A indicates that the end of the present 
subframe has occurred, and it sets up the prioritizer to 
decrement with the next REFRESH clock. At the same 
time that the prioritizer decrements, the changed level of 
the CA3 bit is clocked through U2950A and causes the 
output of exclusive-OR-gate U2990A to return LO untii 
the next subframe is completed. 



If the subframe is completed (SO on U2985 goes HI) 
when a ROSFRAME request is also pending (SI is aiso Hi), 
U2985 does a parallel load, reloading the present priority 
back into the prioritizer. Since, in this case, the subframe 
display was completed at the same rate as the ROSFRAME 
request occurred, the readout display priority is not 
changed. 



3-33 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Dot Start Governor 

The Dot Start Governor detects the display priority 
from the Refresh Prioritizer and initiates dot-display cycles 
as the appropriate conditions are met. The conditions 
tested include display priority, sweep gate completion, dot 
completion, readout control status, and the readout active 
enable from the Display Sequencer. 



When the readout board status line (ACTIVE/ 



ADDRESSABLE) is HI (signifying display) and the REST 
line goes HI to indicate that the dot cycle is complete, 
AND-gate U2970C generates a HI at pin 8 (DOTOK) to 
signal that a new dot display is allowed. The HI from 
U2970C enables most of the gating in the Dot Start 
Governor. If the Refresh Prioritizer has encoded a display 
priority of either one or two, the output of exclusive-OR- 
gate U2990B is HI. When DOTOK from U2970C goes HI 
to enable a dot display, the LO reset from pin 6 of U2970B 
to pin 1 of flip -flop U2880A is removed. Now, when the 
A Sweep gate (SGA) goes HI (beginning of Holdoff), the 
HI at the D input of U2880A is clocked to the Q output 
and the Q output at pin 6 will go LO, requesting display of 
a priority one or two dot. This LO dot request is propa- 
gated through U2885B, U2890D, U2890B, and U2890C 
and sets the STARTDOT signal LO. STARTDOT going 
LO resets Dot Cycle Generator shift register U2995 and 
counter U2830B of the Dot Timer. Resetting the Dot Cycle 
Generator shift register causes the REST signal from 
U2995 pin 13 to go to a LO, removing the HI DOTOK 
signal at U2970C pin 8. As DOTOK goes LO, STARTDOT 
at pin 8 of U2890C goes HI to start the Dot Cycle Gener- 
ator. At the same time the reset to U2880A is asserted via 
U2970B and the dot request is removed. Both the Dot 
Timer and the Dot Cycle Generator are now enabled and 
start the first dot-display cycle during holdoff time. 



t he h igher priority and generate a readout request signal 
(ROR) to the Display Sequencer. The LO from U2950B 
pin 8 propagates through U2890B and U2890C to initiate a 
STARTDOT cycle. When the Display Sequencer recognizes 
that the readout request signal is LO, it will perform the 
mode-dependent setup functions necessary to give display 
control to the Readout Board and will then set the ROA 
(readout active) line LO. The LO will be clocked into 
U2880B, and the Dot Cycle Generator will generate a 
GETDOT signal, resetting the readout request from flip- 
flop U2950B. Only one dot is displayed for each readout 
request. 



A similar readout display request will be generated when 
priority-two-or-higher displays are required when sweep 
gates are not present (dot display during triggerable time 
after holdoff). This condition is detected by NAND-gate 
U2885A. AND-gate U2970D allows a readout request to be 
generated when in the interfere mode. This mode is invoked 
only during a single-sequence waveform display and ensures 
that all of the selected sweep combinations are displayed 
once, followed by a complete readout frame (for the 
purpose of crt photography). 



Dot Cycle Generator 

The Dot Cycle Generator, composed of shift register 
U2995, flip-flop U2880B, and associated gating circuitry, 
generates time-related signals for the following purposes: 
unblanking the crt to display a dot; requesting the next 
byte of dot data in preparation for displaying the next 
dot; and reenabling itself to repeat the tasks, via the Dot 
Start Governor (dependent on the display priority). 



After the Display Sequencer U650 (diagram 5) has time 
to respond to the end of the sweep gate, it sets the readout 
active signal (ROA) to pin 4 of U2880A LO. This sets pin 5 
of U2855B LO, and the signal is propagated through 
U2855B, U2890D, U2890B, and U2890C, as before, reset- 
ting the Dot Timer and the Dot Cycle Generator. REST 
then goes LO as before and starts the Dot Cycle Generator 
and Dot Timer. This cycle continues, displaying one dot per 
cycle (except for the first nondisplayed dot of a character 
which is automatically initiated by EOCH2), until the 
Displ ay Se quencer determines that the readout time is over 
(sets ROA HI) or until the display priority is decremented 
to zero. 



When a display priority of three or four exists, the out- 
put of U2990B will be LO, and U2970B, U2880A, and the 
associated logic gates following it will not be able to initiate 
a dot cycle. In either of these display priorities, U2970D, 
U2835C, U2980A, U2965B, and flip-flop U2950B detect 



The timing relationships of the Dot Cycle Generator 
output signals are controlled by shift register U2995. 
When the Dot Start Governor initiates a STARTDOT 
cycle as previously described, the STARTDOT signal 
initially goes LO, resetting all the Q outputs of U2995 
LO and setting the Q output of flip-flop U2880B to a HI. 
The STARTDOT signal is then returned HI, and Dot Timer 
counter U2830A and shift register U2995 are enabled. The 
shift register begins to consecutively shift HI logic levels to 
its Q output pins with each 5-MHz clock from Dot Timer. 
After approximately 400 ns, pin 5 (Q c ) of the shift register 
will go HI. The HI at Q c propagates through exclusive-OR- 
gate U2990D and AND-gate U297 0A to unblank the crt by 
setting the readout blanking signal (ROB) HI. 

When the Q p output of U2995 goes HI (1 jus after 
STARTDOT), the output of U2990D goes LO and the out- 
put of U2990C goes HI. The LO from U2990D propagates 
through U2970A to blank the crt (ROB goes LO) and to 

clock flip-flop U2880B via inverter U2890C. The ROA 



3-34 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



(readout active) level from the Display Sequencer (dia- 
gram 5) is clocked from the D input (pin 12) of U2880B to 
the Q output; and, if LO (indicating that the readout 
circuitry had control of the crt when unblanking occurred; 
thus the dot was displayed), the output of U2980B is set 
HI. With three HI levels applied to NAND-gate U2885C, a 
GETDOT request is generated to get the next byte of 
dot-position data for display. The next 5-MHz clock sets 
the Q G output of U2995 HI, and the output of U2990C 
goes LO, removing the LO GETDOT signal. 



At 1.4 jus after STARTDOT goes HI, U2995 pin 13 
(Q,,) goes HI to produce the REST signal, indicating that 
the current dot cycle is complete and the Dot Cycle Gener- 
ator is at REST. If the readout ACTIVE/ADDRESSABLE 
mode bit at U2970C pin 10 is still HI, the REST signal 
going HI produces a HI DOTOK signal (next dot is allowed) 
at pin 8. This HI applied to pin 10 of U2890C, along with 
any of the possible dot requests from the Dot Start 
Governor, will initiate another STARTDOT cycle for the 
next dot of the display. As long as the Display Sequencer 
holds the readout active line (ROA) LO, U2885B, U2890D, 
and U2890B of the Dot Start Governor will automatically 
initiate dot cycles as soon as the previous one ends (REST 
goes HI), until the Refresh Prioritizer is decremented to 
zero. 



Dot Timer 

The Dot Timer, composed of U2890A and U2830A and 
B, generates three, time-related signals used to synchronize 
the display and maintain the proper sequencing of the 
individual character dots. 



The two least-significant bits of the Dot Timer, from 
U2830B pins 11 and 10, are reset at the beginning of a 
dot cycle by a LO STARTDOT signal applied to the reset 
input of the counter via U2890A. As the dot-display cycle 
begins, the STARTDOT signal returns HI and the Dot 
i imer uegins counting m a uinary lashion. i he 10-MHz 
clock applied to pin 13 is divided by two to produce the 
5-MHz clocking signal at output pin 11. The 5-MHz clock 
sequences the Dot Cycle Generator through the various 
phases of the dot-display cycle. The REFRESH output 
signal from U2830A pin 4 updates the Refresh Prioritizer 
as each subframe is displayed. 



A third clock, from U2830A pin 6, occurs at approx- 
imately 8-/is intervals and allows any pending dot requests 
to generate a ROR signal to the Display Sequencer via 
flip-flop U2950B. (Readout request generation is described 
in the Dot Start Governor discussion.) 



When the last dot of the character is called from the 
Character ROM, the EOCH bit (DD7) applied to latch 
U2905 at pin 8 (in the Mode Select Logic circuitry) is LO. 
At the end of that d ot display cycle, the GETDOT signal 
clocks the L O EOCH bit into latch U2905. The latched bit 
becomes the EOCH1 signal (end of character, delayed one 
dot request) and is applied to U2855B, along with the 
already LO EOCH bit, to reset Dot Counters U2870A and 
B. The least-significant bits to the Character ROM address 
pins (A0 through A4) are then zeros, and the first dot of 
the next character is addressed. The Horizontal and Vertical 
DACs don't write this first dot p osition da ta into their 
registers until the end of the next GETDOT signal. That 
same GE TDOT si gnal also clocks EOCH1 into U2905 which 
becomes EOCH2 at pin 6 (end of character, delayed by two 
dot requests). EOCH2 is applied to AND-gate U2970A and 
disables the gate prior to the time the Dot Cycle Generator 






Hiuiaill\ LI IC Ul L IUI LI »G IIIOL UUL UK 



the first dot of a character is never displayed. 



Disabling the unblanking path for the first dot of each 
character in the manner just described allows the more 
radical voltage changes between characters to settle before 
the actual display of the next character begins. When the 
dot data for one of these undisplayed dots also has the 
EOCH bit set LO, it is a space character, and the display is 
advanced to the next character. 



HIGH VOLTAGE POWER 
SUPPLY AND CRT 

The High Voltage Power Supply and CRT circuit 
(diagram 8) provides the voltage levels and control circuitry 
for operation of the cathode-ray tube (crt). The circuitry 
consists of the High Voltage Oscillator, the High Voltage 
Regulator, the Cathode Supply, the Anode Multiplier, the 
DC Restorer, Focus Amplifiers, the CRT, and the various 
CRT Control circuits. 



High Voltage Oscillator 

The High Voltage Oscillator transforms power obtained 
from the —15 V unregulated supply into the various ac 
levels necessary for the operation of the crt circuitry. The 
circuit consists primarily of transformer T1970 and 
switching transistor Q1981 connected in a power oscillator 
configuration. The low-voltage oscillations set up in the 
primary winding of T1970 are raised by transformer action 
to high-voltage levels in the secondary windings. These ac 
secondary voltages are applied to the DC Restorer, the 
Cathode Supply, and the Anode Multiplier circuits that 
provide the necessary crt operating potentials. 



Oscillation occurs due to the positive feedback from the 
primary winding (pin 4 to pin 5) to the smaller base-drive 
winding (pin 3 to pin 6) that provides base drive to 
switching transistor Q1981. The frequency of oscillation is 



3-35 



Theory of Operation-2465 Service 



approximately 50 kHz and is determined primarily by the 
resonant frequency of the transformer. 



OSCILLATION START-UP. Initially, when power is 
applied, the High Voltage Regulator circuit detects that the 
crt cathode voltage is too positive and pulls pin 6 of trans- 
former T1970 negative. The negative level is applied to 
switching transistor Q1981 through the transformer 
winding and forward biases it. Current begins to flow in 
the primary winding through the transistor collector circuit 
and induces a magnetic field around the transformer 
primary winding. The increasing magnetic field induces a 
current in the base-drive winding that further increases 
the base drive to the transistor. This inphase feedback 
causes Q1981 to quickly saturate, at which point the 
current in the primary winding reaches its maximum value. 
As the rate of change in the primary current peaks and 
then reverses, the induced magnetic field begins to decay. 
This decreases the base-drive current and begins to turn 
Q1981 off. 



balanced condition and sets base drive in Q1981 via inte- 
grator U1956A and voltage-follower U1956B. Varying base 
drive to Q1981 holds the secondary voltages in regulation. 



If the Cathode Supply voltage level tends too positive, 
a slightly positive voltage will develop across C1932. This 
voltage causes the outputs of integrator U1956A and 
voltage-follower U1956B to move negative. The negative 
shift charges capacitor C1951 to a different level, around 
which the induced feedback voltage at the base-drive 
winding will swing. The added negative bias causes Q1981 
to turn on earlier in the oscillation cycle, and a stronger 
current pulse is induced in the secondary windings. The 
increased power in the secondary windings increases the 
secondary voltages until the Cathode Supply voltage returns 
to the balanced condition (zero volts across C1932). 
Opposite action occurs should the Cathode Supply voltage 
tend too negative. 



As Q1981 turns off, the magnetic field around the 
primary winding continues to collapse, and a voltage of 
opposite polarity is induced in the base-drive winding. 
This turns the switching transistor completely off. Once 
again, as the magnetic field builds and then reverses, the 
current induced in the base-drive winding changes direction, 
forward biasing Q1981. At that point, the primary-winding 
current starts increasing again, and the switching transistor 
is again driven into saturation by the feedback supplied to 
the base-drive winding. This sequence of events occurs 
repetitively as the circuit continues to oscillate. 



The oscillating magnetic field couples power from the 
primary winding into the secondary windings of the trans- 
former. The amplitudes of the voltages induced in the 
secondary windings are functions of the turns ratios of the 
transformer windings. 



High Voltage Regulator 

The High Voltage Regulator consists of U1956A and B 
and associated components. It monitors the crt Cathode 
Supply voltage and varies the bias point of the switching 
transistor in the High Voltage Oscillator to hold the 
Cathode Supply voltage at the nominal level. Since the 
output voltages at the other secondary winding taps are 
related by turns ratios to the Cathode Supply voltage, all 
voltages are held in regulation. 



When the Cathode Supply voltage is at the proper level 
(-1900 V), the current through R1945 and the 19-Mfi 
resistor internal to High Voltage Module U1830 holds the 
voltage developed across C1932 at zero volts. This is the 



Cathode Supply 

The Cathode Supply circuit is composed of a voltage 
doubler and an RC filter network contained within High 
Voltage Module U1830. This supply produces the -1900-V 
accelerating potential applied to the CRT cathode and the 
— 900- V slot lens voltage. The —1900-V supply is monitored 
by the High Voltage Regulator to maintain the regulation 
of all voltages from the High Voltage Oscillator. 



The alternating voltage from pin 10 of transformer 
T1970 (950 V peak) is applied to a conventional voltage- 
doubler circuit at pin 7 of the High Voltage Module. On 
the positive half cycle, the input capacitor of the voltage 
doubler (0.006 /if) is charged to -950 V through the 
forward-biased diode connected to ground at pin 9 of the 
module (charging path is through the diode, so stored 
charge is negative). The following negative half cycle adds 
its ac component (—950 V peak) to this stored dc value 
and produces a total peak voltage of —1900 V across the 
capacitor. This charges the 0.006-juf storage capacitor 
(connected across the two doubler diodes) through the 
second diode (now the forward-biased diode) to —1900 V. 
Two RC filters follow the voltage doubler to smooth out 
the ac ripple. A resistive voitage divider across the output 
of the filter network provides the — 900-V slot lens 
potential. 



Anode Multiplier 

The Anode Multiplier circuit (also contained in High 
Voltage Module U1830) uses voltage multiplication to 
produce the +14-kV CRT anode potential. Circuit 
operation is similar to that of the voltage-doubler circuit 
of the Cathode Supply. 



3-36 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



The first negative half cycle charges the 0.001 -/if input 
capacitor (connected to pin 8 of the High Voltage Module) 
to a positive peak value of +2.33 kV. The following positive 
half cycle adds its positive peak amplitude to the voltage 
stored on the input capacitor and boosts the charge on the 
second capacitor of the multiplier (and those following) 
to +4.66 kV. Following cycles continue to boost up 
succeeding capacitors to values 2.33 kV higher than the 
preceding capacitor until all six capacitors are fully charged. 
This places the output of the last capacitor in the multiplier 
at +14 kV above ground potential. Once the multiplier 
reaches operating potential, succeeding cycles replenish 
current drawn from the Anode Multiplier by the crt beam. 
The 1-M£2 resistor in series with the output protects the 
multiplier by limiting the anode current to a safe value. 



exponentially related to the VZOUT (intensity) signal 
driving the crt control grid and increases the strength 
of the lenses more at higher crt beam currents. (A higher 
beam current requires a stronger lens to cause an equal 
convergence of the beam.) 



DC Restorer 

The DC Restorer provides crt control-grid bias and 
couples both the dc and the low-frequency components of 
the Z-Axis drive signal to the crt control grid. This circuit 
allows the Z-Axis Amplifier to control the display intensity 
by coupling the low-voltage Z-Axis drive signal (VZOUT) to 
the elevated crt control-grid potential (about —1.9 kV). 



Focus Amplifier 

The Focus Amplifier, in conjunction with the auto-focus 
circuitry of Z-Axis hybrid U950 (diagram 6), provides 
optimum focus of the crt beam for all settings of the 
front-panel INTENSITY control. The Focus Amplifier 
itself consists of two shunt-feedback amplifiers composed 
of Q1851, Q1852, and associated components. The outputs 
of these amplifiers set the operating points of a horizontally 
converging quadrapole lens and a vertically converging 
quadrapole lens within the crt. The convergence strength 
of each lens is dependent on the electric field set up 
between the lens elements. 



Since the bases of Q1851 and Q1852 are held at 
constant voltages (set by their emitter potentials), changing 
the position of the wiper arms of the ASTIG and FOCUS 
pots changes the amount of current sourced to the base 
junctions through R1856 and R1857 respectively. This 
changes the base-drive currents and produces different 
output levels from the Focus Amplifiers; that, in turn, 
changes the convergence characteristics of the quadrapole 
lenses. 



Initially, at the time of adjustment, the FOCUS and 
ASTIG potentiometers are set for optimum focus of the 
crt beam at low intensity. After that initial adjustment, 
the ASTIG pot normally remains as set, and the FOCUS 
control is positioned by the user as required when viewing 
the displays. When using the FOCUS control, transistor 
Q1852 is controlled as described above; however, an 
additional current is also supplied to the base node of 
Q1851 from the FOCUS pot through R1855. This 
additional current varies the base-drive current to Q1851 
and provides tracking between the two lenses as the FOCUS 
control is adjusted during use of the instrument. 



The convergence strengths of the quadrapole lenses 
also dynamically track changes in the display intensity. 
The VQOUT signal, applied to the crt at pins 5 and 6, is 



The DC Restorer circuit (Figure 3-10) operates by 
impressing the crt grid bias setting and the Z-Axis drive 
signal on an ac voltage waveform. The shaped ac waveform 
is then coupled to the crt control grid through a coupling 
capacitor that restores the dc components of the signal. 



GRID BIAS LEVEL. An ac drive voltage of approxi- 
mately 300 V peak-to-peak is applied to the DC Restorer 
circuit from pin 7 of transformer T1970. The negative 
half cycle of the sinusoidal waveform is clipped by 
CR1953, and the positive half cycle (150 V peak) is applied 
to the junction of CR1930, CR1951, and R1941 via 
R1950 and R1953. Transistor Q1980, operational amplifier 
U1890A, and associated components form a voltage clamp 
circuit that limits the positive swing of the ac waveform 
at the junction. 



Transistor Q1980 is configured as a shunt-feedback 
amplifier, with C1991 and R1994 as the feedback elements. 
The feedback current through R1994 develops a voltage 
across the resistor that is positive with respect to the 
+42.6 V on the base of the transistor. The value of this 
additive voltage plus the two diode drops across CR1950 
and CR1951 sets the upper clamping threshold. Grid Bias 
potentiometer R1878 sinks varying amounts of current 
away from the base node of the transistor and thus sets 
the feedback current through R1994. The adjustment range 
of the pot can set the nominal clamping level between 
+71 V and +133 V. 



vvnen trie ampiituue oi trie a<j waveiurin is ueiovv uie 
clamping threshold, series diodes CR1950 and CR1951 
will be reverse biased and the ac waveform is not clamped. 
During the time the diodes are reverse biased, transistor 
Q1980 is kept biased in the active region by the charge 
retained on CI 971 from the previous cycle. As the 
amplitude of the ac waveform at the junction of CR1930 
and CR1950 exceeds the voltage at the collector of Q1980, 
the two series diodes (CR1950 and CR1951) become 
forward biased, and the ac waveform is clamped at that 



3-37 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



level. Any current greater than that required to maintain 
the clamp voltage will be shunted to the +42-V supply 
by transistor Q1980. 



Operational amplifier U1890A sinks a time-dependent 
variable current away from the base node of Q1980 that 
modifies the crt control-grid bias during the first few 
minutes of instrument operation. The circuit compensates 
for the changing drive characteristics of the crt as it warms 
up. 



At power-up, capacitor C1990 begins charging through 
R1991 toward the +15-V supply. The output of U1890A 
follows the rising voltage on pin 3; and after about ten 



minutes (for all practical purposes), it reaches +15 V. As 
the output voltage slowly increases, the charging current 
through R1992 causes the Grid Bias voltage to gradually 
lower about ten volts from its power-on level. The charge 
on C1990 dissipates slowly; therefore, if instrument power 
is turned off and then immediately back on again, the 
output of U1890A will still be near the +15-V limit rather 
than starting at zero volts as when the crt was cold. 



Z-AXIS DRIVE LEVEL. The variable-level Z-Axis signal 
(VZOUT) establishes the lower clamping level of the ac 
waveform applied to the High Voltage Module. When the 
amplitude of the waveform drops below the Z-Axis signal 
level, CR1930 becomes forward biased, and the ac wave- 
form is clamped to the Z-Axis signal level. The VZOUT 



+8V TO +73V 
+8V 



Z-AXIS 
OUTPUT 



AC DRIVE 

FROM PIN 7 

OF T1970 



+ 10bv 




R1922 
AW 



13 



+ 150V 

0V 

-150V 



CI 950 R1950 

■^ — 1( Wv-f-A'vV 

\ I R1953 



CR1953 




R1920 



CR1930 



R1941 

-WV 



15 



+ 15V 



+42V 



VCR1951 
VCR 1950 



R1991 



C1990 



m 




R1994 



R1992 
#-AA/V-* 



+42V 



GRID BIAS 



R1878 



R1881 



If— » — If — £ 



^ 



C1971 



01980 



+42V 




PARTIAL U1830 



D 

Hf- 



A E 

^— 1> Wv— * 



CATHODE VOLTAGE 

-1900V 

— i— -1920V 




-1985V 
CONTROL GRID 



DS90 



DS91 



CATHODE 



5831-03 



Figure 3-10. Dc Restorer circuit. 



3-38 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



level may vary between +8 V and +75 V, depending on the 
setting of the front-panel INTENSITY and READOUT 
INTENSITY controls. 



The ac waveform, now carrying both the grid-bias 
information and the Z-Axis drive information, is applied 
to a DC Restorer circuit in the High Voltage Module where 
it is raised to the high-voltage levels of the crt control grid. 



As the INTENSITY control is advanced, the amplitude 
of the square-wave Z-Axis signal increases accordingly. 
This increased signal amplitude decreases the difference 
between the upper and lower clamped levels of the ac 
waveform, and less charge is added to capacitor D. The 
decreased voltage across capacitor D decreases the potential 
difference between the control grid and the cathode, and 
more crt beam current is allowed to flow. Increased beam 
current increases the crt display intensity. 



DC RESTORATION. The DC Restorer circuit in the 
High Voltage Module is referenced to the crt cathode 
voltage via a connection within U1830. Capacitor C (in 
Figure 3-10), connected to pin 15 of U1830, initially 
charges to a level determined by the difference between 
the Z-Axis signal level and the crt cathode potential. The 
Z-Axis signal sets the level on the positive plate of capacitor 
C through R1920, CR1930, and R1941; the level on the 
negative plate is set by the crt cathode voltage through 
resistor E and diode A. Capacitor D is charged to a similar 
dc level through resistor F and R1922. 



When the ac waveform applied to pin 15 begins its 
transition from the lower clamped level (set by the Z-Axis 
signal) towards the upper clamped level (set by the Grid 
Bias potentiometer), the charge on capacitor C increases. 
The additional charge is proportional to the voltage differ- 
ence between the two clamped voltage levels. 



When the ac waveform begins its transition from the 
upper clamped level back to the lower clamped level, 
diode A becomes reverse biased. Diode B becomes forward 
biased, and an additional charge proportional to the 
negative excusion of the ac waveform (difference between 
the upper clamped level and the lower clamped level) is 
added to capacitor D through diode B and resistor G. The 
amount of charge added to capacitor D depends on the 
setting of the front-panel INTENSITY control, as it sets 
the lower clamping level of the ac waveform. This added 
charge determines the potential of the control grid with 
respect to the crt cathode. 



The potential difference between the control grid and 
tnc catnOuc controls the beam current anu tnus the display 
intensity. With no Z-Axis signal applied (INTENSITY 
control off), capacitor D will be charged to its maximum 
negative value, since the difference between the two 
clamped voltage levels is at its maximum value. This is the 
minimum intensity condition and reflects the setting of the 
Grid Bias potentiometer. During calibration, the Grid Bias 
pot is adjusted so that the difference between the upper 
clamping level (set by the Grid Bias pot) and the "no 
signal" level of the Z-Axis drive signal (VZOUT) produces a 
control grid bias that barely shuts off the crt electron beam. 



During the periods that capacitor C is charging and 
discharging, the control-grid voltage is held stable by the 
long-time-constant discharge path of capacitor D through 
resistor F. Any charge removed from capacitor D during 
the positive transitions of the ac waveform will be replaced 
on the negative transitions. 



The fast-rise and fast-fall transitions of the Z-Axis signal 
are coupled to the crt control grid through capacitor D. 
This ac-coupled fast-path signal quickly sends the crt 
electron beam to the new intensity level, then the slower 
DC Restorer path "cathes up" to handle the dc and low- 
frequency components of the Z-Axis drive signal. 



Neon lamps DS90 and DS91 prevent arcing inside the 
crt should the control grid potential or cathode potential 
be lost for any reason. 



CRT Control Circuits 

The CRT Control circuits provide the various potentials 
and signal attenuation factors that set up the electrical 
elements of the crt. The control circuitry is divided into 
two separate catagories: (1) level setting and (2) signal 
handling. The level-setting circuitry produces voltages and 
current levels necessary for the crt to operate, while the 
signal-handling portion is associated with changing crt 
signal levels. 



LEVEL-SETTING CIRCUITRY. Operational amplifier 
U1890B, transistor Q1980, and associated components 
form an edge-focus circuit that sets the voltages on the 
elements of the third quadrapole lens. The positive lens 
element is set to its operating potential by Edge Focus 
adjustment pot R1864 (via R1897). This voltage is also 
divided by R1893 and R1982 and applied to the non- 
inverting input of U1890B to control the voltage on the 
other element of the lens. 



The operational ampiirier and transistor are configured 
as a feedback amplifier, with R1891 and R1990 setting the 
stage gain. Gain of the amplifier is equal to the attenuation 
factor of divider network R1893 and R1892, so total over- 
all gain of the stage from the wiper of R1864 to the 
collector of Q1890 is unity. The offset voltage between lens 



3-39 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



elements is set by the ratio of R1891 and R1990 and the 
+10-V reference applied to R1990. This configuration 
causes the two voltages applied to the third quadrapole lens 
to track each other over the entire range of Edge Focus 
adjustment pot R1864. 



Other adjustable level-setting circuits include Y-Axis 
Alignment pot R1848, used to rotate the beam alignment 
after vertical deflection. This adjustment controls the 
amount of current through the Y-Axis Alignment coil 
around the neck of the crt and is set to produce precise 
perpendicular alignment between x- and y-axis deflections. 
The TRACE ROTATION adjustment R975 is a front- 
panel screwdriver-adjustable control. The effect of the 
adjustment is similar to the Y-Axis Alignment pot, but 
when adjusted, it rotates both the x-axis and the y-axis 
deflections of the trace on the face of the crt. A final 
adjustable level-setting control is the Geometry pot R1870, 
adjusted to optimize display geometry. The potential at 
pin 8 for the vertical shield internal to the crt is produced 
by zener diode VR1891 and associated components. 



SIGNAL-HANDLING CIRCUITRY. The crt termination 
adjustment R1301 is set to match the loading character- 
istics of the crt's vertical deflection structure to the Vertical 
Output Amplifier. 



the peak value of the rectified source voltage. For either 
configuration, the dc voltage supplied to the power supply 
inverter is the same. 



Thermistors RT1010 and RT1016 limit the surge 
current when the power supply is first turned on. As 
current flow warms the thermistors, their resistances 
decrease and have little effect on circuit operation. Spark- 
gap electrodes E1001 and E1002 are surge-voltage pro- 
tectors. If excessive source voltage is applied to the 
instrument, the spark-gaps conduct, and the extra current 
flow quickly exceeds the rating of F90. The fuse then 
opens to protect the instrument's power supply. The EMI 
(electromagnetic interference) filter, inductors L1011 and 
L1012, capacitors C1014 and C1016, and resistors R1011, 
R1014, and R1016 form a line-filter circuit. This filter, 
along with common-mode rejection transformer T1020, 
prevents power-line interference from entering the 
instrument and prevents power supply switching signals 
from entering the supply line. 



Preregulator Control 

The Preregulator Control circuit monitors the drive 
voltage applied to the Inverter output transformer T1060 
and holds it at the level that produces proper supply 
voltages at each of the secondary windings. 



LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 

The low voltages required by the 2465 are produced 
by a high-efficiency, switching power supply. This type of 
supply directly rectifies and stores charge from the ac 
line supply; then the stored charge is switched through a 
special transformer at a high rate, generating the various 
supply voltages. 



Line Rectifier 

Ac line voltages of either 115 V or 230 V may provide 
the primary power for the instrument, depending on the 
setting of the LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch S90 
(located on the instrument rear panel). Power Switch S350 
applies the selected line voitage to the power suppiy 
rectifier (CR1011). 



With the selector switch in the 115-V position, the 
rectifier and storage capacitors C1021 and C1022 operate 
as a full-wave voltage doubler. When operating in this 
configuration, each capacitor is charged on opposite half 
cycles of the ac input, and the voltages across the two 
capacitors in series will approximate the peak-to-peak value 
of the source voltage. For 230-V operation, switch S90 
connects the rectifier as a conventional bridge rectifier. 
Both capacitors charge on both input half cycles, and the 
voltage across C1021 and C1022 in series will approximate 



The Preregulator Control circuit consists primarily of 
control IC U1030, its switching buffers, and its power 
supply components. The control IC senses voltage on the 
primary winding of T2060 and varies the "on time" of a 
series-switching transistor, depending on whether the sensed 
voltage is too high or too low. The switching transistor 
Q1050, rectifier CR1050, choke T1050, and capacitor 
C1050 form a buck-switching regulator circuit. The output 
voltage at W1060 is proportional to the product of the 
rectified line voltage on C1020-C1022 and the duty cycle 
of Q1050. In normal operation, Q1050 is on about one-half 
of the time. When Q1050 is off, current flows to W1060 
and T1060 through CR1050. 



PREREGULATOR CONTROL POWER SUPPLY. Since 
the Preregulator control network controls supply startup 
and preregulates the secondary supplies, an independent 
power source must be established for it before any of the 
other power supplies will operate. The independent power 
supply for the control circuitry is composed of Q1021, 
Q1022, and the associated components. 



Initially, when instrument power is applied, the positive 
plate of capacitor C1025 is charged toward the positive 
rectified line voltage through R1020. The voltage at the 
base of Q1022 follows at a level determined by the voltage 
divider composed of R1022, R1024, CR1023, and the load 
within U1030. When the voltage across C1025 reaches 



3-40 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



about +21 V, the base voltage of Q1022 reaches +6.8 V and 
Q1022 turns on, saturating Q1021. The +21 V on the 
emitter of Q1021 appears at its collector and establishes the 
positive voltage supply for the Preregulator IC. With Q1021 
on, R1024 is placed in parallel with R1022, and both 
Q1022 and Q1021 remain saturated. 



The +2TV level begins to drain down as the control 
IC draws current from C1025. If the Preregulator Control 
IC doesn't start the switching supply (and thus recharge 
C1025 and C1023 via CR1022) by the time the voltage 
across C1025 reaches about +8 V, Q1021 will turn off. 
Resistor R1024 pulls the base of Q1022 low and turns 
that transistor off also. (Capacitor C1025 would only 
discharge low enough to turn off the transistors under a 
fault condition.) In this event, C1025 would then charge 
again to +21 V, and the start sequence would repeat. 
Normally, the control IC will start Inverter action before 
the +8-V level is reached, and current is drawn through 
T1050 via Q1050. This induces a current in the secondary 
winding of T1050 and charges C1025 positive via diode 
CR1022. The turns ratio of T1050 sets the secondary 
voltage at approximately +15 V; and, as long as the supply 
is being properly regulated, C1025 will be charged up to 
that level and held there. 

PREREGULATOR START-UP. As the supply for the 
Preregulator Control IC is established, an internal switching 
oscillator begins to run. The oscillator generates a repetitive 
triangular wave (as shown in Figure 3-11) at a frequency 
determined primarily by R1032 and C1032. The simplified 
schematic of Figure 3-12 illustrates the voltage control 
functions of U1030. 



As the Preregulator power supply turns on, capacitor 
C1034 charges from the +5-V reference level toward 
ground potential through R1034 and R1037. As it does, 
the voltage at pin 4 (one input of Dead-Time Comparator 
U1) will pass through the positive-peak value of the tri- 
angular waveform on the other input of the Dead-Time 
Comparator. The comparator will then begin outputting 
narrow pulses that become progressively wider as the 
voltage on pin 4 settles to zero volts. These pulses drive 
switching transistor Q1050, and their slow progression from 
narrow to wide causes the various secondary supplies to 
gradually build up to their final operating levels. The slow 
buildup prevents a turn-on current surge that would cause 
the current-limit circuitry to shut down the supply. 



During the startup, capacitor C1072 acts as a substantial 
load, and a relatively large current will flow in the windings 
of T1050 for the first few cycles of Preregulator switching. 
These strong current pulses ensure that storage capacitor 
C1066 becomes charged sufficiently to start the Inverter 
Drive circuit. Once the Inverter Drive stage is operating, 
the normal switching current through T1050 maintains 
the required charge on C1066. (The Inverter Drive power 
supply is discussed later in this description.) 



Dead-Time Comparator U1 is referenced at approxi- 
mately 0.1 V above the ground level at pin 4 (established 
when C1034 becomes fully charged) and outputs a narrow, 
negative-going pulse that turns off switching transistor 
Q1050 for a portion of each switching cycle. This off time 
ensures that flip-flop U1064B in the Inverter Drive circuit 
toggles every cycle (thereby maintaining the proper duty 
cycle), independent of the voltage conditions being sensed 
by the remainder of the voltage control circuitry. 



PREREGULATION. Once the initial charging at power- 
up is accomplished, as just described, the voltage-sensing 
circuitry begins controlling the Inverter switching action. 
The actual voltage sensing is done by error amplifier U2. 
The level at the center tap of output transformer T1060 is 
applied to pin 1 and is compared to the reference estab- 
lished by R1045 and R1046 at pin 2. If the sensed level 
at pin 1 is lower than the reference level at pin 2 (as it will 
always be for the first few switching cycles), the output 
of error-amplifier U2 will be LO. The LO, applied to the 
inverting input of U3, results in a long-duty-cycle drive 
signal to transistor Q1050 (via CR1030). Since the Inverter 
Drive stage will alternately turn either Q1060 or Q1070 on, 
relatively large current pulses will result in the primary 
winding of inverter output transformer T1060. 



These large current pulses, over the period of a few 
cycles, will increase the charge on the storage capacitors 
on the secondary side of the transformer and will reduce 
the current demand on the inverter output transformer. 
As the demand decreases, the voltage across the primary 
winding will increase until it reaches the point where the 
two inputs of U2 are at the same potential. At this point, 
the output of U2 (to U3) will settle to a level approxi- 
mately equal to the midpoint of the triangular waveform 
applied to the other input of U3. The resulting drive signal 
has an approximate 50% duty cycle and will respond to 
changes in either the ac line voltage or supply load con- 
ditions. Depending on the output levels sensed, the duty 
cycle of the drive signal will change (sensed level rises or 
falls with respect to the triangular waveform) to hold the 
secondary supplies at their proper levels. 



Opto-isolator U1040 and resistor R1044 form a control 
network that allows a voltage sensed at the feedback input 
(FB) to slightly alter the voltage-sense reference applied 
to pin 2 of U2. The FB signai is generated by the +5-V 
Inverter Feedback amplifier (U1371, diagram 10) and 
is directly related to the level of the +5-V D supply line. 
Base drive to the shunt transistor (in opto-isolator U1040) 
is increased should the FB signal go below its nominal 
value. Additional current is shunted around R1045 (via 
R1044) and raises the voltage-sense reference level to 
error-amplifier U2. This increases the voltage applied to 
the primary winding of the output transformer, since U2 
sensing depends on a balanced condition. Higher currents 
are induced in the secondary windings, and the secondary 



3-41 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



voltages begin to return to their nominal values. As the 
+5-V D line returns to its nominal level, base drive to the 
shunt transistor will be reduced and the voltage in the 
primary winding will follow. Should the FB signal level 
tend too high, opposite control responses occur. Further 
information about the FB signai is given in the +5 V 
Inverter Feedback description. 



Error amplifier U4 and the voltage divider composed 
of R1035 and R1031 provide a backup sensing circuit. 
Its operation is similar to that of error amplifier U2, just 
described, but it senses at a slightly higher level. As long as 
U2 is operating properly, U4 will be inactive. However, 
should a failure occur in the U2 sensing circuitry, the 
voltage on the primary winding of T1060 will rise to the 



sensing level at pin 15 of U4. Sense amplifier U4 will then 
take over, preventing a damaging over-voltage condition. 



Inverter Drive 

The Inverter Drive circuit performs the necessary 
switching to drive the Inverter output transformer. Like 
the Preregulator Control IC, the Inverter Drive circuit 
requires an independent power supply, since it must be 
operational before any of the secondary supply voltages 
can be generated. 



INVERTER DRIVE POWER SUPPLY. This power 
supply consists of Q1062, VR1062, and their associated 



SENSE LEVEL 



SENSE LEVEL 

SUPERIMPOSED 

ON OSCILLATOR'S 

OUTPUT WAVEFORM 

0.1V 

0V 

01050 
(SWITCH 
TRANSISTOR 
DRIVE 



01060 
DRIVE 



Q1070 
DRIVE 



LOW 



COMING UP 



NORMAL OPERATION 



TENDING HIGH 



ABOVE 
| REGULATION 
WINDOW 




MAXIMUM 
DRIVE- 
CONTROLLED 
BY U1 



w 



■%• 

DECREASING 

DRIVE- 
CONTROLLED 
BY U1 AND U2 



I 
w 



AVERAGE DRIVE- 
( - 50% DUTY CYCLE ) 



v 

DECREASING 

DRIVE- 
CONTROLLED 
BY U1 AND U2 



NO DRIVE- 
CONTROLLED 
BY U2 



3831 -07 



Figure 3-11. Timing relationships of the inverter Drive signals. 



3-42 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



components. As power is first applied, the initial charging 
current through T1050 induces a current in the transformer 
secondary winding (pins 8 and 9). The alternating current 
is rectified by the diode bridge composed of CR1062, 
CR1063, CR1064, and CR1065 and stored on C1066, 
providing power for the Inverter Drive circuitry. 



The current rectified by the diode bridge and stored on 
capacitor C1066 is regulated down to the required voltage 
level by R1061, VR1062, and Q1062. Zener diode VR1062 
references emitter-follower Q1062 and holds the supply 
output at approximately +1 1.4 V. 



When the Preregulator Control IC turns switching tran- 
sistor Q1050 on for the first time, the charge stored on 
C1066 during the initial charging period is sufficient to 
properly turn on one of the current-switching transistors 
(either Q1060 or Q1070) for the first cycle. After that, 
the alternating drive signals continue to induce current into 
the secondary winding of T1050 to provide operating 
power as long as the instrument is turned on. 



INVERTER DRIVE GENERATOR. The Inverter Drive 
generator consists of U1062, U1064, U1066, switching 
transistors Q1060 and Q1070, and the associated com- 
ponents. The circuitry alternately switches current through 
each leg of the output transformer primary winding and 
produces the ac current required for transformer action. 



A 



0V 



./WA 



+5V 



FB 



> 



U1040 



sz 



V 




osc 



\ 



ii_0.iv 



15 



16 



U4 





U1 



+V 



U2 






Q1050 



U3 



U1030 




i / o 



•< 



Q1030 



I 



• * 



Q1060 




SWITCH DRIVE 
SIGNALS 



Q1070 




"-0 



T1060 



5831-08 



Figure 3-12. Simplified schematic of control network. 



3-43 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Out-of-phase input signals to comparator U1062Ccome 
from two resistive voltage dividers placed in either leg of 
one secondary winding of T1050. The comparator detects 
the phase changes (crossover points) of the secondary 
current caused as Q1050 switches on and off. Every 
complete on-off cycle of Q1050 produces a positive clock 
at pin 14 of U1062C that toggles flip-flop U1064B. The 
toggling alternately turns switching transistors Q1060 and 
Q1070 on, each with an approximate 50% duty cycle. 



CR1132 is referenced at approximately +45 V through 
diode CR1131 (to the +42-V unregulated supply). As the 
positive half cycle from the 42-V secondary winding 
(actually about +45 V peak) is applied to the negative plate 
of C1130, the positive plate is elevated to a peak value of 
approximately +90 V. Diode CR1132 becomes forward 
biased and storage capacitor C1132 is charged to about 
+90 V. Following cycles replenish the charge drawn off by 
the loads on the +87-V supply line. 



Comparators U1062A and U1062B, at the Q and Q 
output of the flip-flop, detect the precise crossing point of 
the toggling drive signals and ensure that only one switching 
transistor will be on at any one time. These mutually- 
exclusive drive signals are buffered by inverters U1066A 
and U1066B and applied to switching transistors Q1060 
and Q1070 to alternately turn them on and off at one-half 
the switching rate of Q1050. By alternately switching 
opposite ends of the primary winding to ground, the 
current flowing through switching transistor Q1050 will 
flow alternately in each half of the primary winding. This 
produces ac voltages at the secondary windings that are 
rectifiied, providing the various unregulated dc supply 
voltages. 



Current Limit 

The Current Limit circuit, composed of transistor 
Q1040 and the associated components, limits the maximum 
current flow in the output transformer to about 1 ampere. 
Resistor R1040 (connected to the Preregulator Control 
IC +15-V supply) forward biases germanium diode CR1040 
and applies approximately +0.3 V across the base-to-emitter 
junction of Q1040. Current flowing to the output trans- 
former develops a voltage drop across R1050 that adds to 
the bias developed by CR1040. As the current to the 
transformer increases, the voltage drop across R1050 also 
increases until, at around 1 A, the combined voltage drop 
across R1050 and CR1040 forward biases transistor Q1040. 
The base of Q1022 is pulled negative through R1042, and 
the +15-V supply for the Preregulator IC turns off (see 
Preregulator Control discription). The power supply will 
try to restart itself; but, as long as the excessive-current 
condition persists, the current-limit circuit will keep 
shutting the supply down, protecting the instrument. 



Rectifiers 

The Rectifiers convert the alternating current from the 
secondary windings of the inverter output transformer to 
the various dc supply voltages required by the instrument. 
Rectification is done by conventional diode rectifier 
circuits, and filtering is done by conventional LC networks. 



The +87-V unregulated supply is produced by a voltage- 
doubler circuit. The positive plate of C1 130 at the anode of 



Line Signal 

A sample of the ac line voltage is coupled to the Trigger 
circuit by transformer T1229 and provides the LINE TRIG 
signal to the Trigger hybrid. Transformer current is limited 
to a safe value by resistors R1014 and R 1015 placed in 
series with the primary winding leads. The transformer's 
output characteristics are matched to the input of the 
Trigger circuit hybrid by R1208 and C1208. 



Line Up Signal 

The circuit composed of Q1029, opto-isolator U1029, 
and their associated components, detects when power has 
been applied to the instrument and the Preregulator 
Control power supply is functioning properly. When the 
rectified line voltage reaches proper operating voltage, the 
voltage divider composed of R1027 and R1028 forward 
biases Q1029. As soon as the Preregulator Control power 
supply turns on, current flows through R1029, Q1029, 
and the opto-isolator LED. The illuminated LED saturates 
transistor U1029 and the LINE UP signal to the Power-Up 
Delay circuit (diagram 1) is pulled HI, indicating that the 
Preregulator Control circuit should now be functioning 
properly. 



POWER DOWN. When instrument power is turned off, 
the voltage across the primary storage capacitors (C1021 
and C1022) begins to fall as the capacitors discharge. As 
the voltage drops, the bias current through R1027 to the 
base of Q1029 also drops until the bias voltage across 
R1028 reaches a point about 2 V above the average trans- 
former drive level at pin 2 of U1029. At this point, Q1029 
turns off, and the LINE UP signal to the Power-up Delay 
circuit goes LO. This LO signals the Microprocessor that it 
should start its power down routine. 



The Line Up circuit tells the Microprocessor that the 
primary capacitors have started discharging while there is 
still a stored charge (set by R1027 and R1028) about 40% 
in excess of that required to keep the power supply voltages 
in regulation. This allows the Microprocessor to complete 
the power-down sequence before the supplies drop below 
their normal operating levels. Further information about 
the power-down sequence is given in the Microprocessor 
Reset Control description. 



344 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



LOW VOLTAGE REGULATORS 

The Low Voltage Regulators remove ac noise and ripple 
from the various unregulated dc supply voltages. Each 
regulator output is automatically current limited if the 
output current exceeds the requirements of a normally 
functioning instrument. This limiting prevents any further 
component damage. 



+10 V Reference 

Each of the power-supply regulators control their 
respective outputs by comparing their output voltages to 
a known reference level. In order to maintain stable supply 
voltages, the reference voltage must itself be highly stable. 
The circuit composed of U1290, U1300C, and associated 
components establishes this reference. 



Resistor R1400 and capacitor C1400 form an RC filter 
network that smooths the unregulated +15-V supply before 
it is applied to voltage-reference IC U1290. The +2.5-V 
output from pin 2 of U1290 is applied to the noninverting 
input of operational amplifier U1300C. The output of 
U1300C is the source of the +10-V reference level used 
by the various regulators. The output level is set by the 
voltage divider formed by R1291, R1293, and potenti- 
ometer R1292. The Volt Ref Adjust pot in the divider 
allows the reference level to be precisely set. Zener diode 
VR1292 prevents the reference from exceeding +11 V 
should a failure in the reference circuitry occur. 



+87 V Regulator 

The +87 V Regulator is composed of Q1220, Q1221, 
Q1222, Q1223, U 1281 A, and the associated components. 
The circuit regulates and limits both the voltage and current 
of the supply output. 



Initially, as power is applied, the voltage applied to pin 2 
of U 1281 A from the voltage divider formed by R1227 and 
R1228 is lower than the +10-V reference level applied to 
pin 3. The output of U 1281 A is forced high, reverse biasing 
the base-emitter junction of Q1222 and turning it com- 
pletely off. With Q1222 off, all the current through R1212 
is supplied as base current to Darlington transistor pair 
Q1221 and Q1220, and maximum current flows in series- 
pass transistor Q1220. This charges up the various loads on 
the supply line, and the output level charges positive. 

As the regulator output charges toward +87 V, the 
voltage divider applies a positive-going voltage to the 
inverting input of U1281A. When the output level reaches 
+87 volts, the inverting input equals the +10-V reference 
at the noninverting input. The output voltage at pin 1 of 
U1281A will go negative and the base-emitter junction of 



Q1222 will be biased into the active region. As Q1222 turns 
on, base drive for the Darlington pair (Q1221 and pass 
transistor Q1220) is reduced. The output will be held at 
the level required for voltage at the two inputs of amplifier 
U1281A to be in balance (+87 V). 



Current limiting is a foldback design and is perfromed 
by Q1223 and its associated components. Under normal 
current demand conditions, Q1223 is off. If the regulator 
output current exceeds approximately 100 mA (as it might 
if a component fails), the voltage drop across R1221 and 
CR1220 reaches a point that forward biases Q1223 via the 
bias divider formed by R1222 and R1223. As Q1223 turns 
on, a portion of the base-drive current to Q1221 is shunted 
away by Q1223. This reduces the base-drive current (and 
thus the output current) of series-pass transistor Q1220. 



+42 V Regulator 

The circuit configuration and operation of the +42 V 
Regulator is identical to that of the +82 V Regulator. 
Current limiting of the +42-V supply occurs at approxi- 
mately 400 mA. Base drive to Darlington pair Q1241 and 
Q1240 is via R1244 and is dependent on proper operation 
of the +87 V Regulator. This dependency ensures that the 
relative polarities of the two supplies are never reversed 
(preventing semiconductor-junction damage in the associ- 
ated load circuitry). 



+15 V Regulator 

The +15V Regulator uses three-terminal regulator 
U1260 and operational amplifiers U1371A and U1371B, 
arranged as voltage sensors, to achieve regulation of the 
+15-V supply. The three-terminal regulator holds its output 
voltage at pin 2 at 1.25 volts more positve than the refer- 
ence input level at pin 1. The voltage at the reference pin 
is established by current flow in either diode CR1262 or 
CR1263. 



Resistors R1261 and R1262 at the regulator output 
divide the +15-V level down for comparison with the +10-V 
reference applied to pin 5 of operational amplifier U1371B. 
When the input voltage at pin 6 (supplied by the voltage 
divider) is lower than the +10-V reference, the output of 
amplifier U1371B is high and the output voltage of U 1260 



In+nr /-.i i + r-.i 



Id dllUVVCU lu I lie. y-\3 liic icyuiaiui uuipui icaunco ■ i v^ v, 

the voltage on pin 6 of U1371B approaches the level on 
pin 5, and the amplifier begins sinking current away from 
the reference pin of the three-terminal regulator via diode 
CR1263. This lowers the voltage on the reference pin and 
holds the ouput at +15 V. 



The other voltage-sensing amplifier (U1371A) ensures 
that the relative polarity between the +15-V supply and the 



3-45 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



+42-V supply is maintained, preventing component damage 
in the load circuitry. Should the +42-V supply be pulled 
below +15 V (excessive loading or supply failure), the 
voltage at pin 3 of U1371A falls below the voltage at pin 2 
and the amplifier output voltage goes low. This forward 
biases CRT 262 and lowers the reference voltage for U1260, 
reducing the output voltage. 



-8 V Regulator 

Operation of the —8 V Regulator is similar to that of the 
+87 V and +42 V Regulators. Due to the lower operating 
voltages of the —8 V Regulator, the common-base transistor 
present in both the +87 V and the +42 V Regulators is 
not required. Current limiting in the — 8-V supply occurs 
at about 480 mA. 



Current limiting for the +15-V supply is provided by 
the internal circuitry of the three-terminal regulator. 



+5 V Regulator 

Regulation of the +5-V supply is provided by a circuit 
similar to those of the +87 V and the +42 V Regulators. 
As long as the relative polarity between the +15-V and the 
+5-V supplies is maintained, base drive to Q1281 is supplied 
through R1283. The current through Q1281 provides base 
drive for series-pass transistor Q1280. 



When voltage-sense amplifier U1300B detects that the 
output voltage has reached +5 V, it begins shunting base- 
drive current away from Q1281 via CR1281 and holds the 
output voltage constant. 



Current limiting for the +5-V supply is done by U1300A 
and associated components. Under normal current-demand 
conditions, the output of U1300A is high and diode 
CR1282 is reverse biased. However, should the current 
through current-sense resistor R1281 reach approximately 
2 A, the voltage developed across R1281 will raise the 
voltage at pin 2 of U1300A (via divider R1282 and R1286) 
to a level equal to that at pin 3. This causes the output of 
U1300A to go low, forward biasing CR1282. This sinks 
base drive current away from Q1281 and lowers the output 
current in series-pass transistor Q1280. 



-15 V Regulator 

Operation of the —15 V Regulator, composed of three- 
terminal regulator U1330, operational amplifier U1270C, 
and their associated components, is similar to that of the 
+15 V Regulator with the following major changes. The 
control voltage at the three-terminal regulator's reference 
pin (pin 1) is established by the current through series- 
resistors R1333 and R1334. The reference pin is clamped 
by CR1332 at about -5.6 V should a failure in the sensing 
network occur. (Clamping also prevents latchup of the 
operational amplifier during startup of the power supply.) 
Finally, the sensing divider formed by R1331 and R1332 is 
referenced to the +10-V reference instead of ground to 
enable sensing of negative voltage. 



—5 V Regulator 

Operation of the —5 V Regulator is similar to that of the 
+5 V Regulator. Current limiting in the — 5-V supply occurs 
at about 2 A. 



+5 V Inverter Feedback 

Operational amplifier U1371C and associated com- 
ponents are configured as a frequency-compensated voltage- 
sensing network. The circuit monitors the +5-V digital 
power supply line from the rectifiers and provides feed- 
back to the Preregulator Control IC (U1030) via opto- 
isolator U1040 (both on diagram 9). The feedback is used 
to slightly vary the voltage-sensing characteristics of the 
Preregulator Control circuitry. The feedback (FB) signal 
slightly varies the voltage to the Inverter output trans- 
former and holds the output of the 5-V secondary windings 
at an optimum level. Output levels of the other secondary 
windings are related to the +5-V D level and are also held 
at their optimum values. This technique minimizes power 
losses in the series-pass transistors and increases regulator 
reliability. 

Power-Up Delay 

The Power-Up Delay circuit, composed of Q1370, 
Q1376, U1371D, and the associated components, ensures 
that the various regulated power supplies have time to 
reach their proper operating voltages before signaling the 
Microprocessor that the supplies are up. 



When power is first applied, the LINE UP signal from 
the Preregulator Control circuit goes HI, indicating that 
the power switch has been closed and that ample supply 
voltage is available for driving the Inverter transformer. 
The HI is applied to the base of Q1370, but since the 
collector is not properly biased yet, no transistor current 
will flow. As the Inverter begins to run, the various voltages 
from the secondary rectifiers begin coming up to their 
proper levels. A +2. 5-V reference voltage is applied to 
operational amplifier U1371Dpin 12 and forces the output 
high, biasing Q1376 on. The resulting LO at the transistor's 
collector signals the Microprocessor that the power supplies 
are not yet stable. 



3-46 



REV OCT 1983 



Theory of Operation— 2465 Service 



Before any of the Low Voltage Regulators may function 
properly, the +10-V reference voltage must be established 
as previously described. When the +15 V Regulator turns 
on, current flows through Q1370, and pin 2 of U1371D is 
pulled above the +2.5-V reference through divider R1370 
and R1372. The output of U1371D goes low, turning off 
Q1376. The PWR UP signal at the collector goes HI, 
signaling the Microprocessor that the power supplies should 
now be operating properly. 



The back EMF produced by the motor field windings 
is also proportional to motor speed. This back EMF is 
rectified by diodes CR1691, CR1692, CR1694, and 
CR1696 and is applied to the base node of Q1698 via 
R1697. This current opposes the normal bias current of 
the transistor and acts as a form of negative feedback to 
stablilize the motor speed from cycle to cycle. 



When power to the instrument is turned off, the LINE 
UP signal goes LO (as explained in the Line Up Signal 
description). The falling LINE UP signal turns Q1370 off 
and drives the output of U1371D high. The output level 
from U1371D turns on Q1376and pulls the PWR UP signal 
to the Microprocessor LO. This LO initiates the power- 
down sequence used to store the current front-panel setup 
conditions in EAROM and to shut down the instrument in 
an orderly fashion. The delay between the time that the 
PWR UP signal goes LO and when the regulated power 
supplies fall below their normal operating levels provides 
ample time for the Microprocessor to complete the power- 
down sequence. 



Fan Circuit 

The fan motor used in this instrument is a brushless, 
dc motor that uses Hall-effect devices to control its rotation 
speed. The two Hall-effect devices sequentially drive the 
four field-control transistors {U1690A, B, C, and D) which 
in turn control field current to the fan motor windings. The 
fan's speed is determined by the amount of drive current 
supplied by Q1698 and varies with ambient temperature. 



POWER DISTRIBUTION 



Schematic diagrams 11 and 12 illustrate the power 
distribution of the 2465. The connections to the labeled 
boxes (representing the hybrids and ICs) show the power 
connections to each device, while connections to non- 
power lines are shown by the component and schematic 
number. Power supply decoupling is done with traditional 
LRC networks as shown on the diagrams. 



Several intermediate supply voltages are generated by 
devices shown on diagrams 11 and 12. An approximate 
+32-volt supply for the A and B Sweeps is developed by 
emitter-follower Q700 and its associated components. 
Zener diodes VR125 and VR225 develop approximate 
+6.2-volt supplies for the CH 1 and CH 2 Preamps respec- 
tively, and zener diode VR2805 establishes an approximate 
-6.8-volt supply for U2800 and U2805. 



As the ambient temperature in the cabinet increases, 
the resistance of RT1696 decreases, and additional base 
drive is provided to Q1698. The transistor conducts harder, 
and the fan's motor speed is increased to provide more 
cooling capacity. 



INTERCONNECTIONS 



Schematic diagram 13 illustrates the circuit board 
interconnections of the 2465. Connector numbers and 
cabling types are shown. 



3-47 



Section 4 — 2465 Service 



VERIFICATION PROCEDURE 



iNTKvvUv i i^/iM 



This procedure is used to verify proper operation of instrument controls and to check the instrument's performance against 
the requirements listed in the "Specification" (Section 1). This procedure verifies instrument function and may be used to 
determine need for readjustment. These checks may also be used as an acceptance test and as a preliminary troubleshooting 
aid. 

Removing the wrap-around cabinet is not necessary to perform this procedure. All checks are made using the operator 
accessible front- and rear-panel controls and connectors. 

Within the procedure, steps to verify proper operation of an instrument control or function that is not specified in the 
"Specification" section begin with the word "VERIFY". These functions ARE NOT specifications and should not be interpreted 
as such. Steps to check performance specifications begin with the word "CHECK". 



PREPARATION 

Test equipment items 1 through 1 8 listed in Table 4-1 are 
required to perform this procedure. The specific pieces of 
equipment required to perform the checks within each sec- 
tion are listed at the beginning of that section. The item 
numbers in parenthesis next to each piece of equipment 
refer to the numbered equipment list of Table 4-1 . Items 19 
through 23 are used only for instrument calibration (see the 
Adjustment Procedure in Section 5). 



or calibrated by a qualified service technician before per- 
forming this procedure. 



The procedure is divided into sections to permit function- 
al and performance verifications of individual sections of the 
instrument without performing the entire procedure. Perform 
all steps within a section, both in the sequence presented 
and in their entirety to ensure that control settings are cor- 
rect for the following step. 



Before performing this procedure, ensure that the LINE 
VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch is set for the ac power 
source being used (see "Preparation for Use" in Section 2). 
Connect the instrument to be checked and the test equip- 
ment to an appropriate power source. Turn the instrument 
on and ensure that no error message is displayed on the crt. 
If an error message is present, have the instrument repaired 



When performing partial procedures, the Initial Control 
Settings at the first of the section should be setup first; then 
make any changes noted at the first of the subsection to be 
performed. When performing the procedures in sequence, 
merely change those controls that have changed from the 
previous step. 



4-1 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



Table 4-1 
Test Equipment Required 



Item and 
Description 


Minimum Specification 


Use 


Example of Applica- 
ble Test Equipment 


1 . Variable Power 
Supply 


Variable output voltage: 0V to +16V. 


Check input overload 
switching. 


TEKTRONIX PS 503A. 


2. Leveled Sine-Wave 
Generator (Primary) 


Frequency: 50 kHz to 250 MHz. Output: V 
to 5 V. Reference frequency: 50 kHz. 


Check bandwidth and 
triggering. 


TEKTRONIX SG 503. 


3. Calibration 
Generator 


Fast-rise, low-abberation amplitudes: to 1 V. 
Rise time: 1 ns or less. Repetition rate: 
1 kHz to 100 kHz. Precision amplitudes: 
0.01 V to 50 V ±0.25%. 


Signal source for gain 
and transient response. 


TEKTRONIX PG 506. 


4. Leveled Sine-Wave 
Generator 
(Secondary) 


Frequency: 245 to 500 MHz. Output: V to 
5 V. Reference frequency: 50 kHz. 


Check bandwidth and 
triggering. 


TEKTRONIX SG 504 
with Leveling Head. 


5. Function Generator 


Repetition rate: 1 kHz to 1 MHz. Output to 
15 Vp-p. 


Check triggers and 
coupling. 


TEKTRONIX FG 501 A. 


6. Time-Mark 
Generator 


Markers: 2 ns to 5 s in a 1-2-5 sequence. 
Marker accuracy: ±0.1%. 


Check horizontal timing. 


TEKTRONIX TG 501 


7. Oscilloscope with 
P6131 10X Standard 
Accessory Probe. 


Bandwidth: 300 MHz. General Purpose. 


Check power supply rip- 
ple and output signals. 
Troubleshooting. 


TEKTRONIX 2465. 


8. T-Connector 


Impedance: 50 ft. Connectors: BNC. 


Signal interconnection. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 103-0030-00. 


9. Precision BNC 
Cable 


Impedance: 50 ft. Connectors: BNC. 
Length: 36 in. 


Signal interconnection. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 012-0482-00. 


10. BNC Cable 
(2 required) 


Impedance: 50 ft. Connectors: BNC 
Length: 42 in. 


Signal interconnection. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 012-0057-01 


1 1 . Dual-Input Coupler 


Connectors: BNC female-to-dual-BNC male. 


Signal interconnection. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 067-0525-02 


12. Termination 
(2 required) 


Impedance: 50 ft. Connectors: BNC. 


Signal interconnection. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 011-0049-01. 


13. Adapter 


Subminiature probe-tip-to-GR 50 ft. 


Signal interconnection. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 017-0520-00. 


14. Adapter 


GR-to-BNC female. 


Signal interconnection. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 017-0064-00. 


15. Adapter 


Connectors: BNC female-to-dual banana. 


Signal interconnection. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 103-0090-00. 


16. Attenuator 


Attenuation factor: 2X. Impedance: 50 ft. 
Connectors: BNC. 


Signal attenuation. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 011-0069-02. 


17. Attenuator 


Attenuation factor: 5X. Impedance: 50 ft. 
Connectors: BNC. 


Signal attenuation. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 011-0060-02. 


18. Attenuator 


Attenuation factor: 10X. Impedance: 50 ft. 
Connectors: BNC. 


Signal attenuation. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 011-0059-02. 



4-2 



REV MAY 1984 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



Table 4-1 (cont) 



Item and 
Description 


Minimum Specification 


Use 


Example of Applica- 
ble Test Equipment 


19. Digital Multimeter 
(DMM) 


DC volts range to +20 V. Accuracy ±0.2%. 


Check power supplies 
and CALIBRATOR. 


TEKTRONIX DM 502A. 


20. Low-Capacitance 
Alignment Tool 


Shaft length: 2 in. 


Adjust variable resistors 
and capacitors. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 003-0675-00. 


21. 1X Probe 


Attenuation: 1X. Bandpass: <20 MHz. 


Check power supply 
ripple. 


TEKTRONIX 
P6101. 


22. Normalizer 


Input resistance: 1 MQ. Input capacitance: 
15 pf. 


Check input 
capacitance. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 067-0537-00. 


23. Tunnel Diode 
Pulser 


Rise time: 125 ps or less. 


Check transient 
response. 


TEKTRONIX Part 
Number 067-0681-01. 



REV OCT 1983 



4-3 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



VERTICAL 



Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) 




Power Supply (Item 1 ) 


Dual-Input Coupler (Item 11) 


Primary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (Item 2) 


50 Q BNC Termination (Item 12) 


Calibration Generator (Item 3) 


Mini Probe Tip-to-BNC Adapter (Item 13) 


Secondary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (Item 4) 


BNC Female-to-BNC Female Adapter (Item 14) 


P6131 10X Probe (supplied with 2465) (Item 7) 


BNC Female-to-Dual Banana Adapter (Item 15) 


Precision 50 Q BNC Cable (Item 9) 


2X Attenuator (Item 16) 


50 $2 BNC Cable (Item 10) 


5X Attenuator (Item 17) 




1 0X Attenuator (Item 18) 



Initial Control Settings. 

Control settings not listed do not affect the procedure. 
Set: 



VERTICAL MODE 




CH 1 


On (button in) 


CH 2, CH 3, CH 4, 




ADD, and INVERT 


Off (buttons out) 


CHOP/ALT 


ALT (button out) 


20 MHz BW LIMIT 


Off (button out) 


VOLTS/DIV 




CH 1 and CH 2 


1 V 


CH 1 and CH 2 VAR 


In detent 


CH 3 and CH 4 


0.1 V (buttons out) 


Input Coupling 




CH 1 and CH 2 


1 Mft GND 


A and B SEC/DIV 


1 ms (knobs locked) 


A and B SEC/DIV VAR 


In detent 


X10 MAG 


Off (button out) 


At and AV 


Off (press and release until 




associated readout Is off) 


TRACKING 


Off (button out) 


TRACE SEP 


Fully CW 


TRIGGER 




HOLDOFF 


Fully CCW 


LEVEL 


Midrange 


SLOPE 


+ (plus) 


A/B TRIG SELECT 


A 


MODE 


AUTO LVL 


SOURCE 


VERT 


COUPLING 


no 



1. Verify CH 1 and CH 2, 50 Q OVERLOAD 
Protection. 

a. Connect the Power Supply to the CH 1 OR X input 
connector via a 50 12 BNC cable and a BNC female-to-dual 
banana adapter. 



b. Using the CH 1 VERTICAL POSITION control, posi- 
tion the trace on the bottom horizontal graticule line. 



c. Change the CH 1 Input Coupling switch to 1 M12 DC. 



d. Turn the Power Supply on. 



e. Adjust the Power Supply output level until the CH 1 
trace rises to 1 division above the center graticule line 
( + 5V). 



f. Change the CH 1 Input Coupling switch to 50 12 DC. 



g. VERIFY — For a period of one minute, the readout dis- 
play does not indicate any overload condition (50 12 
OVERLOAD). 



h. Change the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV control to 5 V and the 
CH 1 Input Coupling to 1 M12 DC. 



i. Increase the Power Supply output level until the CH 1 
trace rises to the center graticule line (+20 V). 



4-4 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 




b. Connect the CALIBRATOR output signal to the CH 1 
OR X input connector using a 1X probe. 



To prevent damage to the input circuitry when in 50 Q 
DC, the 20 V source must not be applied to the CH 1 
OR X or CH 2 input connectors for longer than 15 
seconds. If the automatic OVERLOAD switching does 
not occur within 15 seconds, turn the Power Supply 
off immediately. 



c. Position the ground-reference trace 2 divisions below 
the center horizontal graticule line. 



d. Set the CH 1 Input Coupling switch to 1 Mfi DC. 



j. Set the CH 1 Input Coupling switch to 50 fi DC. 



k. VERIFY— Approximately 10 seconds after the CH 1 
input coupling switch is set to 50 fi DC, the readout display 
indicates "50 fi OVERLOAD", the CH 1 Input Coupling 
switch changes to 1 Mfi GND automatically, and the trace 
returns to the bottom horizontal graticule line. 



e. CHECK — Displayed signal is vertically centered and 
has an amplitude of 3.88 to 4.12 divisions. 



f. Set the CH 1 Input Coupling to the upper 1 Mfi GND 
position . 



g. Using the CH 1 POSITION control, align the trace 
with the center horizontal graticule line. 



I. Turn the Power Supply Off. 



h. Set the CH 1 Input Coupling switch to 1 Mfi AC. 



m. Disconnect the Power Supply. 



n. Clear the OVERLOAD condition by pressing up on the 
CH 1 Input Coupling switch. 



i. CHECK — Displayed signal is a tilted square wave, 
4.36 to 5.37 divisions in amplitude, vertically centered on the 
graticule. 



j. Move the probe to the CH 2 input connector. 



o. VERIFY— The CH 1, 1 Mfi DC indicator is lit and the 
readout display no longer indicates "50 fi OVERLOAD". 



k. Set the VERTICAL MODE switches to deselect CH 1 
and display CH 2. 



p. Set the VERTICAL MODE switches to display CH 2 
and repeat parts a through o to verify 50 fi OVERLOAD 
protection for that channel. 



I. Repeat parts c through i for CH 2. 



m. Disconnect the test setup. 



2. Check CH 1 and CH 2 Low-Frequency AC 
Coupling. 



a. Set: 

VERTICAL MODE 
CH 1 
CH2 

A and B SEC/DiV 

VOLTS/DIV 
CH 1 and CH 2 

Input Coupling 
CH 1 and CH 2 



In (button in) 
Off (button out) 

1 ms (knobs locked) 



0.1 V 



3. Check CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTS/DIV, CH 2 INVERT, 
AV and TRIGGER LEVEL Readout Accuracies, 
Variable VOLTS/DIV, Vertical Linearity, and ADD. 

a. Set: 



1 Mfi GND 



Input Coupling 
CH 1 and CH 2 

VERTICAL MODE 
BW LIMIT 

AV 

VOLTS/DIV 

CH 1 and CH 2 

A and B SEC/DIV 



1 Mfi AC 

On (button in) 

On (press and release for a 
AV readout) 

2mV 

1 ms (knobs locked) 



REV JUL 1984 



4-5 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



TRIGGER 
MODE 



AUTO 



8. CHECK— Vertical Deflection Accuracy (measured 
against the graticule) and AV Readout Accuracy are 
within the limits listed in Table 4-2. 



NOTE 

The instrument must have had at least 20 minutes 
warmup prior to performing the following steps. 



b. Press up and momentarily hold the CH 1 and CH 2 
Input Coupling switches in their 1 MO AC positions until a 
moving dot display replaces the normal signal and readout 
displays (for approximately 15 seconds). This performs a 
DC Balance of CH 1 and CH 2. 



c. When the signal and readout displays automatically 
return to normal, set the CH 1 and CH 2 Input Coupling to 
1 MQ DC. 



d. Connect the Calibration Generator to the CH 1 OR X 
input connector via a 50 fi BNC cable. Do not use a 
termination. 



e. CHECK— CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTS/DIV, AV, and TRIG- 
GER LEVEL readout accuracies as follows: 

1 . Set VOLTS/DIV control to the first position listed in 
Table 4-2. 

2. Set the Calibration Generator STD AMPLITUDE 
output level to the corresponding Standard Ampli- 
tude Input Level in Table 4-2. 

NOTE 

To properly verify TRIGGER LEVEL 
Readout Accuracy, the Calibration Gen- 
erator's STD AMPLITUDE output must 
have rising and falling transition times 
(10% to 90%) > 20 ns. No overshoot 
should appear on the waveform. 

3. Verify that the generator output meets the require- 
ments noted above. 

4. Return the A and B SEC/DIV switch to 1 ms (knobs 
locked). 

5. Use the VERTICAL POSITION control to set the 
bottom of the signal 2 divisions below graticule 
center. 

6. Rotate the AREF OR DLY POS control to align the 
reference cursor with the bottom of the waveform. 

7. Rotate the A control to align the A cursor with the 
top of the signai display. 



9. Set the TRIGGER LEVEL control at the most posi- 
tive voltage that produces a barely triggered, jittering 
display for each position of the SLOPE switch. 

10. CHECK— The A Trigger Level readings (see Figure 
2-8) are within the limits given in the + Peak column 
of Table 4-2. 

11. Set the TRIGGER LEVEL control at the most nega- 
tive voltage that produces a barely triggered, jittering 
display for each position of the SLOPE switch. 

12. CHECK— The A Trigger Level readings are with- 
in the limits given in the —Peak column of Table 4-2. 

13. Set the TRIGGER LEVEL for a stable display. 

14. Pull the SEC/DIV knob out and set the B TRIGGER 
MODE to TRIG AFT DLY. 

15. Adjust AREF OR DLY POS control for a delay read- 
out of 0.000 ms. 

16. Set the TRIGGER LEVEL control to the most posi- 
tive voltage that produces an intensified point on the 
waveform display for each position of the SLOPE 
switch. 

17. CHECK — The B Trigger Level readings are with- 
in the limits given in the +Peak column of Table 4-2. 

18. Set the TRIGGER LEVEL control to the most nega- 
tive voltage that produces an intensified point on the 
waveform display for each position of the SLOPE 
switch. 

19. CHECK— The B Trigger Level readings are with- 
in the limits given in the —Peak column of Table 4-2. 

20. Push the B SEC/DIV knob in. 

21. Change the VOLTS/DIV switch to the next position 
listed in Table 4-2. 

22. Set the Calibration Generator to the corresponding 
signal amplitude setting. 

23. Press and release the AV pushbutton to reobtain the 
AV readout display. 

24. Repeat subparts 5 through 23 of part e for each 
VOLTS/DIV setting listed in Table 4-2. 

25. Set the TRIGGER COUPLING switch to NOISE 
REJ. 



4-6 



REV JUN 1983 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



26. Set the CH 1 and CH 2 Input Coupling switches to 
50 mV. 

27. CHECK — Trigger Level Readout is within the limits 
given in Table 4-2 for NOISE REJ Coupling. 



j. Set the VERTICAL POSITION control to align the top 
edge of the display with the top graticule line. 



k. CHECK— Signal display amplitude is 1.9 to 2.1 
divisions. 



f. Return the TRIGGER COUPLING switch to DC. 



g. Set the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV switch and the Calibration 
Generator output level to produce a vertical signal display 5 
divisions in amplitude. 



I. Set the VERTICAL POSITION control to align the bot- 
tom edge of the signal display with the bottom graticule line. 



m. CHECK — Signal display amplitude is 1.9 to 2.1 
divisions. 



h. CHECK — Display amplitude reduces to 2 divisions or 
less when the VOLTS/DIV VAR control (of the channel un- 
der test) is rotated fully CCW. Return the VOLTS/DIV VAR 
control to its maximum CW (detent) position. 



n. Move the test signal to CH 2 and set the VERTICAL 
MODE controls to display CH 2. 



i. Set the Calibration Generator output level and VERTI- 
CAL POSITION controls for a 2-division display vertically 
centered on the graticule. Use the CH 1 VAR control if nec- 
essary to obtain the correct display amplitude. 



o. Repeat parts e through m for CH 2. 



p. Rotate the AREF OR DLY control CCW until the 
cursor stops moving. 



Table 4-2 

Accuracy Limits 

CH 1, CH 2, CH 2 INVERT, and Delta Volts Readouts 



VOLTS/ 
DIV 


Stand- 
ard 

Ampli- 
tude 
Input 
Level 


Vertical 
Deflection 
Accuracy 
(±2% in 
divisions) 


Delta Volts 
Readout 
Accuracy 
(limits) 
1.25% +.03 div 


Limits of Trigger LEVEL 
Readout 


Switch 
Setting 


DC Coupling 


NOISE REJ Coupling 


CH 1 
and 
CH 2 


+ Peak 


— Peak 


+Peak 


-Peak 


2mV 


10 mV 


4.90 to 5.10 


9.81 mVto 10.20 mV 


8.0mVto 12.0 mV 


+ 1.7mVto -1.7 mV 






5mV 


20 mV 


3.92 to 4.08 


19.6 mV to 20.4 mV 


16.8 mV to 23.2 mV 


+2.6mVto -2.6 mV 






10 mV 


50 mV 


4.90 to 5.10 


49.0 mV to 50.9 mV 


44 mV to 56 mV 


+4.5 mV to -4.5 mV 






20 mV 


0.1 V 


4.90 to 5.10 


98.1 mVto 102.0 mV 


89 mV to 1 1 1 mV 


+ 8.0mVto -8.0 mV 






50 mV 


0.2 V 


3.92 to 4.08 


196mVto204mV 


177mVto223mV 


+ 17.5 mV to 
-17.5 mV 


147 mV 
to 

OCO rv^W 

^.OIO III V 


+ 47 mV 
to 

AT «~\/ 

— t( II IV 


0.1 V 


0.5 V 


4.90 to 5.10 


490 mV to 509 mV 


0.449 V to 0.551 V 


+ 0.036 V to -0.036 V 






0.2 V 


1.0 V 


4.90 to 5.10 


0.981 V to 1.020 V 


0.90 V to 1.10 V 


+ 0.07 V to -0.07 V \ 




0.5 V 


2.0 V 


i qo *n a no 


1 .\J\S V l\J C-.\J-T V 


i 7Q \/ +^ O DO V/ 

1 . 1 \J V l\J £-.£.£- V 


i n t a \/ +/-> n i a \i \ 

~~T \J. IT V LU W.IT V I 




1.0 V 


5.0 V 


4.90 to 5.10 


4.90 V to 5.09 V 


4.50 V to 5.50 V 


+ 0.35 V to -0.35 V 






2.0 V 


10.0 V 


4.90 to 5.10 


9.81 V to 10.2 V 


9.0 V to 11.0V 


+ 0.7 V to -0.7 V 






5.0 V 


20.0 V 3.92 to 4.08 


19.6 V to 20.4 V 


17.8 V to 22.2 V 


+ 1.4 V to -1.4V 







REV MAY 1984 



4-7 



Performance Check— 2465 Service 



q. CHECK— Cursor is aligned with the bottom graticule 
line within ±0.2 division. 



r. Rotate the A control CW until the cursor stops 
moving. 



s. CHECK— Cursor is aligned with the top graticule line 
within ±0.2 division. 



t. Turn the INVERT function on (button in), return the CH 
2 VOLTS/DIV VAR control to the calibrated detent position, 
and reobtain a 5-division signal as explained in part g above. 



u. VERIFY — A down-arrow symbol appears to the left of 
the CH 2 VOLTS/DIV readout. 



aa. Set: 

VERTICAL MODE 
CH3 

CH 1.CH2, CH4, 
ADD, and INVERT 



On (button in) 
Off (buttons out) 



bb. Move the Dual-Input Coupler to the CH 3 and CH 4 
input connectors. 



cc. CHECK— VOLTS/DIV and TRIGGER LEVEL Read- 
out accuracies for both switch setting-input level combina- 
tions listed in Table 4-3 as in subparts 5 through 23 of 
part e. 

dd. Set the Calibration Generator output level and VER- 
TICAL POSITION controls for a 2-division display vertically 
centered on the graticule. 



v. CHECK — Display amplitude is between 4.9 divisions 
and 5.1 divisions in amplitude (5 divisions ±2 %). Turn the 
INVERT function off (button out) when finished. 



w. Connect a 5 V standard-amplitude signal from the 
Calibration Generator to the CH 1 OR X and CH 2 input 
connectors via a 50 Q BNC cable and a Dual-Input Coupler. 



x. Set: 



VOLTS/DIV 

CH 1 and CH 2 

VERTICAL MODE 
CH 1 and CH 2 
ADD 



2 V 

Off (buttons out) 
On (button in) 



y. CHECK— Vertical deflection amplitude is 4.9 to 5.1 
divisions. 



z. CHECK— Signal amplitude reduces to 0.2 division or 
less when CH 2 INVERT is on (button in). 



ee. Set the VERTICAL POSITION control to align the 
top edge of the display with the top graticule line. 



ff. CHECK— Signal display amplitude is 1.9 to 2.1 
divisions. 



gg. Set the VERTICAL POSITION control to align the 
bottom edge of the signal display with the bottom graticule 
line. 



hh. CHECK— Signal display amplitude is 1.9 to 2.1 
divisions. 



ii. Set the VERTICAL MODE switches to disable CH 3 
and display CH 4. 



jj. Repeat parts cc through hh for CH 4. 



kk. Disconnect the test setup. 



VOLTS/DIV 
Switch Setting 
CH 3 and CH 4 



0.1 V 



0.5 V 



Standard Ampli- 
tude Signal 
Input Level 



0.5 V 



2.0 V 



Table 4-3 
CH 3 and CH 4 Accuracy Limits 



Vertical Deflection 

Accuracy (±10% in 

divisions) 



4.50 to 5.50 



3.60 to 4.40 



Trigger LEVEL Readout When Barely 
Triggered at the Indicated Peak 



+Peak 



0.454 V to 0.545 V 



1.81 V to 2.19 V 



— Peak 



+ 0.03 V to -0.03 V 



+ 0.13 V to -0.13 V 



4-8 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



4. Check Channel 2 Delay. 

a. Set: 

VERTICAL MODE 
CH 1 and CH 2 
CH 3 and CH 4 



Input Coupling 
CH 1 and CH 2 

VOLTS/DIV 
CH 1 and CH 2 
20 MHz BW LIMIT 

A and B SEC/DIV 

TRIGGER 
SOURCE 



On (buttons in) 
Off (buttons out) 

50 Q DC 

10 mV 

Off (button out) 

1 ms (knobs locked) 
CH 1 



b. Connect a 100 kHz, fast-rise, positive-going signal 
from the the Calibration Generator to the CH 1 OR X and 
the CH 2 input connectors via a 50 12 BNC cable, a 5X atten- 
uator and a Dual-Input Coupler. 

c. Set the output level of the Calibration Generator for 
an approximate 5-division, vertically-centered display for 
both channels. 



j. Turn X10 MAG off (button out) and push in the 
B SEC/DIV knob. 



k. Disconnect the test setup. 

Check Vertical Bandwidth — All Channels 

a. Set: 



A and B SEC/DIV 


50 ms (knobs lockei 


TRIGGER 
SOURCE 


VERT 


VOLTS/DIV 

CH 1 and CH 2 
CH 3 and CH 4 


2 mV 

0.1 V (buttons out) 


VAR 

CH 1 and CH 2 


Calibrated (in deter 


VERTICAL MODE 
CH 1 
CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4 


On (button in) 
Off (buttons out) 


Input Coupling 
CH 1 and CH 2 


50 Q DC 



d. Use either the CH 1 or CH 2 VAR control to match 
signal amplitude between both channels. 



e. Set: 

A and B SEC/DIV 

X10 MAG 



5 ns (knobs locked) 
On (button in) 



f. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to move the ris- 
ing edges of the CH 1 and CH 2 displays to graticule center. 



g. Pull the B SEC/DIV knob out to activate the CH 2 
DLY feature. 



NOTE 
If the readout displays "CH 2 DLY DISABLED" 






l„l-.„_ 



inaieau ui un ^ ult — t i/rwv i± , me u&iay mciiuiiiiiy 

feature has been disabled and the remainder of this 
subsection cannot be performed. In this case, proceed 
to subsection 5 below. 

h. CHECK — A control will position the CH 2 display 1 
division or more (500 ps) to either side of the CH 1 display. 



b. Connect the output of the Primary Leveled Sine-Wave 
Generator to the CH 1 OR X input connector via a precision 
50 ft BNC cable and any combination of the 1 0X, 5X, or 2X 
Attenuators needed to reduce the signal amplitude to the 
level called out in the next step. 



c. Set the generator output level for a 6-division display 
at the reference frequency, then change the output frequen- 
cy to 100 MHz. 



d. CHECK — Signal display amplitude is 4.25 divisions or 
greater. 



e. Move the signal to the CH 2 input connector and set 
the VERTICAL MODE switches to disable CH 1 and display 
CH2. 



t. nepeai pans c ana a ror on z. 



g. Disconnect the cable and attenuator(s) from the Pri- 
mary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator and connect the attenu- 
ators) to the Secondary Sine-Wave Generator ieveiing 
head; then connect the signal to the CH 2 input connector. 



i. Superimpose the rising edges of the pulses using the A 
control. 



h. Set the CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTS/DIV switch setting to 
20 mV. 



REV MAY 1984 



4-9 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



i. Set the generator output level for a 6-division display 
at the reference frequency, then change the generator out- 
put to 245 MHz. 



v. Set the generator output for a 4-division display at the 
reference frequency, then change the generator frequency 
to 245 MHz. 



j. CHECK — Signal display amplitude is 4.25 divisions or 
greater while sweeping the generator frequency from 245 
MHz to 300 MHz. 



w. CHECK — Signal display amplitude is 2.82 divisions 
or greater while sweeping the generator frequency from 245 
MHz to 300 MHz. 



k. Set the VOLTS/DIV switch to 0.5 V and repeat parts i 
and j. 



x. Move the signal to CH 4 and set the VERTICAL 
MODE switches to display CH 4 only. 



I. Set the VOLTS/DIV switch to 1 V and the generator 
output level for a 4-division display at the reference frequen- 
cy, then change the generator frequency to 245 MHz. 



m. CHECK — Signal display amplitude is 2.82 divisions 
or greater while sweeping the generator frequency from 245 
MHz to 300 MHz. 



n. Move the signal to CH 1 OR X input connector and 
set the VERTICAL MODE switches to disable CH 2 and 
display CH 1 . 



o. CHECK — Repeat parts i through m for CH 1. 



p. Set the VERTICAL MODE switches to display CH 3 
only. 



q. Attach the standard-accessory 10X probe (supplied 
with the instrument) to the CH 3 input connector and the 
probe tip to the CALIBRATOR terminal. 



r. Set the A and B SEC/DIV (knobs locked) to 1 ms. 



s. Adjust probe compensation for the best flat top on the 
square-wave signal display. 



t. Disconnect the probe tip from the CALIBRATOR ter- 
minal. Remove the grabber tip from the probe, unscrew and 
remove the plastic barrel, and connect the probe to the out- 
put of the Secondary Sine-Wave Generator (with the level- 
ing head) via a GR-to-BNC female and a subminiature 
probe-tip-to-GR 50 ft feed through termination. 



y. CHECK— Repeat parts q through w for CH 4. 

z. Disconnect the test setup. 

Check Common Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR). 

a. Set: 

VERTICAL MODE 

CH 1 , ADD, and INVERT On (button in) 
CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4 Off (buttons out) 



VOLTS/DIV 

CH 1 and CH 2 
CH 1 and CH 2 VAR 


10 mV 
In detent 


Input Coupling 
CH 1 and CH 2 


50 Q DC 


A and B SEC/DIV 


50 ms (knobs locked) 


TRIGGER 
MODE 
SOURCE 


AUTO LVL 
CH 1 



b. Connect a reference frequency signal from the Pri- 
mary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator to the CH 1 OR X and 
CH 2 input connectors via a 50 ft BNC cable, a 5X attenua- 
tor, and a Dual-Input Coupler. 



c. Set the generator output level for an 8-division display 
of the reference signal on CH 1 . 



d. Adjust either the CH 1 VAR control or the CH 2 VAR 
control for a minimum ADD display amplitude while leaving 
the other control in the calibrated detent (whichever pro- 
vides the best CMRR). 



e. Set the generator frequency to 50 MHz. 



u. Set the A and B SEC/DIV to 50 ^s (knobs locked). 



f. Set the SEC/DIV switch to 20 ns. 



4-10 



REV MAY 1984 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



g. CHECK — ADD display amplitude is 0.4 division or 
less (discount trace width). 



i. CHECK — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 3 is 
0.16 division or less (discount trace width). 



h. Set ADD and INVERT Off (buttons out) and rotate the 
CH 1 and CH 2 VAR controls CW to their calibrated detent 
positions. 



i. Disconnect the test setup. 



j. Move the signal to CH 4 input connector and set 
TRIGGER SOURCE to CH 4. 



k. CHECK — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 4 is 
0.16 division or less (discount trace width). 



7. Check Channel Isolation. 

a. Set: 

VERTICAL MODE 
CH 1,CH 2, 
CH 3, and CH 4 
CHOP/ALT 



Input Coupling 
CH 1 and CH 2 

VOLTS/DIV 

CH 1 and CH 2 
CH 3 and CH 4 

TRIGGER 
SOURCE 

A and B SEC/DIV 



On (buttons in) 
ALT (button out) 

50 ft DC 

0.1 V 

0.1 V (buttons out) 

CH 1 

20 ns (knobs locked) 



b. Connect the Primary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator to 
the CH 1 OR X input connector via a 50 Q BNC cable. 



c. Set the generator frequency to 100 MHz and adjust 
the output level for an 8-division display. 



I. Replace the Primary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator 
with the Secondary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (with the 
leveling head) and connect the generator to the CH 1 OR X 
input connector. 



m. Set the TRIGGER SOURCE switch to CH 1, 



n. Set the generator output frequency to 300 MHz and 
the output level for an 8-division display. 



o. CHECK — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 1 is 
0.16 division or less (discount trace width). 



p. Move the signal to the CH 2 input connector and set 
the TRIGGER SOURCE switch to CH 2. 



q. CHECK — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 2 is 
0.16 division or less (discount trace width). 



r. Disconnect the test setup. 



d. CHECK — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 1 is 
0.08 division or less (discount trace width). 



e. Move the signal to the CH 2 input connector and 
change the TRIGGER SOURCE switch to CH 2. 



f. CHECK — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 2 is 
0.08 division or less (discount trace width). 



g. Add a 50 Q BNC termination to the BNC cable and 
move the signal to CH 3. 



h. Set the TRIGGER SOURCE switch to CH 3 and ad- 
just the generator output for a signal display amplitude of 8 
divisions. 



8. Set CH 1 and CH 2 DC Balance. 

NOTE 

For an accurate DC Balance setting, the instrument 
MUST be allowed to warmup for 20 minutes before 
performing the following steps. 

~ |-!..„„., . .„ „»,J U^.1^1 k^tU +U^ r*LJ H ~~.^i /->LJ O l~~..J. 

a. ncss u|_i ai ivj i iuiu uom mc on i ai iu on c input 

Coupling switches in the 1 MQ AC position for approximate- 
ly 1 second, then release them. 

NOTE 

Ai the completion of the automatic DC Balance, the 
Input Coupling settings will return to the states they 
previously held (if they were in those states for at least 
7 seconds prior to performing the DC Balance 
procedure). 



4-11 



Performance Check— 2465 Service 



b. VERIFY — A moving dot display replaces the normal 
display for approximately 1 seconds (while the DC Balance 
levels are automatically reset), then the display returns to 
normal. 



c. VERIFY— There is less than 0.2 division + 0.5 mV 
vertical trace shift between adjacent settings of the CH 1 
and CH 2 VOLTS/DIV switches as they are rotated through 
each of their positions. 



d. VERIFY — There is less than 1 .0 division vertical trace 
shift as the CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTS/DIV VAR controls are 
rotated fully CCW. 



e. VERIFY — There is less than 0.5 division vertical trace 
shift when the INVERT button is pressed in. 



f. Return the VERTICAL VAR controls to their detent 
positions and turn the CH 2 INVERT function off (button 
out). 

9. Check CH 2 SIGNAL OUT and Cascaded 
Operation. 

a. Set: 

VERTICAL MODE 

CH 1 On (button in) 

CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4 Off (buttons out) 

BW LIMIT On (button in) 



VOLTS/DIV 

CH 1 and CH 2 


2mV 


Input Coupling 
CH 1 
CH 2 


50 ft DC 
1 Mft DC 


A and B SEC/DIV 


1 ms 


TRIGGER MODE 
SOURCE 
COUPLING 


AUTO LVL 
VERT 
NOISE REJ 



b. Connect a 1 kHz, 2 mV standard-amplitude signal 
from the Calibration Generator to the CH 2 input connector 
via a 50 BNC cable. 



c. Connect the CH 2 signal from the rear-panel CH 2 
SIGNAL OUT connector to the CH 1 OR X input connector 
via a precision 50 ft BNC cable. 



e. Set CH 1 Input Coupling to GND and align the trace 
with the center graticule line. 



f. Return CH 1 Input Coupling to 50 ft DC. 



g. Set the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV switch to 5 mV. 



h. CHECK — The baseline of the display is within 2 divi- 
sions of the ground reference set above (discount trace 
width). 



Set the CH 1 Input Coupling to 1 Mft DC. 



j. CHECK — Display amplitude is 3.6 to 4.4 divisions (dis- 
count trace width). 



k. Disconnect the signal from the CH 2 input connector. 



I. Set the CH 1 and CH 2 Input Coupling to 50 ft DC. 



m. Press and release the BW LIMIT button to turn the 
function off. 



n. Connect a 50 kHz signal from the Primary Leveled 
Sine-Wave Generator to the CH 2 input connector via a pre- 
cision 50 ft BNC cable and a 10X attenuator. 



o. Set the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV switch to 2 mV. 



p. Adjust the generator output level to produce a 
6-division CH 1 display. 



q. Increase the generator frequency to 50 MHz. 



r. CHECK — Display amplitude is 4.24 divisions or 
greater. 



s. If the following step (step 1 0) is to be performed, skip 
part t below. 



d. CHECK— Display amplitude is 4.5 to 5.5 divisions 
(discount trace width). 



t. Disconnect the test setup. 



4-12 



REV MAY 1984 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



10. Check BW LIMIT Operation. 


a. Set: 




VERTICAL MODE 
CH 1 
CH 2 
BW LIMIT 


Off (button out) 
On (button in) 
On (button in) 


A and B SEC/DIV 


50 ms (knobs Id 


VOLTS/DIV 
CH 2 


10 mV 



b. Connect the Primary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator 
output to the CH 2 input connector via a precision 50 Q BNC 
cable. 



c. Set the generator frequency to 50 kHz and adjust the 
output level for a 6-division display on the crt. 



d. Gradually increase the generator output frequency 
until the display amplitude decreases to 4.24 divisions. 



e. CHECK — Generator frequency is between 13 MHz to 
24 MHz. 



f. Turn BW LIMIT off (button out). 



g. Disconnect the test setup. 



REV MAY 1984 



4-13 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



TRIGGERING 



Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) 

Primary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (Item 2) 
Secondary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (Item 4) 
Function Generator (Item 5) 
10X Probe (supplied with 2465) (Item 7) 



Precision 50 fl BNC Cable (Item 9) 

50 ft BNC Cable (2 required) (Item 10) 

Dual-Input Coupler (Item 11) 

50 Q BNC Termination (2 required)(ltem 12) 



Initial Control Settings. 

Control settings not listed do not affect the procedure. 



1. Check A and B Triggers. 



Set: 



VERTICAL MODE 




CH 1 and CH 2 


On (buttons in) 


CH 3, CH 4, ADD and 




INVERT 


Off (buttons out) 


CHOP/ALT 


ALT (button out) 


20 MHz BW LIMIT 


Off (button out) 


VOLTS/DIV 




CH 1 


0.1 V 


CH2 


0.5 V 


CH 1 and CH 2 VAR 


In detent 


CH 3 and CH 4 


0.5 V (buttons in) 


Input Coupling 




CH 1 


1 MfiDC 


CH 2 


50 Q DC 


A and B SEC/DIV 


2 us (knobs locked) 


A and B SEC/DIV VAR 


In detent 


X10MAG 


Off (button out) 


At and AV 


Off (press and release 




until associated readout 




is off) 


TRACKING 


Off (button out) 


TRACE SEP 


Fully CW 


TRIGGER 




HOLDOFF 


B ENDS A (fully CW) 


LEVEL 


Midrange 


SLOPE 


+ (plus) 


MODE 


AUTO LVL 


SOURCE 


VERT 


COUPLING 


DC 



NOTE 

The Trigger Level Readout Accuracies are checked in 
the Vertical Performance Checks. 



a. Refer to Table 4-4 to determine what the A Trigger 
requirements are and at what frequencies various checks 
are made. 



b. Using a 50 Q BNC cable, connect one of the following 
test generators to the CH 1 input connector. Select the gen- 
erator that produces the proper frequency range for the 
conditions being tested as called out in Tables 4-4 and 4-5. 
When using the leveled sine-wave generators (items 2 and 3 
below), the output must be terminated into 50 fl (either the 
50 ft input coupling or a 50 12 termination may be used). 

1 . Function Generator (30 kHz and 80 kHz) 

2. Primary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (50 MHz) 

3. Secondary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (500 MHz) 



NOTE 

To obtain signal amplitudes less than 1 division, first 
set the signal for either 4, 5, or 10 times the specified 
amplitude; then reduce the amplitude by a factor of 4, 
5, or 10 by increasing the VOLTS/DIV settings as 
necessary. 



4-14 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



c. For each combination listed in the table, set the gener- 
ator Test Frequency and the 2465 TRIGGER COUPLING as 
indicated, performing the following steps to verify the Trig- 
gering levels in each setup. 



d. Set the VOLTS/DIV switch and the generator output 
level to obtain the test signal amplitude indicated for the 
particular combination being tested. 



e. Set the SEC/DIV switch and the X10 MAG switch to 
obtain a well-defined display of the test signal. 



NOTE 

Normally, unless trigger sensitivity is very close to the 
specified limits, it is sufficient to check each of the 
indicated frequency-coupling combinations listed in 
the table in Channel 1 only; checks for Channels 2, 3 
and 4 need only be done in DC COUPLING (to verify 
signal path). 



f. CHECK — For a stably triggered display (unless other- 
wise indicated) for each of the Test Frequency-TRIGGER 
COUPLING combinations listed in Table 4-4. When testing 
the 500 MHz triggering, check that trigger jitter is < 50 ps 
(0.1 division at 5 ns/div with X10 MAG). 



g. Press in the ADD button to select the function and 
press and release the CH 1 button to turn off the CH 1 
display. 



h. Repeat the DC TRIGGER COUPLING tests of Table 
4-4 while in the ADD mode. 



i. Move the 50 MHz and 500 MHz signals to the CH 2 
input connector and repeat the DC TRIGGER COUPLING 
tests of Table 4-4 while in ADD mode. 



j. Press the CH 2 button in to select the channel and 
press and release the ADD button to turn off the ADD 
display. 



k. Repeat the DC TRIGGER COUPLING tests of Table 
4-4 while in CH 2 mode. 



I. If trigger sensitivity is close to the specified limits given 
in steps c through k above, test all of the frequency-coupling 
combinations given in Table 4-4 for CH 2. 



m. Move the test signal to CH 3 and CH 4 in turn and 
repeat parts c through f using Table 4-5. 



Table 4-4 
CH 1 or CH 2 Triggering Conditions 



Table 4-5 
CH 3 or CH 4 Triggering Conditions 



Test 
Fre- 


Minimum Vertical Display Levels at Which 
Triggering Should Occur 


quency 


TRIGGER COUPLING 




DC 


NOISE 
REJ 


HFREJ 


LFREJ 


AC 


60 Hz 


a 


a 


a 


No 
Trigger, 
Freeruns 


0.35 Div 


30 kHz 


a 


a 


0.35 Div 


a 


a 


80 kHz 


a 


a 


a 


0.35 Div 


a 


50 MHz 


0.35 Div 


1.2 Div 


No Trigger, 
Freeruns 
at 1.2 Div 


0.35 Div 


0.35 Div 


300 MHz 


1.0 Div 


3.0 Div 


No Trigger, 
Freeruns 
at 3.0 Div 


1.0 Div 


1.0 Div 


500 MHz 


1.5 Div 


4.5 Div 


a 


1.5 Div 


1.5 Div 



Test 
Fre- 


Minimum Vertical Display Levels at Which 
Triggering Should Occur 


quency 


TRIGGER COUPLING 




DC 


NOISE 
REJ 


HFREJ 


LFREJ 


AC 


60 Hz 


a 


a 


a 


No 
Trigger, 
Freeruns 


0.18 Div 


30 kHz 


a 


a 


0.25 Div 


a 


a 


80 kHz 


a 


a 


a 


0.25 Div 


a 


50 MHz 


0.18 Div 


0.6 Div 


No Trigger, 
Freeruns 
at 0.6 Div 


0.18 Div 


0.18 Div 


300 MHz 


0.5 Div 


1.5 Div 


No Trigger, 
Freeruns 
at 1 .5 Div 


0.5 Div 


0.5 Div 


500 MHz 


0.75 Div 


2.25 Div 


a 


0.75 Div 


0.75 Div 



a Not necessary to check. 



a Not necessary to check. 



REV MAY 1984 



4-15 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



n. Set: 

TRIGGER 
MODE 
LEVEL 



AUTO 

Fully clockwise 



o. Pull the B SEC/DIV knob out and set it 1 switch set- 
ting (CW) faster than the A SEC/DIV setting, then push the 
B SEC/DIV knob back in. 



p. Verify that the crt readout displays DLY and not At. If 
At is displayed, press the At button in and release it to select 
the DLY function. When DLY is displayed, rotate the AREF 
OR DLY POS control CCW until the readout display indi- 
cates zero delay. (The display will indicate DLY?, which is 
normal.) 



q. Press the A/B TRIG button to select the B TRIGGER. 



r. Set B TRIGGER MODE to TRIG AFT DLY and adjust 
TRIGGER LEVEL for a stable signal display. 



s. Repeat parts a through m for B TRIGGER, changing 
the A and B SEC/DIV and X10 MAG switches as required to 
maintain a well-defined display. 



t. Disconnect the test setup. 



c. Set the Function Generator for a 50 kHz, 1 .35-division 
display for CH 1 and CH 2. 



d. Connect the Primary Leveled Sine- Wave Generator to 
the CH 3 input connector using a 50 Q BNC cable and a 50 fi 
termination. 



e. Set the generator output level for a 0.7-division dis- 
play at the reference frequency (50 kHz). 



f. Connect the Secondary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator 
to the CH 4 input using a BNC cable and a 50 Q termination. 



g. Set the generator output level for a 0.7-division dis- 
play at the reference frequency. 



h. CHECK— Display will trigger as the TRIGGER LEVEL 
control is rotated through its range. 



i. Pull the B SEC/DIV knob out, rotate it to 5 us, and 
push it back in. 



j. Press the A/B TRIG button and set the B TRIGGER 
MODE to TRIG AFT DLY. 



k. Rotate the AREF OR DLY POS control CCW until the 
delay readout indicates DLY? 0.00 lis. 



2. Check Composite Triggering. 


a. Set: 




VERTICAL MODE 




CH 1,CH 2, CH 3, 




and CH 4 


On (buttons in) 


ADD 


Off (button out) 


CHOP/ALT 


ALT (button out) 


Input Coupling 




CH 1 


50QDC 


CH 2 


1 Mfi DC 


TRIGGER 




A/B TRIG 


A 


MODE 


NORM 


SOURCE 


VERT 


COUPLING 


DC 


A and B SEC/DIV 


10 MS 



I. CHECK— Display will trigger as the TRIGGER LEVEL 
control is rotated through its range. 



m. Rotate the B SEC/DIV knob back to 10 us (knobs 
locked). 



n. Disconnect the test setup. 

3. Check Trigger Noise Rejection — All Channels. 

a. Set: 



b. Connect the Function Generator to the CH 1 and 
CH 2 inputs via a 50 fi BNC cable and a Dual-Input Coupler. 



VERTICAL MODE 
CH 1 

Input Coupling 
CH 1 and CH 2 

VOLTS/DIV 
CH 1 
CH 2 

CH 3 and CH 4 



On (button in) 

1 Mfi DC 

5mV 

50 mV 

0.1 V (buttons out) 



4-16 



REV MAY 1984 



A and B SEC/DIV 

TRIGGER 
MODE 
SOURCE 



1 ms (knobs locked) 

AUTO LVL 
VERT 



b. Connect the Function Generator to the CH 1 input via 
a 50 ft BNC cable and a 10X attenuator. 



c. Set the Function Generator output frequency and 
level for a 50-kHz, 4-division display. 



d. Set the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV switch to 50 mV. 

e. Set the TRIGGER COUPLING switch to NOISE REJ. 

f. CHECK— Display will not trigger (freeruns). 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 

4. Check Slope Selection and Verify Line Trigger. 

a. Set: 



A and B SEC/DIV 


2 ms (knobs locked) 


X10 MAG 


Off (button out) 


TRIGGER 
MODE 
SOURCE 
COUPLING 


AUTO 

LINE 

AC 


VOLTS/DIV 
CH 1 


5 V 


Input Coupling 
CH 1 


1 Mfi DC 




CAUTION < 



In the next part, DO NOT connect the probe ground 
lead to the ac power source. 



g. Pull the B SEC/DIV knob out, rotate it to 5 us and 
push it back in. 



h. Press the A/B TRIG button to select the B TRIGGER. 



b. Attach the 1 0X probe to the CH 1 OR X input connec- 
tor and connect the probe tip to the ac power source. 



i. Set the TRIGGER MODE switch to B TRIG AFT DLY. 



j. CHECK — Display will not trigger for any setting of the 
LEVEL control. 



c. CHECK — Display can be triggered in both the 
+ (plus) and — (minus) positions of the SLOPE switch 
using the TRIGGER LEVEL control and that the displayed 
slope agrees with the selected slope. 



k. Rotate the B SEC/DIV switch back to 10 ^s (knobs 
locked). 



I. Move the input signal to CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4 in turn, 
selecting each channel as the display source. Repeat parts f 
through k for each channel. 



d. CHECK— Display phase shifts slightly as the TRIG- 
GER COUPLING switch is changed from AC to DC. 



e. Disconnect the test setup. 



REV MAY 1984 



4-17 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



HORIZONTAL 



Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) 

Primary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (Item 2) 
Calibration Generator (Item 3) 



Time-Mark Generator (Item 6) 
Precision 50 Q BNC Cable (Item 9) 



Initial Control Settings. 

Control settings not listed do not affect the procedure. 



b. Adjust the TRIGGER LEVEL control as necessary for 
a stable signal display. 



Set: 



VERTICAL MODE 




CH 1 


On (button in) 


CH 2, CH 3, CH 4, 




ADD, and INVERT 


Off (buttons out) 


CHOP/ALT 


ALT (button out) 


20 MHz BW LIMIT 


Off (button out) 


VOLTS/DIV 




CH 1 


0.5 V 


CH 1 VAR 


In detent 


CH 3 and CH 4 


0.1 V (buttons out) 


Input Coupling 




CH 1 


50QDC 


A and B SEC/DIV 


200 ns (knobs locked) 


A and B SEC/DIV VAR 


In detent 


X10 MAG 


Off (button out) 


AV and At 


Off (press and release 




until associated readout 




is off) 


TRACKING 


Off (button out) 


TRACE SEP 


Fully CW 


TRIGGER 




HOLDOFF 


B ENDS A 


LEVEL 


Midrange 


SLOPE 


+ (plus) 


MODE 


AUTO LVL 


SOURCE 


VERT 


COUPLING 


DC 



1. Check Horizontal Display Modes (A, A INTEN, 
ALT, and B). 

a. Use a 50 Q BNC cable to connect 200 ns time mark- 
ers from the Time-Mark Generator to the CH 1 OR X input 
connector. 



c. Pull the B SEC/DIV knob out and set the B TRIGGER 
MODE to RUN AFT DLY. 



d. Set the AREF OR DLY control for a DLY readout of 
approx 1000 ns. 



e. VERIFY — An intensified zone appears on the dis- 
played signal near graticule center. 



f. Rotate the AREF OR DLY POS control to center the 
intensified zone on one of the time markers near graticule 
center. 



g. Set the B SEC/DIV control to 50 ns (knob out). 



h. Rotate the TRACE SEP control CCW to separate the 
the A and B sweep displays. 



i. CHECK — The B sweep is displayed with the A sweep. 



Push the B SEC/DIV knob in. 



k. CHECK — Only the B sweep is displayed. 



2. Check A and B Timing, A Cursor Accuracies, 
and A Cursor Range. 



a. Set: 

A and B SEC/DIV 

TRACE SEP 

At 



5 ns (knobs locked) 

Fully CW 

On (press and release 
for At display) 



4-18 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



b. Select 5 ns time markers from the Time-Mark Genera- 
tor and adjust the TRIGGER LEVEL control for a stable 
display. 



c. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to align the 2nd 
time marker with the 2nd vertical graticule line (2nd from the 
left edge of the display). 



NOTE 

The 2 ns and the 5 ns time markers are sinusodial. 
Use either the rising or falling zero-crossings as align- 
ment points. 



d. Align the AREF cursor with the 2nd time marker and 
align the A cursor with the 1 0th time marker. 



NOTE 

If the 2nd and 10th time markers are within ±0.06 
division of the 2nd and 10th vertical graticule lines for 
unmagnified sweeps and within ±0.1 division for 
magnified sweeps, the sweep timing accuracy is con- 
servatively within limits. When the timing accuracy is 
checked at each sweep speed, note any SEC/DIV set- 
ting at which the timing error exceeds the 0.6-division 
limit. Check these sweep speeds against the major- 
division time-interval limits given in Table 4-7. 

NOTE 

For A and B SEC/DIV switch settings of 5 ns and 
10 ns, the time-marker period is greater than 1 divi- 
sion when the sweep is magnified. At 500 ps per divi- 
sion (SEC/DIV setting of 5 ns with X10 MAG), check 
for 2 cycles between the 2nd and 10th vertical grati- 
cule lines (within ±0.1 division). For 1 ns per division, 
check for 4 cycles between the 2nd and 10th vertical 
graticule lines (± 0. 1 division). 



e. CHECK — The A Sweep timing and cursor readout 
accuracies are within the limits given in Tables 4-6 and 4-7. 



f. Repeat parts c, d, and e for each A SEC/DIV-time 
marker combination given in Table 4-6 for both unmagnified 
and magnified sweeps. 



4-19 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



Table 4-6 

Settings for A and B Timing Accuracy Checks 

and A Cursor Accuracy Limits 



A and B SEC/ 


Unmagnified 


X10 


DIV Switch 


Time 
Markers 


Limits of At Cursor 
Readout 


Time 
Markers 


Limits of At Cursor 
Readout 


5 ns 


5 ns 


39.65 ns to 40.35 ns 


2 ns 
4 Div/cycle 


3.94 ns to 4.06 ns 
(2 cycles) 


10 ns 


10 ns 


79.30 ns to 80.70 ns 


2 ns 
2 Div/cycle 


7.89 ns to 8.11 ns 
(4 cycles) 


20 ns 


20 ns 


158.60 ns to 161.40 ns 


2 ns 


15.78 ns to 16.22 ns 


50 ns 


50 ns 


396.5 ns to 403.5 ns 


5 ns 


39.45 ns to 40.55 ns 


0.1 MS 


0.1 ms 


793.0 ns to 807.0 ms 


10 ns 


78.90 ns to 81.10 ns 


0.2 mS 


0.2 ms 


1586.0 ns to 1614.0 ns 


20 ns 


157.80 ns to 162.20 ns 


0.5 jus 


0.5 ms 


3965 ns to 4035 ns 


50 ns 


394.5 ns to 405.5 ns 


1 MS 


1 MS 


7.930 ms to 8.070 mS 


0.1 ms 


789.0 ns to 81 1.0 ns 


2 MS 


2 ms 


15.860 ms to 16.140 ms 


0.2 ms 


1578.0 ns to 1622.0 ns 


5 mS 


5 ms 


39.65 ms to 40.35 ms 


0.5 ms 


3945 ns to 4055 ns 


10 MS 


10 ms 


79.30 ms to 80.70 ms 


1 ms 


7.890 ms to 8.110 ms 


20 mS 


20 ms 


158.60 ms to 161 .40 ms 


2 ms 


15.780 ms to 16.220 ms 


50 mS 


50 ms 


396.5 ms to 403.5 ms 


5 ms 


39.45 ms to 40.55 ms 


0.1 ms 


0.1 ms 


793.0 ms to 807.0 ms 


10 MS 


78.90 ms to 81.10 ms 


0.2 ms 


0.2 ms 


1586.0 ms to 1614.0 ms 


20 ms 


157.80 ms to 162.20 ms 


0.5 ms 


0.5 ms 


3965 ms to 4035 ms 


50 ms 


394.5 ms to 405.5 ms 


1 ms 


1 ms 


7.930 ms to 8.070 ms 


0.1 ms 


789.0 ms to 81 1 .0 ms 


2 ms 


2 ms 


15.860 ms to 16.140 ms 


0.2 ms 


1578.0 ms to 1622.0 ms 


5 ms 


5 ms 


39.65 ms to 40.35 ms 


0.5 ms 


3945 ms to 4055 ms 


10 ms 


10 ms 


79.30 ms to 80.70 ms 


1 ms 


7.890 ms to 8.110 ms 


20 ms 


20 ms 


158.60 ms to 161.40 ms 


2 ms 


15.780 ms to 16.220 ms 


50 ms 


50 ms 


396.5 ms to 403.5 ms 


5 ms 


39.45 ms to 40.55 ms 


A SEC/DIV ONLY 


(B Sweep does not have these sweep speeds) 


0.1 s 


0.1 s 


793.0 ms to 807.0 ms 


10 ms 


78.90 ms to 81.10 ms 


0.2 s 


0.2 s 


1578.0 ms to 1622.0 ms 


20 ms 


157.00 ms to 163.00 ms 


0.5 s 


0.5 s 


3945 ms to 4055 ms 


50 ms 


392.5 ms to 407.5 ms 



4-20 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



Table 4-7 
Horizontal Timing Accuracy Checked Against the Graticule 



Over Any 





1 Div 


2 Div 


3 Div 


4 Div 


5 Div 


6 Div 


7 Div 


8 Div 


9 Div 


10 Div 


Time-marker Accuracy 
(X10 MAG off) Should Be 


± 0.07 
Div 


± 0.07 
Div 


± 0.08 
Div 


± 0.09 
Div 


± 0.10 
Div 


± 0.10 
Div 


± 0.11 
Div 


± 0.12 
Div 


± 0.12 
Div 


± 0.13 
Div 


or (with X10 MAG on) 


± 0.07 
Div 


± 0.08 
Div 


± 0.1 
Div 


± 0.11 
Div 


± 0.12 
Div 


± 0.13 
Div 


± 0.14 
Div 


± 0.16 
Div 


± 0.17 
Div 


± 0.18 
Div 


As Measured Against These Time- 


1-2 


1-3 


1-4 


1-5 


1-6 


1-7 


1-8 


1-9 


1-10 


1-11 


Marker Pairs (X10 MAG off only) 


2-3 


2-4 


2-5 


2-6 


2-7 


2-8 


2-9 


2-10 


2-11 






3-4 


3-5 


3-6 


3-7 


3-8 


3-9 


3-10 


3-11 








4-5 


4-6 


4-7 


4-8 


4-9 


4-10 


4-11 










5-6 


5-7 


5-8 


5-9 


5-10 


5-11 












6-7 


6-8 


6-9 


6-10 


6-11 














7-8 


7-9 


7-10 


7-11 
















8-9 


8-10 


8-11 


















9-10 


9-11 




















10-11 





















g. Rotate the AREF OR DLY POS control CCW until the 
cursor stops moving. 



h. CHECK — AREF cursor aligns with the 1st graticule 
line within ±0.2 division. 



i. Rotate the A control CW until the cursor stops moving. 



p. Set: 




B SEC/DIV 


5 ns (knob in) 


B TRIGGER 




MODE 


RUN AFT DLY 


X10 MAG 


Off (button out) 


At 


Off (DLY) 


AREF OR DLY POS 


Set for zero delay 



j. CHECK — A cursor aligns with the 11th graticule line 
within ±0.2 division. 



k. Set the A and B SEC/DIV switches to 10 ns. 



q. CHECK — The B sweep timing accuracy as in parts b 
through f, making sure that the A SEC/DIV switch is set 
slower than the B SEC/DIV switch. Disregard the cursor 
accuracy data. 



I. Rotate the AREF OR DLY and the A controls to pre- 

r*'te>A\\i a iir\&r\mr\/'\&A +k»o /m ireAre naor the Or>r\ nrotin ilo lino 



m. CHECK — At readout indicates a difference of 0.30 ns 
or less. 



n. Rotate the AREF OR DLY and the A controls to pre- 
cisely superimpose the cursors near the 1 0th graticule line. 



o. CHECK — At readout indicates a difference of 0.30 ns 
or less. 



3. Check Delta Time Accuracy using the Delayed 
Sweep. 



a. Set: 




A SEC/DIV 


10 ns 


B SEC/DIV 


5 ns (knob in) 


X10 MAG 


On (button in) 


At 


Off (DLY readout) 


TRIGGER 




MODE 


AUTO LVL 


SOURCE 


VERT 



REV NOV 1983 



4-21 



Performance Check— 2465 Service 



COUPLING 


DC 


g. Set: 


SLOPE 
LEVEL 


+ (plus) 

As required for a stable 


A SEC/DIV 




display 


At 


B TRIG MODE 


RUN AFT DLY 





NOTE 

Certain time marks from the TG 501 (and other Time- 
Mark Generators) will vary in width and may be dis- 
place in time. This will happen in a repeatable 
sequence and is caused by the loading and interaction 
of the 2, 5, and 10 dividers. This is most noticable with 
10 ns, 20 ns, and 50 ns markers. The following proce- 
dure will use the above markers to set up the proper 
references but the 5 ns markers will be used to make 
the actual measurement. Close inspection of apparent 
jitter or mistrigger of the time marks will show the 
trigger point to be stable with the apparent jitter to be 
variable with unique combinations of trigger holdoff 
and sweep speed. This is normal behavior with this 
type of signal and is not an instrument defect. 



It is not necessary to count the number of marks 
given in the tables. Switching to 10 ns, 20 ns, or 50 ns 
markers as required and then to 5 ns will show the 
proper 5 ns mark to be used. 



b. Set the Time-Mark Generator for 10 ns markers. Ad- 
just the Vertical VOLTS/DIV as required for a display of 3 to 
6 divisions. 



c. Adjust the A REF OR DLY POS control for a readout 
display of DLY 10.64 ns. 



d. Adjust the Horizontal POSITION control CCW until 
the cursor stops moving, then CW to display the leading 
edge of the 2nd time marker near the graticule center. This 
becomes the reference point for the following procedure. 
Set the Time-Mark Generator to 5 ns and adjust the Vertical 
VOLTS/DIV and Trigger LEVEL as required. 

e. Press and release the At button to obtain the At dis- 
play and rotate the A control for a readout display of 
At —10.64 ns. If the time marks are not superimposed, ad- 
just the A control to do so. 



f. CHECK — At readout is within the limits listed in Table 
4-8 for the 1 st 5 ns time marker; then check that the 3rd 
through 19th time markers are within the given limits as the 
A control is rotated CW to superimpose each successive 
time marker on the reference time marker. 



20 ns 

Off (DLY readout) 



h. Set the Time-Mark Generator for 20 ns time markers 
and adjust the AREF OR DLY POS control for a readout 
display of DLY 21 .25 ns. 



i. Position the leading edge of the 2nd time marker near 
graticule center using the Horizontal POSITION control. Set 
the Time-Mark Generator to 5 ns and adjust the Vertical 
VOLTS/DIV and Trigger LEVEL as required. 



j. Press and release the At button to obtain a At display 
and adjust the A control for a readout display of At 
-20.00 ns. If the time markers are not superimposed, ad- 
just the A control to do so. 

Table 4-8 
Delta Time Display Accuracy 



Time- 








Marker 




Marker 




Period 




Super- 




and A 


BSEC/ 


imposed 




SEC/DIV 


DIV 


using the 




Switch 


Switch 


A (Delta) 


Delta Time Readout 


Setting 


Setting 


Control 


Accuracy Limits 


10 ns 


500 ps a 


1st 


-9.86 ns to -10.14 ns 






3rd 


-0.10 ns to 0.10 ns 






5th 


9.86 ns to 10.14 ns 






7th 


19.84 ns to 20.16 ns 






9th 


29.80 ns to 30.20 ns 






11th 


39.78 ns to 40.22 ns 






13th 


49.74 ns to 50.26 ns 






15th 


59.72 ns to 60.28 ns 






17th 


69.68 ns to 70.32 ns 






19th 


79.66 ns to 80.34 ns 


20 ns 


500 ps a 


1st 


-19.75 ns to -20.25 ns 






8th 


19.75 ns to 20.25 ns 






36th 


159.3 ns to 160.70 ns 


50 ns 


500 ps a 


1st 


-49.3 ns to -50.7 ns 






20th 


49.3 ns to 50.7 ns 






90th 


398.3 ns to 401 .7 ns 



a 5 ns with X10 MAG on (button in). 

k. CHECK — At readout is within the limits listed in Table 
4-8 for the 1st 20 ns time marker; then check that the 8th 
and 36th time markers are within the given limits as the 
A control is rotated CW to superimpose each time marker 
on the reference time marker. 



4-22 



REV NOV 1983 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



I. Set: 
A SEC/DIV 
At 



50 ns 

Off (DLY readout) 



m. Set the Time-Mark Generator for 50 ns time markers 
and adjust the AREF OR DLY POS control for a readout 
display of 53.2 ns. 



n. Position the leading edge of the 1st time marker near 
graticule center using the Horizontal POSITION control. 
Switch the Time-Mark Generator to 5 ns and adjust the A 
SEC/DIV and Trigger LEVEL as required. 



o. Press and release the At button to obtain a At display 
and adjust the A control for a readout display of At 
-50.00 ns. If the time markers are not superimposed, ad- 
just the A control to do so. 



p. CHECK — At readout is within the limits listed in Table 
4-8 for the 1st 5 ns time marker; then check that the 20th 
and 90th time markers are within the given limits as the 
A control is rotated CW to superimpose each time marker 
on the reference time marker. 



q. Set: 

TRACKING/INDEP 
A SEC/DIV 
B SEC/DIV 
X10 MAG 



TRACKING (button in) 
0.1 MS 

1 ns (knob out) 
On (button in) 



r. Select 0.1 us time markers from the Time-Mark 
Generator. 



s. Adjust the A and AREF OR DLY POS controls for a At 
readout display of At 800.0 ns. 



t. Adjust the Horizontal POSITION control to align the 
leading edge of the 2nd time marker on the A sweep with 
the 2nd vertical graticule line. 



u. Rotate the TRACE SEP control CCW to separate the 
traces. 



v. Adjust the AREF OR DLY POS control to intensify the 
2nd and 1 0th time markers (of the A sweep) and display the 
leading edges of the displayed B sweep time markers in the 
center area of the graticule. 



w. VERIFY — The horizontal distance between the lead- 
ing edges of the B sweep time markers is within the conser- 
vative guideline listed in Table 4-9. If this guideline is met, 
accuracy between each marker is ensured, and the follow- 
ing CHECK step need not be performed. 

x. CHECK — The horizontal distance between the lead- 
ing edges of the B sweep time markers is within the speci- 
fied limits given in Table 4-9. The limit given is for separation 
between the 2nd and 1 0th marker; however, separation be- 
tween the 2nd marker and each suceeding marker should 
also be checked, calculating the limits from the specification 
as listed at the top of the table. 

y. Repeat part w (and x if necessary) for each combina- 
tion of A SEC/DIV, B SEC/DIV, and X10 MAG settings 
listed in Table 4-9. The At readout should be set to indicate 
eight times the A SEC/DIV setting. At the slowest sweep 
speeds, the B SEC/DIV knob will need to be pushed in 
(B Sweep only) to increase the display repetition rate. 

Table 4-9 
Delayed Sweep Delta Time Accuracy 



A SEC/DIV 


B SEC/DIV 


Displayed Separation of 


and Time 


as Displayed 


Delayed Time Markers 


Markers 


on Readout 


(for 2nd and 10th markers) 




Conservative 


Specified 






Guideline 


Limit: 






(divisions) 


(±0.3% time) 
interval 
+0.1% of 
full scale- 
divisions 


0.1 MS 


1 ns a 


2.4 


3.4 


0.2 ms 


2 ns a 


2.4 


3.4 


0.5 ms 


5 ns b 


2.4 


3.4 


1 ms 


10 ns 


2.4 


3.4 


2 ms 


20 ns 


2.4 


3.4 


5 ms 


50 ns 


2.4 


3.4 


10 MS 


100 ns 


2.4 


3.4 


20 ms 


200 ns 


2.4 


3.4 


50 ms 


500 ns 


2.4 


3.4 


0.1 ms 


1 MS 


2.4 


3.4 


0.2 ms 


2 ms 


2.4 


3.4 


0.5 ms 


5 ms 


2.4 


3.4 


1 ms 


10 ms 


2.4 


3.4 


2 ms 


20 ms 


2.4 


3.4 


5 ms 


50 ms 


2.4 


3.4 


10 ms 


100 MS 


2.4 


3.4 


20 ms 


200 ms 


2.4 


3.4 


50 ms 


500 ms 


2.4 


3.4 


0.1 s 


1 ms 


2.4 


3.4 


0.2 s 


2 ms 


6.4 


7.4 


0.5 s 


5 ms 


6.4 


7.4 



8 X10 MAG On (button in). 

b For remainder of Table, turn X10 MAG off. 



REV NOV 1983 



4-23 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



4. Check Delay Jitter. 

Set: 

TRACKING 
A SEC/DIV 
B SEC/DIV 



Off (button out) 

1 ms 

0.5 ms (knob out) 



b. Select 1 ms time markers from the Time-Mark 
Generator. 

c. Align the intensified zones with the 1 0th time marker 
using the AREF OR DLY POS and A controls. Superimpose 
the zones to obtain a At readout display of 0.000 ms. 



d. Push in the B SEC/DIV knob and adjust TRACE SEP 
to separate the traces. 



h. CHECK— The Time-Mark Generator variable timing 
% of error has changed 2% or less from the reading noted in 
part b. 



i. Set: 

A SEC/DIV 

B SEC/DIV 

SEC/DIV VAR 

At 

AREF OR DLY POS 

B TRIGGER 
MODE 



50 ixs 

10 ms (knob in) 
CW (in detent) 
Off (DLY readout) 
Zero delay 

RUN AFT DLY 



j. Repeat parts b through h for the B Sweep. 



e. CHECK— For 0.8 division or less of horizontal jitter on 
the rising edge of both time markers. 

5. Check A and B SEC/DIV VAR Range and 
Accuracy. 

a. Set: 

A and B SEC/DIV 10 ms (knobs locked) 

A and B SEC/DIV VAR In detent 

At Off (press and release 

to eliminate At 
readout) 



b. Select 1 ms time markers from the Time-Mark Gener- 
ator and adjust the Time-Mark Generator variable timing 
control for exactly 1 time marker per division. Note the vari- 
able timing % error on the Time-Mark Generator. 



c. Adjust the SEC/DIV VAR control for a sweep-speed 
readout (on bottom line) of 20 ms and adjust the Time-Mark 
Generator variable timing control for exactly 2 time markers 
per division. 



d. CHECK— The Time-Mark Generator variable timing 
% of error has changed 2% or less from the reading noted in 
part b. 



k. Rotate the SEC/DIV VAR control CW to the detent 
position and disconnect the test setup. 



6. Check X-Axis Gain. 




a. Set: 




VERTICAL MODE 
CH2 

CH 1, CH3, CH 4, 
ADD, and BW LIMIT 


On (button in) 
Off (buttons out) 


A and B SEC/DIV 


X-Y (knobs locked) 


VOLTS/DIV 

CH 1 and CH 2 


10 mV 


Input Coupling 
CH 1 
CH 2 


1 MfiDC 
1 MQ GND 



b. Connect a 50 mV standard-amplitude signal from the 
Calibration Generator to the CH 1 OR X input connector via 
a 50 Q BNC cable. 



c. CHECK— Signal display amplitude is 4.9 to 5.1 hori- 
zontal divisions. 



d. Disconnect the test setup. 



e. Adjust the SEC/DIV VAR control fully CCW. 



f. CHECK — Sweep speed readout displays 30.0 ms. 



g. Set the Time-Mark Generator variable timing control 
for exactly 3 time markers per division. 



7. Check X-Axis Bandwidth. 

a. Set the CH 1 Input Coupling to 50 fi DC. 



b. Connect a 50 kHz signal from the Primary Leveled 
Sine-Wave Generator to the CH 1 OR X input connector via 
a orecision 50 Q BNC cable. 



4-24 



REV NOV 1983 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



c. Set the generator output for a 6-division horizontal 
display. 



h. CHECK — Elipse opening is 0.3 division or less, mea- 
sured horizontally. 



d. Change the generator frequency to 3 MHz. 



i. Press in the CH 2 VERTICAL MODE switch (CH 2 on). 



e. CHECK— Signal display is => 4.2 horizontal divisions. 



8. Check X-Y Phase Differential. 

a. Set the Primary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator for a 
1 MHz, 6-division horizontal display. 



b. Press and release the CH 2 VERTICAL MODE switch 
( CH 2 off ). CH 1 displays automatically. 

c. Use the CH 1 VERTICAL POSITION control to verti- 
cally center the display on the graticule. 



d. CHECK — Elipse opening is 0.1 division or less, mea- 
sured horizontally. 



e. Press in the CH 2 VERTICAL MODE switch (CH 2 



on). 



f. Set the generator for a 2 MHz, 6-division horizontal 
display. 



g. Press and release the CH 2 VERTICAL MODE switch 
(CH 2 off). 



9. Check X-Axis Low-Frequency Linearity. 

a. Set the Primary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator and 
the CH 1 POSITION control for a 50 kHz, 2-division horizon- 
tal display centered on the graticule. 



b. Use the CH 1 POSITION control to align the left edge 
of the signal with the left side vertical graticule line. 



c. CHECK — Signal display is 1.8 to 2.2 divisions, mea- 
sured horizontally. 



d. Use the CH 1 POSITION control to position the right 
edge of the signal on the right side vertical graticule line. 



e. CHECK — Signal display is 1.8 to 2.2 divisions, mea- 
sured horizontally. 



f. Disconnect the test setup. 



REV NOV 1983 



4-25 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



CALIBRATOR, EXTERNAL Z-AXIS AND GATE OUTPUTS 



Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) 

Calibration Generator (Item 3) 
Time-Mark Generator (Item 6) 
Oscilloscope with 1 0X Probe (Item 7) 


50 Q BNC T-Connector (Item 8) 

50 Q BNC Cables (2 required) (Item 10) 



Initial Control Settings. 

Control settings not listed do not affect the procedure. 



a. Connect a 10X probe from the CALIBRATOR termi- 
nal to the CH 1 OR X input connector. 



Set: 



VERTICAL MODE 




CH 1 and CH 2 


On (buttons in) 


CH 3, CH 4, ADD, 




and INVERT 


Off (buttons out) 


CHOP/ALT 


CHOP (button in) 


20 MHz BW LIMIT 


Off (button out) 


VOLTS/DIV 




CH 1 and CH 2 


0.1 V 


CH 1 and CH 2 VAR 


In detent 


Input Coupling 




CH 1 


1 MQ DC 


CH2 


50 Q DC 


A and B SEC/DIV 


1 ms (knobs locked) 


A and B SEC/DIV VAR 


In detent 


X10 MAG 


Off (button out) 


AV and At 


Off (press and release 




until associated 




readout is off) 


TRIGGER 




HOLDOFF 


B ENDS A (fully CW) 


LEVEL 


Midrange 


SLOPE 


+ (plus) 


MODE 


AUTO LVL 


SOURCE 


CH 1 


COUPLING 


DC 



b. Connect 1 ms time markers from the Time-Mark Gen- 
erator to the CH 2 input connector via a 50 Q BNC cable. 



c. Adjust the CH 2 VOLTS/DIV switch for several divi- 
sions of marker display. 



d. CHECK — Horizontal drift for any time marker is 1 divi- 
sion or less per second (10 seconds or more for 1 marker to 
drift 1 horizontal divisions). 



e. Set the CH 2 VERTICAL MODE switch to Off (button 
out). 



f. CHECK — 1 cycle is displayed per 2 horizontal divi- 
sions for each position of the A SEC/DIV switch from 0.1 s 
to 0.1 ms. 



g. Disconnect the test setup. 



2. Check External Z-Axis Operation. 

a. Set: 

INTENSITY Fully clockwise 

A and B SEC/DIV 1 ms 



1. Check CALIBRATOR Repetition Rate. 



VOLTS/DIV 
CH 1 



0.5 V 



NOTE 

Refer to the Adjustment Procedure to check the accu- 
ral" r\f +^o f^Ai (DD/rnn mi*™.* locale 



b. Connect a 1 kHz, 2 V standard-amplitude signal from 
the Calibration Generator to the CH 1 OR X input connector 
and the rear-panel EXT Z-AXIS input connector using a 50 ft 






Connect 



iui a i iu ivvv; 



5r\ O DMO nnklnc 



4-26 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



c. CHECK — The positive portion of the 4-division signal 
display is blanked out. 



d. VERIFY — Duration of the high level is between 1 ms 
and 1 .2 ms. 



d. Disconnect the test setup and adjust the crt INTENSI- 
TY as desired. 

3. Check A and B GATE Outputs and Verify 
TRIGGER HOLDOFF. 



a. Set: 




A SEC/DIV 


100 ms 


B SEC/DIV 


50 ixs (knob in) 


At 


Off (DLY readout) 


AREF OR DLY POS 


Zero DLY readout 


TRIGGER 




MODE 


AUTO 


HOLDOFF 


Minimum (CCW) 



b. Connect a test oscilloscope to the A GATE OUT con- 
nector (located on the 2465 rear panel) via a 50 12 BNC 
cable. 



e. VERIFY — Duration of the low level is between 80 ms 
and 150 ixs. 



f. VERIFY — Duration of the low level increases to at 
least 1 times the time measured in part e when the 2465 
HOLDOFF control is rotated to the maximum CW position 
(but not in the detent). 



g. Move the 50 fi BNC cable from the A GATE OUT 
connector to the B GATE OUT connector. 



h. CHECK — Test oscilloscope displays a signal with a 
high level between 2.4 V and 5 V and a low level between 
V and 0.4 V. 



i. VERIFY — Duration of the high portion of the signal is 
between 500 us and 600 j*s. 



c. CHECK — Test oscilloscope displays a signal with a 
high level between 2.4 V and 5 V and a low level between 
V and 0.4 V. 



j. Disconnect the test setup. 



4-27 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 



ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL VERIFICATION 



Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) 

1 0X Probe supplied with Oscilloscope (Item 7) 



Initial Control Settings. 

Control settings not listed do not affect the procedure. 



c. VERIFY— CH 1 trace is not displayed and the CH 2 
trace is displayed. 



Set: 



VERTICAL MODE 
CH 1, CH 2, CH3, 
CH 4, ADD, and 
INVERT 
CHOP/ALT 
20 MHz BW LIMIT 


Off (buttons out) 
ALT (button out) 
Off (button out) 


VOLTS/DIV 
CH 1 and CH 2 
CH 1 and CH 2 VAR 
CH 3 and CH 4 


0.1 V 

In detent 

0.1 V (buttons out) 


Input Coupling 
CH 1 and CH 2 


1 Mfi DC 


A and B SEC/DIV 


1 ms (knobs locked) 


A and B SEC/DIV VAR 


In detent 


X10 MAG 


Off (button out) 


AV and M 


Off (press and release 
until associated 
readout is off) 


TRACKING 


Off (button out) 


TRACE SEP 


Fully CW 


TRIGGER 
HOLDOFF 
LEVEL 
SLOPE 

A/B TRIG Select 
MODE 
SOURCE 
COUPLING 


B ENDS A (fully CW) 

Midrange 

+ (plus) 

A 

AUTO LVL 

VERT 

DC 



1. Verify ALT, CHOP, and ADD Modes and TRACE 
SEP. 

a. VERIFY— CH 1 trace is visible with no VERTICAL 
MODE buttons selected (ail out). 



b. Press the CH 2 VERTICAL MODE button in. 



d. Press the CH 1 VERTICAL MODE button in. 



NOTE 

Separate the traces by approximately 1 division using 
the VERTICAL POSITION controls. Do not position 
either trace precisely at graticule center. 



e. VERIFY— Both the CH 1 and the CH 2 traces are 
displayed. 



f. Press in the ADD button. 



g. VERIFY— A third trace (ADD) is displayed. 



h. Press in the CH 3 VERTICAL MODE button. 



i. VERIFY— The CH 3 trace is added to the display. 



j. Press in the CH 4 VERTICAL MODE button. 



k. VERIFY— The CH 4 trace is added to the display. 



I. Set the A and B SEC/DIV controls to 50 ms (knobs 
locked). 



m. VERIFY — 5 traces are alternately displayed in the fol- 
lowing sequence: CH 1, CH 2, ADD, CH 3, CH 4. 



n. Set the TRIGGER MODE switch to SGL SEQ. 



o. VERIFY — After the current sequence of traces is 
complete, no further traces are displayed. 



4-28 



p. Set the TRIGGER SOURCE switch to LINE. 



Performance Check — 2465 Service 

b. Press and hold the BEAM FIND button in. 



q. Press down and release the TRIGGER MODE switch. 



r. VERIFY— Each time the TRIGGER MODE switch is 
pressed down and released, the 5 signal traces appear once 
(in sequence), the readout display flashes once and the 
scale illumination flashes on and off. 



s. Set the TRIGGER MODE switch to AUTO LVL and 
press the CHOP button in. 



c. VERIFY — The trace is less than 10 divisions long and 
remains in the graticule area as the CH 1 POSITION control 
and the Horizontal POSITION control are rotated through 
their complete ranges. 



d. Release the BEAM FIND button and set the VERTI- 
CAL POSITION and Horizontal POSITION controls to 
midrange. 



3. Check Probe Encoding. 



t. VERIFY — The 5 traces appear to be displayed 
simultaneously. 



u. Set: 



TRIGGER 




SOURCE 


CH4 


A SEC/DIV 


20 mS 


B SEC/DIV 


1 /is (knob out 




and rotated) 


CHOP/ALT 


ALT (button out) 


TRACE SEP 


CCW until traces 




are separated 



NOTE 

Refer to Figure 2-8, Readout Display Locations, for 
the positioning of the readout display information. 



a. Set: 



VOLTS/DIV 

CH 1.CH 2, CHS, 
and CH 4 



0.1 V 



b. Connect the standard accessory 1 0X probe (encoded) 
to the CH 1 input connector. 



v. VERIFY — An alternate B sweep trace appears for 
each A sweep trace (1 traces total). 



c. CHECK— CH 1 readout changes from 100 mV to 1 V. 



2. Verify BEAM FIND Operation. 

a. Set: 

A and B SEC/DIV 



VERTICAL MODE 
CH 1 

CH 2, CH 3, 
CH 4 and ADD 

X10 MAG 

Horizontal POSITION 

Vertical POSITION 



1 ms (knobs locked) 

On (button in) 

Off (buttons out) 
On (button in) 
Midrange 
Midrange 



d. Move the probe to CH 2 and repeat part c for that 
channel. 



e. Move the probe to CH 3. 



f. CHECK— Readout changes from 0.1 to 1. 



g. Move the probe to CH 4 and repeat part f for that 
channel. 



h. Disconnect test setup. 



4-29 



Section 5 — 2465 Service 



ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 



INTRODUCTION 



IMPORTANT— PLEASE READ BEFORE USING THIS PROCEDURE 

The "Adjustment Procedure" is used to restore optimum performance or return the instrument to conformance with its 
"Performance Requirements" as listed in the "Specification" (Section 1). As a general rule, these adjustments should be 
performed every 2000 hours of operation or once a year if used infrequently. 



PARTIAL PROCEDURES 



BEFORE YOU BEGIN: 



This procedure is divided into subsections to permit cali- 
bration of individual sections of the instrument whenever 
complete instrument calibration is not required. To perform 
a partial procedure, first set the instrument as directed in the 
Initial Setup Conditions at the beginning of the section, then 
make any changes called for within the procedure. Perform 
all steps within a subsection, both in the sequence present- 
ed and in their entirety to ensure that control settings will be 
correct for the following steps. 



NOTE 

When performing any of the automatic calibration 
routines (CAL 01 through CAL 04), the CAL/NO CAL 
jumper P501 must be moved to its CAL position (be- 
tween pins 1 and 2) before turning the power on. 
When the desired calibration has been performed, re- 
turn the jumper to its NO CAL position. 



a. Turn instrument Power on. 



The adjustments in CAL 01 , 02, 03, and 04 should be 
performed in numerical sequence, i.e., CAL 01 should be 
done before CAL 02, CAL 02 should be done before CAL 
03, etc. Performing partial procedures when setting the 
automatic calibration constants (i.e. only one or two of the 
CAL steps) is not recommended and should only be done if 
the calibration constants set in the preceding steps are 
known to be correct. 



NOTE 

The instrument MUST have a 20-minute warmup peri- 
od before making any adjustments. Performing the 
adjustment procedure while the temperature is drifting 
may cause erroneous calibration settings. 



5-1 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 



POWER SUPPLIES 



Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) 

Oscilloscope With 10X P6131 Probe (Item 7) 
Digital Multimeter (Item 19) 



Alignment Tool (Item 20) 
1X Probe (Item 21) 



See Adjustment Locations 1 and Adjustment Locations 4 

at the rear of this manual for test point and adjustment locations. 



NOTE 

If the instrument displays "DIAGNSTIC. PUSH A/B 
TRIG TO EXIT" at power on, one of the power-up 
tests has failed. If the error message on the bottom 
line of the display is "TEST 04 FAIL xx" where "xx" is 
01, 10 or 11, stored calibration data is in error, and the 
instrument should be recalibrated. If this is the case, 
pressing the A/B TRIG button will force entry to the 
normal operating mode; however, the accuracy of any 
measurement taken could be in error. 

If any other error message occurs, the failure is proba- 
bly not related to calibration. In this case, the instru- 
ment should be repaired before attempting calibration. 



Initial Control Settings. 

Controls settings not listed will not affect the procedure. 



VERTICAL VOLTS/DIV 
CH2 

CH 3 and CH 4 
CH 1 and CH 2 VAR 

Input Coupling 
CH 1 and CH 2 

VERTICAL MODE 
CH 1 

CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4 
ADD, INVERT, and 
BW LIMIT 
ALT/CHOP 

VERTICAL POSITION 

A and B SEC/DIV 



0.1 V 

0.1 V (buttons out) 

In detent 

1 MS2DC 

On (button in) 
Off (buttons out) 

Off (buttons out) 
ALT (button out) 

Midrange 

X-Y (knobs locked) 



A and B SEC/DI 


v" VAR 


In detent 


Horizontal POSITION 


Midrange 


TRIGGER 






MODE 




AUTO LVL 


SOURCE 




VERT 


COUPLING 




DC 


SLOPE 




+ (plus) 


LEVEL 




Midrange 


HOLDOFF 




In detent 


AV and At 




Off (press and release until 
readout display disappears 


INTENSITY 




Visible display 


READOUT INTENSITY 


Visible display (CCW from 






MIN) 


SCALE ILLUM 




Fully CCW 


FOCUS 




Defocused dot 



1. Check/ Adjust Power Supply DC Levels, 
Regulation, and Ripple (R1292). 

a. Connect the Digital Multimeter (DMM) negative lead 
to chassis ground. Connect the positive lead to the first test 
point listed in Table 5-1 (all test points are on the Main 
Board). 



b. CHECK — That the reading is within the limits given in 
Table 5-1 . 



c. ADJUST— Volt Ref Adj (R1292) for a DMM reading of 
precisely 10.00 V. The adjustment is accessable through a 
hole in the top cover plate. 



5-2 



Adjustment Procedure— 2465 Service 



Table 5-1 
Power Supply Voltage and Ripple Tolerances 



Power Supply 


Test Point (+ Lead) 


Reading 


Total p-p Ripple 


p-p Ripple at Two 
Times Line Frequency 


+ 10V 


J119-4 


+ 9.99 to +10.01 


100mV 


1 mV 


+ 87 V 


J119-8 


+ 85.26 to +88.74 


80 mV 


5mV 


+42.4 V 


J119-9 


+ 41.55 to +43.25 


80 mV 


2mV 


+ 15V 


J119-6 


+ 14.775 to +15.225 


15 mV 


11mV 


Digital +5 V 


J119-2 


+4.85 to +5.15 


150mV 


30 mV 


Analog +5 V 


J119-12 


+ 4.925 to +5.075 


15 mV 


1 mV 


-5V 


J119-5 


-4.965 to -5.035 


15 mV 


1 mV 


-8V 


J119-11 


-7.88 to -8.12 


100 mV 


1 mV 


-15V 


J119-1 


-14.775 to -15.225 


10 mV 


2mV 



d. Repeat parts a and b for the other test points listed in 
Table 5-1 . 



e. Disconnect the DMM. 



g. Using a 1X probe, connect the test oscilloscope probe 
ground lead to chassis ground. Connect the probe tip to the 
first test point listed in Table 5-1 . 



f. Set the test oscilloscope as follows: 



Sweep Speed 

Input Coupling 
CH 1 

Vertical controls 

Trigger controls 

Volts/Division 
BW Limit 



5 ms/div 

1 MQ AC 

To display CH 1 

Line source, triggered 
display 

2mV 

20 MHz (button in) 



h. CHECK — Ripple at two times the line frequency and 
the total peak-to-peak ripple do not exceed the values given 
in Table 5-1 . 



i. Repeat part h for each test point in Table 5-1. 



j. Disconnect the test oscilloscope. 



REV MAR 1983 



5-3 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 



CRT ADJUSTMENTS 



Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) 

Primary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (Item 2) 
Time-Mark Generator (Item 6) 



50 ti BNC Cable (2 required) (Item 10) 
Alignment Tool (Item 20) 



See Adjustment Locations 2 

at the rear of this manual for location of adjustments and test points. 



NOTE 

All crt adjustments (other than the Front-Panel 
ASTIG, FOCUS, and TRACE ROTATION adjust- 
ments) are accessed through the High Voltage shield 
located on the left side of the instrument near the rear 
of the crt. The location of each adjustment is indicated 
on the shield. 



TRACKING/INDEP 
INTENSITY 
READOUT INTENSITY 

SCALE ILLUM 
FOCUS 



INDEP (button out) 

Visible display 

Scale factors off (CCW 
from MIN) 

Fully CCW 

Best focused display 



Initial Control Settings. 

Control settings not listed do not affect the procedure. 
VERTICAL VOLTS/DIV 



CH 1 and CH 2 


0.1 V 


CH 1 and CH 2 VAR 


In detent 


Input Coupling 




CH 1 and CH 2 


1 Mfl GND 


VERTICAL MODE 




CH 2 and BW LIMIT 


On (buttons in) 


CH 1, CH 3,andCH 4 


Off (buttons out) 


ADD and INVERT 


Off (buttons out) 


ALT/CHOP 


ALT (button out) 


VERTICAL POSITION 


Midrange 


A and B SEC/DIV 


X-Y (knobs locked) 


A and B SEC/DIV VAR 


In detent 


Horizontal POSITION 


Midrange 


TRIGGER 




MODE 


AUTO LVL 


SOURCE 


VERT 


COUPLING 


DC 


SLOPE 


+ (plus) 


LEVEL 


Midrange 


HOLDOFF 


In detent 



AV and M 



Off (press and release until 
readout display disappears 



1. Adjust ASTIG Preset (R977) and Grid Bias 
(R1878). 

a. Position the dot in the center area of the graticule 
using the CH 1 and CH 2 POSITION controls. 



b. Focus the displayed dot as well as possible using the 
front-panel FOCUS control. 

c. ADJUST— ASTIG (R977 on the front panel), in con- 
junction with the FOCUS control, for the sharpest possible 
dot. 



d. Set the INTENSITY control knob CCW so the index 
mark points directly left (less than full CCW rotation). 



e. ADJUST— Grid Bias (R1878) for a barely visible dot. 



f. CHECK— No dot is visible when the INTENSITY con- 
trol is rotated fully CCW. 



g. If necessary, repeat parts d and e until the CHECK in 
part f is correct. 



5-4 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 



2. Adjust TRACE ROTATION (R975) and Y-Axis 
Alignment (R1848). 

NOTE 

If the previous step was not performed, first setup the 
Initial Control Settings at the beginning of the CRT 
adjustments, then proceed as follows. 



b. Connect 1 ^s time markers from the Time-Mark 
Generator to the CH 2 input connector via a 50 Q BNC 
cable. 



c. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to align the time 
markers with the vertical graticule lines. Use the CH 2 POSI- 
TION control to align the base of the signal with the bottom 
graticule line. 



a. Set: 

A and B SEC/DIV 
INTENSITY 

At 
INTENSITY 



50 us (knobs iockeci) 

As required for a well de- 
fined trace 

(At readout) 

As required for well de- 
fined vertical cursors 



d. Set the CH 2 VOLTS/DIV switch for at least a 6-divi- 
sion vertical display. 

e. Use the CH 2 POSITION control to set the tops of the 
time markers to graticule center. 



f. Set the CH 2 VOLTS/DIV switch one position clock- 
wise to overscan the display. 



b. Using the CH 2 Vertical POSITION control, align the 
trace with the center horizontal graticule line. 



g. ADJUST— Geometry (R1870) for minimum curvature 
of the time markers across the entire graticule. 



c. Position one of the At cursors to the center vertical 
graticule line using either the A or the AREF OR DLY POS 
control. 



h. Disconnect the test setup. 
4. Adjust Edge Focus (R1864). 



d. ADJUST— TRACE ROTATION (R975 on the front 
panel) to align the trace with the center horizontal graticule 
line. 



e. ADJUST— Y-Axis Alignment (R1848) to align the At 
cursor with the center vertical graticule line. 



f . Repeat parts d and e as necessary for the best aligned 
display. 



NOTE 

If the previous step was not performed, first setup the 
Initial Control Settings at the beginning of the CRT 
adjustments, then proceed as follows. 



a. Set: 



3. Adjust Geometry (R1870). 



Input Coupling 
CH2 


50 fl DC 


VOLTS/DIV 
CH 2 


0.2 V 


INTENSITY 


Midrange 



NOTE 

If the previous step was not performed, first setup the 
Initial Control Settings at the beginning of the CRT 
adjustments, then proceed as follows. 



a. Set: 

Input Coupling 
CH 2 

AV and At 



50 Q DC 

Off (no readout) 



b. Connect a 50 kHz, 8-division signal from the Primary 
Leveled Sine-Wave Generator to the CH 2 input connector 



/ia a ^H O RMP rahlo 



c. Center the display on the graticule. 



d. ADJUST— Edge Focus (R1864), FOCUS (front-panel 
control), and ASTIG (R977, front-panel preset) for the most 
uniform focus over the entire display. 



e. Disconnect the test setup. 



5-5 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 

5. Adjust Z-Axis Transient Response (R1834). 

NOTE 

If the previous step was not performed, first setup the 
Initial Control Settings at the beginning of the CRT 
adjustments, then proceed as follows. 



a. Set: 

A and B SEC/DIV 

Input Coupling 
CH2 

INTENSITY 



50 ns (knobs locked) 

1 MQ GND 

Slightly left of center 



b. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to place the 
beginning of the trace within the graticule. 



a. Set: 




AV 


On (AV readout) 


VOLTS/DIV 
CH2 


0.2 V 


Input Coupling 
CH2 


50 DC 


A and B SEC/DIV 


200 ns (knobs locked) 


READOUT INTENSITY 


Fully CW 


INTENSITY 


Fully CW 



b. Connect a 10 MHz, 6-division signal from the Primary 
Leveled Sine-Wave Generator to the CH 2 input connector 
via a 50 Q BNC cable. 



c. ADJUST— Z-Axis Transient Response (R1834) for 
the most uniform intensity across the first division of 
display. 



c. Center the display on the graticule. 



d. ADJUST-High Drive Focus (R1842) for the best overall 
focus of the trace and readout. 



6. Adjust High Drive Focus (R1842). 



e. Disconnect the test setup. 



NOTE 
If the previous step was not performed, first set up the 
Intial Control Settings at the beginning of the CRT 
adjustments, then proceed as follows. 

The following adjustment has the most effect on the 
first two divisions of the trace which will probably 
cause the readout to be compromised slightly. This 
will not be a problem as the readout is not used at full 
intensity. 



5-6 



REV OCT 1983 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 



DAC REF, CH 1 AND CH 2 INPUT CAPACITANCE, 
AND VERTICAL READOUT JITTER ADJUSTMENTS 



Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) 

Calibration Generator (Item 3) 
50 Q BNC Cable (Item 10) 
50 Q Termination (Item 12) 


Digital Multimeter (DMM) (Item 19) 
Alignment Tool (Item 20) 
Normalizer (Item 22) 



See Adjustment Locations 3 and Adjustment Locations 4 

at the rear of this manual for test point and adjustment locations. 



Initial Control Settings. 

Control settings not listed do not affect the procedure. 



VERTICAL VOLTS/DIV 
CH 1 and CH 2 
CH 1 and CH 2 VAR 


0.1 V 
In detent 


Input Coupling 
CH 1 and CH 2 


1 Mft DC 


VERTICAL MODE 
CH 1 

CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4 
ADD, INVERT, and 
BW LIMIT 
ALT/CHOP 


On (buttons in) 
Off (buttons out) 

Off (buttons out) 
ALT (button out) 


VERTICAL POSITION 


Midrange 


A and B SEC/DIV 


0.1 ms (knobs locked) 


A and B SEC/DIV VAR 


In detent 


Horizontal POSITION 


Midrange 


TRIGGER 
MODE 
SOURCE 
COUPLING 
SLOPE 
LEVEL 
HOLDOFF 


AUTO LVL 

VERT 

DC 

+ (plus) 

Midrange 

In detent 


At 


r\„ 1 A 4. -~ ~ ,J ~ . .4.\ 


TRACKING/INDEP 


INDEP (button out) 


INTENSITY 


Left of center 


READOUT INTENSITY 


As renuired for a visible 




display 


SCALE ILLUM 


Fully CCW 


FOCUS 


Best focused display 



1. Adjust DAC Ref (R21 27) 



NOTE 

The objective of this step is to make the total range of 
the DAC output voltage (sum of the CCW and CW 
readings) equal to 2.5 V. 

a. Connect the digital multimeter (DMM) negative lead to 
the chassis ground. Connect the positive lead to pin 2 of 
J118(on the Main Board). 



b. Set the DMM to measure approximately 1.5 Vdc. 



c. Rotate the AREF OR DLY POS control CCW until the 
DMM reading remains at a constant value (approximately 
-1 .250 V). Note the reading. 



d. Rotate the AREF OR DLY POS control CW until the 
DMM reading remains at a constant value (approximately 
+ 1 .250 V). Note the reading. 



e. Add the absolute values of the readings noted in parts 
c and d together (approximately 2.500 V). 



f. Subtract the total in part e from 2.500 V, then divide 
the difference by two. 



g. ADJUST— DAC Ref (R2127 on the Control Board) to 
add the (signed) number obtained in part f to the reading 
obtained in part d. 



h. Repeat parts c through g as necessary to obtain a 
total DAC range of 2.500 V. 



5-7 



Adjustment Procedure— 2465 Service 



2. Adjust CH 1 and CH 2 Input Capacitance (C105 
and C205). 



h. Change the CH 2 VOLTS/DIV switch to the 50 mV 
position and adjust the generator for a 6-division display. 



NOTE 

If the previous step was not performed, first setup the 
Initial Control Settings before the DAC Ref adjust- 
ment, then proceed as follows. 



NOTE 

The objective of this adjustment is to match the input 
capacitance of the 50 mV per division position of the 
VOLTS/DIV switches to the 0.1 V per division posi- 
tion. The front corner of an input square-wave signal 
is used to indicate when the capacitances are 
matched. 



i. ADJUST— The CH 2, 50 mV C Adj (C205 on the Main 
Board) for the same waveform front corner noted in part g. 



j. Repeat parts g through i until no change is observed in 
the waveform front corner when the CH 2 VOLTS/DIV 
switch is alternated between the 50 mV and 0.1 V positions. 
When switching between positions, reestablish the refer- 
ence signal amplitude at each position, and observe the 
square- wave front corner to make the comparison. 



k. Disconnect the test setup. 



3. Adjust Vertical Readout Jitter (R618). 



a. Connect a 1 KHz square-wave signal from the Cali- 
bration Generator high-amplitude output to the CH 1 OR X 
input connector via a 50 Q BNC cable, a 50 Q termination, 
and a normalizer. Adjust the generator output level for a 
6-division signal vertically centered on the graticule. 



b. Set the normalizer for a square front corner over 
approximately the first 40 ms (0.4 division) of the positive 
portion of the waveform. 



c. Change the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV switch to the 50 mV 
position and adjust the generator for a 6-division signal 
display. 



d. ADJUST— The CH 1 50 mV C Adj (C105 on the Main 
Board) for the same waveform front corner noted in part b. 



e. Repeat parts b through d until no change is observed 
in the waveform front corner when the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 
switch is alternated between the 50 mV and 0.1 V positions. 
When switching between positions, reestablish the refer- 
ence display amplitude at each position, and observe the 
square-wave front corner to make the comparison. 



f. Move the input signal to CH 2 and change the VERTI- 
CAL MODE to display CH 2 only. Adjust the generator 
amplitude for a 6-division signal amplitude. 



g. Set the normalizer for a square front corner over 
approximately the first 40 /xs (0.4 division) of the positive 
portion of the waveform. 



NOTE 

If the previous step was not performed, first setup the 
Initial Control Settings before the DAC Ref adjust- 
ment, then proceed as follows. 



a. Set the CH 1 Input Coupling to 50 12 DC. 

b. Press and release the AV button to obtain a AV 
display. 



c. Use the AREF OR DLY POS control to position one 
cursor 3 divisions above graticule center. Use the A control 
to position the other cursor 3 divisions below graticule 
center. 



d. Connect a 1 kHz, fast-rise signal from the Calibration 
Generator to the CH 1 OR X input connector via a 50 Q BNC 
cable. 



e. Set the generator output level for an 8 division 
display. 



f. Use the CH 1 Vertical and Horizontal POSITION con- 
trols to center the CH 1 display on the graticule. 



g. ADJUST— Vertical Readout Jitter (R618) for mini- 
mum vertical jitter of the readout characters and cursors. 



h. Disconnect the test setup. 



5-8 



REV MAR 1983 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION CONSTANTS, HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL 
GAIN, CENTERING, AND TRANSIENT RESPONSE ADJUSTMENTS 



NOTE 

Within the following procedure, the calibration constants for timing, vertical gain, and trigger level are generated by the 
system microprocessor and are stored in nonvolatile memory. The adjustments in CAL 01, 02, 03, and 04 should be 
performed in numerical sequence, i.e., CAL 01 should be done before CAL 02, CAL 02 should be done before CAL 03, 
etc. Performing partial procedures (i.e. only one or two of the CAL steps) is not recommended and should only be done if 
the calibration constants that would have been set in the preceding steps are known to be correct. 

The CAL functions are available only if the CAL/NO CAL jumper (P501 on the Control Board) is in the CAL position 
(between pins 1 and 2) when power is turned on. When the automatic calibration procedures are completed, return the 
jumper to the NO CAL position to prevent entry into the calibration routines. 



Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) 

Calibration Generator (Item 3) 
Time-Mark Generator (Item 6) 
5012 BNC Cable (Item 10) 


Dual-Input Coupler (Item 11) 
5X Attenuator (Item 17) 
Digital Multimeter (DMM) (Item 19) 
Alignment Tool (Item 20) 



See Adjustment Locations 4 

at the rear of this manual for test point and adjustment locations. 



Initial Control Settings. 

CAL/NO CAL jumper 



CAL position (between 
pins 1 and 2) prior to turn- 
ing on power 



all three switches in for approximately one second, then re- 
lease them. 



b. CHECK — Top line of the readout display says: 
'DIAGNSTIC. PUSH A/B TRIG TO EXIT". 



NOTE 

When performing the automatic CAL steps, initial set- 
ting of the front-panel controls is not required. 



CAL 01— HORIZONTAL 



1. Check/Adjust Horizontal Timing, X1 Gain 
(R860), X10 Gain (R850), Hrz Ctr (R801), and Trans 
Resp (R802). 

a. Simultaneously press in and hold the At and the AV 
push buttons, then press and hold the SLOPE switch. Hold 



NOTE 

The "menu" of calibration, test, and exercise routines 
are in a loop that may be scrolled through in single 
steps, either forward or backward. Pressing up or 
down on the TRIGGER MODE switch and releasing it 
respectively increments or decrements the menu posi- 
tion by one. As each routine is selected, its name 
appears in the iower ieft corner of the readout dispiay. 

When performing a calibration step, touch only the 
specific control or controls called out in the procedure. 
Movement of other controls may cause erroneous cal- 
ibration results. 



5-9 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 

c. Scroll to CAL 01 . 




Upon entering CAL 01, the Input Coupling is automat- 
ically set to 50 Q DC and the 50 i2 OVERLOAD protec- 
tion is disabled. Before starting the procedure, make 
sure any 50 Q OVERLOAD condition has been 
cleared. 



NOTE 

In this procedure, pressing up and releasing the TRIG- 
GER COUPLING switch stores the current calibration 
parameter being set and increments the routine to the 
next step (except where otherwise noted). 



d. Connect the DMM, set to measure approximately 
500 mV, to the CALIBRATOR output. 



e. Press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. 



i. Set: 




VOLTS DIV 


As needed for a conveni- 
ent signal display 
amplitude 


TRACE SEP 


As needed to separate the 
A and B Sweeps 


CH 1 POSITION 


As needed to view both A 
and B Sweeps 


Horizontal POSITION 


Position start of trace at 
the left graticule line 



NOTE 

Some sequential pairs of steps are iterative, i.e., the 
earlier step is recalled if an adjustment is made in the 
later step. Occasionally, on the earlier of some of 
these pairs, the readout may indicate "LIMIT" before 
the correct control setting is reached . If this occurs, 
proceed to the next AUTOCAL step. After the adjust- 
ment at the next step is performed, the previous step 
will automatically be recalled, and the adjustment may 
be performed in the normal manner. 



NOTE 

The CALIBRATOR output will go to its LO level on 
odd CAL steps and to its HI level on even steps. 



f. CHECK— CALIBRATOR output voltage is mV 
1 mV. 



g. CHECK— Readout indicates ADJUST A, (step) 1, 
100 ms (for A Sweep), and 1 us (for B Sweep). 



j. ADJUST— AREF OR DLY POS and A controls to align 
both the intensified zones with the 6th time marker (near 
graticule center) and to superimpose the delayed B Sweep 
time markers. Press up and release the TRIGGER COU- 
PLING switch. 



k. CHECK— CALIBRATOR output voltage is between 
398 mV and 402 mV of the reading noted in part f. Discon- 
nect the DMM when through. 



NOTE 

The readout prompts the operator by showing the 
control to be moved (upper left corner), the autocal 
step number (upper right corner), the A Sweep speed 
(bottom right center), and the B Sweep speed (bottom 
right corner) as set up by the routine. An example 
(from step g above) is: 



ADJ A 



1 



1 00 mS 1 MS 

h. Connect the Time-Mark Generator, set for 0.1 ms 
time markers, to the CH 1 OR X input connector via a 50 ft 
BNC cable. 



I. CHECK— Readout indicates ADJ A, (step) 2, 100 ms 
(for A Sweep), and 1 ms (for B Sweep). 



m. ADJUST— AREF OR DLY POS control to intensify 
the 2nd time marker, and ADJUST— A control to intensify 
the the 10th time marker. Superimpose the delayed B 
Sweep time markers within 0.2 division. 



n. Push up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. 



o. CHECK— Readout indicates ADJ A, (step) 3, 300 ms 
(for A Sweep), and 1 ms (for B Sweep). 



5-10 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 



p. ADJUST— AREF OR DLY POS control to intensify 
the 4th time marker, and ADJUST— A control to intensify 
the 28th time marker. Superimpose the delayed B Sweep 
time markers within 1.2 division. 



q. Press up and release TRIGGER COUPLING switch. If 
the adjustment in step 3 was changed, step 2 will be re- 
called; otherwise step 4 will be initiated. 



r. CHECK— Readout indicates ADJ A, (step) 4, 100 ms 
(for A Sweep), and 1 ms {for B Sweep). Set the Time-Mark 
Generator for 5 ms time markers. 



s. ADJUST — A control CCW until no further movement 
of the B Sweep display occurs. Note the position of the 1st 
time marker, then adjust the A control CW until the 2nd time 
marker moves to the left and aligns with the position just 
noted. 



t. Press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. Set the Time-Mark Generator for 10 ms time 
markers. 



u. CHECK— Readout indicates X1, X10, HRZ CTR, 
(step) 5, and 10 ms (for A Sweep) and two vertical cursors 
appear on the display. 



v. ADJUST— X1 Gain (R860) and Hrz Ctr (R801 ) to align 
the two cursors with the 2nd and 10th vertical graticule 
iines, then adjust X10 Gain (R850) for 1 time marker per 
division. 



w. Press up and release TRIGGER COUPLING switch. 
Set the Time-Mark Generator for 10 ms time markers. 



x. CHECK— Readout indicates ADJ A, (step) 6, 10 ms 
(for A Sweep), and 100 ms (for B Sweep). 



y. ADJUST— AREF OR DLY POS control to intensify 
the 2nd time marker, and ADJUST— A control to intensify 
the 10th time marker. Superimpose the delayed B Sweep 
time markers within 0.2 division. 



z. Press up and release TRIGGER COUPLING switch. 
Set the Time-Mark Generator for 1 ms time markers. 



aa. For each step in Table 5-2, do the following: 

1 . Adjust the AREF OR DLY POS and A controls, as 
necessary, to intensify the indicated time marks on 
the A Sweep and superimpose the displayed B 
Sweep markers within the listed limits. 

2. Press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. 

NOTE 

If the A control is adjusted at step 9, 12 or 14, the 
previous step will be repeated. 

Table 5-2 
Horizontal Timing 



Step No. 


Time-Marker 
Period 


AREF 
Marker 


A 
Marker 


Superposition 

Tolerance In 

Tolerance In 

Divisions 


7 


1 MS 


2 


10 


0.2 


8 


2 ms 


2 


10 


0.2 


9 


2 ms 


4 


28 


1.2 


10 


10 MS 


2 


10 


0.2 


11 


50 ms 


2 


10 


0.2 


12 


50 ms 


4 


28 


1.2 


13 


0.5 ms 


2 


10 


0.2 


14 


0.5 ms 


4 


28 


1.2 


15 


100 ns 


2 


10 


0.2 


16 


20 ns 


2 


10 


0.1 



bb. Set the TRACE SEP fully CW. 



cc. For each step in Table 5-3 (except step 28), adjust 
the A control for the listed number of markers over the 
center 8 divisions, then press up and release the TRIGGER 
COUPLING switch. If the A control is adjusted at step 18, 
20, 23, or 25, the previous step will be repeated. At step 28, 
adjust Trans Resp (R802 on the Main Board) as indicated. 

NOTE 

Change the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV switch setting as nec- 
essary to maintain adequate signal display amplitude. 



REV OCT 1983 



5-11 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 



Table 5-3 
Horizontal Timing 



Step No. 


Time-Marker Period 


Markers Over 
8 Divisions 


17 


1 MS 


8 


18 


1 MS 


24 


19 


2 M s 


8 


20 


2 MS 


24 


21 


10 MS 


8 


22 


50 ms 


8 


23 


50 ms 


24 


24 


500 ns 


8 


25 


500 ns 


24 


26 


100 ns 


8 


27 


20 ns 


8 


28 


2 ns 


2 a 


29 


1 ms 


8 



8 Adjust Trans Resp (R802) for precisely 2 cycles between the 
2nd and 10th graticule lines. 



b. Scroll to CAL 02. 



c. Press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. The instrument will automatically increment through 
steps 100 to 111. 



d. CHECK— Readout indicates CH 1 VAR, CH2 POS, 
(step) 1 1 1 , 500 mV, and BWL 



NOTE 

The readout prompts the operator by showing the 
controls to be moved (upper left corner and upper 
center), the autocal step number (upper right corner), 
the amplitude of signal to be applied to either the CH 1 
or CH 2 connectors (lower left corner), and any other 
scope function that is enabled. An example (from step 
d above) is: 

CH1VARCH2POS 111 

500 mV BWL 



e. Connect a 0.5 V, standard-amplitude signal from the 
Calibration Generator to the CH 1 OR X input connector via 
a 50 fi BNC cable. 



NOTE 

If the remainder of the Adjustment Procedure will not 
be performed (in totality), readjustment of Horizontal 
Readout Jitter (R805) may be necessary if the X1 
Gain (R860) or the X10 Gain (R850) was changed. 
See subsection 2 on page 5-16 for that procedure. 



f. Use the CH 2 POSITION control to vertically position 
the trace to within 1 division of the center graticule line. 



g. ADJUST— CH 1 POSITION and VOLTS/DIV VAR 
controls to obtain a 10-division horizontal signal. Press up 
and release the TRIGGER COUPLING switch. 



dd. Disconnect the test setup. 



h. CHECK— Readout indicates MOVE SW, CENTER 
CH1 POS, (step) 112, 500 mV, and BWL; then press up and 
release the TRIGGER COUPLING switch. 



CAL 02— VERTICAL 

2. Check/Adjust Vertical Preamp Gain, Gain 
(R638), and Vertical Centering (R639). 



i. ADJUST— CH 1 POSITION control carefully until the 
CH 1 input coupling "1 MQ DC" indicator remains illuminat- 
ed, then press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. 



NOTE 

If the previous step (CAL 01) was not performed, the 
adjustments in this subsection should only be per- 
formed if those constants that would have been set in 
CAL 01 are known to be correct. 



a. Set the front-panel INTENSITY control at midrange. 



NOTE 

In the following steps, if the "LIMIT" message ap- 
pears, it probably indicates that the TRIGGER COU- 
PLING (step) switch was moved before the required 
signal was applied. Press down and release the TRIG- 
GER COUPLING switch, verify that the correct signal 
is applied, then press up and release the TRIGGER 
COUPLING switch. 



5-12 



REV MAR 1983 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 



j. CHECK — First step number listed in Table 5-4 
appears in the readout. 



r. With the Calibration Generator set for a 500 mV 
standard-amplitude signal, press up and release the TRIG- 
GER COUPLING switch. 



k. Apply the corresponding standard-ampiitude signai 
from the Calibration Generator, then press up and release 
the TRIGGER COUPLING switch. 



I. Repeat steps j and k for each step-signal combination 
listed in Table 5-4. 



Table 5-4 
Vertical Calibration Signals 



Autocal Step Readout 
Display 


Standard-Amplitude 
Signal to Apply 


113, 114 a 


0.5 V 


115 


0.2 V 


116 


0.1 V 


117 


50 mV 


118 


20 mV 


119 


1 V 


120 


10V 



a When step 113 is performed, step 114 is also automatically 
done. No indication of step 114 will be shown unless a LIMIT 
error is encountered. 



m. Move the signal to the CH 2 input connector. 



n. CHECK— Readout indicates MOVE SW, CENTER 
CH 2 POS, (step) 121, 500 mV, 500 mV, and BWL. 



o. Set the Calibration Generator for a 500 mV standard- 
amplitude signal, then press up and release the TRIGGER 
COUPLING switch. 



p. ADJUST— CH 2 VERTICAL POSITION control until 
the CH 1 input Coupling "1 Mil DC indicator remains illumi- 
nated, then press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. 



q. UHLUK— Readout indicates MOVE SW, CENTER 
CH 2 POS, (step) 122, 500 mV, 500 mV, and BWL. 



s. ADJUST— CH 2 VERTICAL POSITION control until 
the CH 1 Input Coupling "1 MQ DC" indicator remains illumi- 
nated, then press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. 



t. CHECK — First step number listed in Table 5-5 
aooears in the readout. 



u. Apply the corresponding standard-amplitude signal, 
then press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. 



v. Repeat steps t and u for each step-signal combination 
listed in Table 5-5. 



Table 5-5 
Vertical Calibration Signals 



Autocal Step 
Readout Display 


Standard-Amplitude 
Signal to Apply 


123, 124 a 


0.5 V 


125 


0.2 V 


126 


0.1 V 


127 


50 mV 


128 


20 mV 


129 


1 V 


130 


10 V 



a When step 123 is performed, step 124 is also automatically 
done. No indication of step 124 will be shown unless a LIMIT 
error is encountered. 



w. CHECK— Readout indicates MOVE SW, CENTER 
CH 2 POS, (step) 1 31 , 1 V, 1 1 V, and BWL; then press up 
and release the TRIGGER COUPLING switch. 



x. ADJUST— CH 2 POSITION control until the CH 1 
Input Coupling "1 Mfi DC" indicator remains illuminated, 
then press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. The instrument will automatically increment through 
steps 132 to 142. 



REV MAR 1983 



5-13 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 



y. CHECK— Readout indicates MOVE SW, CENTER 
CH 1 POS, (step) 142, 50 mV, and BWL. 



d. CHECK— Readout indicates CH 1, 500 mV, and 
(step) 215. 



z. Move the signal to the CH 1 OR X input connector 
and set the Calibration Generator for a 50 mv standard- 
amplitude signal, then press up and release the TRIGGER 
COUPLING switch. 



aa. ADJUST— CH 1 POSITION control until the CH 1 
"1 MQ DC" indicator remains illuminated, then press up and 
release the TRIGGER COUPLING switch. Wait approxi- 
mately 10 seconds for automatic calibration of the AV 
cursors. 



bb. CHECK— Readout indicates VERTICAL CENTER 
and GAIN. 



NOTE 

The readout prompts the operator by showing which 
connector the input signal should be applied to (upper 
left corner), the amplitude of that signal (upper center), 
and the autocal step number (upper right corner). An 
example (from step d above) is: 



CH1 500 mV 



215 



e. Connect a 0.5 V standard-amplitude signal from the 
Calibration Generator to the CH 1 OR X input connector via 
a 50 Q BNC cable. 



cc. ADJUST — Gain (R638) for precisely 5 divisions 
between the two horizontal cursors. 



f. Press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. 



dd. ADJUST— Vertical Centering (R639) to center the 
cursors on the graticule (align the cursors with the dotted 
0% and 1 00(%) graticule lines). 



ee. Press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. 



CAL 03— TRIGGERING 

3. Check/Adjust Triggering. 



g. CHECK— Readout indicates CH 1, 500 mV, and 
(step) 216. 



h. Press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. 



i. CHECK— Readout indicates CH 2, 500 mV, and 
(step) 217. 



j. Move the signal to the CH 2 input connector. Press up 
and release the TRIGGER COUPLING switch. 



NOTE 

If the previous steps (CAL 01 and CAL 02) were not 
performed, the adjustments in this subsection should 
only be performed if those constants that would have 
been set in CAL 01 and CAL 02 are known to be 
correct and if a DC Balance has been performed after 
a 20-minute warmup period. 



k. CHECK— Readout indicates CH 3, 500 mV, and 
(step) 218. 



I. Move the signal to the CH 3 input connector. Press up 
and release the TRIGGER COUPLING switch. 



a. Scroll to CAL 03. 



m. CHECK— Readout indicates CH 3, 2V, and 
(step) 219. 



b. Press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. 



n. Change the generator output level to 2 V, then press 
up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING switch. 



c. CHECK — Procedure automatically steps from 201 
through 214 and stops at 215. 



o. CHECK— Readout indicates CH 4, 500 mV. and 
(step) 220. 



5-14 



Adjustment Procedure— 2465 Service 



p. Move the signal to the CH 4 input connector and 
change the generator output level to 0.5 V. Press up and 
release the TRIGGER COUPLING switch. 



g. Set the generator amplitude for a 3- to 5-division dis- 
play amplitude. Use the CH 1 and CH 2 POSITION controls 
to vertically overlay the traces near the center of the grati- 
cule area. 



q. CHECK— Readout indicates CH 4, 2V, and 
(step) 221 . 



r. Change the generator output level to 2 V, then press 
up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING switch. 



s. Disconnect the test setup. 



h. Set the Horizontal POSITION control to set the rising 
edge of the signal near the center vertical graticule line. 



i. Press the X10 MAG button in to obtain a magnified 
display. 



j. Pull out the B SEC/DIV knob. 



CAL 04— CH 2 DELAY ENABLE/DISABLE 

4. Check/Adjust CH 2 Delay Enable/Disable. 

a. Scroll to CAL 04. 



k. CHECK— Readout indicates "CH 2 DLY— TURN A" 
and that the A control will move the leading edge of the 
CH 2 trace at least 1 division to either side of the CH 1 
trace. 



b. Press up and release the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch to initiate the routine. 



I. ADJUST — A control to superimpose the leading 
edges. 



c. CHECK— Readout alternately indicates "ENABLED" 
and "DISABLED" each time the TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch is pressed up and released. 



d. Leave the readout display indicating "ENABLED" 
Press and release the A/B TRIG button to exit the routine. 



m. Push in the B SEC/DIV knob. 



NOTE 

If the CH 2 Delay Adjust feature is to be disabled for 
normal instrument use, perform the following steps; 
otherwise, proceed to step r below. 



e. Connect a 100 kHz, positive-going signal from the 
Calibration Generator fast-rise output to the CH 1 OR X and 
CH 2 input connectors via a 50 ft BNC cable, a 5X attenua- 
tor, and a Dual-Input Coupler. 



f. Set: 



VERTICAL MODE 




CH 1 and CH 2 


On (buttons in) 


VOLTS/DIV 




CH 1 and CH 2 


10 mV 


Input Coupling 




CH 1 and CH 2 


50 Q DC 


A and B SEC/DIV 


1 ns (knobs locked) 


TRIGGER 




SOURCE 


CH 1 


MODE 


AUTO LVL 


COUPLING 


DC 


SLOPE 


+ (plus) 



n. Reenter the Diagnostic Monitor by pressing the AV 
and At buttons simultaneously (hold them in), then press 
and hold the TRIGGER SLOPE button. Release the buttons 
after about 1 second. 



o. Scroll to CAL 04. 



„ r> „«^ -,-.1~~„~ +U~ TDI(^r!CD Pr\IIDI IMIl 

(J. ncss up ai iu i cicasc u 10 innjvjLii wvwr lihu 

switch until the readout indicates "DISABLED." 



q. Press and release the A/B TRIG button to return to 
normal operating mode. 



r. Return the CAL/NO CAL jumper to the NO CAL posi- 
tion and disconnect the test setup. 



REV MAY 1984 



5-15 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 

DYNAMIC CENTERING, CRT TERMINATION, VERTICAL GAIN, VERTICAL 

CENTERING, TRANSIENT RESPONSE, HF ADJ, READOUT JITTER, DC 

BALANCE, AND X-Y PHASE DIFFERENTIAL ADJUSTMENTS 



Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) 

Primary Leveled-Sinewave Generator (Item 2) 
Calibration Generator (Item 3) 
50 Q BNC Cable (Item 10) 


5X Attenuator (Item 17) 
Alignment Tool (Item 20) 
Tunnel Diode Pulser (Item 23) 



See Adjustment Locations 1 and Adjustment Locations 4 

at the rear of this manual for location of test points and adjustments. 



Initial Control Settings. 

Control settings not listed do not affect the procedure. 



VERTICAL VOLTS/DIV 




CH 1 and CH 2 


10 mV 


CH 1 VAR 


CCW (out of detent) 


CH 2 VAR 


In detent 


Input Coupling 




CH 1 and CH 2 


50 Q DC 


VERTICAL MODE 




CH 1 


On (button in) 


CH 2, CH 3 and CH 4 


Off (buttons out) 


ADD, INVERT, and 




BW LIMIT 


Off (buttons out) 


ALT/CHOP 


ALT (button out) 


VERTICAL POSITION 


Midrange 


A and B SEC/DIV 


20 ns (knobs locked) 


A and B SEC/DIV VAR 


In detent 


Horizontal POSITION 


Midrange 


TRIGGER 




MODE 


AUTO LVL 


SOURCE 


VERT 


COUPLING 


DC 


SLOPE 


+ (plus) 


LEVEL 


Midrange 


HOLDOFF 


In detent 


AV 


On (RATIO readout) 


TRACKING/INDEP 


INDEP (button out) 


AREF OR DLY POS 




and A 


Cursors near the 3rd line 




above and 3rd line below 




graticule center 




(6 division spacing) 


INTENSITY 


Left of center 



READOUT INTENSITY 
SCALE ILLUM 
FOCUS 



Right of center 

Fully CCW 

Best focused display 



1. Adjust Dynamic Centering (R3401 and R3407). 

a. Rotate the READOUT INTENSITY control from 
midrange to fully CW and note any horizontal and vertical 
shift that occurs in the readout characters. 



b. ADJUST— Horizontal Dynamic Centering (R3401) to 
minimize the horizontal component of the shift. 



c. ADJUST— Vertical Dynamic Centering (R3407) to 
minimize the vertical component of the shift. 



d. Repeat steps a through c as necessary to minimize 
readout shift until no further improvement is noted. 

2. Check/ Adjust CRT Termination (R1501), 
Vertical Gain (R638), Vertical Centering (R639), 
High-Frequency Trans Resp (C404, R403, R411, 
C403, and L403), HF Adj (R417), Vertical Readout 
Jitter (R618), Horizontal Readout Jitter (R805), and 
X-Y Phasing (C1 18). 

NOTE 

If the previous step was not performed, first setup the 
Initial Control Settings before the Dynamic Centering 
adjustments, then proceed as follows. 

NOTE 
CRT Termination, High Frequency Transient 
Response, Vertical Gain, Vertical Centering, and 
Readout Jitter adjustments are interactive. This pro- 
cedure optimizes these adjustments together. 



5-16 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 



a. Rotate the AREF OR DLY POS control CCW until the 
RATIO readout is constant. 



b. Rotate the A control until the readout display indi- 
cates 130.0%. 



j. ADJUST— Trans Resp adjustments (C404 and R403) 
alternately for the best flat top on the first 10 ns of the 
positive portion of the waveform. When adjusting R403, use 
only the range between 1/4 CCW to fully CCW. Repeat 
steps i and j as necessary for best flat top over the first 20 
ns. 



c. CHECK — One cursor is near the bottom horizontal 
graticule line and the other is near dotted graticule line 
marked 100(%). 



d. Rotate the AREF OR DLY POS control until the read- 
out displays exactly 1 00.0%. The cursors should now be on 
or near the dotted graticule lines marked 0% and 1 00(%). 



k. ADJUST— Vertical Gain (R638) and Vertical Center- 
ing (R639) to vertically center the cursors precisely 5 divi- 
sions apart (align with the dotted 0% and 1 00(%) graticule 
lines). 



Press the AV button to turn off the cursors. 



e. Set the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV VAR to the detent position. 



NOTE 

Care must be taken not to disturb the position of the 
controls adjusted in parts b through e during the bal- 
ance of this procedure. If they are accidentally moved, 
repeat the procedure from the beginning. 



f. Connect the high-amplitude output of the Calibration 
Generator to the CH 1 OR X input connector via a 50 Q BNC 
cable, a Tunnel Diode Pulser, and a 5X attenuator. 



g. Set the generator Period switch to 100 kHz, and set 
the generator amplitude control to maximum. 



NOTE 

Inductor L403 is a selectable component chosen to 
match transient response characteristics of the Verti- 
cal system. If spreading the coil turns as described in 
step m below will not correct the front corner over- 
shoot, a smaller value coil should be installed. The 
proper coils to use are: 

60 nH— 3 turn inductor Part No. 108-0420-00 
45 nH— 2 turn inductor Part No. 108-0578-00 
35 nH— 1 turn inductor Part No. 108-0557-00 



m. ADJUST— Trans Resp adjustments (R411, C403) 
and HF Adj (R417) alternately for the squarest front corner 
and flatest top of the positive portion of the waveform. If the 
front corner is overshot, adjust the small coil (L403) by 
spreading the coil leads apart, then readjust R411 and 
C403. 



h. Rotate the pulser Trigger control CW (from a fully 
CCW position) until a stable signal first appears on the grati- 
cule. Display amplitude will be approximately 5 divisions. 
The oscilloscope TRIGGER LEVEL control may need to be 
adjusted to obtain a stable display. 

NOTE 

As a guide when performing the following adjust- 
ments, optimum performance is achieved when the 
CH 1 and CH 2 step response aberrations are < 4% 
when using 10 m\ '/division deflection factors (^ 0.2 
division on a 5-division signal). 

i. ADJUST— CRT Termination (R1501) for best flat-top 
approximately 5 ns past the rising edge of the waveform. 
The adjustment is accessabie through a hoie in the top 
cover plate. Squeezing the output leads of the termination 
inductors (LR1513 and LR1514) toward each other will re- 
duce the spike that may be present approximately 6 ns be- 
hind the leading edge. 



n. Move the test signal to CH 2 and set the VERTICAL 
MODE switches to display CH 2. 



o. Repeat parts j and m for CH 2, switching between 
CH 1 and CH 2 as necessary, until both CH 2 and CH 1 
aberrations are minimized. When minimized, leave CH 2 
selected. 



p. Disconnect tne uanbration uenerator and connect the 
Secondary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator to the CH 2 input 
via a BNC cable. 



q. Set the generator for a 6-division display at the refer- 
ence frequency. 



r. Change the generator output frequency to 300 MHz. 



REV MAR 1983 



5-17 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 



s. CHECK— Display amplitude is between 4.4 divisions 
and 5.0 divisions. Optimum performance of the Vertical sys- 
tem is obtained when this value is between 4.6 and 4.8 
divisions. 



s1 . CHECK — Display amplitude does not drop below 4.4 
divisions when sweeping the generator frequency from 300 
MHz to 250 MHz. 



ff. Using the AREF OR DLY POS and A controls, posi- 
tion the cursors to the 2nd and 10th graticule lines. 

gg. Press the X10 MAG button to magnify the display. 

hh. ADJUST— Horizontal Readout Jitter (R805) for mini- 
mum horizontal jitter of the readout characters and cursors. 

ii. Disconnect the test setup. 



t. ADJUST — If necessary, compromise the settings in 
parts j and m to obtain the best flat top with the proper 
bandwidth. HF Adj (R417) will have the most effect on the 
bandwidth. 



u. Move the input signal to CH 1 and select CH 1 for 
display. 



v. Repeat parts q through t for CH 1 . If readjustment of 
R417 is necessary, repeat parts j through t. 



w. Set the A and B SEC/DIV switch to 1 ms. 



3. Set CH 1 and CH 2 DC Balance. 



NOTE 



The instrument must have had a 20-minute warmup 
prior to performing the next step to ensure accuracy. 



a. Set: 

Input Coupling 
CH 1 and CH 2 



1 Mfi AC 



b. Press up momentarily and release the CH 1 and CH 2 
Input Coupling switches simultaneously. 



x. Select CH 1 for display. 



y. Press and release the AV button to obtain a AV 
display. 



z. Use the AREF OR DLY POS control to position one 
cursor 3 divisions above graticule center and use the A con- 
trol to position the other cursor 3 divisions below graticule 
center. 



c. CHECK— A moving dot display replaces the normal 
display for approximately 10 seconds, then the display re- 
turns to normal. 



d. CHECK— For less than 0.2-division + 0.5 mV vertical 
trace shift when the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV switch is rotated 
through all of its settings. 



e. Set the VERTICAL MODE switches to disable CH 1 
and display CH 2. 



aa. Connect a 1 kHz, fast-rise signal from the Calibration 
Generator to the CH 1 OR X input connector via a 50 Q BNC 
cable. 



f. CHECK— For less than 0.2-division + 0.5 mV vertical 
trace shift when the CH 2 VOLTS/DIV switch is rotated 
through all of its settings. 



bb. Set the generator output level for an 8-division 
display. 



cc. Use the CH 1 Vertical and the Horizontal POSITION 
controls to center the CH 1 display on the graticule. 



dd. ADJUST— Vertical Readout Jitter (R618) for mini- 
mum vertical jitter of the readout characters and cursors. 



ee. Press the At button to obtain a At cursor display. 



4. Adjust X-Y Phasing (C1 


18). 


a. Set: 




VOLTS/DIV 
CH 1 


50 mV 


Input Coupling 


50 fi DC 


A SEC/DIV 


X-Y 


VERTICAL MODE 
CH 1 
CH 2 


On (button in) 
Off (button out) 



5-13 



REV MAY 1984 



Adjustment Procedure — 2465 Service 



b. Connect the Primary Leveled Sine-Wave Generator to 
the CH 1 OR X input connector via a 50 Q BNC cable. 



f. Set the generator frequency to 2 MHz and adjust the 
amplitude for a 6-division vertical signal display. 



c. Set the generator frequence to 1 MHz and adjust the 
amplitude for a 6-division vertical signal display. 



g. CHECK— Horizontal opening in the elipse is 0.3 divi- 
sion or less, measured at the center horizontal graticule line. 



d. Use the CH 1 POSITION control to vertically center 
the display on the graticule. 



a An II ICT Y V Dhoeinn IC:A 1 fl\ fnr nn rjnoninn in the 



elipse. 



i. Disconnect the test setup. 



Turn POWER Off. 



5-19 



Section 6 — 2465 Service 



■Vl# l \ll^l I Em I X r^ I ^1 \m* mm 



This section of the manual contains information for conducting preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, and corrective 
maintenance on the 2465 Oscilloscope. 



STATivs-SENSi i iVE v^OmFQNENTS 



The following precautions are applicable when perform- 
ing any maintenance involving internal access to the 
instrument. 



6. Pick up components by their bodies, never by their 
leads. 




Table 6-1 

Susceptibility 

to Static Discharge Damage 



Static discharge can damage any semiconductor 
component in this instrument. 



This instrument contains electrical components that are 
susceptible to damage from static discharge. Table 6-1 lists 
the relative susceptibility of various classes of semiconduc- 
tors. Static voltages of 1 kV to 30 kV are common in unpro- 
tected environments. 



When performing maintenance, observe the following 
precautions to avoid component damage: 

1 . Minimize handling of static-sensitive components. 



2. Transport and store static-sensitive components or 
assemblies in their original containers or on a metal rail. 
Label any package that contains static-sensitive compo- 
nents or assemblies. 



3. Discharge the static voltage from your body by wear- 
ing a grounded antistatic wrist strap while handling these 
components. Servicing static-sensitive components or as- 
semblies should be performed oniy at a static-free work sta- 
tion by qualified service personnel. 



Semiconductor Classes 


Relative 

Susceptibility 

Levels 3 


MOS or CMOS microcircuits or 
discretes, or linear microcircuits 
with MOS inputs. (Most Sensitive) 


1 


ECL 


2 


Schottky signal diodes 


3 


Schottky TTL 


4 


High-frequency bipolar transistors 


5 


JFETs 


6 


Linear microcircuits 


7 


Low-power Schottky TTL 


8 


TTL (Least Sensitive) 


9 



"Voltage equivalent for levels: (Voltage discharged from a 
100 pF capacitor through a resistance of 100 Q.) 

1 = 100 to 500 V 4 = 500 V 7 = 400 to 1000 V(est.) 

2 = 200 to 500 V 5 = 400 to 600 V 8 = 900 V 

3 = 250 V 6 = 600 to 800 V 9 = 1200 V 



4. Nothing capable of generating or holding a static 
charge should be allowed on the work station surface. 



5. Keep the component leads shorted together whenever 
possible. 



7. Do not slide the components over any surface. 



8. Avoid handling components in areas that have a floor 
or work-surface covering capable of generating a static 
charge. 



6-1 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



9. Use a soldering iron that is connected to earth ground. 



10. Use only approved antistatic, vacuum-type 
desoldering tools for component removal. 



PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 



INTRODUCTION 

Preventive maintenance consists of cleaning, visual in- 
spection, and checking instrument performance. When ac- 
complished regularly, it may prevent instrument malfunction 
and enhance instrument reliability. The severity of the envi- 
ronment in which the instrument is used determines the re- 
quired frequency of maintenance. An appropriate time to 
accomplish preventive maintenance is just before instru- 
ment adjustment. 



GENERAL CARE 

The cabinet minimizes accumulation of dust inside the 
instrument and should normally be in place when operating 
the 2465. The front cover supplied with the instrument pro- 
vides both dust and damage protection for the front panel 
and crt, and it should be on whenever the instrument is 
stored or is being transported. 



INSPECTION AND CLEANING 

The 2465 should be visually inspected and cleaned as 
often as operating conditions require. Accumulation of dirt in 
the instrument can cause overheating and component 



breakdown. Dirt on components acts as an insulating blan- 
ket, prevent efficient heat dissipation. It also provides an 
electrical conduction path that could result in instrument fail- 
ure, especially under high-humidity conditions. 




Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which 
might damage the plastics used in this instrument. 
Use a nonresidue-type cleaner, preferably isopropyl 
alcohol or a solution of 1% mild detergent with 99% 
water. Before using any other type of cleaner, consult 
your Tektronix Service Center or representative. 



Exterior 

INSPECTION. Inspect the external portions of the instru- 
ment for damage, wear, and missing parts; use Table 6-2 as 
a guide. Instruments that appear to have been dropped or 
otherwise abused should be checked thoroughly to verify 
correct operation and performance. Deficiencies found that 
could cause personal injury or could lead to further damage 
to the instrument should be repaired immediately. 



Table 6-2 
External Inspection Check List 



Item 


Inspect For 


Repair Action 


Cabinet, Lid, Front 
Panel 


Cracks, scratches, deformations, damaged 
hardware or gaskets. 


Touch up paint scratches and replace 
defective components. 


Front-panel Controls 


Missing, damaged, or loose knobs, buttons, and 
controls. 


Repair or replace missing or defective items. 


Connectors 


Broken shells, cracked insulation, and deformed 
contacts. Dirt in connectors. 


Replace defective parts. Clear or wash out 
dirt. 


Carrying Handle 


Correct operation. 


Replace defective parts. 


Accessories 


Missing items or parts of items, bent pins, 
broken or frayed cables, and damaged 
connectors. 


Replace damaged or missing items, frayed 
cables, and defective parts. 



6-2 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 




To prevent getting moisture inside the instrument dur- 
ing external cleaning, use only enough liquid to damp- 
en the cloth or applicator. 



CLEANING. Loose dust on the outside of the instrument 
can be removed with a soft cloth or smaii soft-bristie brush. 
The brush is particularly useful for dislodging dirt on and 
around the controls and connectors. Dirt that remains can 
be removed with a soft cloth dampened in a mild detergent- 
and-water solution. Do not use abrasive cleaners. 



Two plastic light filters, one blue and one clear, are pro- 
vided with the oscilloscope. Clean the light filters and the crt 
face with a soft lint-free cloth dampened with either isopro- 
pyl alcohol or a mild detergent-and-water solution. 



Interior 

To gain access to internal portions of the instrument for 
inspection and cleaning, refer to the "Removal and Replace- 
ment Instructions" in the "Corrective Maintenance" part of 
this section. 



INSPECTION. Inspect the internal portions of the 2465 
for damage and wear, using Table 6-3 as a guide. Deficien- 
cies found should be repaired immediately. The corrective 
procedure for most visible defects is obvious; however, par- 
ticular care must be taken if heat-damaged components are 
found. Overheating usually indicates other trouble in the in- 
strument; therefore, it is important that the cause of over- 
heating be corrected to prevent recurrence of the damage. 

If any electrical component is replaced, conduct a Perfor- 
mance Check for the affected circuit and for other closely 
related circuits (see Section 4). If repair or replacement work 
is done on any of the power supplies, conduct a complete 
Performance Check and, if so indicated, an instrument read- 
justment (see Sections 4 and 5). 



Table 6-3 
Internal Inspection Check List 



Item 


Inspect For 


Repair Action 


Circuit Boards 


Loose, broken, or corroded solder 
connections. Burned circuit boards. 
Burned, broken, or cracked circuit- 
run plating. 


Clean solder corrosion with an eraser and flush with isopropyl 
alcohol. Resolder defective connections. Determine cause of 
burned items and repair. Repair defective circuit runs. 


Resistors 


Burned, cracked, broken, blistered. 


Replace defective resistors. Check for cause of burned 
component and repair as necessary. 


Solder Connections 


Cold solder or rosin joints. 


Resolder joint and clean with isopropyl alcohol. 


Capacitors 


Damaged or leaking cases. Corrod- 
ed solder on leads or terminals. 


Replace defective capacitors. Clean solder connections and 
flush with isopropyl alcohol. 


Semiconductors 


Loosely inserted in sockets. 
Distorted pins. 


Firmly seat loose semiconductors. Remove devices having 
distorted pins. Carefully straighten pins (as required to fit the 
socket), using long-nose pliers, and reinsert firmly. Ensure 
that straightening action does not crack pins, causing them to 
break off. 


Wiring and Cabies 


Loose piugs or conneciors. ourneu, 
broken, or frayed wiring. 


Firmly seat connectors. Repair or replace defective wires or 
cables. 


Chassis 


Dents, deformations, and damaged 
hardware. 


Straighten, repair, or replace defective hardware. 



6-3 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 




To prevent damage from electrical arcing, ensure that 
circuit boards and components are dry before apply- 
ing power to the instrument. 



CLEANING. To clean the interior, blow off dust with dry, 
low-pressure air (approximately 9 psi). Remove any remain- 
ing dust with a soft brush or a cloth dampened with a solu- 
tion of mild detergent and water. A cotton-tipped applicator 
is useful for cleaning in narrow spaces and on circuit boards. 



If these methods do not remove all the dust or dirt, the 
instrument may be spray washed using a solution of 5% 
mild detergent and 95% water as follows: 



4. Clean switches with isopropyl alcohol and wait 60 sec- 
onds for the majority of the alcohol to evaporate. Then com- 
plete drying with low-pressure air. 



5. Dry all components and assemblies in an oven or dry- 
ing compartment using low-temperature (125° F to 150° F) 
circulating air. 



LUBRICATION 

There is no periodic lubrication required for this 
instrument. 




Exceptions to the following procedure are the Attenu- 
ator assemblies and the Front-Panel module. Clean 
these assemblies only with isopropyl alcohol as de- 
scribed in step 4. 



SEMICONDUCTOR CHECKS 

Periodic checks of the transistors and other semiconduc- 
tors in the oscilloscope are not recommended. The best 
check of semiconductor performance is actual operation in 
the instrument. 



1 . Gain access to the parts to be cleaned by removing 
easily accessible shields and panels. 



PERIODIC READJUSTMENT 



2. Spray wash dirty parts with the detergent-and-water 
solution; then use clean water to thoroughly rinse them. 



3. Dry all parts with low-pressure air. 

NOTE 

Most of the switches used in the 2465 are sealed and 
the contacts are inaccessible. If cleaning is deemed 
necessary, use only isopropyl alcohol. 



To ensure accurate measurements, check the perfor- 
mance of this instrument every 2000 hours of operation, or 
if used infrequently, once each year. In addition, replace- 
ment of components may necessitate readjustment of the 
affected circuits. 



Complete Performance Check and Adjustment instruc- 
tions are given in Sections 4 and 5. The Performance Check 
Procedure can also be helpful in localizing certain troubles in 
the instrument. 



6-4 



Maintenance— 2465 Service 



TROUBLESHOOTING 



INTRODUCTION 

Preventive maintenance performed on a regular basis 
should reveal most potential problems before an instrument 
malfunctions. However, should troubleshooting be required, 
the following information is provided to facilitate location of 
a fault. In addition, the material presented in the "Theory of 
Operation" and "Diagrams" sections of this manual may be 
helpful while troubleshooting. 



TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS 



Circuit Board Illustrations 

Circuit board illustrations showing the physical location 
of each component are provided for use in conjunction with 
each schematic diagram. Each board illustration is found in 
the "Diagrams" section on the back of a foldout page, pre- 
ceding the first schematic diagram(s) to which it relates. 



The iocations of waveform test points are marked on the 
circuit board illustrations with hexagonal outlined numbers 
corresponding to the waveform numbers on both the sche- 
matic diagram and the waveform illustrations. 



Diagnostic Firmware 

The operating firmware in this instrument contains diag- 
nostic routines that aid in locating malfunctions. When in- 
strument power is applied, power-up tests are performed to 
verify proper operation of much of the instrument's circuitry. 
If a failure is detected, this information is passed on to the 
operator in the form of either a crt readout or illuminated 
LED indicators. The failure information directs the operator 
to the failing block of circuitry. If the failure is such that the 
processor can still execute the diagnostic routines, the user 
can call up specific tests to further check the failing circuitry. 
The specific diagnostic routines are explained later in this 
section. 



Circuit Board Locations 

The placement in the instrument of each circuit board is 
shown in a board locator illustration. This illustration is lo- 
cated on the foldout page along with the circuit board 
illustration. 



Power Distribution Diagrams 

Power Distribution diagrams (diagrams 11 and 12) are 
provided in the "Diagrams" section to aid in troubleshooting 
power-supply problems. 



Schematic Diagrams 

Complete schematic diagrams are located on tabbed 
foldout pages in the "Diagrams" section. Portions of circuit- 
ry mounted on each circuit board are enclosed by heavy 
black lines. The assembly number and name of the circuit 
are shown near either the top or the bottom edge of the 
diagram. 



Functional blocks on schematic diagrams are outlined 
with a wide grey line. Components within the outlined area 
perform the function designated by the block label. The 
"Theory of Operation" uses these functional block names 
when describing circuit operation as an aid in cross-refer- 
encing between the theory and the schematic diagrams. 



Circuit Board Interconnection Diagram 

A circuit board interconnection diagram (diagram 1 3) and 
tables listing the interconnecting pins and signals carried are 
provided in the "Diagram" section following the Power Dis- 
tribution diagrams. 



Grid Coordinate System 

Each schematic diagram and circuit board illustration has 
a grid border along its left and top edges. A table located 
adjacent to each diagram lists the grid coordinates of each 
component shown on that diagram. To aid in physically lo- 
cating components on the circuit board, this table also lists 
the grid coordinates of each component on the circuit board 
illustration. 



Component numbers and electrical values of compo- 
nents in this instrument are shown on the schematic dia- 
grams. Refer to the first page of the "Diagrams" section for 
the reference designators and symbols used to identify com- 
ponents. Important voltages and waveform reference num- 
bers (enclosed in hexagonal-shaped boxes) are also shown 
on each diagram. Waveform illustrations are located adja- 
cent to their respective schematic diagram. 



Near each circuit board illustration is an alphanumeric 
listing of all components mounted on that board. The sec- 
ond column in each listing identifies the schematic diagram 
on which each component can be found. These component- 
locator tables are especially useful when more than one 
schematic diagram is associated with a particular circuit 
board. 



6-5 



Maintenance— 2465 Service 

Troubleshooting Charts 

The troubleshooting charts contained in the "Diagrams" 
section are to be used as an aid in locating malfunctioning 
circuitry. To use the charts, begin with the Preliminary Tests 
flowchart. This chart will help identify problem areas and will 
direct you to other appropriate charts for further 
troubleshooting. 



Some malfunctions, especially those involving multiple si- 
multaneous failures, may require more elaborate trouble- 
shooting approaches with references to circuit descriptions 
in the "Theory of Operation" section of this manual. 



Component Color Coding 

Information regarding color codes and markings of resis- 
tors and capacitors is located on the color-coding illustration 
(Figure 9-1) at the beginning of the "Diagrams" section. 



Semiconductor Lead Configurations 

Figure 9-2 in the "Diagrams" section shows the lead con- 
figurations for semiconductor devices used in the instru- 
ment. These lead configurations and case styles are typical 
of those used at completion of the instrument design. Ven- 
dor changes and performance improvement changes may 
result in changes of case styles or lead configurations. If the 
device in question does not appear to match the configura- 
tion shown in Figure 9-2, examine the associated circuitry or 
consult a manufacturer's data sheet. 



Multipin Connectors 

Multipin connector orientation is indexed by two trian- 
gles; one on the holder and one on the circuit board. Slot 
numbers are usually molded into the holder. When a con- 
nection is made to circuit board pins, ensure that the index 
on the holder is aligned with the index on the circuit board 
(see Figure 6-1). 



RESISTOR COLOR CODE. Resistors used in this instru- 
ment are carbon-film, composition, or precision metal-film 
types. They are usually color coded with the El A color code; 
however, some metal-film type resistors may have the value 
printed on the body. The color code is interpreted starting 
with the stripe nearest to one end of the resistor. Composi- 
tion resistors have four stripes; these represent two signifi- 
cant digits, a multiplier, and a tolerance value. Metal-film 
resistors have five stripes representing three significant dig- 
its, a multiplier, and a tolerance value. 



CAPACITOR MARKINGS. Capacitance values of com- 
mon disc capacitors and small electrolytics are marked on 
the side of the capacitor body. White ceramic capacitors are 
color coded in picofarads, using a modified EIA code. 




(0995-11) 2662-50 



Dipped tantalum capacitors are color coded in 
microfarads. The color dot indicates both the positive lead 
and the voltage rating. Since these capacitors are easily 
destroyed by reversed or excessive voltage, be careful to 
observe the polarity and voltage rating when replacing 
them. 



DIODE COLOR CODE. The cathode end of each glass- 
encased diode is indicated by either a stripe, a series of 
stripes or a dot. For most diodes marked with a series of 
stripes, the color combination of the stripes identifies three 
digits of the Tektronix Part Number, using the resistor color- 
code system. The cathode and anode ends of a metal-en- 
cased diode may be identified by the diode symbol marked 
on its body. 



Figure 6-1. Multipin connector orientation. 



TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT 

The equipment listed in Table 4-1 of this manual, or 
equivalent equipment, may be useful when troubleshooting 
this instrument. 



TROUBLESHOOTING TECHNIQUES 

The following procedure is arranged in an order that en- 
ables checking simple trouble possibilities before requiring 
more extensive troubleshooting. The first two steps use di- 



6-6 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



agnostic aids inherent in the instrument's operating 
firmware and will locate many circuit faults. The next four 
procedures are check steps that ensure proper control 
settings, connections, operation, and adjustment. If the 
trouble is not located by these checks, the remaining steps 
will aid in locating the defective component. When the defec- 
tive component is located, replace it using the appropriate 
replacement procedure given under "Corrective Mainte- 
nance" in this section. 




Before using any test equipment to make measure- 
ments on static-sensitive, current-sensitive, or volt- 
age-sensitive components or assemblies, ensure that 
any voltage or current supplied by the test equipment 
does not exceed the limits of the component to be 
tested. 



1. Power-up Tests 

The 2465 performs automatic verification of much of the 
instrument's circuitry when power is first applied. The "Ker- 
nel" tests verify proper operation of the Microprocessor, the 
ROM, and the RAM. If all Kernel tests pass, a second level 
of checks, the "Confidence" tests, are performed. The Con- 
fidence tests, when passed, give the user a high degree of 
assurance that the instrument is functioning properly. 



3. Check Control Settings 

Incorrect control settings can give a false indication of 
instrument malfunction. If there is any question about the 
correct function or operation of any control, refer to either 
the "Operating Information" in Section 2 of this manual or to 
the 2465 Operators Manual. 



4. Check Associated Equipment 

Before proceeding, ensure that any equipment used with 
the 2465 is operating correctly. Verify that input signals are 
properly connected and that the interconnecting cables are 
not defective. Check that the ac-power-source voltage to all 
equipment is correct. 



5. Visual Check 

Perform a visual inspection. This check may reveal bro- 
ken connections or wires, damaged components, semicon- 
ductors not firmly mounted, damaged circuit boards, or 
other clues to the cause of an instrument malfunction. 



6. Check Instrument Performance and Adjustment. 

Check the performance of either those circuits where 
trouble appears to exist or the entire instrument. The appar- 
ent trouble may be the result of misadjustment. Complete 
performance check and adjustment instructions are given in 
Sections 4 and 5 of this manual. 



If a Kernel test or Confidence test fails, the area of failure 
is identified either by a message on the crt (if the instrument 
is able to produce a display) or by an error code displayed 
on the front-panel LED indicators. If a failure occurs, refer to 
the "Diagnostic Routines" discussion later in this section for 
definitions of error messages and LED error codes. 



Once a problem area has been identified, the associated 
troubleshooting procedure should be performed to further 
isolate the problem. The troubleshooting procedures are lo- 
cated on tabbed-foldout pages in the "Diagrams" section at 
the rear of this manual. 



2. Diagnostic Test and Exerciser Routines 

Each of the tests automatically performed at power up, 
along with several other circuit exercising routines, may be 
individually selected by the user to further ciarify the nature 
of a suspected failure. The desired test or exerciser is se- 
lected ' by "scrolling" through a menu of the available 
routines when under control of the "Diagnostic Monitor." 
Entry into the Diagnostic Monitor and its uses are explained 
in the "Diagnostic Routines" discussion later in this section. 



7. Isolate Trouble to a Circuit 

To isolate problems to a particular area, use any symp- 
toms noticed to help locate the trouble. Refer to the trouble- 
shooting charts in the "Diagrams" section as an aid in 
locating a faulty circuit. 



When trouble symptoms appear in more that one circuit, 
first check the power supplies; then check the affected cir- 
cuits by taking voltage and waveform readings. Check first 
for the correct output voltage of each individual supply. 
These voltages are measured between the power supply 
test points and ground (see schematic diagrams 8, 9, and 
10, and associated circuit board illustrations in the "Dia- 
grams" section). If the power-supply voltages and ripple are 
within the listed ranges, the suppiy can ue assume^ to uQ 
working correctly. If they are outside the range, the supply 
may be either misadjusted or operating incorrectly. 



me low voixage rower ouufjiy leveis are iiueruepen- 
dent. All the low voltage supplies use the +10 V reference 
for their reference levels. If more that one of the low voltage 
supplies appears defective, repair them in the following or- 
der: + 10 V REF, +5 V Digital, +87 V, +42 V, +15 V, 
+5 V Analog, -15 V, -8 V, and -5 V. 



6-7 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



A defective component elsewhere in the instrument can 
create the appearance of a power-supply problem and may 
also affect the operation of other circuits. Use the power 
supply troubleshooting charts to aid in locating the problem. 



8. Check Circuit Board Interconnections 

After the trouble has been isolated to a particular circuit, 
again check for loose or broken connections, improperly 
seated semiconductors, and heat-damaged components. 



9. Check Voltages and Waveforms 

Often the defective component can be located by check- 
ing circuit voltages or waveforms. Typical voltages are listed 
on the schematic diagrams. Waveforms indicated on the 
schematic diagrams by hexagonal-outlined numbers are 
shown adjacent to the diagrams. Waveform test points are 
shown on the circuit board illustrations. 



NOTE 

Voltages and waveforms indicated on the schematic 
diagrams are not absolute and may vary slightly be- 
tween instruments. To establish operating conditions 
similar to those used to obtain these readings, see the 
voltage and waveform setup conditions preceding the 
waveform illustrations. 

Note the recommended test equipment, front-panel 
control settings, voltage and waveform conditions, 
and cable-connection instructions. Any special control 
settings required to obtain a given waveform are not- 
ed under the waveform illustration. Changes to the 
control settings from the initial setup, other than those 
noted, are not required. 



10. Check Individual Components 

The following procedures describe methods of checking 
individual components. Two-lead components that are sol- 
dered in place are most accurately checked by first discon- 
necting one end from the circuit board. This isolates the 
measurement from the effects of the surrounding circuitry. 
See Figure 9-1 for component value identification and Figure 
9-2 for semiconductor lead configurations. 




WARMING 



When checking semiconductors, observe the static- 
sensitivity precautions located at the beginning of this 
section. 



TRANSISTORS. A good check of a transistor is actual 
performance under operating conditions. A transistor can 
most effectively be checked by substituting a known-good 
component. However, be sure that circuit conditions are not 
such that a replacement transistor might also be damaged. 
If substitute transistors are not available, use a dynamic- 
type transistor checker for testing. Static-type transistor 
checkers are not recommended, since they do not check 
operation under simulated operating conditions. 



When troubleshooting transistors in the circuit with a 
voltmeter, measure both the emitter-to-base and emitter-to- 
collector voltages to determine whether they are consistent 
with normal circuit voltages. Voltages across a transistor 
may vary with the type of device and its circuit function. 



Some of these voltages are predictable. The emitter-to- 
base voltage for a conducting silicon transistor will normally 
range from 0.6 V to 0.8 V. The emitter-to-collector voltage 
for a saturated transistor is about 0.2 V. Because these 
values are small, the best way to check them is by connect- 
ing a sensitive voltmeter across the junction rather than 
comparing two voltages taken with respect to ground. If the 
former method is used, both leads of the voltmeter must be 
isolated from ground. 



If voltage values measured are less that those just given, 
either the device is shorted or no current is flowing in the 
external circuit. If values exceed the emitter-to-base values 
given, either the junction reverse biased or the device is de- 
fective. Voltages exceeding those given for typical emitter- 
to-collector values could indicate either a nonsaturated 
device operating normally or a defective (open-circuited) 
transistor. If the device is conducting, voltage will be devel- 
oped across the resistors in series with it; if open, no volt- 
age will be developed across the resistors unless current is 
being supplied by a parallel path. 




To avoid electric shock, always disconnect the instru- 
ment from the ac power source before removing or 
replacing components. 



When checking emitter-to-base junctions, do not use 
an ohmmeter range that has a high internal current. 
High current may damage the transistor. Reverse bi- 
asing the emitter-to-base junction with a high current 
may degrade the current-transfer ratio (Beta) of the 
transistor. 



6-8 



Maintenance— 2465 Service 



A transistor emitter-to-base junction also can be checked 
for an open or shorted condition by measuring the resis- 
tance between terminals with an ohmmeter set to a range 
having a low internal source current, such as the R X 1 kfi 
range. The junction resistance should be very high in one 
direction and much lower when the meter leads are 
reversed. 



When troubleshooting a field-effect transistor (FET), the 
voltage across its elements can be checked in the same 
manner as previously described for other transistors. How- 
ever, remember that in the norma! depletion mode of opera- 
tion, the gate-to-source junction is reverse biased; in the 
enhanced mode, the junction is forward biased. 



INTEGRATED CIRCUITS. An integrated circuit (IC) can 
be checked with a voltmeter, test oscilloscope, or by direct 
substitution. A good understanding of circuit operation is 
essential when troubleshooting a circuit having IC compo- 
nents. Use care when checking voltages and waveforms 
around the IC so that adjacent leads are not shorted togeth- 
er. An IC test clip provides a convenient means of clipping a 
test probe to an IC. 



HYBRIDS. Hybrid components can best be checked by 
observing voltages and waveforms on the circuit board. 
Measurements should not be made on any hybrid compo- 
nent while out of the circuit as they may easily be damaged. 
Direct substitution is the best troubleshooting method when 
a hybrid failure is suspected. 




When checking a diode, do not use an ohmmeter 
scale that has a high internal current. High current 
may damage a diode. Checks on diodes can be per- 
formed in much the same manner as those on transis- 
tor emitter-to-base junctions. Do not check tunnel 
diodes or back diodes with an ohmmeter; use a dy- 
namic tester, such as the TEKTRONIX 576 Curve 
Tracer. 



DIODES. A diode can be checked for either an open or a 
shorted condition by measuring the resistance between ter- 
minals with an ohmmeter set to a range having a low inter- 
nal source current, such as the R X 1 kft range. The diode 
resistance should be very high in one direction and much 
lower when the meter leads are reversed. 



Silicon diodes should have 0.6 to 0.8 V across their junc- 
tions when conducting. Higher readings indicate that they 
are either reverse biased or defective, depending on 
polarity. 



RESISTORS. Check resistors with an ohmmeter. Refer 
to the "Replaceable Electrical Parts" list for the tolerances 
of resistors used in this instrument. A resistor normally does 
not require replacement unless its measured value varies 
widely from its specified value and tolerance. 



INDUCTORS. Check for open inductors by checking con- 
tinuity with an ohmmeter. Shorted or partially shorted induc- 
tors can usually be found by check the waveform response 
when high-frequency signals are passed through the circuit. 



CAPACITORS. A leaky or shorted capacitor can best be 
detected by checking resistance with an ohmmeter set to 
one of the highest ranges. Do not exceed the voltage rating 
of the capacitor. The resistance reading should be high after 
the capacitor is charged to the output voltage of the ohm- 
meter. An open capacitor can be detected with a capaci- 
tance meter or by checking whether the capacitor passes ac 
signals. 

ATTENUATORS. The Attenuators are built as complete 
assemblies and should not be taken apart. If an Attenuator 
is suspected as having failed, direct substitution is the rec- 
ommended troubleshooting method. 



11. Repair and Adjust the Circuit. 

If any defective parts are located, follow the replacement 
procedures given under "Corrective Maintenance" in this 
section. After any electrical component has been replaced, 
the performance of that circuit and any other closely related 
circuit should be checked. Since the power supplies affect 
all circuits, performance of the entire instrument should be 
checked if work has been done on the power supplies or if 
the power transformer has been replaced. Readjustment of 
the affected circuitry may be necessary . Refer to the "Per- 
formance Check" and "Adjustment Procedure", Sections 4 
and 5 of this manual. 



DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES 

The diagnostic routines contained in the 2465 operating 
firmware consist of the various power-up tests that are 

— . ,i^~./.t:nnilu r\ntrf*-\rrv\r\A iiihon nmuar ie firet onnlioH anH 

auiui i taiioaiiy jjoi \\j\ 1 1 icu wncn (->v/»»oi w iuo«. t*^^"^^ v*. .** 

several circuit exerciser routines. The test or exerciser 
routines are selected by "scrolling" through a menu of avail- 
able routines when the firmware is under control of the Diag- 
nostic Monitor. Monitor control is indicated by the message 
"DiAGNSTiC. PUSH A/E 
top crt graticule division. 



Entry into the monitor is automatic if a power-up test 
fails. The user may also force entry into the Diagnostic Mon- 



6-9 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



itor from the normal operating mode by holding in the front- 
panel AV and At push buttons and then pressing the 
front-panel SLOPE push button. Exiting the monitor is ac- 
complished by pressing in the A/B TRIG push button, as 
instructed by the crt readout display. 



Depending on how the Diagnostic Monitor was entered 
(from normal mode or as a result of a power-up test failure), 
the first menu item displayed may vary; entry into the moni- 



tor from the normal mode begins at ALL TESTS while entry 
from power up starts at the first failed test. Since, in a failure 
mode, the crt readout may not be able to display the select- 
ed menu item, the VERT TRIGGER SOURCE indicator illu- 
minates as a reference when ALL TESTS is selected. With 
the VERT TRIGGER SOURCE indicator illuminated, the 
user may scroll to the desired test or exerciser routine using 
the test order called out in Table 6-4. Whether the menu is 
displayed or not, scrolling is accomplished by pressing the 
front-panel TRIGGER MODE switch either up to increment 
or down to decrement the menu position by one. 



6-10 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



Table 6-4 
Sequence of Diagnostic Tests and Exerciser Routines 



Routine 
Type 


Type 
Number 


Routine 
Name 


Error 
Code 


Error Code 
Meaning 


All Tests 3 


00 


All 


ZZ 


The left digit is the option number and the right digit is 
the test number of the first failing test of the last ALL 
TESTS run. When looping, it shows the last failing 
test. 


Test 


01 


Interrupt Request 


01 


Interrupt request is missing or has wrong period. 


Test 


02 


Switch Stuck 


01 
02 
08 
10 
28 
30 
44 
48 
50 
61 
62 
64 
68 
70 b 


Trigger COUPLING down. 
Trigger COUPLING up. 
CH 1 Coupling down. 
CH 1 Coupling up. 
CH 2 Coupling down. 
CH 2 Coupling up. 
A t (delta time). 
A V (delta volts). 
Trigger SLOPE 
Trigger SOURCE down. 
Trigger SOURCE up. 
Trigger MODE down. 
Trigger MODE up. 
A/B TRIG select. 


Test 


03 


Readout Board 


01 
02 


Shift register failure. 
Readout RAM failure. 


Test 


04 


EAROM 


X1 
X8 
1X 


Parity error on read (bit set). 
Bad read after write (bit 3 set). 
Bad checksum (bit 4 set). 


Test 


05 


Main Board 


01 
X2 
X4 
2X 
4X 


AUTO LVL failed to trigger. 
Negative level not negative enough. 
Negative level too negative. 
Positive level not positive enough. 
Positive level too positive. 


Exerciser 


01 


Pots and Switches 


None 




Exerciser 


02 


EAROM Examine 


None 




Exerciser 


03 


Cycle Error Clear 


None 




Exerciser 


04 


Display ROM Headers 


None 





a VERT TRIG SOURCE indicator lights when in ALL TESTS as a visual reference in the event a crt display can not be produced. 

b lf the A/B TRIG switch is stuck on power up, the oscilloscope will branch to "normal" operation after a short delay. The associated 
error message will only be visible momentarily if the crt is warmed-up. 



6-11 



Maintenance— 2465 Service 



Routine Control 

When the desired Test or Exerciser has been selected, 
the operator has two types of control that may be exercised 
over the routine: START/STOP and LOOP. 



"STATUS" shows the results of the last time a selected 
test routine ran: either PASS or FAIL. This space is blank 
for exerciser and calibration routines. When the diagnostics 
are called up from normal operating mode, the space will be 
blank until the selected test is executed. 



Starting or stopping the execution of the selected routine 
is controlled by the front-panel TRIGGER COUPLING 
switch. Pressing the switch up starts the routine; pressing it 
down stops it. 



"ZZ" is a two-digit error code identifying the nature of 
the failure in a failed test (see the "Error Code" column of 
Table 6-4). 



All of the test routines, except EAROM— TEST 04, may 
be set to LOOP mode (continuously repeated) by pressing 
the front-panel TRIGGER SOURCE switch up while the rou- 
tine is selected but not executing. The LOOP feature will 
cause the routine to be continuously repeated once started 
until stopped when the operator presses the COUPLING 
switch down. Once the routine is stopped, the LOOP fea- 
ture may be disabled by pressing the SOURCE switch 
down. 



While a Test or Exerciser routine is executing, the Diag- 
nostic Monitor Control message on the top line of the crt 
display will be cleared as an indication that a routine is run- 
ning. When test routines are looping, the message "LOOP" 
is displayed in the bottom division of the crt graticule. 



"LOOP" indicates when a selected test is set to the 
LOOP mode. 



"OD<ABCC>" is the CYCLE mode failure indicator. 
When the CYCLE mode is activated (see CYCLE ERROR 
CLEAR description), data will be written to the EAROM 
about the first test failure that occurs. This information will 
be displayed until the operator performs the CYCLE ER- 
ROR CLEAR routine (Exerciser 03). The information dis- 
played is an abbreviated version of the previous items: 



"OD" is a two-character option designator showing 
which option failed first while in the CYCLE mode (the same 
codes as for "OD" at the start of the readout line). 



Display Format 

The Tests and Exercisers routines display information 
about the routine type and number, as well as any test re- 
sults, at the bottom of the crt display. The readout line is 
formatted as follows: 

OD TYPE XY STATUS ZZ LOOP OD<ABCC> 



The information is defined as follows: 

"OD" is a two-character option designator identifying the 
option that this particular line of diagnostic information re- 
fers to (see Options manual for details). For the basic instru- 
ment, the OD location is blank. 



"TYPE" refers to routine type: All Tests (ALL), Test 
(TEST), Exerciser ( EXER), or Calibration (CAL). 



"X" indicates which bit of the "Option Select Register" is 
set to turn on the option called out by "OD" (see Options 
manual for description of Options Select Register). This bit 
is zero for the basic instrument. 



"A" identifies the option-select bit for the failing option 
(the same code as for "X"). 



"B" is the test Type Number where the failure occurred 
(the same codes as for "Y"). 



"CC" is the error code for the test (the same codes as for 

"ZZ"). 



Kernel Tests 

The Kernel tests are those tests which, when failed, are 
considered "fatal" to the operation of the Microprocessor. 
Failure of a Kernel test will cause the front-panel TRIG'D 
indicator to flash, and certain of the other front-panel indica- 
tors will be illuminated with an error code. The code points 
to the area of failure as indicated in Table 6-5. Tables 6-6 
and 6-7 are used to determine the option and device num- 
bers used in Table 6-5. Only the basic instrument codes are 
given in Table 6-5. Option codes are defined in the "Options 
Service Manual." 



"Y" is the TYPE number of the routine (see the "Type 
Number" column of Table 6-4). 



6-12 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



Table 6-5 
Kernel Test Failure Codes 



Failure 


Codes 




Option 


Device 


Failing Device 








Control Board RAM 





1 


ROM at 9000 (hex) 





2 


ROM at A000 (hex) 





3 


ROM at C000 (hex) 





4 


ROM at E000 (hex) 



Kernel tests are automatically executed at power up. The 
Kernel tests are divided into RAM tests and ROM tests as 
follows: 

RAM TEST. This test is a complete march test. The RAM 
is first filled with zeros. The first location is then read, check- 
ing that only zeros are present. (In later cycles this ensures 
that a previous write hasn't written to the location.) A "1" is 
walked through each bit of the addressed location and read 
back after each write to ensure only one bit at a time 
changes. Each of the succeeding address locations is read, 
then written to in the same way until the RAM is filled with 
ones. After the RAM is filled, a "0" is walked through each 
bit location in a similar manner. 

Test checks: RAM address decoding, RAM address 
lines, RAM data lines, and Data Bus Buffers. 



Table 6-6 
Front-Panel LED Option Codes 



Option Code 






CH 1 

LED 

(bit 3) 


CH2 

LED 

(bit 2) 


CH3 

LED 

(bit 1) 


CH4 

LED 

(bit 0) 


Option 
Number 
(in hex) 


Option 
Name 


OFF 


OFF 


OFF 


OFF 





Basic Instrument 


ON 


ON 


ON 


ON 


F 


Options Buffer 
Board 



Table 6-7 
Front-Panel LED Device Codes 





Device Code 




READY 

LED 

(bit 2) 


+ 

LED 

(bit 1) 


LED 
(bit 0) 


Device 
Number 


OFF 


OFF 


OFF 





OFF 


OFF 


ON 


1 


OFF 


ON 


OFF 


2 


OFF 


ON 


ON 


3 


ON 


OFF 


OFF 


4 


ON 


OFF 


ON 


5 


ON 


ON 


OFF 


6 


ON 


ON 


ON 


7 



Even if a Kernel test fails, the operator may try to go to 
normal oscilloscope operation by pressing the A/B TRIG se- 
lect push button. Depending on the exact nature of the fail- 
ure, the instrument may or may not be functional. 



ROM TEST. The ROM test performs three checks on 
each of the system read-only memories. 



Data Bus Drive — Two locations containing complemen- 
tary data patterns are read. 

Test checks: Data bus lines and the Data Bus Driver. 



Correct Part — A byte in the ROM being checked is com- 
pared to the most-significant byte of the addressed ROM 
block (starting address of where the ROM should be 
installed). 

Test checks: ROM address decoding and proper instal- 
lation of ROM components. 



Checksum — A sixteen bit, spiral-add checksum is calcu- 
lated and compared to a two-byte value stored in ROM be- 
ing checked. 

Test checks: ROM contents, ROM addressing, ROM 
data lines, and the Data Bus Driver. 



Confidence Tests 

The Confidence tests provide checks for much of the re- 
maining circuitry to ensure that instrument operation is cor- 
rect. Confidence tests are performed automatically at power 
up after the Kernel is determined to be functional or initiated 
by the operator from the Diagnostic Monitor. 



A failure of any Confidence test during power up will pass 
control to the Diagnostic Monitor; this permits the test re- 
sults to be examined. Descriptions of the Confidence tests 
follow. 



REV MAY 1984 



6-13 



Maintenance— 2465 Service 



INTERRUPT REQUEST (Test 01). Ten consecutive inter- 
rupt cycles are checked to ensure that succeeding interrupts 
occur not more than 4.5 ms apart (5600 "E" cycles). 

Test checks: Interrupt Timer circuitry. 



SWITCH STUCK (Test 02). The front-panel, momentary- 
contact switches are scanned, checking for a closed switch. 
At power up, the test runs immediately. 



By holding one of the momentary switches in a closed 
position when power is first applied, this test will fail, and 
the Diagnostic Monitor will be entered. When the test is 
started from the Diagnostic Monitor, a one-half second de- 
lay is incorporated to allow the COUPLING (test start) 
switch to return to its normal (open) position. Table 6-4 de- 
fines the error codes that may be encountered when a 
switch is detected as closed. 



NOTE 

When the user presses the COUPLING switch to stop 
this test, an error code may be generated. This is nor- 
mal and does not indicate an actual failure. 



Test checks: Momentary switches, row scanning circuit- 
ry, and column scanning circuitry. 



READOUT BOARD (Test 03). This two-part test checks 
the interface to the Readout Board from the Microprocessor 
and the character RAM circuits. 



Processor Interface Test — The Microprocessor loads 
the three, eight-bit shift registers with an alternating bit pat- 
tern that is then shifted back to the processor for 
comparison. 

Test checks: Data Registers, data strobes (clocks), and 
the data input and output lines. 



RAM Test — A "1" is rotated through each byte of the 
Readout RAM, one bit at a time. Each time an additional bit 
is rotated into the byte, the byte is loaded into the processor 
interface and clocked back to the processor for comparison. 
The byte is then restored to its original content, and each 
successive byte is tested in the same manner. 

Test checks: Readout RAM addressing, Readout RAM 
data lines, and RAM read/write capability. 



EAROM (Test 04). Three checks are performed on the 

EAROM to verify its contents and the interface circuitry. 



Read/Write Test— The contents of one location are 
read, modified, and then reread to verify functioning of the 
device interface. 

Test checks: EAROM input and output lines, EAROM 
mode control, EAROM reading and writing, and the EAROM 
clock. 



Checksum Test — The contents of locations containing 
calibration constants are checksummed using a sprial-add 
technique. The result is compared to the contents of loca- 
tion (the checksum generated at the time of calibration). 

Test checks: EAROM addressing and EAROM 
contents. 



Parity Test — As each of the calibration constants is read 
for the Checksum test above, the parity of each 14-bit word 
is checked. 

Test checks: EAROM data retention and EAROM 
reading. 



MAIN BOARD (Test 05). The AUTO LVL triggering fea- 
ture (a routine stored in firmware) is operated to detect the 
peaks of a Line Trigger signal. Detected peaks are com- 
pared to expected values to verify operation (and calibra- 
tion) of interrelated signal processing circuits. 

Test checks: Line Trigger source, the A Trigger genera- 
tion circuitry, and Control DAC U2234 (located on the Con- 
trol board). 



Exerciser Routines 

The Exerciser routines allow the operator to set and ex- 
amine various bytes of control data used in determining in- 
strument function. 



POTS AND SWITCHES (Exerciser 01). This routine dis- 
plays the values that the Microprocessor detects as the var- 
ious digitized pots and switches are activated. The top line 
of the crt display has the following format: 

AA BB CC DEEE FF GG HI JJ KL 



The format is defined as follows: 

"AA" is the code of the most-recently-activated potenti 
ometer (see Table 6-8 for definition of pot codes). 



"BB" is the current value (in hexadecimal) of pot AA. 



"CC" is the previous value (in hexadecimal) of pot AA. 



6-14 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



"D" is the DAC Multiplexer code used to select pot AA 
(see Table 6-9). 



Table 6-8 
Potentiometer Code Numbers 



"EEE" is the DAC value (in hexadecimal) associated with 
pot AA. 



"FF" is the code of the previously-activated potentiome- 
ter (see Table 6-8). 



"GG" is the row code of the most-recently-activated 
switch (see Table 6-1 for definition of row codes). 



"H" is the switch-position code: for open; C for closed. 



"I" is the column code of the most-recently-activated 
switch (see Table 6-1 0). 



"J J" is the row for for the previously-activated switch. 



"K" is the switch-position code: for open; C for closed. 



Code Number 


Potentiometer 


01 


HOLDOFF 


02 


Trigger LEVEL 


03 


SEC/DIV VAR 


04 


Horizontal POSITION 


05 


A (A section) 


06 


A (B section) 


07 


A REF OR DLY POS (A section) 


08 


A REF OR DLY POS (B section) 


09 


CH 1 VOLTS/DIV VAR 


0A 


CH 2 VOLTS/DIV VAR 



Table 6-9 
DAC Multiplexer "D" Codes 



"L" is the column code for the previously-activated 
switch. 



NOTE 

For all momentary switches (except A/B TRIG) only 
the closed position will be shown in the switch-posi- 
tion code locations (H and K). The A/B TRIG switch 
has both the open and the closed positions shown. 



D Code 


Control Indicated 





CH 1 VOLTS/DIV VAR 


1 


A SEC/DIV VAR 


2 


CH 2 VOLTS/DIV VAR 


3 


A Trigger LEVEL 


5 


Horizontal POSITION 


6 


HOLDOFF 



NOTE 

In the case of the A REF OR DLY POS and A con- 
trols, the D code position shows the two most-signifi- 
cant bits of the 14-bit DAC output (in hexadecimal). 



6-15 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



Table 6-10 

Pots and Switches Column 
and Row Code Definitions 



Row 


Column 


Definition 


Row 


Column 


Definition 


Code 


Code 




Code 


Code 










Trig COUPLING Down 


5 





B SEC/DIV LSB 





1 


Trig COUPLING Up 


5 


1 


B SEC/DIV Bit 2 





2 


Unused 


5 


2 


B SEC/DIV Bit 3 





3 


CH 1 Coupling Down 


5 


3 


B SEC/DIV Bit 4 





4 


CH 1 Coupling Up 


5 


4 


B SEC/DIV MSB 


1 





CH 4 VOLTS/DIV 


6 





CH 1 VERT MODE 


1 


1 


CH 3 VOLTS/DIV 


6 


1 


CH 2 VERT MODE 


1 


2 


Unused 


6 


2 


ADD VERT MODE 


1 


3 


CH 2 Coupling Down 


6 


3 


CH 3 VERT MODE 


1 


4 


CH 2 Coupling Up 


6 


4 


CH 4 VERT MODE 


2 





CH 1 VOLTS/DIV LSB 


7 





Unused 


2 


1 


CH 1 VOLTS/DIV Bit 2 


7 


1 


B ENDS A 


2 


2 


CH 1 VOLTS/DIV Bit 3 


7 


2 


Unused 


2 


3 


CH 1 VOLTS DIV MSB 


7 


3 


CHOP/ALT 


2 


4 


CH 2 INVERT 


7 


4 


BW LIMIT 


3 





CH 2 VOLTS/DIV LSB 


8 





X10MAG 


3 


1 


CH 2 VOLTS/DIV Bit 2 


8 


1 


TRACKING/INDEP 


3 


2 


CH 2 VOLTS/DIV Bit 3 


8 


2 


At 


3 


3 


CH 2 VOLTS/DIV MSB 


8 


3 


AV 


3 


4 


Horiz Display Select 


8 


4 


Trig SLOPE 


4 





A SEC/DIV LSB 


9 





Trig SOURCE Down 


4 


1 


A SEC/DIV Bit 2 


9 


1 


Trig SOURCE Up 


4 


2 


A SEC/DIV Bit 3 


9 


2 


Trig MODE Down 


4 


3 


A SEC/DIV Bit 4 


9 


3 


Trig MODE Up 


4 


4 


A SEC/DIV MSB 


9 


4 


A/B TRIG Select 



EAROM EXAMINE (Exerciser 02). This routine allows the 
operator to examine the contents of any or all EAROM loca- 
tions. The EAROM has 100 (decimal) locations (63 hexadec- 
imal). Addresses above 63 (hex) are not defined. When 
entered, the Exerciser displays the contents of EAROM lo- 
cation 00 (hex) on the top line of the crt display. Calibration 
constants reside between addresses 01 (hex) and 4C (hex) 
and each should have odd parity as explained below. The 
remaining locations may be of either parity. The readout dis- 
play line has the following format: 

AA DDDD P 



The format is defined as follows: 

"AA" is the eight-bit address in hexadecimal notation. 



"P" is a parity indicator for the data word: X indicates 
even parity; blank is odd parity. 



Pushing the MODE switch up or down will increment or 
decrement the EAROM address by 16 (10 hex) respectively. 
Similarly, pushing the SOURCE switch up or down will in- 
crement or decrement the address by 1 respectively. 



CYCLE ERROR CLEAR (Exerciser 03). This routine pro- 
vides a way for the operator to clear the cycle-failure data 
written to the EAROM when a CYCLE mode failure occurs. 
Until the data is cleared, each time the instrument is 
powered up, the Diagnostic Monitor is entered and a diago- 
nal line is display across the crt. 



"DDDD" is the 14-bit word stored at that location (13 bits 
of data and one parity bit). 



CYCLE mode, when entered by removing the CAL/NO 
CAL jumper (P501), causes the instrument to continuously 



6-16 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



LOOP through the Power Up Diagnostic Tests (except for 
EAROM— Test 04). If a failure occurs, the cycle-failure data, 
identifying the first failure encountered, is written to a specif- 
ic location in the EAROM. Thereafter, at each power up, the 
Diagnostic Monitor is automatically entered, and the failure 
data is displayed even when the instrument is returned to 
the normal operating configuration (CAL/NO CAL jumper in 
the NO CAL position). Intepretation of the cycle failure data 
is explained in the "Display Format" description provided 
earlier in this section. The error data must be cleared from 
the EAROM location to eliminate the CYCLE mode error 
display. 



"SS" is the suffix of the ROM part number (version 
number). 



"AAAA" is the starting address of the ROM (address 
where the ROM should be installed). 



Pressing the COUPLING switch up increments the rou- 
tine to the next ROM Header; pressing it down exits the 
routine. 



Clearing the EAROM location is done by scrolling to the 
EAROM CLEAR exerciser and pressing the following 
switches in sequence: 

COUPLING up (starts exerciser), 
SOURCE down, 
MODE down, then 
COUPLING down. 



When the EAROM CLEAR routine is successfully exe- 
cuted, the cycle failure data and the diagonal line will disap- 
pear from the display. 



DISPLAY ROM HEADERS (Exerciser 04). This routine 
displays the Standard Tektronix ROM Header of each sys- 
tem ROM on the top line of the crt display. The readout line 
has the following format: 

CCCC PPPP SS AAAA 



The definition of the format is as follows: 
"CCCC" is a two-byte hexadecimal checksum. 



"PPPP" i S the four middle digits of the ROM part 
number. 



CONTROLLER LATCHES EXERCISER. This routine is 
not user selectable, but it runs automatically when the Diag- 
nostic Monitor is waiting for a key activation. 



The routine first sets latches U2034 and U2134 (diagram 
2). It then pulses the BSWPCLK line (pin 13 of U2596, dia- 
gram 1), as a scope trigger, and rotates a "0" through 15 of 
the 16 latched bits. Bit 16 is not set since it would reset 
Interrupt Timer U2268 (diagram 1) and upset processor in- 
terrupt timing. By externally triggering a test oscilloscope on 
the BSWPCLK signal line and observing the shifted timing 
relationships of the latched signals, proper operation of the 
DAC latches may be verified. 



NOP KERNEL EXERCISER. This exerciser is not a 
firmware routine, but rather a forced hardware condition. It 
is best suited for troubleshooting an inoperative Control 
Board, as it exercises only the Microprocessor address bus 
and the associated Address Decode circuitry. By moving 
Jumper P503 (diagram 1) to the Diagnostic position, Data 
Bus Buffers U2194 and U2294 are disabled, and the 
Microprocessor is forced into a NOP (no operation) loop. 
This causes the address on the address bus to be continu- 
ously incremented for exercising the Address Decode cir- 
cuitry. Troubleshooting of kernel addressing with an 
oscilloscope or logic analyzer is then possible. 



6-17 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 



INTRODUCTION 

Corrective maintenance consists of component replace- 
ment and instrument repair. This part of the manual de- 
scribes special techniques and procedures required to 
replace components in this instrument. If it is necessary to 
ship your instrument to a Tektronix Service Center for repair 
or service, refer to the "Instrument Repackaging Instruc- 
tions" in Section 2. 



MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS 

To reduce the possibility of personal injury or instrument 
damage, observe the following precautions. 



1 . Disconnect the instrument from the ac power source 
before removing or installing components. 



2. Verify that the line-rectifier filter capacitors are dis- 
charged prior to performing any servicing. 

3. Use care not to interconnect instrument grounds 
which may be at different potentials (cross grounding). 

4. When soldering on circuit boards or small insulated 
wires, use only a 15-watt, pencil-type soldering iron. 



OBTAINING REPLACEMENT PARTS 

Most electrical and mechanical parts can be obtained 
through your local Tektronix Field Office or representative. 
However, many of the standard electronic components can 
usually be obtained from a local commercial source. Before 
purchasing or ordering a part from a source other than 
Tektronix, Inc., please check the "Replaceable Electrical 
Parts" list for the proper value, rating, tolerance, and 
description. 



NOTE 

Physical size and shape of a component may affect 
instrument performance, particularly at high frequen- 



cies. Always use direct-replacement components, un- 
less it is known that a substitute will not degrade 
instrument performance. 



Special Parts 

In addition to the standard electronic components, some 
special parts are used in the 2465. These components are 
manufactured or selected by Tektronix, Inc. to meet specific 
performance requirements, or are manufactured for 
Tektronix, Inc. in accordance with our specifications. The 
various manufactures can be identified by referring to the 
"Cross Index-Manufacturer's Code number to Manufactur- 
er" at the beginning of the "Replaceable Electrical Parts" 
list. Many of the mechanical parts used in this instrument 
were manufactured by Tektronix, Inc. Order all special parts 
directly from your local Tektronix Field Office or 
representative. 



Ordering Parts 

When ordering replacement parts from Tektronix, Inc., 
be sure to include all of the following information: 

1. Instrument type (include modification or option 
numbers). 



2. Instrument serial number. 



3. A description of the part (if electrical, include its full 
circuit component number) 



4. Tektronix part number. 



MAINTENANCE AIDS 

The maintenance aids listed in Table 6-1 1 include items 
required for performing most of the maintenance procedures 
in this instrument. Equivalent products may be substituted 
for the examples given, provided their characteristics are 
similar. 



6-18 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



Table 6-11 
Maintenance Aids 



Description 


Specification 


Usage 


Example 


1 . Soldering Iron 


15 to 25 W. 


General soldering and 
unsoldering. 


Antex Precision Model C. 


2. Flat-bit Screwdriver 


3-inch shaft, 3/32-inch 
bit. 


Assembly and disassembly. 


Xcelite Model R3323. 


3. Torx Screwdriver 


Tip sizes: #T9, #T10, 
#T15, #T20. 


Assembly and disassembly. 


Tektronix Part Numbers 
#T9 003-0965-00 
#T10 003-0815-00 
#T15 003-0966-00 
#T20 003-0866-00 


4. Nutdrivers 


3/16 inch, 1/4 inch. 


Assembly and disassembly 


Xcelite #6 and #8. 


5. Open-end Wrenches 


1/4 inch, 5/16 inch, 7/16 
inch 


Assembly and disassembly. 




6. Allen Wrenches 


0.050 inch, 1/16 inch 


Assembly and disassembly. 




7. Long-nose Pliers 




Component removal and 
replacement. 


Diamolloy Model LN55-3. 


8. Diagonal Cutters 




Component removal and 
replacement. 


Diamalloy Model M554-3. 


9. Vacuum Solder 
Extractor 


No static charge 
retention. 


Unsoldering static sensitive 
devices and components on 
multilayer boards. 


Pace Model PC-10. 


1 0. Spray Cleaner 


No-Noise 


Switch and Pot cleaning. 


Tektronix Part Number 
006-0442-02. 


1 1 . Pin-replacement Kit 




Replace circuit board connector 
pins 


Tektronix Part Number 
040-0542-00. 


12. IC-Removal Tool 




Removing DIP IC packages. 


AugatT114-1. 


13. Isopropyl Alcohol 


Reagent grade. 


Cleaning attenuator and front 
panel assemblies. 


2-lsopropanol. 



INTERCONNECTIONS 

Interconnection in this instrument are made with pins sol- 
dered onto the circuit boards. Several types of mating con- 
nectors are used for the interconnecting pins. The following 
information provides the replacement procedures for the 
various type connectors. 



End-Lead Pin Connectors 

Pin connectors used to connect the wires to the intercon- 
nect pins are factory assembled. They consist of machine- 
inserted pin connectors mounted in plastic holders. If the 
connectors are faulty, the entire wire assembly should be 
replaced. 



6-19 



Maintenance— 2465 Service 



Multipin Connectors 

When pin connectors are grouped together and mounted 
in a plastic holder, they are removed, reinstalled, or replaced 
as a unit. If any individual wire or connector in the assembly 
is faulty, the entire cable assembly should be replaced. To 
provide correct orientation of a multipin connector, an index 
arrow is stamped on the circuit board, and either a matching 
arrow is molded into or the numeral 1 is marked on the 
plastic housing as a matching index. Be sure these index 
marks are aligned with each other when the multipin con- 
nector is reinstalled. 



nate sides and ends of the IC as solder is removed. Allow a 
moment for the circuit board to cool before proceeding to 
the next pin. 



Hybrid circuits and heatsinks are removed as a unit by 
removing the mounting nuts at the four corners of the 
heatsink/housing. A firm downward pressure at the center 
of the housing will aid in removal of the nuts. The hybrid 
circuit substrate is bonded to the heatsink/housing casting. 
Attempting to separate the hybrid device from its housing 
will damage the device. 



TRANSISTORS, INTEGRATED CIRCUITS, 
AND HYBRID CIRCUITS 

Transistors, integrated circuits, and hybrid circuits should 
not be replaced unless they are actually defective. If re- 
moved from their sockets or unsoldered from the circuit 
board during routine maintenance, return them to their origi- 
nal board locations. Unnecessary replacement or transpos- 
ing of semiconductor devices may affect the adjustment of 
the instrument. When a semiconductor is replaced, check 
the performance of any circuit that may be affected. 



Any replacement component should be of the original 
type or a direct replacement. Bend transistor leads to fit 
their circuit board holes, and cut the leads to the same 
length as the original component. See Figure 9-2 in the "Dia- 
grams" section for lead-configuration illustrations. 



The heat-sink-mounted power supply transistors are in- 
sulated from the heat sink with a heat-transferring insulator 
pad. Reinstall the insulator pads and bushings when replac- 
ing these transistors. Do not use any type of heat-transfer- 
ring compound on the insulator pads. 



NOTE 

After replacing a power transistor, check that the col- 
lector is not shorted to the heat sink before applying 
power to the instrument. 



To remove socketed dual-in-line packaged (DIP) integrat- 
ed circuits, pull slowly and evenly on both ends of the de- 
vice. Avoid disengaging one end of the integrated circuit 
from the socket before the other, since this may damage the 
pins. 



To remove a soldered DIP IC when it is going to be re- 
placed, clip all the leads of the device and remove the leads 
from the circuit board one at a time. If the device must be 
removed intact for possible reinstallation, do not heat adja- 
cent conductors consecutively. Apply heat to pins at alter- 



SOLDERING TECHNIQUES 

The reliability and accuracy of this instrument can be 
maintained only if proper soldering techniques are used to 
remove or replace parts. General soldering techniques, 
which apply to maintenance of any precision electronic 
equipment, should be used when working on this 
instrument. 



WARMING 



To avoid an electric-shock hazard, observe the follow- 
ing precautions before attempting any soldering: turn 
the instrument off, disconnect it from the ac power 
source, and verify that the line-rectifier filter capacitors 
have discharged. (See label on the primary power 
shield.) If, due to a component failure, the capacitors 
are not discharging, it may be necessary to discharge 
them. Use a 1 kQ, 5-watt resistor and discharge the 
capacitors from point to point through the access 
holes in the primary power shield. 



Use rosin-core wire solder containing 63% tin and 37% 
lead. Contact your local Tektronix Field Office or represen- 
tative to obtain the names of approved solder types. 



When soldering on circuits boards or small insulated 
wires, use only a 1 5-watt, pencil-type soldering iron. A high- 
er wattage soldering iron may cause etched circuit conduc- 
tors to separate from the board base material and melt the 
insulation on small wires. Always keep the soldering-iron tip 
properly tinned to ensure best heat transfer from the iron tip 
to the solder joint. Apply only enough solder to make a firm 
joint. After soldering, clean the area around the solder con- 
nection with an approved flux-removing solvent (such as 
isopropyl alcohol) and allow it to air dry. 



Circuit boards in this instrument may have as many as 
four conductive layers. Conductive paths between the top 
and bottom board layers may connect to one or more inner 



6-20 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



layers. If any inner-layer conductive path becomes broken 
due to poor soldering practices, the board becomes unus- 
able and must be replaced. Damage of this nature can void 
the instrument warranty. 




Only an experienced maintenance person, proficient in 
the use of vacuum-type desoldering equipment should 
attempt repair of any circuit board in this instrument. 




Excessive heat can cause the etched circuit conduc- 
tors to separate from the circuit board. Never allow 
the solder extractor tip to remain at one place on the 
board for more than three seconds. Solder wick, 
spring-actuated or squeeze-bulb solder suckers, and 
heat blocks (for desoldering multipin components) 
must not be used. Damage caused by poor soldering 
techniques can void the instrument warranty. 



Desoldering parts from multilayer circuit boards is espe- 
cially critical. Many integrated circuits are static sensitive 
and may be damaged by solder extractors that generate 
static charges. Perform work involving static-sensitive de- 
vices only at a static-free work station while wearing a 
grounded antistatic wrist strap. Use only an antistatic vacu- 
um-type solder extractor approved by a Tektronix Service 
Center. 




3. Bend the leads of the replacement component to fit 
the holes in the circuit board. If the component is replaced 
while the board is installed in the instrument, cut the leads 
so they protrude only a small amount through the reverse 
side of the circuit board. Excess lead length may cause 
shorting to other conductive parts. 



4. Insert the leads into the holes of the board so that the 
replacement component is positioned the same as the origi- 
nal component. Most components should be firmly seated 
against the circuit board. 



Attempts to unsolder, remove, and resolder leads 
from the component side of a circuit board may cause 
damage to the reverse side of the circuit board. 



5. Touch the soldering iron to the connection and apply 
enough solder to make a firm solder joint. Do not move the 
component while the solder hardens. 



The following techniques should be used to replace a 
component on a circuit board: 

1 . Touch the vacuum desoldering tool to the lead at the 
solder connection. Never place the iron directly on the 
board; doing so may damage the board. 



NOTE 

Some components are difficult to remove from the cir- 
cuit board due to a bend placed in the component 
leads during machine insertion. To make removal of 
machine-inserted components easier, straighten the 
component leads on the reverse side of the circuit 
board. 



2. When removing a multipin component, especially an 
IC, do not heat adjacent pins consecutively. Apply heat to 
the pins at alternate sides and ends of the IC as solder is 
removed. Allow a moment for the circuit board to cool be- 



6. Cut off any excess lead protruding through the circuit 
board (if not clipped to the correct length in step 3). 



7. Clean the area around the solder connection with an 
approved flux-removing solvent. Be careful not to remove 
any of the printed information from the circuit board. 



8. When soldering to the ceramic crt-termination net- 
work, a slightly larger soldering iron can be used. It is rec- 
ommended that a solder containing about 3% silver be used 
when soldering to the ceramic material to avoid destroying 
the the bond. The bond can be broken by repeated use of 
ordinary tin-lead solder or by the application of too much 
heat; however, occasional use of ordinary solder will not 
break the bond, provided excessive heat is not applied 
when making the connection. 



iwic pi uuccuii ly iu u ig iig/vi yjm. 



6-21 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 
INSTRUCTIONS 



WARNING 



WARNING 



To avoid electric shock, disconnect the instrument 
from the ac power source before removing or replac- 
ing any component or assembly. 



Dangerous potentials exist at several points through- 
out this instrument. If it is operated with the cabinet 
removed, do not touch exposed connections or com- 
ponents. Some transistors may have elevated case 
voltages. Disconnect the ac power source from the 
instrument and verify that the line-rectifier filter capac- 
itors have discharged before cleaning the instrument 
or replacing parts (see label on the primary power 
shield). 



The exploded view drawing in the "Replaceable Mechani- 
cal Parts" list at the rear of this manual may be helpful dur- 
ing the removal and reinstallation of individual components 
or subassemblies. Circuit board and component locations 
are illustrated in the "Diagrams" section of this manual. 



Cabinet Removal 

Removal of the instrument wrap-around cabinet is ac- 
complished by the following steps: 

1 . Unplug the power cord from the ac power source. 



8. Slide the cabinet off of the instrument. 



To reinstall the wrap-around cabinet, perform the reverse 
of the preceding instructions. Ensure that the cabinet fits 
properly into the emi gasket grooves in the front frame and 
rear panel. 



2. Unplug the power cord from the rear-panel connector. 



3. Install the front-panel cover, place the cabinet handle 
against the bottom of the cabinet, and set the instrument 
face down on a flat surface. 



4. Unwrap the power cord from the instrument feet. 



5. Remove the four screws in the rear-panel feet (see 
Figure 6-2). 



6. Remove the two screws from the top-center and bot- 
tom-center of the rear panel (see Figure 6-2). 



7. Lift the rear panel and power cord away from the in- 
strument, leaving the rear-panel feet attached. 



WARNING 



The line-rectifier filter capacitors normally retain a 
charge for a short period (approximately 15 to 20 sec- 
onds) after the instrument is turned off and can remain 
charged for a longer period if a bleeder-resistor or 
power-supply problem occurs. Before beginning any 
cleaning or work on the internal circuitry of the oscillo- 
scope, disconnect the ac power source from the in- 
strument and verify that the capacitors have 
discharged to 24 V or less. Measurement is made at 
the three points indicated on the plastic primary input 
shield at the rear of the instrument (after the Top-Cov- 
er Plate is removed). If the capacitors retain charges 
of greater than 24 V for more than 20 seconds, dis- 
charge them using a 1 kQ, 5-watt resistor connected 
point-to-point across the capacitors (through the ac- 
cess holes). Ensure that the capacitors are discharged 
before commencing troubleshooting. 



6-22 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 




REMOVE (4 EA.) 

TORX-HEAD 

SCREWS 



3831-15 



Figure 6-2. Rear panel removal. 



Top-Cover Plate Removal 

Removal of the Top-Cover Plate is accomplished by the 
following steps: 



1. Remove the instrument cabinet as described in that 
procedure. 

9 Set the instrument, hnttnm rinwn. nn a flat surface. 



4. Remove the securing screw from the left side of the 
chassis. 



5. Remove the two top securing screws at the front edge 



6. Remove the top securing nut at the rear of the cover 
plate. 



7. Lift the Top-Cover Plate up and away from the 
3. Remove the two securing screws from the top edge of instrument, 
the rear-panel chassis. 



6-23 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



To reinstall the Top-Cover Plate, perform the reverse of 
the preceding instructions. 



3. Disconnect the three ribbon-cable connectors from the 
Control board (P251, P651, and P652) (see Figure 6-3). 



A5 — Control Board Removal 



Removal of the Control Board is accomplished by the 
following steps: 

1. Remove the instrument wrap-around cabinet as de- 
scribed in that procedure. 



4. Disconnect the two ribbon-cable connectors from the 
Main board (P51 1 and P512). 



5. Remove the five mounting screws securing the board 
to the chassis, one at each corner of the board and one at 
the center. 



2. Place the instrument on its left side on a flat surface. 



6. Lift the Control board away from the chassis. 



REMOVE (3 EA) 
RIBBON CABLE 
CONNECTORS 



REMOVE (2 EA) 
RIBBON CABLE 
CONNECTORS 




Uf 


Ullfiii 


Iflillf 


ililiiil'B 








mm 


ySlifii:f|I 








•* 




flllptlt it 








it 


ifjillji 




lill|l 







3831-14 



Figure 6-3. Ribbon cable removal 



6-24 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



To reinstall the Control board, perform the reverse of the 
preceding instructions. 



To reinstall the Power Supply assembly, perform the re- 
verse of the preceding instructions. 



A2, A3, and A1 2— Power Supply Assembly 
Removal 

Removal of the Power Supply assembly is accomplished 
by the following steps: 

1 . Remove the instrument Cabinet as described in that 
procedure. 



2. Remove the Top-Cover Plate as described in that 
procedure. 



3. Loosen, but do not remove, the nut securing the fan 
blade to the fan motor shaft (a 1/4-inch nut driver is 
required). 



The following procedures describe the further disassem- 
bly of the Power Supply circuit boards once the assembly is 
removed from the instrument. 



FAN REMOVAL. To remove the Fan board and motor 
from the Power Supply assembly, perform the following 
steps: 

1 . Loosen the four screws on the plastic motor mount. 



2. Disconnect the multipin connector from the Fan board 
(P301). Note the connector orientation for reinstallation. 



3. Slide the Fan board and motor from the motor mount. 



4. Grasp the fan blade and, using firm pressure, pull the 
fan blade and mounting collar from the motor shaft. 



To reinstall the Fan board and motor, perform the re- 
verse of the preceding steps. 



5. Remove the two rear-panel screws holding the plastic 
primary circuit shield and remove the shield. 



6. Remove the two screws holding the rear of the Power 
Supply assembly to the rear panel. 



7. Remove the three screws securing the power-transis- 
tor heatsink to the chassis. 



INVERTER BOARD AND REGULATOR BOARD SEPA- 
RATION. To separate the Inverter and Regulator boards, 
perform the following steps: 

1 . Remove the rear-corner securing screw from the Reg- 
ulator board. 



2. Unplug the four thru-pin connectors (J231 , J232, J233, 
and J234). 



8. Disconnect the power supply ribbon-cable connector 
from the Control board (P251) and feed the cable through 
the slot in the Control board. 



9. Disconnect the two power supply multipin connectors 
from the Power Supply assembly to the Main board (P121 
and P122). 



3. Separate the two circuit boards by unclipping the plas- 
tic edge connectors. 



To rejoin the Inverter and Regulator boards, perform the 
reverse of the preceding steps. 



10. Disconnect the four primary power connections at 
the rear of the supply assembly (P204, P205, P206, and 
P207). Note their orientation for reinstallation. 



1 1 . If the Probe Power option is installed, disconnect the 
Probe Power connectors from the Power Supply assembly 
(P201 and P202). 



12. Lift the Power Supply assembly from the instrument. 



as — nign-voiiage ooara riemovai 

Removal of the High-Voltage board is accomplished by 
the following steps: 

1 . Remove the instrument Cabinet as described in that 
procedure. 



2. Remove the Top-Cover Plate as described in that 
procedure. 



6-25 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



WARNING 



The crt anode lead may retain a high-voltage charge 
after the instrument is turned off, To avoid electrical 
shock, ground the crt anode lead to the chassis after 
disconnecting the plug. Reconnect and disconnect the 
anode-lead plug several time, grounding the anode 
lead to chassis ground each time it is disconnected to 
fully dissipate the charge. 



3. Unplug the CRT anode lead and discharge it to chas- 
sis ground. 



4. Unplug the two leads from the ceramic termination 
strip to the crt. Use long-nose pliers to pull the connectors 
straight away from the crt neck pins. Avoid putting exces- 
sive pressure on the metal-to-glass seal. Raise the connec- 
tors high enough to allow clearance for the crt anode lead (in 
step 7). 



5. Disconnect the single conductor connector from the 
ceramic termination strip. 



13. Tilt the top of the board out to clear the left-side 
frame and pull the board up to disengage the High-Voltage 
board pin connectors from the Main board. 



14. Lift the board from the chassis while carefully feeding 
the crt socket, cabling, and high-voltage lead through the 
chassis slot. 



To reinstall the High-Voltage board, perform the reverse 
of the preceding instructions. 

A4 — Readout Board Removal 

Removal of the Readout board is accomplished by the 
following steps: 

1 . Remove the instrument Cabinet as described in that 
procedure. 



2. Remove the Top-Cover Plate as described in that 
procedure. 



3. Place the instrument, left side down, on a flat surface. 



6. Remove the screw retaining the high-voltage lead 
clamp. 



4. Disconnect the Readout Board ribbon-cable connector 
from the Main board (P411). 



7. Slide the high-voltage lead sideways under the termi- 
nation strip. 



8. Loosen the two screws on the left side of the crt sock- 
et cover and remove the one on the right side. Remove the 
cover. 



9. Remove the five screws securing the High-Voltage 
board shield to remove the shield. 



1 0. Remove the four mounting posts securing the High- 
Voltage board to the chassis. 



1 1 . Unplug the crt socket by gently prying evenly on both 
sides of the socket until the socket can be disengaged from 
the crt pins. Do not apply excessive side pressure on the 
socket. 



12. Disconnect the two multipin connectors and one sin- 
gle-conductor connector from the front of the High-Voltage 
board (P902, PS03, and PS04). Note orientation for 
reinstallation. 



5. With the instrument still on its side, pull the circuit 
board out of its plastic board mounts. Remove the board 
from the instrument while guiding the ribbon cable and con- 
nector through the slots in the Main board and chassis. 



To reinstall the Readout board, perform the reverse of 
the preceding steps. 

A6 and A7 — Front-Panel and Variable Board 
Assembly Removal 

Removal of the Front-Panel and Variable board assembly 
is accomplished by the following steps. 

1 . Remove the instrument Cabinet as described in that 
procedure. 



2. Using a small-bladed screwdriver, pry the trim strip 
from the top edge of the front-panel trim ring. Gently pry up 
on the back edge to release it, then pry gently at each of the 
front edge retaining clips to remove the strip. 



3. Remove the five screws from the top edge of the front- 
panel trim ring. 



6-26 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



4. Remove the four screws and the two plastic feet from 
the bottom edge of the front-panel trim ring. 



5. Remove the screw from either side of the front-panel 
trim ring (screws are recessed in the front-cover catches). 



6. Using firm pressure, pull the knobs from the four con- 
trols directly below the crt (INTENSITY, FOCUS, READOUT 
INTENSITY, and SCALE ILLUM). 



2. Using a 1/16-inch Allen wrench, loosen the set screws 
in the CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTS/DIV knobs. Remove the 
knobs from their control shafts (if not previously removed). 



3. Pull the B SEC/DIV knob to the out position to gain 
access to the two recessed setscrews. 



4. Use a 1/16-inch Allen wrench to loosen the two set- 
screws and remove the B SEC/DIV knob. 



7. Slide off the front-panel trim ring and outer crt bezel. 



5. Loosen the setscrews in the A SEC/DIV collar and 
remove the collar. 



8. Disconnect the two ribbon-cable connectors from the 
front edge of the Control board (P651 and P652). 

9. Pull out the Front-Panel and Variable board assembly. 



6. Using firm outward pressure, pull the knobs off of the 
Vertical and Horizontal POSITION controls, the Trigger 
HOLDOFF and LEVEL controls, the Delta controls, and the 
TRACE SEP control (ten knobs). Note the differences in the 
knobs for reinstallation. 



The following steps describe the further disassembly of 
the Front-Panel and Variable boards once the assembly is 
removed from the instrument. 



7. Remove the three securing screws and two securing 
studs from the rear of Front-Panel board. 



ASSEMBLY SEPARATION. Separation of the Variable 
board from the Front-Panel board is accomplished by the 
following steps: 

1 . Using a 1/16-inch Allen wrench, loosen the set screws 
in the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV VAR, CH 2 VOLTS/DIV VAR, and A 
and B SEC/DIV VAR knobs and remove the knobs from 
their control shafts. 



8. Partially separate the board from the front-panel cover 
plate to expose the B SEC/DIV knob microswitch and 
multipin connector. 



9. Unplug the connector (P601) from the Front-Panel 
board and separate the board from the cover plate. 



2. Disconnect the multipin connector from the Variable 
board (P671). 



To reinstall the Front-Panel and Variable board assem- 
bly, perform the reverse of the preceding instructions. 



3. Remove the two screws securing the Variable board 
to the mounting posts. 



4. Slide the Variable board and the variable-control 
shafts away from the Front-Panel board. 



A10 and A11 — Channel 1 and Channel 2 Attenuator 
Assembly Removal 

Removal of either the Channel 1 or Channel 2 Attenuator 
assembly is accomplished by the following steps: 

1. Remove the instrument Cabinet as described in that 
procedure. 



FRONT-PANEL COVER PLATE REMOVAL. Use the fol- 
lowing procedure to remove the front-panel cover plate from 
the Front-Panel board. 



2. Remove the Front-Panel and Variable board assembly 
as described in that procedure. 



1 . Separate the Front-Panel and Variable boards as de- 
scribed above (if not already done). 



3. Remove the two screws holding the small mounting 
bracket under the Attenuator assemblies and remove the 
bracket. 



6-27 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



4. Remove the two screws that hold the Attenuator being 
removed to the front-panel frame. 



7. Disconnect the rear-panel BNC connector leads from 
the rear of the Main Board (P106, P107, and P108). 



5. Remove the two mounting screws holding the Attenu- 
ator being removed to the Main board (through access holes 
in the front-panel compartment). 



6. Disconnect the associated multipin connector from the 
Main board (either P10 for Channel 1 or P1 1 for Channel 2). 



7. Remove the two screws holding the rear attenuator 
shield and remove the shield. 



8. Disconnect the CH 2 OUT connector from near the 
center of the Main board (P105) 



9. Disconnect the six multipin connectors for the controls 
beneath the crt (P1 1 1 , P1 1 2, P1 1 3, P1 1 4, P1 1 5, and P1 1 6). 



10. Disconnect the two-conductor connector for the 
Scale Illumination board from between the ASTIG and the 
SCALE ILLUM control connections (P181). 



8. Unsolder the two Attenuator output leads and the 
compensation capacitor lead. 



9. Unplug the Attenuator by gently pulling the assembly 
straight up and away from the Main board. 



To reinstall a removed Attenuator assembly, perform the 
reverse of the preceding steps. 



A1 — Main Board Removal 

Removal of the Main board is accomplished by the fol- 
lowing steps: 

1 . Remove the instrument Cabinet as described in that 
procedure. 



2. Remove the Top-Cover Plate as described in that 
procedure. 



3. Remove the Front-Panel and Variable board assembly 
as described in that procedure. 



4. Disconnect the two power-supply multipin connectors 
from the power supply Regulator board (P121 and P122). 



5. Disconnect the three ribbon-cable connections from 
the bottom of the Main board (P41 1 , P51 1 , and P512). 



6. Disconnect the vertical and horizontal deflection leads 
from the crt neck pins. Access is via holes in the Main 
board. Use long-nose pliers to disconnect the pins by gently 
pulling straight up on the connectors. Avoid putting exces- 
sive side pressure on the meta!-to-g!ass seal of the crt neck 
pins. 



1 1 . Unsnap the Power-switch rod from the switch hinge 
at the rear of the instrument by applying counterclockwise 
torque to the shaft and sliding it out of the hinge. 



12. Remove the Power-switch push-button mounting 
screw from the front of the instrument (on the bottom of the 
front frame) and extract the Power-switch rod. 



13. Remove the two screws holding the small bracket 
under the Attenuator assemblies and remove the bracket. 



14. Remove the six screws holding the Attenuator as- 
semblies and the CH 3 and CH 4 input connectors to the 
front frame. 



15. Remove the Main board mounting screws (eleven 
screws total securing the Main board to the frame). 



16. Raise the rear of the Main board to unplug J191 and 
separate the Main board from the HV board. When the plug 
pins are completely disengaged and the rear of the board 
clears the rear frame, slide the Main board rearward out of 
the front-panel frame. 



17. Lift the Main board and Delay Line clear of the instru- 
ment while working the power supply cables through the 
slot in the frame. 



To reinstall the Main board, perform the reverse of the 
preceding instructions. 

A8 — Scale Illumination Board Removal 

Removal of the Scale-Illumination board is accomplished 
by the following steps: 



6-28 



Maintenance — 2465 Service 



1 . Remove the instrument Cabinet as described in that 
procedure. 



3. Loosen the two screws on the left side of the crt sock- 
et cover and remove the one on the right side. Remove the 
cover. 



2. Remove the front-panel trim and outer crt bezel as 
described in the Front-Panel and Variable board assembly 
removal instructions. 



3. Remove the eight screws holding the crt mounting be- 
zel in place and remove the bezel and plastic gasket. Note 
the length difference in the screws for reinstallation. 



4. Unplug the crt socket by gently prying the socket 
evenly on both sides until the pins can be disengaged. Do 
not apply excessive side pressure on the socket as it is 
being removed. 



WARNING 



4. Remove the plastic lens from the Scale-Illumination 
board. 



5. Disconnect the scale-illumination multipin connector 
from the Main board (P181). 



6. Remove the Scale-Illumination board by lifting it away 
from the front frame while working the wires and connector 
through the slot in the frame. 



The crt anode lead and the output terminal of the 
High-Voltage Multiplier can retain a high-voltage 
charge after the instrument is turned off. To avoid 
electrical shock, ground both the crt anode lead and 
the high-voltage lead to the main instrument chassis. 
Repeat the grounding process several times to fully 
dissipate the charge. 



5. Disconnect the crt anode lead connector and dis- 
charge it to chassis ground. 



To reinstall the Scale-Illumination board, perform the re- 
verse of the preceding instructions. 



CRT Removal 



6. Using long-nosed pliers, disconnect the horizontal and 
vertical deflection leads from the bottom of the crt. Pull 
straight out on these connectors to prevent excessive strain 
on the metal-to-glass seal. (Access to the connectors is 
through holes in the Main board). 



WARMING 



Use care when handling a crt. Breakage of the crt 
may cause high-velocity scattering of glass fragments 
(implosion). Protective clothing and safety glasses 
(preferably a full-face shield) should be worn. Avoid 
striking the crt on any object which may cause it to 
crack or implode. When storing a crt, place it in a pro- 
tective carton or set it face down on a smooth surface 
in a protected location. When stored face down, it 
should be placed on a soft, nonabrasive surface to 
prevent the crt face plate from being scratched. 



7. Using long-nosed pliers, disconnect the vertical termi- 
nation leads from the top of the crt. 



8. Using long-nosed pliers, disconnect the crt shield re- 
sistor from the top of the crt. 



9. Disconnect the Y-Axis Alignment coil connector from 
the front of the High-Voltage board (P903). 



10. Remove the front-panel trim ring and outer crt bezel 
as described in the Front-Panel and Variable board assem- 
bly removal instructions. 



1 . Remove the instrument Cabinet as described in that 
procedure. 



11. Remove the eight retaining screws from the crt- 
mounting bezel at the front of the crt. Note the difference in 
length of the screws for reinstallation. 



2. Remove the Top-Cover Plate as described in that 
procedure. 



12. Remove the crt mounting bezel and plastic gasket 
from the crt. 



6-29 



Maintenance— 2465 Service 



13. Slide the crt forward slightly by gently pushing on the 
rear of the crt neck until the front of the crt can be grasped. 

14. Slide the crt out of the instrument while feeding the 
anode lead and Y-Axis Alignment coil leads through their 
respective holes. 



NOTE 

Once the crt is removed, it should be stored in such a 
manner as to protect it from impact. If stored face 
down, it should be placed on a soft, nonabrasive sur- 
face to prevent the crt face plate from being 
scratched. To reinstall the crt, perform the reverse of 
the preceding instructions. 



A1 R467 


3612 


Used in conjunction with 
C467 for CH 2 vertical 
aberrations. 


A1 R303* 


10012 Nom. 
20012 Sel. 
30012 Sel. 


Selected to obtain correct 
CH 4 bandwidth. 


A1R312* 


10012 Nom. 
20012 Sel. 
30012 Sel. 


Selected to obtain correct 
CH 3 bandwidth. 



'See Selection Procedure 



SELECTABLE COMPONENTS 



Several components in the 2465 oscilloscope are 
selectable to obtain optimum circuit operation. Value selec- 
tion of these components is done during the initial factory 
adjustment procedure. Further selection is not usually nec- 
essary for subsequent adjustments unless a component has 
been changed that affects circuitry for which a selected 
component has been specifically chosen . 



SELECTION PROCEDURE 

R303 & R312 

If the bandwidth of CH 3 or CH 4 has been determined to 
be low by using the Adjustment Procedure (4. Check Verti- 
cal Bandwidth — CH 3 and CH 4) proceed with the following 
selection procedure. 



At this time, the components listed in Table 6-12 have 
been designated as selectable. See the Replaceable Electri- 
cal Parts List for part numbers. 



1 . Increase the value of R303 (CH 4) or R312 (CH 3) us- 
ing the values listed in Table 6-12 to increase the bandwidth 
of the channel being checked. 



Table 6-12 
Selectable Components 



Component 


Value 


Purpose 


A1C466 


15 pF 


Used in conjunction with 
R466 for CH 1 vertical 
aberrations. 


A1 R466 


3612 


Used in conjunction with 
C466 for CH 1 vertical 
aberrations. 


A1C467 


15 pF 


Used in conjunction with 
R467 for CH 2 vertical 
aberrations. 



NOTE 

Do not increase the value of R303 or R312 more than 
necessary to meet the bandwidth check as this will 
also increase the aberrations of the channels. 



2. If after selecting R303 or R312 the channel still does 
not meet the bandwidth check, check the following. 

a. The probe (P6131) may be adjusted incorrectly or 
may be defective. Refer to the probe manual for 
the Performance Check/ Adjustment Procedure. 

b. The Vertical system may be adjusted incorrectly. 
See Step 2 in the Adjustment Procedure. 



c. A1 1 U300 may be defective. 



6-30 



REV JUL 1984 



Section 7-2465 Service 



OPTIONS 



INTRODUCTION 

This section contains a general description of instrument 
options available at the time of publication of this manual. 
Additional information about instrument options and 
option availability can be obtained either by consulting 
the current Tektronix Product Catalog or by contacting 
your local Tektronix Field Office or representative. 



Connector-mounting holes are provided in the rack- 
mount front panel. These holes enable convenient accessing 
of the four BNC connectors (CH 2 SIGNAL OUT, A GATE 
OUT, B GATE OUT, and EXT Z AXIS IN) and the two 
PROBE POWER connectors located on the rear panel. 
Additional cabling and connectors required to implement 
any front-panel access to the rear-panel connectors are 
supplied by the user; however, these items can be separately 
ordered from Tektronix. 



OPTION 11 

Option 1 1 provides two probe-power connectors on the 
rear panel of the instrument. Voltages supplied at these 
connectors meet the power requirements of standard 
Tektronix active oscilloscope probes. 



Complete rackmounting instructions are provided in a 
separate document shipped with the 2465 Option 1R. 
These instructions also contain appropriate procedures to 
convert a standard instrument into the Option 1R con- 
figuration by using the rackmounting conversion kit. 



OPTION 22 



When ordered with this option, two additional probe 
packages identical to the standard-accessory probes are 
supplied with the instrument. 



OPTION 1R 

When the 2465 Oscilloscope is ordered with Option 1R, 
it is shipped in a configuration that permits easy installation 
into a 19-inch-wide electronic-equipment rack. 



An optional rear-support kit is also available for use 
when rackmounting the 2465. Using this optional rear- 
support kit enables the rackmounted instrument to meet 

i j.1 , .: i. _x it/111 -p or> nn /->/-> ...:j.u * 

ur exceeu uie requirements ui ivn i_- 1 -^oouvjo vvilii icsijcul 

to Type III, Class 5, Style C electronic equipment for 
vibration and shock. Other electrical and environmental 
specifications of the 2465 apply to both the rackmounted 
and the standard instrument with one exception. For the 
rackmounted instrument, the ambient air temperature 
operating limits (— 15°C to +55°C) are measured at the 
instrument's air inlet, and its fan exhaust air temperature 
should not be allowed to exceed +65° C. 



POWER CORD OPTIONS 



Instruments are shipped with the detachable-power-cord 
configuration ordered by the customer. Descriptive infor- 
mation about the international power-cord options is 
provided in Section 2, "Operating Information." The 
following list identifies the Tektronix part numbers for the 
available power cords and associated fuses. 



Option A1 (Universal Euro] 

Power cord (2.5 m) 

Fuse (1.6 A, 250 V, 

5 x 20 mm. Quick-acting) 

Pi icp can 



Option A2 (UK) 

Power cord (2.5 m) 

Fuse (1.6 A, 250 V, 

5 x 20 mm, Quick-acting) 

Fuse cap 



161-0104-06 

1 59-0098-00 
9nn.99RR.nn 



161-0104-07 

159-0098-00 
200-2265-00 



7-1 



Options— 2465 Service 



Option A3 (Australian) 

Power cord (2.5 m) 

Fuse (1.6 A, 250 V, 

5 x 20 mm, Quick-acting) 

Fuse cap 



Option A5 (Switzerland) 

161-0104-05 Power cord (2.5 m) 

Fuse (1.6 A, 250 V, 
1 59-0098-00 5 x 20 mm, Quick-acting) 

200-2265-00 Fuse cap 



161-0167-00 

1 59-0098-00 
200-2265-00 



Option A4 (North American) 

Power cord (2.5 m) 

Fuse (2 A, 250 V, AGC/3AG, 
Fast-blow) 

Fuse cap 



161-0104-08 

159-0021-00 
200-2264-00 



FUTURE OPTIONS 

Technical documentation for options not available at 
the time of publication of this manual will be supplied in 
separate Operators and Service manuals for each option. 



7-2 



REV OCT 1983 



Section 8 — 2465 Service 



REPLACEABLE 
ELECTRICAL PARTS 

PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION 



Replacement parts are available from or through your local 
Tektronix, inc. Field Office or representative. 

Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made to 
accommodate improved components as they become available, 
and to give you the benefit of the latest circuit improvements 
developed in our engineering department. It is therefore impor- 
tant, when ordering parts, to include the following information in 
your order: Part number, instrument type or number, serial 
number, and modification number if applicable. 

If a part you have ordered has been replaced with a new or 
improved part, your local Tektronix, Inc. Field Office or represen- 
tative will contact you concerning any change in part number. 

Change information, if any, is located at the rear of this 
manual. 

LIST OF ASSEMBLIES 

A list of assemblies can be found at the beginning of the 
Electrical Parts List. The assemblies arelistedin numerical order. 
When the complete component number of a part is known, this list 
will identify the assembly in which the part is located. 

CROSS INDEX-MFR. CODE NUMBER TO 
MANUFACTURER 

The Mfr. Code Number to Manufacturer index for the 
Electrical Parts List is located immediately after this page. The 
Cross Index provides codes, names and addresses of manufac- 
turers of components listed in the Electrical Parts List. 

ABBREVIATIONS 

Abbreviations conform to American National Standard Y1 .1 . 



COMPONENT NUMBER (column one of the 
Electrical Parts List) 

A numbering method has been used to identify assemblies, 
subassemblies and parts. Examples of this numbering method 
and typical expansions are illustrated by the following: 

Example a. 



component number 
A23R1234 A23 R1234 

Assembly number 



>^~ "^ 



Circuit number 



Read: Resistor 1234 of Assembly 23 



Example b. 



A23A2R1234 
Assembly 
number 



component number 
A23 A2 R1234 



Read: Resistor 1234 of Subassembly 2 of Assembly 23 



Only the circuit number will appear on the diagrams and 
circuit board illustrations. Each diagram and circuit board 
illustration is clearly marked with the assembly number. 
Assembly numbers are also marked on the mechanical exploded 
views located in the Mechanical Parts List. The component 
number is obtained by adding the assembly number prefix to the 
circuit number. 

The Electrical Parts List is divided and arranged by 
assemblies in numerical sequence (e.g., assembly A1 with its 
subassemblies and parts, precedes assembly A2 with its sub- 
assemblies and parts). 

Chassis-mounted parts have no assembly number prefix 
and are located at the end of the Electrical Parts List. 



TEKTRONIX PART NO. (column two of the 
Electrical Parts List) 

Indicates part number to be used when ordering replace- 
ment part from Tektronix. 



SERIAL/MODEL NO. (columns three and four 
of the Electrical Parts List) 

Column three (3) indicates the serial number at which the 
part was first used. Column four (4) indicates the serial number at 
which the part was removed. No serial number entered indicates 
part is good for all serial numbers. 



NAME & DESCRIPTION (column five of the 
Electrical Parts List) 

In the Parts List, an Item Name is separated from the 
description by a colon (:). Because of space limitations, an Item 
Name may sometimes appear as incomplete. For further Item 
Name identification, the U.S. Federal Cataloging Handbook H6-1 
can be utilized where possible. 



MFR. CODE (column six of the Electrical Parts 
List) 

Indicates the code number of the actual manufacturer of the 
part. (Code to name and address cross reference can be found 
immediately after this page.) 



MFR. PART NUMBER (column seven of the 
Electrical Parts List) 

Indicates actual manufacturers part number. 



8-1 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 



Mfr. Code Manufacturer 



CROSS INDEX— MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER 
Address City, State, Zip 



000FG RIFA WORLD PRODUCTS INC. 

000FJ MARCOM SWITCHES INC. 

000HX SAN-0 INDUSTRIAL CORP. 

000IG FUJITSU-AMERICA INC. 

OOOJF FUJI SEMICONDUCTOR 

00213 NYTRONICS, COMPONENTS GROUP, INC., 

SUBSIDIARY OF NYTRONICS, INC. 

00779 AMP, INC. 

01121 ALLEN-BRADLEY COMPANY 

01295 TEXAS INSTRUMENTS, INC. 

SEMICONDUCTOR GROUP 

01963 CHERRY ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS CORPORATION 

' 021 1 1 SPECTROL ELECTRONICS CORPORATION 

02113 COILCRAFT INC. 

02735 RCA CORPORATION, SOLID STATE DIVISION 

03508 GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, SEMI-CONDUCTOR 

PRODUCTS DEPARTMENT 

04222 AVX CERAMICS, DIVISION OF AVX CORP. 

04713 MOTOROLA, INC., SEMICONDUCTOR PROD. DIV. 

05828 GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP ELECTRONIC 

SYSTEMS DIV. 

07263 FAIRCHILD SEMICONDUCTOR, A DIV. OF 

FAIRCHILD CAMERA AND INSTRUMENT CORP. 

09250 ELECTRO ASSEMBLIES CORP. 

C AND K COMPONENTS INC. 

09922 BURNDY CORPORATION 

12697 CLAROSTAT MFG. CO., INC. 

12969 UNITRODE CORPORATION 

14433 ITT SEMICONDUCTORS 

14552 MICRO SEMICONDUCTOR CORP. 

14752 ELECTRO CUBE INC. 

15238 ITT SEMICONDUCTORS, A DIVISION OF INTER 

NATIONAL TELEPHONE AND TELEGRAPH CORP. 

15454 RODAN INDUSTRIES, INC. 

17856 SILICONIX, INC. 

20462 PREM ENTERPRISES, INC. 

20932 EMCON DIV OF ILLINOIS TOOL WORKS INC. 

22526 BERG ELECTRONICS, INC. 

22753 U. I. D. ELECTRONICS CORP. 

24546 CORNING GLASS WORKS, ELECTRONIC 

COMPONENTS DIVISION 

25088 SIEMENS CORP. 

27014 NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR CORP. 

27264 MOLEX, INC. 

31918 IEE/SCHADOW INC. 

32159 WEST-CAP ARIZONA 

32997 BOURNS, INC., TRIMPOT PRODUCTS DIV. 

34335 ADVANCED MICRO DEVICES 

34479 RENCO CORP 

50157 MIDWEST COMPONENTS INC. 

50434 HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY 

54473 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC, CORP. OF AMERICA 

54937 DEYOUNG MFG., INC. 

551 12 PLESSEY CAPACITORS, DIV. OF PLESSEY INC. 

55680 NICHICON/AMERICA/CORP. 

56289 SPRAGUE ELECTRIC CO. 

57668 R-OHM CORP. 

59660 TUSONIX INC. 

59821 CENTRALAB INC 

SUB NORTH AMERICAN PHILIPS CORP 

71400 BUSSMAN MFG.. DIVISION OF MCGRAW- 

72982 ERIE TECHNOLOGICAL PRODUCTS, INC. 



7625 BUSH LAKE RD 
P.O. BOX 35263 
67 ALBANY STREET 
170 WILBUR PLACE 

1208 E. ARQUES AVE. 
NEW YURAKUCHO BLDG 
ORANGE STREET 

P.O. BOX 3608 

1201 2ND STREET SOUTH 

P.O. BOX 5012 
3600 SUNSET AVENUE 
17070 EAST GALE AVENUE 
1102 SILVER LAKERD. 
ROUTE 202 

ELECTRONICS PARK 

P O BOX 867 

5005 E MCDOWELL RD,PO BOX 20923 

600 W JOHN ST. 

464 ELLIS STREET 
15RIVERDALEAVE 

RICHARDS AVENUE 

LOWER WASHINGTON STREET 

580 PLEASANT STREET 

3301 ELECTRONICS WAY 

P O BOX 3049 

2830 E FAIRVIEW ST. 

1710 S. DEL MAR AVE. 

P.O. BOX 168, 500 BROADWAY 
2905 BLUE STAR ST. 
2201 LAURELWOOD DRIVE 
3519 N. CHAPEL HILL 
11620 SORRENTO VALLEY RD 
PO BOX 81542 
YOUK EXPRESSWAY 
4105 PEMBROKE RD. 

550 HIGH STREET 

186 WOOD AVE. S 

2900 SEMICONDUCTOR DR. 

2222 WELLINGTON COURT 

8081 WALLACE ROAD 

2201 E. ELVIRA ROAD 

1200 COLUMBIA AVE. 

901 THOMPSON PL. 

26 COROMAR DRIVE 

P. O. BOX 787 

1981 PORT CITY BLVD. 

640 PAGE MILL ROAD 

1 PANASONIC WAY 

PO BOX 1806, 1517 130TH AVE. 

5334 STERLING CENTER DR. 

6435 N PROESEL AVENUE 

87 MARSHALL ST. 

16931 MILLIKEN AVE. 

2155 N FORBES BLVD 

7158 MERCHANT AVE 



iooo vv. umvenoi i 
644 W. 12TH ST. 



MINNEAPOLIS. MN 55435 

CAZENOVIA, N.Y. 13035 

BAHEMIA 

LONG ISLAND, NY 11716 

SUNNYVALE, CA 94086 

TOKYO 100, JAPAN 

DARLINGTON, SC 29532 

HARRISBURG, PA 17105 
MILWAUKEE, Wl 53204 

DALLAS, TX 75222 
WAUKEGAN, IL 60085 
CITY OF INDUSTRY, CA 91745 
CARY, IL 60013 
SOMERVILLE, NY 08876 

SYRACUSE, NY 13201 
MYRTLE BEACH, SC 29577 
PHOENIX, AZ 85036 

HICKSVILLE LI, NY 11802 

MOUNTAIN VIEW, CA 94042 
NEWTON MA 02158 

NORWALK, CT 06852 
DOVER, NH 03820 
WATERTOWN, MA 02172 

WEST PALM BEACH, FL 33402 
SANTA ANA, CA 92704 
SAN GABRIEL, CA 91776 

LAWRENCE, MA 01841 
ANAHEIM, CA 92806 
SANTA CLARA, CA 95054 
MCHENRY, IL 60050 

SAN DIEGO, CA 92121 

NEW CUMBERLAND, PA 17070 

HOLLYWOOD, FL 33021 

BRADFORD, PA 16701 
ISELIN, NJ 08830 
SANTA CLARA, CA 95051 
LISLE, IL 60532 
EDEN PRAIRIE, MN 55343 
TUCSON, AZ 85706 
RIVERSIDE, CA 92507 
SUNNYVALE, CA 94086 
GOLETA, CA 93117 

MUSKEGON, Ml 49443 
PALO ALTO, CA 94304 
SECAUCUS, NJ 07094 
BELLEVUE.WA 98009 
WEST LAKE VILLAGE, CA 91361 
CHICAGO, IL 60645 
NORTH ADAMS, MA 01247 
IRVINE, CA 92713 
TUCSON, AZ 85705 
EL PASO, TX 79915 



31. LUUia, IV1U 00 111/ 

ERIE, PA 16512 



8-2 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 



Mfr. Code Manufacturer 



CROSS INDEX— MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER 
Address City, State, Zip 



73138 BECKMAN INSTRUMENTS, INC., HELIPOT DIV. 

74276 SIGNALITE DIV., GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP. 

74970 JOHNSON, E. F., CO. 

75042 TRW ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS, IRC FIXED 

RESISTORS, PHILADELPHIA DIVISION 
75915 LITTELFUSE, INC. 

76493 BELL INDUSTRIES, INC., 

MILLER, J. W., DIV. 
76784 OAK SWITCH SYSTEMS iNC 

SUB OF OAK TECHNOLOGY INC 
76854 OAK INDUSTRIES, INC., SWITCH DIV. 

80009 TEKTRONIX, INC. 

80031 ELECTRA-MIDLAND CORP., MEPCO DIV. 

81483 INTERNATIONAL RECTIFIER CORP. 

8441 1 TRW ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS, TRW CAPACITORS 

90201 MALLORY CAPACITOR CO., DIV. OF 

P. R. MALLORY AND CO., INC. 
91637 DALE ELECTRONICS, INC. 

93410 ESSEX INTERNATIONAL, INC., CONTROLS DIV. 

LEXINGTON PLANT 
96733 SAN FERNANDO ELECTRIC MFG CO 

T0020 UNITED CHEMI-CON INC. 

T0058 NEC ELECTRON INC. 

T0875 MATSUO ELECTRONICS INC 

T0900 UNITED CHEMI-CON 

T0946 SAN-0 INDUSTRIAL CORP. 



2500 HARBOR BLVD. 
1933 HECK AVE. 
299 10TH AVE. S. W. 

401 N. BROAD ST. 

800 E. NORTHWEST HWY 

19070 REYES AVE., P O BOX 5825 

100 S MAIN ST 

S. MAIN ST. 

P O BOX 500 

22 COLUMBIA ROAD 

9220 SUNSET BLVD. 

112 W. FIRST ST. 

3029 E. WASHINGTON STREET 

P. O. BOX 372 

P. O. BOX 609 

P. O. BOX 1007 

1501 FIRST ST 

1128 LEXINGTON AUVE. 

252 HUMBOLT COURT 

831 S DOUGLAS STREET 

9801 W. HIGGINS ROAD 

170 WILBUR PL 



FULLERTON, CA 92634 
NEPTUNE, NJ 07753 
WASECA, MN 56093 

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19108 
DES PLAINES, IL 60016 

COMPTON, CA 90224 

CRYSTAL LAKE, IL 60014 
CRYSTAL LAKE, IL 60014 
BEAVERTON, OR 97077 
MORRISTOWN, NJ 07960 
LOS ANGELES, CA 90069 
OGALLALA, NE 69153 

INDIANAPOLIS, IN 46206 
COLUMBUS, NE 6860.1 

MANSFIELD, OH 44903 

SAN FERNANDO, CA 91341 

ROCHESTER, NY 14606 

SUNNYVALE, CA 94086 

EL SEGUNDO, CA 92641 

ROSEMONT.IL 60018 

BAHEMIA, LONG ISLAND,NY 1171 



REV OCT 1984 






Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



Mfr 
Code 



Mfr Part Number 



A1 
A1 

A1 
A1 
A1 
A1 

A1 
A1 
A1 
A1 
A1 
A1 

'A1 
A1 
A1 
A1 



A2 
A2 
A3 

A3 
A4 
A4 
A4 
A5 
A5 

A5 
A5 
A5 



A6 

A6 
A7 
A8 
A9 
A9 
A9 

A9 

A9 

A9 

A10 

A10 

A11 

A11 
A12 
A12 
A13 

A14 



670-7276-00 
670-7276-04 
670-7276-07 



670-7276-06 
670-7276-08 
670-7276-09 



670-7276-10 
670-7276-1 1 



672-1037-00 
672-1037-03 

672-1037-04 
672-1037-05 
672-1037-07 



670-7278-00 
670-7278-01 
670-7278-02 
670-7279-01 
670-7279-05 

670-7279-06 
670-7279-07 
670-7279-08 
672-1038-00 
672-1038-02 



B010100 B011199 CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 

(STANDARD) 
B011200 B011999 CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 

(STANDARD) 
B012000 B019999 CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 

(STANDARD) 



B020000 B023099 



B020000 B023099 



B023100 B024739 



B024740 B026617 



B026618 



B010100 
B013900 

B014150 
B022175 
B024300 



B010100 
B021700 
B024700 
B010100 
B013100 

B021966 
B023200 
B025240 
B010100 
B013850 



B013899 
B014149 



B022174 
B024299 



B021699 
B024699 



B013099 
B021965 



B023199 
B025239 



B013849 



670-7284-00 






670-7280-00 






670-7277-00 


B010100 


B010999 


670-7277-01 


B011000 


B011999 


670-7277-02 


B012000 


B013299 


670-7277-03 


B013300 


B014099 


670-7277-05 


B014100 


B022019 


670-7277-06 


B022020 




670-7390-00 


B010100 


B024299 


670-7390-01 


B024300 




119-1445-01 






119-1445-02 






307-1154-00 






670-8000-00 







CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 
(OPT. 01 ,05,06,09 ONLY) 
CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 
(STD&OPT10ONLY) 
CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 
(STANDARD & ALL OPTIONS) 

CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 

(STANDARD & ALL OPTIONS) 

CKT BOARD ASSY:MA!N 

(STANDARD & ALL OPTIONS) 

CKT BOARD ASSY:LV/POWER SUPPLY MODULE 

CKT BOARD ASSY:L V PWR SPLY MODULE 

CKT BOARD ASSY:LV/POWER SUPPLY MODULE 
CKT BOARD ASSY:L V/PWR SPLY MODULE 
CKT BOARD ASSY:LV/PWR SPLY MODULE 
CKT BOARD ASSY:REGULATOR 
(AVAILABLE AT 672-1 037-XX LEVEL ONLY) 
CKT BOARD ASSY:INVERTER 

(AVAILABLE AT 672-1 037-XX LEVEL ONLY) 
CKT BOARD ASSY:BUS READOUT 
CKT BOARD ASSY:BUS READOUT 
CKT BOARD ASSY: BUS READOUT 
CKT BOARD ASSYrDIGITAL CONTROL 
CKT BOARD ASSY:DIGITAL CONTROL 



CKT BOARD 
CKT BOARD 
CKT BOARD 
CKT BOARD 
CKT BOARD 
CKT BOARD 



ASSY 
ASSY 
ASSY 
ASSY 
ASSY 
ASSY 



DIGITAL CONTROL 
DIGITAL CONTROL 
DIGITAL CONTROL 
FR PNL MODULE 
FR PNL MODULE 
FRONT PANEL 



(AVAILABLE AT 672-1 038-XX LEVEL ONLY) 
CKT BOARD ASSY:FRONT PANEL VARIABLE 
CKT BOARD ASSY:SCALE ILLUMINATION 
CKT BOARD ASSY: HIGH VOLTAGE 
CKT BOARD ASSY:HIGH VOLTAGE 
CKT BOARD ASSY:HIGH VOLTAGE 

CKT BOARD ASSY:HIGH VOLTAGE 

CKT BOARD ASSY:HIGH VOLTAGE 

CKT BOARD ASSY:HIGH VOLTAGE 

CKT BOARD ASSY:FAN MOTOR 

CKT BOARD ASSY: FAN MOTOR 

ATTENUATOR,VAR:PROGRAMMABLE1X-100X,CH1 

(CHANNEL 1) 

ATTENUATOR,VAR:PROGRAMMABLE,1X-100X,CH2 

(CHANNEL 2) 

PASSIVE NETWORK:CRT TERMINATOR,FINISHED 

CKT BOARD ASSY:DYNAMIC CENTERING 



80009 
80009 
80009 

80009 
80009 
80009 

80009 

80009 

80009 
80009 

80009 
80009 
80009 



670-7276-00 
670-7276-04 
670-7276-07 

670-7276-06 
670-7276-08 
670-7276-09 

670-7276-10 

670-7276-06 

672-1037-00 
672-1037-03 

672-1037-04 
672-1037-05 
672-1037-07 



80009 


670-7278-00 


80009 


670-7278-01 


80009 


670-7278-02 


80009 


670-7279-00 


80009 


670-7279-05 


80009 


670-7279-06 


80009 


670-7279-07 


80009 


670-7279-08 


80009 


672-1038-00 


80009 


672-1038-02 



80009 


670-7284-00 


80009 


670-7280-00 


80009 


670-7277-00 


80009 


670-7277-01 


80009 


670-7277-02 


80009 


670-7277-03 


80009 


670-7277-05 


80009 


670-7277-06 


80009 


670-7390-00 


80009 


670-7390-01 


80009 


119-1445-01 


80009 


119.1445-02 


80009 


307-1154-00 


80009 


670-8000-00 



8-4 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



Mfr 
Code 



Mfr Part Number 



A20 
A20 
A20 
A20 
A20 
A20 

A20 
A20 
A20 
A20 
A20 



670-7830-01 



670-7830-03 
670-7830-04 



CKT BOARD ASSY:BUFFER 
(USED WHERE A PARTICULAR OPTION OR 
COMBINATION OF OPTIONS IS IN PLACE-AND 
DOCUMENTED IN THAT OPTION MANUAL) 
CKT BOARD ASSY:BUFFER 
(OPT.01,OPT.06,OR OPT.09 ONLY) 

CKT BOARD ASSY:BUFFER 

(OPT.05 ONLY) 

CKT BOARD ASSY: BUFFER 

(COMBINATION OF OPT.05 AND OPT.01, 

OPT.06.OR OPT. 09) 



80009 



670-7830-01 



80009 670-7830-03 
80009 670-7830-04 



REV OCT 1984 



8-5 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



A1 

A1 

A1 
A1 
A1 
A1 

A1 
A1 
A1 
A1 
A1 
A1 

'A1 
A1 
A1 
A1 

A1C100 

A1C100 
A1C102 
A1C102 
A1C103 
A1C103 
A1C104 

A1C105 
A1C106 
A1C107 
A1C108 
A1C112 
A1C113 

A1C114 
A1C115 
A1C116 
A1C117 
A1C117 
A1C117 

A1C118 
A1C119 
A1C120 
A1C120 
A1C121 
A1C122 

A1C125 
A1C125 
A1C130 
A1C175 
A1C175 
A1C176 

A1C177 
A1C179 
A1C180 
A1C180 
A1C181 
A1C181 



670-7276-07 


B012000 


B019999 


670-7276-06 


B020000 


B023099 


670-7276-08 


B020000 


B023099 


670-7276-09 


B023100 


B024739 


670-7276-10 


B024740 


B026617 


670-7276-1 1 


B026618 




283-0000-00 







B010100 B026617 



670-7276-00 B010100 B011199 CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 

(STANDARD) 

670-7276-04 B011200 B011999 CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 

(STANDARD) 
CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 
(STANDARD) 

CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 
(OPT. 01,05,06,09 ONLY) 
CKT BOARD ASSY;MAIN 
(STD&OPT10ONLY) 
CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 
(STANDARD & ALL OPTIONS) 



CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 
(STANDARD & ALL OPTIONS) 
CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 
(STANDARD & ALL OPTIONS) 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.001UF, + 100-0%,500V 

(COMBO W/R100) 
B010100 B010249 CAP., FXD,ELCTLT:220UF, + 50-1 0%,25V 
B010250 CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:100UF,20%,25VDC 

B010100 B026617 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:100PF,20% 
B026618 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:1000PF,10%,100V 

B010100 B026617 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.001UF, + 100-0%,500V 

CAP.,VAR,PLSTC:0.25-1 .5PF,600V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF, + 80-20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:15PF,10%,100V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF,-)-80-20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:27PF,5%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:100PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,+80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CERDI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF, + 80-20%,50V 

CAP.,VAR,PLSTC:5.5-65PF,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CERDI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.05UF, + 100-20%,50V 

B026617 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,-r8~0-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:22UF,+50-10%,10V 

B026617 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CERDI:0.22UF,+80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.47UF,+80-20%,25V 

CAP.,FXD,CERDI:0.47UF,+80-20%,25V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
B026617 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF, + 80-20%,50V 
B026617 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF, + 80-20%,50V 



290-0963-00 
290-0973-00 
283-0492-00 
281-0812-00 
283-0000-00 

281-0064-00 
283-0024-00 
290-0943-00 
283-0423-00 
281-0797-00 
283-0423-00 

290-0943-00 
281-0761-00 
281-0814-00 
283-0024-00 
283-0421-00 
283-0423-00 

281-0205-00 
283-0024-00 
283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
290-0943-00 
283-0010-00 

283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
290-0776-00 
283-0421-00 
283-0423-00 
283-0479-00 

283-0479-00 
281-0775-00 
283-0421-00 
283-0423-00 
283-0421-00 
283-0423-00 



B010100 
B020000 
B026618 



B010100 
B026618 



B0 19999 
B026617 



B026617 



B010100 B026617 



B010100 
B026618 

B010100 
B026618 



B010100 
B026618 
B010100 
B026618 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


80009 


670-7276-00 


80009 


670-7276-04 


80009 


670-7276-07 


80009 


670-7276-06 


80009 


670-7276-08 


80009 


670-7276-09 


80009 


670-7276-10 


80009 


670-7276-06 


59660 


831610Y5U0102P 


T0900 


SM25VB220Q 


T0020 


SM25VB100M 


20932 


501EM50DP10SM 


04222 


MA101C102KAA 


59660 


831610Y5U0102P 


74970 


273-0001-101 


72982 


8121N083Z5U0104Z 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


04222 


DG015E224Z 


72982 


8035D9AADC0G150K 


04222 


DG015E224Z 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


72982 


314-008S2H270J 


04222 


GC101A101K 


72982 


8121N083Z5U0104Z 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


04222 


DG015E224Z 


80031 


2810C5R565QJ02F0 


72982 


8121N083Z5U0104Z 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


56289 


1C10Z5U503Z050B 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


55680 


ULA1A220TEA 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


04222 


DG015E224Z 


20932 


501ES25DP474E 


20932 


501ES25DP474E 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


04222 


DG015E224Z 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


04222 


DG015E224Z 



8-6 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


72982 


8121N083Z5U0104Z 


59660 


831610Y5U0102P 


20932 


501EM50DP10SM 


04222 


MA101C102KAA 


20932 


501EM50DP10SM 


04222 


MD011C103MAA 


74970 


273-0001-101 


59660 


831610Y5U0102P 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


04222 


DG015E224Z 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


72982 


8121N083Z5U0104Z 


72982 


8121N083Z5U0104Z 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


56289 


1C10Z5U503Z050B 


04222 


MA101C102MAA 


04222 


MA101C102KAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


7001--COJ-2R7C 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


7001-COJ-2R7C 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


04222 


GC101A270M 


59660 


513-013A1-5 


59660 


513-013A2 0-10 


04222 


GC101A270M 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


nA1fl1A47nKAA 


72982 


8035D9AADC0G150K 


72982 


8035D9AADC0G150K 


96733 


R2735 



A1C184 
A1C185 
A1C186 
A1C200 
A1C202 
A1C202 

A1C203 
A1C203 
A1C205 
A1C206 
A1C207 
A1C207 

A1C217 
A1C217 
A1C218 
A1C219 
A1C220 
A1C221 

A1C222 
A1C223 
A1C223 
A1C225 
A1C301 
A1C301 

A1C302 
A1C303 
A1C306 
A1C306 
A1C307 
A1C310 

A1C310 
A1C311 
A1C311 
A1C312 
A1C325 
A1C329 

A1C332 
A1C336 
A1C402 
A1C403 
A1C404 
A1C412 

A1C415 
A1C415 
A1C450 
A1C454 
A1C458 
A1C458 

A1C460 
A1C460 
A1G464 
A1C466 
A1C467 
A1C478 



281-0775-00 
290-0943-00 
283-0024-00 
283-0000-00 
283-0492-00 
281-0812-00 

283-0492-00 
283-0811-00 
281-0064-00 
283-0000-00 
283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 

283-0421-00 
283-0423-00 
290-0943-00 
283-0024-00 
283-0024-00 
290-0943-00 

283-0010-00 
281-0770-00 
281-0812-00 
281-0775-00 
283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 

281-0775-00 
281-0547-00 
283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
290-0943-00 
283-0421-00 

281-0909-00 
283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
281-0547-00 
290-0943-00 
281-0773-00 

281-0773-00 
290-0943-00 
281-0762-00 
281-0218-00 
281-0221-00 
281-0762-00 

283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
283-0421-00 
283-0421-00 
283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 

283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
281-0763-00 
281-0797-00 
281-0797-00 
281-0759-00 



B010100 
B026618 



B010100 
B012000 



B010100 
B026618 



B010100 
B026618 



B010100 
B010100 



B010100 
B012000 
B026618 

B010100 
B026618 



B010100 
B010100 
B026618 



B026618 
B010100 
B026618 
B010100 



B010100 
B026618 
B010100 
B01 01 00 
B010100 
B026618 

B010100 
B026618 



B026617 



B011999 



B026617 



B026617 



B026617 
B026617 



B026617 
B026617 



B026617 



B019999 
B026617 



B010100 B026617 



B026617 



B019999 



B026617 

B019999 
B0 19999 
B026617 



B026617 



CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.001UF, + 100-0%,500V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:100PF,20% 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:1000PF,10%,100V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:100PF,20% 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.01UF,20%,100V 
CAP.,VAR,PLSTC:0.25-1 .5PF,600V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.001UF, + 100-0%,500V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER Dl:0.1 UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 

CAP.,FXD,CERDI:0.05UF, + 100-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER Dl:1000 PF,20%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:1000PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-2Q%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:2.7PF,10%,500V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP., FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-1 0%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CERDI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 

CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,+80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:2.7PF,10%,500V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP., FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-1 0%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:27PF,20%,100V 
CAP.,VAR,CER DI:1-5PF, + 2-2.5%,100V 
CAP.,VAR,CER DI:2-10PF,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:27PF,20%,100V 

CAP.,FXD,CERDI:0.1UF,+80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CERDI:0.1UF,+80-20%,50V 
CAP..FXD.CER Di:0.1 UF,+80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER Dl:0.1 UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER D!:47PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:15PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:15PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:22PF,10%,100V 



REV OCT 1984 



3-7 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff 


Dscont 


A1C480 


281-0775-00 






A1C487 


281-0823-00 






A1C488 


281-0814-00 






A1C500 


281-0812-00 


B0 12000 




A1C501 


281-0812-00 


B012000 




A1C512 


290-0246-00 






A1C513 


281-0775-00 


B010100 


B019999 


A1C513 


283-0479-00 


B020000 




A1C520 


281-0814-00 






A1C521 


283-0421-00 


B010100 


B026617 


A1C521 


281-0909-00 


B026618 




A1C528 


283-0421-00 


B010100 


B026617 


A1C528 


283-0423-00 


B026618 




A1C536 


290-0246-00 






A1C537 


281-0775-00 


B010100 


B019999 


A1C537 


283-0479-00 


B020000 




A1C544 


281-0814-00 






A1C617 


281-0773-00 






A1C625 


283-0421-00 


B010100 


B026617 


A1C625 


281-0909-00 


B026618 




A1C645 


281-0773-00 






A1C650 


281-0823-00 






A1C653 


281-0819-00 






A1C660 


281-0786-00 


B010100 


B019999 


A1 C660 


281-0851-00 


B020000 




A1C669 


281-0775-00 






A1C675 


281-0775-00 






A1C707 


281-0808-00 






A1C708 


285-0676-01 






A1C709 


285-1060-00 






A1C710 


281-0775-00 






A1C712 


283-0479-00 






A1C722 


283-0421-00 


B010100 


B026617 


A1C722 


281-0909-00 


B026618 




A1C723 


290-0943-00 






A1C731 


290-0963-00 


B010100 


B010249 


A1C731 


290-0944-00 


B010250 




A1C733 


290-0943-00 






A1C735 


281-0823-00 






A1C738 


290-0943-00 






A1C740 


290-0943-00 






A1C742 


281-0812-00 






A1C803 


283-0421-00 


B010100 


B026617 


A1C803 


281-0909-00 


B026618 




A1C804 


281-0759-00 


B024740 




A1C805 


281-0823-00 






A1C806 


283-0156-00 






A1C808 


281-0757-00 






A1C809 


281-0759-00 






A1C810 


283-0421-00 


B010100 


B026617 


A1C810 


281-0909-00 


B026618 




A1C811 


283-0421-00 


B010100 


B026617 


A1C811 


281-0909-00 


B026618 




A1C817 


281-0812-00 







Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


12969 


CGB471KDN 


04222 


GC101A101K 


04222 


MA101C102KAA 


04222 


MA101C102KAA 


56289 


173D335X9015V 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


20932 


501ES25DP474E 


04222 


GC101A101K 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


04222 


DG015E224Z 


56289 


173D335X9015V 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


20932 


501ES25DP474E 


04222 


GC101A101K 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


12969 


CGB471KDN 


72982 


8035BC0G330 


04222 


MA106A569D 


04222 


GC10-1-A-181K 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


GC10-1A7ROM 


80009 


285-0676-01 


80009 


285-1060-00 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


20932 


501ES25DP474E 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


T0900 


SM25VB220Q 


55680 


ULB1A221TPAANA 


55680 


ULB1 E470TECANA 


12969 


CGB471KDN 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


04222 


MA101C102KAA 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


96733 


R2735 


12969 


CGB471KDN 


96733 


R2670 


72982 


8035-D-COG-100G 


96733 


R2735 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


MA101C102KAA 



CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:470PF,10%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:100PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:1000PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:1000PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:3.3UF,10%,15V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.47UF, + 80-20%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:100PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:3.3UF,10%,15V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.47UF, + 80-20%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:100PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:470PF,10%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:33PF,5%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:150PF,10%,100V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:18OPF,5%,100VDC 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:7PF,20%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:0.1UF,3,5%,35V 
CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:10UF,3%,25V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CERDI:0.47UF, + 80-20%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CERDI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:220UF, + 50-10%,25V 

CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:220UF, + 50-10%,10V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF,4-50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:470PF,10%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:1000PF,10%,100V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:22PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:470PF,10%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER Dl: 1 000PF, + 1 00-0%,200V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:10PF,20%,100V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:22PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:1000PF,10%,100V 



8-8 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 



Component No. 

A1C819 
A1C819 
A1C822 
A1C822 
A1C850 
A1C850 

A1C851 
A1C852 
A1C853 
A1C854 
A1C907 
A1C908 

A1C912 
A1C912 
A1C912 
A1C933 
A1C933 
A1C938 

A1C938 
A1C940 
A1C940 
A1C943 
A1C943 
A1 C956 

A1C957 
A1C958 
A1C958 
A1C966 
A1C967 
A1C972 

A1C973 
A1C973 
A1C975 
A1C980 
A1C988 
A1C988 

A1C990 
A1C990 
A1C995 

A1CR100 
A1CR100 

A1CR101 
A1CR101 
A1CR101 

/-\ I \^l 1 I V/ 1 

A1CR107 

A1CR130 
A1CR131 

A 1<— D1 Ar\ 

A1CR141 
A1CR142 
A1CR143 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
283-0421-00 
283-0423-00 
283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 

283-0479-00 
283-0479-00 
283-0479-00 
283-0479-00 
281-0808-00 
285-0752-03 

281-0775-00 
283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
283-0421-00 

281-0909-00 
283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
281-0773-00 

290-0804-00 
283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
281-0783-00 
281-0783-00 
281-0756-00 

283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
281-0775-00 
281-0775-00 
283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 

283-0421-00 
281-0909-00 
281-0810-00 

152-0323-01 



152-0322-00 
152-0323-01 



152-0066-00 

152-0141-02 
152-0141-02 
152-0141-02 
152-0141-02 
152-0141-02 
152-0141-02 



B010100 
B026618 
B010100 
B026618 
B010100 
B026618 



B010100 
B020000 
B026618 
B010100 
B026618 
B010100 

B026618 
B010100 
B026618 
B010100 
B026618 



B010100 
B026618 

B020000 



B020000 
B010100 
B026618 



B026617 



B026617 



B026617 



B019999 
B026617 



B026617 



B026617 



B026617 



B026617 



B026617 



B010100 B026617 
B026618 



B026617 



B010100 B026617 
B026618 



B010100 B013249 
B013250 



CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.47UF, + 80-20%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CERDI:0.47UF, + 80-20%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.47UF, + 80-20%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CERDI:0.47UF, + 80-20%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:7PF,20%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:1 UF,3%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 

CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DL0.1 UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:10UF, + 50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER Dl:0.1 UF, +80-20%, 50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:2.2PF,0.5%,200V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CERDI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:5.6PF,0.5%,100V 

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,35V,0.1A 
(IN COMBO W/CR200) 

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,15V,HOT CARRIER 

(IN COMBO W/CR201) 

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,35V,0.1A 

(!N COMBO W/CR201) 

SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVCDLSW.SISOVilSOMA^ONADO-SS 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,1 50MA,30V,DO-35 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Numbe 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


04222 


DG015E224Z 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


20932 


501ES25DP474E 


20932 


501 ES25DP474E 


20932 


501ES25DP474E 


20932 


501ES25DP474E 


04222 


GC10-1A7ROM 


80009 


285-0752-03 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


55680 


ULA1E100TEA 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


96733 


ADVISE 


96733 


ADVISE 


12969 


CGB2R2DFN 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


80009 


281-0909-00 


04222 


GC10-1A5R6D 



03508 



DE101 



50434 


5082-2672 


03508 


DE101 


05828 


GP10G-020 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 



REV OCT 1984 



8-9 



Replaceable Electrical Parts-— 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff Dscont 


A1CR144 


152-0141-02 




A1CR145 


152-0141-02 




A1CR146 


152-0141-02 




A1CR147 


152-0141-02 




A1CR148 


152-0141-02 




A1CR149 


152-0141-02 




A1CR150 


152-0141-02 




A1CR151 


152-0141-02 




A1CR152 


152-0141-02 




A1CR153 


152-0141-02 




A1CR154 


152-0141-02 




A1CR155 


152-0141-02 




A1CR160 


152-0141-02 




A1CR161 


152-0141-02 




A1CR162 


152-0141-02 




A1CR163 


152-0141-02 




A1CR200 


152-0323-01 




A1CR200 






A1CR201 


152-0322-00 


B010100 B01324S 


A1CR201 






A1CR201 


152-0323-01 


B013250 


A1CR201 






A1CR355 


152-0141-02 




A1CR356 


152-0141-02 




A1CR358 


152-0141-02 




A1CR359 


152-0141-02 




A1CR460 


152-0141-02 




A1CR461 


152-0141-02 




A1CR476 


152-0141-02 




A1CR484 


152-0141-02 




A1CR485 


152-0141-02 




A1CR495 


152-0141-02 




A1CR503 


152-0141-02 


B020000 


A1CR600 


152-0141-02 




A1CR601 


152-0141-02 


B011200 


A1CR616 


152-0141-02 




A1CR619 


152-0141-02 


B011200 


A1CR620 


152-0141-02 


B011200 


A1CR621 


152-0141-02 


B011200 


A1CR652 


152-0141-02 




A1CR653 


152-0141-02 




A1CR707 


152-0141-02 




A1CR741 


152-0141-02 




A1CR746 


152-0141-02 




A1CR747 


152-0141-02 




A1CR752 


152-0075-00 




A1CR807 


152-0574-00 




A1CR811 


152-0141-02 




A1CR950 


152-0141-02 




A1CR951 


152-0141-02 




A1CR956 


152-0141-02 




A1CR966 


152-0574-00 




A1CR972 


152-0574-00 




A1CR987 


152-0574-00 





Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part I 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


03508 


DE101 


50434 


5082-2672 


03508 


DE101 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


14433 


G866 


14433 


WG1308 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


14433 


WG1308 


14433 


WG1308 


14433 


WG1308 



SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,35V,0.1A 
(IN COMBO W/CR100) 

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,15V,HOT CARRIER 

(IN COMBO W/CR101) 

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,35V,0.1A 

(INCOMBOW/CR101) 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 



SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V 



150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 

150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 

150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 
150MA,30V,DO-35 



SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,1 50MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC.DhSW.SI^OV.ISOMA.SOV.DO-SS 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SW,GE,22V,40MA 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,120V,0.15A 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,120V,0.15A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,120V,0.15A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,120V,0.15A 



8-10 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff 


Dscont 


A1DL100 


119-1490-00 


B010100 


B012577 


A1DL100 


119-1490-01 


B012578 




A1J100 


131-0608-00 


B010100 


B019999 


A1J110 


136-0727-00 






A1J118 


136-0727-00 






A1J119 


136-0728-00 






A1L101 


108-0538-00 






A1L107 


108-0538-00 






A1L113 


108-0538-00 






A1L115 


108-0317-00 






A1L219 


108-0538-00 






A1L307 


108-0538-00 






A1L325 


108-0538-00 






A1L336 


108-0538-00 






A1L403 


108-0552-00 


B010100 


B011999 


A1 L403 









A1L403 


108-0578-00 


B020000 




A1 L521 


108-0538-00 






A1L605 


108-0735-00 






A1 L606 


108-0683-00 






A1L607 


108-0683-00 






A1 L608 


108-0735-00 






A1 L609 


108-0509-00 






A1L610 


108-0509-00 






A1L611 


108-0317-00 






A1L612 


108-0317-00 






A1L619 


108-0735-00 


B010100 


B019999 


A1L619 


114-0353-00 


B020000 


B026617 


A1L619 


108-0736-00 


B026618 




A1L628 


108-0327-00 






A1 L633 


108-0327-00 






A1 L644 


108-0736-00 






A1L644 


114-0353-00 


B020000 




A1L644 








A1L733 


108-0538-00 






A1L738 


108-0317-00 






A1 L740 


108-0317-00 






A1 L743 


108-0538-00 






A1L938 


108-0538-00 






A1L973 


108-0538-00 






A1LR101 


108-0325-00 






A1LR107 


108-0325-00 






A1LR180 


108-0602-00 






A1LR201 


108-0325-00 






A1LR218 


108-0330-00 






A1LR280 


108-0602-00 






A1Q130 


151-0622-00 






A1Q131 


151-0622-00 






A1Q154 


151-0188-00 






A1Q155 


151-0188-00 







Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Nui 


80009 


119-1490-00 


80009 


119-1490-01 


22526 


48283-036 


09922 


DILB8P-108 


09922 


DILB8P-108 


09922 


DiLB14P-108 


76493 


JWM#B7059 


76493 


JWM#B7059 


76493 


JWM#B7059 


32159 


71 501 M 


76493 


JWM#B7059 


76493 


JWM#B7059 


76493 


JWM#B7059 


76493 


JWM#B7059 


80009 


108-0552-00 


80009 


108-0578-00 


76493 


JWM#B7059 


80009 


108-0735-00 


80009 


108-0683-00 


80009 


108-0683-00 


80009 


108-0735-00 


80009 


108-0509-00 


80009 


108-0509-00 


32159 


71 501 M 


32159 


71 501 M 


80009 


108-0735-00 


80009 


114-0353-00 


80009 


108-0736-00 


80009 


108-0327-00 


80009 


108-0327-00 


80009 


108-0736-00 


80009 


114-0353-00 


76493 


JWM#B7059 


32159 


71501 M 


32159 


71 501 M 


76493 


JWM#B7059 


76493 


JWM#B7059 


76493 


JWM#B7059 


80009 


108-0325-00 


80009 


108-0325-00 


80009 


108-0602-00 


80009 


108-0325-00 


80009 


108-0330-00 


80009 


108-0602-00 



DELAY LiNE,ELEC:73NS,150 OHM 
DELAY LINE,ELEC:73NS,150 OHM 

TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 
SKT,PL-IN ELEK:MICROCKT,8 CONTACT 

SKT.PL-IN ELEK:MICROCKT,8 CONTACT 
SKT,PL-iN ELEK:MiCROCKT,14 CONTACT 

COIL,RF:FIXED,2.7UH 
COIL,RF:FIXED,2.7UH 
COIL,RF:FIXED,2.7UH 

CO!L,RF:FIXED,15UH 
COIL,RF:FIXED,2.7UH 
COIL,RF:FIXED,2.7UH 
COIL,RF:FIXED,2.7UH 
COIL,RF:FIXED,2.7UH 
COIL,RF:80NH 

(TEST SELECTABLE) 

COIL,RF:FIXED,45NH 

COIL,RF:FIXED,2.7UH 

COIL,RF:FIXED,560NH 

COIL,RF:FIXED,900NH 

COIL,RF:FIXED,900NH 

COIL,RF:FIXED,560NH 

COIL,RF:2.45UH 

COIL,RF:2.45UH 

COIL,RF:FIXED,15UH 

CO!L,RF:FIXED,15UH 

COIL,RF:FIXED,560NH 



COIL,RF:810NH 

COIL,RF:XD,TERMINATION COMP 
COIL,RF:XD,TERMINATION COMP 
COIL,RF:810NH 
COIL,RF:VARIABLE,0.6 TO 1.0UH 

(OPTIONS 01,05,06,09 ONLY) 

COIL,RF:FIXED,2.7UH 

COIL,RF:FIXED,15UH 

COIL,RF:FIXED,15UH 

COIL,RF:FIXED,2.7UH 

COIL,RF:FIXED,2.7UH 

COIL,RF:FIXED,2.7UH 

COIL,RF:0.5UH 

COIL,RF:0.5UH 

COIL,RF:60NH 

COIL,RF:0.5UH 

COIL,RF:0.4UH 

COIL,RF:60NH 

TRANSISTOR:SILiCON,PNP 
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP 
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI,TO-92 
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI,TO-92 



T0058 
T0058 



2N3906 
2N3906 



REV OCT 1984 



R-11 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Moi 


jel No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff 


Dscont 


A1Q190 


151-0190-00 






A1Q460 


153-0547-00 






A1Q550 


151-0190-00 






A1Q600 


151-0190-00 






A1Q623 


151-0190-00 






A1Q624 


151-1042-01 


B010100 


B019999 


A1Q624 


151-1025-00 


B020000 




A1Q645 


151-0188-00 






A1Q700 


151-0190-00 






A1Q709 


151-0736-00 






A1Q741 


151-0188-00 






A1R100 


315-0474-00 






A1R100 








A1R101 


315-0272-00 






A1R102 


315-0272-00 






A1R114 


321-0130-00 






A1R115 


321-0146-00 






A1R117 


321-0285-00 






A1R118 


321-0210-00 


B010100 


B026617 


A1R118 


321-0212-00 


B026618 




A1R119 


321-0354-00 






A1R120 


315-0100-00 






A1R121 


315-0121-00 






A1R123 


31 5-0622-00 






A1R125 


301-0361-00 


B010100 


B026617 


A1R129 


315-0101-00 






A1R130 


315-0561-00 






A1R131 


315-0561-00 






A1R133 


315-0122-00 






A1R135 


315-0102-00 






A1R136 


315-0622-00 






A1R140 


315-0471-00 






A1R141 


315-0471-00 






A1R142 


315-0391-00 






A1R143 


315-0391-00 






A1R144 


307-0108-00 






A1R149 


315-0103-00 






A1R152 


31 5-0562-00 






A1R153 


315-0752-00 






A1R154 


321-0210-00 






A1R155 


321-0210-00 


B010100 


B019999 


A1R155 


321-0206-00 


B020000 




A1R156 


321-0255-00 






A1R159 


321-0242-00 






A1R161 


321-0289-00 


B010100 


B026617 


A1R161 


321-0293-00 


B026618 




A1R162 


321-0289-00 


B010100 


B026617 


A1R162 


321-0293-00 


B026618 




A1R163 


321-0242-00 






A1R165 


315-0822-00 






A1R190 


315-0103-00 






A1R191 


315-0103-00 






A1R192 


315-0103-00 







Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Ni 


04713 


SPS7969 


80009 


153-0547-00 


04713 


SPS7969 


04713 


SPS7969 


04713 


SPS7969 


17856 


J2595 


01295 


SFB8129 


T0058 


2N3906 


04713 


SPS7969 


04713 


SPS8317 


T0058 


2N3906 



TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI,TO-92 

SEMICOND DVC SE:SILICON,NPN, MATCHED 

TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI,TO-92 

TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI,TO-92 

TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI,TO-92 

SEMICOND DVC SE:FET,SI,TO-92 

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,JFE,N-CHANNEL 

TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI,TO-92 

TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI,TO-92 

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 

TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI,TO-92 



RES.,FXD,CMPSN:470K OHM,5%,0.25W 
(COMBO W/C1 00) 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.7KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:221 OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:324OHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:9.09KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1.5K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1.58KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:47.5KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:120 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:6.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:360 OHM,5%,0.5W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:560 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:560 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1 .2K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:6.2KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:470 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:470 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:390 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:390 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:6.8 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:5.6KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:7.5K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1.5K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1.5KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:1 37K OHM",1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:4.42KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:3.24KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:10K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:11K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:10K OHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:11K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:3.24KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:8.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10KOHM,5%,0.25W 



01121 



CB4745 



01121 


CB2725 


01121 


CB2725 


91637 


MFF1816G221R0F 


91637 


MFF1816G324R0F 


91637 


MFF1816G90900F 


91637 


MFF1816G15000F 


91637 


MFF1816G15800F 


91637 


CMF55116G47501F 


01121 


CB1005 


01121 


CB1215 


01121 


CB6225 


01121 


EB3615 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB5615 


01121 


CB5615 


01121 


CB1225 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB6225 


01121 


CB4715 


01121 


CB4715 


01121 


CB3915 


01121 


CB3915 


01121 


CB68G5 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB5625 


01121 


CB7525 


91637 


MFF1816G15000F 


91637 


MFF1816G15000F 


91637 


MFF1816G13700F 


91637 


MFF1816G44200F 


91637 


MFF1816G32400F 


91637 


MFF1816G10001F 


91637 


MFF1816G11001F 


91637 


MFF1816G10001F 


91637 


MFF1816G11001F 


91637 


MFF1816G32400F 


01121 


CB8225 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 



8-12 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No, 




Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff Dscont 




A1R193 


315-0102-00 




RES., 


A1R194 


317-0103-00 


B010100 B019999 


RES., 


A1R194 


315-0103-00 


B020000 


RES., 


A1R195 


315-0301-00 




RES., 


A1R196 


315-0752-00 




RES., 


A1R197 


315-0562-00 




RES., 


A1R198 


321-1700-04 




RES., 


A1R199 


321-1700-04 




RES., 


A1R201 


315-0272-00 




RES., 


A1 R202 


315-0272-00 




RES., 


A1R216 


315-0121-00 




RES., 


A1R217 


321-0268-00 




RES., 


A1R218 


321-0210-00 


B010100 B026617 


RES., 


A1R218 


281-0212-00 


B026618 


CAP., 1 


A1R219 


321-0354-00 




RES., 


A1 R220 


315-0100-00 




RES., 


A1R223 


315-0622-00 


B010100 B011999 


RES., 


A1R225 


301-0361-00 


B010100 B026617 


RES., 


A1R230 


315-0222-00 




RES., 


A1R231 


315-0222-00 




RES., 


A1R232 


315-0222-00 




RES., 


A1R301 


315-0240-00 




RES., 


A1R302 


315-0240-00 




RES., 


A1R303 


315-0201-00 




RES., 


A1R303 


315-0301-00 




RES., 


A1 R304 


315-0101-00 




RES., 


A1R311 


315-0101-00 




RES., 


A1R312 


315-0101-00 




RES., 


A1 R329 


315-0101-00 




RES., 


A1R332 


315-0101-00 




RES., 


A1R334 


315-0392-00 




RES., 


A1R353 


321-0265-00 




RES., 


A1R355 


315-0103-00 




RES., 


A1R357 


315-0104-00 




RES., 


A1R358 


315-0104-00 




RES., 


A1R359 


315-0104-00 




RES., 


A1R360 


321-0293-00 




RES., 


A1R361 


315-0123-00 




RES., 


A1R362 


315-0104-00 




RES., 


A1R363 


315-0332-00 




RES., 


A1 R401 


321-0202-00 




RES., 


A1R402 


315-0750-00 




RES., 


A1R403 


311-0635-00 




RES., 1 


A1R411 


311-0978-01 




RES.; 


A1R412 


315-0750-00 




RES., 


A1R416 


315-0432-00 




RES., 


A1R417 


311-1137-00 




RES., 1 


A1 R430 


315-0201-00 




RES., 


A1R440 


321-0666-00 




RES., 


A1R450 


321-0310-00 




RES., 


A1R451 


321-0275-00 




RES., 


A1R452 


321-0310-00 




RES., 


A1R453 


321-0275-00 




RES., 


A1 R454 


321-0310-00 




RES., 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


BB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB3015 


01121 


CB7525 


01121 


CB5625 


91637 


MFF1816D10441B 


91637 


MFF1816D10441B 


01121 


CB2725 


01121 


CB2725 


01121 


CB1215 


91637 


MFF1816G60400F 


91637 


MFF1816G15000F 


80031 


2807C1406MM02F 


91637 


CMF55116G47501F 


01121 


CB1005 


01121 


CB6225 


01121 


EB3615 


01121 


CB2225 


01121 


CB2225 


01121 


CB2225 


01121 


CB2405 


01121 


CB2405 


01121 


CB2015 


01121 


CB3015 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB3925 


91637 


MFF1816G56200F 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1045 


91637 


MFF1816G11001F 


01121 


CB1235 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB3325 


91637 


MFF1816G12400F 


01121 


CB7505 


02111 


65Y102T010 


73138 


82-4-1 


01121 


CB7505 


01121 


CB4325 


73138 


72PX-67-0-502M 


01121 


CB2015 


91637 


MFF1816D30400D 


91637 


MFF1816G16501F 


91637 


MFF1816G71500F 


91637 


MFF1816G16501F 


91637 


MFF1816G71500F 


91637 


MFF1816G16501F 



FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.125W 
FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:300 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:7.5K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:5.6K OHM,5%,0.25W 

FXD,F!LM:10.44K OHM,0.1%,Q.125W 
FXD,FILM:10.44K OHM,0.1%,0.125W 
FXD,CMPSN:2.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:2.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:120 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,FILM:6.04K OHM,1%,0.125W 

FXD,FILM:1.5K OHM,1%,0.125W 
VAR,PLSTC:1 .5-5.5PF,100V 
FXD,FILM:47.5K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,CMPSN:10 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:6.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:360 OHM,5%,0.5W 

FXD,CMPSN:2.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:2.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:2.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:24 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:24 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:200 OHM,5%,0.25W 

FXD,CMPSN:300 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 

FXD,CMPSN:3.9K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,FILM:5.62K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 

FXD,FILM:11K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,CMPSN:12K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:3.3K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,FILM:1.24K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,CMPSN:75 OHM,5%,0.25W 

VAR,NONWW:TRMR,1 K OHM.1 0%,0.5%,0.5W 
VAR,NONWIR:250 OHM,10%,0.5OW 
FXD,CMPSN:75 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:4.3K OHM,5%,0.25W 
VAR,NONWIR:5K OHM,20%,0.50W 
FXD,CMPSN:200 OHM,5%,0.25W 

FXD,FILM:3.04K OHM,0.5%,0.125W 
FXD,FILM:16.5K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,FILM:7.15K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,FILM:16.5K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,FILM:7.15K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,FILM:16.5K OHM,1%,0.125W 



REV OCT 1984 



8-13 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff 


Dscont 


A1R455 


321-0309-00 


B010100 


B026617 


A1R455 


321-0310-00 


B026618 




A1R456 


321-0303-00 


B010100 


B019999 


A1R456 


321-0329-00 


B020000 


B026617 


A1R456 


321-0333-00 


B026618 




A1R457 


321-0275-00 






A1R458 


321-0085-00 






A1R459 


321-0085-00 






A1R459 








A1 R460 


321-0062-00 






A1R461 


321-0136-00 


B010100 


B019999 


A1R461 


321-0139-00 


B020000 




'A1R462 


321-0208-00 


B010100 


B019999 


A1 R462 


321-0201-00 


B020000 




A1 R463 


321-0201-00 


B010100 


B019999 


A1 R463 


321-0193-00 


B020000 




A1 R464 


321-0063-00 






A1R465 


321-0193-00 






A1 R466 


315-0360-00 


B010100 


B019999 


A1R466 


321-0275-00 


B020000 




A1R466 








A1 R467 


315-0360-00 






A1 R468 


321-0275-00 


B020000 


B026617 


A1 R468 


321-0287-00 


B026618 




A1R470 


315-0223-00 






A1R471 


315-0223-00 






A1R476 


315-0750-00 






A1R477 


315-0472-00 






A1R478 


321-0193-03 






A1R479 


315-0102-00 






A1R480 


321-0378-00 






A1R481 


321-0347-00 






A1R482 


315-0471-00 






A1R483 


321-0347-00 






A1R484 


315-0202-00 






A1R485 


315-0202-00 






A1R486 


321-0347-00 






A1R487 


321-0130-03 






A1R488 


321-1216-03 






A1R489 


321-1216-03 






A1R490 


321-0378-00 






A1R491 


315-0102-00 






A1R492 


321-0193-03 






A1R493 


315-0472-00 






A1R494 


315-0201-00 






A1R495 


315-0750-00 






A1R497 


315-0821-00 






A1R498 


315-0821-00 






A1R500 


315-0331-00 






A1R501 


315-0101-00 






A1R502 


315-0622-00 






A1R503 


315-0103-00 


B020000 




A1R504 


315-0103-00 


B020000 




A1R511 


321-0320-00 







Name & Description 



RES.,FXD,FILM:16.2KOHM.1%.0.125W.TC-TO 

RES.,FXD,FILM:16.5KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:14K OHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:26.1KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:28.7KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:7.15KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:75 OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:75 OHM,1%,0.125W 
(COMBO W/C459) 

RES.,FXD,FILM:43.2 OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:255 OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:274 OHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:1.43KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1.21KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1.21KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:44.2 OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FiLM:1K OHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:36 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:7.15KOHM,1%,0.125W 
(OPTIONS ONLY) 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:36 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:7.15KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:9.53KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:22K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:22K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:75 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1KOHM,0.25%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:84.5KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:40.2K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:470 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:40.2KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:40.2KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:221 OHM,0.25%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1.76KOHM,0.25%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1 .76K OHM,0.25%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:84.5KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:1KOHM,0.25%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:200 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:75 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:820OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:820OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:330 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:6.2KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:21K OHM,1%,0.125W 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


91637 


CMF55116G16201F 


91637 


MFF1816G16501F 


91637 


MFF1816G14001F 


91637 


MFF1816G26101F 


91637 


CMF55116G28701F 


91637 


MFF1816G71500F 


91637 


MFF1816G75R0OF 


91637 


MFF1816G75R00F 


91637 


CMF55-116G43R20F 


91637 


MFF1816G255R0F 


91637 


MFF1816G274R0F 


91637 


MFF1816G14300F 


91637 


MFF1816G12100F 


91637 


MFF1816G12100F 


01121 


ORD BY DESCR 


91637 


MFF1816G44R20F 


01121 


ORD BY DESCR 


01121 


CB3605 


91637 


MFF1816G71500F 


01121 


CB3605 


91637 


MFF1816G71500F 


91637 


MFF1816G95300F 


01121 


CB2235 


01121 


CB2235 


01121 


CB7505 


01121 


CB4725 


91637 


MFF1816D10000C 


01121 


CB1025 


91637 


MFF1816G84501F 


91637 


MFF1816G40201F 


01121 


CB4715 


91637 


MFF1816G40201F 


01121 


CB2025 


01121 


CB2025 


91637 


MFF1816G40201F 


91637 


MFF1816D221R0C 


91637 


MFF1816D17600C 


91637 


MFF1816D17600C 


91637 


MFF1816G84501F 


01121 


CB1025 


91637 


MFF1816D10000C 


01121 


CB4725 


01121 


CB2015 


01121 


CB7505 


01121 


CB8215 


01121 


CB8215 


01121 


CB3315 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB6225 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


91637 


MFF1816G21001F 



8-14 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 





Tektronix Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. Eff Dscont 


A1R512 


321-0293-00 


A1R513 


315-0470-00 


A1R518 


315-0680-00 


A1R519 


315-0621-00 


A1R520 


315-0393-00 


A1R521 


315-0750-00 


A1R527 


315-0750-00 


A1R529 


315-0561-00 


A1R537 


315-0470-00 


A1 R542 


315-0680-00 


A1 R543 


315-0621-00 


A1R544 


315-0393-00 


A1R545 


315-0750-00 


A1R550 


315-0471-00 


A1R551 


321-1682-07 


A1R552 


321-0641-07 


A1R553 


315-0152-00 


A1R554 


315-0162-00 


A1R555 


321-0294-00 


A1R556 


321-0282-00 


A1R557 


321-0808-07 


A1R558 


321-0657-07 


A1 R560 


315-0621-00 


A1 R600 


315-0270-00 


A1R601 


307-0108-00 


A1 R602 


307-0108-00 


A1R605 


321-0112-00 


A1 R606 


321-0002-00 


A1 R607 


321-0002-00 


A1 R608 


307-0108-00 


A1R614 


315-0103-00 


A1R615 


315-0103-00 


A1R617 


315-0102-00 


A1R618 


311-1137-00 


A1R619 


315-0270-00 


A1R620 


315-0472-00 B011200 


A1R622 


321-0226-00 B010100 B019999 


A1R622 


321-0255-00 B020000 


A1 R624 


315-0100-00 


A1R638 


311-1137-00 


A1R639 


311-2099-00 


A1R639 




A1 R642 


315-0432-00 


A1R643 


315-0750-00 


A1 R644 


315-0472-00 


A1 R645 


321-0625-00 


A1R646 


321-0252-00 


A1R650 


315-0203-00 


A1R651 


315-0911-00 


A1R652 


315-0274-00 


A1 R653 


315-0102-00 


A1 R654 


315-0911-00 


A1R655 


315-0102-00 


A1R659 


321-0147-00 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


91637 


MFF1816G11001F 


01121 


CB4705 


01121 


CB6805 


01121 


CB6215 


01121 


CB3935 


01121 


CB7505 


01121 


CB7505 


01121 


CB5615 


01121 


CB4705 


01121 


CB6805 


01121 


CB6215 


01121 


CB3935 


01121 


CB7505 


01121 


CB4715 


91637 


MFF1816C57000B 


91637 


MFF1816C18000B 


01121 


CB1525 


01121 


CB1625 


91637 


CMF55116G11301F 


91637 


MFF1816G84500F 


24546 


NE55E3000B 


91637 


CMF55-116C60R00B 


01121 


CB6215 


01121 


CB2705 


01121 


CB68G5 


01121 


CB68G5 


91637 


MFF1816G143R0F 


91637 


MFF1816G10R20F 


91637 


MFF1816G10R20F 


01121 


CB68G5 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1025 


73138 


72PX-67-0-502M 


01121 


CB2705 


01121 


CB4725 


91637 


MFF1816G22100F 


91637 


MFF1816G44200F 


01121 


CB1005 


73138 


72PX-67-0-502M 


73138 


72PXR500-266A 


01121 


CB4325 


01121 


CB7505 


01121 


CB4725 


91637 


MFF1816G58800F 


91637 


MFF1816G41200F 


01121 


CB2035 


01121 


CB9115 


01121 


CB2745 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB9115 


01121 


CB1025 


91637 


MFF1816G332R0F 



RES.,FXD,FiLM:11K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:47 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:68 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:620 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:39K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:75 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RE5.,FXD,CMP5N:75 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:560 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:47 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:68 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:620 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:39K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:75 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:470 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:5.7KOHM,0.1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1.8KOHM,0.1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1 .5K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1 .6K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:11.3KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:8.45KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:300OHM,0.1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:60OHM,0.1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:620 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:27 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:6.8OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:6.8 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:143 OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:10.2 OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:10.2OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:6.8 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:5KOHM,20%,0.50W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:27 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:2.21KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:4.42KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:5KOHM,20%,0.50W 
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:TRMR,500OHM,10%,0.5W 
(IN SERIES W/W639) 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.3K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:75 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:5.88KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:4.12KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:20K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:91 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:270K OHM.5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:91 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:332 OHM,1%,0.125W 



REV OCT 1984 



8-15 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff Dscont 


A1R669 


321-0406-00 




A1R670 


315-0102-00 




A1R671 


315-0103-00 




A1R672 


315-0102-00 




A1R678 


315-0102-00 




A1R700 


315-0221-00 




A1R701 


321-0223-00 




A1R702 


321-0252-00 




A1R707 


315-0122-00 




A1R708 


315-0242-00 




A1R709 


315-0472-00 




A1R710 


315-0396-00 




A1R713 


315-0822-00 




A1R723 


321-0245-00 




A1R724 


321-0680-00 




A1R731 


315-0153-00 




A1R732 


315-0682-00 




A1R733 


315-0182-00 




A1R734 


315-0221-00 




A1R735 


315-0273-00 




A1R736 


321-0209-00 




A1R737 


321-0255-00 




A1R738 


321-0273-00 




A1R741 


315-0272-00 




A1R742 


315-0151-00 




A1R743 


315-0750-00 


B010100 B019999 


A1R743 


315-0102-00 


B020000 


A1R744 


315-0750-00 




A1R745 


315-0242-00 




A1R746 


301-0470-00 


B010100 B026617 


A1R750 


315-0271-00 




A1R751 


315-0622-00 




A1R752 


321-0269-00 




A1R753 


321-0265-00 




A1R754 


315-0104-00 




A1R800 


321-0147-00 




A1R801 


311-2099-00 




A1R801 






A1R802 


311-1137-00 




A1R804 


315-0151-00 




A1R805 


311-2155-00 


B010100 B019999 


A1R805 


311-1242-00 


B020000 


A1R806 


315-0204-00 




A1R809 


315-0151-00 




A1R811 


301-0331-00 


B010100 B026617 


A1R817 


315-0221-00 




A1R820 


321-0327-00 




A1R821 


321-0298-00 




A1 R822 


315-0271-00 




A1R823 


321-0193-00 




A1R850 


311-1137-00 




A1R852 


315-0240-00 




A1R853 


315-0240-00 




A1R855 


315-0103-00 





Name & Description 



Code 


Mfr Part Number 


91637 


MFF1816G16502F 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB2215 


91637 


MFF1816G20500F 


91637 


MFF1816G41200F 


01121 


CB1225 


01121 


CB2425 


01121 


CB4725 


01121 


CB3965 


01121 


CB8225 


91637 


MFF1816G34800F 


91637 


MFF1816D35301D 


01121 


CB1535 


01121 


CB6825 


01121 


CB1825 


01121 


CB2215 


01121 


CB2735 


91637 


MFF1816G14700F 


91637 


MFF1816G44200F 


91637 


MFF1816G68100F 


01121 


CB2725 


01121 


CB1515 


01121 


CB7505 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB7505 


01121 


CB2425 


01121 


EB4705 


01121 


CB2715 


01121 


CB6225 


91637 


MFF1816G61900F 


91637 


MFF1816G56200F 


01121 


CB1045 


91637 


MFF1816G332R0F 


73138 


72PXR500-266A 


73138 


72PX-67-0-502M 


01121 


CB1515 


73138 


72PXR200K 


73138 


72-33-0 


01121 


CB2045 


01121 


CB1515 


01121 


EB3315 


01121 


CB2215 


91637 


MFF1816G24901F 


91637 


MFF1816G12401F 


01121 


CB2715 


01121 


ORD BY DESCR 


73138 


72PX-67-0-502M 


01121 


CB2405 


01121 


CB2405 


01121 


CB1035 



RES.,FXD,FILM:165K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:220 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:2.05KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:4.12KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1 .2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.4KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:39M OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:8.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:3.48KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:35.3KOHM,0.5%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:15K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:6.8K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1 .8K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:220 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:27K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1.47KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:4.42KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:6.81KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:150 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:75 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:75 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.4K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:47 OHM,5%,0.5W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:270 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:6.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:6.19KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:5.62KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:332 OHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,VAR,NONWIR:TRMR,500OHM,10%,0.5W 

(IN SERIES W/W800) 

RES.,VAR,NONWIR:5KOHM,20%,0.50W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:150OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,VAR,NONWIR:RMR,200KOHM,10%,0.5W 

RES.,VAR,NONWIR:200KOHM,10%,0.50W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:200K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:150 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:330 OHM,5%,0.5W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:220OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:24.9KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:12.4KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:270 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:5KOHM,20%,0.50W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:24 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:24 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 



8-16 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



A1R856 
A1R858 
A1R860 
A1R901 
A1R902 
A1R903 

A1 R904 
A1 R907 
A1R910 
A1R912 
A1R924 
A1R936 

A1R937 
A1R939 
A1R940 
A1R941 
A1R941 
A1 R942 

A1R943 
A1R944 
A1 R945 
A1R950 
A1R951 
A1R952 

A1R956 
A1R957 
A1R972 
A1R973 
A1R981 
A1R995 



321-0210-00 
321-0239-00 
311-1137-00 
315-0112-00 
315-0112-00 
315-0472-00 

315-0124-00 
315-0471-00 
315-0396-00 
315-0822-00 
321-0325-00 
321-0217-00 

321-0268-00 
315-0332-00 
315-0101-00 
315-0102-00 
315-0561-00 
321-0256-00 

315-0121-00 
317-0302-00 
315-0621-00 
301-0470-00 
308-0555-00 
315-0750-00 

315-0302-00 
321-0291-00 
315-0510-00 
315-0513-00 
315-0101-00 
315-0512-00 



B020000 
B020000 
B020000 



B020000 

B010100 
B020000 
B020000 



B019999 



B010100 B026617 



RES.,FXD,FILM:1.5KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:3.01KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,VAR,NONWIR:5K OHM,20%,0.50W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1.1KOHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1.1KOHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7KOHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:120KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:470 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:39M OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:8.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:23.7KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1.78KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:6.04KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:3.3K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:560 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,RLM:4.53K OHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:120 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:3K OHM,5%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:620 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:47 OHM,5%,0.5W 
RES.,FXD,WW:5 OHM,5%,3W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:75 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:3K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:10.5KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:51 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:51 K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:5.1 K OHM,5%,0.25W 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


91637 


MFF1816G15000F 


91637 


MFF1816G30100F 


73138 


72PX-67-0-502M 


01121 


CB1125 


01121 


CB1125 


01121 


CB4725 


01121 


CB1245 


01121 


CB4715 


01121 


CB3965 


01121 


CB8225 


91637 


MFF1816G23701F 


91637 


MFF1816G17800F 


91637 


MFF1816G60400F 


01121 


CB3325 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB5615 


91637 


MFF1816G45300F 


01121 


CB1215 


01121 


BB3025 


01121 


CB6215 


01121 


EB4705 


00213 


1200S-5R000J 


01121 


CB7505 


01121 


CB3025 


91637 


MFF1816G10501F 


01121 


CB5105 


01121 


CB5135 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB5125 



A1S615 

A1U100 
A1U100 
A1U110 

A1U120 
A1U130 
A1U140 
A1U150 
A1U160 
A1U165 

A1U170 
A1U200 
A1U200 
a i 1 \ir\r\ 

A1U350 
A1U400 

A1U450 
A1U475 

A -I I MQK 

A1U500 
A1U500 
A1U550 



260-1421-00 SWITCH,PUSH:1 STA,MOMENTARY,NON-SHORT 59821 OBD 

155-0235-00 B010100 B013299 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VERT!CAL PREAMP.TESTED 

153-0235-00 B013300 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VERTICAL PREAMPS 

156-1245-00 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:7 XSTR,HV/HIGH CUR 

156-1245-00 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:7 XSTR,HV/HIGH CUR 

156-1245-00 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:7 XSTR,HV/HIGH CUR 

156-0651-02 MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8 BIT PRL-OUT SER SHF RGTR 

156-0651-02 MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8 BIT PRL-OUT SER SHF RGTR 

156-1200-01 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:OPERATIONAL AMPL,QUAD 

156-0495-02 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:QUAD OPNL AMPL.SELECTED 

156-0513-02 MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8-CHANNEL MUX.SEL 

155-0235-00 B010100 B013299 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VERTICAL PREAMP.TESTED 

153-0235-00 B013300 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VERTICAL PREAMPS 

155-0238-00 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:TRIGGER PREAMP 

156-0853-02 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:DUAL OPNL AMPL.CHK 

155-0236-00 MICROCIRCUIT.LI: VERTICAL CHANNEL SWITCH 

156-0158-07 MICROCIRCUIT.LhDUAL OPNL AMPL,SCREENED 

156-0048-00 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:FIVE NPN TRANSISTOR ARRAY 

-!55_0048-00 M|CROC!RCUIT,LI:FIVE NPN TRANSISTOR ARRAY 

155-0239-00 B010100 B021399 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:TRIGGER TESTED 

155-0239-01 B021400 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:TRIGGER,W/THRU HOLE 

156-0048-00 MICROCIRCUIT,LI:FIVE NPN TRANSISTOR ARRAY 



80009 


155-0235-00 


80009 


153-0235-00 


04713 


MC1413PDS 


04713 


MC1413PDS 


04713 


MC1413PDS 


01295 


SN74LS164(NP3 OR 


01295 


SN74LS164(NP3 0R 


01295 


TL074CN/PEP3 


01295 


LM324J4 


80009 


156-0513-02 


80009 


155-0235-00 


80009 


153-0235-00 


80009 


155-0238-00 


04713 


LM358J 


80009 


155-0236-00 


01295 


MC1458JG4 


02735 


CA3046 


02735 


CA3046 


80009 


155-0239-00 


80009 


155-0239-01 


02735 


CA3046 



REV OCT 1984 



8-17 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 




Mfr 




Component No, 


Part No. 


Eff 


Dscont 


Name & Description 


Code 


Mfr Part Number 


A1 U600 


155-0237-00 






MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VERTICALOUTPUT,TESTED 


80009 


155-0237-00 


A1U650 


155-0244-00 






MICROCIRCUIT,DI:SYSTEM LOGIC INTERFACE 






A1U700 


155-0240-00 






MICROCIRCUIT,l_l:VERTICAL OUTPUT/TESTED 


80009 


155-0240-00 


A1U735 


156-0048-00 






MICROCIRCUIT,LI:FIVE NPN TRANSISTOR ARRAY 


02735 


CA3046 


A1U800 


155-0241-01 


B010100 


B024739 


MICROCIRCUIT,Li:HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIER 


80009 


155-0241-01 


A1U800 


155-0241-02 


B024740 




MICROCIRCUIT,DI:HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIER 


80009 


155-0241-02 


A1U850 


156-0515-02 






MICROCIRCUIT,DI:TRIPLE 3-CHAN MUX.SEL 


80009 


156-0515-02 


A1U860 


156-0515-02 






MICROCIRCUIT,DI:TRIPLE 3-CHAN MUX.SEL 


80009 


156-0515-02 


A1U900 


155-0240-00 






MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VERTICALOUTPUT,TESTED 


80009 


155-0240-00 


A1U910 


156-1191-01 






MICROCIRCUIT,LI:DUAL BI-FET OP-AMP,8 DIP 


01295 


TL072ACP3 


A1U950 


155-0242-00 


B010100 


B011274 


MICROCIRCUIT,LI:Z AXIS AUTOFOCUSJESTED 


80009 


155-0242-00 


A1U950 


155-0242-01 


B011275 




MICROCIRCUIT,LI:Z AXIS AUTOFOCUS.TESTED 


80009 


155-0242-01 


A1U975 


156-0382-02 






MICROCIRCUIT.DkQUAD 2-INP NAND GATE 


01295 


SN74LS00 


A1U980 


156-0479-02 






MICROCIRCUIT,DI:QUAD 2-INP OR GATE 


01295 


SN74LS32NP3 


A1VR125 


152-0166-00 






SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,6.2V,5% 


04713 


SZ11738RL 


A1VR225 


152-0166-00 






SEMICONDDEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,6.2V,5% 


04713 


SZ11738RL 


A1VR550 


152-0195-00 






SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,5.1V,5% 


04713 


SZ11755 


A1W101 


131-0566-00 






BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


A1W102 


131-0566-00 






BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


A1W103 


131-0566-00 






BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


A1W104 


131-0566-00 






BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


A1W105 


131-0566-00 






BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


A1W106 


195-6500-00 


B010100 


B019999 


LEAD,ELECTRICAL:STRD,22AWG,300V,WHITE,2.0 


80009 


195-6500-00 


A1W106 


195-6500-01 


B020000 




LEAD,ELECTRICAL:STRD,22AWG,300V,WHITE,2.0 






A1W107 


195-6500-00 


B010100 


B019999 


LEAD,ELECTRICAL:STRD,22AWG,300V,WHITE,2.0 


80009 


195-6500-00 


A1W107 


195-6500-01 


B020000 




LEAD,ELECTRICAL:STRD,22AWG,300V,WHITE,2.0 






A1W108 


195-6500-00 


B010100 


B019999 


LEAD,ELECTRICAL:STRD,22AWG,300V,WHITE,2.0 


80009 


195-6500-00 


A1W108 


195-6500-01 


B020000 




LEAD,ELECTRICAL:STRD,22AWG,300V,WHITE,2.0 






A1W109 


131-0566-00 






BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


A1W121 


175-4594-00 






CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:7,22 AWG,7.0 L.RIBBON 


80009 


175-4594-00 


A1W122 


175-4598-00 






CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:8,26 AWG.7.0 L.RIBBON 


80009 


175-4598-00 


A1W130 


131-0566-00 






BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


A1W171 


131-0566-00 






BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


A1W172 


131-0566-00 






BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


A1W194 


131-0566-00 


B010100 


B019999 


BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


A1W666 


131-0566-00 






BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


A1W677 


131-0566-00 






BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 



8-18 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 





Tektronix Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. Eff Dscont 


A2 




A2 




A2C1016 


285-1222-00 


A2C1018 


285-1222-00 


A2C1208 


281-0775-00 


A2C1220 


290-0939-00 


A2C1222 


281-0783-00 B013900 


A2C1226 


281-0791-00 


A2C1240 


290-0939-00 


A2C1245 


281-0783-00 


A2C1246 


281-0791-00 


A2C1260 


290-0942-00 


A2C1261 


281-0773-00 


A2C1270 


281-0791-00 


A2C1272 


281-0826-00 


A2C1274 


290-0778-00 


A2C1280 


290-0942-00 


A2C1290 


281-0775-00 


A2C1291 


290-0778-00 


A2C1300 


290-0942-00 


A2C1330 


290-0942-00 


A2C1331 


281-0775-00 


A2C1350 


290-0942-00 


A2C1357 


281-0773-00 


A2C1374 


281-0791-00 


A2C1400 


290-0943-00 


A2C1402 


290-0943-00 


A2CR1011 


152-0750-00 


A2CR1220 


152-0066-00 


A2CR1221 


152-0066-00 


A2CR1241 


152-0066-00 


A2CR1242 


152-0066-00 


A2CR1243 


152-0066-00 


A2CR1244 


152-0066-00 


A2CR1260 


152-0066-00 


A2CR1261 


152-0066-00 


A2CR1262 


152-0141-02 


A2CR1263 


152-0141-02 


A2CR1264 


152-0141-02 


A2CR1281 


152-0141-02 


A2CR1281 


152-0141-02 B013900 


A2CR1281 




A2CR1282 


152-0141-02 


A2CR1283 


152-0066-00 


A2CR1300 


152-0141-02 


A2CR1301 


152-0141-02 


A2CR1302 


152-0141-02 


A2CR1303 


152-0066-00 


A2CR1330 


152-0066-00 


A2CR1331 


152-0066-00 


A2CR1332 


152-0066-00 


A2CR1334 


152-0066-00 



Name & Description 



Mfr 
Code 



MtY Part Number 



CKT BOARD ASSY:REGULATOR 
(AVAILABLE AT 672-1 037-XX LEVEL ONLY) 

CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:0.068UF,20%,250V 
CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:0.068UF,20%,250V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT: 1 0UF, + 1 00-1 0%,1 00V 
CAP.,FXD,CER Di:0.1UF,20%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:270PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:10UF, + 100-10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:270PF,10%,100V 

CAP.,FXD.ELCTLT: 1 00UF, + 1 00-1 0%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:270PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:2200PF,5%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:1UF,+50-10%,50V 
CAP.,FXD.ELCTLT:1 00UF, + 1 00-1 0%,25V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:1UF, + 50-10%,50V 
CAP.,FXD.ELCTLT:100UF, + 100-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD.ELCTLT:1 00UF, + 1 00-1 0%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD.ELCTLT:100UF, + 100-10%,25V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:270PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 

SEMICOND DEVICE:RECT BRIDGE,600V,3A 

SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 

SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
(IN COMBO W/R1287) 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DVC Di:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 



55112 


158/.068/M/250/H 


55112 


158/.068/M/250/H 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


56289 


672D106H100CG2C 


96733 


ADVISE 


04222 


MA101A271KAA 


56289 


672D106H100CG2C 


96733 


ADVISE 


04222 


MA101A271KAA 


56289 


672D107H025CG2C 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA101A271KAA 


12969 


CGB222KEX 


54473 


ECE-A50N1 


56289 


672D107H025CG2C 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


54473 


ECE-A50N1 


56289 


672D107H025CG2C 


56289 


672D107H025CG2C 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


56289 


672D107H025CG2C 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA101A271KAA 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


80009 


152-0750-00 


05828 


GP10G-020 


05828 


GP10G-020 


05828 


GP10G-020 


05828 


GP10G-020 


05828 


GP10G-020 


05828 


GP10G-020 


05828 


GP10G-020 


05828 


GP10G-020 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


05828 


GP10G-020 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


05828 


GP10G-020 


05828 


GP10G-020 


05828 


GP10G-020 


05828 


GP10G-020 


05828 


GP10G-020 



REV OCT 1984 



8-19 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff 


Dscont 


A2CR1351 


152-0066-00 






A2CR1376 


152-0141-02 






A2E1001 


119-0181-00 






A2E1002 


119-0181-00 






A2F1330 


1 59-01 85-00 






A2J203 


131-2925-00 


B020000 




A2L1011 


108-0473-00 






A2L1012 


108-0473-00 






A2L1402 


108-0443-00 






A2P204 


131-1048-00 






A2P205 


131-1048-00 






A2P206 


131-1048-00 






A2P207 


131-1048-00 






A2Q1220 


151-0497-00 






A2Q1221 


151-0347-00 






A2Q1222 


151-0347-00 






A2Q1223 


151-0347-00 






A2Q1240 


151-0464-00 






A2Q1241 


151-0347-00 






A2Q1243 


151-0347-00 






A2Q1245 


151-0347-00 






A2Q1280 


151-0476-00 






A2Q1281 


151-0347-00 






A2Q1300 


151-0482-00 






A2Q1301 


151-0342-00 






A2Q1351 


151-0429-00 






A2Q1354 


151-0342-00 






A2Q1370 


151-0341-00 






A2Q1376 


151-0341-00 






A2R1010 


301-0150-00 


B013900 




A2R1010 









A2R1011 


315-0560-00 






A2R1012 


315-0560-00 






A2R1013 


315-0154-00 


B010100 


B013899 


A2R1013 


315-0753-00 


B013900 




A2R1014 


315-0753-00 


B010100 


B013899 


A2R1014 


315-0363-00 


B013900 




A2R1015 


315-0753-00 


B010100 


B013899 


A2R1015 


315-0363-00 


B013900 




A2R1016 


301-0680-00 






A2R1017 


31 5-0474-00 






A2R1018 


301-0300-00 






A2R1019 


301-0150-00 


B013900 




A2R1019 








A2R1204 


315-0103-00 






A2R1208 


315-0471-00 


B010100 


B013899 


A2R1208 


315-0201-00 


B013900 




A2R1212 


315-0393-00 







Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Nu 


05828 


GP10G-020 


01295 


1N4152R 


74276 


CG230L 


74276 


CG230L 


000HX 


TSC.75 


27264 


10-10-1069 


80009 


108-0473-00 


80009 


108-0473-00 


80009 


108-0443-00 


00779 


61134-1 


00779 


61134-1 


00779 


61134-1 


00779 


61134-1 


04713 


SJE1985 


56289 


2N5551 


56289 


2N5551 


56289 


2N5551 


04713 


SJE412 


56289 


2N5551 


56289 


2N5551 


56289 


2N5551 


02735 


68430 


56289 


2N5551 


80009 


151-0482-00 


07263 


S035928 


04713 


SJE957 


07263 


S035928 


04713 


SPS6919 


04713 


SPS6919 


01121 


EB1505 


01121 


CB5605 


01121 


CB5605 


01121 


CB1545 


01121 


CB7535 


01121 


CB7535 


01121 


CB3635 


01121 


CB7535 


01121 


CB3635 


01121 


EB6805 


01121 


CB4745 


01121 


EB3005 



SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

ARSR,ELEC SURGE:230V,GAS FILLED 
ARSR.ELEC SURGE:230V,GAS FILLED 



FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5.2 X 20MM,0.75A,125V 

CONN,RCPT,ELEC:CKT BD,1X6,0.2 SPACING 

COIL,RF:150UH 
COIL,RF:150UH 

COIL,RF:25UH 

TERM.QIK DISC:CKT BD MT,0.11 X 0.02 
TERM.QIK DISC:CKT BD MT.0.11 X 0.02 
TERM.QIK DISC:CKT BD MT.0.11 X 0.02 
TERM.QIK DISC:CKT BD MT.0.11 X 0.02 



TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 



TRANSISTOR: 
TRANSISTOR: 
TRANSISTOR: 
TRANSISTOR: 
TRANSISTOR: 
TRANSISTOR: 



SILICON,NPN 
SILICON,NPN 
SILICON.NPN 
SILICON.NPN 
SILICON.NPN 
SILICON,PNP 



TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP 

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP 

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP 

TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI,TO-106 

TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI,TO-106 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:15 OHM,5%,0.5W 

(IN COMBO W/RT1010) 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:56 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:56 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:150K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:75K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:75KOHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:36K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:75K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:36K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:68 OHM,5%,0.50W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:470K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:30 OHM,5%,0.5W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:15 OHM,5%,0.5W 
(IN COMBO W/RT1016) 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:470 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:200 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:39K OHM,5%,0.25W 



01121 



EB1505 



01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB4715 


01121 


CB2015 


01121 


CB3935 



8-20 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 





Tektronix Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. Eff 


Dscont 


A2R1220 


304-0822-00 


RES., 


A2R1221 


315-0100-00 


RES., 


A2R1222 


315-0102-00 


RES., 


A2R1223 


315-0823-00 


RES., 


A2R1226 


315-0472-00 


RES., 


A2R1227 


321-0634-00 


RES., 


A2R1228 


321-0293-03 


RES., 


A2R1229 


315-0683-00 


RES., 


A2R1240 


303-0202-00 


RES., 


A2R1241 


307-0105-00 


RES., 


A2R1242 


315-0152-00 


RES., 


A2R1243 


315-0393-00 


RES., 


A2R1244 


315-0104-00 


RES., 


A2R1246 


315-0472-00 


RES., 


A2R1247 


321-0368-00 


RES., 


A2R1248 


321-0319-00 


RES., 


A2R1249 


315-0473-00 


RES., 


A2R1261 


321-0289-00 


RES., 


A2R1262 


321-0318-00 


RES., 


A2R1264 


315-0473-00 


RES., 


A2R1270 


315-0432-00 


RES., 


A2R1273 


315-0473-00 


RES., 


A2R1274 


315-0753-00 


RES., 


A2R1280 


303-0470-00 


RES., 


A2R1281 


308-0839-00 


RES., 


A2R1282 


315-0102-00 


RES., 


A2R1283 


315-0103-00 


RES., 


A2R1284 


321-0318-00 


RES., 


A2R1285 


321-0318-00 


RES., 


A2R1286 


315-0243-00 


RES., 


A2R1287 


315-0472-00 


RES., 


A2R1287 


315-0472-00 B013900 


RES., 


A2R1287 




(INCC 


A2R1291 


321-0334-00 


RES., 


A2R1292 


311-1138-00 


res.; 


A2R1293 


321-0639-00 


RES., 


A2R1300 


303-0470-00 


RES., 


A2R1301 


308-0839-00 


RES., 


A2R1302 


315-0102-00 


RES., 


A2R1304 


315-0243-00 


RES., 


A2R1305 


321-0289-06 


RES., 


A2R1306 


321-0318-03 


RES., 


A2R1307 


315-0472-00 


RES., 


A2R1309 


315-0222-00 


RES., 


A2R1331 


321-0335-00 


RES., 


A2R1332 


321-0318-00 


RES., 


A2R1333 


315-0751-00 


RES., 


A2R1334 


315-0103-00 


RES., 


A2R1351 


315-0202-00 


RES., 


A2R1352 


301-0150-00 


RES., 


A2R1353 


301-0150-00 


RES., 


A2R1354 


315-0222-00 


RES., 


A2R1355 


315-0682-00 


RES., 


A2R1356 


315-0512-00 B010185 


RES., 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


01121 


GB8221 


01121 


CB1005 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB8235 


01121 


CB4725 


91637 


CMF55-116D84651C 


24546 


NC55C1102C 


01121 


CB6835 


01121 


GB2025 


01121 


CB39G5 


01121 


CB1525 


01121 


CB3935 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB4725 


91637 


MFF1816G66501F 


91637 


MFF1816G20501F 


01121 


CB4735 


91637 


MFF1816G10001F 


91637 


MFF1816G20001F 


01121 


CB4735 


01121 


CB4325 


01121 


CB4735 


01121 


CB7535 


01121 


GB4705 


75042 


BW-20-R/1000J 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1035 


91637 


MFF1816G20001F 


91637 


MFF1816G20001F 


01121 


CB2435 


01121 


CB4725 


01121 


CB4725 


91637 


MFF1816G29401F 


73138 


72XW-44-0-102M 


91637 


MFF1816G96000F 


01121 


GB4705 


75042 


BW-20-R/1000J 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB2435 


91637 


MFF1816C10001C 


24546 


NC55C2002C 


01121 


CB4725 


01121 


CB2225 


91637 


CMF55116G30101F 


91637 


MFF1816G20001F 


01121 


CB7515 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB2025 


01121 


EB1505 


01121 


EB1505 


01121 


CB2225 


01121 


CB6825 


01121 


CB5125 



FXD,CMPSN:8.2K OHM,10%,1W 
FXD,CMPSN:10 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:82K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,FILM:84.65K OHM,0.25%,0.125W 

FXD,FILM:11K OHM,0.25%,0.125W 
FXD,CMPSN:58K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,1W 
FXD,CMPSN:3.9 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:1.5K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:39K OHM,5%,0.25W 

FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,FILM:66.5K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,FILM:20.5K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,CMPSN:47K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,FILM:10K OHM,1%,0.125W 

FXD,FILM:20K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,CMPSN:47K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:4.3K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:47K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:75K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:47 OHM,5%,1W 

FXD,WW:0.1 OHM,5%,1.0W 
FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,FILM:20K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,FILM:20K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,CMPSN:24K OHM,5%,0.25W 

FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
COMBO W/CR1 281) 
FXD,FILM:29.4K OHM,1%,0.125W 
VAR,NONWIR:1K OHM,20%,0.50W 
FXD,FILM:9.6K OHM,1%,0.125W 

FXD,CMPSN:47 OHM,5%,1W 
FXD,WW:0.1 OHM,5%,1.0W 
FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:24K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,FILM:10K OHM,0.25%,0.125W 
FXD,FILM:20K OHM,0.25%,0.125W 

FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:2.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,FILM:30.1K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,FILM:20K OHM,1%,0.125W 
FXD,CMPSN:750 OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 

FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:15 OHM,5%,0.5W 
FXD,CMPSN:15 OHM,5%,0.5W 
FXD,CMPSN:2.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:6.8K OHM,5%,0.25W 
FXD,CMPSN:5.1K OHM,5%,0.25W 



REV OCT 1984 



8-21 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


91637 


MFF1816G16501F 


91637 


MFF1816G20501F 


01121 


CB6825 


91637 


MFF1816G59001F 


91637 


MFF1816G12701F 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB2035 


01121 


CB2025 


01121 


CB1115 


01121 


CB1115 


15454 


75DJ7R5R0220SS 


15454 


SG-6 


31918 


NE15/F2U103EE 


54937 


ORD BY DESCR 


22526 


48283-036 


27014 


LM317T 


01295 


LM324J4 


01295 


MC1458JG4 


04713 


MC1403UDS 


01295 


LM324J4 


04713 


MC7912C 


01295 


LM324J4 


04713 


SZG35009K1 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 



A2R1357 
A2R1358 
A2R1359 
A2R1370 
A2R1372 
A2R1374 

A2R1376 
A2R1378 
A2R1400 
A2R1402 

A2RT1010 

'A2RT1016 

A2S350 

A2T1229 
A2TP201 

A2U1260 
A2U1270 
A2U1281 
A2U1290 
A2U1300 

A2U1330 
A2U1371 

A2VR1293 

A2W1226 

A2W1287 



321-0310-00 
321-0319-00 
315-0682-00 
321-0363-00 
321-0299-00 
315-0103-00 

315-0203-00 
315-0202-00 
315-0111-00 
315-0111-00 

307-0350-00 

307-0746-00 

260-1849-00 

120-1401-00 
131-0608-00 



156-1161-00 
156-0495-02 
156-0158-07 
156-1173-00 
156-0495-02 

156-0872-00 
156-0495-02 

152-0055-00 

131-0566-00 

131-0566-00 



RES.,FXD,FILM:16.5KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:20.5KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:6.8K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:59K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:12.7KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:20K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:110 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:110 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,THERMAL:7.5 OHM,10%,3.9%/DEG C 

RES.,THERMAL:5 OHM,10%,7A/DEG C 

SWITCH,PUSH:DPDT,4A,250VAC 

XFMRTRIG: 

TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 

MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VOLTAGE REGULATOR 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:QUAD OPNL AMPL.SELECTED 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:DUAL OPNL AMPL,SCREENED 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VOLTAGE REFERENCE 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:QUAD OPNL AMPL,SELECTED 

MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VOLTAGE REGULATOR 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:QUAD OPNL AMPL,SELECTED 

SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,1 1 V,5% 

BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 

BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 



8-22 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff Dscont 


A3 






A3 






A3C1020 


285-1192-00 




A3C1021 


290-0971-00 




A3C1022 


290-0971-00 




A3C1023 


281-0773-00 




A3C1025 


290-0942-00 




A3C1032 


281-0812-00 




A3C1033 


281-0772-00 




A3C1034 


290-0524-00 


B010100 B013099 


A3C1034 


290-0524-01 


B013100 


A3C1035 


281-0772-00 




A3C1040 


281-0773-00 




A3C1048 


281-0826-00 




A3C1050 


285-1254-00 




A3C1051 


285-1192-00 




A3C1052 


285-1196-00 




A3C1062 


281-0850-00 




A3C1065 


285-1190-00 




A3C1066 


290-0782-00 


B010100 B013099 


A3C1066 


290-0782-01 


B013100 


A3C1067 


281-0850-00 




A3C1071 


281-0772-00 




A3C1072 


290-0806-00 




A3C1075 


283-0421-00 




A3C1101 


290-0942-00 




A3C1102 


290-0942-00 




A3C1110 


290-0800-00 




A3C1 1 1 1 


290-0800-00 




A3C1112 


290-0782-00 


B010100 B013099 


A3C1112 


290-0782-01 


B013100 


A3C1113 


290-0798-00 




A3C1114 


290-0800-00 




A3C1115 


290-0800-00 




A3C1116 


290-0798-00 




A3C1120 


290-0939-00 




A3C1130 


290-0939-00 




A3C1132 


290-0880-00 




A3CR1022 


152-0333-00 




A3CR1023 


152-0141-02 




A3CR1028 


152-0141-02 




A3CR1030 


152-0141-02 




A3CR1034 


152-0141-02 




A.^rRinsR 


159-ni 41.09 




A3CR1040 


152-0075-00 




A3CR1050 


152-0661-00 




A3CR1060 


152-0040-00 




A3CR1062 


152-0333-00 




A3r.Rir>fi3 


1 59.na33.nn 




A3CR1064 


152-0333-00 




A3CR1065 


152-0333-00 




A3CR1070 


152-0040-00 





Name & Description 



Mfr 
Code 



Mfr Part Number 



CKT BOARD ASSY:INVERTER 
(AVAILABLE AT 672-1 037-XX LEVEL ONLY) 

CAP.,FXD,PPR DI:0.0022UF,20%,250VAC 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:290UF, + 50-10%,200V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:290UF, + 50-10%,200V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD.ELCTLT: 1 00UF, + 1 00-1 0%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:1000PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.0047UF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:4.7UF,20%,1 0V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:4.7UF,20%,1 0V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.0047UF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:2200PF,5%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:0.22UF,10%,400WVDC 
CAP.,FXD,PPR DI:0.0022UF,20%,250VAC 
CAP.,FXD,PAPER:0.01 UF,20%,250V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:820PF,5%,50VDC 
CAP.,FXD,MTLZD:0.056UF,5%,250V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:4.7UF, + 75-10%,35V 
TAPED AND REELE: USE -00 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:820PF,5%,50VDC 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.0047UF,10%,100V 

CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:3.3UF, + 75-10%,350VDC 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD.ELCTLT:100UF, + 100-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD.ELCTLT:100UF, + 100-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:250UF, + 1 00-1 0%,20V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:250UF, + 1 00-1 0%,20V 

CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:4.7UF, + 75-10%,35V 
TAPED AND REELE: USE -00 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:180UF, + 100-10%,40V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:250UF, + 100-10%,20V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:250UF, + 100-10%,20V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:180UF, + 100-10%,40V 

CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:10UF, + 100-10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:10UF, + 100-10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:10UF, + 50-10%,160V 

SEMICOND DVC DI:SW,SI,55V,200MA,D0-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC D!:SW SI 30V 150MA 30V DO-35 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SW,GE,22V,40MA 
SEMICOND DEVICE: RECT,SI,600V,3A,FAST 

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,600V,1A 
SEMICOND DVC DI:SW,SI,55V,200MA,D0-35 
SEMICOND DVC D!:SW SI 55V 200MA DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC DI:SW,SI,55V,200MA,D0-35 
SEMICOND DVC DI:SW,SI,55V,200MA,D0-35 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,600V,1A 



000FG 


PME271Y422 


90201 


TCG291T200N 


90201 


TCG291T200N 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


56289 


672D107H025CG2C 


04222 


MA101C102KAA 


04222 


GC701C472K 


90201 


TDC475M010EL 


T0875 


202L1002-475MN 


04222 


GC701C472K 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


12969 


CGB222KEX 


84411 


X363UW-224104 


000FG 


PME271Y422 


80009 


285-1196-00 


96733 


R3149 


55112 


160.056 J 250C 


55680 


ULA1V4R7TEA 


96733 


R3149 


04222 


GC701C472K 


55680 


UHU2V3RTEA 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


56289 


672D107H025CG2C 


56289 


672D107H025CG2C 


56289 


672D257H0200M5C 


56289 


672D257H0200M5C 


55680 


ULA1V4R7TEA 


56289 


672D187H040DM5C 


56289 


672D257H0200M5C 


56289 


672D257H0200M5C 


56289 


672D187H040DM5C 


56289 


672D106H100CG2C 


56289 


672D106H100CG2C 


55680 


UHU2C100TEA 


03508 


DJ2011 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


n-j2C" c 


i Mil •< COD 
i IMT utn 


14433 


G866 


04713 


MR856 


15238 


LG109 


03508 


DJ2011 


nocno 


LiOCU 1 1 


03508 


DJ2011 


03508 


DJ2011 


15238 


LG109 



REV OCT 1984 



8-23 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff Dscont 


A3CR1072 


1 52-0066-00 




A3CR1101 


152-0400-00 




A3CR1102 


152-0400-00 




A3CR1103 


152-0400-00 




A3CR1104 


152-0400-00 




A3CR1105 


152-0400-00 




A3CR1106 


152-0400-00 




A3CR1110 


152-0794-00 




A3CR1113 


152-0633-00 




A3CR1114 


152-0633-00 




A3CR1115 


152-0633-00 




A3CR1116 


152-0633-00 




'A3CR1121 


152-0400-00 




A3CR1122 


152-0400-00 




A3CR1123 


152-0400-00 




A3CR1124 


152-0400-00 




A3CR1131 


152-0400-00 




A3CR1132 


152-0400-00 




A3F1101 


159-0059-00 




A3F1102 


159-0059-00 




A3J303 


131-2926-00 


B020000 


A3L1110 


108-0554-00 




A3L1113 


108-1144-00 




A3L1114 


108-1144-00 




A3L1115 


108-1144-00 




A3L1116 


108-1144-00 




A3LR1060 


108-0329-00 




A3Q1021 


151-0301-00 




A3Q1022 


151-0192-00 




A3Q1029 


151-0254-00 




A3Q1030 


151-0301-00 




A3Q1040 


151-0302-00 




A3Q1050 


151-1152-00 




A3Q1060 


151-1152-00 




A3Q1062 


151-0302-00 




A3Q1070 


151-1152-00 




A3R1017 


315-0103-00 


B010100 B022174 


A3R1018 


315-0394-00 




A3R1019 


315-0394-00 




A3R1020 


301-0274-00 




A3R1021 


315-0103-00 


B010100 B022174 


A3R1022 


315-0104-00 




A3R1023 


315-0122-00 




A3R1024 


315-0473-00 




A3R1025 


315-0302-00 




A3R1027 


321-0431-00 




A3R1028 


321-0481-00 




A3R1029 


315-0122-00 


B010100 B013899 


A3R1029 


315-0272-00 


B013900 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


05828 


GP10G-020 


80009 


152-0400-00 


80009 


152-0400-00 


80009 


152-0400-00 


80009 


152-0400-00 


80009 


152-0400-00 


80009 


152-0400-00 


81483 


95-4269 


04713 


1N5821 


04713 


1N5821 


04713 


1N5821 


04713 


1N5821 


80009 


152-0400-00 


80009 


152-0400-00 


80009 


152-0400-00 


80009 


152-0400-00 


80009 


152-0400-00 


80009 


152-0400-00 


000HX 


SPI-5A 


000HX 


SPI-5A 


27264 


10-10-1024 


80009 


108-0554-00 


34479 


RL1284 


34479 


RL1284 


34479 


RL1284 


34479 


RL1284 


80009 


108-0329-00 


27014 


2N2907A 


04713 


SPS8801 


03508 


X38L3118 


27014 


2N2907A 


07263 


S038487 


04713 


STP3002 


04713 


STP3002 


07263 


S038487 


04713 


STP3002 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB3945 


01121 


CB3945 


01121 


EB2745 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1225 


01121 


CB4735 


01121 


CB3025 


91637 


MFF1816G30102F 


91637 


CMF55116G10003F 


01121 


CB1225 


01121 


CB2725 



SEMICOND DVC DI:RECT,SI,400V,1A,D0-41 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400V,1A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400V,1A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400V,1A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400V,1A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400V,1A 

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400V,1A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:RECT,SI,10A,30V 
SEMICOND DEVICE:RECT,SI,30V,3A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:RECT,SI,30V,3A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:RECT,SI,30V,3A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:RECT,SI,30V,3A 

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400V,1A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400V,1A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400V,1A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400V,1A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400V,1A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400V,1A 



FUSE.WIRE LEAD:5A,FAST-BLOW 
FUSE.WIRE LEAD:5A,FAST-BLOW 
CONN,RCPT,ELEC:CKT BD,1X2,02 SPACING 

COIL,RF:5UH 

COIL,RF:FIXED,27UH 
COIL,RF:FIXED,27UH 
COIL,RF:FIXED,27UH 
COIL,RF:FIXED,27UH 
COIL,RF:2.5UH 



TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP 

TRANSISTOR:SELECTED 

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP 

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 

TRANSISTOR :MOSEE,N-CHANNEL,SI 

TRANSISTOR : MOSEE.N-CHANNEL.SI 

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 

TRANSISTOR:MOSEE,N-CHANNEL,SI 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:390KOHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:390KOKM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:270KOHM,5%,0.5W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1 .2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:47K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:3K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:301K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1M OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1 .2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 



8-24 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff 


Dscont 


A3R1030 


315-0102-00 






A3R1031 


315-0334-00 






A3R1032 


321-0335-00 






A3R1033 


315-0104-00 






A3R1034 


315-0102-00 






A3R1035 


315-0103-00 






A3R1036 


315-0103-00 






A3R1037 


315-0562-00 


B010100 


B013899 


A3R1037 


315-0272-00 


B013900 




A3R1040 


315-0103-00 






A3R1041 


315-0471-00 






A3R1042 


315-0102-00 






A3R1044 


315-0273-00 






A3R1045 


321-0289-00 






A3R1046 


321-0422-00 






A3R1050 


308-0843-00 






A3R1052 


315-0470-00 






A3R1060 


315-0470-00 






A3R1061 


315-0202-00 






A3R1062 


315-0682-00 






A3R1063 


315-0202-00 






A3R1064 


315-0202-00 






A3R1065 


315-0124-00 






A3R1066 


315-0202-00 






A3R1067 


315-0682-00 






A3R1068 


315-0202-00 






A3R1069 


315-0104-00 


B010100 


B013899 


A3R1069 


301-0183-00 


B013900 




A3R1069 








A3R1070 


315-0470-00 






A3R1071 


315-0431-00 






A3R1072 


315-0203-00 






A3R1073 


301-0183-00 


B013900 




A3R1073 








A3R1075 


315-0472-00 






A3R1101 


307-0103-00 


B010100 


B019999 


A3R1102 


307-0103-00 


B010100 


B019999 


A3R1129 


315-0474-00 






A3T1020 


120-1449-00 


B010100 


B022174 


A3T1020 


120-1244-00 


B022175 




A3T1050 


120-1417-00 






A3T1060 


120-1437-00 






A3U1029 


156-0885-00 






Acsuiuao 


156-1627-00 






A3U1040 


156-0885-00 






A3U1062 


156-0411-00 






A3U1064 


156-0366-02 






A3U1066 


156-0328-00 






A3VR1020 


152-0166-00 






A3VR1062 


152-0168-00 







Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB3345 


91637 


CMF55116G30101F 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB5625 


01121 


CB2725 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB4715 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB2735 


91637 


MFF1816G10001F 


91637 


MFF1816G24302F 


91637 


RS1AR2000JT/R 


01121 


CB4705 


01121 


CB4705 


01121 


CB2025 


01121 


CB6825 


01121 


CB2025 


01121 


CB2025 


01121 


CB1245 


01121 


CB2025 


01121 


CB6825 


01121 


CB2025 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


EB1835 



RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:330KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:30.1KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:5.6K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.7KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:470 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:27K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:10KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:243K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES..FXD WW:0.2 OHM,5%,1.0W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:47 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:47 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:6.8K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:120K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:6.8KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:18K OHM,5%,0.5W 
(IN COMBO W/R1 073) 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:47 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:430 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:20K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:18K OHM,5%,0.5W 
(IN COMBO W/R1 069) 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.7 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.7 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:470K OHM,5%,0.25W 

XFMR.COM MODE: 

XFMR,RF:COMMON MODE,13MN,0.5A 
XFMR,RF:POWER HIGH FREQUENCY 

XFMR,PWR,STPDN: 



01121 



MICROCIRCUIT,LI:OPTOELECTRONIC ISOLATOR 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:POWER WIDTH MODULATED CONT 01295 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:OPTOELECTRONIC ISOLATOR 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:QUAD-COMP,SGL SUPPLY 



MICROCIRCUIT,DI:DUAL D FLIP-FLOP,CHK 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:DUAL CLOCK DRIVER 

SEMICONDDEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,6.2V,5% 
SEMICONDDEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,12V,5% 



CB4705 



01121 


CB4315 


01121 


CB2035 


01121 


EB1835 


01121 


CB4725 


01121 


CB27G5 


01121 


CB27G5 


01121 


CB4745 


02113 


P104 


20462 


4096 


54937 


500-2311 



02113 C1310 



04713 


S0C123A 


01295 


TL594CN 


04713 


S0C123A 


27014 


LM339N 


80009 


156-0366-02 


27014 


DS0026C 


04713 


SZ11738RL 


04713 


SZG35009K4 



REV OCT 1984 



8-25 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Mo 


del No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff 


Dscont 


A3W1021 


131-0566-00 






A3W1022 


131-0566-00 






A3W1050 


131-0566-00 






A3W1060 


131-0566-00 






A3W1101 


131-0566-00 


B020000 




A3W1 1 02 


131-0566-00 


B020000 





Name & Description 





Mfr 






Code 


Mfr Part Nur 


AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


AWG 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 



BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 
BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 
BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 
BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 
BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 
BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 



8-26 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff Dscont 


A4 


870-7278-00 


B010100 B021699 


A4 


670-7278-01 


B021700 B024699 


A4 


670-7278-02 


B024700 


A4C2830 


281-0775-00 




A4C2835 


281-0775-00 




A4C2851 


281-0775-00 




A4C2855 


281-0775-00 




A4C2860 


281-0775-00 




A4C2885 


281-0775-00 




A4C2901 


281-0775-00 




A4C2911 


281-0773-00 




A4C2913 


281-0775-00 




A4C2926 


281-0775-00 




A4C2940 


281-0775-00 




A4C2950 


281-0775-00 




A4C2960 


281-0775-00 




A4C2970 


281-0775-00 




A4C2980 


281-0775-00 




A4C2990 


281-0775-00 




A4R2805 


315-0472-00 




A4R2830 


315-0101-00 




A4R2841 


315-0103-00 




A4R2842 


315-0103-00 




A4R2843 


315-0472-00 




A4R2844 


315-0472-00 




A4R2850 


315-0472-00 




A4R2901 


315-0103-00 




A4R2902 


315-0102-00 




A4R2903 


321-1296-03 




A4R2905 


321-0816-03 




A4R2910 


321-0685-00 




A4R2911 


321-0685-00 




A4R2912 


315-0102-00 




A4R2913 


321-0198-00 




A4R2914 


321-0306-00 




A4R2915 


315-0202-00 




A4R2919 


321-0385-00 


B021700 . ' '"" 


A4R2920 


315-0334-00 


-"■ 


A4R2921 


321-0724-03 


B010100 B021699 


A4R2921 


321-0303-00 


B021700 


A4R2922 


321-0756-00 




A4R2923 


321-0385-00 




A4R2924 


321-0414-00 




A4R2925 


321-0235-02 




A4R2926 


321-0225-01 




A4R2927 


315-0203-00 




A4R2928 


315-0472-00 




A4R2929 


315-0472-00 




A4R2930 


315-0202-00 


B010100 B021699 


A4R2930 


315-0152-00 


B021700 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Numbei 


80009 


670-7278-00 


80009 


670-7278-01 


80009 


670-7278-02 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


01121 


CB4725 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB4725 


01121 


CB4725 


01121 


CB4725 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1025 


91637 


MFF1816D12001C 


91637 


MFF1816D50000C 


91637 


MFF1816D30001D 


91637 


MFF1816D30001D 


01121 


CB1025 


91637 


MFF1816G11300F 


91637 


MFF1816G15001F 


01121 


CB2025 


91637 


MFF1816G10002F 


01121 


CB3345 


24546 


NC55C1362C 


91637 


MFF1816G14001F 


24546 


NA55D5002F 


91637 


MFF1816G10002F 


91637 


MFF1816G20002F 


91637 


MFF1816G2741F 


80009 


321-0255-01 


01121 


CB2035 


01121 


CB4725 


01121 


CB4725 


01121 


CB2025 


01121 


CB1525 



CKT BOARD ASSY:BUS READOUT 
CKT BOARD ASSY:BUS READOUT 
CKT BOARD ASSY:BUS READOUT 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER D1:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:12KOHM,0.25%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:5KOHM,0.25%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:30KOHM,0.5%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:30KOHM,0.5%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:1.13KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:15K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES. ! FXD,FILM:100KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:330K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:13.6KOHM,0.25W,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:14K OHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:50K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:100K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:200KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:2.74KOHM,0.5%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FLIM:2.15K OHM,5%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:20K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1.5K OHM,5%,0.25W 



REV OCT 1984 



8-27 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB4715 


01121 


CB4725 


01121 


CB1025 


80009 


156-0514-01 


80009 


156-0514-01 


01295 


SN74LS00 


01295 


TL072ACP3 


01295 


SN74LS393 


01295 


SN74LS32NP3 


07263 


74LS74A 


01295 


SN74LS02 


01295 


SN74LS299N3/J4 


80009 


156-0796-01 


01295 


SN74LS393 


07263 


74LS74A 


27014 


DM74LS10N 


01295 


SN74LS00 


27014 


DM74LS10N 


01295 


SN74LS374 N3 


34335 


AM6080PC 


80009 


156-0716-01 


80009 


160-1631-00 


80009 


160-1631-02 


01295 


SN74LS244NP3 


01295 


SN74LS393 


07263 


74LS74A 


80009 


156-0796-01 


01295 


SN74LS00 


01295 


SN74LS08NP3 


01295 


SN74LS00 


01295 


SN74LS194A9NP3 


01295 


SN74LS86 


01295 


SN74LS164(NP3 OR 


04713 


SZG20 


04713 


SZG195 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 



A4R2940 
A4R2945 
A4R2975 
A4R2985 

A4U2800 

A4U2805 
A4U2810 
A4U2820 
A4U2830 
A4U2835 
A4U2850 

A4U2855 
A4U2860 
A4U2865 
A4U2870 
A4U2880 
A4U2885 

A4U2890 
A4U2900 
A4U2905 
A4U2910 
A4U2920 
A4U2930 

A4U2930 
A4U2935 
A4U2940 
A4U2950 
A4U2960 
A4U2965 

A4U2970 
A4U2980 
A4U2985 
A4U2990 
A4U2995 



A4VR2805 
A4VR2925 



A4W2851 
A4W2913 



315-0102-00 
315-0471-00 
315-0472-00 
315-0102-00 

156-0514-01 

156-0514-01 
156-0382-02 
156-1191-01 
156-1172-01 
156-0479-02 
156-0388-03 

156-0383-02 
156-0975-02 
156-0796-01 
156-1172-01 
156-0388-03 
156-0386-02 

156-0382-02 
156-0386-02 
156-0982-03 
156-1555-00 
156-0716-01 
160-1631-00 

160-1631-02 
156-0956-02 
156-1172-01 
156-0388-03 
156-0796-01 
156-0382-02 

156-0480-02 
156-0382-02 
156-0768-01 
156-0381-02 
156-0651-02 



152-0217-00 
152-0662-00 

131-0566-00 
131-0566-00 



B010100 B019999 



B020000 



RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:470 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:DIFF 4-CHANNEL MUX.SEL 

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:DIFF 4-CHANNEL MUX.SEL 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:QUAD 2-INP NAND GATE 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:DUAL BI-FET OP-AMP,8 DIP 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:DUAL 4 BIT CNTR 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:QUAD 2-INP OR GATE 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:DUAL D FLIP-FLOP 

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:QUAD 2-INP NOR GATE 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:UNIV SHIFT/STORAGE RGTR 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8 STG SHF & STORE BUS RGTR 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:DUAL 4 BIT CNTR 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:DUAL D FLIP-FLOP 
MICROCIRCUIT.DLTRIPLE 3-INP NAND GATE 

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:QUAD 2-INP NAND GATE 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:TRIPLE 3-INP NAND GATE 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:OCTAL-D-EDGEFF,SCRN 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:D/A CONVERTER 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:128 X 8 STATIC RAM.SCRN 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:4096 X 8 EPROM 

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:4096 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:OCTAL BFR W/3 STATE OUT 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:DUAL 4 BIT CNTR 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:DUAL D FLIP-FLOP 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8 STG SHF & STORE BUS RGTR 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:QUAD 2-INP NAND GATE 

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:QUAD 2 INP & GATE 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:QUAD 2-INP NAND GATE 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:BIDIRECT UNIV SR.SCREENED 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:QUAD 2-INP EXCL OR GATE 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8 BIT PRL-OUT SER SHF RGTR 



SEMICONDDEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,8.2V,5% 
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,5V,1% 

BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 
BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 



8-23 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff Dscont 


A5 


670-7279-01 


B010100 B013099 


A5 


670-7279-05 


B013100 B021965 


A5 


670-7279-06 


B021966 B023199 


A5 


670-7279-07 


B023200 B025239 


A5 


670-7279-08 


B025240 


A5C2041 


281-0775-00 




A5C2188 


281-0775-00 




A5C2203 


281-0775-00 




A5C2217 


281-0775-00 




A5C2218 


281-0775-00 




A5C2221 


281-0775-00 




A5C2222 


281-0814-00 




A5C2223 


290-0943-00 




A5C2224 


290-0943-00 




A5C2240 


281-0775-00 




A5C2318 


281-0791-00 




A5C2326 


281-0775-00 




A5C2327 


281-0775-00 




A5C2328 


281-0775-00 




A5C2329 


281-0775-00 




A5C2330 


285-1187-00 




A5C2346 


281-0775-00 




A5C2354 


290-0943-00 




A5C2440 


281-0775-00 




A5C2441 


285-1187-00 




A5C2443 


281-0775-00 




A5C2475 


281-0775-00 




A5C2485 


281-0775-00 




A5C2486 


281-0775-00 




A5C2524 


281-0775-00 




A5C2527 


281-0775-00 




A5C2530 


283-0423-00 




A5C2536 


281-0775-00 




A5C2540 


283-0423-00 




A5C2542 


283-0423-00 




A5C2550 


281-0775-00 




A5C2565 


281-0816-00 




A5C2566 


281-0819-00 




A5C2572 


281-0775-00 




A5C2575 


281-0775-00 




A5C2586 


281-0775-00 




A5C2637 


283-0423-00 




A5C2638 


285-1187-00 




A5C2640 


285-1187-00 




A5C2642 


281-0775-00 




A5C2661 


281-0775-00 




A5C2734 


281-0775-00 




A5CR2004 


152-0141-02 




A5CR2021 


152-0141-02 




A5CR2122 


152-0141-02 




A5CR2651 


152-0141-02 




A5CR2723 


152-0141-02 





Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


80009 


670-7279-00 


80009 


670-7279-05 


80009 


670-7279-06 


80009 


670-7279-07 


80009 


670-7279-08 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E1 04M AA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


GC101A101K 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA101A271KAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


55112 


160.47 K1 OOF 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


55680 


ULB1E470TECANA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


55112 


160.47 K1 OOF 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


DG015E224Z 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


DG015E224Z 


04222 


DG015E224Z 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


96733 


R3247 


72982 


8035BC0G330 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


DG015E224Z 


55112 


160.47 K100F 


55112 


160.47 K1 OOF 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 



CKT BOARD ASSY: DIGITAL CONTROL 
CKT BOARD ASSY: DIGITAL CONTROL 
CKT BOARD ASSY: DIGITAL CONTROL 
CKT BOARD ASSY: DIGITAL CONTROL 
CKT BOARD ASSY: DIGITAL CONTROL 



CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER D!:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:100PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:270PF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,MTLZD:0.47UF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:47UF, + 50-10%,25V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,MTLZD:0.47UF,1 0%,1 00V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF, + 80-20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:82PF,5%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:33PF,5%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.22UF, + 80-20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,MTLZD:0.47UF,10%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,MTLZD:0.47UF,1 0%,1 00V 
CAP..FXD.CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 



SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,1 50MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 



REV OCT 1984 



8-29 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



Mfr 
Code 



Mfr Part Number 



A5CR2731 
A5CR2733 
A5CR2742 
A5CR2744 

A5Q2025 

A5Q2322 

A5R2012 
A5R2013 
A5R2014 
A5R2015 

'A5R2016 
A5R2017 
A5R2018 
A5R2019 
A5R2020 
A5R2022 

A5R2023 
A5R2025 
A5R2028 
A5R2029 
A5R2040 
A5R2103 

A5R2113 
A5R2123 
A5R2127 
A5R2132 
A5R2140 
A5R2141 

A5R2142 
A5R2143 
A5R2144 
A5R2145 
A5R2162 
A5R2185 

A5R2186 
A5R2187 
A5R2224 
A5R2227 
A5R2228 
A5R2229 

A5R2230 
A5R2241 
A5R2242 
A5R2243 
A5R2244 
A5R2245 

A5R2246 
A5R2285 
A5R2286 
A5R2287 
A5R2288 
A5R2297 



152-0141-02 
152-0141-02 
152-0141-02 
152-0141-02 

151-0188-00 

151-0341-00 

315-0512-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0512-00 

315-0512-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0512-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0512-00 

315-0203-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0134-00 
315-0134-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0102-00 

315-0103-00 
315-0222-00 
311-1137-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0101-00 
315-0101-00 

315-0103-00 
315-0101-00 
315-0101-00 
315-0101-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0102-00 

315-0103-00 
315-0104-00 
315-0103-00 
321-0289-02 
321-0289-02 
321-0431-00 

315-0103-00 
315-0101-00 
315-0101-00 
315-0101-00 
315-0101-00 
315-0101-00 

315-0101-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0104-00 
315-0104-00 
315-0104-00 
315-0104-00 



B013100 B023199 



SEMICOND DVC.DI 
SEMICOND DVC.DI 
SEMICOND DVC.DI 
SEMICOND DVC,DI 



SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 



TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI,TO-92 

TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI,TO-106 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:5.1 K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:5.1 K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:5.1 K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:5.1 K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:5.1 K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:20K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:130KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:130KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:5KOHM,20%,0.50W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100KOHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:10KOHM,0.5%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:10KOHM,0.5%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:301KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100OHM.5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 



01295 
01295 
01295 
01295 

T0058 



1N4152R 
1N4152R 
1N4152R 
1N4152R 

2N3906 



04713 


SPS6919 


01121 


CB5125 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB5125 


01121 


CB5125 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB5125 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB5125 


01121 


CB2035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1345 


01121 


CB1345 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB2225 


73138 


72PX-67-0-502M 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1035 


91637 


CMF55-116D10001D 


91637 


CMF55-116D10001D 


91637 


MFF1816G30102F 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1045 



8-30 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1035 


91637 


CMF55116D681R0D 


91637 


CMF55116D681R0D 


01121 


CB2035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


91637 


CMF55116D27201C 


24546 


NC55C2492C 


91637 


MFF1816G232Q1F 


91637 


CMF55-116D10001D 


01121 


CB6835 


01121 


CB1035 



A5R2298 
A5R2299 
A5R2303 
A5R2312 
A5R2313 
A5R2314 

A5R2315 
A5R2316 
A5R2317 
A5R2319 
A5R2320 
A5R2324 

A5R2325 
A5R2330 
A5R2340 
A5R2341 
A5R2342 
A5R2343 

A5R2344 
A5R2345 
A5R2444 
A5R2445 
A5R2446 
A5R2447 

A5R2448 
A5R2449 
A5R2450 
A5R2451 
A5R2452 
A5R2463 

A5R2504 
A5R2505 
A5R2506 
A5R2507 
A5R2508 
A5R2509 

A5R2510 
A5R2511 
A5R2512 
A5R2513 
A5R2514 
A5R2515 

A5R2516 
A5R2517 
A5R2518 
A5R2519 
A5R2520 
A5R2521 

A5R2522 
A5R2525 
A5R2532 
A5R2534 
A5R2535 
A5R2539 



315-0104-00 
315-0104-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0102-00 

315-0102-00 
315-0102-00 
315-0102-00 
315-0104-00 
315-0103-00 
321-0177-02 

321-0177-02 
315-0203-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 

315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 

315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 

315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 

315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 

315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 

321-0917-03 
321-0327-03 
321-0324-00 
321-0289-02 
315-0683-00 
315-0103-00 



RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:681 OHM,0.5%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:681 OHM,0.5%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:20K OHM,5%,0.25W 



RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD ( CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5% 



0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 

0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 

0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 

0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 

0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 

0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 
0.25W 



RES.,FXD,FILM:27.2KOHM,0.25%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:24.9KOHM,0.25%,0.125W 
RES. ? FXD T FILM:23.2K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:10KOHM,0.5%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:68K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 



REV OCT 1984 



8-31 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



A5R2540 
A5R2541 
A5R2542 
A5R2543 
A5R2545 
A5R2546 

A5R2547 
A5R2549 
A5R2551 
A5R2552 
A5R2553 
A5R2564 

'A5R2571 
A5R2573 
A5R2608 
A5R2609 
A5R2610 
A5R261 1 

A5R2612 
A5R2613 
A5R2614 
A5R2645 
A5R2646 
A5R2647 

A5R2648 
A5R2649 
A5R2650 
A5R2652 
A5R2662 
A5R2663 

A5R2703 
A5R2730 
A5R2731 
A5R2732 
A5R2734 
A5R2735 

A5R2741 
A5R2742 
A5R2745 
A5R2764 

A5TP503 

A5TP504 
A5TP505 
A5TP506 
A5TP507 
A5TP509 
A5TP510 

A5TP51 1 

A5U2008 
A5U2034 
A5U2092 



321-1618-02 
321-0923-02 
315-0203-00 
315-0203-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 

315-0103-00 
315-0681-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0102-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0331-00 

315-0102-00 
315-0102-00 
315-0100-00 
315-0104-00 
315-0104-00 
315-0104-00 

315-0104-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0332-00 
315-0682-00 

315-0243-00 
31 5-0273-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0225-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 

315-0471-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0222-00 
315-0512-00 
315-0103-00 

315-0222-00 
315-0512-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0102-00 

131-0608-00 

131-0608-00 
131-0608-00 
131-0608-00 
131-0608-00 
131-0608-00 
131-0608-00 

131-0608-00 

156-1566-00 
1 56-0865-02 

156-1342-01 



RES.,FXD,FILM:6.5KOHM,0.5%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:25.1KOHM,0.5%.0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:20K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:20K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:680 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:330 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:3.3K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:6.8K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:24K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:27K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.2M OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:470 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:5.1 K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:5.1 K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 

TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 



TERMINAL.PIN 
TERMINAL,PIN 
TERMINAL.PIN 
TERMINAL.PIN 
TERMINAL.PIN 
TERMINAL.PIN 



0.365 L X 0:025 PH BRZ GOLD 
0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 
0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 
0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 
:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 
0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 



TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:EPROM,100 X 14 
MICROCIRCUIT.DLOCTAL D-TYPE FF W/CLEAR 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:MPU,8 BIT W/CLK 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


91637 


MFF1618D65000D 


24546 


NC55C2512D 


01121 


CB2035 


01121 


CB2035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB6815 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB3315 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1005 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1045 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB3325 


01121 


CB6825 


01121 


CB2435 


01121 


CB2735 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB2255 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB4715 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB2225 


01121 


CB5125 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB2225 


01121 


CB5125 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1025 


22526 


48283-036 


22526 


48283-036 


22526 


48283-036 


22526 


48283-036 


22526 


48283-036 


22526 


48283-036 


22526 


48283-036 


22526 


48283-036 


80009 


156-1566-00 


01295 


SN74LS273NP3 


07263 


F68A08(P OR D) 



8-32 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Numb 


01295 


SN74LS365A 


04713 


MC1413PDS 


01295 


SN74LS273NP3 


80009 


160-1994-03 


80009 


160-1994-04 


80009 


180-1994-06 


80009 


160-1994-07 


80009 


160-1628-03 


80009 


160-1628-04 


80009 


160-1628-06 


80009 


160-1628-07 


80009 


160-1628-08 


80009 


160-1625-03 


80009 


160-1625-04 


80009 


160-1625-06 


01295 


SN74LS244NP3 


01295 


SN74LS174 


01295 


LM311JG4 


34335 


AM6012PC 


34335 


AM74LS373 


01295 


SN74LS174 


80009 


156-0513-02 


80009 


160-1627-03 


80009 


160-1627-04 


80009 


160-1627-06 


80009 


160-1626-03 


80009 


160-1626-04 


80009 


160-1626-06 


80009 


160-1995-03 


80009 


160-1995-04 


80009 


160-1995-06 


80009 


160-1995-07 


80009 


160-1995-08 


80009 


156-0513-02 


80009 


156-0513-03 


80009 


156-0513-02 


80009 


156-0513-03 


01295 


TL074CN/PEP3 


01295 


TL074CN/PEP3 


04713 


MC14512BCLD 


07263 


74LS74A 


01295 


SN74LS138NP3 


01295 


SN74LS04 


01295 


SN74LS138NP3 


80009 


156-1026-02 


01295 


TL072ACP3 


01295 


SN74LS279NP3 


04713 


MC14020BCLD 



A5U2108 
A5U2118 
A5U2134 
A5U2162 



A5U2378 
A5U2378 
A5U2408 
A5U2408 
A5U2418 

A5U2418 
A5U2427 
A5U2435 
A5U2456 
A5U2468 
A5U2480 

A5U2556 
A5U2580 
A5U2596 
A5U2634 
A5U2656 
A5U2668 



156-1220-00 
156-1245-00 
156-0865-02 
160-1994-03 



B010100 B010999 



A5U2162 


160-1994-04 


B011000 


B012499 


A5U2162 


150-1994-06 


B0 12500 


B021965 


A5U2162 


160-1994-07 


B021966 




A5U2162 


160-1628-03 


B010100 


B010999 


A5U2162 


160-1628-04 


B011000 


B012499 


A5U2162 


160-1628-06 


B012500 


B021965 


A5U2162 


160-1628-07 


B021966 


B025239 


A5U2162 


160-1628-08 


B025240 




A5U2178 


160-1625-03 


B010100 


B010999 


A5U2178 


160-1625-04 


B011000 


B012499 


A5U2178 


160-1625-06 


B012500 


B021965 


A5U2194 


156-0956-02 






A5U2208 


156-0391-02 






A5U2214 


156-1126-01 






A5U2234 


156-1589-00 






A5U2294 


156-1065-01 






A5U2308 


156-0391-02 






A5U2335 


156-0513-02 






A5U2362 


160-1627-03 


B010100 


B010999 


A5U2362 


160-1627-04 


B011000 


B012499 


A5U2362 


160-1627-06 


B012500 


B021965 


A5U2378 


160-1626-03 


B010100 


B010999 


A5U2378 


160-1626-04 


B011000 


B012499 


A5U2378 


160-1626-06 


B012500 


B021965 


A5U2378 


160-1995-03 


B010100 


B010999 


A5U2378 


160-1995-04 


B011000 


B012499 


A5U2378 


160-1995-06 


B012500 


B021965 



160-1995-07 
160-1995-08 
156-0513-02 
156-0513-03 
156-0513-02 

156-0513-03 
156-1200-01 
156-1200-01 
156-1486-00 
156-0388-03 
156-0469-02 

156-0385-02 
156-0469-02 
156-1026-02 
156-1191-01 
156-0804-02 
156-0895-01 



MICROCIRCUIT,DI:HEX BUS DRIVER 
MICROCIRCU!T,LI:7 XSTR,HV/H!GH CUR 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:OCTAL D-TYPE FF W/CLEAR 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:16384 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
(ALTERNATE FOR U2162.U2178 8K EPROMS) 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:16384 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 

(ALTERNATE FOR U2162.U2178 8K EPROMS) 
M!CROCIRCU!T,Dh18384 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
(ALTERNATE FOR U2162.U2178 8K EPROMS) 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:16384 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8K X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8K X 8 EPROM.PRGM 

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:4096 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
M!CROCIRCUIT,DI:4096 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
MICROCIRCU1T,DI:4096 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8192 X 8 EPROM PROG 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8K X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8192 X 8 EPROM PROG 

MICROCIRCUIT.DhOCTAL BFR W/3 STATE OUT 
MICROCIRCUIT.DhHEX LATCH W/CLEAR 
MICROCIRCUIT.LhVOLTAGECOMPARATOR.SEL 
MICROCIRCUIT.LhDA CONVERTERS 2 BIT.HI SPD 
MICROCIRCUIT.DhOCTAL D TYPE TRANS LATCHES 
MICROCIRCUIT.DhHEX LATCH W/CLEAR 

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8-CHANNELMUX,SEL 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8192 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8K X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8192 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8192 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8192 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8192 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:16384 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
(ALTERNATE FOR U2362.U2378 8K EPROMS) 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:16384 X 8 EPOM.PRGM 
(ALTERNATE FOR U2362.U2378 8K EPROMS) 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:16384 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 

(ALTERNATE FOR U2362.U2378 8K EPROMS) 
B021966 B025239 MICROCIRCUIT,DI:1 6384 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 
B025240 MICROCIRCUIT,DI:16384 X 8 EPROM.PRGM 

B010100 B023199 MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8-CHANNEL MUX.SEL 
B023200 MICROCIRCUIT,DI:CMOS,8-CHAN ANALOG MUX 

B010100 B023199 MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8-CHANNEL MUX.SEL 



B023200 



MICROCIRCUIT,DI:CMOS,8-CHAN ANALOG MUX 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:OPERATlONALAMPL,QUAD 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:OPERATIONALAMPL,QUAD 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8 CHANNEL DATA SEL.SCREENED 
MICROCIRCUIT.DhDUAL D FLIP-FLOP 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:3/8 LINE DCDR 

MICROCIRCUIT.DhHEX INVERTER 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:3/8 LINE DCDR 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:4/1 LINE DECODER.BURN-IN 
MICROCIRCUIT.LhDUAL BI-FET OP-AMP.8 DIP 
MICROCIRCUIT.DhQUADRUPLE S-R LATCH.SCRN 
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:14 BIT BINARY CNTR.BURN-IN 



REV OCT 1984 



8-33 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Numb 


01295 


SN74LS138NP3 


04713 


SZG35009K2 


04713 


SZG35009K20 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


57668 


JWW-0200E0 


80009 


158-0248-00 



A5U2770 

A5VR2003 

A5VR2526 

A5W2143 
A5W2526 



A5Y2568 



156-0469-02 
152-0127-00 
152-0278-00 

131-0566-00 
131-0566-00 



158-0248-00 



MICROCIRCUIT,DI:3/8 LINE DCDR 
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,7.5V,5% 
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,3V,5% 

BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES.2.375,22 AWG 
BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 



XTAL UNIT,QTZ:10MHZ, 0.01%,SERIES 



8-34 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff Dscont 


A6 






A6 






A6CR3000 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3001 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3002 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3003 


152-0141-02 




A8CR3010 


152-0141-02 




A6CR301 1 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3012 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3013 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3020 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3021 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3022 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3023 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3025 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3030 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3031 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3032 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3033 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3035 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3050 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3075 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3105 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3110 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3115 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3120 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3175 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3176 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3177 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3178 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3179 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3180 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3181 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3182 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3183 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3184 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3185 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3200 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3210 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3220 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3250 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3260 


152-0141-02 




A6CR3270 


152-0141-02 




A6DS3300 


150-1109-00 




A6DS3301 


150-1109-00 




A6DS3302 


150-1109-00 




A6DS3303 


150-1109-00 




A6DS3304 


150-1105-00 




A6DS3310 


150-1109-00 




A6DS331 1 


150-1109-00 




A6DS3312 


150-1109-00 




A6DS3313 


150-1109-00 





Name & Description 



Mfr 
Code 



Mfr Part Number 



CKT BOARD ASSY:FRONT PANEL 
(AVAILABLE AT 672-1 038-XX LEVEL ONLY) 

SEMICONDDVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SVV,Si,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

LT EMITTING DIO:GREEN, 30MA 
LT EMITTING DIO:GREEN, 30MA 
LT EMITTING DIO:GREEN, 30MA 

LT EMITTING DIO:GREEN, 30MA 
LT EMITTING DIO:YELLOW,30MA 
LT EMITTING DIO:GREEN, 30MA 
LT EMITTING DIO:GREEN, 30MA 
LT EMITTING DIO:GREEN, 30MA 
LT EMITTING DIO:GREEN, 30MA 



01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


50434 


QLMP-0449 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 



REV OCT 1984 



8-35 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


50434 


QLMP-0449 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


50434 


QLMP-0449 


50434 


QLMP-0449 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


50434 


QLMP-0449 


50434 


QLMP-0449 


50434 


QLMP-0449 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


50434 


QLMP-0449 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


50434 


QLMP-0449 


50434 


QLMP-0449 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


73138 


SP732 


32997 


91Z1A-Z45-EA0019 


32997 


91Z1A-Z45-EA0019 


32997 


91Z1A-Z45-EA0019 


32997 


91Z1A-Z45-EA0019 


32997 


91Z1A-Z45-EA0019 


32997 


91Z2D-Z45-EA0020 


32997 


91Z2D-Z45-EA0020 


32997 


91Z1A-Z45-EA0019 


32997 


91Z2D-Z45-EA0021 


32997 


91Z1A-Z45-EA0019 


01121 


CB1515 


01121 


CB1515 


01121 


CB1515 


01121 


CB1515 


01121 


CB1515 


01121 


CB1515 


32997 


4308R101-151J 


01121 


110A151 


80009 


260-2094-00 


80009 


260-2094-00 


76784 


T-51621-001 


22753 


OBD 


76784 


T-51621-001 


22753 


OBD 


80009 


260-2095-00 



A6DS3314 
A6DS3325 
A6DS3326 
A6DS3327 
A6DS3328 
A6DS3329 

A6DS3330 
A6DS3331 
A6DS3332 
A6DS3350 
A6DS3351 
A6DS3352 

A6DS3353 
A6DS3354 
A6DS3355 
A6DS3356 
A6DS3357 
A6DS3375 

A6DS3376 
A6DS3377 
A6DS3378 
A6DS3379 
A6DS3380 
A6DS3390 

A6DS3391 
A6DS3392 
A6DS3393 

A6R3021 
A6R3031 

A6R3050 
A6R3075 
A6R3100 
A6R3125 
A6R3150 
A6R3190 

A6R3200 
A6R3210 
A6R3300 
A6R3310 
A6R3325 
A6R3326 

A6R3327 
A6R3329 
A6R3350 
A6R3350 

A6S3000 

A6S3010 
A6S3020 
A6S3025 
A6S3030 
A6S3035 
A6S3050 



150-1105-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1105-00 
150-1105-00 

150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1105-00 
150-1105-00 

150-1105-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1105-00 

150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1105-00 
150-1105-00 

150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 

311-2180-00 
311-2180-00 

311-2180-00 
311-2180-00 
311-2180-00 
311-2181-00 
311-2181-00 
311-2180-00 

311-2182-00 
311-2180-00 
315-0151-00 
315-0151-00 
315-0151-00 
315-0151-00 

315-0151-00 
315-0151-00 
307-0611-00 
307-0695-00 

260-2094-00 

260-2094-00 
260-2086-00 
260-2100-00 
260-2086-00 
260-2100-00 
260-2095-00 



B020000 
B013850 



B020000 



B020000 
B020000 
B020000 



B020000 



B010100 
B020000 
B010100 
B013850 



LT EMITTING 
LT EMITTING 
LT EMITTING 
LT EMITTING 
LT EMITTING 
LT EMITTING 



DIO:YELLOW,30MA 
DIO:GREEN, 30MA 
DIO:GREEN, 30MA 
DIOrGREEN, 30MA 
DIO:YELLOW,30MA 
DIO:YELLOW,30MA 



LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 

LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 

LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 
LT EMITTING DIO: 



GREEN, 30MA 
GREEN, 30MA 
GREEN, 30MA 
GREEN, 30MA 
YELLOW.30MA 
YELLOW,30MA 

:YELLOW,30MA 
GREEN, 30MA 
GREEN, 30MA 
GREEN, 30MA 
GREEN, 30MA 
YELLOW.30MA 

GREEN, 30MA 
GREEN, 30MA 
GREEN, 30MA 
:GREEN, 30MA 
:YELLOW,30MA 
:YELLOW,30MA 



LT EMITTING DIO:GREEN, 30MA 
LT EMITTING DIO:GREEN, 30MA 
LT EMITTING DIO:GREEN, 30MA 

RES.,VAR,NONWW:LINEAR,2KOHM,30%,0.5W 
RES.,VAR,NONWW:LINEAR,2KOHM,30%,0.5W 

RES.,VAR,NONWW:LINEAR,2KOHM,30%,0.5W 

RES.,VAR,NONWW:LINEAR,2KOHM,30%,0.5W 

RES.,VAR,NONWW:LINEAR,2KOHM,30%,0.5W 

RES.,VAR,NONWW:LINEAR,5KOHM,30%,0.25W 

RES.,VAR,NONWW:LINEAR,5KOHM,30%,0.25W 

RES.,VAR,NONWW:L!NEAR,2KOHM,30%,0.5W 

RES.,VAR,NONWW:LINEAR,5KOHM,30%,0.5W 
RES.,VAR,NONWW:LINEAR,2KOHM,30%,0.5W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:150 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:150 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:150 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:150 OHM,5%,0.25W 

BC13819 RES.,FXD,CMPSN:150 OH!$,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:150 OHM,5%,0.25W 

B013849 RES NTWK,FXD Fl:7,150 OHM,5%,1.125W 

RES NTWK,FXD Fl:9,150 OHM,2%,0.2W EACH 

SWITCH, PUSH:4 BTN.SINGLE POLE,VERT CONT 

SWITCH, PUSH:4 BTN.SINGLE POLE,VERT CONT 

SWITCH, ROTARY:VOLTS/DIV 

SWITCH, LEVER:DPDT,1 SECT,3 POSN,30 DEG 

SWITCH, ROTARY:VOLTS/DIV 

SWITCH, LEVER:DPDT,1 SECT.3 POSN,30 DEG 

SWITCH, PUSH:2 BTN,S!NGLE POLE,CHAN 3 &4 



8-36 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 



Component No. 



A6S3105 
A6S3110 
A6S3175 
A6S3185 
A6S3185 
A6S3210 

A6S3220 
A6S3250 
A6S3260 
A6S3270 

A6U3300 

A6U3325 
A6U3350 
A6U3375 

A6W651 
A6W651 

A6W652 
A6W652 



Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Part No. 


Eff 


Dscont 


260-2087-00 






260-2093-00 






260-2085-00 






260-2108-00 


B010100 


B013849 


260-2108-01 


B013850 




260-2088-00 






260-2088-00 






260-2100-00 






260-2100-00 






260-2100-00 






156-0651-02 






156-0651-02 






156-0651-02 






156-0651-02 






175-4582-00 


B010100 


B013849 


175-8419-00 


B013850 




175-4584-00 


B010100 


B013849 


175-8418-00 


B013850 





Name & Description 



SWITCH, PUSH:1 SINGLE BTN.SINGLE POLE,HO 
SWITCH, PUSH:3 BTN.SINGLE POLE,HORIZ 
SWITCH, ROTARY:TIME/DIV 
SWITCH, PUSH:SPST,0.1A,125VAC 
SWITCH, PUSH:SPST,0.1A,125VAC 
SWITCH,PUSH:SINGLE BTN.SINGLE POLETRIG 

SWITCH, PUSH:SINGLE BTN,SINGLE POLETRIG 
SWITCH, LEVER:DPDT,1 SECT,3 POSN,30 DEG 
SWITCH,LEVER:DPDT,1 SECT,3 POSN.30 DEG 
SWITCH,LEVER:DPDT,1 SECT,3 POSN,30 DEG 



MICROCIRCUIT,DI:8 BIT PRL-OUT SER SHF RGTR 01295 SN74LS164(NP3 OR 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Ni 


80009 


260-2087-00 


80009 


260-2093-00 


76854 


5-51625-001 


80009 


260-2108-00 


01963 


E63-39HE 


80009 


260-2088-00 


80009 


260-2088-00 


22753 


OBD 


22753 


OBD 


22753 


OBD 



MICROCIRCUIT.DI 
MICROCIRCUIT.DI 
MICROCIRCUIT.DI 



8 BIT PRL-OUT SER SHF RGTR 
8 BIT PRL-OUT SER SHF RGTR 
8 BIT PRL-OUT SER SHF RGTR 



CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:26,28 AWG,8.5 L 

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:26,28 AWG.2.5 L.RIBBON 

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:20,28 AWG,4.0 L 

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:20,28 AWG.8.0 L,RIBBON 



01295 
01295 
01295 

80009 
80009 

80009 
80009 



SN74LS164(NP3 0R 
SN74LS164(NP3 0R 
SN74LS164(NP3 0R 

175-4582-00 
175-8419-00 

175-4584-00 
175-8418-00 



REV OCT 1984 



8-37 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 







Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Compone 


int No. 


Part No. 


Eff Dscont 


A7 




670-7284-00 




A7R3420 




311-2183-00 




A7R3430 




311-2183-00 




A7R3475 




311-2183-00 





Name & Description 



Mfr 
Code 



Mfr Part Number 



CKT BOARD ASSY:FRONT PANEL VARIABLE 80009 670-7284-00 

RES.,VAR,NONWW:LINEAR,5KOHM,30%,0.5W 32997 91ZID-Z36-EA0024 

RES.,VAR,NONWW:LINEAR,5KOHM,30%,0.5W 32997 91ZID-Z36-EA0024 

RES.,VAR,NONWW:LINEAR,5KOHM,30%,0.5W 32997 91ZID-Z36-EA0024 



A8 

A8DS100 
A8DS101 
A8DS102 



670-7280-00 

150-0057-01 
150-0057-01 
150-0057-01 



CKT BOARD ASSY:SCALE ILLUMINATION 

LAMP,INCAND:5V,0.115A,WIRE LD,SEL 
LAMP,INCAND:5V,0.115A,WIRELD,SEL 
LAMP,INCAND:5V,0.115A,WIRE LD,SEL 



80009 


670-7280-00 


76854 


17AS15 


76854 


17AS15 


76854 


17AS15 



8-38 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eft Dscont 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


80009 


670-7277-00 


80009 


670-7277-01 


80009 


670-7277-02 


80009 


670-7277-03 


80009 


670-7277-05 


80009 


670-7277-06 


59660 


805-51 9-C0G0470J 


59660 


838 533X5F0 2715 


84411 


TEK-245-22304 


84411 


TEK-245-22304 


84411 


TEK-245-22304 


84411 


TEK-245-22304 


84411 


TEK-245-22304 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


96733 


ADVISE 


96733 


R2928 


96733 


ADVISE 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


04222 


GC106C101M 


56289 


173D224X505035U 


84411 


TEK-245-22304 


56289 


500D148 


56289 


292C Z5U222M200B 


04222 


MA205E104MAA 


14752 


230B1A105K 


56289 


292C Z5U222M200B 


80009 


152-0400-00 


80009 


152-0400-00 


07263 


FDH2161 


07263 


FDH2161 


07263 


FDH2161 


000JF 


ESJA25-12 


07263 


FDH2161 


01295 


1N4152R 


74276 


NE2V-T 


74276 


NE2V-T 


80009 


108-0262-00 


32159 


81000M 


04713 


SPS7950 


04713 


SPS7950 


04713 


SPS7950 


04713 


SPS797 


000IG 


2SA1077G 


01121 


CB1005 


01121 


CB1005 


01121 


CB1225 



A9 
A9 
A9 
A9 
A9 
A9 



A9CS0 

A9C91 

A9C1812 

A9C1813 

A9C1886 

A9C1888 
A9C1889 
A9C1890 
A9C1891 
A9C1891 
A9C1909 

A9C1912 
A9C1915 
A9C1932 
A9C1950 
A9C1951 
A9C1971 

A9C1972 
A9C1973 
A9C1980 
A9C1990 
A9C1991 



A9CR1894 
A9CR1895 
A9CR1915 
A9CR1930 
A9CR1950 
A9CR1951 

A9CR1953 
A9CR1990 

A9DS90 
A9DS91 



A9L1921 
A9L1974 

A9Q1851 
A9Q1852 
A9Q1890 

A9Q1980 
A9Q1981 

A9R1812 
A9R1813 
A9R1820 



670-7277-00 
670-7277-01 
670-7277-02 
670-7277-03 
670-7277-05 
670-7277-06 



283-0115-00 
283-0084-00 
285-1236-00 
285-1236-00 
285-1236-00 

285-1236-00 
285-1236-00 
281-0775-00 
281-0775-00 
281-0773-00 
281-0783-00 

281-0798-00 
281-0783-00 
281-0775-00 
281-0766-00 
290-0269-00 
285-1236-00 

290-0747-00 
281-0771-00 
281-0773-00 
285-1096-00 
281-0771-00 



152-0400-00 
152-0400-00 
152-0061-00 
152-0061-00 
152-0061-00 
152-0787-00 

152-0061-00 
152-0141-02 

150-0030-00 
150-0030-00 



108-0262-00 
108-0318-00 

151-0443-00 
151-0443-00 
151-0443-00 

151-0444-00 
151-0745-00 

315-0100-02 
315-0100-02 
315-0122-00 



B010100 
B011000 
B012000 
BO 13300 
B014100 
B022020 



B010999 
B011999 
B013299 
B014099 
B022019 



nn-in-inn qni 1 ooo 



B010100 B014099 

B014100 

B010100 B022019 



B011000 



B011000 



B010100 B010835 



B022020 



CKT BOARD 
CKT BOARD 
CKT BOARD 
CKT BOARD 
CKT BOARD 
CKT BOARD 



ASSY: 
ASSY: 
ASSY: 
ASSY: 
ASSY: 
ASSY: 



HIGH 
HIGH 
HIGH 
HIGH 
HIGH 
HIGH 



VOLTAGE 
VOLTAGE 
VOLTAGE 
VOLTAGE 
VOLTAGE 
VOLTAGE 



B010100 B022019 



CAP.,FXD,CER D!:47PF,5%,200V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:270PF,5%,1000V 
CAP„FXD,PLSTC:0.022UF,20%,400V 
CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:0.022UF,20%,400V 
CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:0.022UF,20°/°,400V 

CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:0.022UF,20%,400V 
CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:0.022UF,20%,400V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,100V 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:51PF,1%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,100V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:100PF,20%,200V 
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:0.22UF,5%,35V 
CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:0.022UF,20%,400V 

CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:100UF, + 50-10%,25V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.0022UF,20%,200V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,20%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:1UF,10%,50V 
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.0022UF,20%,200V 



SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400V,1A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SIL!CON,400V,1A 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,175V,100MA 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,175V,100MA 
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,175V,100MA 
SEMICOND DEVICE:RECT,SI,12KV,3MA,A-LZV 

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,175V,100MA 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 

LAMP,GLOW:NEON,T-2,60 TO 90 VOLTS 
LAMP,GLOW:NEON,T-2,60 TO 90 VOLTS 



COIL,RF:FIXED,510NH 
COIL,RF,CMPSN:100 OHM, 5%, 0.25W 

TRANSISTOR SILICON, PNP 
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP 
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP 

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1 .2K OHM,5%,0.25W 



REV OCT 1984 



8-39 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



A9R1830 
A9R1833 
A9R1834 
A9R1834 
A9R1842 
A9R1848 

A9R1853 
A9R1854 
A9R1855 
A9R1856 
A9R1857 
A9R1858 

A9R1864 
A9R1870 
A9R1871 
A9R1872 
A9R1873 
A9R1878 

A9R1880 
A9R1881 
A9R1890 
A9R1891 
A9R1892 
A9R1893 

A9R1895 
A9R1895 
A9R1896 
A9R1897 
A9R1898 
A9R1901 

A9R1910 
A9R1911 
A9R1913 
A9R1920 
A9R1921 
A9R1922 

A9R1922 
A9R1933 
A9R1941 
A9R1944 
A9R1945 
A9R1946 

A9R1350 
A9R1951 
A9R1952 
A9R1953 
A9R1971 
A9R1972 

A9R1973 
A9R1973 
A9R1990 
A9R1991 



307-0110-00 
315-0103-00 
311-1227-00 
315-0103-00 
311-1227-00 
311-1227-00 

321-0447-00 
321-0435-00 
321-0407-00 
321-0367-00 
321-0364-00 
315-0105-00 

311-1230-00 
311-1214-00 
315-0154-00 
315-0184-00 
315-0103-00 
311-1214-00 

315-0434-00 
321-0385-00 
315-0473-00 
321-0481-04 
321-0693-00 
321-0481-04 

315-0123-00 
315-0302-00 
315-0100-02 
315-0102-00 
315-0102-00 
315-0101-03 

321-0271-00 
321-0245-00 
315-0101-03 
315-0152-00 
315-0100-02 
315-0101-06 

315-0331-03 
315-0102-00 
315-0201-00 
315-0163-00 
321-0385-07 
315-0475-00 

315-0103-00 
315-0220-00 
315-0202-00 
315-0393-00 
315-0202-00 
315-0224-00 

315-0163-00 
315-0124-00 
321-0693-00 

315-0107-00 



B010100 B013299 RES.,FXD,CMPSN:3 OHM,5%,0.25W 
B022020 RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 

B010100 B022019 RES.,VAR,NONWIR:5K OHM,20%,0.50W 
B022020 RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,VAR,NONWIR:5K OHM,20%,0.50W 
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:5K OHM,20%,0.50W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:442KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:332K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:169K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:64.9KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:60.4KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1M OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,VAR,NONWIR:20KOHM,207o,0.50W 
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:200KOHM,207o,0.50W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:150K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:180K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:200KOHM,20%,0.50W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:430K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:100K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:47K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1M OHM,0.1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:68.1KOHM,0.5%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:1M OHM,0.1%,0.125W 



B010100 
B023200 



B022020 



B011000 



B010100 
B010100 



B011000 
B010100 



B023200 



B023199 RES.,FXD,CMPSN:12K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:3K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 



RES.,FXD,FILM:6.49KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:3.48KOHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1.5KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100 OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:330 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:200 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:16KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:100KOHM,0.1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7M OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHW,5 o/ c,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:22 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:39KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:220KOHM,5%,0.25W 



B022019 
B010999 



B022019 



B010100 B022019 RES.,FXD,CMPSN:16K OHM,5%,0.25W 
B022020 RES.,FXD,CMPSN:120K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:68.1K OHM,0.5%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:100M OHM,5%,0.25W 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


01121 


CB30G5 


01121 


CB1035 


32997 


3386F-T04-502 


01121 


CB1035 


32997 


3386F-T04-502 


32997 


3386F-T04-502 


24546 


NA55D4423F 


91637 


MFF1816G33202F 


91637 


MFF1816G16902F 


91637 


MFF1816G64901F 


91637 


CMF55116G60401F 


01121 


CB1055 


32997 


3386F-T04-203 


73138 


72-16-0 


01121 


CB1545 


01121 


CB1845 


01121 


CB1035 


73138 


72-16-0 


01121 


CB4345 


91637 


MFF1816G10002F 


01121 


CB4735 


91637 


CMF55116D10003B 


91637 


CMF55-116G68101D 


91637 


CMF55116D10003B 


01121 


CB1235 


01121 


CB3025 


01121 


CB1005 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB1015 


91637 


MFF1816G64900F 


91637 


MFF1816G34800F 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB1525 


01121 


CB1005 


01121 


CB1015 


01121 


CB3315 


01121 


CB1025 


01121 


CB2015 


01121 


CB1635 


91637 


MFF1816C10002B 


01121 


CB4755 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB2205 


01121 


CB2025 


01121 


CB3935 


01121 


CB2025 


01121 


CB2245 


01121 


CB1635 


01121 


CB1245 


91637 


CMF55-116G68101D 


01121 


CB1075 



8-40 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff 


Dscont 


A9R1992 


315-0244-00 


B010100 


B022019 


A9R1992 


315-0394-00 


B022020 




A9R1994 


321-0402-00 






A9T1970 


120-1418-00 


B010100 


B013299 


A9T1970 


120-1418-01 


B013300 




A9U1830 


152-0805-00 






A9U1890 


156-1191-01 






A9U1956 


156-0158-07 






A9VR1891 


152-0282-00 






A9W1909 


131-0566-00 







Name & Description 



Mfr 
Code 



Mfr Part Number 



RES.,FXD,CMPSN:240K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:390K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:150KOHM,1%,0.125W 

XFMR,PWR SU&SDN:HIGH VOLTAGE 
XFMR.PWR SU&SDN:HIGH VOLTAGE 



SEMiCOND DEV!CE:HV MULTIPLIER, 20KV INPUT 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:DUAL BI-FET OP-AMP.8 DIP 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:DUAL OPNL AMPL.SCREENED 

SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,30V,5% 



BUS CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 



01121 CB2445 

01121 CB3945 

24546 NA55D1503F 



80009 


120-1418-00 


80009 


120-1418-01 


80009 


152-0805-00 


01295 


TL072ACP3 


01295 


MC1458JG4 



14552 



57668 



1N972B 



JWW-0200E0 



REV OCT 1984 



8-41 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 





Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 


Component No. 


Part No. 


Eff 


Dscont 


A10 


670-7390-00 


B010100 


B024299 


A10 


670-7390-01 


B024300 




A10B1690 


147-0035-00 






A10C1698 


290-0804-00 






A10CR1691 


152-0141-02 






A10CR1692 


152-0141-02 






A10CR1694 


152-0141-02 






A10CR1696 


152-0141-02 






A10CR1699 


152-0141-02 






A10Q1698 


151-0301-00 


B010100 


B024299 


A10Q1698 


151-0622-00 


B024300 




A10R1691 


303-0150-00 


B010100 


B024299 


A10R1691 


308-0142-00 


B024300 




A10R1692 


321-0062-00 






A10R1693 


323-0155-00 






A10R1694 


323-0155-00 






A10R1695 


321-0222-00 






A10R1697 


321-0190-00 






A10RT1696 


307-0124-00 






A10U1690 


156-0281-00 






A11 


119-1445-01 






A12 


119-1445-02 






A13 


307-1154-00 







Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


80009 


670-7390-00 


80009 


670-7390-01 


25088 


1AD3001-0A 


55680 


ULA1E100TEA 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


01295 


1N4152R 


27014 


2N2907A 


01121 


GB1505 


91637 


CW2B30R00J 


91637 


CMF55-116G43R20F 


75042 


CECT0-4020F 


75042 


CECT0-4020F 


91637 


MFF1816G20000F 


91637 


MFF1816G931R0F 


50157 


1D1618 


02735 


89164 


80009 


119-1445-01 


80009 


119-1445-02 


80009 


307-1154-00 



CKT BOARD ASSY:FAN MOTOR 

MOTOR, DC:BRUSHLESS,10-15VDC,145MA 

CAP„FXD,ELCTLT: 1 0UF, + 50-1 0%,25V 



SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA r 30V,DO-35 
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,1 50MA,30V,DO-35 



TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP 
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:15 OHM,5%,1W 
RES.,FXD,WW:30 OHM,5%,3W 

RES.,FXD,FILM:43.2 OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:402 OHM,1%,0.50W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:402 OHM,1%,0.50W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:2K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:931 OHM,1%,0.125W 



RES.,THERMAL:5K OHM, 10% 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:4 TRANSISTOR ARRAY 

ATTENUATOR, VAR:PROGRAMMABLE 1X-100X.CH1 

ATTENUATOR,VAR:PROGRAMMABLE,1 X-1 00X,CH2 

PASSIVE NETWORK:CRT TERMINATOR. FINISHED 



8-42 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Electrical Parts — 2465 Service 



)mponent No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



A14 

A14C3401 

A14R3401 
A14R3402 

A14R3403 
A14R3404 
A14R3405 
A14R3406 
A14R3407 
A14R3408 

A14R3409 
A14R3410 
A14R3411 

A14U3401 
A14U3402 



A14VR3401 



670-8000-00 

283-0421-00 

311-1137-00 
31 5-0222-00 

315-0750-00 
321-0284-00 
315-0750-00 
315-0123-00 
311-1137-00 
321-0284-00 

315-0222-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 

156-0130-02 
156-0130-02 



152-0227-00 



CKT BOARD ASSY:DYNAMIC CENTERING 

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 

RES.,VAR,NONWIR:5K OHM,20%,0.50W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.2K OHM,5%,0.25W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:75 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:8.87K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:75 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:12K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:5KOHM,20%,0.50W 
RES.,FXD,FILM:8.87KOHM,1%,0.125W 

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:2.2KOHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:10K OHM,5%,0.25W 

MICR0CIRCUIT,U:M0DULAT0R/DEM0DULAT0R,SCRN 
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:MODULATOR/DEMODULATOR,SCRN 



SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,6.2V,5% 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


80009 


670-8000-00 


04222 


DG015E104Z 


73138 


72PX-67-0-502M 


01121 


CB2225 


01121 


CB7505 


91637 


MFF1816G88700F 


01121 


CB7505 


01121 


CB1235 


73138 


72PX-67-0-502M 


91637 


MFF1816G88700F 


01121 


CB2225 


01121 


CB1035 


01121 


CB1035 


04713 


SC77162GH 


04713 


SC77162GH 


04713 


SZ 13903 



REV OCT 1984 



8-43 



Replaceable Electrical Parts— 2465 Service 



Component No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Name & Description 



Mfr 

Code Mfr Part Number 



F90 
F90 
F90 
F90 

F90 
F90 

L90 

LR1513 

'LR1514 

R134 
R351 
R352 
R975 

R976 
R977 

S90 
S90 
S1020 

S3185 
S3185 

V900 
V900 



159-0021-00 
159-0098-00 



119-1478-01 

108-1132-00 

108-1132-00 

311-2174-00 
311-2174-00 
311-2174-00 
311-1482-00 

311-2174-00 
311-1482-00 

260-1967-00 

260-0907-00 

260-2108-00 
260-2108-02 

154-0850-00 
154-0850-01 



CHASSIS PARTS 

FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,2A,250V, FAST-BLOW 
(SUBPART OF STANDARD & OPT. A4 ONLY) 
B010100 B012849 FUSE,CARTRIDGE:DIN,1.6A 

(SUBPART OF OPTIONS A1 ,A2,A3,A5) 



159-0229-00 B012850 



FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5 X20MM.1 .6A,250V,TIME/DLY 
(SUBPART OF OPTIONS A1,A2,A3,A5) 

COILJUBE DEFL:FXD TRACE REDUCTION 

COIL,RF:FXD,TERMINATION COMP 

COIL,RF:FXD,TERMINATION COMP 

RES.,VAR,NONWW:5K OHM,20%,0.5W LINEAR 
RES.,VAR,NONWW:5K OHM,20%,0.5W LINEAR 
RES.,VAR,NONWW:5K OHM,20%,0.5W LINEAR 
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:5K OHM,20%,0.50W 

RES.,VAR,NONWW:5K OHM,20%,0.5W LINEAR 
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:5K OHM,20%,0.50W 

SWITCH, SLIDE: DPDT,5A/250V 
(SUBPART OF 672-1037-01) 
SW,THERMOSTATIC:OPEN 97.8.CL 75.6,10A,240V 



B010100 B020999 SWITCH, PUSH:SPST,0.1 A, 125VAC 
B021000 SWITCH, PUSH:SPST.0.1 A, 125VAC 



71400 AGC2 

T0946 EQ1 .6 

75915 213016EAK.1.6 

09250 ORD BY DESCR 



B010100 
B021400 



B021399 



ELECTRON TUBE:CRT 
ELECTRON TUBE:CRT 



12697 


CM43515 


12697 


CM43515 


12697 


CM43515 


01121 


W-8070 


12697 


CM43515 


01121 


W-8070 


000FJ 


4021.0512 


93410 


430-349 


80009 


260-2108-00 


80009 


260-2108-00 


80009 


154-0850-00 


80009 


154-0850-01 



8-44 



REV OCT 1984 



Section 9—2465 Service 

DIAGRAMS AND CIRCUIT BOARD ILLUSTRATIONS 



Symbols 

Graphic symbols and class designation letters are 
based on ANSI Standard Y32.2-1975. 

Logic symbology is based on ANSI Y32.14-1973 in 
terms of positive logic. Logic symbols depict the logic 
function performed and may differ from the manufac- 
turer's data. 

The overline on a signal name indicates that the signal 
performs its intended function when it is in the low state. 



Abbreviations are based on ANSI Y1. 1-1 972. 

Other ANSI standards that are used in the preparation 
of diagrams by Tektronix, Inc. are: 



Y14.15, 1966 Drafting Practices. 

Y14.2, 1973 Line Conventions and Lettering. 

Y10.5, 1968 Letter Symbols for Quantities Used ir 

Electrical Science and Electrica 

Engineering. 

American National Standard Institute 

1430 Broadway 

New York, New York 10018 

Component Values 

Electrical components shown on the diagrams are in 
the following units unless noted otherwise: 

Capacitors = Values one or greater are in picofarads (pF). 

Values less than one are in microfarads 

0"F). 
Resistors = Ohms (Q). 



The information and special symbols below may appear in this manual. 



Assembly Numbers and Grid Coordinates 

Each assembly in the instrument is assigned an 
assembly number (e.g., A20). The assembly number 
appears on the circuit board outline on the diagram, in the 
title for the circuit board component location illustration, 
and in the lookup table for the schematic diagram and 
corresponding component locator illustration. The 
Replaceable Electrical Parts list is arranged by assemblies 
in numerical sequence; the components are listed by 
component number *(see following illustration for 
constructing a component number). 



The schematic diagram and circuit board component 
location illustration have grids. A lookup table with the 
grid coordinates is provided for ease of locating the 
component. Only the components illustrated on the facing 
diagram are listed in the lookup table. When more than 
one schematic diagram is used to illustrate the circuitry on 
a circuit board, the circuit board illustration may only 
appear opposite the first diagram on which it was il- 
lustrated; the lookup table will list the diagram number of 
other diagrams that the circuitry of the circuit board 
appears on. 



Function Block Title 

Internal 

Screwdriver 

Adjustment 

Cam Switch 
Closure Chart 
(Dot indicates 
switch closure) 

Etched Circuit Board 
Outlined in Black 

Refer to Waveform 

Function Block 
Outline 



Assembly Number 

Tektronix Part No. 
for circuit boards 




Modified Component— See 
Parts List (Depicted in grey, 
or with grey outline) 

Strap or Link 



Plug to E.C. Board 

Box j - Identifies Panel 
controls, Connectors and 
Indicators 

Coaxial connectors: 

male 

female 

Plug Index; signifies pin No. 1 

External Screwdriver Adj. 

Shielding 

Selected value, see Parts List 
and Maintenance Section for 
Selection Criteria 



Decoupled or Filtered 
Voltage 

Refer to Diagram Number 



Schematic Name 
and Number 



COLOR CODE 




DIPPED 

TANTALUM 

ELECTROLYTICS 



CERAMIC 
CAPACITORS 



OX^) and f3j — 1st, 2nd, and 3rd significant figures 
Qa) —multiplier f~M —tolerance 

TO —temperature coefficient ^-^ >~>^ 

®(t) and/or (tc) color code may not be present 
—polarity and voltage rating on some capacitors 



COLOR 


SIGNIFICANT 
FIGURES 


RESISTORS 


CAPACITORS 


DIPPED 
TANTALUM 
VOLTAGE 

RATING 


MULTIPLIER 


TOLERANCE 


MULTIPLIER 


TOLERANCE 


over 10 pF 


under 10 pF 


BLACK 





1 





1 


±20% 


±2pF 


4VDC 


BROWN 


1 


10 


±1% 


10 


±1% 


±0.1 pF 


6 VDC 


RED 


2 


10 2 or 100 


±2% 


10 2 or 100 


±2% 





10VDC 


ORANGE 


3 


10 3 or 1 K 


±3% 


10 3 or 1000 


±3% 





15 VDC 


YELLOW 


4 


10 4 or10K 


±4% 


10 4 or 10,000 


+100% -9% 





20 VDC 


GREEN 


5 


10 5 or 100 K 


±y 2 % 


10 5 or 100,000 


±5% 


±0.5 pF 


25 VDC 


BLUE 


6 


. _6 - -- 

iu or i ivi 


±Vi% 


1 6 or 1 ,000,000 








35 VDC 


VIOLET 


7 





±1/10% 











50 VDC 


GRAY 


8 








10~ 2 or 0.01 


+80% -20% 


±0.25 pF 





WHITE 


9 








10" 1 or 0.1 


±10% 


±1 pF 


3 VDC 


GOLD 


- 


10" : or 0.1 


±5% 














SILVER 


- 


10" 2 or 0.01 


±10% 














NONE 


- 





±20% 





±10% 


±1 pF 






TYPICAL 



DUAL 




y 



\\ / 





C B E 



METAL CASE 
TRANSISTORS 



PLASTIC 

CASE 

TRANSISTORS 



SHORT LEADS 
LARGE ARE CATHODES 





SINGLE 



DUAL 




, FLAT PACK 
TRANSISTORS 



INDEX 




INDEX 




LED | L 

BARS 



INDEX 



FETS 



7 16 ' \ 



■INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 
INDEX 




3-TERMINAL 
REGULATORS 



INDEX 



POWER FETS 



REF 




OUT 





HYBRIDS 



LEAD CONFIGURATIONS AND CASE STYLES ARE TYPICAL, BUT MAY VARY DUE TO VENDOR CHANGES OR 
INSTRUMENT MODIFICATIONS. 



3831-18 



(1861-20A) 2662-48 



Figure 9-1. Color codes for resistors and capacitors. 



Figure 9-2. Semiconductor lead configurations. 



2465 Service 

To identify any component 
mounted on a circuit board and 
to locate that component In the 
appropriate schematic diagra t> 



5 



1. Locate the Circuit Board Illustration 

a. In the instrument identify the Assembly Number of the 
circuit board in question. The Assembly Number is usually 
printed on the upper left corner of the circuit board on the 
component side. 

b. In the manual locate and pull out tabbed page whose title 
corresponds with the Assembly Number of the circuit 
board. Circuit board assembly numbers and board 
nomenclature are printed on the back side of the tabs 
(facing the rear of the manual). 



2. Determine the Circuit Number 

a. Compare the circuit board with its illustration and locate 
the desired component by area and shape on the illustra- 
tion. 



b. ScanthetableadjacenttotheCircuit Board Illustration and 
find the Circuit Number of the desired component. 



Determine the Schematic Diagram Number in which the 
component is located. 





A6CRT 


BOARD 




COMPONENTS 


<■»—..» 


-— 


«■: 




1 ».,. 


l 


1 


S 




ro-o.,.,. 


»,.,„„»,„ 


~0 


;: 


j:. 


:;.. | 


■«' 


" ■ 


ahs 








•*••■ 




i 



PULL OUT PAGE 

TABS FOR CIRCUIT 

BOARD ILLUSTRATION 




A6 CRT BOARD 



3. Locate the Cc 

a. Locate an 
correspor 
determin* 
and num 
(facing th 



Scan the 
schematii 
desired c< 



COMPONENT LOCATION 
TABLE 



CRT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 



ILLUSTRATION FOR 

INSTRUMENT CIRCUIT 

BOARD LOCATION 



5. Locate the Component on the Circuit Board 

a. In the manual, locate and pull out the tabbed page whose 
title and Assembly Number correspond with the desired 
circuit board. This information is on the back side of the 
tabs. 



Using the Circuit Number and grid coordinates, locate the 
component on the Circuit Board Illustration. 



In the circuit board location illustration, determine the 
location of the circuit board in the instrument. 



Find the circuit board in the instrument and compare it 
with its illustration in the manual to locate the desired 
component on the board. 



4. Determine the Circuit Board Illustration and Component 
Location 



From the schematic diagram, determine the Assembly 
Number of the circuit board on which the component is 
mounted. This information is boxed and located in a corner 
of the heavy line that distinguishes the board outline. 



Scan the Component Location Table for the Assembly 
Number just determined andfindthe Circuit Number of the 
desired component. 



II 1 ; I 


— ■_ — i--'- -(-"■-■- 




.^•s^fe 


_SK £K._JKt 



Under the BOARD LOCATION column, 
coordinates for the desired component. 



read the grid 



Figure 9-3. Locating components on schematic diagrams and circuit board illustrations 




2465 Service 



FRONT-PANEL 
CONTROLS 



<$> 



FRONT-PANEL 
INDICATORS 



^> 



CH 3 IN (0 
CH 4 IN (& 



CH 2 IN (Or 



ANALOG 

AND 
DIGITAL 
CONTROLS 



M P 



CH 1 IN (C> 



<S> 



CD (CONTROL DATA) 



AT AND AV 



REFERENCE VOLTAGES 



ROM 

I 



RAM 

T 



EAROM 




CH 3 

AND 

CH 4 

PREAMP 



AUXILLARY 
CONTROL 
REGISTER 



♦ 



CH 3 GAIN 



CH 4 GAIN 



-►BWL 



CH 2 
ATTENUATOR 



<J> 



MAG LATCH 
RELAYS 



LOW-VOLTAGE 
POWER 
SUPPLY 



CH 1 
ATTENUATOR 



♦ 



LINE (60 Hz) 



CH 2 

OUT 



CH 2 
PREAMP 



CD 



CD 



CH 1 
PREAMP 



TO ALL 
CIRCUITS 



BWL 



CD 



t 



READOUT 

3> 



ROR 



CD- 



ROY 



VERTICAL 
CHANNEL 
SWITCH 



<s> 



DE LAY LI NE 
—(73 ns) ► 



VERTICAL 
AMPLIFIER 



<5> 



ROX 



ROA 



DISPLAY 
SEQUENCER 



^> 



a a ii 



A AND B 
TRIGGERS 



HOLDOFF 



DLY 



SELECT 



A GATE 



REF 
MUX 



B GATE 



TRIG 



CD 



CD 



CD 



A 
SWEEP 



TRIG 



CH 1 X 



B 
SWEEP 

<§> 



EXT Z IN 



Z-AXIS 

AMPLIFIER 



<8> 



DC 
RESTORER 



A GATE 



HORIZONTAL 
AMPLIFIER 



<3> 



B GATE 



CRT 



HIGH-VOLTAGE 
POWER-SUPPLY 



3831-58 



Figure 9-4. 2465 block diagram. 



2465 Service 

A 



B 



D 



H 



K 




The number* 
board dolly. Tl 
instrument is ru 



3831 -59A 



Figure 9-5. A5— Control board. 



® Static Sensitive Devices 
See Maintenance Section 

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE 




Component Number 

> " \ 

A23A2R1234, 



Assembly 

tinmber 



Schematic 

J c ., ' k , L — CirCUlt 
Subassembly dumber 

Number (it used) 



Chass s-mounted components have no Assembly Numbe' 
pre' 1 * -see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List. 



A5— CONTROL 



LABELED ON SOME BOARDS AS "P" VICE "J' 



( ) COMPONENTS WITHIN PARENTHESES MAY 
NOT BE LOCATED PRECISELY AS SHOWN BUT 
ARE NEAR THEIR INDICATED POSITION. 



t INDICATES COMPONENTS THAT WERE 
MANUALLY ADDED TO THE BOARD AS A 
RESULT OF MODIFICATION. 



REV DEC 1983 



H 



K 



TEST WAVEFORM SETUP INFORMATION 



i05 



U2092 



1 


U2178 


1 









gSsSS&X 



U2108 

502 
2008 



If) 

i to i h 



R20a£ € " /■ /.. ■ 
g|31 (P503) 



< eO U2656 

O fa 



U2194 



U2294 



X A, A> fSL, jfc, | 

Pl§ m SI ^ U2556 > 

p lip OG EfJ EC? j 




SCMjtMj OIM:i cm <M C-*fN|NiiC\l|™ U/beU 

(ij t>J Ijjjf fiti ! >- ito^j^jeiteli^ 



(P512) 



) Static Sensitive Devices 
See Maintenance Section 

IPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE 



Component Number 
,A23„A2R1234 



! Schematic 

- » i— Prcuil 

Numbe r (if used; 



wuntec coTponents have no Assembly Nuribe' 
ee e"d o* ReD'aceab'e L ! ec" ; C8 ! Parts List. 



U 24681 



jrlpjiccli 

''"xxia. 



U2596 



TP§06 i@@Cra 
i-i-i- i-h- 



U2480 



bm 




3831 -59A 



* LABELED ON SOME BOARDS AS "P" VICE "J' 



COMPONENTS WITHIN PARENTHESES MAY 
NOT BE LOCATED PRECISELY AS SHOWN BUT 
ARE NEAR THEIR INDICATED POSITION. 



t INDICATES COMPONENTS THAT WERE 
MANUALLY ADDED TO THE BOARD AS A 
RESULT OF MODIFICATION. 



The numbered waveforms below were obtained at the test points indicated on the accompanying schematic diagram and 
board dolly. The waveforms are representative of signals that may be expected at the associated points whenever the 
instrument is running. 




irt 



0V 



rt 






A 



A 



H 



!H 



if"! ihT 

" 2V 



H 



r^ 



4.5V- 



0V 



r 



3.3ms 



3831-50 



REV DEC 1983 



2465 Service 



A5— CONTROL BOARD 



CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 






















C2041 


12 


P503 


1 


R2317 


2 


R2614 


2 


U2362 


1 


C2188 


12 


P511 


2 


R2319 


2 


R2645 




U2362 


12 


C2203 


1 


P511 


2 


R2320 


2 


R2646 




U2378 


1 


C2217 


12 


P511 


2 


R2324 


2 


R2647 




U2378 


12 


C2218 


12 


P511 


12 


R2325 


2 


R2648 




U2408 


2 


C2221 


12 


P512 


1 


R2330 


2 


R2649 




U2408 


12 


C2222 


2 


P512 


2 


R2340 


2 


R2650 




U2418 


2 


C2223 


12 


P512 


2 


R2341 


2 


R2652 




U2418 


12 


C2224 


2 


P512 


2 


R2342 


2 


R2662 




U2427 


2 


C2240 


12 


P512 


12 


R2343 


2 


R2663 




U2427 


2 


C2318 


2 


Q2025 


2 


R2344 


2 


R2703 


2 


U2427 


2 


C2326 


2 


Q2322 


2 


R2345 


2 


R2730 


2 


U2427 


2 


C2327 


2 


R2012 


2 


R2444 


2 


R2731 


2 


U2427 


12 


C2328 


12 


R2013 


2 


R2445 


2 


R2732 


2 


U2435 


1 


C2329 


2 


R2014 


2 


R2446 


2 


R2734 


2 


U2435 


2 


C2330 


2 


R2015 


2 


R2447 


2 


R2735 


2 


U2435 


2 


C2346 


12 


R2016 


2 


R2448 


2 


R2741 


2 


U2435 


2 


C2354 


12 


R2017 


2 


R2449 


2 


R2742 


2 


U2435 


12 


C2440 


12 


R2018 


2 


R2450 


2 


R2745 


2 


U2456 


2 


C2441 


2 


R2019 


2 


R2451 


2 


R2764 


1 


U2456 


12 


C2443 


2 


R2020 


2 


R2452 


2 


TP503 


2 


U2468 




C2475 


12 


R2022 


2 


R2463 


1 


TP504 


2 


U2468 




C2485 


12 


R2023 


2 


R2504 


2 


TP505 


1 


U2468 


12 


C2486 


1 


R2025 


2 


R2505 


2 


TP506 


1 


U2480 




C2524 


2 


R2028 


2 


R2506 


2 


TP507 


1 


U2480 


12 


C2527 


12 


R2029 


2 


R2507 


2 


TP508 


12 


U2496 




C2530 


2 


R2040 


2 


R2508 


2 


TP509 


1 


U2496 


12 


C2536 


2 


R2103 


2 


R2509 


2 


TP510 


1 


U2556 




C2540 


2 


R2113 


2 


R2510 


2 


TP511 


1 


U2556 




C2542 


2 


R2123 


2 


R2511 


2 


U2008 


2 


U2556 




C2550 


1 


R2127 


2 


R2512 


2 


U2008 


2 


U2556 




C2565 


1 


R2140 


2 


R2513 


2 


U2034 


2 


U2556 




C2566 


1 


R2141 


2 


R2514 


2 


U2034 


12 


U2556 




C2572 


1 


R2142 


2 


R2515 


2 


U2092 


1 


U2556 


12 


C2575 


12 


R2143 


2 


R2516 


2 


U2092 


12 


U2580 




C2586 


12 


R2144 


2 


R2517 


2 


U2108 


2 


U2580 


12 


C2637 


12 


R2145 


2 


R2518 


2 


U2108 


12 


U2596 




C2638 


2 


R2162 


1 


R2519 


2 


U2118 


1 


U2596 


12 


C2640 


2 


R2185 


1 


R2520 


2 


U2118 


2 


U2634 


2 


C2642 


12 


R2186 


1 


R2521 


2 


U2118 


2 


U2634 


2 


C2661 


1 


R2187 


1 


R2522 


2 


U2118 


2 


U2634 


12 


C2734 


12 


R2224 


2 


R2525 


2 


U2118 


2 


U2656 




CR2004 


2 


R2227 


2 


R2532 


2 


U2118 


2 


U2656 




CR2021 


2 


R2228 


2 


R2534 


2 


U2118 


2 


U2656 




CR2122 


2 


R2229 


2 


R2535 


2 


U2118 


2 


U2656 




CR2651 


1 


R2230 


2 


R2539 


2 


U2134 


2 


U2656 


12 


CR2723 


2 


R2241 


2 


R2540 


2 


U2134 


12 


U2668 




CR2731 


2 


R2242 


2 


R2541 


2 


U2162 


1 


U2668 


12 


CR2733 


2 


R2243 


2 


R2542 


2 


U2162 


12 


U2770 




CR2742 


2 


R2244 


2 


R2543 


2 


U2178 


1 


U2770 


12 


CR2744 


2 


R2245 


2 


R2545 


2 


U2178 


12 


VR2003 


2 


J 251 


1 


R2246 


2 


R2546 


2 


U2194 


1 


VR2526 


2 


J251 


12 


R2252 




R2547 


2 


U2194 


1 


W511 


2 


J500 


1 


R2285 




R2549 




U2208 


1 


W511 


2 


J500 


1 


R2286 




R2551 




U2208 


2 


W511 


2 


J500 


1 


R2287 




R2553 




U2214 


2 


W511 


12 


J501 


2 


R2288 




R2564 




U2214 


12 


W512 


1 


J 502 


2 


R2297 




R2571 




U2234 


2 


W512 


2 


J503 


1 


R2298 




R2573 




U2234 


12 


W512 


2 


J651 


2 


R2299 




R2608 


12 


U2294 


1 


W512 


2 


J651 


2 


R2303 


2 


R2609 


2 


U2294 


1 


W512 


12 


J651 


2 


R2312 


2 


R2610 


2 


U2308 


2 


W2143 


12 


J652 


2 


R2313 


2 


R2611 


2 


U2308 


12 


W2526 


12 


J652 


2 


R2314 


2 


R2612 


2 


U2335 


2 


Y2568 


1 


P501 


2 

i 


R2315 
R2316 

1 


2 
2 

1 


R2613 


2 


U2335 


12 




l 



REV DEC 1983 



PROCESSOR AND DIGITAL CONTROL DIAGRAM 



♦ 



B 



D 



ASSEMBLY A5 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C2203 


6C 


2D 


R2299 


9A 


3H 


U2194 


7B 


2H 


C2486 


6C 


2H 


R2463 


4C 


4J 


U2194 


9C 


2H 


C2550 


6C 


3G 


R2549 


4C 


4J 


U2208 


7C 


2E 


C2565 


4C 


4H 


R2551 


5N 


3E 


U2294 


7B 


3H 


C2566 


4B 


4H 


R2553 


4B 


4H 


U2294 


9D 


3H 


C2572 


3B 


4H 


R2564 


4C 


4H 


U2362 


8H 


3J 


C2661 


6A 


4F 


R2571 


38 


4J 


U2378 


8F 


2J 








R2573 


3B 


4J 


U2435C 


6B 


3E 


CR2851 


68 


4F 


R2645 


5D 


4F 


U2468A 


4D 


4J 








R2646 


5B 


4F 


U2468B 


2E 


4J 


J251 


5A 


2D 


R2647 


5B 


4F 


U2480 


5G 


4K 


J500 


1P 


2E 


R2648 


5B 


3F 


U2496 


8K 


3K 


J500 


4A 


2E 


R2649 


5C 


3F 


U2556A 


4B 


3J 


J500 


8P 


2E 


R2650 


6C 


4F 


U2556B 


4C 


3J 


J503 


68 


3G 


R2652 


5A 


3F 


U2556C 


4F 


3J 








R2662 


6P 


4F 


U2556D 


3B 


3J 


P503 


6B 


3G 


R2663 


4G 


4J 


U2556E 


3H 


3J 


P512 


4P 


4H 


R2764 


3D 


4K 


U2556F 
U2580 


3F 
4K 


3J 
4J 


R2162 


6H 


1K 


TP505 


4E 


1G 


U2596 


5M 


3K 


R2185 


4B 


1F 


TP506 


5G 


4K 


U2656A 


6C 


4G 


R2186 


5D 


1F 


TP507 


5H 


4K 


U2656B 


5N 


4G 


R2187 


9B 


3G 


TP509 


5H 


4K 


U2656C 


3G 


4G 


R2252 


78 


3F 


TP510 


5H 


4K 


U2656D 


5N 


4G 


R2285 


8A 


3G 


TP511 


5H 


4K 


U2668 


3H 


4G 


R2286 


9A 


3H 








U2770 


4H 


3J 


R2287 


9B 


3H 


U2092 


5D 


1G 








R2288 


8B 


3H 


U2118A 


7B 


3E 


W512 


7P 


4H 


R2297 


9B 


3H 


U2162 


6H 


2K 








R2298 


8A 


3H 


U2178 


6F 


1J 


Y2568 


4B 


4H 


Partial A5 also shown on 


diagrams 2 an 


d12. 













ACRONYM DICTIONARY 

The following listing explains some of the less obvious 
acronyms and signal labels used on this schematic. 
Acronyms and labels not shown in this listing may be 
included in the circuit descriptions (Section 3) and should 
be obvious if a little thought is given to the intended circuit 
function. 



6 



ATTN CLK . . . attenuator clock 

AO - A1 5 . . . address bits 0-15 

A000H . . . address block A000 hex 

BA . . . bus available 

BDO - BD7 . . . buffered data bits 0-7 

C000H . . . address block C000 hex 

DAC MUXO INH . . . DAC multiplexer inhibit 

DAC MUX1 INH . . . DAC multiplexer 1 inhibit 

DO - D7 . . . data bits 0-7 

E . . . enable 

E . . . enable 

EXTAL . . . external crystal 

E000H . . . address block E000 hex 

GND C . . . virtual ground "C" 

IRQ . . . interrupt request 

LED CLK. . . LED clock 

MR . . . memory ready 

NMI . . . non-maskable interrupt 

PORT 3 INH . . . port 3 inhibit 

RE . . . RAM enable 

ROSFRAME . . . readout subframe 



ROS1 (900H) . . . readout strobe 1 (address 0900 hex) 

ROS2 (940H) . . . readout strobe 2 (address 0940 hex) 

R/W . . . read/write 

R/W DLY'D . . . read/write delayed 

TRIG STAT STRB . . . trigger status strobe 

VMA . . . valid memory address 

XTAL . . . crystal 

0000H . . . address block 0000 hex 

8000H . . . address block 8000 hex 

9C1 H - 9CFH . . . addresses 09C1 hex - 09CF hex 



8 



10 




24b5 



3;iOMHZ. TO J5ll-Zfe<&>IOA 

;l 

<5MHZ TO J5I1-Z5<§>2A 



900 hex) 
940 hex) 



F hex 




=KDISP SEQ CLK TO J5U<g> 
^<ATTN CUC 1 TO ft 



3851-72 



DIGITAL CONTROL 



2465 Service 



TEST WAVEFORM SETUP INFORMATION 



The waveform below was obtained at the test point indicated on the accompanying schematic diagram. The waveform is 
representative of the signal that may be expected at the test point whenever the instrument is running. 

Also shown below is an illustration depicting timing of the D to A Converter and the output ranges that may be expected 
as the DAC sets up the various analog reference voltages. Test point locations and setup information are called out on the 
illustration. 



+4 . 5V — 



0V — + 



3.3ms 



3831-51 



i: 2: — — ■ m 
— — a. oc — 



CslU- 



n ? u £S«T~Lnji_n_n_r 



L_n_n_n_n_n_Ji_n_^^r - 



DAC MUX1 INH 
(U170-6) 



uiiULruu 



DAC OUTPUT 
(U2234-19) 



* RANGE OF 
DAC OUTPUT 
(SHOWN ABOVE) 




-1.3V 

TO 
♦1.1V 
1+1 .IV 

IN 
DETENT) 



-1.36V 

TO 
+1.36V 



M.36V+i.4V H.36V+i.4V 
1-1. 3V (-1.3V 

IN IN 



-1.36V 

TO 
+1.36V 



r 



0V 



-1.25V 

TO 
+1.25V 



DETENT) 



DETENT) 



*N0TE: AS ANY GIVEN CONTROL IS EXERCISED, THE CORRESPONDING 
PORTION OF THE DAC OUTPUT WAVEFORM SHOULD VARY WITHIN THE 
LIMITS INDICATED. 



3831-19 



ANALOG CONTROL DIAGRAM 



♦ 



ASSEMBLY A5 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C2222 


8H 


2C 


R2016 


2L 


3G 


R2444 


5F 


4B 


R2732 


9N 


4E 


C2224 


8H 


1C 


R2017 


2K 


3F 


R2445 


5G 


2A 


R2734 


9N 


4F 


C2318 


4J 


2D 


R2018 


3K 


3F 


R2446 


5F 


2A 


R2735 


9M 


4E 


C2326 


5P 


3D 


R2019 


2L 


3G 


R2447 


6F 


4C 


R2741 


9M 


4F 


C2327 


8M 


4E 


R2020 


3K 


4G 


R2448 


6G 


3B 


R2742 


10M 


4F 


C2329 


8L 


4E 


R2022 


2K 


4G 


R2449 


6G 


3A 


R2745 


10L 


4F 


C2330 


6K 


4D 


R2023 


2N 


3G 


R2450 


6H 


3B 








C2441 


6L 


3D 


R2025* 


2N 


3G 


R2451 


6H 


3B 


TP503 


5P 


3B 


C2443 


7N 


4D 


R2028 


3L 


3F 


R2452 


6H 


3B 


TP504 


6P 


4C 


C2524 


5N 


3C 


R2029 


2N 


3G 


R2504 


3E 


4A 








C2530 


6L 


4C 


R2040 


10C 


28 


R2505 


2D 


4B 


U2008 


2N 


3G 


C2536 


8N 


4F 


R2103 


4K 


2E 


R2506 


3D 


4A 


U2008 


3.N 


3G 


C2540 


9L 


4E 


R2113 


2P 


2E 


R2507 


3E 


4A 


U2034 


9D 


2B 


C2542 


9L 


4E 


R2123 


2N 


4F 


R2508 


3E 


4B 


U2108 


2P 


2G 


C2638 


9L 


3E 


R2127 


8H 


2C 


R2509 


3D 


4B 


U2118B 


2K 


3E 


C2640 


9K 


4D 


R2140 


8G 


2B 


R2510 


3E 


4B 


U2118C 


3K 


3E 








R2141 


8D 


2A 


R2511 


3D 


4A 


U2118D 


2K 


3E 


CR2004 


1K 


4G 


R2142 


8D 


1B 


R2512 


5E 


4C 


U2118E 


2K 


3E 


CR2021 


3K 


4G 


R2143 


8G 


1A 


R2513 


4D 


4C 


U2118F 


3K 


3E 


CR2122 


2P 


3G 


R2144 


8E 


2A 


R2514 


4D 


4C 


U2118G 


2N 


3E 


CR2723 


5P 


3A 


R2145 


8E 


2A 


R2515 


5D 


4B 


U2118 


1L 


3E 


CR2731 


9M 


4E 


R2224 


6G 


4C 


R2516 


5E 


4C 


U2134 


8D 


1B 


CR2733 


9N 


4E 


R2227 


8H 


2C 


R2517 


5E 


4B 


U2208 


2D 


2E 


CR2742 


9M 


4E 


R2228 


7H 


2C 


R2518 


5E 


4B 


U2214 


5K 


2D 


CR2744 


9L 


4E 


R2229 


7H 


2C 


R2519 


5D 


4B 


U2234 


7J 


2B 








R2230 


7G 


2C 


R2520 


5D 


4B 


U2308 


3H 


2F 


J501 


7H 


3B 


R2241 


8E 


2B 


R2521 


5D 


4B 


U2335 


8K 


3D 


J502 


2M 


2G 


R2242 


8E 


1A 


R2522 


5N 


3C 


U2408 


4F 


3A 


J651 


2B 


3A 


R2243 


8F 


1A 


R2525 


5N 


4D 


U2418 


5F 


3B 


J651 


5P 


3A 


R2244 


8F 


1B 


R2532 


7N 


4E 


U2427A 


6M 


3C 


J651 


8B 


3A 


R2245 


8F 


1C 


R2534 


7N 


4E 


U2427B 


6L 


3C 


J652 


3P 


2A 


R2246 


8G 


2A 


R2535 


8N 


4E 


U2427C 


7N 


3C 


J652 


5B 


2A 


R2303 


4G 


2F 


R2539 


8N 


4E 


U2427D 


5N 


3C 








R2312 


2F 


3D 


R2540 


7L 


4D 


U2435A 


9M 


3E 


P501 


7G 


3B 


R2313 


4F 


3D 


R2541 


7L 


4D 


U2435B 


9L 


3E 


P511 


4A 


4C 


R2314 


2J 


3C 


R2542 


9L 


4E 


U2435D 


8N 


3E 


P511 


6S 


4C 


R2315 


2J 


3C 


R2543 


9L 


4E 


U2456 


5J 


3B 


P511 


9A 


4C 


R2316 


2J 


3C 


R2545 


5G 


2A 


U2634A 


7M 


4D 


P512 


10S 


4H 


R2317 


4J 


3D 


R2546 


5H 


2A 


U2634B 


8L 


4D 


P512 


1A 


4H 


R2319 


4J 


2D 


R2547 


5H 


2B 








P512 


4S 


4H 


R2320 


5J 


2D 


R2609 


3D 


4B 


VR2003 


1K 


4F 








R2324 


6K 


3C 


R2610 


3D 


4B 


VR2526 


6N 


4A 


Q2025 


2N 


3G 


R2325 


5J 


3C 


R2611 


3D 


4B 








Q2322 


5P 


3D 


R2330 


6L 


4C 


R2612 


3E 


4B 


W511 


10B 


4C 








R2340 


10N 


2E 


R2613 


5D 


4B 


W511 


5B 


4C 


R2012 


2L 


3F 


R2341 


10P 


3E 


R2614 


5E 


4B 


W511 


9P 


4C 


R2013 


2K 


3F 


R2342 


10N 


3D 


R2703 


5P 


4B 


W512 


10P 


4H 


R2014 


3K 


3F 


R2343 


10P 


3E 


R2730 


8M 


4D 


W512 


1B 


4H 


R2015 


2L 


3F 


R2344 
R2345 


10N 
10P 


3E 
3E 


R2731 


8L 


4D 


W512 


5P 


4H 


Partial AS also shown on 


diagrams J and 


12. 



















ACRONYM DICTIONARY 

The following listing explains some of the less obvious 
acronyms and signal labels used on this schematic. 
Acronyms and labels not shown in this listing may be 
included in the circuit descriptions (Section 3) and should 
be obvious if a little thought is given to the intended circuit 
function. 

A TIM REF ... A timing reference 

ATTN STRB . . . attenuator strobe 

BDO - BD7 . . . buffered data bits 0-7 

B TIM REF . . . B timing reference 

CH1 OVL . . . channel 1 overload 

CH2 OVI channel 2 overload 

CH1 PRB . . . channel 1 probe 

CH2 PRB . . . channel 2 probe 

CH3 PRB . . . channel 3 probe 

CH4 PRB . . . channel 4 probe 



*See Parts List for 
serial number ranges. 

CONT DATA . . . control data 

DAC MUXO INH . . . DAC multiplexer inhibit 

DAC MUX1 A0 . . . DAC multiplexer 1, address bit 

DAC MUXT A1 . . . DAC multiplexer 1, address bit 1 

DAC MUX1 A2 . . . DAC multiplexer 1, address bit 2 

DAC MUX1 IN . . . DAC multiplexer input 

GND C . . . virtual ground "C" 

OEA35 . . . option EAROM +35 volt 

OEACLK . . . option EAROM clock 

OEAI/O . . . option EAROM input/output 

OEAC1 . . . option EAROM mode code, bit 1 

OEAC2 . . . option EAROM mode code, bit 2 

OEAC3 . . . option EAROM mode code, bit 3 

PORT 3 INH (9C3H) . . . port 3 inhibit 

RO DO . . . readout data out 

RO ON . . . readout on 

SI . . . scope identification 

TSO . . . trigger status output 



8 



B 



XS,,Sv FRO* m5u,-w >.,. ,, - 

<@RO DO FROM JSIfrtt) , • 

<^ROON FROM J5tt-U N ' " 

IS 



WAVEFORMS 



10 




/£> TRACB SEPnS 

4A "VwBII 



24b5 





EM 


BOARD 


"ION 


LOCATION 








4E 




4F 


1 


4E 


1 


4F 


M 


4F 


L 


4F 




3B 




4C 




3G 




3G 




2B 




2G 




3E 




3E 




3E 




3E 




3E 




3E 




3E 




1B 




2E 




2D 




2B 




2F 




3D 




3A 




3B 




3C 




3C 




3C 




3C 




3E 




3E 




3E 




3B 




4D 




4D 




4F 




4A 


5 


4C 




4C 




4C 


) 


4H 




4H 




4H 





*See Parts List for 
serial number ranges. 

inhibit 
address bit 
address bit 1 
address bit 2 

ut 



it 

bit 1 
bit 2 
bit 3 




38*1-73 
REV D£C 19S3 



ANALOG CONTROL 



uit Number 

rcuit board with its illustration and locate 
iponent by area and shape on the illustra- 



idjacent to the Circuit Board Illustration and 
Number of the desired component. 



Schematic Diagram Number in which the 
ocated. 




A6 CRT BOARD 




A6CRT BOARD 






COMPONENTS LOCATED ON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM^! 9 





Q606 
Q610 
Q615 
Q645 
Q656 
Q665 



Q668 

R604 
R605 
R608 
R609 
R610 
R614 
R616 
R623 
R624 



R625 
R626 
R627 
R630 
R632 



3. Locate the Component on the Schematic Diagram 

a. Locate and pull out tabbed page whose number and title 
correspond with the Schematic Diagram Number just 
determined in the table. Schematic diagram nomenclature 
and numbers are printed on the front side of the tabs 
(facing the front of the manual). 



Scan the Component Location Table adjacent to the 
schematic diagram and find the Circuit Number of the 
desired component. 



Under the SCHEM LOCATION column, read the grid 
coordinates for the desired component. 



Using the Circuit Number and grid coordinates, locate the 
component on the schematic diagram. 



COMPONENTS LOCATED ON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 



C670 
C671 
C673 
C680 
C681 
P603 



>e the Assembly 
he component is 
seated in a corner 
board outline. 



or the Assembly 
uit Number of the 



n, read the grid 



mtis and circuit board illustrations. 



PULL OUT 

PAGE TABS 

FOR SCHEMATIC 

DIAGRAMS 




SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 
NAME AND NUMBER 



2465 Service 



B 



■T" ™~* 




R3200 





i I 


|| 


J S32 °° 


-j m%s^® m 








©&f ! 


S31104 


S3110C 


§||[ S3220 j 




S3110B 




m\ ! 



r l ! j)S332!| 

R3125 j | R3150 [ te332| 

! I I 053327 



L 



MM (MEWS 



■ ®( 3S333 



)S332| 



S3175 




DS35 




M 






S33g Sj3J^_ #H1 #eD^9^^^^@^^^«5 




6 




fi\ Static Sensitive Devices 
V^f See Maintenance Section 

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE 



Component Number 

, • * 

A23A2 R1234 

\ — r — I — 

... Schematic 

tssembl, „_l t U c-rcutf 

Number Sutaemo/y Numter 

Number (if used) 



Chassis- mounted components have no Assembly Number 
prefix — see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List. 



3831-60 



Figure 9-6. A6— Front Panel and A7— Front Panel Variable boards. 



* LABELED ON SOME BOARDS AS "P" VICE "J* 



( ) COMPONENTS WITHIN PARENTHESES MAY 
NOT BE LOCATED PRECISELY AS SHOWN BUT 
ARE NEAR THEIR INDICATED POSITION. 



ALL COMPONENTS MOUNTED ON A7-FR0NT 
PANEL VARIABLE CIRCUIT BOARD ARE SHOWN ON SCHEMATIC 

niAftQAM/TV 



A6— FRONT PANEL BOARD 



CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


















CR3000 


3 


CR3200 


3 


DS3392 


3 


S3010 


3 


CR3001 


3 


CR3210 


3 


DS3393 


3 


S3010 


3 


CR3002 


3 


CR3220 


3 


J601 


3 


S3010 


3 


CR3003 


3 


CR3250 


3 


J671 


3 


S3010 


3 


CR3010 


3 


CR3260 


3 


P651 


3 


S3020 


3 


CR3011 


3 


CR3270 


3 


P651 


12 


S3025 


3 


CR3012 


3 


DS3300 


3 


P652 


3 


S3030 


3 


CR3013 


3 


DS3301 


3 


P652 


3 


S3035 


3 


CR3020 


3 


DS3302 


3 


P652 


12 


S3050 


3 


CR3021 


3 


DS3303 


3 


R3021 


3 


S3050 


3 


CR3022 


3 


DS3304 


3 


R3031 


3 


S3105 


3 


CR3023 


3 


DS3310 


3 


R3050 


3 


S3110 


3 


CR3025 


3 


DS3311 


3 


R3075 


3 


S3110 


3 


CR3030 


3 


DS3312 


3 


R3100 


3 


S3110 


3 


CR3031 


3 


DS3313 


3 


R3125 


3 


S3175 


3 


CR3032 


3 


DS3314 


3 


R3150 


3 


S3175 


3 


CR3033 


3 


DS3325 


3 


R3190 


3 


S3200 


3 


CR3035 


3 


DS3326 


3 


R3200 


3 


S3210 


3 


CR3050 


3 


DS3327 


3 


R3210 


3 


S3220 


3 


CR3075 


3 


DS3329 


3 


R3300 


3 


S3250 


3 


CR3105 


3 


DS3330 


3 


R3310 


3 


S3260 


3 


CR3110 


3 


DS3331 


3 


R3325 


3 


S3270 


3 


CR3115 


3 


DS3350 


3 


R3326 


3 


U3300 


3 


CR3120 


3 


DS3351 


3 


R3327 


3 


U3300 


12 


CR3175 


3 


DS3352 


3 


R3350 


3 


U3325 


3 


CR3176 


3 


DS3353 


3 


R3350 


3 


U3325 


12 


CR3177 


3 


DS3354 


3 


R3350 


3 


U3350 


3 


CR3178 


3 


DS3375 


3 


R3350 


3 


U3350 


12 


CR3179 


3 


DS3376 


3 


R3350 


3 


U3375 


3 


CR3180 


3 


DS3377 


3 


R3350 


3 


U3375 


12 


CR3181 


3 


DS3378 


3 


R3350 


3 


W651 


3 


CR3182 


3 


DS3379 


3 


S3000 


3 


W651 


12 


CR3183 


3 


DS3380 


3 


S3000 


3 


W652 


3 


CR3184 


3 


DS3390 


3 


S3000 


3 


W652 


3 


CR3185 


3 


DS3391 


3 


S3000 


3 


W652 


12 



A7— FRONT PANEL VARIABLE 
A6— FRONT PANEL 



REV FEB 1983 






F 








^a«*. 






• 






# 


1 




• 
• 


** 




•'.> 


2 




• 

• 
• 
• 


■» 




HI 

we 
II 

i • 


3 


i 


I • 
# 


** 




H 


4 




T5 

H 


*» 







B 



am • 



• • 



S^fcS^tf J*t • •?"• """l 1 *#•* **»P •»•>•«« " dtife 

■• • • ■• ■ • • ■■ • •■ • 1 

• * SEl ■»• x • x • -i ■■■■«£ j. • X x • j # » A 



--- l- -1- j. ^ _i .~m.w»,». i. _i_ _i_ j_ n tt 

• • %•• # # - • • • • ./ 9 X »T -__T 1 ••* 

••«*•«* -• • «1Si R3BS •• C * B 83 *" A - •• 

Sg ; ■• 2 ■• ■••• • •••• • •• • 1 # £•« *•"••* 

■» ■• ■ ■• ■• " •■ •«* *A ■ • ■ • • ■ • *f 



IS 



■rfffjM.% # ww 



•• 







Figure 9-7. Circuit view of A6— Front Panel. 



® 



Static Sensitive Devices 

See Maintenance Section 



COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE 



Component Number 



A23„A2, R1234 

I I | Schematic 

— - : ♦ ^— Orct/if 



fif used) 



Chassis- mounted components have no Assembly Number 
prefix-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List. 



FRONT PANEL CONTROLS DIAGRAM 



<3> 



ASSEMBLY A6 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


CR03000 


2J 


1A 


CR3200 


3J 


1D 


DS3391 


10P 


1E 


S3000B 


3K 


2B 


CR3001 


2K 


1B 


CR3210 


4N 


2E 


DS3392 


8L 


2E 


S3000C 


3M 


2B 


CR3002 


2M 


1C 


CR3220 


5L 


2D 


DS3393 


7F 


2E 


S3000D 


3N 


2B 


CR3003 


2N 


2C 


CR3250 


5K 


4E 








S3010A 


3L 


2A 


CR3010 


2L 


2C 


CR3260 


6J 


4E 


J601 


5D 


3C 


S3010B 


3D 


2B 


CR3011 


3D 


2A 


CR3270 


2B 


4D 


J671 


7P 


4F 


S3010C 


3K 


2B 


CR3012 


3K 


2C 














S3010D 


3L 


2B 


CR3013 


3L 


2C 


DS3300 


6B 


4A 


P651 


3S 


3F 


S3020 


3D 


3A 


CR3020 


3B 


3A 


DS3301 


6C 


4A 


P652 


1S 


2A 


S3025 


1B 


4A 


CR3021 


3B 


3B 


DS3302 


6C 


4A 


P652 


7A 


2A 


S3030 


4D 


3B 


CR3022 


3B 


3B 


DS3303 


7C 


4A 








S3035 


2C 


4B 


CR3023 


3C 


3B 


DS3304 


7D 


4A 


R3021 


3P 


1A 


S3050A 


2B 


4D 


CR3025 


2C 


4A 


DS3310 


7D 


4B 


R3031 


4P 


1B 


S3050B 


2A 


4E 


CR3030 


5B 


3B 


DS331 1 


7E 


4B 


R3050 


4P 


4D 


S3105 


4J 


1D 


CR3031 


5B 


2B 


DS3312 


7E 


4B 


R3075 


5P 


4E 


S3110A 


4M 


2C 


CR3032 


5B 


3B 


DS3313 


7E 


4B 


R3100 


5P 


1C 


S3110B 


4L 


2C 


CR3033 


5C 


2B 


DS3314 


7F 


4B 


R3125 


5P 


2C 


S3110C 


4K 


2D 


CR3035 


2C 


4C 


DS3325 


8H 


2D 


R3150 


6P 


2D 


S3175A 


3H 


3C 


CR3050 


2C 


4D 


DS3326 


8H 


2D 


R3190 


3P 


4C 


S3175B 


5H 


3C 


CR3075 


2B 


4D 


DS3327 


8G 


2D 


R3200 


6P 


1D 


S3200 


3J 


1D 


CR3105 


4J 


1D 


DS3329 


7G 


2D 


R3210 


6P 


1E 


S3210 


4N 


2E 


CR3110 


4M 


1C 


DS3330 


8J 


3D 


R3300 


6D 


4A 


S3220 


5L 


2D 


CR3115 


4L 


2C 


DS3331 


8J 


3D 


R3310 


7F 


3B 


S3250 


5K 


3D 


CR3120 


4K 


2D 


DS3350 


8J 


2E 


R3325 


8L 


2F 


S3260 


5J 


3E 


CR3175 


2F 


3D 


DS3351 


8K 


2E 


R3326 


9N 


3E 


S3270 


1A 


3E 


CR3176 


2F 


2C 


DS3352 


8K 


2E 


R3327 


9P 


3E 








CR3177 


2F 


2C 


DS3353 


8L 


2E 


R3350A 


9N 


2E 


U33O0 


8B 


4B 


CR3178 


2G 


3C 


DS3354 


8L 


3E 


R3350B 


9M 


2E 


U3325 


9E 


3C 


CR3179 


2G 


3C 


DS3375 


9M 


2E 


R3350C 


8M 


2E 


U3350 


9H 


2F 


CR3180 


5F 


3C 


DS3376 


9M 


2E 


R3350D 


7J 


2E 


U3375 


10L 


3D 


CR3181 


6F 


4D 


DS3377 


9N 


2E 


R3350E 


10P 


2E 








CR3182 


6F 


4B 


DS3378 


9N 


2E 


R3350F 


7G 


2E 


W651 


8S 


3F 


CR3183 


6G 


4C 


DS3379 


9N 


3E 


R3350G 


7M 


2E 


W652 


10A 


2A 


CR3184 


6G 


4B 


DS3380 


9P 


3E 








W652 


3S 


2A 


CR3185 


5C 


4C 


DS3390 


7G 


1E 


S3000A 


3J 


2A 








Partial A6 also shown on 


diagram 12. 




















ASSEMBLY A7 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


J671 


7N 


5D 


R3420 
R3430 


7M 
7M 


6A 
6B 


R3475 


8M 


6C 








CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


P601 


5D 


CHASSIS 


S3185 


5D 


CHASSIS 


W671 


8N 


CHASSIS 








P671 


7N 


CHASSIS 





















ACRONYM DICTIONARY 

The following listing explains some of the less obvious 
acronyms and signal labels used on this schematic. 
Acronyms and labels not shown in this listing may be 
included in the circuit descriptions (Section 3) and should 
be obvious if a little thought is given to the intended circuit 
function. 



CH1 VAR . . . channel 1 variable 

CH2 VAR . . . channel 2 variable 

DAC MUX1 IN . . . DAC multiplexer 1 input 

HORIZ VAR . . . horizontal variable 




2465 



BOARD 
LOCATION 

2B 
2B 
2B 
2A 
2B 
2B 
2B 
3A 
4A 
3B 
4B 
4D 
4E 
1D 
2C 
2C 
2D 
3C 
3C 
1D 
2E 
2D 
3D 
3E 
3E 

4B 
3C 
2F 
3D 

3F 
2A 
2A 



BOARD 
LOCATION 



BOARD 
LOCATION 




2465 



FRONT PANEL CONTROLS 



2465 Service 



A 




3831 -62C 



Chassis-mounted components have no Assembly Number 
prefix— see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List. 

Figure 9-8. A1— Main and A8— Scale Illumination boards. 

REV MAY 1984 



TABLE (CONT 



A1— MAIN BOARD 





CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 




NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 




C100 


4 


C669 


5 


CR620 


6 


L738 


11 


R216 


4 




C102 


11 


C675 


11 


CR621 


6 


L740 


11 


R217 


4 




C103 


4 


C707 


5 


CR652 


5 


L743 


11 


R218 


4 




C104 


4 


C708 


5 


CR653 


5 


L938 


11 


R219 


4 




C105 


4 


C709 


5 


CR707 


5 


L973 


11 


R220 


11 




C106 


11 


C710 


11 


CR741 


5 


LR101 


11 


R223 


4 




C107 


11 


C712 


5 


CR746 


5 


LR107 


11 


R225 


11 




C108 


5 


C722 


11 


CR747 


5 


LR180 


4 


R230 


4 




C108 


11 


C723 


11 


CR752 


5 


LR201 


11 


R231 


4 




C112 


4 


C731 


11 


CR807 


11 


LR218 


11 


R232 


4 




C113 


11 


C733 


11 


CR811 


11 


LR280 


4 


R301 


4 




C114 


11 


C735 


6 


CR950 


5 


P100 


4 


R302 


4 




C115 


4 


C738 


11 


CR951 


5 


P100 


4 


R303 


4 




C116 


4 


C740 


11 


CR956 


6 


P101 


5 


R304 


4 




C117 


4 


C742 


5 


CR966 


6 


P101 


5 


R311 


4 




C118 


4 


C803 


6 


CR972 


6 


P102 


5 


R312 


4 




C119 


11 


C805 


6 


CR987 


11 


P102 


5 


R329 


4 




C120 


11 


C806 


6 


DL100 


6 


P103 


4 


R332 


4 




C121 


11 


C808 


6 


J9 


5 


P106 


6 


R334 


5 




C122 


4 


C809 


6 


J10 


4 


P108 


5 


R353 


5 




C125 


11 


C810 


11 


J11 


4 


P121 


11 


R355 


5 




C130 


4 


C811 


11 


J100 


4 


P121 


11 


R357 


5 




C175 


4 


C817 


6 


J100 


4 


P122 


5 


R358 


5 




C176 


4 


C819 


11 


J100 


4 


P122 


11 


R359 


5 




C177 


4 


C822 


6 


J101 


5 


P141 


6 


R360 


5 




C179 


4 


C850 


11 


J101 


5 


P141 


6 


R361 


5 




C180 


5 


C851 


5 


J102 


5 


Q130 


4 


R362 


5 




C181 


5 


C852 


5 


J102 


5 


Q131 


4 


R363 


5 




C184 


4 


C853 


5 


J102 


5 


Q154 


5 


R401 


6 




C185 


4 


C854 


5 


J103 


4 


Q155 


5 


R402 


6 




C200 


4 


C907 


5 


J104 


5 


Q190 


4 


R403 


6 




C202 


4 


C908 


5 


J104 


5 


Q460 


4 


R411 


6 




C203 


4 


C912 


5 


J105 


4 


Q460 


4 


R412 


6 




C205 


4 


C933 


11 


J110 


4 


Q550 


5 


R416 


6 




C206 


4 


C938 


11 


J111 


4 


Q600 


6 


R417 


6 




C207 


11 


C940 


11 


J112 


8 


0623 


6 


R430 


4 




C217 


4 


C943 


11 


J113 


5 


Q624 


6 


R440 


4 




C218 


11 


C956 


6 


J114 


8 


Q645 


5 


R450 


4 




C219 


11 


C957 


6 


J115 


8 


Q700 


11 


R451 


4 




C220 


11 


C958 


11 


J116 


5 


Q709 


5 


R452 


4 




C221 


11 


C966 


11 


J117 


4 


Q741 


5 


R453 


4 




C222 


4 


C972 


6 


J118 


5 


R100 


4 


R454 


4 




C223 
C225 
C301 
C302 
C303 
C306 
C307 
C310 
C311 
C312 
C325 
C329 
C332 
C336 
C402 
C403 
C404 
C412 
C415 
C450 
C454 
C458 
C460 


4 

11 
4 
4 
4 


C973 


11 


J119 


11 


R101 


4 


R455 


4 




C975 


8 


J181 


4 


R102 


4 


R456 


4 




C988 


11 


J191 


6 


R114 


4 


R457 


4 




C990 


11 


J191 


6 


R115 


4 


R458 


4 




C995 


6 


J191 


11 


R117 


4 


R459 


4 




5 
11 
4 
4 
4 
11 
4 
4 
11 
6 
6 
6 
6 
11 
4 
4 


CR100 


4 


J191 


11 


R118 


4 


R460 


4 




CR101 


4 


J411 


5 


R119 


4 


R461 


4 




CR107 


11 


J411 


5 


R120 


11 


R462 


4 




CR130 


4 


J411 


6 


R121 


4 


R463 


4 




CR131 


4 


J411 


6 


R123 


4 


R464 


4 




CR140 
CR141 
CR142 
CR143 
CR144 
CR145 
CR146 
CR147 
CR148 
CR149 
CR150 


4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 


J411 
J511 
J511 
J511 
J511 
J511 
J511 
J512 
J512 
J512 
J512 


11 
4 
4 
5 
6 
11 
11 
4 
5 
5 
6 


R125 
R129 
R130 
R131 
R133 
R135 
R136 
R140 
R141 
R142 
R143 


11 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 


R465 
R466 
R467 
R470 
R471 
R476 
R477 
R478 
R479 
R480 
R481 


4 
4 
4 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 




4 


CR151 
CR152 


4 
4 


J512 
J512 


6 

11 


R144 
R149 


4 
4 


R482 
R483 


« i 
6 




C464 


4 


CR153 


4 


L101 


11 


R152 


5 


R484 


6 




C466 
C467 


4 


CR154 


4 


L107 


11 


R153 


5 


R485 


6 




4 


CR155 


4 


L113 


11 


R154 


5 


R486 


6 




C478 


6 


CR160 


4 


L115 


4 


R155 


5 


R487 


6 




C480 


11 


CR161 


4 


L219 


11 


R156 


5 


R488 


6 




C487 


6 


CR162 


4 


L307 


11 


R159 


4 


R489 


6 




C488 
C500 
C501 


6 

11 
11 


CR163 
CR200 


4 
4 


L325 
L336 


11 
11 


R161 
R162 


4 

4 


R490 
R491 


6 
6 




C512 


5 
5 
5 
11 
5 

5 • 
5 
5 
6 
6 


CR201 


4 


L403 


6 


R163 


4 


R492 


6 




C513 


CR355 


5 


L521 


11 


R165 


5 


R493 


6 




C520 


CR356 


5 


L605 


6 


R190 


4 


R494 


6 




C521 


CR358 


5 


L606 


6 


R191 


4 


R495 


6 




C528 


CR359 


5 


L607 


6 


R192 


4 


R497 


6 




C536 


CR460 


4 


L608 


6 


R193 


4 


R498 


6 




C537 


CR461 


4 


L609 


6 


R194 


4 


R500 


6 




C544 


CR476 


6 


L610 


6 


R195 


4 


R501 


6 




C617 


CR484 


6 


L611 


6 


R196 


4 


R502 


4 




C625 


CR485 
CR495 


6 
g 


L612 

1 C-fO i 


6 


R197 


4 


R502 


4 




C645 
C650 
C653 


5 
5 
5 
5 


CR600 
CR601 


6 
6 


L628 
L633 


6 
6 


nISo 

R199 
R200 


4 
4 
4 


R5i3 
R518 
R519 


5 
5 
5 




C660 


CR616 
CR619 


6 

6 


L644 
L733 


6 

11 


R201 
R202 


4 
4 


R520 
R521 


5 
5 



A1— MAIN BOARD (CONT) 



CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


R527 


5 


R811 


11 


U485 


6 


R529 


5 


R817 


6 


U500 


11 


R537 


5 


R820 


6 


U550 


5 


R542 


5 


R821 


6 


U550 


5 


R543 


5 


R822 


6 


U550 


5 


R544 


5 


R823 


6 


U550 


5 


R545 


5 


R850 


6 


U550 


5 


R550 


5 


R852 


5 


U600 


6 


R551 


5 


R853 


5 


U600 


11 


R552 


5 


R855 


6 


U650 


5 


R553 


5 


R856 


6 


U650 


11 


R554 


5 


R858 


6 


U700 


5 


R555 


5 


R860 


6 


U700 


11 


R556 


5 


R904 


5 


U735 


6 


R557 


5 


R907 


5 


U735 


6 


R558 


5 


R910 


5 


U735 


6 


R560 


5 


R912 


5 


U735 


6 


R600 


6 


R924 


5 


U735 


6 


R601 


6 


R936 


5 


U800 


6 


R602 


6 


R937 


5 


U800 


11 


R605 


6 


R940 


5 


U850 


5 


R606 


6 


R941 


5 


U850 


5 


R607 


6 


R943 


5 


U850 


6 


R608 


6 


R944 


5 


U850 


11 


R614 


6 


R945 


5 


U860 


5 


R615 


6 


R950 


5 


U860 


5 


R617 


6 


R951 


11 


U860 


6 


R618 


6 


R952 


5 


U860 


11 


R619 


6 


R956 


6 


U900 


5 


R620 


6 


R957 


6 


U900 


11 


R622 


6 


R972 


6 


U910 


5 


R624 


6 


R973 


6 


U910 


5 


R638 


6 


R981 


5 


U910 


11 


R639 


6 


R995 


6 


U950 


6 


R642 


6 


S615 


6 


U950 


11 


R643 


5 


U100 


4 


U975 


5 


R644 


5 


U100 


11 


U975 


5 


R645 


5 


U110 


4 


U975 


6 


R646 


5 


U110 


11 


U975 


6 


R650 


6 


U120 


4 


U975 


11 


R651 


5 


U120 


11 


U980 


5 


R652 


5 


U130 


4 


U980 


5 


R653 


5 


U130 


4 


U980 


6 


R654 


5 


U130 


4 


U980 


6 


R655 


5 


U130 


4 


U980 


11 


R659 


6 


U130 


4 


VR125 


11 


R669 


5 


U130 


4 


VR225 


11 


R670 


5 


U130 


4 


VR550 


5 


R671 


5 


U130 


11 


W101 


11 


R672 


5 


U140 


4 


W102 


11 


R678 


5 


U140 


11 


W103 


11 


R700 


11 


U150 


4 


W104 


11 


R701 


11 


U150 


11 


W105 


11 


R702 


11 


U160 


4 


W106 


6 


R707 


5 


U160 


4 


W107 


5 


R708 


5 


U160 


4 


W108 


5 


R709 


5 


U160 


4 


W109 


11 


R710 


5 


U160 


11 


W121 


11 


R713 


5 


U165 


4 


W121 


11 


R723 


5 


U165 


5 


W122 


5 


R724 


5 


U165 


5 


W122 


11 


R731 


6 


U165 


5 


W141 


6 


R732 


6 


U165 


11 


W141 


6 


R733 


6 


U170 


4 


W171 


4 


R734 


6 


U170 


11 


W172 


4 


R735 


6 


U200 


4 


W194 


4 


R736 


5 


U200 


11 


W666 


5 


R737 


5 


U300 


4 


W677 


5 


R738 


5 


U300 


11 


W916 


6 


R741 


5 


U350 


5 


W917 


6 


R742 


5 


U350 


5 


W918 


6 


R743 


5 


U350 


11 


W919 


6 


R744 


5 


U400 


6 






R745 


5 


U4C0 


1 1 






R746 


5 


U450 


4 






R750 


5 


U450 


4 






R751 


5 


U450 


11 






R752 


5 


U475 


6 






R753 


5 


U475 


6 






R754 


5 


U475 


6 






R800 


6 


U475 


6 






R801 


6 


U475 


6 






R802 


6 


U485 


6 






R804 


6 


U485 


6 






R805 


6 


U485 


6 






R806 


6 


U485 


6 






R809 


6 











2465 Service 
ACRONYM DICTIONARY 

The following listing explains some of the less obvious 
acronyms and signal labels used on this schematic. 
Acronyms and labels not shown in this listing may be 
included in the circuit descriptions (Section 3) and should 
be obvious if a little thought is given to the intended circuit 
function. 

APO+ . . . auxiliary pickoff, noninverting 

ATTN CLK . . . attenuator clock 

ATTN STRB . . . attenuator strobe 

BDCA . . . bypass delay comparator A 

BDCB . . . bypass delay comparator B 

BPO+ . . . second auxiliary pickoff, noninverting 

BWI bandwidth limit 

BYP . . . bypass 
CC . . . control clock 
CD . . . control data 

CH1 OVI CH1 overload 

CH2 0VI CH2 overload 

CH1 PA CLK . . . CH1 preamp clock 

CH2 PA CLK . . . CH2 preamp clock 

CH1 PRB - CH4 PRB . . . CH1 - CH4 probe encoding 

CONT DATA . . . control data 

CTC . . . capacitor, timing compensation 

DAC MUX1 INH . . . DAC multiplexer 1 inhibit 

DAC MUX1 AO . . . DAC multiplexer 1, address bit 

DAC MUX1 A1 . . . DAC multiplexer 1, address bit 1 

DAC MUX1 A2 . . . DAC multiplexer 1, address bit 2 

DAC MUX1 IN . . . DAC multiplexer 1 input 

DO+ . . . display output, noninverting 

DO— . . . display output, inverting 

DON3 . . . display output, negative CH 3 

DOP3 . . . display output, positive CH 3 

DON4 . . . display output, negative CH 4 

DOP4 . . . display output, positive CH 4 

GA3 . . . gain 3 

GA4 . . . gain 4 

SI . . . scope identification bit 

SIL . . . slow intensity limit 

TPO— . . . trigger pickoff, inverting 

TP03 . . . CH3 trigger pickoff 

TP04 . . . CH4 trigger pickoff 

TPT— . . . trigger pickoff reverse termination 

TXY . . . triggered X-Y 



REV OCT 1983 



ATTENUATORS AND PREAMPS DIAGRAM 



<5> 



ASSEMBLY A1 






CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C100 


1H 


4C 


CR148 


7G 


6C 


R114 


3N 


6D 


R329 


9L 


2D 


C103 


3G 


5C 


CR149 


7F 


6C 


R115 


3P 


6D 


R332 


10L 


2D 


C104 


2M 


5D 


CR150 


7F 


6C 


R117 


2K 


6E 


R430 


8P 


3E 


C105 


1H 


4C 


CR151 


7F 


6C 


R118 


2M 


5E 


R440 


8K 


4F 


C112 


3P 


6D 


CR152 


7E 


6C 


R119 


2L 


6D 


R450 


2P 


3E 


C115 


3P 


6E 


CR153 


7E 


6C 


R121 


2M 


4D 


R451 


2S 


3E 


C116 


3S 


7E 


CR154 


4G 


6C 


R123 


3C 


2H 


R452 


2P 


3E 


C117 


2M 


4D 


CR155 


7G 


6C 


R129 


6B 


5C 


R453 


2S 


3E 


C118 


3S 


7E 


CR160 


7L 


2D 


R130 


6B 


7B 


R454 


7P 


3F 


CI 22 


2M 


5D 


CR161 


7L 


2D 


R131 


6C 


7B 


R455 


7P 


3E 


C130 


6B 


5C 


CR162 


2L 


2D 


R133 


5M 


6B 


R456 


7S 


3E 


C175 


7K 


2D 


CR163 


2L 


2D 


R135 


4N 


6B 


R457 


7S 


4F 


C176 


7K 


2D 


CR200 


8K 


3C 


R136 


3B 


1H 


R458 


1T 


4F 


C177 


2L 


2D 


CR201 


8K 


3C 


R140 


7B 


7C 


R459 


7T 


4G 


C179 


1K 


2D 


CR460 


8S 


3E 


R141 


6B 


7C 


R460 


8N 


3E 


C184 


9M 


2F 


CR461 


8S 


3E 


R142 


6C 


7C 


R461 


9N 


3E 


C185 


9N 


3B 








R143 


6B 


7C 


R462 


9P 


4J 


C200 


8H 


3C 


J10 


1H 


5B 


R144 


5C 


7B 


R463 


8P 


3E 


C202 


7G 


4C 


J11 


8H 


3B 


R149 


4C 


7B 


R464 


8T 


3E 


C203 


8M 


4C 


J100 


1T 


4F 


R159 


7L 


1D 


R465 


8P 


3F 


C205 


7H 


3C 


J100 


7T 


4F 


R161 


7L 


2D 


R466 


6S 


4G 


C206 


7M 


4D 


J100 


8K 


4F 


R162 


2L 


2D 


R467 


6S 


4G 


C217 


8L 


2D 


J103 


8L 


4C 


R163 


2K 


2D 


R502 


3B 


1G 


C222 


7M 


4D 


J105 


8T 


3E 


R190 


3J 


2E 








C223* 
C301 
C302 
C303 


3C 
11B 
10B 
11C 


2H 
1B 
3B 
2A 


J110 
J111 
J117 
J181 


6T 
4N 

2P 
5P 


2E 
6B 
6E 
6B 


R191 
R192 
R193 
R194 


3J 
4J 
4J 
3J 


2E 
2E 

1E 
1H 


U100 
U110 
U120 
U130A 


2N 
4E 
6E 
5G 


5D 
6B 
6C 
6C 


C310 


9H 


1C 


J511 


10T 


1D 


R195 


8N 


2E 


U130B 


5G 


6C 


C311 
C312 
C329 
C332 
C450 


2H 

10C 

10M 

10L 

2P 


1C 
2A 
2D 
2D 
3F 


J511 
J512 

L115 


9B 
3A 

3P 


1D 

1H 

6E 


R196 
R197 
R198 
R199 
R200 


8M 
9M 
9M 
9M 
8H 


2E 
2F 
3F 
3F 
3C 


U130C 
U130D 
U130E 
U130F 
U130G 


6L 
5N 
6N 
4N 
6B 


6C 
6C 
6C 
6C 
6C 


C454 


7P 


3F 


LR180 


2N 


4E 


R201 


8H 


3B 


U140 


5D 


7B 


C460 
C464 


8P 
9T 


3E 
3E 


LR280 


7N 


3E 


R202 
R216 


8H 

7L 


3B 
3D 


U150 
U160A 


6D 
2L 


7C 
2D 


C466 


1S 


4F 


P100A 


1T 


4F 


R217 


8K 


3D 


U160B 


6L 


2D 


C467 


1S 


4F 


P100D 


7T 


4F 


R218 


8K 


3E 


U160C 


7K 


2D 


CR100 


1K 


5C 


P103 


8L 


4C 


R219 


8L 


3D 


U160D 


1K 


2D 


CR101 
CR130 


1K 
6C 


5C 
7B 


Q130 


6C 


7B 


R223* 
R230 


3C 
3D 


2H 
2E 


U165A 
U170 


8M 
4K 


2F 
2E 


CR131 


7C 


7B 


Q131 


6C 


7B 


R231 


3B 


2E 


U200 


7N 


4D 


CR140 


4G 


6B 


Q190 


9N 


3E 


R232 


3C 


3E 


U300 


10N 


2B 


CR141 


4G 


6B 


Q460A 


8P 


3E 


R301 


10A 


1A 


U450A 


7P 


3F 


CR142 
CR143 


4F 
4F 


6B 
6B 


Q460B 


8P 


3E 


R302 
R303 


10A 

10C 


2A 
1B 


U450B 


2P 


3F 


CR144 
CR145 


4F 
4E 


6B 
6B 


R100 
R101 


1H 
1H 


4C 
5B 


R304 
R311 


11A 
10A 


1B 
2A 


W171 
W172 


7L 
1M 


2D 
2D 


CR146 
CR147 


4E 
7G 


6B 
6C 


R102 


2H 


5B 


R312 


10C 


2B 


W194 


3J 


2E 


Partial A1 also shown on 


diagrams 5, 6 


8 and 11. 






'See Par 
serial num 


ts List for 
ber ranges. 








ASSEMBLY A8 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


DS100 


5S 


1M 


DS102 


5S 


1P 


P181 


5S 


1P 


W181 


5S 


1P 


DS101 


5S 


1N 




















ASSEMBLY A11 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


J1 


1A 


5A 


P10 


1H 


5B 


W10 


2H 


5B 








ASSEMBLY A12 




CHASSIS 


MOUNTED 


PARTS 














CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


J2 


8A 


3A 


J5 


8T 


CHASSIS 


P105 


8T 


CHASSIS 


R134 


5N 


CHASSIS 


J3 

J4 


10A 
10A 


CHASSIS 
CHASSIS 


P11 


8H 


3B 


P111 


4N 


CHASSIS 


W11 
W111 


9H 
5N 


3B 
CHASSIS 




24b5 



BOARD 
LOCATION 



2D 
2D 

3E 
4F 
3E 
3E 
3E 
3E 
3F 
3E 
3E 
4F 
4F 
4G 
3E 
3E 
4J 
3E 
3E 
3F 
4G 
4G 
1G 

5D 
6B 
6C 
6C 
6C 
6C 
6C 
6C 
6C 
6C 
7B 
7C 
2D 
2D 
2D 
2D 
2F 
2E 
4D 
2B 
3F 
3F 

2D 
2D 
2E 



BOARD 
IN LOCATION 



BOARD 
N LOCATION 



BOARD 
LOCATION 



CHASSIS 

3B 
CHASSIS 



I iPlOOft z 




3831-75 
REV MAY I9S4 



ATTENUATORS 



PREAMPS 



2465 Service 



TEST WAVEFORM SETUP INFORMATION 



The numbered waveforms below were obtained at the test points indicated on the accompanying schematic diagram and 
board dolly. The waveforms are representative of signals that may be expected at the associated points when the following 
setup conditions are observed. Any change(s) from the given setup conditions required to produce a given waveform are 
noted with that waveform illustration. 



2465 SETUP 



Connect a 200-mV, 1-kHz squarewave signal from a 
signal generator to the CH 1 and CH 2 inputs of the 2465 
via a BNC T-connector, a 50-ohm BNC cable and a dual- 
input coupler. 



TRIGGER 




MODE 


AUTO 


SOURCE 


VERT 


COUPLING 


DC 



Set: 



VERTICAL MODE 

Input Coupling 
CH 1 and CH 2 

VOLTS/DIV 
CH 1 and CH 2 

A and B SEC/DIV 



CH 1 



1 MfiDC 



50 mV 

0.5 ms (knobs locked) 



All other control settings are irrelevant. 



TEST OSCILLOSCOPE SETUP 



Connect the 200-mV, 1-kHz squarewave from the BNC 
T-connector to the External Trigger input of the test 
oscilloscope using a 50-ohm BNC cable. Externally trigger 
the test oscilloscope on the rising edge of the 1-kHz signal 
and, using a X10 probe with the test oscilloscope, set its 
Volts/Div and Time/Div ranges as required to obtain the 
indicated displays. 



00^Q^Q 



+200mV - 



0V 



1ms 



oooo 



+ 100mV — 
0V— — 



00 



0V — 



-100mV — 







+ 130mV — 
+30mV — 



# 



200ms 



+ 15V — 






WHEN L0> 
ATTENUATORS 
ARE STROBED 



3831-52 



2465 Service 



TEST WAVEFORM SETUP INFORMATION 



The numbered waveforms below were obtained at the test points indicated on the accompanying schematic diagram and 
board dolly. The waveforms are representative of signals that may be expected at the associated points when the following 
setup conditions are observed. Any change(s) from the given setup conditions required to produce a given waveform are 
noted with that waveform illustration. Where B Sweep setup conditions are referenced with a waveform, it is assumed that 
the B SEC/DIV knob is set to 100/zs/div unless otherwise noted. 

2465 SETUP 



Connect a 200-mV, 1-kHz squarewave to the CH 1 input 
of the 2465 using a BNC cable. 



t: 

VERTICAL MODE 


CH 1 


Input Coupling 




CH 1 and CH 2 


1 MHDC 


VOLTS/DIV 




CH 1 and CH 2 


50 mV 


CH 1 and CH 2 VAR 


In detent 


A and B SEC/DIV 


0.2 ms (knobs locked) 


A and B SEC/DIV VAR 


In detent 


TRIGGER 




MODE 


AUTO 


SOURCE 


VERT 


COUPLING 


NOISE REJ 


HOLDOFF 


In detent 


SLOPE 


+ (plus) 


LEVEL 


Stably triggered display 



+5V 



<& 



HOLDOFF 



0V — 



+3V — 



W/NO TRIGGER 



H*-2.4ms-H 



0V — 



V 

EXPANDED 
IN 21 



W/NO TRIGGER 



At DLY readout 

AREFORDLY POS 1 000.0 jus readout 

INTENSITY Midrange 

READOUT INTENSITY Minimum (once DLY 

readout is set) 

All other control settings are irrelevant. 

TEST OSCILLOSCOPE SETUP 

Using a X10 probe with the test oscilloscope, set its 
Trigger Slope, Trigger Level, Volts/Div and Time/Div ranges 
as required to obtain the indicated displays. 



1.1ms 




0V — 



EXPANDED VIEW OF 20 



+5.5V 



-HK 



|<- 2 . 4ms -H 



^ 

^ 



0V — I- 



BLANK 

TIME 

SET BY 

HOLDOFF 



J b 



W/NC TRIGGER 



-\ 



^2.4ms-H 



HOLDOFF 



HOLDOFF 


«-2.4ms-H 

1 h P 


k * 



rT\ 



B SWEEP SELECTED - W/NO TRIGGER 
J-*-2.4ms-H 



HOLDOFF 



+5V — 



® 



0V 
A AND B SEC/DIV KNOBS LOCKED (200ms) W/NO TRIGGER 

+5V — 

m 

0V — 
+5V — 

0V — 
+5V — 

0V — 

0V — f\ 



XI MAG SELECTED - W/NO TRIGGER 



K" READOUT 
ACTIVE 



H-2.4ns-H 



y/NO TRIGGER 



-3.6V- 



W/NO TRIGGER 



HOLDOFF-H K H — 3ms — H 



+4V 



~i n n 



TRIGGERED ON U. SWEEP -J 

POSITIVE-GOING r RUNNINC 1 
SQUARE WAVE 



3ms H 



H 3mi 



+4.5V— r* 



^ 



0V — 
-0.2V — 



+2.6V 



® 



-0.2V — 



+4V 



^ 



0V — 



VARIES W/ A SWEEP - 200p 

AREF SETTING B SWEEP - 1 



3*8 



+5V — 



^ 



0V — 





TRIG'D 
SWEEP 

\ 













+4V — 



& 



0V — 



r 



H 3ms 



-3ms- 



+2V — 



^ 



.5V— "- 



+4V 
+3V 



(•« 3m: 



+5V — 



m 



0V — 



+3V — 



-3m: 



0V — 



A SW 



+2 . 2V 



H 3ms H ^^ 



-,5V — 



A SWF 



[•« 3mi 



+4V — 



0V — 



+5V — 



A S 



-3m: 



<J> 



0V 



d awccr uiii- ! 



REV FEB 1983 



3ms H HOLDOFF | 



+4V 
+3V 



TRIG'D 



B SWEEP ONLY B TRIGGERED 



H 3ms H HOLDOFF |SWEEP| 



+5V — 



® 



0V — 



A SWEEP - 200ps B SWEEP - 100ms 



H 3ms H HOLDOFF |SWEEP| 



+3V 



0V — 



+2.2V — f 



A SWEEP - 200ms B SWEEP - 100ms 



^ 



-.5V 



A SWP - 200MS/DIV B SWP - IOTms/DIV 



- 3ms H HOLDOFF |SWEEP| 



+4V — 



0V 



A SWEEP - 200ms B SWEEP - 100ms 



\*m 3ms H HOLDOFF |SWEEP| 

+5V— f * 



Q 



0V 



B SWC.tr Ul\l_i > i r%.i outncu nr I en; !o(Js ucla i ui>i _ oi_urc 



+4V — 







0V — 



W^BM 



-3ms H HOLDOFF |SWEEP| 

A SWEEP - 200ms B SWEEP - 100ms 



(^ . 4ms 

+5V — 4 



® 



0V 



|<« . 4ms ■ 



® 



0V — 



\+ . 4ms H 

+0.4V — t i <* 



<& 



0V 



-6V — 



+3.5V — 



W/NO TRIGGER 



W/NO TRIGGER 




M-2M8-H 



^ 




5V-/ V V V V \ 

3831 -53A 



2465 Service 



TFST WAVFFORM SFTUP INFORMATION 



av — 



B 



•-f3'40>- 



R3401 



LU3401 



9~f|3403~f ' 
VR3401 . 
' R34P5"- 



! R3404 j 



C3401 



* c x R340S j 
EU3402.& j 144' f 



| R3407 



! R3408 I 



® 



Static Sensitive Devices 

See Maintenance Section 



X «'|4340| r *:- 

v R341Q . R341 1 



COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE 



3831-63 



Assembly 
Number 


Component Number 


"chematic 
Circuit 
Number 


A23A2R1234 

Subassembly 
Number (if used) 



Chassis- mounted components have no Assembly Number 
prefix— see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List 



Figure 9-9. A1 4— Dynamic Centering board. 



ALL COMPONENTS MOUNTED ON A14— DYNAMIC 
CENTERING BOARD ARE SHOWN ON SCHEMATIC 

DIAGRAM <6> 



A14— DYNAMIC CENTERING 




The numbered waveforms below were obtained at the test points indicated on the accompanying schematic diagram and 
board dolly. The waveforms are representative of signals that may be expected at the associated points when the following 
setup conditions are observed. Any change(s) from the given setup conditions required to produce a given waveform are 
noted with that waveform illustration. Where B Sweep setup conditions are referenced with a waveform, it is assumed that 
the B SEC/DIV knob is set to 100jus/div unless otherwise noted. 

2465 SETUP 



Connect a 200-mV, 1-kHz squarewave to the CH 1 input 
of the 2465 using a BNC cable. 



Set: 




VERTICAL MODE 


CH 1 


Input Coupling 




CH 1 and CH 2 


1 Mft DC 


VOLTS/DIV 




CH 1 and CH 2 


50 mV 


CH 1 and CH 2 VAR 


In detent 


A and B SEC/DIV 


0.2 ms (knobs locked) 


A and B SEC/DIV VAR 


In detent 


TRIGGER 




MODE 


AUTO 


SOURCE 


VERT 


COUPLING 


NOISE REJ 


HOLDOFF 


In detent 


SLOPE 


+ (plus) 


LEVEL 


Stably triggered display 



+3V — 



-3V — 



+ .8V — 



® 



j — *i 



lr^ 



W/READOUT ON, SIGNAL CONSTANTLY CHANGES 



,8V 



_iU 



u 



r 

u 



H 



u 



At DLY readout 

AREFORDLYPOS 1 000.0 jus readout 

INTENSITY Midrange 

READOUT INTENSITY Minimum (once DLY 

readout is set) 

All other control settings are irrelevant. 

TEST OSCILLOSCOPE SETUP 



Using a X10 probe with the test oscilloscope, set its 
Trigger Slope, Trigger Level, Volts/Div and Time/Div ranges 
as required to obtain the indicated displays. 



+4V 



0V — 



+4V — 



€> 



0V 



+4V 







0V — 




W/READOUT OFF 



•Sins - 



W/READOUT OFF 



ft 



^ 



-4V — 



+ 100mV — 



0V — 



® 



-150mV — 



+ 100mV — 



^ 



0V — 



-150mV — *\ I 



+30V — 



+27V — 



n 



+22V — 



+31 V 



& 



+27V — 



+24V- 



+4V— n 



0V — 



W/READOUT ON, SIGNAL CONSTANTLY CHANGES 



-3ms- 



+4V — 



-3ms- 



^ 



-4V — 



+100mV — 



0V — U- 



0V- 



$ 



W/READOUT OFF 
I///* / ' '"t " 



-5ms- 



-150mV — 



+100mV — 



^ 



0V — 



-150mV — *\ 1 



'*» /» 



[/# »« 



»i »■ tv 



, S * ■ * 











K 








-5ms- 








-*1 













\4\( »• W* ! f 



+ 1 .5V — 




+46V — 



+28V — 




+30V — 



+27V — 



^ 



+22V 



■ t ■ i 



n 



+ 1.5V — 



® 



0V — 



At w » - ii is \: 



■1.2V 




h 3ms H HOLDOFF |SWEEP| 



+31V 



® 



+27V — 



+24V — 



+4V— ri 



0V — ir- 



'y p - / ■ 



-3ms- 



B SWEEP MUST BE SELECTED 



*! 

+25V — 



+8.5V — 



* I i 1 1 



-3lT18 



* AMPLITUDE VARIES W/ INTENSITY SETTING 



*♦ 



-3ms- 



* J u 



*» 



uoi iTiinc i/ioicc 



l«ui,J I( imOWl II SCI ! IPIIj 



3831-54 



2465 Service 



ACRONYM DICTIONARY 

The following listing explains some of the less obvious 
acronyms and signal labels used on this schematic. 
Acronyms and labels not shown in this listing may be 
included in the circuit descriptions (Section 3) and should 
be obvious if a little thought is given to the intended circuit 
function. 



ACA ... A low-pass capacitor 

ACB . . . B low-pass capacitor 

AHO ... A holdoff 

A TIM REF ... A timing reference 

B TIM REF . . . B timing reference 

BDC . . . bypass delay comparator 

BDCA . . . bypass delay comparator A 

BDCB . . . bypass delay comparator B 

BWLB . . . bandwidth limited B signal 

CAL . . . calibrator 

CAL OUT . . . calibrator out 

CC . . . control clock 

CCA . . . control clock A 

CCB . . . control clock B 

CD . . . control data 

CHN5A.. . CH5 (for A trigger) 

CHN5B . . . CH5 (for B trigger) 

CONT DATA . . . control data 

CT . . . calibrator timing out 

CTC . . . capacitor, timing compensation 

CTO . . . timing capacitor 

CT 2 . . . timing capacitor 2 

DG . . . delay gate 

DGB . . . delay gate bypass 

Dl . . . display intensity 

DOR . . . delay offset reference 

DR . . . delay reference 

DS . . . delay select 

HRR . . . holdoff ramp reset 

HSA . . . horizontal select A 

HSB . . . horizontal select B 

I REF . . . current reference 

IT . . . timing current 

ITF . . . timing current feedback 

ITR . . . timing current reference 

ITREF . . . timing current reference 

ITRR . . . timing current reference return 

IZD . . . inhibit zero delay 

RDA . . . reset delay adjust 

ROA . . . readout acknowledge 

ROB . . . readout blank 

ROI . . . readout intensity 

RO ON . . . readout on 



ROR . 


. . readout request 


SDO. 


. sweep delay offset 


SG . . . 


sweep gate 


SGA. 


. sweep gate A 


SGAZ 


. . . sweep gate A to Z axis 


SGB. . 


. sweep gate B 


SGBZ 


. . sweep gate B to Z axis 


SROA 


. . A trigger source select 


SR1A 


. . A trigger source select 1 


SR2A 


. . A trigger source select 2 


SROB. 


. . B trigger source select 


SR1B . 


. . B trigger source select 1 


SR2B. 


. . B trigger source select 2 


SSA.. 


. A selected signal source 


SSB.. 


. B selected signal source 


SSR .. 


. sweep start reference 


STBA. 


. . A compare strobe 


STBB. 


. . B compare strobe 


TC... 


timing clock 


TCS.. 


. timing capacitor select 


TGA. 


. A trigger 


TGA. 


. inverted A trigger 


TGB.. 


. B trigger 


TGB.. 


. inverted B trigger 


THO. 


. trigger holdoff 


THOA 


. . . trigger holdoff A 


THOB 


. . trigger holdoff B 


TLA. . 


. trigger level A 


TLB.. 


. trigger level B 


TRIG STATSTRB . . . trigger status strobe 


TSA. . 


. trigger status A 


TSB .. 


. trigger status B 


TS IN . 


. . trace separation input 


TSO.. 


. trigger status output 


TSS.. 


. trigger status strobe 


TS1 .. 


. trace separation voltage 1 


TS2.. 


. trace separation voltage 2 


T^1+T?s9 trarp conaratinn 1 anrt 9 



VBBI . . . bias voltage in 
VBBO . . . b ias voltage out 
VS1 - VS4 . . . vertical selects 1 



DISPLAY SEQUENCER, TRIGGERING, A & B SWEEPS DIAGRAM 



<•> 



ASSEMBLY A1 










CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C180 


3B 


2E 


J118 


9S 


2K 


R550 


8P 


1G 


R936 


6K 


9F 


C181 


2G 


2E 


J411 


10S 


1K 


R5b1 


8N 


1E 


R937 


6K 


8G 


C306 


1P 


1B 


J411 


6A 


1K 


R552 


8N 


1E 


R940 


7M 


6K 


C512 


8F 


3H 


J511 


8A 


1D 


R553 


9N 


1F 


R941 


7M 


9J 


C513 


8E 


3H 


J512 


1A 


1H 


R554 


8N 


1G 


R943 


6M 


9H 


C520 


7C 


2H 


J512 


1S 


1H 


R555 


8P 


1G 


R944 


7M 


8J 


C528 


7F 


1G 








R556 


9P 


1F 


R945 


6M 


7H 


C536 


9F 


1F 


P101A 


7B 


3H 


R557 


9P 


1E 


R950 


7P 


6K 


C537 


9E 


2F 


P101B 


8B 


3H 


R558 


9P 


1E 


R952 


6E 


7K 


C544 


8C 


3H 


P102B 


4K 


7F 


R560 


7N 


1F 


R981 


4P 


5K 


C645 


8F 


5G 


P102D 


8K 


7F 


R643 


8F 


5G 








C650 


6E 


7K 


P107 


7S 


6K 


R644 


8F 


5G 


U165B 


8N 


2F 


C653 


6C 


3J 


P108 


4S 


5K 


R645 


7F 


5G 


U165C 


3C 


2F 


C660 


4C 


3J 


P122 


8A 


4H 


R646 


8F 


5G 


U165D 


2G 


2F 


C669 


5C 


2J 








R651 


6B 


1J 


U350A 


6C 


8B 


C707 


2M 


8C 


Q154 


4C 


1E 


R652 


6C 


2J 


U350B 


1N 


8B 


C708 


2M 


8C 


Q155 


3D 


1F 


R653 


5E 


4J 


U500 


7G 


3G 


C709 


2M 


8D 


Q550 


8S 


1E 


R654 


7B 


U 


U550A 


9P 


1F 


C712 


1K 


9E 


Q645 


8F 


6G 


R655 


7B 


1J 


U550B 


8P 


1F 


C742 


3K 


6D 


Q709 


2M 


8D 


R669 


5C 


2J 


U550C 


8P 


1F 


C851 


3H 


8E 


Q741 


4M 


6D 


R670 


2B 


1H 


U550D 


8N 


1F 


C852 


3H 


8E 








R671 


2D 


2H 


U550E 


9P 


1F 


C853 


3H 


8E 


R152 


3C 


2F 


R672 


2B 


2H 


U650 


6D 


3J 


C854 


3H 


8E 


R153 


3C 


2F 


R678 


2B 


2H 


U700 


3L 


7D 


C907 


6M 


7H 


R154 


4C 


2E 


R707 


2N 


8C 


U850B 


6J 


8F 


C908 


5M 


8J 


R155 


3C 


2F 


R708 


2N 


8C 


U850C 


3J 


8F 


C912 


5K 


9E 


R156 


4C 


2E 


R709 


1N 


8C 


U860A 


3M 


6F 








R165 


2H 


2E 


R710 


1K 


9F 


U860B 


2J 


6F 


CR355 


1P 


7B 


R334 


6B 


9B 


R713 


1K 


9E 


U900 


6L 


8H 


CR356 


1P 


7B 


R353 


6B 


2H 


R723 


2K 


8E 


U910A 


5K 


9F 


CR358 


5B 


7B 


R355 


IP 


7B 


R724 


2K 


8E 


U910B 


2K 


9F 


CR359 


6B 


8B 


R357 


5C 


7C 


R736 


2K 


9F 


U975B 


4P 


6K 


CR652 


6E 


4J 


R358 


5B 


7C 


R737 


2K 


9F 


U975D 


7P 


6K 


CR653 


6C 


3J 


R359 


6B 


8B 


R738 


2K 


9F 


U980A 


4N 


6K 


CR707 


2M 


8B 


R360 


5C 


3H 


R741 


4M 


6D 


U980D 


6M 


6K 


CR741 


4M 


6D 


R361 


6C 


3H 


R742 


4M 


6D 








CR746 


3P 


5K 


R362 


1N 


7B 


R743 


4J 


6D 


VR550 


7N 


1E 


CR747 


4P 


5K 


R363 


1N 


7B 


R744 


4L 


7F 








CR752 


3N 


7J 


R511 


4F 


3H 


R745 


3M 


6D 


W107 


7S 


«K 


CR950 


7P 


6K 


R512 


4F 


3H 


R746 


3P 


5K 


W108 


3S 


5K 


CR951 


6P 


6K 


R513 


8E 


3H 


R750 


3M 


6D 


W122 


8A 


4H 








R518 


4H 


3H 


R751 


3M 


7J 


W666 


8E 


1H 


J9 


9S 


2A 


R519 


4H 


3H 


R752 


3N 


6E 


W677 


2E 


2J 


J101 


4H 


3H 


R520 


7C 


2H 


R753 


3N 


8J 








J101 


7C 


3H 


R521 


7C 


2H 


R754 


3N 


7J 








J102 


3F 


7F 


R527 


7F 


1G 


R852 


3H 


8E 








J102 


4K 


7F 


R529 


7F 


1G 


R853 


3H 


8E 








J102 


8K 


7F 


R537 


9E 


1E 


R904 


6K 


8J 








J104 


4S 


5K 


R542 


7H 


3F 


R907 


6M 


7J 








J104 


7S 


5K 


R543 


8H 


2F 


R910 


5K 


9F 








J113 


5A 


7B 


R544 


8C 


3H 


R912 


5K 


9E 








J116 


6A 


9B 


R545 


8C 


3H 


R924 


5K 


7G 








Partial A 1 also shown on 


iiagrams 4, 6. 


3 and 11. 


















CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS 










CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


J7 


7S 


CHASSIS 


P113 


5A 


CHASSIS 


R351 


5A 


CHASSIS 


W113 


6A 


CHASSIS 


J8 


3S 


CHASSIS 


P116 


6A 


CHASSIS 


R352 


6A 


CHASSIS 


W116 


6A 


CHASSIS 



A 



B 




DLY REF i <: 



2Ah5 



BOARD 
LOCATION 

9F 
8G 
6K 
9J 
9H 
8J 
7H 
6K 
7K 
5K 

2F 
2F 
2F 
8B 
8B 
3G 
1F 
1F 
IF 
1F 
1F 
3J 
7D 
8F 
8F 
6F 
6F 
8H 
9F 
9F 
6K 
6K 
6K 
6K 



5K 
4H 
1H 

2J 



BOARD 
LOCATION 



CHASSIS 
CHASSIS 




383l-7fe 
REV OCT 198^ 



DISPLAY SEQUENCER, TRIGGERING, 



SWEEPS 



2465 Service 
ACRONYM DICTIONARY 

The following listing explains some of the less obvious 
acronyms and signal labels used on this schematic. 
Acronyms and labels not shown in this listing may be 
included in the circuit descriptions (Section 3) and should 
be obvious if a little thought is given to the intended circuit 
function. 



A+ . . . A 


k sweep 




B+ . . . B 


sweep 




BDO. . . 


buffered data bit 




BF . . . beamfind 




BTST . . 


. bootstrap 




BWI 


bandwidth limit 




BWLA1 , 


. . . A bandwidth limit 


inductor input 


BWLA2 . 


. . . A bandwidth limit 


inductor output 


BWLB . . 


. bandwidth limit B 




BWLB1 . 


. . B bandwidth limit i 


nductor input 


BWLB2. 


. . B bandwidth limit i 


nductor output 


CLB. .. 


current limit bypass 




CMB . . . 


common mode bypass 




COMPA 


... A compensation 




COMPB 


. . . B compensation 




GA . . . gain 




GADJ . . 


. gain adjust 




HSA... 


horizontal select A 




HSB . . . 


horizontal select B 




I BIAS. 


. . current reference 




ISRC. . 


. current source 




MKLRC 


: . . . mean cathode loading RC 



MREG . . . mag registration 

Q GAIN . . . quadrapole gain 

RO DO . . . readout data out 

ROSFRAME . . . readout subframe 

R/W DLYD . . . read/write delayed 

RO . . . readout 

ROS1 . . . readout strobe 1 

ROS2 . . . readout strobe 2 

SGA . . . sweep gate A 

SGAZ . . . sweep gate A to Z-axis 

SGB . . . sweep gate B 

SGAB . . . sweep gate B to Z-axis 

SIL . . . slow intensity limit 

TADJ . . . thermal adjust 

TRANR . . . transient response 

TRANS RESP . . . transient response 

TRQ . . . transient response, quadrapole drive 

TRZ , . transient response, Z-axis 

TS . . . trace separation 

TS1+TS2 . . . trace separation inputs 1 and 2 

TXY . . . triggered X-Y 

VZOUT . . . variable Z-axis output 

VQOUT . . . variable nuadraoole outout 

VS1 - VS4 . . . vertical selects 1 - 4 

X+ . . . noninverting external input 

X— . . . inverting external input 



2465 Service 



B 



~*T^ 



_> 



W411 (P422) 



il 3 U2820 



U2810 



U2800 



U2805 



U2830 



U2835 



cm 


•*9 :-■**• ; 


<* 


^■^ i 


00 


00; 00 i 


CM 


cmjcM \ 


or 

i 


mm \ 



U2900 



U2905 



U2910 



o — ■ i- N n"* 

o en o> en en , coi 

CM CM CM CM CM I CM 

or or u DC or' cd 



U2920 



.c&t «-i cm co ■* in ™> <o,t* o 

sCMtl CM§ _I c« CMJ CM ICM ICMjcMi^ 

! o» o» CBs am cm anioi \ 
icMll cm! el cm! cmI cmIIcm 
iOC orj oJ 03 or] orM ! 



.^i sp* pUR .CO, *«» !<&t j_tt CO! 

;_, i_u t- icM; icsJ ip* !5ii cms 

;OS ICO; sO5s0> OS <CDi iCOjiCOj 
'CMikMl ICMjCM iCMiCMl ^CMfjCM 

o ;> -'_ or or d or 



U2850 



U2855 



U2860 



U2930 



rOrsm 
m: ids io 
oo co oo 

CM! CM! CM 

or o § 



U2880 



J4Q2^ 



U2935 



U2940 



1 i<* 


•Q r 


1 sOS 

1 jCM 




\ ipr- 


'W j 



U2865 



U2870 



U2960 



U2965 



U2970 



U2885 



U2890 



en 

isCMi' 

;0 



U2950 



U2980 



U2985 



U2990 



U2995 



3831-64 



Static Sensitive Devices 

See Maintenance Section 



Figure 9-10. A4— Readout board. 



( ) COMPONENTS WITHIN PARENTHESES MAY 
NOT BE LOCATED PRECISELY AS SHOWN BUT 
ARE NEAR THEIR INDICATED POSITION. 



® 

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE 




Component Number 

, • s 

A23A2 R1234 

\ — \ — i — 

,, ! Schematic 

Assembly ^_i * L^ Ctrcwt 

Number Subassembly Number 

Number (i! used) 



Chassis- mounted components have no Assembly Number 
prefix— see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List. 



A4— READOUT 



A4— READOUT BOARD 



The numbered 
board dolly. The 
setup conditions < 



CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


C2830 


12 


R2920 


7 


U2855 


7 


U2940 


12 


C2835 


12 


R2921 


7 


U2855 


7 


U2950 


7 


C2851 


12 


R2922 


7 


U2855 


7 


U2950 


7 


C2855 


12 


R2923 


7 


U2855 


12 


U2950 


12 


C2860 


12 


R2924 


7 


U2860 


7 


U2960 


7 


C2885 


12 


R2925 


7 


U2860 


12 


U2960 


12 


C2901 


12 


R2926 


7 


U2865 


7 


U2965 


7 


C2911 


7 


R2927 


7 


U2865 


12 


U2965 


7 


C2913 


12 


R2928 


7 


U2870 


7 


U2965 


7 


C2926 


12 


R2929 


7 


U2870 


7 


U2965 


7 


C2940 


12 


R2930 


7 


U2870 


12 


U2965 


12 


C2950 


12 


R2940 


7 


U2880 


7 


U2970 


7 


C2960 


12 


R2945 


7 


U2880 


7 


U2970 


7 


C2970 


12 


R2975 


7 


U2880 


12 


U2970 


7 


C2980 


12 


R2985 


7 


U2885 


7 


U2970 


7 


C2990 


12 


U2800 


7 


U2885 


7 


U2970 


12 


J401 


7 


U2800 


12 


U2885 


7 


U2980 


7 


J402 


7 


U2805 


7 


U2885 


12 


U2980 


7 


P411 


7 


U2805 


12 


U2890 


7 


U2980 


7 


P411 


7 


U2810 


7 


U2890 


7 


U2980 


7 


P411 


7 


U2810 


7 


U2890 


7 


U2980 


12 


P411 


12 


U2810 


7 


U2890 


7 


U2985 


7 


R2805 


12 


U2810 


7 


U2890 


12 


U2985 


12 


R2830 


7 


U2810 


12 


U2900 


7 


U2990 


7 


R2841 


7 


U2820 


7 


U2900 


7 


U2990 


7 


R2842 


7 


U2820 


7 


U2900 


7 


U2990 


7 


R2843 


7 


U2820 


12 


U2900 


12 


U2990 


7 


R2844 


7 


U2830 


7 


U2905 


7 


U2990 


12 


R2850 


7 


U2830 


7 


U2905 


12 


U2995 


7 


R2901 


7 


U2830 


12 


U2910 


7 


U2995 


12 


R2902 


7 


U2835 


7 


U2910 


12 


VR2805 


12 


R2903 


7 


U2835 


7 


U2920 


7 


VR2925 


7 


R2905 


7 


U2835 


7 


U2920 


12 


W411 


7 


R2910 


7 


U2835 


7 


U2930 


7 


W411 


7 


R2911 


7 


U2835 


12 


U2930 


12 


W411 


7 


R2912 


7 


U2850 


7 


U2935 


7 


W411 


12 


R2913 


7 


U2850 


7 


U2935 


12 


W2851 


12 


R2914 


7 


U2850 


12 


U2940 


7 


W2913 


12 


R2915 


7 


U2855 


7 


U2940 


7 




_____ _ 



CHANNEL SWiTCH AND OUTPUT AMPLIFIERS DiAGRAM 






B 



H 



ASSEMBLY A1 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C402 


3F 


5F 


L607 


2N 


5G 


R493 


2D 


3J 


R856 


6N 


9E 


C403 


2H 


4F 


L608 


2N 


5H 


R494 


2D 


3K 


R858 


6N 


9E 


C404 


2J 


4F 


L609 


2M 


5H 


R495 


2F 


4J 


R860 


6M 


9D 


C412 


2F 


4F 


L610 


2M 


5H 


R497 


4C 


5K 


R956 


8N 


7K 


C478 


3E 


3J 


L611 


2M 


5H 


R498 


3D 


6K 


R957 


8N 


7J 


C487 


2C 


3K 


L612 


2M 


5H 


R500 


10B 


1H 


R972 


9T 


9K 


C488 


2B 


3K 


L619 


3S 


6G 


R501 


11B 


1H 


R973 


9S 


9K 


C617 


3M 


5G 


L628 


3T 


7H 


R600 


3S 


6J 


R995 


9B 


7K 


C625 


1S 


6G 


L633 


1T 


7H 


R601 


2N 


5H 








C735 


6K 


7E 


L644 


3S 


6J 


R602 


2N 


5H 


S615 


4M 


8B 


C803 


6N 


8F 








R605 


2N 


5H 








C805 


7S 


7F 


P106 


9A 


7K 


R606 


2N 


5H 


U400 


2G 


4E 


C806 


7S 


7F 


P141 


5G 


9K 


R607 


2N 


5G 


U475A 


3D 


4J 


C808 


6S 


7F 


P141 


6C 


9K 


R608 


2M 


4H 


U475B 


3E 


4J 


C809 


5S 


7F 








R614 


3H 


7E 


U475C 


1D 


4J 


C817 


3B 


7F 


Q600 


5L 


4J 


R615 


4N 


9B 


U475D 


3F 


4J 


C822 


5B 


8E 


Q623 


"IS 


6G 


R617 


3M 


5G 


U475E 


3E 


4J 


C956 


8N 


6K 


Q624 


1P 


6G 


R618 


3M 


5G 


U485A 


2C 


3K 


C957 


8N 


7J 








R619 


3S 


6G 


U485B 


2D 


3K 


C972 


9T 


9K 


R401 


3F 


5F 


R620* 


3T 


4H 


U485C 


1C 


3K 


C995 


9B 


7K 


R402 


3F 


5F 


R622 


4N 


6G 


U485D 


1C 


3K 


CR476 


3F 


3J 


R403 


2J 


5F 


R624 


1P 


6G 


U485E 


1B 


3K 


CR484 


4D 


3K 


R411 


2H 


5F 


R638 


3N 


6J 


U600 


2P 


6H 


CR485 


3P 


3K 


R412 


2F 


4F 


R639 


4N 


6J 


U735A 


5L 


7E 


CR495 


2E 


3K 


R416 


2F 


4F 


R642 


4L 


3E 


U735B 


6K 


7E 


CR600 


4L 


6J 


R417 


2F 


4F 


R650 


4L 


4J 


U735C 


6K 


7E 


CR601* 


3S 


6J 


R470 


4C 


3K 


R659 


4N 


6J 


U735D 


6K 


7E 


CR616 


4J 


6K 


R471 


3D 


4K 


R731 


5K 


7E 


U735E 


7K 


7E 


CR619* 


4S 


6G 


R476 


3F 


4J 


R732 


7K 


7E 


U800 


5P 


7F 


CR620* 


3T 


4J 


R477 


3F 


3J 


R733 


6L 


7E 


U850A 


8M 


8F 


CR621* 


3T 


4H 


R478 


3E 


3J 


R734 


6L 


7E 


U860C 


7M 


6F 


CR956 


8P 


7K 


R479 


2F 


4J 


R735 


6L 


7E 


U950 


9P 


8K 


CR966 


8S 


9K 


R480 


3E 


2J 


R800 


7N 


8F 


U975A 


4D 


6K 


CR972 


9S 


9K 


R481 


3E 


4K 


R801 


7M 


8F 


U975C 


8J 


6K 


DL100 


2J 


5F 


R482 


3D 


4K 


R802 


7N 


8G 


U980B 


8H 


6K 


DL100 


2J 


5K 


R483 


2C 


4K 


R804 


6S 


7F 


U980C 


7H 


6K 


J191 


8T 


8K 


R484 


3D 


4K 


R805 


6S 


7F 








J191 


9L 


8K 


R485 


4C 


4K 


R806 


7S 


7F 


W106 


9A 


7K 


J411 


10T 


1K 


R486 


2C 


4K 


R809 


6S 


7F 


W141 


7G 


9K 


J411 


2B 


1K 


R487 


2C 


3K 


R817 


2B 


6F 


W141 


9C 


9K 


J511 


4B 


1D 


R488 


2B 


3K 


R820 


6M 


6E 


W916 


1T 


7H 


J512 


10B 


1H 


R489 


2B 


3K 


R821 


6M 


6E 


W917 


3T 


7H 


J512 


10T 


1H 


R490 


1C 


3J 


R822 


5B 


6E 


W918 


6T 


7F 


L403 


2H 


4F 


R491 


1D 


3J 


R823 


6M 


8E 


W919 


6T 


7F 


L605 


2N 


5H 


R492 


2E 


3J 


R850 


7L 


8F 








L606 


2N 


5J 








R855 


6N 


6F 








Partial A1 also shown on 


diagrams 4, 5 


, 8 and 11. 




ASSEMBLY A9 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


P191 


9L 


4B 


R1820 
R1834 


9K 
9L 


1B 
1B 


R1842 


9K 


1C 








Partial A9 also shown on 


diagrams 8 at 


id 12. 


















ASSEMBLY A14 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C3401 


9D 


2B 


R3402 


8E 


1B 


R3408 


7F 


2B 


U3402 


7E 


2B 








R3403 


6D 


2A 


R3409 


6E 


2B 








J141 


5F 


2B 


R3404 


8F 


2B 


R3410 


8D 


3A 


VR3401 


5D 


2A 


J141 


6C 


2B 


R3405 
R3406 


7D 
7D 


2A 
2B 


R3411 


8D 


3B 








R3401 


8F 


1A 


R3407 


6F 


2A 


U3401 


8E 


2B 








CHASSIS MOUNTED 


PARTS 










CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


J6 


9A 


CHASSIS 





















*See Parts List for 
serial number ranges. 



8 



10 




4P I 



11 



Al 



MAIN B0AR.0 



24b5 



3831-77 
REV MfcY I' 



D 
ON 



*See Parts List for 
serial number ranges. 



D 
ON 



D 
ON 



D 
ON 




TCCT \MA\tCCr\QMl 

■ t-w ■ v vr-% v h_i x^ mvi 



CCTIID IMCnDMATinM 
vjl-ivsi iivi vmvini iviv 



The numbered waveforms below were obtained at the test points indicated on the accompanying schematic diagram and 
board dolly. The waveforms are representative of signals that may be expected at the associated points when the indicated 
setup conditions are observed. 



+ .8V — 



® 




9V — J- KJ u 



W/READOUT ON, SIGNAL CONSTANTLY CHANGES 



+3V' 



Lr^ 



V/READOUT ON, SIGNAL CONSTANTLY CHANGES 



3831-55 



READOUT DIAGRAM 



♦ 



ACRONYM DICTIONARY 

The following listing explains some of the less obvious 
acronyms and signal labels used on this schematic. 
Acronyms and labels not shown in this listing may be 
included in the circuit descriptions (Section 3) and should 
be obvious if a little thought is given to the intended circuit 
function. 



ASSEMBLY A4 
















CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C2911 


2K 


4A 


R2945 


2B 


4C 


U2900B 


5L 


2A 








R2975 


7M 


4D 


U2900B 


9L 


2A 


J401 


1H 


3C 


R2985 


8E 


3F 


U2900C 


5L 


2A 


J402 


3H 


3D 








U2905 


4K 


3A 








U2800 


4P 


2B 


U2910 


1K 


3A 


P411 


1A 


1A 


U2805 


2P 


2B 


U2920 


2F 


3B 


P411 


1S 


1A 


U2810A 


6L 


2A 


U2930 


1H 


3D 


P411 


9S 


1A 


U2810B 


6L 


2A 


U2935 


1D 


3C 








U2810C 


6N 


2A 


U2940A 


2C 


4C 


R2830 


8C 


1B 


U2810D 


5N 


2A 


U2940B 


1B 


4C 


R2841 


5M 


2C 


U2820A 


5P 


2A 


U2950A 


9E 


4D 


R2842 


3B 


2C 


U2820B 


3P 


2A 


U2950B 


9J 


4D 


R2843 


4B 


2C 


U2830A 


8C 


1C 


U2960 


3D 


2E 


R2844 


5B 


2C 


U2830B 


7B 


1C 


U2965A 


5C 


3E 


R2850 


9D 


1D 


U2835A 


6G 


2C 


U2965B 


9H 


3E 


R2901 


5M 


2B 


U2835B 


9K 


2C 


U2965C 


4F 


3E 


R2902 


3F 


2B 


U2835C 


9G 


2C 


U2965D 


9M 


3E 


R2903 


5P 


2A 


U2835D 


2E 


2C 


U2970A 


9N 


3E 


R2905 


5P 


2A 


U2850A 


9D 


1D 


U2970B 


9H 


3E 


R2910 


1K 


4A 


U2850B 


9E 


1D 


U2970C 


7G 


3E 


R2911 


1K 


4A 


U2855A 


7B 


2D 


U2970D 


9G 


3E 


R2912 


2L 


4A 


U2855B 


6E 


2D 


U2980A 


9H 


2E 


R2913 


3L 


4A 


U2855C 


3E 


2D 


U2980B 


8P 


2E 


R2914 


3L 


4B 


U2855D 


3E 


2D 


U2980C 


9N 


2E 


R2915 


4L 


4B 


U2860 


5F 


2D 


U2980D 


5E 


2E 


R2920 


4M 


3B 


U2865 


6D 


2E 


U2985 


8F 


3E 


R2921 


5M 


3B 


U2870A 


6F 


2E 


U2990A 


8E 


3E 


R2922 


5M 


3B 


U2870B 


5F 


2E 


U2990B 


9H 


3E 


R2923 


4M 


3B 


U2880A 


8J 


1E 


U2990C 


9M 


3E 


R2924 


4M 


3B 


U2880B 


8P 


IE 


U2990D 


8M 


3E 


R2925 


4M 


3B 


U2885A 


10H 


2F 


U2995 


9M 


4E 


R2926 


5M 


4C 


U2885B 


8J 


2F 








R2927 


2H 


3C 


U2885C 


8S 


2F 


VR2925 


4M 


3C 


R2928 


4L 


4B 


U2890A 


8B 


2E 








R2929 


4L 


4B 


U2890B 


9K 


2E 


W411 


10S 


1A 


R2930 


4M 


4B 


U2890C 


8L 


2E 


W411 


1A 


1A 


R2940 


8D 


3D | 


U2890D 


9K 


2E 


W411 


5S 


1A 


Partial A4 also shown on 


diagram 12. 






•= 









BDO. . . buffered data bit 

CAO - CA6 . . . character address bits 0-7 

CDO - CD7 . . . character data bits 0-7 

DD0- DD7 ... dot data bits 0-7 

EOCH . . . end of character 

EOCH1 . . . end of character delayed 1 dot 

EOCH2 . . . end of character delayed 2 dots 

RAO - RA6 . . . RAM address bits 0-6 

ROA . . . readout acknowledge 



ROB . . . readout blank 

RO D O . . . readout data out 

ROR . . . readout request 

ROR DOT TIMER DELAY . . . readout request dot timer delay 

RQSF RAME . . . readout subframe 

ROS1 . . . readout strobe 1 

RO_S2 . . . readout strobe 2 

R/W DLYD . . . read/write delayed 

SGA . . . sweep qate A 




10 



FROM [SB> 
J4llJ 



24b5 




READOUT 



2465 Service 



B 



A9— HIGH VOLTAGE BOARD 




383 1-65 A 



Figure 9-11. A9— High Voltage board. 



* LABELED ON SOME BOARDS AS "P" VICE "J' 

t INDICATES COMPONENTS THAT WERE 
MANUALLY ADDED TO THE BOARD AS A 
RESULT OF MODIFICATION. 



ACRONYM DICTIONARY 

The following listing explains some of the less obvious 
acronyms and signal labels used on this schematic. 
Acronyms and labels not shown in this listing may be 
included in the circuit descriptions (Section 3) and should 
be obvious if a little thought is given to the intended circuit 
function. 

PDA (14KV) . . . post deflection accelerator 
VQOUT . . . variable quadrapole out 
VZOUT , , . variable 2-axis out 



COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE 



, Static Sensitive Devices 

See Maintenance Section 



Assembly 
Number 



Component Number 
A23A2 R1234 

i I j Schematic 

— ' „ * ,., L— Grcuit 
Subassembly Num6er 

Number (if used) 



Chassis-mounted components have no Assembly Number 
prefix— see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List. 



CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


C90 


8 


L1974 


8 


R1896 


8 


C91 


8 


P191 


6 


R1897 


8 


C1812 


8 


P191 


8 


R1898 


8 


C1813 


8 


P191 


8 


R1910 


8 


C1886 


8 


P191 


12 


R1911 


8 


C1888 


8 


Q1851 


8 


R1913 


8 


C1889 


8 


Q1852 


8 


R1920 


8 


C1890 


8 


Q1890 


8 


R1921 


8 


C1891 


8 


Q1980 


8 


R1922 


8 


C1909 


12 


Q1981 


8 


R1922 


8 


C1912 


8 


R1812 


8 


R1933 


12 


C1915 


8 


R1813 


8 


R1941 


8 


C1932 


8 


R1820 


6 


R1944 


8 


C1950 


8 


R1830 


8 


R1945 


8 


C1951 


8 


R1834 


6 


R1950 


8 


C1971 


8 


R1842 


6 


R1951 


8 


C1972 


8 


R1848 


8 


R1952 


8 


C1973 


8 


R1853 


8 


R1953 


8 


C1980 


8 


R1854 


8 


R1971 


8 


C1990 


8 


R1855 


8 


R1972 


8 


C1991 


8 


R1856 


8 


R1973 


8 


CR1894 


8 


R1857 


8 


R1990 


8 


CR1896 


8 


R1858 


8 


R1991 


8 


CR1915 


8 


R1864 


8 


R1992 


8 


CR1930 


8 


R1870 


8 


R1994 


8 


CR1950 


8 


R1871 


8 


T1970 


8 


CR1951 


8 


R1872 


8 


U1830 


8 


CR1953 


8 


R1873 


8 


U1890 


8 


CR1990 


8 


R1878 


8 


U1890 


8 


DS90 


8 


R1880 


8 


U1890 


12 


DS91 


8 


R1881 


8 


U1956 


8 


J901 


8 


R1890 


8 


U1956 


8 


J901 


8 


R1891 


8 


U1956 


12 


J901 


8 


R1892 


8 


VR1891 


8 


J902 


8 


R1893 


8 


W1909 


12 


J903 


8 


R1895 


8 






J904 


8 











A9— HIGH VOLTAGE 



A13— CRT TERMINATION 




REV OCT 1983 



HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY AND CRT DIAGRAM 



— — —— , 

ASSEMBLY A1 


CIRCUIT SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C975 3D 


7B 


J112 
J114 


3C 
2C 


7B 
8B 


J115 


4C 


8B 








Partial A1 also shown on 


diagrams 4, 5, 


6 and 11. 


















ASSEMBLY A9 


CIRCUIT SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C90* 9H 


3A 


CR1990 


8E 


3E 


R1853 


4F 


2C 


R1922 


7E 


4B 


C91 8H 


2A 








R1854 


5F 


2C 


R1941 


7E 


4C 


C1812 4F 


1A 


DS90 


7H 


3A 


R1855 


4E 


2C 


R1944 


6C 


4C 


C1813 5F 


1A 


DS91 


8H 


4A 


R1856 


4E 


2C 


R1945 


6D 


4C 


C1886 8C 


2D 








R1857 


5E 


2C 


R1950 


7C 


4C 


C1888 3M 


1E 


J901 


3M 


3A 


R1858 


5E 


2C 


R1951 


7A 


4D 


C1889 8B 


2E 


J901 


4J 


3A 


R1864 


3F 


1D 


R1952 


6B 


4D 


C1890 5S 


2A 


J901 


5M 


3A 


R1870 


3N 


1D 


R1953 


7C 


4C 


C1891 3G 


1B 


J902 


2J 


1E 


R1871 


4F 


1D 


R1971 


6B 


4D 


C1912 6N 


4A 


J903 


4M 


1E 


R1872 


5F 


1D 


R1972 


6C 


4D 


C1915* 6E 


4B 


J904 


5P 


1E 


R1873 


3F 


2D 


R1973 


6C 


4D 


C1932 6D 


4B 








R1878 


8D 


1D 


R1990 


3G 


3E 


C1950 7B 


3C 


L1974 


9A 


4E 


R1880 


4H 


1E 


R1991 


8D 


2E 


C1951 7B 


4D 








R1881 


8E 


3E 


R1992 


8E 


3E 


C1971 8E 


4D 


P191 


2E 


4B 


R1890 


3G 


2E 


R1994 


8E 


4E 


C1972 8A 


4E 


P191 


7A 


4B 


R1891 


4G 


2E 








C1973 6C 


4D 








R1892 


3G 


2E 


T1970 


10B 


3D 


C1980 8B 


3E 


Q1851 


4F 


1C 


R1893 


3G 


2E 








C1990 8D 


3E 


Q1852 


5F 


1D 


R1895 


5S 


1A 


U1830 


8G 


2B 


C1991 7E 


4E 


Q1890 


3H 


1E 


R1896 


5S 


3A 


U1890A 


8D 


2E 


CR1894 8C 


1E 


Q1980 


8E 


3E 


R1897 


3H 


1B 


U1890B 


3G 


2E " 


CR1895 8B 


2E 


Q1981 


8B 


3E 


R1898 


4N 


1E 


U1956A 


6C 


4C 


CR1915* 7E 


4B 








R1910 


6P 


4A 


U1956B 


6B 


4C 


CR1930 7E 


4B 


R1812 


4F 


2A 


R1911 


6P 


4A 








CR1950 7E 


4C 


R1813 


5F 


1A 


R1913- 


7E 


4B 


VR1891 


5S 


1A 


CR1951 7E 


4C 


R1830- 


9E 


4A 


R1920 


7E 


4B 








CR1953 7C 


4C 


R1848 


4N 


1C 


R1921 


6P 


4B 








Partial A9 also shown on 


diagrams 6 an 


112. 


















ASSEMBLY A13 


CIRCUIT SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


J904 5P 


R1501 


5N 


" 






CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS 


CIRCUIT SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 










L90 2L 


CHASSIS 


P901 


3M 


CHASSIS 


R976 


5B 


CHASSIS 


W115 


5B 


CHASSIS 






P901 


4J 


CHASSIS 


R977 


4B 


CHASSIS 


W900 


3M 


CHASSIS 


LR1513 5M 


CHASSIS 


P901 


5M 


CHASSIS 


R996 


3K 


CHASSIS 


W900 


6J 


CHASSIS 


LR1514 5M 


CHASSIS 


P902 


2J 


CHASSIS 








W900 


7J 


CHASSIS 






P903 


4M 


CHASSIS 


V900 


2L 


CHASSIS 


W900 


7M 


CHASSIS 


P112 3C 


CHASSIS 


P904 


5P 


CHASSIS 








W902 


3J 


CHASSIS 


P114 2C 


CHASSIS 








W112 


4B 


CHASSIS 


W903 


4M 


CHASSIS 


P115 4C 


CHASSIS 


R975 


2B 


CHASSIS 


W114 


3B 


CHASSIS 


W904 


5P 


CHASSIS 



B 



H 



•• BOARD ILLUSTRATION NOT SHOWN 



*See Parts List for 
serial number ranges. 



WAVEFORMS 



iOTATiON^ RS75: 



I ASTISOI ^ 



R ^ GUW0 jfor 



[Focus! ^ £•- 



,A9h„ 



(*U4V) 



8 



<$>IOS 




CISB9 
.022 CRI89+ 



1 O! 



c ROM 019.1-5 » , I 



<$> 




J : 



2200¥ CR ' 950 
j )|— | CI97I 

3^* / ^otdca^)V7 



3. 



I CRI990S 



RIS78 • _ 
200K >Q 



sse ?mr$ list fob emueh 

VAIUE8 AND SE«"*L NUMBER 
S*NGES OF PARTS OUTLSffiO OB 
DtEP!CTED!N<J!»E¥. 



UI830 

HIGH VOLTAGE 
MODULE 



W C 



M — I » va— * — wv * 



J! 



24G5 



BOARD 
I LOCATION 



BOARD 
LOCATION 



4B 
4C 
4C 
4C 
4C 
4D 
4D 
4C 
4D 
4D 
4D 
3E 
2E 
3E 
4E 

3D 

2B 
2E 
2E 
4C 
4C 



BOARD 
LOCATION 



BOARD 
LOCATION 



CHASSIS 
CHASSIS 
CHASSIS 
CHASSIS 
CHASSIS 
CHASSIS 
CHASSIS 
CHASSIS 



hi OWN 



B 



H 



K 



M 



N 



WAVEFORMS 



8 



Oios 



10 



V900 



ST 




3851-79 

R-E.V DEC iOi&i 



HIGH VOLTAGE 5UPPLY AND CRT 



TEST WAVEFORM SETUP INFORMATION 



The numbered waveforms below were obtained at the test points indicated on the accompanying schematic diagram and 
board dolly. The waveforms are representative of signals that may be expected at the associated points whenever the 
instrument is running, 



® 



+60V — 



W*i 



■2.5(J8 H-5ms| 



+10V — J w* 



Wi 



WWM. 



AMPLITUDE WILL VARY BETWEEN INSTRUMENTS 
^■25m8* 



+ 10V — 



-20V 




® 



+ 150V 



-150V — 




0V ■ — 



^ 



+45V — 




-45V — 



® 



+78V — 



+8.5V- 



. 5ps 
K2.5MS-H-4 




fl> 



+15V 



0V- 



-I 



UAPM IIP rtPI AY 



~ 8 MIN 



3831-56 



2465 Service 



B 



H 



8 



1?Sf|l33(i) : " ;( 8l^''3- 




DEX~2 



'^Rf3^as 

B 






W251 
(P251) 



t1 3d) I ( ©1 33§> 1 I m 3§£) 1 Jkd,lh SSI r— r 

s>„,x x^,^ v..^ |5l"''jS^ s H5I2P^«£ii i; f)r 



TP201f 



R1292i 



J232A~ 

L f 

)j iiNi !' 

i i in 



A2 



feJ®130tt;i 



:£J (dc 



R1287 Is- 



l|M^{fi]M]«| 



£|%J137sK 



"_72" 



I El |Q1351| 






'i "SMnsiSHs 



r— , P r&N--^ *' ^~* J__ Q _J 

yJil. v f Ki *) © *i? t F 1 f i 




§-{51394.; 










tM&j 





A3 



The numbered w 
board dolly. The v 
instrument is runnin 



LABELED ON SOME BOARDS AS "P" VICE "J' 



$ THESE COMPONENTS MAY NOT EXIST IN 
EARLIER INSTRUMENTS. 



( ) COMPONENTS WITHIN PARENTHESES MAY 
NOT BE LOCATED PRECISELY AS SHOWN BUT 
ARE NEAR THEIR INDICATED POSITION. 



ALL COMPONENTS MOUNTED ON A3— INVERTER 
BOARD ARE SHOWN ON SCHEMATIC 



+11.5V- 



m 



DIAGRAM 



<3> 



0V — 



+2V — 



$ 



A3— INVERTER 




A2— REGULATOR +.25V — 



+2V — 



I f y u 



fc 



+ .25V — 



+ 12V 



f+* 



# 



X?\ Static Sensitive Devices 
V3' See Maintenance Section 

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE 



ini-i RRn 



& 



Component Number 
A23A2 R1234 ' 



7~H 

Assembly J » |_ 

Number Subassembly 

Number (if used) 



Schematic 
■ Circuit 



+ .5V — 



•y f 



Figure 9-12. A2— Regulator and A3— Inverter boards. 



REV MAY 1984 



Chassis-mounted components have no Assembly Number 
oref-« — see en? o< SeD'aceable uecir'cai Pjrts L>st. 



H 



ES j WAVEFORM SETUP INFORMATION 



-#ff3l§41§ 



§ i Igi «--B31P^)gJtj 1 30f I 




W251 
(P251) 



J232A 






JP2Q1J— - , = 3 ^— 



X 



ico 



A2 



: JQ1351 



tx?ao>|Djj: 
^P 1 M 



•KM K^ 8 ^* ^T^ I. 

Miss*©' 
P4srt @ jTrrao§^ a B1 W 












3MR 1357 k© 
HR13581 



P ©-Ifflja® §jj i27g* nJSJll}"® 



3 Pn M 00 f 00 ! O I >« * ir-** h" 



ft ^#S>i>5*? in? fM 



(*)* ^^™«fri333^™^) 






: '- 



5^*63333^® 1 






Jlmm 

L1402~l 



■nr 



^ ! co [ml 



■P 



®-B3aQf^|g| i ||| 



ZJ 







£\ 24022 






Jil02^ 



@JirTUTiEL^gi 



(§™RT02TL^g 




94frru2|-..gj .y-^niJ2|t~@ 



S^TtJ?® ______ 

q.__=f pton§ s3™k ' 



:»ilfc^-*iscrrrr«i.^r---^ i 



^™«™| 






IBU-^a 



3 



;<» 1 o3®| ^ti:jr^i^ - ^HrLL^g^KQfp^rfo 1 o 

gL__J§S ^^3(^mm^&^mmiJ Vx 



O 



A3 



The numbered waveforms below were obtained at the test points indicated on the accompanying schematic diagram and 
board dolly. The waveforms are representative of signals that may be expected at the associated points whenever the 
instrument is running. 



* LABELED ON SOME BOARDS AS "P" VICE "J' 



* THESE COMPONENTS MAY NOT EXIST IN 
EARLIER INSTRUMENTS. 



( ) COMPONENTS WITHIN PARENTHESES MAY 
NOT BE LOCATED PRECISELY AS SHOWN BUT 
ARE NEAR THEIR INDICATED POSITION. 



ALL COMPONENTS MOUNTED ON A3— INVERTER 
BOARD ARE SHOWN ON SCHEMATIC 



+11.5V- 



$ 



24p* 



DIAGRAM 



<§> 



0V — 



+2V- 



+ 12V — 



rH 



■48jj8- 



* 



-48y«- 



■*) 



r~n 



$ 



A3— INVERTER 




A2— REGULATOR + , 25V — 



rnpi 



+ .5V — 



+3V — 



rnHi 



^ — 1| — )f 



H»— 24ps— H 



r 



*y — y — f 



+2V — 



H 48m© - 



i — r~i 



m 



+ .25V — 



+12V — 



y y " a 



0V — 




+ 11V- 



H 48ps- 



^ 



© 



f5v c*-t;„ c-..:*:... n...:.. 



See Maintenance Section 



COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE 



(S> 



3831 -66C 



REV MAY 1984 







Component Number 
A23A2 R1234 

teemWy ; T S ^ m f t 

Ni/mter SuiassemD/y """ UrC "" 

Number (if used) 



Number 



+ .5V — 



"v — v — ir 



l — r-/l 



11 — v — v^ 



0V — 



+ .4V — 



0V — 



.4V — 



24jjs 




Chassis- mounted components have no Assembly Number 
prefix— see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List. 



3831-57 



2465 Service 



A2— REGULATOR BOARD 



CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


C1016 


9 


CR1351 


10 


R1015 


9 


R1331 


10 


C1018 


9 


CR1376 


10 


R1016 


9 


R1332 


10 


C1208 


9 


E1001 


9 


R1017 


9 


R1333 


10 


C1220 


10 


E1002 


9 


R1018 


9 


R1334 


10 


C1222 


10 


F1330 


10 


R1019 


9 


R1351 


10 


C1226 


10 


J121 


10 


R1204 


10 


R1352 


10 


C1240 


10 


J122 


9 


R1208 


9 


R1353 


10 


C1245 


10 


J122 


10 


R1212 


10 


R1354 


10 


C1246 


10 


J201 


10 


R1220 


10 


R1355 


10 


C1260 


10 


J 202 


10 


R1221 


10 


R1356 


10 


C1261 


10 


J 203 


10 


R1222 


10 


R1357 


10 


C1270 


10 


J 204 


9 


R1223 


10 


R1358 


10 


C1272 


10 


J 205 


9 


R1226 


10 


R1359 


10 


C1274 


10 


J206 


9 


R1227 


10 


R1370 


10 


C1280 


10 


J207 


9 


R1228 


10 


R1372 


10 


C1290 


10 


J231 


9 


R1229 


10 


R1374 


10 


C1291 


10 


J232 


10 


R1240 


10 


R1376 


10 


C1300 


10 


J232 


10 


R1241 


10 


R1378 


10 


C1330 


10 


J233 


10 


R1242 


10 


R1400 


10 


C1331 


10 


J233 


10 


R1243 


10 


R1402 


10 


C1350 


10 


J 234 


10 


R1244 


10 


RT1010 


9 


C1357 


10 


J234 


10 


R1246 


10 


RT1016 


9 


C1374 


10 


J234 


10 


R1247 


10 


S350 


9 


C1400 


10 


L1011 


9 


R1248 


10 


T1229 


9 


C1402 


10 


L1012 


9 


R1249 


10 


TP201 


10 


CR1011 


9 


L1402 


10 


R1261 


10 


U1260 


10 


CR1220 


10 


P251 


10 


R1262 


10 


U1270 


10 


CR1221 


10 


Q1220 


10 


R1264 


10 


U1270 


10 


CR1241 


10 


Q1221 


10 


R1270 


10 


U1270 


10 


CR1242 


10 


Q1222 


10 


R1273 


10 


U1270 


10 


CR1243 


10 


Q1223 


10 


R1274 


10 


U1270 


10 


CR1244 


10 


Q1240 


10 


R1280 


10 


U1281 


10 


CR1260 


10 


Q1241 


10 


R1281 


10 


U1281 


10 


CR1261 


10 


Q1243 


10 


R1282 


10 


U1281 


10 


CR1262 


10 


Q1245 


10 


R1283 


10 


U1290 


10 


CR1263 


10 


Q1280 


10 


R1284 


10 


U1300 


10 


CR1264 


10 


Q1281 


10 


R1285 


10 


U1300 


10 


CR1281 


10 


Q1300 


10 


R1286 


10 


U1300 


10 


CR1282 


10 


Q1301 


10 


R1287 


10 


U1300 


10 


CR1283 


10 


Q1351 


10 


R1291 


10 


U1300 


10 


CR1300 


10 


Q1354 


10 


R1292 


10 


U1330 


10 


CR1301 


10 


Q1370 


10 


R1293 


10 


U1371 


10 


CR1302 


10 


Q1376 


10 


R1300 


10 


U1371 


10 


CR1303 


10 


R1010 


9 


R1301 


10 


U1371 


10 


CR1330 


10 


R1011 


9 


R1302 


10 


U1371 


10 


CR1331 


10 


R1012 


9 


R1304 


10 


U1371 


10 


CR1332 


10 


R1013 


9 


R1305 


10 


VR1293 


10 


CR1334 


10 


R1014 


9 


R1306 
R1307 
R1309 


10 
10 
10 


W251 


10 



ACRONYM DICTIONARY 

The following listing explains some of the less obvious 
acronyms and signal labels used on this schematic. 
Acronyms and labels not shown in this listing may be 
included in the circuit descriptions (Section 3) and should 
be obvious if a little thought is given to the intended circuit 
function. 



FB . . . feedback 
PWM COMPARATOR 
+5VD ... +5 V digital 



pulse-width modulator comparator 



REV MAY 1984 



LOW-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY DIAGRAM 



<•> 



B 



ASSEMBLY A2 




CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C1016 


6C 


2C 


J 122 


1S 


2F 


R1010* 


5B 


2A 


R1019* 


6C 


2C 


C1018 


6B 


3B 


J 204 


5B 


2B 


R1011 


5B 


2A 


R1208 


1N 


3D 


C1208 


1P 


3D 


J 205 


6B 


2B 


R1012 


6B 


3A 


RT1010 


5B 


2A 








J 206 


6B 


4B 


R1013 


7B 


4B 


RT1016 


6C 


2C 


CR1011 


5C 


1B 


J207 


7B 


4B 


R1014 


1N 


4C 














J231A 


5D 


1B 


R1015 


1N 


3C 


S350 


4B 


3A 


E1001 


6B 


2B 








R1016 


6C 


2B 








E1002 


6C 


3B 


L1011 


5B 


2A 


R1017 


6A 


3B 


T1229 


1N 


3C 








L1012 


6B 


3B 


R1018 


6B 


3B 








Partial A2 also shown on 


diagram 10. 




















ASSEMBLY A3 




CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C1020 


4E 


5G 


CR1060 


5L 


5D 


Q1021 


2G 


8J 


R1064 


9E 


7E 


C1021 


7D 


5J 


CR1062 


7F 


7G 


Q1022 


3G 


8J 


R1065 


6L 


6E 


C1022 


6D 


5H 


CR1063 


7F 


7G 


Q1029 


3P 


8F 


R1066 


8J 


6E 


C1023 


3F 


7H 


CR1064 


7F 


7G 


Q1030 


6H 


6F 


R1067 


9E 


7E 


C1025 


3F 


7H 


CR1065 


7F 


7G 


Q1040 


6J 


6F 


R1068 


9J 


6E 


C1032 


3L 


8G 


CR1070 


7L 


6D 


Q1050 


5G 


5F 


R1069 


7G 


7G 


C1033 


4L 


8G 


CR1072 


6G 


7F 


Q1060 


9K 


5D 


R1070 


9K 


6D 


C1034 


3L 


7G 


CR1101 


10M 


6A 


Q1062 


7G 


7G 


R1071 


6H 


7F 


C1035 


4L 


8H 


CR1102 


10M 


6A 


Q1070 


9K 


5E 


R1072 


6G 


7F 


C1040 


6J 


6F 


CR1103 


9N 


7A 








R1073" 


7G 


7G 


C1048 


4M 


8E 


CR1104 


9P 


7A 


R1017* 


5E 


6H 


R1075 


9G 


6E 


C1050 


6F 


6F 


CR1105 


7N 


7A 


R1018 


7D 


5J 


R1101 


6P 


5B 


C1051 


7E 


7D 


CR1106 


7P 


7A 


R1019 


6D 


6J 


R1102 


6P 


5B 


C1052 


6F 


6E 


CR1110 


7M 


5C 


R1020 


2E 


8J 


R1129 


3P 


8D 


C1062 


9F 


7F 


CR1113 


8N 


7B 


R102T 


6E 


6J 


LR1060 


9K 


6E 


C1065 


5L 


6E 


CR1114 


8N 


7B 


R1022 


2F 


7H 








C1066 


7F 


7H 


CR1115 


7N 


7A 


R1023 


3G 


8H 


T1020 


6D 


6J 


C1067 


9E 


7E 


CR1116 


7N 


7B 


R1024 


2H 


8H 


T1050 


6F 


6G 


C1071 


6H 


7F 


CR1121 


6P 


7D 


R1025 


2G 


8H 


T1060 


5M 


6C 


C1072 


7H 


7F 


CR1122 


5P 


7D 


R1027 


2N 


8J 








C1075 


8J 


6E 


CR1123 


5P 


7D 


R1028 


3N 


8E 


U1029 


3P 


8E 


C1101 


10M 


6B 


CR1124 


5P 


8D 


R1029 


2P 


8F 


U1030 


3K 


8G 


C1102 


10P 


6A 


CR1131 


5P 


8D 


R1030 


6H 


7F 


U1062 


8G 


7E 


C1110 


9N 


6B 


CR1132 


5P 


8D 


R1031 


4M 


8F 


U1040 


4N 


8E 


C1111 


9N 


6A 








R1032 


4L 


8G 


U1062A 


8H 


7E 


C1112 


8P 


7A 


F1101 


9P 


6B 


R1033 


5L 


8G 


U1062B 


9H 


7E 


C1113 


8P 


8B 


F1102 


9P 


6A 


R1034 


3L 


8G 


U1062C 


9F 


7E 


C1114 


8P 


8C 








R1035 


4M 


8F 


U1062D 


9F 


7E 


C1115 


7P 


8C 


J231B 


5D 


5H 


R1036 


4L 


8G 


U1064 


8H 


7E 


C1116 


7P 


8B 


J232B 


9P 


5A 


R1037 


3L 


8H 


U1064A 


9G 


7E 


C1120 


5P 


8D 


J233B 


3P 


8D 


R1040 


5H 


7F 


U1064B 


9H 


7E 


C1130 


5P 


8D 


J234B 


7P 


7B 


R1041 


6H 


6F 


U1066 


8J 


7E 


C1132 


5P 


8C 


J301 


6P 


8C 


R1042 


3H 


7G 


U1066A 


8J 


7E 








J302 


6P 


5B 


R1044 


4M 


8E 


U1066B 


9J 


7E 


CR1022 


2E 


7H 


J303 


9P 


5B 


R1045 


4M 


8E 








CR1023 


2H 


8H 








R1046 


5N 


8E 


VR1020 


3G 


8H 


CR1028 


3N 


8F 


L1110 


9N 


6A 


R1050 


6H 


6F 


VR1062 


7G 


7G 


CR1030 


5G 


6F 


L1113 


9P 


8A 


R1052 


5G 


5F 








CR1Q34 


°L 


TO 


L1V4 


8P 


SA 


R1060 


OK 


6D 


V/1021 


~TN 


7J 


CR1035 


5L 


8H 


L1115 


7P 


7C 


R1061 


7G 


7G 


W1022 


6D 


7H 


CR1040 


6H 


6F 


L1116 


7P 


8A 


R1062 


8F 


7E 


W1050 


6G 


6F 


CR1050 


6F 


6F 








R1063 


9F 


7E 


W1060 


6L 


6D 


CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS 






CIRCLE ■■ 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


.OCATION 


F90 


5A 


CHASSIS 


P206 


6A 


CHASSIS 


P233 


3S 


CHASSIS 


S1020 


5D 


CHASSIS 








P207 


7A 


CHASSIS 


P234 


7S 


CHASSIS 








P204 


5A 


CHASSIS 


P231 


5D 


CHASSIS 














P205 


6A 


CHASSIS 


P232 


9S 


CHASSIS 


S90 


6A 


CHASSIS 









H 



8 



10 



*See Parts List for 
serial number ranges. 




B 



D 



H 



K 



M 



N 



BOARD 
-OCATION 

2C 
3D 
2A 
2C 



3C 



WAVEFORMS 



BOARD 
.OCATI ON 

7E 
6E 
6E 
7E 
6E 
7G 
6D 
7F 
7F 
7G 
6E 
5B 
5B 
8D 
6E 

6J 
6G 
6C 

8E 
8G 
7E 
8E 
7E 
7E 
7E 
7E 
7E 
7E 
7E 
7E 
7E 
7E 

8H 
7G 

7J 
7H 
6F 
6D 



BOARD 
3CATION 



LINE 
VOLTAGE 
SELECTOR 



8 



lO 



NOTE: REGULATOR BOARD ILLUSTRATION 
IS OPPOSITE<f 



REGULATOR BOARD 



INVERTER BOARD 



^TO^H^ 8 * 




J note:* indicates VOLTAGE WITH respect to (HE) 



3831-30 
REV MAY I9S4 



LOW -VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 



2465 Service 



B 




Figure 9-13. A10— Fan Motor board. 



K£\ Static Sensitive Devices 
\3' See Maintenance Section 

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE 





Component Number 






A23A2R1234 




Assembly 
Number 


J i L 

Subassembly 
Number (if used) 


'cbematic 

Circuit 
Number 



Chassis-mounted components have no Assembly Number 
prefix— see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List. 



* LABELED ON SOME BOARDS AS "P" VICE "J". 



ALL COMPONENTS MOUNTED ON A10— FAN MOTOR 
BOARD ARE SHOWN ON SCHEMATIC 

DIAGRAM 4$>. 



A10— FAN MOTOR 




ACRONYM DICTIONARY 

The following listing explains some of the less obvious 
acronyms and signal labels used on this schematic. 
Acronyms and labels not shown in this listing may be 
included in the circuit descriptions (Section 3) and should 
be obvious if a little thought is given to the intended circuit 
function. 



FB feedback 
+5VD ... +5 V digital 



LOW-VOLTAGE REGULATORS AND FAN DRIVE DIAGRAM 



«$> 



ASSEMBLY A2 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C1220 


2M 


2D 


CR1351 


9H 


4J 


R1223 


1G 


4D 


R1352 


8K 


2J 


C1222" 


1F 


3E 


<JH13/b 


U 


11- 


HliiZO 


tr 


■3U 


H13D3 


BJ 


2J 


C1226 


2F 


2D 








R1227 


2G 


2D 


R1354 


8J 


2J 


C1240 


3M 


2D 


F1330 


10F 


2E 


R1228 


2G 


3D 


R1355 


8J 


2J 


C1245 


3H 


3E 








R1229 


1F 


3D 


R1356* 


8H 


3J 


C1246 


3H 


2E 


J121 


2P 


2E 


R1240 


2J 


3F 


R1357 


8H 


3J 


C1260 


3M 


2D 


J122 


3P 


2F 


R1241 


2J 


4E 


R1358 


8H 


3J 


C1261 


4J 


3F 


J201 


4P 


1D 


R1242 


2J 


4E 


R1359 


8H 


3J 












m 








DH7n 


TUI 


in 


U l£/U 
























C1272 


6B 


3G 


J203 


5P 


1G 


R1244 


2G 


4E 


R1372 


7H 


2G 


C1274 


6B 


3F 


J232A 


5B 


U 


R1246 


3G 


3E 


R1374 


7H 


2G 


C1280 


5M 


2E 


J232A 


9B 


1J 


R1247 


3H 


2D 


R1376 


7J 


2G 


C1290 


5E 


2H 


J233A 


3B 


3F 


R1248 


3H 


3E 


R1378 


6K 


2G 


C1291 


5F 


2H 


J233A 


6B 


3F 


R1249 


2G 


3E 


R1400 


4D 


3H 


C1300 


7M 


2E 


J234A 


10B 


3H 


R1261 


4K 


3F 


R1402 


7D 


4H 


C1330 


9M 


2F 


J234A 


4B 


3H 


R1262 


4K 


2F 


TP201 


5F 


2H 


C1331 


9F 


3J 


J234A 


8B 


3H 


R1264 


3K 


3F 








C1350 


8M 


2F 








R1270 


7B 


3F 


U1260 


3J 


4F 


C1357 


8H 


2J 


L1402 


7D 


4H 


R1273 


6C 


3G 


U1270A 


6L 


3J 


C1374 


7J 


2G 








R1274 


6C 


3G 


U1270B 


7L 


3J 


C1400 


5D 


3H 


P251 


6S 


1H 


R1280 


5M 


3G 


U1270C 


9F 


3J 


C1402 


7D 


4H 








R1281 


5M 


3G 


U1270D 


8H 


3J 


CR1220 


2H 


3D 


Q1220 


1H 


4E 


R1282 


5L 


2G 


U1270 


5D 


3J 


CR1221 


2N 


2D 


Q1221 


1G 


4D 


R1283 


4K 


4F 


U1281A 


2F 


3D 


CR1241 


3J 


3E 


Q1222 


1F 


3D 


R1284 


5L 


2G 


U1281B 


3H 


3D 


CR1242 


3H 


3E 


Q1223 


1F 


4D 


R1285 


6L 


2G 


U1281 


5C 


3D 


CR1243 


3N 


2E 


Q1240 


2K 


4E 


R1286 


5L 


2G 


U1290 


5E 


2J 


CR1244 


2G 


3D 


Q1241 


2J 


4E 


R1287* 


5K 


2G 


U1300A 


5L 


2H 


CR1260 


3J 


4F 


Q1243 


2H 


3E 


R1291 


5F 


2H 


U1300B 


6L 


2H 


CR1261 


4N 


2E 


Q1245 


3H 


3E 


R1292 


5F 


2H 


U1300C 


5F 


2H 


CR1262 


,3J 


3F 


Q1280 


5M 


4G 


R1293 


6F 


2H 


U1300D 


5J 


2H 


CR1263 


'4J 


3F 


Q1281 


5L 


4G 


R1300 


7M 


3G 


U1300 


5D 


2H 


CR1264 


4K 


3F 


Q1300 


7M 


4H 


R1301 


7M 


3G 


U1330 


10F 


4J 


CR1281 


5K 


2G 


Q1301 


7L 


4H 


R1302 


7L 


3H 


U1371A 


3J 


3F 


CR1282 


5K 


2G 


Q1351 


9K 


2J 


R1304 


7L 


3H 


U1371B 


4K 


3F 


CR1283 


5N 


2F 


Q1354 


8J 


2J 


R1305 


7L 


3H 


U1371C 


7C 


3F 


CR1300 


6K 


2H 


Q1370 


7H 


3G 


R1306 


6L 


3H 


U1371D 


7J 


3F 


CR1301 


7K 


3H 


Q1376 


7K 


1F 


R1307 


7K 


3H 


U1371 


6D 


3F 


CR1302 


7K 


3H 








R1309 


7K 


4H 








CR1303 


7M 


2F 


R1204 


7H 


3G 


R1331 


9G 


3J 


VR1293 


5G 


2H 


CR1330 


10F 


4J 


R1212 


1F 


4D 


R1332 


9G 


3J 








CR1331 


9N 


2G 


R1220 


1H 


3E 


R1333 


9F 


3J 


W251 


8S 


1H 


CR1332 


9F 


4J 


R1221 


1G 


4D 


R1334 


9F 


3J 








CR1334 


7N 


2G 


R1222 


1G 


4D 


R1351 


9H 


4J 








Partial A2 also shown on 


diagram 9. 




















ASSEMBLY A10 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


























B1690 


2C 


2B 


CR1696 


2D 


1B 


R1691 


3C 


2A 


RT1696 


3E 


1A 








CR1699 


1E 


1B 


R1692 


2C 


1A 








C1698 


1E 


1B 


J301 


1B 


2B 


R1693 


1B 


2A 


U1690A 


2D 


1A 








R1694 


1D 


1A 


U1690B 


2B 


1A 


CR1691 


2D 


1B 


Q1698 


1D 


2B 


R1695 


2E 


1A 


U1690C 


2C 


1A 


CR1692 


2D 


1B 








R1697 


2E 


1A 


U1690D 


2C 


1A 


CR1694 


2D 


1B 




















CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


W301 


1A 


CHASSIS 


P301 


1A 


CHASSIS 















B 



H 



8 



*See Parts List for 
serial number ranges. 



10 




24b5 



33^1-81 
REV MAY \9i 



B 



H 



K 



M 



N 



BOARD 
.OCATION 

2J 
2J 
2J 
2J 
3J 
3J 
3J 
3J 
3G 
2G 
2G 
2G 
2G 
3H 
4H 
2H 

4F 
3J 
3J 
3J 
3J 
3J 
3D 
3D 
3D 
2J 
2H 
2H 
2H 
2H 
2H 
4J 
3F 
3F 
3F 
3F 
3F 

2H 

1H 



1 1 J30I 



BOARD 
.OCATION 



1A 
1A 
1A 
1A 



BOARD 
.OCATION 



8 



lO 




38SI-8I 
REV MAY 1964 



LOW -VOLTAGE REGULATORS 



ACRONYM DICTIONARY 



The following listing explains some of the less obvious 
acronyms and signal labels used on this schematic. 
Acronyms and labels not shown in this listing may be 
included in the circuit descriptions (Section 3) and should 
be obvious if a little thought is given to the intended circuit 
function. 



GND C . . . virtual ground "C" 
GND R . . . virtual ground "R" 
GND S . . . virtual ground "S" 
+5VD.. . +5 V digital 
-15V2, . .-15 V decoupled (2) 
+87V1 . .. +87 V decoupled (1) 



POWER DISTRIBUTION A DIAGRAM 



<8> 



ASSEMBLY A1 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C102 


8B 


6D 


C811 


3M 


7F 


L740 


7H 


6D 


U170 


5L 


2E 


C106 


6A 


5D 


C819 


7M 


8E 


L743 


3H 


6D 


U200 


5C 


4D 


C107 


7B 


5D 


C850 


7M 


7F 


L938 


7K 


6J 


U300 


5D 


2B 


C108 


8B 


6D 


C933 


2M 


8G 


L973 


8M 


9K 


U350 


5L 


8B 


C113 


4B 


6D 


C938 


7M 


9G 








U400 


5E 


4E 


C114 


3B 


5D 


C940 


7M 


9G 


LR101 


6A 


5C 


U450 


2M 


3F 


C119 


7B 


5C 


C943 


3M 


9H 


LR107 


6C 


6D 


U500 


5E 


3G 


C120 


2B 


5E 


C958 


3M 


7K 


LR201 


6B 


4C 


U600 


5F 


6H 


C121 


2B 


5E 


C966 


1M 


9K 


LR218 


7C 


3D 


U650 


5G 


3J 


C125 


4A 


5C 


C973 


8M 


9K 








U700 


5H 


7D 


C207 


8A 


4C 


C988 


7K 


6K 


P121 


2A 


4J 


U800 


5J 


7F 


C218 


7C 


3D 


C990 


2M 


8K 


P121 


9A 


4J 


U850 


6L 


8F 


C219 


7B 


3D 


CR107 


7B 


4H 


P122 


3A 


4H 


U860 


6L 


6F 


C220 


2C 


3D 


CR807 


4J 


7F 








U900 


5J 


8H 


C221 


2C 


3D 


CR811 


2K 


7F 


Q700 


1G 


9C 


U910 


2G 


9F 


C225 


4B 


3C 


CR987 


4K 


8K 








U950 


5K 


8K 


C307 


7D 


3B 


J119 


8S 


4H 


R120 


2B 


5E 


U975 


3L 


6K 


C325 


3D 


3C 


J191 


10S 


8K 


R125 


4B 


6D 


U980 


3L 


6K 


C336 


3D 


1C 


J191 


"IS 


8K 


R220 


2C 


3C 








C415 


7M 


4F 


J411 


3S 


1K 


R225 


4B 


3C 


VR125 


4A 


6D 


C458 


2M 


4F 


J511 


10A 


1D 


R700 


1G 


9C 


VR225 


4B 


3C 


C480 


2M 


2J 


J511 


6S 


1D 


R701 


1F 


9C 








C500* 


4E 


2F 


J512 


6S 


1H 


R702 


2F 


9D 


W101 


3A 


9B 


C501" 


6F 


1G 








R811 


2K 


7G 


W102 


3A 


4K 


C521 


7M 


2H 


L101 


8A 


6D 


R951 


10P 


9J 


W103 


3A 


7G 


C675 


3M 


3H 


L107 


7B 


6D 








W104 


3A 


3K 


C710 


1G 


9D 


L113 


3B 


6D 


U100 


5B 


5D 


W105 


3A 


5F 


C722 


3H 


6D 


L219 


7B 


3D 


U110 


2B 


6B 


W109 


3A 


9L 


C723 


3H 


6D 


L307 


7D 


3B 


U120 


2B 


6C 


W121 


1A 


4J 


C731 


10C 


8E 


L325 


3D 


3C 


U130 


2B 


6C 


W121 


9A 


4J 


C733 


2H 


7E 


L336 


3D 


1C 


U140 


3L 


7B 


W122 


8A 


4H 


C738 


8G 


6E 


L521 


7E 


2H 


U150 


3L 


7C 








C740 


7H 


6D 


L733 


2H 


6E 


U160 


2C 


2D 








C810 


2M 


7F 


L738 


8G 


6E 


U165 


4L 


2F 








Partial A1 also shown on diagrams 4, 5 


6 and 8. 



















ACRONYM DICTIONARY 

The following listing explains some of the less obvious 
acronyms and signal labels used on this schematic. 
Acronyms and labels not shown in this listing may be 
included in the circuit descriptions (Section 3) and should 
be obvious if a little thought is given to the intended circuit 
function. 



*See Parts List for 
serial number ranges. 



GNDC 


. . virtual ground "C" 


GND R 


. . . virtual ground "R" 


GNDS 


. . virtual ground "S" 


+5VD. 


. +5 V digital 


+5V1 . . 


. +5 V decoupled (1) 


+5V2 . . 


. +5 V decoupled (2) 


-5V1 . 


. -5 V decoupled (1) 


-5V2. 


. -5 V decoupled (2) 


-5V3. 


. -5 V decoupled (3) 


-5V4. 


. —5 V decoupled (4) 


-8V1 . 


. -8 V decoupled (1) 


-8V2. 


8 V decoupled (2} 


+15V1 . 


. . +15 V decoupled (1) 


-15V2 


. . -15 V decoupled (2 




I \J 



2465 



383>I-B2. 

REV MAV IQ&d. 



ARD 
MION 

!E 
ID 
!B 
IB 
IE 
IF 
IG 
iH 
IJ 
D 
F 
IF 
IF 
IH 
iF 
IK 
K 
K 

O 
C 

e 

K 
G 
K 

F 
L 
J 
J 
H 



t for 
iges. 




24b5 



3831-62 
REV MAY 1984 



POWER DISTRIBUTION A O 



POWER DISTRIBUTION B DIAGRAM 



«5> 



ASSEMBLY A4 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C2830 


4C 


1C 


C2990 


4C 


3F 


U2860 


4G 


2D 


U2960 


4G 


2E 


C2835 


4C 


2C 








U"f 35 


4G 


2E 


U2965 


5H 


3E 


C2851 


4C 


1D 


P411 


3B 


1A 


i /870 


4H 


2E 


U2970 


5H 


3E 


C2855 


4C 


2D 








J2880 


4H 


1E 


U2980 


5H 


2E 


C2860 


4C 


2D 


R2805 


4C 


2B 


U2885 


4H 


2F 


U2985 


4G 


3E 


C2885 


4C 


2E 








U2890 


4H 


2E 


U2990 


5H 


3E 


C2901 


4C 


2B 


U2800 


4D 


2B 


U2900 


5H 


2A 


U2995 


5H 


4E 


C2913 


5B 


4B 


U2805 


4D 


2B 


U2905 


4E 


3A 








C2926 


4C 


3C 


U2810 


4H 


2A 


U2910 


3D 


3A 


VR2805 


4C 


2B 


C2940 


3B 


4C 


U2820 


3C 


2A 


U2920 


4E 


3B 








C2950 


4C 


4D 


U2830 


4H 


1C 


U2930 


4F 


3D 


W411 


5B 


1A 


C2960 


4C 


2E 


U2835 


4H 


2C 


U2935 


4G 


3C 


W2851 


4B 


1D 


C2970 


4C 


3D 


U2850 


4H 


1D 


U2940 


5H 


4C 


W2913 


5B 


4B 


C2980 


4C 


2F 


U2855 


4H 


2D 


U2950 


5H 


4D 








Partial A4 also shown on diagram 7. 


ASSEMBLY A5 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C2041 


8C 


1C 


C2637 


7B 


3D 


U2134 


8H 


1B 


U2496 


8G 


3J 


C2188 


8C 


1H 


C2642 


10C 


4D 


U2162 


8F 


2J 


U2556 


8J 


3J 


C2217 


9B 


2E 


C2734 


9C 


4F 


U2178 


8F 


U 


U2580 


8H 


4J 


C2218 


9B 


3D 








U2214 


9E 


2D 


U2596 


9F 


3J 


C2221 


10C 


2C 


J251 


7B 


2D 


U2234 


8D 


2B 


U2634 


7D 


4D 


C2223 


10B 


2C 








U2308 


9F 


2F 


U2656 


8H 


4G 


C2240 


8C 


1A 


P511 


6B 


4C 


U2335 


8E 


3D 


U2668 


9H 


4G 


C2328 


10C 


4E 


P512 


6B 


4H 


U2362 


8F 


3J 


U2770 


9H 


3J 


C2346 


8C 


3D 








U2378 


8F 


2J 








C2354 


8B 


1C 


R2608 


6L 


3A 


U2408 


8E 


3A 


W511 


6B 


4C 


C2440 


10C 


4E 








U2418 


8E 


3B 


W512 


7B 


4H 


C2475 


8C 


4J 


TP508 


7L 


4K 


U2427 


7D 


3C 


W2143 


7L 


1A 


C2485 


8C 


3K 








U2435 


7D 


3E 


W2526 


6L 


4A 


C2527 


7C 


4D 


U2034 


8H 


2B 


U2456 


8H 


3B 








C2575 


8C 


4H 


U2092 


8E 


1G 


U2468 


8J 


4J 








C2586 


9C 


3K 


U2108 


8H 


2G 


U2480 


8H 


4K 








Partial A5 also shown on diagrams 1 and 2. 


ASSEMBLY A6 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


P651 


6M 


3F 


U3300 


8N 


4B 


U3375 


8N 


3D 


W652 


10M 


2A 


P652 


6M 


2A 


U3325 


8N 


3C 




















U3350 


8N 


2F 


W651 


6M 


3F 








Partial A6 also shown on diagram 3. 


ASSEMBLY A9 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


C1909 


1C 


3A 


R1933 


1B 


4A 


U1956 


2C 


4C 








P191 


3B 


4B 


U1890 


2C 


2E 


W1909 


3B 


3A 








Partial A9 also shown on diagrams 6 and 8. 



B 



H 




P5U 

fGND S&A- 
=ROM GND>n 



A5 



.-II < GND>jff4j- 
<£> GND#J-U- 



GNoy 



L>A 



P5I2 
=*CY J5I2-2I P — r 



r 



o 

faS 



8 



+42V* 



J25I- 
20 



pr* 



+42V TC VR2003 



H5V w- 



"Xc2t37 
"0.22 



r iz i 



3T 



U2421-TL074 
U2435-TL014 



jr 



-+I5V TO R202S 



U2fo34-TL012 



l0V REF <ig T "-HOVref t0 £ 22i4 

icnref* 12 - 1 



10 




B 



H 



K 



M 



N 





iN 


BOARD 
LOCATION 




2E 
3E 
3E 
2E 
3E 
3E 
4E 

2B 

1A 
1D 
4B 






N 


BOARD 
LOCATION 




3J 
3J 
4J 
3J 
4D 
4G 
4G 
3J 

4C 
4H 
1A 
4A 






BOARD 
N LOCATION 




2A 






N 


BOARD 
LOCATION 









o 

IS 






r87V^ 



+42V^ 



»15V<- 



+ iOV REF <-^- 



GNt*- 



lWl« 



R!°i31 Iciqoi 

IK TO.I 



-+42V TO CRWO 
P104-I 
QI180 
R18fc4 

Riaia 

R18=15 



Sl870 
RI873 

<§> 



Aq 



HIGH VOLTAGE BOARD 



CT 



•+IOVr£ F to 
I? 1 145 

Riqio 



-*-+ISV TO RS8ZC 
RIB34 



<$> 



R1848 
RI858 
R187 

Riqsi 



U1810-353 
Ufl5fe-1458 



FROM 

J4-IK 

o 

3S 



P4II 
■ fa 



pig i 



QI852 R\S48 < 



V5V D ^ 



GNDR>t 



GND R > 

GNDR>y 

GNDR^ 

I,. 

GND>; 

GND 2 



_I_C2S40 



~25t~ 



U2B20-TL012 U2qi0-AMfc>080 



►+I5V TO R21II 
RZ1I4 
R2130 



A4 



READOUT BOARD 



c 



i 



, 201 II } , W?qi», 



GND>. 
GND>^ 



.221 II 



*C2830 
C2835 
C285I 
02855 
CZSfeO 
C2885 
CZTOI 
C2924. 
CZS50 
C2=KoO 
C2T?0 
C2180 
CZ<MO 



.-I5V> 



"W4II 



IdllS 
T-O.l 



*r 



<3> 




20? 24? 24? ~ 

U2105-74LS374| |u2q20-MCfa8IO | |u2q3Q-233Z | 



U284>0-14LS2'M 

U2S35-14LS244 



U28fc5- CD4OT4 
U21fcO-CD4OT4 
U2<t85-74LSI<H 



\ 



2T 



-+5Vp TO 



U28I0- 
UZ830- 
UZ835- 
02850- 
02855- 
U2810- 
U2880- 
U2885- 
U2810- 
02100- 
U2140- 
U2950- 
U21b5- 
02970- 
'J 2180- 
U2<W0- 

uzw- 



•74LS00 

■741SW3 
■74LS3Z 
-74LS74 
74LS02 
■14LS313 
■T4LS74 
-74LSI0 
■74LS00 
T4LSI0 
74LS313 
74LS74 
■14LS0O 
■74LS08 
■74LS00 
-74LS8fa 
■74lSlfc4 



J401-2 

R284I 

RZ84Z 

RZ843 

R2844 

R2S50 

RZ10I 

R2102 

R29I5 

R2128 

R2121 

R2140 

R2975 

RZ185 



1)2800-2,4,5 
U2805- 1,2,3,4,5 
U2850-2\li 
U28b0- 1,11,11 

012&05-15 

02880-2,13 
UZ885-5 
U2110-I 
U21Z0-I0 
112150- MO 
U 214,0 -I 
U2<?fe5-l,l2,lS 
02115-1,2 



NUMERAL AND LETTER ATSIGNAL LINES TO OR 
FROM OTHER DIAGRAMS INDICATES THE GRID 
COORDINATE ON ANOTHER SCHEMATIC (FOR 
EXAMPLE: 4E) 



COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE 



Static Sensitive Devices 

See Maintenance Section 



3> 



Assembly 


Component Number 


chematic 

Circuit 

Number 


A23A2R1234 

Subassembly 
Nimber (it used) 



♦ 



fGND S>t 



A5 



CONTROL BOARD 



FROM) GND>^f 
J5II < GND)^ 



o % 



GND>=; 
,ND> 



> J V ' ' I 



WZ524, 



J4.5I Pfc5l 

.01 ft, 



-^ 



Ab 



FRONT PANEL BOARD 



GND C v 
FROM J5IZ-2I > 

o 

faS 



P5I2 



<^A 



■u 



Jfc,5Zl P4.52 



*T 



-ȣ 



8 



+42V^ r 



-+42V _ VR2003 



+,5V nfr 
| 

+ '0Vr EF <,S >->• 
+ IOV REF <pJ 



j.C2fe37 
p.2Z 



±02527 
TO.I 



_ir 



U2427-TL074 
U2435-TL074 






iOVref TO C2224 
r R22Z8 

R2221 

^> 

r 



io 



+Lc23S4 
T47piF 



"C.I 



TC204I 
C2I88 
C2240 

am 

CZ485 
C2575 






-5V4 



|tr 



J.C2217 
TCI 

m 

T-b.i 



lcZ58b 

T 8 - T " 



-iw^-J 



+ 1C2223 
T"4>F 



JCZ22I 
C232S 
C2440 
C2b4Z 



nn 



- + I5V TO R2028 



UZfo34-TL072 



U2234-AM4.0I2J 



U2SS5-405I 
UZ408-405I 
UZ4I8-4051 



\ 



fi_ 



020=12- MCfc802 



"F" 



2bfzs| 



UZIbZ-Z7ii.4 
U2n8-Z7fe>4 
J2%2-27b4 
U2378-Z7fa4 



14 



5~ 



UZ034-14L'5273 
U2.l34-74LS27i 



U2l08-74LS3fc5 

J245<j- 14512 

UZ480-74LSI38 

U2580-74LSI38 

U2fe5fe-74LS2T c f 

UZfcfa8- 40Z0 

UZ770-14LSI38 



\ 



UZ4fa8-74LS74 
U255fa-74LS04 



r 



+ 5V D T0 R2I85 U2lt2-l,Z7 

v RZISfa U2I78-1,Z7 

RZ285 U23fc2-l,Z7 

RZ4lo3 U2318-H21 

KZ541 UZ4fc8-4,IO,l2 

RZ55I U2580-4, 

R2fc45 U 2654.- 3 

RZfeAfe J2770-4. 
R2jfat.2 y\ 

R24.4.3 Si/ 

R27t>4 



Q.2322 RZ340 
R2040 R234Z 
R2I03 R2344 
R2I23 R2444- 
R2I42 R2445 
R2224- R244fa 
R.2230 R2545 
R2301 R254b 
R23IZ R2547 
R23I3 ^ 



<J> 



<P 



2 



r 



.25qfe-74isii4] |'JZ308-T4LSn4| 



+5V TO P503 
<i> 



4> 



St 



U3300-14LSIfc4 
U3n5-74L51b4 
U^350-74LSI(=4 
U3375-14L5lfe4 



>+5Vn TO R3300 

U R33I0 

R3325 

R332<= 

R^327 

R3350-A,B,C,D,E,F,G 
U3300-2M '''I 
U3325- I 1 
03350- 11 
U3375-Z 1 



r 



!SV TO C2222 



-5V TO R2353 R2U3 
RZ703 
R2135 
R2145 



♦ 



<3> 



^W&Z 



■t5VTO R3iq0 



-5V TO R302I 
R303I 
R3050 
R3015 



<$> 



2A<o5 



POWER DISTRIBUTION B 



2465 Service 



J110 


A1 Test < 


Connector 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


ATTN CLK 


4 


2 


GND 


4 


3 


CH4 POS 


4 


4 


Unused 


4 


5 


CH1 POS 


4 


6 


GND 


4 


7 


CH3 POS 


4 


8 


CH2 POS 


4 



J118 


A1 Test Connector 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


Unused 


5 I 


2 


DLY REF 


5 


3 


DLY REF 1 


5 


4 


GND 


5 


5 


+ 10VREF 


5 


6 


ROR 


5 


7 


Unused 


5 


8 


GND 


5 I 
i 



J119 



Pin 



A1 Test Connector 



Line Name 



1 


-15V 


2 


+5Vd 


3 


-15VUNREG 


4 


+ 10VREF 


5 


-5V 


6 


+15V 


7 


GND 


8 


+87V 


9 


+42V 


10 


Unused 


11 


-8V 


12 


+5V 


13 


+15V 


14 


GND 



Schem 



J/P/W121 


A1 to A2 


Pin Line Name 


Schem 


1 


-15VUNREG 


10,11 


2 


Key 8 


10,11 


3 


+ 10VREF 


10,11 


4 


GND 


10,11 


5 


+15V 


10,11 


6 


+42V 


10,11 


7 


+87V 


10,11 



J/P/W122 


A1 to A2 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


LINE TRIG 


5,9 


2 


-8V 


10,11 


3 


-15V 


10,11 


4 


GND 


10,11 


5 


-5V 


10,11 


6 


Key 8 


10,11 


7 


+5V 


10,11 


8 


+5Vd 


10,11 



J/P/W141 A1 to A14 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


GND 


6 


2 


-15V 


6 


3 


VQOUT 


6 


4 


VERT 


6 


5 


HORIZ 


6 



J/P191 


A1 to A9 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


-15VUNREG 


8,11 


2 


+ 10VREF 


11,12 


3 


+ 15V 


11,12 


4 


FOCUS 


8 


5 


ASTIG 


8 


6 


GND 


11,12 


7 


VZOUT 


6,8 


8 


VQOUT 


6,8 


9 


-15V2 


11,12 


10 


TRACE ROT 


8 


11 


+42V 


11,12 


12 


TRZ 


6 


13 


QGAIN 


6 


14 


+87V 


11,12 

i 



J/P/W251 j 


\2 to A5 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


-15V 


10,12 


2 


-15V 


10,12 


3 


-5V 


10,12 


4 


-5V 


10,12 


5 


GND 


10,12 


6 


GND 


10,12 


7 


+5V 


10,12 


8 


+5V 


10,12 


9 


GND 


10,12 


10 


GND 


10,12 


11 


+5Vd 


10,12 


12 


PWR UP 


1,10 


13 


+5Vd 


10,12 


14 


+5Vd 


10,12 


15 


+ 10VREF 


10,12 


16 


+ 10VREF 


10,12 


17 


+15V 


10,12 


18 


+15V 


10,12 


19 


+42V 


10,12 


20 


+42V 


10,12 



J500 



A5 to Options 



Pin 



Line Name 



Schem 



J/P/W411 


A4 to A1 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


ROB 


5,7 


2 


ROR 


5,7 


3 


ROA 


5,7 


4 


GND R 


11,12 ! 


5 


ROS2 


6,7 | 


6 


SGA 


5,7 i 


7 


ROSFRAME 


6,7 | 


8 


ROS 1 


6,7 


9 


R/W DLYD 


6,7 


10 


RODO 


6,7 


11 


GND R 


11,12 


12 


10 MHZ 


6,7 I 


13 


GND R 


11 19 I 


14 


+15V 


11,12 


15 


BD0 


6,7 


16 


GND R 


11,12 


17 


GND 


11,12 


18 


+5Vd 


11,12 


19 


DLY REF 1 


5,7 


20 


GND 


11,12 


21 


DLY REF 


5,7 


22 


GND 


11,12 


23 


-15V 


11,12 


24 


READOUT 






HORIZ OUT 


6,7 


25 


GND 


11,12 


9fi 


RFAHOI IT 





VERT OUT 



6,7 



1 


A7 


2 


A15 


3 


A6 


4 


A14 


5 


MR 


6 


A13 


7 


A5 


8 


A12 


9 


A4 


10 


A11 


11 


A3 


12 


A10 


13 


GNDC 


14 


A9 


15 


A2 


16 


A8 


17 


A1 


18 


A0 


19 


R/W 


20 


BD7 


21 


GNDC 


22 


BD6 


23 


BD3 


24 


BD5 


25 


BD2 


26 


GNDC 


27 


BD1 


28 


BD4 


29 


BD0 


30 


E 


31 ; 


GND C 


32 ; 


10MHZ 


33 ! 


VMA 


34 ! 


RESET 



J502 


A5 tc 


Options 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


OEA35 


2 


2 


OEACLK 


2 


3 


GNDC 


2 


4 


OEAI/O 


2 


5 


OEAC2 


2 


6 


OEAC1 


2 


7 


OEAC3 


2 



J/P/W511 


A5 to A1 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


CH1 PRB 


2,4 ! 


2 


CH2 OVL 


2,4 


3 


CH4 PRB 


2,4 


4 


CH3 PRB 


2,4 


5 


CH1 OVL 


2,4 i 


6 


CH2 PRB 


2,4 


7 


CH4 POS 


2,4 


8 


CH3 POS 


2,4 


9 


CH2 POS 


2,4 ! 


10 


CH1 POS 


2,4 


11 


GND 


11,12 ■ 


12 


DAC MUX1 IN 


2,4 


13 


GND 


11,12 


14 


TRACE SEP 


2,6 


15 


-1.25V 


2,11 


16 


DLY REF 


2,5 


17 


DLY REF 1 


2,5 


18 


GNDS 


11,12 


19 


A TIM REF 


2,5 


20 


B TIM REF 


2,5 


21 


GND 


11,12 


22 


HORIZ POS 


2,6 


23 


S1 


2,4 


24 


GND 


11,12 


25 


A TRIG LVL 


2,5 


26 


B TRIG LVL 


2,5 



J/P/W512 A5 to A1 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


CONT DATA 


1 

2,4 


2 


ATTN STRB 


2,4 | 


3 


ATTN CLK 


1,4 


4 


CH2 PA CLK 


1,4 


5 


CH1 PA CLK 


1,4 


6 


A TRIG CLK 


1,5 


7 


B TRIG CLK 


1,5 


8 


A SWP CLK 


1,5 


9 


B SWP CLK 


1,5 


10 


DISP SEQ CLK 


1,5 


11 


ROON 


2,5 


12 


RO DO 


2,6 


13 


ROS 2 


1,6 


14 


ROS 1 


1,6 


15 


ROSFRAME 


1,6 


16 


DAC MUX1 A0 


2,4 


17 


TSO 


2,5 


18 


DAC MUX1 A1 


2,4 


19 


TRIG STAT 






STRB 


1,5 


20 


DAC MUX1 A2 


2,4 


21 


GNDC 


11,12 ! 


22 


DAC MUX1 INH 


1.4 


23 


R/W DLYD 


1,6 


24 


BD0 


1,6 


25 


5MHZ 


1,5 


26 

i 


10MHZ 


1,6 ! 

I 



J/P/W651 A6 to A5 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


DAC MUX1 IN 


2,3 


2 


GND 


12 


3 


HORIZ POS 


2,3 


4 


+1.36V 


2,3 


5 


-1.25V 


2,3 


6 


DLY A 


2,3 


7 


AA 


2,3 


8 


AB 


2,3 


9 


DLYB 


2,3 


10 


HORIZ VAR 


2,3 


11 


TRIG LEVEL 


2,3 


12 


HOLDOFF 


2,3 


13 


-1.25V 


2,3 


14 


TRACE SEP 


2,3 


15 


CH1 VAR 


2,3 


16 


CH2 VAR 


2,3 


17 


CH1 POS 


2,3 


18 


CH2 POS 


2,3 


19 


CHS POS 


2,3 i 


20 


CH4 POS 


2,3 i 



J/P/W652 


Pin 


L 


1 


RO 


2 


RO 


3 


RO 


4 


RO 


5 


RO 


6 


RO 


7 


Uni 


8 


Urn 


9 


RO 


10 


RO 


11 


RO 


12 


RO 


13 


RO 


14 


GN 


15 


-5V 


16 


+5\ 


17 


TR 


18 


CO 


19 


LEI 


20 


CO 


21 


LEI 


22 


+5\ 


23 


GN 


24 


CO 


25 


CO 


26 


CO 



J/P/W671 


Pin 


LI 


1 


ch: 


2 


ch 


3 


HOI 


4 


-1.2 


5 


"M.C 



J500 


A5 to Options 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


A7 




2 


A15 




3 


A6 




4 


A14 




5 


MR 




6 


A13 




7 


A5 




8 


A12 




9 


A4 




10 


A11 




11 


A3 




12 


A10 




13 


GNDC 




14 


A9 




15 


A2 




16 


A8 




17 


A1 




18 


A0 




19 


R/W 




20 


BD7 




21 


GND C 




22 


BD6 




23 


BD3 




24 


BD5 




25 


BD2 




26 


GND C 




27 


BD1 




28 


BD4 




29 


BDO 




30 


E 




31 


GND C 




32 


10MHZ 




33 


VMA 




34 


RESET 





J502 


A5 to 


Options 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


OEA35 


2 


2 


OEACLK 


2 


3 


GNDC 


2 


4 


OEAI/O 


2 


5 


OEAC2 


2 


6 


OEAC1 


2 


7 


OEAC3 


2 



J/P/W511 


A5 to A1 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


CH1 PRB 


2,4 


2 


CH2 OVL 


2,4 


3 


CH4 PRB 


2,4 


4 


CH3 PRB 


2,4 


5 


CH1 OVL 


2,4 


6 


CH2 PRB 


2,4 


7 


CH4 POS 


2,4 


8 


CHS POS 


2,4 


9 


CH2 POS 


2,4 


10 


CH1 POS 


2,4 


11 


GND 


11,12 


12 


DAC MUX1 IN 


2,4 


13 


GND 


11,12 


14 


TRACE SEP 


2,6 


15 


-1.25V 


2,11 


16 


DLY REF 


2,5 


17 


DLY REF 1 


2,5 


18 


GNDS 


11,12 


19 


A TIM REF 


2,5 


20 


BTIM REF 


2,5 


21 


GND 


11,12 


22 


HORIZ POS 


2,6 


23 


S1 


2,4 


24 


GND 


11,12 


25 


A TRIG LVL 


2,5 


26 


B TRIG LVL 


2,5 



J/P/W512 A5 to A1 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


CONT DATA 


2,4 


2 


ATTN STRB 


2,4 


3 


ATTN CLK 


1,4 


4 


CH2 PA CLK 


1,4 


5 


CH1 PA CLK 


1,4 


6 


A TRIG CLK 


1,5 


7 


BTRIG CLK 


1,5 


8 


A SWP CLK 


1,5 


9 


B SWP CLK 


1,5 


10 


DISP SEQ CLK 


1,5 


11 


ROON 


2,5 


12 


RO DO 


2,6 


13 


ROS2 


1,6 


14 


ROS 1 


1,6 


15 


ROSFRAME 


1,6 


16 


DAC MUX1 A0 


2,4 


17 


TSO 


2,5 


18 


DAC MUX1 A1 


2,4 


19 


TRIG STAT 






STRB 


1,5 


20 


DAC MUX1 A2 


2,4 


21 


GNDC 


11,12 


22 


DAC MUX1 INH 


1,4 


23 


R/W DLYD 


1,6 


24 


BDO 


1,6 


25 


5MHZ 


1,5 


26 


10MHZ 


1,6 



J/P/W651 A6 to A5 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


DAC MUX1 IN 


2,3 


2 


GND 


12 


3 


HORIZ POS 


2,3 


4 


+1.36V 


2,3 


5 


-1.25V 


2,3 


6 


DLY A 


2,3 


7 


AA 


2,3 


8 


AtJ 


2,3 


9 


DLY B 


2,3 


10 


HORIZ VAR 


2,3 


11 


TRIG LEVEL 


2,3 


12 


HOLDOFF 


2,3 


13 


-1.25 V 


2,3 


14 


TRACE SEP 


2,3 


15 


CH1 VAR 


2,3 


16 


CH2 VAR 


2,3 


17 


CH1 POS 


2,3 


18 


CH2 POS 


2,3 


19 


CH3 POS 


2,3 


20 


CH4 POS 


2,3 



J/P/W652 


A6 to A5 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


ROW 8 


2,3 


2 


ROWS 


2,3 


3 


ROW 9 


2,3 


4 


ROW 4 


2,3 


5 


ROW 5 


2,3 


6 


ROW 1 


2,3 


7 


Unused 


2,3 


8 


Unused 


2,3 


9 


ROW0 


2,3 


10 


ROW 7 


2,3 


11 


ROW 10 


2,3 


12 


ROW 2 


2,3 


13 


ROW 6 


2,3 


14 


GND C 


12 


15 


-5V 


12 


16 


+5V 


12 


17 


TRIG LED 


2,3 


18 


COLO 


2,3 


19 


LED CLK 


2,3 


20 


COL1 


2,3 


21 


LED DATA 


2,3 


22 


+5Vd 


12 


23 


GNDC 


12 


24 


COL 2 


2,3 


25 


COL 3 


2,3 


26 


COL 4 


2,3 



J/P/W671 


A6 to A7 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


CH2 VAR 


3 


2 


CH1 VAR 


3 


3 


HORIZ VAR 


3 


4 


-1.25V 


3 


5 


+1.36V 


3 



W900 


A9 to CRT 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


HEATER 


8 


2 


CATHODE 


8 


3 


GRID 


8 


4 


SLOT 


8 


5 


Q1 + 


8 


6 


Q2+ 


8 


7 


Q3- 


8 


8 


PLATE 






AVERAGE 


8 


9 


FIRST ANODE 


8 


10 


VARIABLE 






OCTOPOLE 


8 


11 


Q3+ 


8 


12 


Q1- 


8 


13 


Q2- 


8 


14 


H EATER 


8 



J/P901 A9 to CRT 


Pin 


Line Name 


Schem 


1 


03- 


8 


2 


Key b 


8 


3 


Q1- 


8 


4 


Q2- 


8 


5 


Key b 


8 


6 


FIRST ANODE 


8 


7 


Q3+ 


8 


8 


VARIABLE 






OCTOPOLE 


8 


9 


PLATE 






AVERAGE 


8 


10 


Q2+ 


8 


11 


Q1 + 


8 



No pins exist in J121-2 and J122-2 
positions; no wires exist in W121-2 
and W122-2 positions; plugs are 
installed in P121-2 and P122-2 
positions to key the connectors. 



No pins exist in J901-2 and -5 
positions; plugs are installed infl 
P901-2 and -5 positions. 



B 



D 



H 



K 



M 



N 




HV 

WCH J102 

GND <$> 



-E 



-¥■ 



CRT 



PSOI 



W<100 
SEE 

LIST 



A Q HIGH VOLTAGE 
M I BOARD 



TRACE ROT 
P<W8 J<K» 

JTgnd <^ 

~|2 y axis alignment 



J101 



*W100 



Wit, 

<S> 



<&>rcHn 



Al 



CHI ATTENUATOR ASSEMBLY 



~=L 



J 10 
CHIOVL 
CHIOVL BIAS< 
CHI PRB 



wqi<? 



A I Q VERTICAL 

M I -D TERMINATION ASSEMBLY 



AI4 



DYNAMIC CENTER\NG BR 



SEE 
JI4-I LIST 
Pl4l [5 pinsT 



A4 



READOUT BOARD 



<3>ROM ENtU 



J402 

<^ FORCE EOCH-U 
GNDR-=> 



W14I |. 'RIBBON 



■ RIBBON 



P4U|2fcPINSI 



J41I 



Lll 



J2 

<3>Ich2] H- 



^/\^/\/\Z/\^^/\ / 



J3I- 

J4l 

<$> [CH4l (^- 



M 



CH2 ATTENUATOR ASSEMBLY 



^ PI I 



Jll 

CH2 OVL 

CH2 0VLBlAS< 

CH2 PRB 



<§>< 



CHI 



PO cH!^ig>°°A] 



GND-£» 
CH2 POS<FROM BUF)-f> 
CH2 POSCTO 3UF>^9> 
GND^» 
GND-f» 



<§> |calibrator] (o| 



A8 



SCALE 
ILLUMINATION I 



"HI 



Ji8i 

SCALE ILLUMINATION, 

2 +I5V 



SCALE 
\LLUM. 



I) 



I ASTIG H - 



__R3J5 

TRACE 

ROTATION 



-V- 



I FOCUS ~t - 



-V- 



PI 15 
I 

2 
5 



R352 



I INTENSITY \ 



% 



. Ml 

<@>HORIZOUT— > 

Jl IS 



Jill 
SEE 
<$> 



JII2 
+5V 
ASTIQ V 
GND 

JII3 

ROI^ 
5V 




CH2 PO-7^>-, B ,„^ 
CH2 PO TER M i%>> 100 '> 
JI0I| 

'^TSACFROMBUF)-^>- 1 

GND-# P10IA 

TSA(TO BUF)-^)- 1 
GND-|> 

„ GND-|» 

TSBrOBUR-*>>-| 

GND-5> PIOIB 

TSbCFBOM BUF)-!^)- 1 

JI02, 
BHC~» 
GND-#» 



A AUX TfiS-ffc 



gnd-|>: 

AHO-|> 
PINv> 
GND-S* 



»1 



PI02B 



JII4 

TRACE ROT «> 
3J+I5V 

JII5 

GND <*> 
FOCUS ^ 

+I5V 

Jlllo 

INTENSITY^ 
3H-5V 



J 103, 

JI04| 

<§>GN?# 

GND-=» 



IJ5 |CH2 OUT I 



P5II |2fePl~ 



WI22 



8 



S3I85 



PULL ALT 
PUSH B 



novi 



io 



jfeii 

SEE 

LIST 



JfeOI 
COL 4 
ROW 3 



<S> 



Pfal 

N| 



Pfall 
5 



Nl wtni 

..... 



A -7 FRONT PANEL 
M / VARIABLE BOARD 



Ab 



FRONT PANEL BOARD 



20/ RIBBON 



Wfo5l 



2fe/ RIBBON 



24b5 





J232A|p2?2Jjl4iB J23IB|P2lj]j23lA 

tI^ t> '"St'H>- +5V <> a +RECTIFIED UNE -<£I»>- +RECT ,p, ED UNE UM ^fi 

t 5 ) tr 5tTt^" +W t> ^> LIN E CAP COMM0N-<«-|-»>- .LINE CAP COMMON^ 

GND-C^-f-^-GND,*. -RECTIFIED LIN£-«-^>— RECTIFIED LINE V 



1041 



GNDK^-i-^-GND^ 

-8Vv, NRES -«^>- -8V UNRES 

J213A|P2?J|J233B 

FB-<££»>-FB 

LINE UP-«-f-»>-LINE UP 

^^ UNRBr <^>- +42V UNREG 

3> GND-<4^>-GND <§> 

+8W UNKS -<<S>>-+87V UNRE G 

J234A |P234|J234B 

" 1 9WEG"<£ft>- -'SVUNREG 

GND-<44-»-GND ^> 

+^NREG~«-i^>-+^ NREQ 
+ | 5V UNREG -<^£^>-+l5V UNREG 



AOlWERTER 



BOARD 



***> GND^ 
. +5Vc-|> 

GND-** 
J302J 

S.5VAc4-» 
<3>GND-£> 
S-SVAC-^. 
J50I 

^+I5V UNRBS 
GND 



LINE lN-»^^ 
JI0fe' s s P20t. 

LINE ■?> 

> VOLTAGE | „,._ 
SELECT -V/107 



j^^ite) 



ls5ol 



AIO 



FAN MOTOR 
BOARD 



<@>GND 

GNP 



boi 3 -' w30 ' 



3831-84- 
REV OCT 198^, 



INTERCONNECTIONS <$> 



2465 Service 



CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS 



CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


SCHEM 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


SCHEM 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


F90 


9 


5A 


P904 


8 


5P 


J3 


4 


10A 


R134 


4 


5N 


J4 


4 


10A 


R351 


5 


5A 


J5 


4 


8T 


R352 


5 


6A 


J6 


6 


9A 


R975 


8 


2B 


J7 


5 


7S 


R976 


8 


5B 


J8 


5 


3S 


R977 


8 


4B 








R996 


8 


3K 


L90 


8 


2L 














S90 


9 


6A 


LR1513 


8 


5M 


S1020 


9 


5D 


LR1514 


8 


5M 


S3185 


3 


5D 


P111 


4 


4N 


V900 


8 


2L 


P112 


8 


3C 








P113 


5 


5A 


W111 


4 


5N 


P114 


8 


2C 


W112 


8 


4B 


P115 


8 


4C 


W113 


5 


6A 


P116 


5 


6A 


W114 


8 


3B 


P204 


9 


5A 


W115 


8 


5B 


P205 


9 


6A 


W116 


5 


6A 


P206 


9 


6A 


W121 


10 


2S 


P207 


9 


7A 


W122 


10 


3S 


P231 


9 


5D 


W122 


9 


1S 


P232 


9 


9S 


W301 


10 


1A 


P233 


9 


3S 


W671 


3 


8N 


P234 


9 


7S 


W900 


8 


3M 


P601 


3 


5D 


W900 


8 


6J 


P671 


3 


7N 


W900 


8 


7J 


P901 


8 


3M 


W900 


8 


7M 


P901 


8 


4J 


W902 


8 


3J 


P901 


8 


5M 


W903 


8 


4M 


P902 


8 


2J 








P903 


8 


4M 









REV OCT 1983 



CRT TERMINATION 
(R1301) 



VOLT REF ADJ 
(R1292) 




2465 Service 



VERTICAL 
(R3407) 



HORIZONTAL 
(R3401) 



3831-68 



A13— CRT TERMINATION, A14— DYNAMIC CENTERING, 
ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS 1 



HIGH-DRIVE FOCUS 
(R1842) 



EDGE FOCUS 
( R1864) 



GRID BIAS 
(R1878) 



Z-AXIS TRANSIENT 
RESPONSE (R1834) 



Y 



■MZZH 






^ 



Y-AXIS ALIGNMENT / GEOMETRY 
(R1848) / (R1870) 



10^" 



□ 



f 



£ 



M 



SHZZHE 



O 
HI 



«HZZHb 








®-C 















yv 









D s nmnm ^ 






8^L®1^ 



€H 



1 «s* U* 



s 
PJL@®M 

%\ ! 



® H ~~h » 



IH> ;?— 



~S 



nU LjlUU 



DAC REF 
(R2127) 




JS«~.JtA 



P^LT3C^M(!JEL~j 




IBQW 



y 



Pf f f ej 



&; ^ <& 



3831-70 



A5— CONTROL, ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS 3 



A9— HIGH VOLTAGE, ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS 2 



2465 Service 



— . 



50mV C ADJ 
(C205) 



50mV C ADJ 
(C105) 



A1— MAIN, ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS 4 




J118 



VERT 

READOUT JITTER 

(R618) 



VERTICAL CENTERING 
(R639) 



GAIN 
(R638) 



X1 GAIN 
(R860) 



REV FEB 1983 



3831 -71 A 



2465 PRELIMINARY TROUBLESHOOTING 




24S5 Service 



YES 




REFER TO THE PROCEDURE 

FOR THE LED-CODED FAULT. 

SEE TABLES 6-5 THROUGH 6-7 



REFER TO THE 

DISPLAY DIAGNOSTIC 

PROCEDURE 



•(done) 



REPAIR LED CIRCUITRY 

OR FRONT-PANEL 

INTERCONNECT 





REPAIR FAULTY 

SUPPLY OR 
DISTRIBUTION 




REFER TO ERROR MESSAGE 
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 





YES 




YES 




YES 



REFER TO NOP 

KERNEL DIAGNOSTIC 

PROCEDURE 



REFER TO NOP 

KERNEL DIAGNOSTIC 

PROCEDURE 




REPAIR INTERRUPT 
TIMER CIRCUITRY 






YES 



IS U2092-39 \ VES 

m nrr r\\j/\ or in*. 

SQUARE WAVE? 




REFER TO POWER SUPPLY 
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 





TROUBLESHOOT E SIGNAL 

LINE. CHECK FOR ECB 

SHORT OR SHORT INTERNAL 

TO U2092, U2468, U2556 > 

U2656 OR U2294 



REPAIR OSCILLATOR/ 
DIVIDER CIRCUITRY 




REPAIR RESET 
CIRCUITRY 



/returnN 



REFER TO OPTION 

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS 

IN THE OPTIONS 

SERVICE MANUAL 




3831-101 



2465 Service 



Probable Causes of Trigger Error Messages 


Test 05 Fail 


Probable Causes of Failure 


01 


a. Line Signal 

b. U500 (Trigger) 

c. U650 (Trigger Status Data to Processor) 


02 or 22 


a. Line Signal 

b. U500 (Trigger) 


04 or 44 


a. U2634A, U2235, or U500 

b. Line Signal 




ERROR MESSAGE DIAGNOSTICS 



ERROR MESSAGE 
DIAGNOSTICS 




YES 




REFER TO OPTIONS 
TROUBLESHOOTING 

PROCEDURES IN THE 

OPTIONS SERVICE 

MANUAL 



YES 




YES 



REPLACE 
U2092 




YES 




CHECK CONTINUITY 

BETWEEN U2668-10 

AND U2556-6 



REPLACE 
U2668 



YES 



REPLACE 
U2034 




REFER TO THE 

FRONT-PANEL 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

PROCEDURE 



PRESS SOURCE 

SWITCH UP 

TO TURN ON 

LOOPING 



( GO TO } 



REPLACE 
U2920 



OPEN 
CIRCUIT 




PRESS COUPLING 

SWITCH UP TO 

BEGIN TEST 



EAROM IN" 
FAULT. 
U2118, I 
U2108, 





OPEN 
CIRCUIT 



CHECK 
CONTINUITY 

FROM BD0 
ON CONTROL 

BOARD 



YES 



REPLACE 
U2960 



YES 



REPLACE 
U2580 




2465 Service 



ERROR MESSAGE DIAGNOSTICS 




YES 




YES 



REPLACE 
U2034 




REFER TO THE 

FRONT-PANEL 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

PROCEDURE 



PRESS SOURCE 

SWITCH UP 

TO TURN ON 

LOOPING 



( GO TO i\ 



REPLACE 
U2920 



OPEN 
CIRCUIT 




ERROR MESSAGE 

"TEST 05 FAIL nn" 

ON CRT 



REPLACE 

U2008 AND 

RECALIBRATE 

INSTRUMENT 



PRESS COUPLING 

SWITCH UP TO 

BEGIN TEST 



YES 



EAROM INTERFACE 
FAULT. CHECK 
U2118, U2208> 
U2108, Q2025 





OPEN 
CIRCUIT 



CHECK 
CONTINUITY 

FROM BD0 
ON CONTROL 

BOARD 



YES 



REPLACE 
U2960 



YES 



REPLACE 
U2580 




CHECK LINE 

TRIGGER SOURCE AND 

INTERCONNECTIONS 



CHECK LINE 

TRIGGER SOURCE AND 

INTERCONNECTIONS 



YES 



REFER TO TRIGGER 
ERROR MESSAGE 

TABLE AT LEFT TO 

DETERMINE 

PROBABLE CAUSE 



REFER TO TRIGGER 
ERROR MESSAGE 

TABLE AT LEFT TO 

DETERMINE 

PROBABLE CAUSE 



3831-104 



FRONT-PANEL TROUBLESHOOTING 



FRONT-PANEL 
TROUBLESHOOTING 



PRESS AND HOLD 

AV AND AT , THEN 

PRESS SLOPE TO 

ENTER MONITOR 



SCROLL TO EXERCISER 

01 USING THE 
TRIGGER MODE SWITCH 



PRESS UP AND 
RELEASE THE TRIGGER 
COUPLING SWITCH TO 

ENTER ROUTINE 




YES 



REPAIR FAULTY 
MODE SWITCH 




PROBABLE CAUSE: 

SHORTED DIODE ON 

SUSPECT COLUMN 



PROBABLE CAUSE: 
1 ) OPEN DIODE 
2) BAD SWITCH 



PROBABLE 
CAUSE : 

BAD 
SWITCH 




PRESS THE A/B 
TRIG SELECT 

BUTTON TO EXIT 
THE MONITOR 



MANUALLY 
EXERCISE THE 
FRONT-PANEL 
SWITCHES AND 
OBSERVE THE 
ASSOCIATED LEDS 




YES 




PROBABLE CAUSE: 
AN INTERMITTENT 
POT OR SWITCH 
IS INTERRUPTING 
FRONT-PANEL SCAN 



YES 



PROBABLE CAUSE: 
DEFECTIVE POT 




MOVE A FRONT- 
PANEL SWITCH IN 
ORDER TO UPDATE 

THE LED DATA 



MAIN 
INSTRUMENT 

IS NOT 

PROPERLY 

READING THE 

POT'S VALUE 




YES 



CONTROL BOARD 
FAULT 



EXTRA LEDS ARE LIT. 

PROBABLE CAUSE: 

DEFECTIVE SHIFT 

REGISTER 




PROBABLE CAUSE: 

DEFECTIVE SHIFT 

REGISTER 



PROBABLE 
CAUSE: 

DEFECTIVE 
LEDCS) 



FRONT-PANEL TROUBLESHOOTING 



2465 Service 




YES 



MANUALLY EXERCISE 

EACH POT, OBSERVING 

THE CONTROL'S 

FUNCTION 



YES 




EXTRA LEDS ARE LIT. 

PROBABLE CAUSE: 

DEFECTIVE SHIFT 

REGISTER 



PROBABLE CAUSE: 

DEFECTIVE SHIFT 

REGISTER 



PROBABLE 
CAUSE: 

DEFECTIVE 
LEDCS) 




YES 




REPAIR CONTROL 
BOARD AND/OR 
READOUT BOARD 



PROBABLE CAUSE: 
DEFECTIVE POT 



3831 -105 



VERTICAL TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS 

With no signals connected to the four Vertical input 
connectors, select each channel for display and rotate its 
POSITION control through its entire range. 

1. If one or more of the four Vertical channels properly 
responds to its POSITION control, the problem is in 
the preamp circuit of the defective channel or in the 
Vertical Channel Switch circuit. If none of them 
respond properly, the Channel Switch, Delay Line, 
Vertical Output Amplifier, and the hybrid power 
supplies should be suspect, 

2. Check the range of the input positioning voltage for 
a faulty channel. Channel 1 and 2 positioning inputs 
(pin 17 of U100 and U200) should vary between 
-4.6 volts and -5.26 volts. Channel 3 and 4 posi- 
tioning voltages (to pins 29 and 32 of U300) should 
vary between ground potential and -5 volts. 

3. If the faulty channel's input positioning range is 
okay, check the positioning effect at the outputs of 
the Channel Switch (connect a DMM across the 
Delay Line). When the CH 1 or CH 2 POSITION 
control is rotated through its range, the DMM reading 
should vary from approximately +700 mV to 
-700 mV; for Channels 3 and 4, it should vary 
approximately from +350 mV to -350 mV. 

4. If the range at the Delay Line is okay, connect the 
DMM across the vertical outputs to the crt (between 
L628 and L633). Range should vary approximately 
from +11.5 volts to -11.5 volts as the POSITION 
control of the displayed channel is rotated through 
its range. 

5. If the output voltages to the crt are okay, check that 
the voltage between the crt termination resistors 
(CR1513 and CR1514) varies approximately from 
+11.5 volts to -11.5 volts as the POSITION control 
is rotated through its range. 



See the "Theory of Operation" for further information. 



HORIZONTAL TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS 

If possible, set the 2465's TRIGGER controls so the 
TRIG'D LED remains illuminated (triggered sweep is 
running). Setting the TRIGGER MODE to AUTO LVLwill 
usually do this. 

1. Check that the horizontal positioning input (pin 22 
of U800) of the Horizontal Output IC varies approxi- 
mately from -1.25 volts to +1.25 volts as the Hori- 
zontal POSITION control is rotated through its 
range. If it does not, repair the position circuit. 



2. Check that the A Sweep Ramp at pin 18 of U800 is 
ramping from -1.25 volts to +1.25 volts. If it is not, 
check the buffer amplifier made up of U735 and its 
associated components. When operating properly, 
the voltages and waveforms at pins 3 and 9 of U735 
will be nearly identical. 



HSA and HSB inputs of U800. 
4. Check the power supply levels to U800. 



> +80 volts, check the +OUT and -OUT pins for 
shorts. 

See the "Theory of Operation" for further information. 

HOW TO VERIFY THE CONTROL DATA 
AND CONTROL CLOCK LINES 

1. Power up the 2465 under test. 

2. Move the NORM/DIAG jumper (P503 on the scope 
under test) to the DIAG position. This forces the processor 
into a NOP loop and exercies the Address Decode circuitry. 

3. Trigger the test scope on the DAC MSB CLK at 
pin 14 of U2580 (on the Control Board). Use NORM 
TRIGGER and - SLOPE. Set TRIGGER LEVEL to 
+1.4 volts. 

4. Verify that four bursts of clocks appear at 104-ms to 
106-ms intervals. 

5. Check that each of the outputs of U2850 has similar 
signals present (diagram 2). 

6. Check that each output of U2596 (diagram 2) has 
four bursts of two pulses each occurring at 104-ms to 
106-ms intervals. 

7. Turn instrument power off and restore P503 to the 
NORM position. 

8. Power up the 2465 again. 

9. Set the 2465's CH 1 and CH 2 input coupling to 
1 M£2 DC and TRIGGER MODE to NORM. 

10. Lock the TRIGGER COUPLING switch in its up 
position, using a rubber band looped between the 
TRIGGER LEVEL control and the switch's lever actuator. 

11. Trigger the test oscilloscope on the DISP SEQ CLK 
(pin 8 of U2596 or pin 10 of P512). 

12. With the test scope still triggered on the DISP SEQ 
CLK, verify that the ATTN STRB at pin 2 of P512 is 
eight positive-going strobes. 

13 V/pi-ifx/ that tho wntml rli + ~y «•-, ■-.:.-, 1 ~f DC10 l~ 

toggling at TTL levels. 




DISPLAY DIAGNOSTIC PRi 



YES 



REPAIR CONTROL 

BOARD AND/OR 
INTERCONNECTIONS 





2465 CONTROL SETUP = 

ALL PUSHBUTTONS 

IN - NO SIGNAL 

AT INPUT 

CONNECTORS 

- IN (CHOP) 

IN - NO SIGNAL AT 
CONNECTOR 
A AND B SEC/DIV - 1ms, LOCKED 
POSITION CONTROLS - ALL AT 

MIDRANGE 
H0LD0FF - FULLY CCW 
A TRIGGER MODE - AUTO 
INTENSITY - FULLY CW 
R0 INTENSITY - FULLY CW 
BANDWIDTH LIMIT - SWITCH OUT 



PRESS At, 
THEN PRESS AV 



ROTATE AREF 

6 TURNS CCW, 

THEN 2 TURNS CW 



ROTATE A 6 

TURNS CW, THEN 

2 TURNS CCW 



-•*< 



< 




TURN THE GRID BIAS 
P0T-R1878-FULLY CW 
AND PUSH BEAM FIND 




YES 




REFER TO THE 

HORIZONTAL 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

HINTS AT LEFT 



YES 



ADJUST GRID BIAS 
ACCORDING TO 
CAL PROCEDURE 



REFER TO THE 

VERTICAL 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

HINTS AT LEFT 





REPAIR OR REPLACE 
CRT CONNECTIONS, U6 
OR BEAM FIND CIRCU 



RETURN CONTROLS 

TO INITIAL 

SETTINGS AND 

PRESS BEAM FIND 






REFER TO THE 

Z-AXIS DIAGNOSTIC 

PROCEDURE 



VOLTAGES ARE MEASURED USING A TEST 

OSCILLOSCOPE WITH X10 PROBES WHILE 

HOLDING IN BEAMFIND BUTTON 




t 18 of USOO is 
olts. If it is not, 
of U735 and its 
ating properly, 
and 9 of U735 



L levels) at the 



0. 

30. If it is not 
—OUT pins for 



sr information. 

)L DATA 
NES 



I3 on the scope 
es the processor 
scode circuitry. 

: MSB CLK at 
d). Use NORM 
ER LEVEL to 



;ar at 104-ms to 



2850 has similar 



'diagram 2) has 
j at 104-ms to 



>re P503 to the 



)ut coupling to 

vitch in its up 
between the 
lever actuator. 

DiSP SEQ CLK 



the DISP SEQ 
i 2 of P512 is 



1 of P512 is 



rr\ 




DISPLAY uIAuNOSTIC PKUChUURt 



DISPLAY DIAGNOSTIC 
PROCEDURE 



DO 

'CONTROL CLOCKS^ 

AND DATA CONFORM TO 

GUIDELINES AT 

LEFT? 



NO 



YES 



REPAIR CONTROL 

BOARD AND/OR 
INTERCONNECTIONS 





2465 CONTROL SETUP: 

ALL PUSHBUTTONS 

IN - NO SIGNAL 

AT INPUT 

CONNECTORS 

- IN (CHOP) 

IN - NO SIGNAL AT 
CONNECTOR 
A AND B SEC/DIV - 1ms> LOCKED 
POSITION CONTROLS - ALL AT 

MIDRANGE 
HOLDOFF - FULLY CCW 
A TRIGGER MODE - AUTO 
INTENSITY - FULLY CW 
RO INTENSITY - FULLY CW 
BANDWIDTH LIMIT - SWITCH OUT 



PRESS At, 
THEN PRESS AV 



ROTATE AREF 

6 TURNS CCW, 

THEN 2 TURNS CW 



ROTATE A 6 

TURNS CW > THEN 

2 TURNS CCW 




PRESS THE 
BEAMFIND BUTTON 



YES 



REFER TO THE 

SWEEP DIAGNOSTIC 

PROCEDURE 





YES 



REFER TO THE VERTICAL 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

HINTS AT LEFT 




YES 



LOCATE ANY REMAINING 

PROBLEMS USING THE 

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM AND 

THEORY OF OPERATION 

SECTIONS 



REFER TO THE 

READOUT DIAGNOSTIC 

PROCEDURE 







TURN THE GRID BIAS 
P0T-R1878-FULLY CW 
AND PUSH BEAM FIND 




YES 




REFER TO THE 

HORIZONTAL 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

HINTS AT LEFT 



YES 



ADJUST GRID BIAS 
ACCORDING TO 
CAL PROCEDURE 



REFER TO THE 

VERTICAL 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

HINTS AT LEFT 






VERIFY HORIZONTAL 

DEFLECTION LEADS 

ARE SECURE 




REPAIR OR REPLACE 
CRT CONNECTIONS, U600 
OR BEAM FIND CIRCUIT 



REPAIR OR REPLACE 

U800 OR BEAM FIND 

CIRCUIT 



RETURN CONTROLS 

TO INITIAL 

SETTINGS AND 

PRESS BEAM FIND 





YES 


REPLACE 




THE CRT 




Jt 



REPAIR THE 
HIGH-VOLTAGE 
POWER SUPPLY 




VOLTAGES ARE MEASURED USING A TEST 

OSCILLOSCOPE WITH X10 PROBES WHILE 

HOLDING IN BEAMFIND BUTTON 





YES 



REPAIR THE 

HVPS GRID DRIVE 

CIRCUIT 



REFER TO THE 

Z-AXIS DIAGNOSTIC 

PROCEDURE 




/returnN 



3831-102 




SWEEP TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 



PRESS At BUTTON 

TO ELIMINATE 

READOUT 



PRESS 

BEAMFIND 

BUTTON 



YES 



REPAIR SEC/DIV 
MICROSWITCH 



LOCK KNOBS 
TOGETHER 





YES 



REPAIR RAMP SIGNAL 

PATH. CHECK U700 , 

U735, U800, AND 

INTERCONNECTIONS, 

POWER SUPPLIES AND 

CONTROL jSJGNALS TO 

U800 (HSA, HSB, 

AND POS) 




YES 



REPAIR -1.25V 
REFERENCE PATH 



REPAIR FAULTY 
SUPPLY 




REPAIR PATH FROM 
U700-45 TO U950-4 



REPLACE 

U700 (TRY 

SUBSTITUTING 

U900) 



REMOVE 

U700 




YES 




REINSTALL 
U700 



TEMPORARILY 

CONNECT A 

10KQ RESISTOR 

FROM U650-10 

TO +5V 



REPLACE U700 

(TRY SUBSTITUTING 

U900) 



YES 




DISCONNECT ANY 

WIRE CONNECTED 

TO J 102-5 



REPAIR 
HOLDOFF-TIMING 
CURRENT SOURCE 



YES 




YES 




REPLACE 
Q155 



REPAIR OPTION 

CIRCUIT CONNECTED 

TO J 102-5 



REPAIR PATH 

FROM U650-13 

TO U700-1 



TROUBLESHOOT 
FAILING 
CIRCUIT 




2465 Service 



SWEEP TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 



*NOTE: +3. 56V IS MEASURED AS -1.44V 
WITH RESPECT TO THE +5V SUPPLY 




YES 



REPAIR RAMP SIGNAL 

PATH. CHECK U700 > 

U735 > U800 > AND 

INTERCONNECTIONS, 

POWER SUPPLIES AND 

CONTROL _SICNA_LS TO 

U800 (HSA, HSB> 

AND POS) 




YES 



REPAIR -1.25V 
REFERENCE PATH 



REPAIR FAULTY 
SUPPLY 




REPAIR PATH FROM 
U700-45 TO U950-4 



REPLACE 

U700 (TRY 

SUBSTITUTING 

U900) 



REPLACE U700 

(TRY SUBSTITUTING 

U900) 



REINSTALL 
U700 



TEMPORARILY 

CONNECT A 

10Kfl RESISTOR 

FROM U650-10 

TO +5V 




DISCONNECT ANY 

WIRE CONNECTED 

TO J 102-5 



YES 




YES 



REPLACE 
Q155 




REPAIR OPTION 

CIRCUIT CONNECTED 

TO J 102-5 



REPAIR PATH 

FROM U650-13 

TO U700-1 



TROUBLESHOOT 
FAILING 
CIRCUIT 



REPAIR CC OR 

CD TO U500 

OR REPLACE 

U500 




REPLACE 
U700 



TROUBLESHOOT 
FAILING 
CIRCUIT 



3831-110 




READOUT TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 



READOUT* 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

PROCEDURE 



*NOTE: PROCEDURE ASSUMES 
POWER SUPPLIES AND THE 
NORMAL SCOPE FUNCTION 
ARE OPERATING PROPERLY 




DATA PATH FROM 

BD0 (P411-15) 

THROUGH U2960 AND 

U2860 TO RODO 
CP411-10) IS BAD 



PRESS UP ON THE 

TRIGGER SOURCE 

SWITCH TO START 

LOOPING OF 

DIAGNOSTIC 



CHECK: 
U2960-3 IS 
PULSING LO. 
U2860-12 IS 
PULSING HI. 
U2960-2 "1 
U2960-9 
U2860-18 
U2860-8 



ACTIVE 



TROUBLESHOOT 

INDICATED 

FAULT 




FAILING RAM 
ACCESS AND 
RETRIEVAL 



PRESS UP ON THE 

TRIGGER SOURCE 

SWITCH TO START 

LOOPING OF 

DIAGNOSTIC 



RA6, DLY REF0 

OR DLY REF1 

IS STUCK 



CHECK: 
U2865-1 
U2860-12 
U2865-3 
U2860-3 
U2960-3 
U2920-16 
U2865-2>' 
5 ,6 >7 ,1 1 
AND 12 
U2860-1 ,2 
U2960-5 , 
6,7>9,10> 
11 ,12,13, 
14 AND 15 
U2935-1 ,19 
U2920-11 PULSES 
HI , BUT IS LO AT 
SAME TIME AS 
U2920-16 



PULSES 
HI 



PULSES 
LO 



> ACTIVE 



PROBLEM IN 

AREA OF U2810 

OR U2900 



CHECK FOR POWER- 
UP ERROR CODE ON 
LEDS AND REFER 
TO APPROPRIATE 
TROUBLESHOOTING 
PROCEDURE 



PROBLEM WITH 

DLY REF0, 

DLY REF1 , 

U2800 OR 

U2805 



YES 



YES 



PROBLEM IS ON 
MAIN BOARD 



YES 



REPLACE 
U2995 



REPAIR SHORT OR 
REPLACE U2890 




2465 Service 



READOUT TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 



HECK FOR POVER- 
5 ERROR CODE ON 
.EDS AND REFER 
TO APPROPRIATE 
ROUBLESHOOTING 
PROCEDURE 



PROBLEM IS ON 
MAIN -BOARD 



REPLACE 
U2995 





READOUT \ NO 
GAIN CURSORS? 



YES 



CHECK PATH: 
U2985-12 
U2990-5 ,6 
U2880-2 AND 
U2880-6* 
CHECKING 
U2880-3 FOR 
ACTIVITY AND 
U2880-1 FOR 
A HI 



CHECK U2830A 

AND U2830B 

FOR PARTIAL 

FAILURE 



CHECK U2850 
USING THEORY 
OF OPERATION 



CHECK PATH: 
U2995-14 
U2835-9 
U2980-1 
U2965-4 
U2930-12 
AND U2950-8* 
CHECKING 
U2950-11 FOR 
ACTIVITY AND 
U2950-13 FOR 
A HI 




CALIBRATION 
OF AV 

CURSORS IS 
WRONG 



PROBLEM IN 

AREA OF 

U2800, U2820 

U2805, U2810 

OR U2900 



PROBLEM IN 

AREA OF 

U2800-1 >2 , 

3,4,5 



SPACING 

BETWEEN TOP AND 

BOTTOM LINES 

OK? 

YES 



NO 



CHECK 
ZENER 
VR2925 
AND 
RESISTOR 
R2930 



<r VERTICAL ^N 


.SIZE WRONG? . 




YES 


" 


CHECK : 


R2929, R2928 


R2915, R2925 


R2920, R2924 


R2923, R2922 


R2926, R2921 


R2903, R2905 


AND RO INPUTS 


ON MAIN BOARD 



HORIZONTAL 
GAIN ERROR 



CHECK : 
R2911 
R2910 
R2913 
R2914 
AND RO 
INPUTS 

ON 
MAIN 
BOARD 



3831-103 



2465 Service 




Z-AXIS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 



Z-AXIS 
DIAGNOSTIC 
PROCEDURE 




WATCH THE VOLTAGE 

AT U950'S BRIGHT 

INPUT WHILE ROTATING 

THE INTENSITY CONTROL 

THROUGH IT'S RANGE 




YES 



TROUBLESHOOT DISPLAY 

SEQUENCER'S INPUTS 

OR REPLACE U650 



REPAIR SHORT CIRCUIT 
ON BRIGHT LINE, REPAIR 

INTENSITY CONTROL 

CIRCUIT, REPAIR CONTROL 

SIGNALS TO U650 OR 

REPLACE U650 



YES 



CORRECT DC BIAS 
PROBLEM AT U950 
OR REPLACE U950 






3831-100 



*>JU»F- «- 



£hoo service 



© 



KERNEL NOP DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 



KERNEL NOP 
DIAGNOSTIC 
PROCEDURE 



MOVE NORM/DIAG 
JUMPER TO THE 
DIAG POSITION 




YES 




YES 



YES 



REPLACE U2092, 
ROMS OR RAM 



REPLACE U2194 
OR U2294 




REPLACE U2092, 
U2178 OR U2194 



REPAIR ADDRESS 
DECODE CIRCUIT 



YES 



LOCATE FAULT 
AND REPAIR 




3831-106 



Power Supply Voltage Tolerances 



Power Supply 


Test Point (+ Lead) 


Reading 


+10 V 


J119-4 


+9.99 to +10.01 


+87 V 


J119-8 


+85.26 to +88.74 


+42.4 V 


J119-9 


+41.55 to +43.25 


+15V 


J119-6 


+14.775 to +15.225 


Digital +5 V 


J119-2 


+4.85 to +5.15 


Analog +5 V 


J119-12 


+4.925 to +5.075 


-5V 


J119-5 


-4.965 to -5.035 


-8V 


J119-11 


-7.88 to -8.12 


-15V 


J119-1 


-14.775 to -15.225 




YES 



CURRENT LIMIT 

OR STARTUP 

PROBLEM 



REFER TO THE 

INVERTER 

PROCEDURE 




POWER SUPPLY TR0UBLESH0C 



CHECK REGULATOR 
OUTPUTS ACCORDING 
TO TABLE AT LEFT 




OUTPUT LEVELS? 



ALL 0V 



SOME ACTIVE 



REFER TO THE 
REGULATOR 
PROCEDURE 





YES 




CHECK FOR 
OPEN LINE CORD, 

POWER SWITCH, 

LINE FILTER, OR 

RECTIFIER (CR1011 ) 



YES 



REFER TO THE 

INVERTER 

PROCEDURE 



(GO To\ 



REPAIR 

INDICATED 

FAULT 




REV FEB 1983 



2465 Service 




POWER SUPPLY TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 



POWER SUPPLY 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

PROCEDURE 




CHECK REGULATOR 
OUTPUTS ACCORDING 
TO TABLE AT LEFT 



YES 



CURRENT LIMIT 

OR STARTUP 

PROBLEM 




ALL 0V 



REFER TO THE 

INVERTER 

PROCEDURE 



SOME ACTIVE 



REFER TO THE 
REGULATOR 
PROCEDURE 



/go tci\ 






YES 



WITH POWER 

OFF, REMOVE 

COMB P231 



YES 




REPLACE 
THERMAL CUTOUT 
SWITCH (S1020) 



CHECK FOR 
OPEN LINE CORD, 

POWER SWITCH, 

LINE FILTER, OR 

RECTIFIER (CR1011 ) 



YES 



REFER TO THE 

INVERTER 

PROCEDURE 



YES 



DETERMINE CAUSE 
OF OVERHEATING 




REPLACE FUSE 

AND TURN POWER 

BACK ON 



SET SWITCH (S90) 
TO MATCH THE 
LINE VOLTAGE 



REPLACE 
THE FUSE 




WITH POWER 

OFF, REINSTALL 

COMB P231 



CHECK CR1011 , SPARK 

GAP ARRESTORS, AND 

DESCRETE FILTER 

COMPONENTS FOR SHORTS 



CHECK 

C1021 , C1022 

CR1050, Q1030 

Q1050, Q1060 

Q1070, CR1072 

CI 072, AND 

WINDINGS OF 

T1020 AND T1050 



WITH POWER 

OFF, REINSTALL 

COMB P231 




3831-109 



REV FEB 1983 



2465 Service 



Primary Test Load 

The test load illustrated below may be used to test the 
operation of the Inverter with the output transformer 
(T1060) and drive transistors (Q1060 and Q1070) dis- 
connected. Connect the + lead of the load to the lifted 
end of W1060 (see procedure in flowchart at right) and the 
- lead to the sources of Q1060 and Q1070. A schematic 
diagram of the load, showing the associated Tektronix 
part numbers, is given below. 



PRIMARY TEST LOAD 

( 1 52-0066-00 ) 



n 



-0 + 



150fi, 1W 
(303-0151-00) 



750mA 
( 1 59-0042-00 ) 



-±- Z.Z\if 

(290-0806-00) 



-o- 



4 EA. 4.5kfl, 20W 
(308-0033-00) 



+5 V D Test Load 

Some load is required for the Inverter to run. When the 
Power Supply module is removed from the instrument or 
when the Regulator Board is disconnected from the 
Inverter Board's output, the test load described below may 
be used to check operation of the Inverter. 



NOTE 

Each of the Regulators requires a load to regulate 
properly; this loading is not provided by the +5-V D 
load. 



TEST LOAD. Connect two 2-£2, 25-watt resistors 
(Tektronix part number 308-0205-00) from the +5-V D 
pins of J303 and J232 (on the Inverter Board) to ground. 



INVERTER TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 



INVERTER 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

PROCEDURE 



DISCONNECT FAN 
(P301) AND OPTIONS 

(P302 AND P303) 
FROM INVERTER BOARD 




GOOD 



FAN OR OPTIONS 

IS LOADING 

DOWN SUPPLY 





W 






REMOVE COMB 

CONNECTOR 

P232 






W 




CONNECT +5Vo 
LOAD (DESCRIBED 
AT LEFT) TO J303 



^ NOTE: BY USING TWO PS503s , 
THE INVERTER MAY BE CHECKED 
WITHOUT USING THE LINE POWER 
OR LINE- ISOLATION TRANSFORMER. 



REPLACE 

OPEN 
FUSE(S) 



<DOES SUPPLY>- 
^s. START? .^ 



NO 



REMOVE COMB 

CONNECTORS 

P233 AND P234 



YES 



FAILURE TO START 

IS CAUSED BY THE 

REGULATOR BOARD 

NOT DRAWING POWER. 

USING THE REGULATOR 

REPAIR NOTES IN 
THAT PROCEDURE AND 

THE THEORY OF 

OPERATION, REPAIR 

THE SUPPLIES IN THE 

FOLLOWING ORDER: 

+ 10V REF, +87V, 

+42V, +15V, +5V, 

-15V, -8V> -5V, 

+5V D 




PROBLEM 
IS ON 

INVERTER 
BOARD 



CHECK FOR 

EXCESSIVE 

LOADING BY 

REGULATOR 

BOARD 

(SHORTED PASS 

TRANSISTOR OR 

REGULATOR IC) 



CHECK 

01050, Q1060 

Q1070, CR1060 

AND CR1070 

FOR SHORTS 




YES 



POWER UP AND CHECK 

FOR 120V (PLUS A IV 

P-P TRIANGLE WAVE) 

ACROSS LOAD 



INSERT AN 
i SOLA r I ON XFMER 
IN LINE SUPPLY 





CHECK CURRENT 

LIMIT (Q1040, 

CR1040) AND 

DUMMY LOAD 

(C1072) FOR 

SHORTS 




ANY 
SHORTS? 



YES 



NO|f 



REMOVE PRIMARY 
TEST LOAD AND 
RESOLDER W1060 




YES 



CHECK P232, 
P233 , AND P234 
FOR SHORTS TO 
GROUND ON THE 

UNREGULATED 

SUPPLY LINES. 

ALSO CHECK FOR 

SHORTS ACROSS 

CR1101 , CR1102, 

CR1130, CR1131 , 

CR1124, AND 

CR1121 . 



REPAIR SERIES 
REGULATOR MADE 

UP OF Q1062 

AND ASSOCIATED 

PARTS 



REPAIR INVERTER 

DRIVE CIRCUIT 

U1062, U1064 

U1066 



REPLACE 

SHORTED 

COMPONENT 



ANY 
SHORTS? 



YES 



NO 




REMOVE PRIMARY 
TEST LOAD AND 
RESOLDER W1060 



UNSOLDER AND 
LIFT THE END OF 

W1060 NEAREST 
PIN 7 OF T1060 



3831 -107 



CONNECT THE 

PRIMARY TEST 

LOAD (DESCRIBED 

AT LEFT) BETWEEN 

THE LIFTED END 
OF W1060 AND THE 
SOURCES OF Q1060 

nii'u 14 1 10/ 10 



REPLACE 

Q1060 AND 

Q1070 



i i 



TURN OFF THE 

LINE VOLTAGE 

AND DISCONNECT 

THE PRIMARY 

TEST LOAD 



CONNECT THE + OUTPUT 
OF A DC POWER SUPPLY 

(PS503) TO THE 

JUNCTION OF R1020 AND 

CR1022. CONNECT THE - 

OUTPUT TO THE CATHODE 

OF CR1050 



CONNECT A DMM SET 
TO MEASURE VOLTAGE 
BETWEEN THE CATHODE 
OF CR1023 AND THE 
CATHODE OF CR1050 



TURN THE PS503 ON 
AND SLOWLY RAISE 
ITS OUTPUT TO 28V 




REDUCE OUTPUT LEVEL OF 
DC POWER SUPPLY UNTIL 
DRIVE FROM U1030 STOPS 




DISCONNECT T 
DC POWER 
SUPPLY ( I es: 



CHECK 
ZENER 
DIODE 
VR1020 



REDUCE PS503 
OUTPUT LEVEL 
TO 16V 




CHECK Q1021 , Q1022 

VR1020, Q1040, AND 

ASSOCIATED CIRCUITRY 



CHECK Q105S 
FOR OPENS 



CHECK SUPPL 

COMPONENTS 

CR1022, R102 

AND CI 025 



CHECK CURREN 

LIMIT CIRCUI 

Q1040 AND 

ASSOCIATED 

COMPONENTS 



CHECK CI 071 

R1071 , CR107 

AND R1072 



CHECK SLOW- 
START COMPONEI 
CI 034 AND CRK 



CHECK R1045 
R1046, R103( 

R1033 AND C10 
(FEED BACK 

OUTPUT VOLTAG 



AND T1050 



:r 

ER. 




YES 



POWER UP AND CHECK 

FOR 120V (PLUS A 1V 

P-P TRIANGLE WAVE) 

ACROSS LOAD 




CHECK CURRENT 

LIMIT (Q1040> 

CR1040) AND 

DUMMY LOAD 

(C1072) FOR 

SHORTS 




ANY 
SHORTS? 



YES 



NOh 



REMOVE PRIMARY 
TEST LOAD AND 
RESOLDER W1060 




INSERT AN 
ISOLATION XFMER 
IN LINE SUPPLY 



UNSOLDER AND 
LIFT THE END OF 

W1060 NEAREST 
PIN 7 OF T1060 



CONNECT THE 
PRIMARY TEST 
LOAD (DESCRIBED 
tt LEFT) BETWEEN 
THE LIFTED END 
)F W1060 AND THE 
50URCES OF Q1060 
AND Q1070 



YES 



CHECK P232, 
P233> AND P234 
FOR SHORTS TO 
GROUND ON THE 

UNREGULATED 

SUPPLY LINES. 

ALSO CHECK FOR 

SHORTS ACROSS 

CR1101 , CR1102> 

CR1130, CR1131 , 

CR1124, AND 

CR1121 . 



REPAIR SERIES 
REGULATOR MADE 

UP OF Q1 062 

AND ASSOCIATED 

PARTS 



REPAIR INVERTER 

DRIVE CIRCUIT 

U1062> U1064 

U1066 



REPLACE 

SHORTED 

COMPONENT 



ANY 
SHORTS? 



YES 



NO 




REMOVE PRIMARY 
TEST LOAD AND 
RESOLDER W1060 



REPLACE 

01060 AND 

01 070 



TURN OFF THE 

LINE VOLTAGE 

AND DISCONNECT 

THE PRIMARY 

TEST LOAD 




2465 Service 



MOVE THE + 

OUTPUT OF THE 

DC POWER SUPPLY 

Tn Tut r*Ti irM-^r- 

i u i nc on i nuuc 

OF CR1023 



YES 



REDUCE OUTPUT LEVEL OF 
DC POWER SUPPLY UNTIL 
DRIVE FROM U1030 STOPS 



CONNECT THE + OUTPUT 
OF A DC POWER SUPPLY 

(PS503) TO THE 

JUNCTION OF R1020 AND 

CR1022. CONNECT THE - 

OUTPUT TO THE CATHODE 

OF CR1050 



CONNECT A DMM SET 
TO MEASURE VOLTAGE 
BETWEEN THE CATHODE 
OF CR1023 AND THE 
CATHODE OF CR1050 



TURN THE PS503 ON 
AND SLOWLY RAISE 
ITS OUTPUT TO 28V 



DISCONNECT THE 

DC POWER 

SUPPLY ( I ES) 



CHECK 
ZENER 
DIODE 
VR1020 




REDUCE PS503 
OUTPUT LEVEL 
TO 16V 



YES 



CHECK Q1021 , Q1022 

VR1020, Q1040, AND 

ASSOCIATED CIRCUITRY 



CHECK Q1 050 
FOR OPENS 



CHECK SUPPLY 

COMPONENTS 

CR1022, R1020 

AND C1025 



CHECK CURRENT 

LIMIT CIRCUIT 

Q1040 AND 

ASSOCIATED 

COMPONENTS 



CHECK CI 071 

R1071 > CR1072 

AND R1072 



CHECK SLOW- 
START COMPONENTS 
C1034 AND CR1034 



CHEuK R1045 
R1046, R1036 

R1033 AND CI 033 
(FEED BACK OF 

OUTPUT VOLTAGE) 



CHECK T1020 
AND T1050 





TROUBLESHOOT U1030'S 
SUPPLY CIRCUIT. 
CHECK Q1021 AND 
CR1023 FOR OPENS 



CHECK 

CR1030 

FOR OPEN 



YES 



CONNECT THE + OUTPUT 

OF THE SECOND PS503 

TO J231B-1 AND THE 

- OUTPUT TO J231B-2. 

CONNECT THE COMMON 

TO THE CATHODE OF 

CR1064 



REPLACE 
SHORTED DEVICE 



TURN BOTH VOLTAGES 

TO MAXIMUM AND SET 

CURRENT LIMIT TO 200mA 



TURN THE FIRST 
PS503 UP TO 
28V AND BACK 

TO 16V AS 
DONE EARLIER 




TROUBLESHOOT 

U1062, U1064 

U1066> AND 

ASSOCIATED 

COMPONENTS 



TROUBLESHOOT 

TRANSFORMER 

T1060 




TROUBLESHOOT 
SHORT 



YES 



REPLACE 

FAULTY 

COMPONENT 



Ul 



CHECK 

R1034 AND 

R1037 



Regulator Repair Notes 

Hints for troubleshooting a faulty supply Regulator: 

1. First verify that the +10-V REF level is correctly 
adjusted; if it is not, do so (see Adjustment Procedure 
in Section 5). 



a. Is the output loaded? All Regulators (except 
+10-V REF require some load to regulate, the 
lower voltage supplies requiring greater loads. 
The Regulators between +15 V and —15 V may be 
loaded using 100-fi resistors of the proper power 
ratings. 

b. Check for a short-circuited series-pass device. 

c. Check feedback through the voltage-sense com- 
parator. 

3. Regulator output is low: 

a. Check for excessive loading using the Load Iso- 
lation diagram below and the Interconnection 
Schematic (diagram 13). 



b. The operation of the supply Regulators is inter- 
dependent. If a supply is out of regulation, verify 
that the supply of next greater magnitude is 
operating properly. Repair faulty Regulators in 



+ (lO fnWnflinn nvAnr- -LOT V/ A An 

i.i i v^ ivnuiiiiiy uiuci . i £3/ V, t**^ 

-15 V, -8 V, and then -5 V. 



1 p \ / i r- * . 



V , -r | u v , TO V 



c. Verify that the current-limit circuit 
activated. 



is not 



d. Check drive to series-pass device and verify that 
the device is not open circuited. 

e. Check feedback through the voltage-sense 
comparator. 

f. If supply goes low only when fully loaded, suspect 
an open-circuit diode in the associated rectifier 
circuit. 



LOAD ISOLATION 



USE THIS LOAD ISOLATION DIAGRAM TO LOCATE 
AND ISOLATE A BOARD WHICH 
LOADING A POWER SUPPLY RE 



AC LINE 
SUPPLY 



RECTIFIERS 

AND 

FILTERS 



IS EXCESSIVELY 


^0** 


GULATOR 




CRT 


















—J 




OPTIONS 

(IF 
PRESENT ) 




HIGH 

VOLTAGE 

BOARD 














READOUT 
BOARD 




^ 


















f 




t 




INVERTER 




REGULATOR 
BOARD 




MAIN 
BOARD 






DYNAMIC 

CENTERING 

BOARD 






BOARD 












' 




1 


' 










1 






FAN 
BOARD 




PROBE- 
POWER 
OUTPUTS 






CONTROL 
BOARD 






SCALE 

ILLUMINATION 

BOARD 








< 


' 
















FRONT- 
PANEL 
BOARD 




FRONT-PANEL 

VARIABLE 

BOARD 









REGULATOR TROUB 



REGULATOR 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

PROCEDURE* 



READ THE NOTES 

ON REGULATOR 
REPAIR AT LEFT 



*NOTE: ADJUSTMENT OR REPAIR 
OF ANY POWER SUPPLY REGULATOR 
NECESSITATES A COMPLETE 

r\c.uni_ i c5r\n i i um ur \ nc l i^o i rcuncin i . 



USING A DMM, 

CHECK THE +10V 

REF VOLTAGE 





NATURE OF 
ERROR? 



0V 



OUT OF 
LIMITS 



USING THE REGULATOR 
REPAIR NOTES AT LEFT 

AND THE THEORY OF 

OPERATION, CHECK AND 

REPAIR THE REGULATORS 

IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER: 

-15V UNREG (FUSE 1330) , 

+87V, +42V, +15V, +5V, 

-15V, -8V, AND -5V 



CHECK +5V D FEEDBACK 

PATH THROUGH V1371C 

AND U1040. EXERCISE 

THE CIRCUIT BY 

VARYING R1292* 

(VOLT REF AD J) AND 

VERIFY THAT +5V D 

VARIES 



CHECK FUSE F1102 

RECTIFIER CR1110 

C1110, C1111 , 

L1 110, AND +5V 

OUTPUT WINDINGS 

OF T1060 




FEEDBACK 
WORKING? 



NO 




YES 



REPAIR PATH 

THROUGH U1371C 

AND U1040 



REFER TO THE 

INVERTER 

PROCEDURE 





YES 



PROBLEM IS WITH 

+15V UNREG AND 

-5V UNREG SUPPLIES 



CHECK APPROPRIATE 

RECTIFIER, FILTER 

COMPONENTS, AND 

TRANSFORMER WINDINGS 



REPAIR 

INDICATED 

FAULT* 




REGULATOR TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 



2465 Service 



REGULATOR 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

PROCEDURE* 



*NOTE: ADJUSTMENT OR REPAIR 
OF ANY POWER SUPPLY REGULATOR 
NECESSITATES A COMPLETE 
RECALIBRATION OF THE INSTRUMENT. 



ators is inter- 
ilation, verify 
magnitude is 
Regulators in 
+15 V,+5V, 



rcuit is not 
d verify that 
voltage-sense 



aded, suspect 
ated rectifier 



READ THE NOTES 

ON REGULATOR 
REPAIR AT LEFT 



USING A DMM, 

CHECK THE +10V 

REF VOLTAGE 





NATURE OF 
ERROR? 



0V 



OUT OF 
LIMITS 



USING THE REGULATOR 
REPAIR NOTES AT LEFT 

AND THE THEORY OF 

OPERATION, CHECK AND 

REPAIR THE REGULATORS 

IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER: 

-15V UNREG (FUSE 1330) > 

+87V, +42V> + 15V, +5V, 

-15V, -8V, AND -5V 



CHECK +5V D FEEDBACK 

PATH THROUGH V1371C 

AND U1040. EXERCISE 

THE CIRCUIT BY 

VARYING R1292* 

(VOLT REF AD J) AND 

VERIFY THAT +5V D 

VARIES 



CHECK FUSE F1102, 

RECTIFIER CR1110, 

C1110, C1111 > 

L1110, AND +5V 

OUTPUT WINDINGS 

OF T1060 




FEEDBACK 
WORKING? 



NO 




YES 




YES 



SET +10V REF FOR 
PRECISELY + 10V* 




YES 



YES 



REPAIR PATH 

THROUGH U1371C 

AND U1040 



REFER TO THE 

INVERTER 

PROCEDURE 




CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE 

LOADING OF +10V REF. 

FIRST CHECK VR1293, THEN 

REMAINING LOADS. USE THE 

LOAD ISOLATION DRAWING 

AT LEFT AND THE POWER 

DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS 

<jj> AND <^2> 



SET SWITCH (S90) 
TO MATCH THE 
LINE VOLTAGE 



PROBLEM IS WITH 

+15V UNREG AND 

-5V UNREG SUPPLIES 



CHECK APPROPRIATE 

RECTIFIER, FILTER 

COMPONENTS,' AND 

TRANSFORMER WINDINGS 





YES 




YES 



CHECK C1400, 

U1290, U1300C 

AND ASSOCIATED 

CIRCUIT COMPONENTS 



TROUBLESHOOT 

OVERLOADED 

BRANCH 



CHECK ASSOCIATED 

RECTIFIER, FILTER 

COMPONENTS, AND 

TRANSFORMER WINDINGS 



REPAIR 

INDICATED 

FAULT* 




3831-108 



Section 1 0—2465 Service 



REPLACEABLE 
MECHANICAL PARTS 



PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION 

Replacement parts are available from or through your local 
Tektronix, Inc. Field Office or representative. 

Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made to 
accommodate improved components as they become available, 
and to give you the benefit of the latest circuit improvements 
developed in our engineering department. It is therefore 
important, when ordering parts, to include the following 
information in your order: Part number, instrument type or 
number, serial number, and modification number if applicable. 

If a part you have ordered has been replaced with a new or 
improved part, your local Tektronix, Inc. Field Office or 
representative will contact you concerning any change in part 
number. 

Change information, if any, is located at the rear of this 
manual. 

SPECIAL NOTES AND SYMBOLS 

X000 Part first added at this serial number 

00X Part removed after this serial number 



FIGURE AND INDEX NUMBERS 

Items in this section are referenced by figure and index 
numbers to the illustrations. 



INDENTATION SYSTEM 

This mechanical parts list is indented to indicate item 
relationships. Following is an example of the indentation system 
used in the description column. 



12 3 4 5 



Name & Description 



Assembly and lor Component 

Attaching parts for Assembly and/or Component 

Detail Part of Assembly and/or Component 
Attaching parts for Detail Part 

Parts of Detail Part 

Attaching parts for Parts of Detail Part 



Attaching Parts always appear in the same indentation as 
the item it mounts, while the detail parts are indented to the right. 
Indented items are part of, and included with, the next higher 
indentation. The separation symbol — * — indicates the end of 
attaching parts. 

Attaching parts must be purchased separately, unless otherwise 
specified. 



ITEM NAME 

In the Parts List, an Item Name is separated from the 
description by a colon (:). Because of space limitations, an Item 
Name may sometimes appear as incomplete. For further Item 
Name identification, the U.S. Federal Cataloging Handbook H6-1 
can be utilized where possible. 



ABBREVIATIONS 





INCH 


ELCTRN 


ELECTRON 


IN 


INCH 


SE 


SINGLE END 


# 


NUMBER SIZE 


ELEC 


ELECTRICAL 


INCAND 


INCANDESCENT 


SECT 


SECTION 


ACTR 


ACTUATOR 


ELCTLT 


ELECTROLYTIC 


INSUL 


INSULATOR 


SEMICOND SEMICONDUCTOR 


ADPTR 


ADAPTER 


ELEM 


•ELEMENT 


INTL 


INTERNAL 


SHLD 


SHIELD 


ALIGN 


ALIGNMENT 


EPL 


ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST 


LPHLDR 


LAMPHOLDER 


SHL.DR 


SHOULDERED 


AL 


ALUMINUM 


EQPT 


EQUIPMENT 


MACH 


MACHINE 


SKT 


SOCKET 


ASSEM 


ASSEMBLED 


EXT 


EXTERNAL 


MECH 


MECHANICAL 


SL 


SLIDE 


ASSY 


ASSEMBLY 


FIL 


FILLISTER HEAD 


MTG 


MOUNTING 


SLFLKG 


SELF-LOCKING 


ATTEN 


ATTENUATOR 


FLEX 


FLEXIBLE 


NIP 


NIPPLE 


SLVG 


SLEEVING 


AWG 


AMERICAN WIRE GAGE 


FLH 


FLAT HEAD 


NON WIRE 


NOT WIRE WOUND 


SPR 


SPRING 


BD 


BOARD 


FLTR 


FILTER 


OBD 


ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 


SQ 


SQUARE 


BRKT 


BRACKET 


FR 


FRAME or FRONT 


OD 


OUTSIDE DIAMETER 


SST 


STAINLESS STEEL 


BRS 


BRASS 


FSTNR 


FASTENER 


OVH 


OVAL HEAD 


STL 


STEEL 


BRZ 


BRONZE 


FT 


FOOT 


PH BRZ 


PHOSPHOR BRONZE 


SW 


SWITCH 


BSHG 


BUSHING 


FXD 


FIXED 


PL 


PLAIN or PLATE 


T 


TUBE 


CAB 


CABINET 


GSKT 


GASKET 


PLSTC 


PLASTIC 


TERM 


TERMINAL 


CAP 


CAPACITOR 


HDL 


HANDLE 


PN 


PART NUMBER 


THD 


THREAD 


CER 


CERAMIC 


HEX 


HEXAGON 


PNH 


PAN HEAD 


THK 


THICK 


CHAS 


CHASSIS 


HEX HD 


HEXAGONAL HEAD 


PWR 


POWER 


TNSN 


TENSION 


CKT 


CIRCUIT 


HEX SOC 


HEXAGONAL crv ^KET 


RCPT 


RECEPTACLE 


TPG 


TAppiMQ 


















COMP 


COMPOSITION 


HLCPS 


HELICAL COMPRESSION 


RES 


RESISTOR 


TRH 


TRUSS HEAD 


CONN 


CONNECTOR 


HLEXT 


HELICAL EXTENSION 


RGD 


RIGID 


V 


VOLTAGE 


COV 


COVER 


HV 


HIGH VOLTAGE 


RLF 


RELIEF 


VAR 


VARIABLE 


CPLG 


COUPLING 


IC 


INTEGRATED CIRCUIT 


RTNR 


RETAINER 


W/ 


WITH 


CRT 


CATHODE RAY TUBE 


ID 


INSIDE DIAMETER 


SCH 


SOCKET HEAD 


WSHR 


WASHER 


DEG 


DEGREE 


IDENT 


IDENTIFICATION 


SCOPE 


OSCILLOSCOPE 


XFMR 


TRANSFORMER 


DWR 


DRAWER 


IMPLR 


IMPELLER 


SCR 


SCREW 


XSTR 


TRANSISTOR 



10-1 



Replaceable Mechanical Parts— 2465 Service 



Mfr. Code Manufacturer 



CROSS INDEX— MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER 
Address City, State, Zip 



000BK STAUFFER SUPPLY 

000EL PORTLAND SCREW CO. 

00779 AMP, INC. 

01536 CAMCAR DIV OF TEXTRON INC. SEMS 

PRODUCTS UNIT 

05006 TWENTIETH CENTURY PLASTICS, INC. 

06915 RICHCO PLASTIC CO. 

09250 ELECTRO ASSEMBLIES CORP. 

C AND K COMPONENTS INC. 

09922 BURNDY CORPORATION 

12327 FREEWAY CORPORATION 

22161 ADVANCE MACHINE CORP 

22526 BERG ELECTRONICS, INC. 

24931 SPECIALITY CONNECTOR CO., INC. 

'28817 CAL-METEX CORP., SUBSIDIARY OF METEX 

CORP. 

31918 IEE/SCHADOW INC. 

50293 GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, INSTALLA- 

TION AND SERVICE ENGINEERING DEPT. 

54583 TDK ELECTRONICS CORP. 



105 SE TAYLOR 
6520 N. BASIN AVE. 
P.O. BOX 3608 

1818 CHRISTINA ST. 
415 E WASHINGTON BLVD. 
5825 N. TRIPP AVE. 
15 RIVERDALE AVE 

RICHARDS AVENUE 
9301 ALLEN DRIVE 
10200 AVIATION BLVD 
YOUK EXPRESSWAY 
2620 ENDRESS PLACE 

509 HINDRY AVE. 
8081 WALLACE ROAD 

1 RIVER ROAD 

755 EASTGATE BLVD. 



PORTLAND, OR 97214 
PORTLAND, OR 97217 
HARRISBURG, PA 17105 

ROCKFORD, IL 61108 
LOS ANGELES, CA 90015 
CHICAGO, IL 60646 
NEWTON MA 02158 

NORWALK, CT 06852 
CLEVELAND, OH 44125 
LOS ANGELES, CA 90045 
NEW CUMBERLAND, PA 17070 
GREENWOOD, IN 46142 

INGLEWOOD, CA 90301 
EDEN PRAIRIE, MN 55343 

SCHENECTADY, NY 12306 
GARDEN CITY, NY 11530 



70485 ATLANTIC INDIA RUBBER WORKS, INC. 

71400 BUSSMAN MFG., DIVISION OF MCGRAW- 

EDISON CO. 
73743 FISCHER SPECIAL MFG. CO. 

78189 ILLINOIS TOOL WORKS, INC. 

SHAKEPROOF DIVISION 
80009 TEKTRONIX, INC. 

80033 PRESTOLE EVERLOCK, INC. 

82104 STANDARD GRIGSBY CO., DIV. OF SUN 

CHEMICAL CORPORATION 
83385 CENTRAL SCREW CO. 

83486 ELCO INDUSTRIES, INC. 

86928 SEASTROM MFG. COMPANY, INC. 

90201 MALLORY CAPACITOR CO., DIV. OF 

P. R. MALLORY AND CO., INC. 
93907 TEXTRON INC. CAMCAR DIV 

95987 WECKESSER CO., INC. 

S3109 C/O PANEL COMPONENTS CORP. 

S3629 PANEL COMPONENTS CORP. 



571 W. POLK ST. 

2536 W. UNIVERSITY ST. 
446 MORGAN ST. 

ST. CHARLES ROAD 

P O BOX 500 

P. O. BOX 278,1345 MIAMI ST. 

920 RATHBONE AVENUE 

2530 CRESCENT DR. 

1103SAMUELSON ROAD 

701 SONORA AVENUE 

3029 E. WASHINGTON STREET 

P. O. BOX 372 

600 18TH AVE 

4444 WEST IRVING PARK RD. 

P.O. BOX 6626 

2015 SECOND ST. 



CHICAGO, IL 60607 

ST. LOUIS, MO 63107 
CINCINNATI, OH 45206 

ELGIN, IL 60120 
BEAVERTON, OR 97077 
TOLEDO, OH 43605 

AURORA, IL 60507 
BROADVIEW, IL 60153 
ROCKFORD, IL 61101 
GLENDALE, CA 91201 

INDIANAPOLIS, IN 46206 
ROCKFORD, IL 61101 
CHICAGO, IL 60641 
SANTA ROSA, CA 95406 
BERKELEY, CA 94170 



T0032 
T0171 



POWELL ELECTRONICS 
ZEPHER ELECTRONICS 



411 FAIRCHILD DR. 
647 INDUSTRY DRIVE 



MT. VIEW, CA 94040 
SEATTLE, WA 98188 



T0336 AniXTER 

T0588 UNIVERSAL PRECISION PRODUCTS 

T1105 J PHILLIP INDUSTRIES INC 

T1161 DTM INDUSTRIES 

T1163 POLYCAST, INC. 



P.O. BOX 88315 TUKWILA BRANCH 
1775 NW216TH 
5713 NORTHWEST flIGHWAY 
4725 NAUTILUS CT. SOUTH 
9898 SW TIGARD ST. 



SEATTLE.WA 98188 
HILLSBORO, OR 97123 
CHICAGO, IL 60646 
BOULDER, CO 80301 
TIGARD, OR 97223 



T1167 COLUMBINE PLASTICS 

T1168 TEXSUN,INC 

T1171 BERMO, INC. 

T1176 KASO PLASTICS 

T1288 PRODUCTION PARTS INC 



3195 BLUFF ST 

11368 W.OLYMPIC BLVD 

220 W. 86TH ST. 

RT 2, BOX 600 

4288 SE INTERNATIONAL WAY 



BOULDER, CO 
LOS ANGELES,CA 90023 
MINNEAPOLIS, MN 55420 
CORBETT, OR 97019 
PORTLAND, OR 97222 



10-2 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Mechanical Parts— 2465 Service 



Fig. & 
Index 
No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Qty 12 3 4 5 



Name & Description 



1-1 
-2 



-10 

-11 
-12 

-13 

-14 
-15 

-16 

-17 



-18 
-19 



-20 



-21 
-22 



-23 



334-4379-00 
366-2041-01 
377-0512-01 
366-2036-00 
333-2877-00 
200-2779-00 
348-0740-00 

21 1-0718-00 

101-0082-00 
101-0082-01 

211-0718-00 

214-3374-00 
214-3374-01 
337-2926-00 
337-2926-03 
378-0199-00 
211-0720-00 
211-0691-00 
343-0003-00 
161-0104-00 



334-4378-00 
334-4381-00 
334-4377-00 
334-4377-02 
348-0729-00 

212-0154-00 
211-0711-00 
211-0722-00 

200-2685-00 
334-4380-00 
337-2395-00 



367-0303-00 
367-0303-02 
367-0303-04 

212-0144-00 
346-0195-00 

437-0286-00 
437-0286-03 
348-0764-00 
348-0764-01 



B010100 
B020000 



B010100 
B011000 



B010100 
B012850 



B010100 
B020500 



B022190 



213-0138-00 B022190 



B010100 
B011000 
B021670 



B010100 

B010100 
B021870 
B010100 
B020000 



B019999 



B010100 B011059 

B011060 

B010100 B024399 

B024400 



B010999 



B012849 



B020499 



B010999 
B021669 



B010999 
B021869 
B019999 



1 
1 
1 

2 
2 

1 
1 

AR 
1 



MARKER, IDENT:BLANK 
KNOB::GY,BAR,0.172 ID X 0.410 OD 
INSERT,KNOB:0.125 ID X 0.663 L,AL,0.247 
PUSH BUTTON:GY,0.206 SQ.1.445 H 
PANEL.FRONT: 
COVER,TOP:TRIM 

FOOT,CABINET:BOTTOM FRONT.PLASTIC 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)"""""* 
SCREW,MACHlNE:6-32 X 0.312,FLH,DEG TORX 
""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)"""*" 
TRIM,DECORATIVE:FRONT,PLASTIC 
TRIM, DECORATIVE: FRON, PLASTIC 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)"""""* 
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.312,FLH,DEG TORX 
**"**"****(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 
SPRING,FILTER:23 L 
SPR1NG,F1LTER:1.32 L.CU-BE 
SHLD,IMPLOSION:4.33 X 3.56 X 0.06,CLEAR 
SHLD,IMPLOSION:4.44 X 3.67 X 0.06.CLEAR 
FILTER,LT,CRT:BLUE,4.1 X 3.32 X 0.03 
SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.50 PNH.TORX 
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.625.PNH 
CLAMP,LOOP:0.25 ID.PLASTIC 
CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3 WIRE.98.0 L,W/RTANG CONN 
(STANDARD) 

MARKER, IDENT:MKD PROBE POWER 
MARKER,IDENT:MKD CONNECTOR IDENT 
MARKER,IDENT:MKD CAUTION 
MARKER,IDENT:MKD CAUTION 
FOOT,CABINET:W/CORDWRAP,REAR, BLACK 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)""*""" 
SCREW,MACHINE:8-32 X 1.125.PNH.TORX 
SCR.ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 
************(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 
COVER, REAR: 

MARKER, IDENT:MKD HANDLE 2465 
SHIELD,ELEC:HANDLE 
*********"*"(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 
SCR,TPG,TF:4-24 X 0.188 INCH,PNH STL 
""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 
HANDLE,CARRYING:1 2.864 L,SST 
HANDLE,CARRYING:1 2.704 L,SST 
HANDLE,CARRYING:12.86 L,GRIP & INDEX 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 
SCREW,TPG,TF:8-16 X 0.562 L 
STRAP,GROUND:STAINLESS STEEL 
************(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 
CABINET,SCOPE:ALUMINUM 
CABINET,SCOPE:ALUMINUM 
SHLD GSKT,ELEC:.235 X 0.094,WIRE MESH 
SHLD GSKT,ELEC:0.188 X 0.094,34.0 L 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


80009 


334-4379-00 


80009 


366-2041-01 


80009 


377-0512-01 


80009 


366-2036-00 


80009 


333-2877-00 


80009 


200-2779-00 


80009 


348-0740-00 


83486 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


101-0082-00 


T1166 


ORD BY DESCR 


83486 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


214-3374-00 


80009 


337-2926-00 


80009 


337-2926-03 


80009 


378-0199-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


95987 


1-4-6B 


S3109 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


334-4378-00 


80009 


334-4381-00 


80009 


334-4377-00 


80009 


334-4377-02 


80009 


348-0729-00 


93907 


ORD BY DESCR 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


200-2685-00 


80009 


334-4380-00 


83385 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


367-0303-00 


80009 


367-0303-02 


80009 


367-0303-04 


93907 


225-38131-012 


80009 


346-0195-00 


80009 


437-0286-00 


T1171 


ORD BY DESCR 


57003 


51-C5P10035 


S7003 


ORD BY DESCR 



REV OCT 1984 



10-3 




2465 OSCILLOSCOPE 



Replaceable Mechanical Parts — 2465 Service 



Fig. & 
Index 
No. 



2-1 



-10 
-11 
-12 



-13 
-14 
-15 
-16 



-17 
-18 

-19 

-20 

-21 
-22 



-23 
-24 
-25 



-26 



-27 
-28 



-29 
-30 
-31 
-32 
-33 
-34 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



407-2790-00 

211-0711-00 
210-0457-00 

343-1012-00 
426-1864-00 

211-0713-00 
213-0914-00 

343-0992-00 

343-0993-00 



348-0731-00 
378-0204-00 



175-4593-00 
366-1833-00 
366-2145-01 
366-2038-00 
366-2039-00 
366-2039-01 



366-2040-00 
366-2041-01 
366-2041-03 
366-2017-00 



211-0304-00 

131-0608-00 
384-1639-01 
384-1640-01 
129-0941-00 
175-4597-00 



211-0304-00 

377-0550-00 
131-0608-00 
131-0608-00 
352-0639-00 
352-0639-00 
352-0641-00 
352-0641-00 
352-0642-00 
352-0692-00 
129-0938-00 
129-0978-00 
220-0495-00 
210-0012-00 



Qty 12 3 4 5 



Name & Description 



B010100 
B020000 



366-2039-02 B025323 



B010100 
B012000 



B019999 
B015322 



B011999 



354-0632-00 
354-0632-01 



B010100 
B020000 
B010100 
B020000 
B010100 
B020000 

B020000 



B010100 
B020000 



B019999 



B013849 



B019999 



1 BRACKET,CKT BD:VERTICAL,ALUM 

»•••*••**»**•*/ ATTAr^UIIKiri D4DTCI"""*"" 

4 SCR.ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 

1 NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:6-32 X 0.312.STL CD PL 

"**********(END ATTACHING PARTS)****"*** 
1 RETAINER,CKT BD: 

1 FRAME.CRT: 
«««»»»"(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 

4 SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 1.25,FLH,100 DEG.STL 

4 SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.75,FLH,100 DEG,TOR 

************(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 

2 RETAINER,CRT:RIGHT,PLASTIC 
(UPPER RT/LOWER LEFT/NAT) 

2 RETAINER,CRT:PLASTIC 
(UPPER LEFT/LOWER RT/BLK) 

1 GASKET:CRT 

1 REFLECTOR,LIGHT:INT SCALE ILLUMINATION 

1 CKT BOARD ASSY:SCALE ILLUMINATION 

(SEE A8 REPL) 

1 .CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:2,26 AWG,4.0 L,RIBBON 

3 KNOB:GRAY,0.25 ID X 0.392 X 0.39 

3 KNOB:DOVE GY,TIME/DIV,0.08 ID X 

2 KNOB:GY,0.25 ID X 0.706 OD X 0.6 

1 KNOB:GY,B SWEEP,0.2 ID X 0.78 OD 

1 KNOB:GY,B SWEEP 

(STANDARD.OPTIONS 05,06,09) 
1 KNOB:GX B SWEEP 

(STANDARD.OPTIONS 05,06,09) 
1 KNOB:CLEAR,A SWEEP.0.252 ID X 1 . 

4 KNOB::GY,BAR,0.172 ID X 0.410 OD 

4 KNOB:DOVE GRAY,BAR,0.172 ID X 0.41 OD 
1 6 KNOB:0.1 8 SQ X 0.644 H.IVORY GY 

(SUBPART OF A6 CKT BOARD) 
1 CKT BOARD ASSY: FRONT PANEL VARIABLE 

(SEE A7 REPL) 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 

3 SCREW,MACHINE:4-40X0.312,PNH 
************(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 

5 TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 

1 SHAFT.VAR RES:3.21 L.NYLON 

2 SHAFT,VAR RES:2.286 L.NYLON 

2 SPACER,POST:1 .86 L W/4-40 INT THD 

1 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:5,26 AWG,4.0 L.RIBBON 

1 CKT BOARD ASSY:FRONT PANEL(SEE A6 REPL) 
(REPLACEABLE ONLY AS 672-1 038-XX) 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)***"**"" 

5 SCREW,MACHINE:4-40X0.312,PNH 

**" **(END ATTACHING PARTS)*"**"** 

10 .INSERT,KNOB:0.178 ID X 0.640 THK,0.370 
7 TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 

10 TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 

2 .HOLDER,LED:BLACK 

1 .HOLDER.LED: BLACK 

3 .HOLDER, LED:Fi*v'E,BLACK 

2 .HOLDER,LED:FIVE,BLACK 

1 .HOLDER,LED:FOUR,BLACK 

2 .HOLDER,LED:PLASTIC 

5 SPACER, POST:1 .102 L W/4-40 THD EACH END 

2 SPACER, POST:0.375-32 AL.0.5 HEX 

2 NUT,PLAiN,HEX.:0.375-32 X 0.438 iNCH BRS 

2 WASHER, LOCK: INTL,0.384 ID,INTL,0.022 TH 

(SEE CHASSIS PARTS S3185 REPL) 

1 RING,MOUNTING:5.41 X4.18 

1 RING,MOUNTING:5.41 X4.18,BRASS 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Numbe 


80009 


407-2790-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


83385 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


343-1012-00 


80009 


426-1864-00 


93907 


ORD BY DESCR 


93907 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


343-0992-00 


80009 


343-0993-00 


80009 


348-0731-00 


80009 


378-0204-00 


80009 


175-4593-00 


80009 


366-1833-00 


80009 


366-2145-01 


80009 


366-2038-00 


80009 


366-2039-00 


T1176 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


366-2040-00 


80009 


366-2041-01 


80009 


366-2017-00 



01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


22526 


48283-036 


T1167 


ORD BY DESCR 


T1167 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


129-0941-00 


80009 


175-4597-00 



01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


377-0550-00 


22526 


48283-036 


22526 


48283-036 


80009 


352-0639-00 


80009 


352-0639-00 


80003 


352-0641 -00 


80009 


352-0641-00 


80009 


352-0642-00 


T1167 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


129-0938-00 


80009 


129-0978-00 


73743 


ORD BY DEooR 


78189 


1 220-02-00-0541 C 


22161 


ORD BY DESCR 



REV OCT 1984 



10-5 



Replaceable Mechanical Parts— 2465 Service 



Fig. & 
Index 
No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Qty 12 3 4 5 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


80009 


333-2876-00 


80009 


333-2876-01 


78189 


3515-20-19-1744 


78189 


211-041800-00 


80009 


214-3373-00 


80009 


214-3428-00 


80009 


348-0769-00 


80009 


386-4728-00 


28817 


01-0404-3719 


80009 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


175-4593-00 


80009 


175-4595-00 


73743 


2X2031 7-402 


78189 


121 4-05-00-0541 C 


80009 


386-4713-00 


80009 


386-4713-01 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


337-3059-00 


T1168 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


334-3379-00 


80009 


195-3984-00 


80009 


334-4865-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


386-4863-00 


78189 


211-041800-00 


T1161 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


369-0043-01 


T0588 


ORD BY DESCR 


T0588 


ORD BY DESCR 


000EL 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


361-1188-00 


86928 


5702-201-20 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


337-3021-00 


80009 


334-4759-00 


80009 


200-0237-04 


S3629 


031.1673(MDLFEU) 


S3629 


FEK 031.1663 


83385 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


195-3984-00 


80009 


195-3986-00 


54583 


ZUB2203-000 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


78189 


211-041800-00 


80009 


195-3989-00 


80009 


195-3990-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


78189 


211-041800-00 


80009 


195-3987-00 


80009 


195-3988-00 



2-35 



-36 
-37 



-38 



333-2876-00 
333-2876-01 
210-0077-00 
210-0586-00 
214-3373-00 
214-3428-00 
348-0769-00 
386-4728-00 
348-0276-00 
348-0792-01 
175-4593-00 



B010100 
B020000 



B019999 



B010100 
B020000 



B0 19999 



1 

1 

2 

3 

2 

2 

1 

1 

AR 

1 





175-4595-00 




6 




210-0583-00 




6 




210-0046-00 




6 


-39 


386-4713-00 


B010100 B019999 1 




386-4713-01 


B020000 




-40 


211-0711-00 




5 




337-3059-00 


B020000 






343-1099-00 


B020000 






334-3379-00 






-41 


195-3984-00 






-42 


334-4865-00 






-43 


211-0304-00 




2 


-44 


386-4863-00 






-45 


210-0586-00 






-46 


354-0638-00 






-47 


369-0043-01 








343-1190-00 


B023710 






355-0192-00 








220-0555-00 






-48 


361-1188-00 






-49 


210-0994-00 






-50 


211-0711-00 






-51 


337-3021-00 






-52 


334-4759-00 


B010100 B012199 1 




334-5196-00 


B012200 




-53 


200-0237-04 






-54 


204-0832-00 






-55 


200-2265-00 






-56 


210-0457-00 






-57 


195-3984-00 
195-3986-00 






-58 


119-1536-00 






-59 


211-0332-00 




2 


-60 


210-0586-00 




2 


-61 


195-3989-00 




1 


-62 


195-3990-00 




1 


-63 


211-0304-00 




2 


-64 


210-0586-00 




2 


-65 






1 


-66 
-67 


195-3987-00 
195-3988-00 




1 
1 

4 



PANEL.FRONT: 

PANEL,FRONT:2465 

WASHER, SPR TNSN:0.375 ID X 0.0025 OD 

NUT.PLASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL,CD PL 

SPRING,GROUND:PHOSPHOR-BRONZE 

SPRING,GROUND:VOLTS/DIV,SST 

SHLD,GSKT,ELEK:TIME/DIV 

SUBPANEL.FRONT: 

SHLD,GSKT,ELEK:0.026 OD NPRN W/WIRE NET CO 

GASKET:ELECTRICAL SHIELD 

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:2,26 AWG,4.0 L,RIBBON 

(SUBPART OF THE SUB-PANEL ASSEMBLY 

.NOT ILLUSTRATED) 

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:3,22 AWG.2.0 L.RIBBON 

"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)""*""" 

NUT,PLAIN,HEX:0.25-32 X 0.312 INCH.BRS 

WASHER, LOCK:0.261 ID,INTL,0.018 THK,BRS 

""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)"*""" 

PLATE,REAR:POWER SUPPLY 

PLATE,REAR:POWER SUPPLY 

"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*""""" 

SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 

""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)""""* 

SHIELD,ELEC:LVPS 

RTNR, POWER SPLY:LOW VOLTAGE.FRONT 

MARKER, IDENT:MARKED GROUND SYMBOL 

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:22 AWG,4.0 L.8-01 

MARKER, IDENT:MKD FAN.CAUTION 

SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.312,PNH 

SUPPORT,CKT BD: 

NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL,CD PL 

RING,FAN:POLYMIDE,FIRE RETARDANT 

IMPLR,FAN ASSY:2.8 DIAX0.25 DIA SHAFT 

.COLLAR, IMPELLER:0.464 X 0.25.ALUMINUM 

.STUD,SHLDR&STEP:4-40 THD ONE END.8-32 THD 

.NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:8-32 X 0.25 INCH STL 

SPACER,POST:1.15 L,4-40 THD 1 END 

WASHER,FLAT:0.125 ID X 0.25" OD.STL 

SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 

SHIELD,ELEC:LVPS PEOPLE 

MARKER, IDENT:MKD SHIELDS INVERTER 

MARKER, IDENT:MKD CAUTION 

(STD AND OPTS. 05,06,09,10) 

COVER,FUSE HLDR:PLASTIC,SAFETY CONTROLLED 

BODY,FUSEHOLDER:3AG,5 X 20MM FUSES 

CAP,FUSEHOLDER:5 X 20MM FUSES 

"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 

NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:6-32 X 0.312.STL CD PL 

""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)"******* 

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:22 AWG.4.0 C.8-01 

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:18 AWG,4.0 L,8-0 

FILTER, RFI:3A,250VAC,50/60 HZ 

"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 

SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.5,PNH,TORX DRIVE 

NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL,CD PL 

******"****(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:18 AWG.4.0 L,8-9 

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:18 AWG.4.5 L.5-4 

SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.312,PNH 

NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL,CD PL 

(SEE S90 CHASSIS REPL) 

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:22 AWG.4.0 L.8-19 

LEAD,ELECTRICAL:22 AWG,4.0 L,8-29 

NUT,PLAIN,KNURL:(FURN WITH 131-1910-01 BNC 



10-6 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Mechanical Parts— 2465 Service 



Fig. & 










Index 


Tektronix 


Serial/Model No. 




No. 


Part No. 


Eff 


Dscont 


Qt 


2-68 








4 


-69 


131-1910-01 






4 


-70 


200-2686-00 






1 


-71 


211-0711-00 






1 


-72 


195-8410-00 






1 


-73 


01 n_ncc-i_nn 






1 


-74 


195-9513-00 






1 


-75 


210-0551-00 
131-1425-00 






1 
AR 


-76 


344-0116-00 
344-0250-00 


B010100 
B010171 


B010170 


1 

1 


-77 


211-0504-00 


B010100 


B021965 


1 




211-0722-00 


B021966 




1 


-78 


307-1154-00 






1 


-79 


211-0324-00 






2 


-80 


210-0457-00 






2 


-81 


407-2809-00 






1 


-82 


210-0457-00 
334-1951-00 






2 

1 


-83 


337-2931-00 






1 


-84 


211-0324-00 






4 


-85 


200-0917-01 






1 


-86 


198-4603-00 






1 


-87 


214-0291-00 






2 


-88 


211-0324-00 






2 


-89 


210-0586-00 






2 


-90 


119-1478-00 
119-1478-01 


B010100 
B021400 


B021399 




-91 


348-0762-00 








-92 


348-0004-00 


B010100 


B021399 




-93 


195-6851-00 








-94 


211-0324-00 








-95 


210-0551-00 
195-8410-00 








-96 


211-0324-00 








-97 


210-0551-00 








-98 


210-0994-00 









12 3 4 5 



Name & Description 



Mfr 

Code Mfr Part Number 



-99 

-100 
-101 



361-0067-00 
131-0608-00 



WASHER, LOCK:(FURN WITH 131-1910-01 BNC'S) 
CONN,RCPT,ELEC:BNC,FEMALE 
COVER,REAR:CRT 

"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*""""" 
SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 
""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)*"""" 
LEAD,ELECTRI'CAL:22 AWG.1.65 L 
""^""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 
NUT,PLAiN,HEX.:4-40 X 0.25 iNCH.'STL 
**""*""*(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 
LEAD,ELECTRICAL:22 AWG.1.4 L 

"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*"*** 

NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,STL 
""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)**"***** 
TERM SET,PIN:(36) 0.025 SQ RTANG,0.150L 
RTNR,CAPACITOR:CAPACITOR MTG 
CLIP,ELECTRICAL:COMPONENT MOUNTING 
"************(ATTACHING PARTS)*""*"*** 
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.250,PNH STL.CD PL 
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 
************(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 
PASSIVE NETWORKrCRT TERMINATOR,FINISHED 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 
SCR.ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.188 L,PNH,TORX,MCH 
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:6-32 X 0.312.STL CD PL 
""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)***"**** 
BRACKET,ANGLE:RESISTOR,AL, 
"*"*********(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:6-32 X 0.312,STL CD PL 
**"********(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 
MARKER, IDENT:CRT WARNING 
SHIELD,CRT: 

*********""*(ATTACHING PARTS)*****"**** 
SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.188 L,PNH,TORX,MCH 
************(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 
COV.CRT SKT:2.052 OD X 0.291 H.PLASTIC 
WIRE SET,ELEC: 

CONTACT,SPRING:1.188 X 0.375 X 0.25 INCH 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 
SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.188 L,PNH,TORX,MCH 
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL,CD PL 
************(END ATTACHING PARTS)*******" 
COIL.TUBE DEFL:FXD,TRACE ROTATION 
COILJUBE DEFL:FXD TRACE REDUCTION 
PAD,CUSHIONING:1.0 X 3.0 X 0.25,POLTHN 
GROMMET,RUBBER:0.281 ID X 0.563 INCH OD 
LEAD,ELECTRICAL:BRAIDED,1.65 L 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 
SCR.ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.188 L,PNH,TORX,MCH 
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,STL 
************(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 
LEAD,ELECTRICAL:22 AWG.1.65 L 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 
SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.188 L,PNH,TORX,MCH 
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:4-40 X 0.25 INCH, STL 
WASHER, FLAT:0.125 ID X 0.25" OD,STL 
""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 
CKT BOARD ASSY:DYNAMIC CENTERING 
(SEE A14 REPL) 

************"(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 
.SPACER,CKT BD:0.187,NYLON 
■**********(END ATTACHING PARTS)********** 
.TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 



24931 


28JR284-1 


80009 


200-2686-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


195-8410-00 


000BK 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


195-9513-00 


000BK 


ORD BY DESCR 


22526 


65521-136 


90201 


TH-17 


80033 


E50005-007 


83385 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


307-1154-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


83385 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


407-2809-00 


83385 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


334-1951-00 


80009 


337-2931-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


200-0917-01 


80009 


198-4603-00 


80009 


214-0291-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


78189 


211-041800-00 


80009 


119-1478-00 


09250 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


348-0762-00 


70485 


763 


80009 


195-6851-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


000BK 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


195-8410-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


000BK 


ORD BY DESCR 


86928 


5702-201-20 



06915 LCBS-3M 

22526 48283-036 



REV OCT 1984 



10-7 



Replaceable Mechanical Parts— 2465 Service 



Fig. & 






Index 


Tektronix 


Serial/Mi 


No. 


Part No. 


Eff 


2-102 


175-8010-00 




-103 


348-0757-00 




-104 


343-0081-00 




-105 


210-0457-00 




-106 


348-0763-00 




-107 


348-0751-00 




-108 


343-1012-00 




-109 


441-1618-00 


B010100 




441-1618-01 


B020000 



Dscont 



Qty 12 3 4 5 



Name & Description 



B019999 



CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:5,22 AWG.10.5 L,RIBBON 
GROMMET,PLASTIC:BLACK U SHAPE,0.25 ID 
STRAP.RETAINING: 

****** "'(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 

NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:6-32 X 0.312.STL CD PL 

*******(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 

GROMMET,PLASTIC:NATURAL,OVAL 1.235 ID 
GROMMET,PLASTIC:BLACK,3.11 X 0.645 OBLONG 
RETAINER.CKT BD: 
CHASSIS,SCOPE:MAIN 
CHASSIS,SCOPE:MAIN 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Number 


80009 


175-8010-00 


80009 


348-0757-00 


95987 


3/1 6-H 


83385 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


348-0763-00 


80009 


348-0751-00 


80009 


343-1012-00 


80009 


441-1618-00 


80009 


441-1618-01 



10-8 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Mechanical Parts — 2465 Service 



Fig. & 
Index 
No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Qtv 12 3 4 5 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Numbei 


80009 


337-2932-00 


80009 


337-2932-01 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


334-4750-00 


80009 


670-7277-00 


80009 


361-1188-00 


22526 


47353 


22526 


48283-029 


T1167 


ORD BY DESCR 


T0171 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


348-0763-00 


80009 


175-4581-00 


80009 


175-4581-01 


80009 


670-7278-00 


22526 


48283-036 


80009 


175-4583-00 


80009 


670-7279-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


00779 


850100-01 


22526 


48283-036 


09922 


DILB40P-108 


09922 


DILB28P-108 


80009 


334-4759-00 


80009 


337-2978-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


407-2830-00 


T1163 


ORD BY DESCR 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


407-2829-00 


78189 


211-041800-00 


80009 


407-2854-00 


78189 


211-041800-00 


80009 


129-0304-00 


80009 


343-1025-00 



3-1 



-3 



-10 
-11 
-12 



-13 

-14 
-15 
-16 
-17 

-18 

-19 

-20 

-21 

-22 

-23 

-24 

-25 
-26 
-27 

-28 

-29 
-30 

-31 

-32 

-33 

-34 



337-2932-00 
337-2932-01 



211-0304-00 



334-4750-00 
334-4750-01 



361-1188-00 

131-0592-00 
131-0589-00 
352-0661-00 
175-4596-00 
348-0763-00 
175-4581-00 
175-4581-01 



131-0608-00 
175-4583-00 



211-0711-00 

131-0993-00 
131-0608-00 
136-0757-00 
136-0755-00 
334-4759-00 
337-2978-00 

211-0304-00 

407-2830-00 
407-2830-01 

211-0332-00 

407-2829-00 

210-0586-00 

407-2854-00 

210-0586-00 
129-0304-00 
343-1025-00 

210-0406-00 

337-3032-00 
195-9513-00 

210-0586-00 

342-0354-00 

210-0586-00 

211-0711-00 



B010100 
B022020 



B010100 
B022020 



B010100 
B021700 



B010100 B024699 



B010100 
B024740 



B022019 1 SHIELD,ELEC:HIGH VOLTAGE 

1 SHiELD,ELEC:HiGH VOLTAGE 

"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*""""" 
4 SCREW,MACHINE:4-40X0.312,PNH 

""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)*"""" 
B022019 1 MARKER, IDENT:MKD HIGH VOLTAGE 

1 MARKER,IDENT:MKD HIGH VOLTAGE 

1 CKT BOARD ASSY:HIGH VOLTAGE 

(SEE A9 REPL) 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*"""**" 

6 SPACER,POST:1 .15 L,4-40 THD 1 END 
""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)*"***"* 

14 .CONTACT,ELEC:0.885 INCH LONG 
13 TERMINAL,PIN:0.46 L X 0.025 SQ 
1 .HOLDER,TERMINAL:17 SQUARE PINS 

1 .CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:5,22 AWG,7.0 L.RIBBON 

1 .GROMMET,PLASTIC:NATURAL,OVAL 1.235 ID 

B021699 1 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:26,28 AWG.5.0 L.RIBBON 

1 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:26,28 AWG,5.0 L.RIBBON 

1 CKT BOARD ASSY:READOUT 

(SEE A4 REPL) 

7 .TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 
1 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:26,28 AWG.2.5 L 

1 CKT BOARD ASSY:DIGITAL CONTROL 

(SEE A5 REPL) 

"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)******""* 
4 SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 

""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 
1 .BUS,CONDUCTOR:2 WIRE BLACK 

122 TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 
1 .SKT.PL-IN ELEK:MICROCKT,40 PIN 

4 .SKT,PL-IN ELEK:MICROCIRCUIT,28 DIP 

1 MARKER, IDENT:MKD SHIELDS INVERTER 

1 SHIELD,ELEC:LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)********"* 

2 SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.312.PNH 
""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)**"*"" 

B024739 1 BRKT,CMPNT MTG:CAP & MOTOR,LEFT,PLASTIC 

1 BRKT,CMPNT MTG:CAP & MOTOR,LEFT,PLASTIC 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*********" 

2 SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.5,PNH,TORX DRIVE 
""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 

1 BRKT.CMPNT MTG:CAP & MOTOR,RIGHT,PLASTIC 

"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*""""" 

3 NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL,CD PL 
""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)""***** 

1 BRACKET,ANGLE:TRANSISTOR,ALUM 

**"**********(ATTACHING PARTS)****"***** 

5 NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL,CD PL 

1 INSULATOR,STDF:0.25 OD X 1.23 INCH LONG 

3 RETAINER,XSTR: 

"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)"""""* 
3 NUT,PLAIN,HEX:4-40 X 0.188,BRS,CD PL 

************(END ATTACHING PARTS)****"*** 
1 SHIELD r CKT BD: 

1 LEAD,ELECTRICAL:22 AWG,1.4 L 

"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*""**"** 
1 NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL,CD PL 

""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS) *** 

1 INSULATOR,PLATE:TRANSISTOR,SILICON RUBBER 
**************(ATTACHING PARTS)*"""*"* 

2 NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL,CD PL 
***"*******(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 

3 SCR.ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 



73743 



12161-50 



80009 


337-3032-00 


80009 


195-9513-00 


78189 


211-041800-00 


T0295 


7403-09FR-52 


78189 


211-041800-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 



REV OCT 1984 



10-9 



Replaceable Mechanical Parts — 2465 Service 



Fig. & 
Index 
No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Qty 12 3 4 5 



Name & Description 



Mfr 




Code 


Mfr Part Numbe 


80009 


129-0912-00 


80009 


195-9720-00 


80009 


195-9720-01 


22526 


48283-036 


80009 


361-1187-00 


80009 


175-4728-00 


80009 


175-4585-00 


80009 


407-2825-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


78189 


211-041800-00 


73743 


12161-50 


86928 


A384-25N 


12327 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


342-0536-00 


T0295 


7403-09FR-52 


80009 


361-1207-00 


22526 


65306-XXX 


22526 


65306-007 


80009 


343-1067-00 


80009 


343-1067-01 


80009 


200-2735-00 


22526 


48283-036 


22526 


48283-036 


22526 


75377-001 


S3629 


FEK 031.1663 


80009 


129-0976-00 


80009 


361-1132-00 


80009 


361-1132-01 


80009 


337-3059-00 


22526 


48283-036 


22526 


75377-001 


22526 


48283-029 


T1168 


ORD BY DESCR 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


78189 


1 206-00-00-0541 C 


80009 


175-4594-00 


80009 


175-4594-01 


80009 


175-4598-00 


80009 


175-4595-00 


31918 


FA201 


80009 


407-2904-00 


80009 


407-2904-01 


83486 


ORD BY DESCR 


93907 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


214-3328-00 


80009 


384-1631-00 



3-35 
-36 



-63 
-64 
-65 



-66 

-67 
-68 
-69 
-70 

-71 

-72 
-73 



129-0912-00 
195-9720-00 
195-9720-01 



B010100 
B011400 



B011399 



-0/ 
-38 


131-0608-00 




3 


-39 


361-1187-00 




1 


-40 


175-4728-00 




1 


-41 


175-4585-00 




1 


-42 


407-2825-00 




1 


-43 


211-0711-00 




3 


-44 


210-0586-00 




3 


-45 


210-0406-00 




6 


-46 


210-1307-00 




6 


-47 


210-1002-00 




6 


-48 






6 


-49 


342-0536-00 




6 


-50 


342-0354-00 




6 


-51 


361-1207-00 




6 


-52 


131-2779-00 




3 




131-2780-00 




1 


-53 


343-1067-00 


B010100 


B019999 4 




343-1067-01 


B020000 


4 


-54 






1 


-55 


200-2735-00 




1 


-56 


131-0608-00 


B010100 


B010299 22 




131-0608-00 


B010300 


17 


-57 


136-0263-04 




18 


-58 


200-2265-00 




4 
1 


-59 


129-0976-00 




1 


-60 


361-1132-00 


B010100 


B0 19999 6 




361-1132-01 


B020000 


4 


-61 


337-3059-00 


B020000 


1 


-62 






1 



131-0608-00 
136-0263-04 
131-0589-00 
343-1099-00 

211-0711-00 
211-0722-00 
210-0006-00 

276-0575-00 
175-4594-00 
175-4594-01 
175-4598-00 
175-4595-00 
366-1767-00 
407-2904-00 
407-2904-01 
211-0718-00 
211-0500-00 
214-3328-00 
384-1631-00 



B020000 

B020000 
B021400 
B021400 

B011200 
B010100 
B021700 



B021399 



B021699 



B010100 B019999 

B020000 

B010100 B019999 

B020000 



1 SPACER, POST:0.62 L W 6/32 THD ONE END 

1 LEAD,ELECTRICAL:18 AWG,1.4 L.5-4 

1 LEAD,ELECTRICAL:18 AWG.2.4 L,0-N 

CKT BOARD ASSY: FAN MOTOR 
(SEE A10 REPL) 

TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 
. SPACER, FAN:0.125,POLYPHENYLENE 
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:2,22 AWG,8.0 L.RIBBON 
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:20,28 AWG,13.0 L 
BRACKET,ANGLE:TRANSISTOR MTG 
"""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)"*"""" 
SCR.ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL,CD PL 
""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)""*"" 
NUT,PLAIN,HEX:4-40 X 0.188,BRS,CD PL 
WASHER,LOCK:0.115 ID,SPLIT,0.025 THK 
WASHER,FLAT:0.125 ID X 0.25 INCH OD,BRS 
TRANSISTOR:(SEEA2Q1220,Q1240,Q1300,U1260, 
U1330 REPL) 

INSULATOR,XSTR:TO-220,POLYENELENE 
INSULATOR, PLATE:TRANSISTOR,SILICON RUBBER 
SPACER,PLATE:0.550 X 0.812.ALUM 
CONN,PLUG,ELEC:CKT BD,1 X 5 MALE.0.15 SP 
CONN,PLUG,ELEC:CKT BD,1 X 3 MALE,0.15 SP 
RTNR.ELEC CONN:POLY,BLACK 
RTNR.ELEC CONN:POLY,BLACK 
CKT BOARD ASSY:REGULATOR(SEE A2 REPL) 
(AVAILABLE AS 672-1 037-XX ONLY) 
COVER,POWER SW: 

.TERMINAL.PIN.0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 
.TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 
.SOCKET.PIN TERM:FOR 0.025 INCH SQ PIN 
.TERM QIK DISC:CKT BD MT.0.11 X 0.02 
.(SEE A2P204,205,206,207 REPL) 
.CAP,FUSEHOLDER:5 X 20MM FUSES 
SPACER,POST:0.86 L X 6-32,POLY,0.3 
SPACER,CKT BD:A 
SPACER.CKT BD:A POLY 
SHIELD,ELEC:LVPS 

CKT BOARD ASSY:INVERTER(SEE A3 REPL) 
(AVAILABLE AS 672-1037-01 ONLY) 
7 TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 

18 .SOCKET,PIN TERM:FOR 0.025 INCH SQ PIN 

4 TERMINAL,PIN:0.46 L X 0.025 SQ 

1 .RTNR, POWER SPLY:LOW VOLTAGE.FRONT 

""'""""(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 
4 .SCR.ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 

4 .SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 

4 .WASHER, LOCK: #6 INTL.0.018 THK.STL CD PL 

"*""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)""*"" 
.CORE,HALF,XFMR:CERMENT,0.305 X 0.19 
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:7,22 AWG.7.0 L.RIBBON 
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:7,22 AWG.7.0 L,RIBBON 
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:8,26 AWG.7.0 L,RIBBON 
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:3,22 AWG,2.0 L.RIBBON 
PUSH BUTTON:BLACK,YELLOW INDICATOR 
BRACKET.EXT SFT:ABS 
BRACKET,CONN:CENTER 

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.312,FLH,DEG TORX 
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.375, FLH, 100 DEG 
SPRING,HLCPS:0.37 OD X 0.7 L,CLOSED ENDS 
EXTENSION SHAFT:1 2.897 L X 0.375 OD.PLSTC 



10-10 



REV OCT 1984 



Replaceable Mechanical Parts — 2465 Service 



Fig. & 

Index Tektronix 

No. Part No. 



Serial/Model No. 
Eff Dscont 



Qty 12 3 4 5 



Name & Description 



Mfr 

Code Mfr Part Numbe 



3-74 

-75 

-76 



-89 

-90 

-91 

-92 
-93 

-94 

-95 
-96 
-97 



-98 



-99 



407-2800-00 
211-0711-00 
407-2803-00 



-78 


386-4735-00 


1 


-79 


210-0586-00 


2 




361-0382-00 


2 




361-0719-00 B010150 


2 


-80 


131-2716-01 


1 


-81 


131-0679-02 


2 


-82 


213-0006-00 


2 


-83 




9 


-84 


210-0586-00 


3( 


-85 


337-2925-00 


1 


-86 


211-0304-00 
119-1445-01 


4 
1 


-87 


119-1445-02 


1 



351-0677-00 
214-2270-00 

211-0324-00 

384-0617-00 
337-3031-00 

211-0324-00 

129-0985-00 
129-0098-00 
210-0003-00 
214-0973-00 

210-0586-00 

136-0252-07 
131-0993-00 
131-0608-00 
131-0608-00 
195-3991-00 
195-3991-01 
175-8010-00 
175-8010-01 
1 75-2054-00 
343-0144-00 
343-0144-00 

211-0711-00 
211-0720-00 



B010100 
B020000 



B019999 



B010100 
B020000 
B010100 
B020000 
B010100 
B020000 
B011200 
B010100 
B01 0300 

B010100 
B020000 



B019999 



B019999 



B019999 



B010299 



B019999 



1 BRACKET,PIVOT:EXTENSION SHAFT,PLASTIC 

""" : ^ A;ii (ATTACHiNG PARTS)"""""" 

1 SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 

""""""(END ATTACHING PARTS)"**"*** 

1 BRACKET,PVT ARM:EXTENSION SHAFT.PLASTIC 

CKT BOARD ASSY:MAIN 
(SEE A1 REPL) 
.PLATE,CMPNT MTGrALUM 
""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)************ 
.NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL,CD PL 
.SPACER, PB SW:BROWN,0.275 INCH LONG 
.SPACER,SLEEVE:0.092 ID X 0.062 IL,PLASTIC 
■**********(END ATTACHING PARTS)********** 
TERMINAL.CAL: 

.CONNECTOR,RCPT,:BNC,MALE,3 CONTACT 
.************(ATTACHING PARTS)************ 
.SETSCREW:8-32 X 0.188 INCH,HSS STL 
.**********(END ATTACHING PARTS)********** 
.MICROCIRCUITLI: 

.(A1U700 SHOWN,ALSO SEE A1U 100,200,300,400 
.(500,600,900,950 REPL) 
.************(ATTACHING PARTS)************ 
.NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL,CD PL 
•**********(END ATTACHING PARTS)********** 
.SHIELD,ELEC:ATTENUATOR 
■************(ATTACHING PARTS)************ 
.SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.312.PNH 

■**********(END ATTACHING PARTS)*** 

.ATTENUATOR.VAR: PROGRAMMABLE 1X-100X,CH1 
.(SEE A11 REPL) 

.ATTENUATOR,VAR:PROGRAMMABLE,1X-100X,CH2 
.(SEE A12 REPL) 
2 .GUIDE, MAG CATCH: BLACK POLY 

1 .SPRING,GROUND:CRT TO SHIELD 
.""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)************ 

2 .SCR.ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.188 LPNH,TORX,MC 
• **********(END ATTACHING PARTS)********** 

1 .SPACER,POST:0.375 L X 0.25 HEX 

2 .SHIELD,ELEC:PRE-AMP 
.************(ATTACHING PARTS)************ 

2 .SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.1 88 L,PNH,TORX,MC 

■**********(END ATTACHING PARTS)********** 
2 .SPACER, POST:0.350 L,W/4-40 THD THRU 

2 .POST,ELEC-MECH:0.250 HEX.X0.406 INCH L,BR 

2 .WASHER,LOCK:#4 EXT,0.015 THK,STL 

1 .HEAT SINK,ELEC:0.28 X 0.18 OVAL X 0.187"H 

.""""""(ATTACHING PARTS)************ 
4 .NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL,CD PL 

■**********(END ATTACHING PARTS)********** 
32 .SOCKET.PIN CONN:W/0 DIMPLE 
7 .BUS,CONDUCTOR:2 WIRE BLACK 

137 TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 
139 TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 
1 .LEAD,ELECTRICAL:22 AWG,3.5 L,0-N 

1 .LEAD,ELECTRICAL:22 AWG.3.5 L.0.N 

1 .CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:5,22 AWG.10.5 L.RIBBON 

1 .CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:5,22 AWG.10.5 L.RIBBON 

AR .WIRE,ELECTRICAL:SOLID,30 AWG,BLACK,KYNAR 

2 CLAMP,LOOP:0.125ID,NYLON 
1 CLAMP,LOOP:0.125ID,NYLON 

**************(ATTACHING PARTS)*********** 
1 SCR.ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25 L,PNH,TORX 

1 SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.50 PNH.TORX 

************(END ATTACHING PARTS)********* 



80009 



80009 407-2800-00 
01536 ORD BY DESCR 
80009 407-2803-00 



386-4735-00 



78189 


211-041800-00 


80009 


361-0382-00 


82104 


10-0144/0622 


80009 


131-2716-01 


24931 


28JR270-1 


50293 


28701 -98C-3B 



78189 


211-041800-00 


80009 


337-2925-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


119-1445-01 


80009 


119-1445-02 


80009 


351-0677-00 


80009 


214-2270-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


384-0617-00 


80009 


337-3031-00 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


T1288 


OBD 


80009 


129-0098-00 


78189 


11 04-00-00-0541 C 


80009 


214-0973-00 


78189 


211-041800-00 


22526 


75060-012 


00779 


850100-01 


22526 


48283-036 


22526 


48283-036 


T0032 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


175-8010-00 


80009 


175-8010-01 


T0336 


1422(30)-1 


95987 


1-8-2 


95987 


1-8-2 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 


01536 


ORD BY DESCR 



REV OCT 1984 



10-11 



Replaceable Mechanical Parts — 2465 Service 



Fig. & 

Index Tektronix Serial/Model No. Mfr 

No. Part No. Eff Dscont Qty 12 3 4 5 Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number 

-100 441-1618-00 1 CHASSIS,SCOPE:MAIN 80009 441-1618-00 

(ALSO SEE FIG. 2) 

195-6851-00 B010100 B019999 1 LEAD,ELECTRICAL:BRAIDED,1.65 L 80009 195-6851-00 

195-6851-01 B020000 1 LEAD,ELECTRICAL:BRAIDED,1.65 L 80009 195-6851-01 



10-12 REV OCT 1984 




2465 OSCILLOSCOPE 




2465 OSCILLOSCOPE 



Replaceable Mechanical Parts— 2465 Service 



Fig. & 
Index 
No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 



4-1 


010-6131-01 


-2 


200-2742-00 


-3 


159-0021-00 


-4 


378-0208-00 




378-0199-00 


-5 


016-0537-00 




016-0692-01 


-6 


016-0692-00 


-7 


386-4849-00 


-8 


161-0104-06 


-9 


161-0104-07 


-10 


161-0104-05 


-11 


161-0104-08 


-12 


161-0167-00 




070-3832-00 




070-41 80-00 




070-4210-00 



Serial/Model No. 

Eff Dscont Qty 12 3 4 5 



Name & Description 



STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

2 PROBE,VOLTAGE:P6131,10X,1.3M W/ACCESS 

1 COVER,PROT:FRONT PANEL 

1 FUSE,CARTRlDGE:3AG,2A,250V,FAST-BLOW 

1 FILTER,LT,CRT:CLEAR,4.105 X 3.415 

1 FILTER,LT,CRT:BLUE,4.1 X 3.32 X 0.03 

1 POUCH,ACCESSORY:VINYL,W/ZIPPER 

1 POUCH ASSEMBLY:2445/2465 

1 .POUCH.ACCESSORY: 

1 .PLATE,MOUNTING::ACCY POUCH.ALUM 

1 CABLE ASSY,PWR:3 X 0.75MM SQ,220V,98.0L 

(OPTION A1 EUROPEAN) 
1 CABLE ASSY,PWR:3 X 0.75MM SQ,240V,98.0 L 

(OPTION A2 U.K.) 
1 CABLE ASSY,PWR:3,18 AWG,240V,98.0 L 

(OPTION A3 AUSTRALIAN) 
1 CABLE ASSY,PWR:3,18 AWG,240V,98.0 L 

(OPTION A4 NORTH AMERICA) 
1 CABLE ASSY,PWR:3.0 X 0.75,6A,240V,2.5M 

(OPTION A5 SWISS) 

1 MANUAL,TECH:OPERATORS,2465 OSCILLOSCOP 

1 CARD,INFO:REF 

1 MANUAL,TECH:010-6131-01 PROBE 



Mfr 
Code 



Mfr Part Number 



80009 


010-6131-01 


80009 


200-2742-00 


71400 


AGC2 


80009 


378-0208-00 


80009 


378-0199-00 


05006 


ZIP-6X91D 


80009 


016-0692-01 


80009 


016-0692-00 


80009 


386-4849-00 


S3109 


ORD BY DESCR 


S3 109 


ORD BY DESCR 


S3109 


ORD BY DESCR 


T1105 


ORD BY DESCR 


S3109 


ORD BY DESCR 


80009 


070-3832-00 


80009 


070-4180-00 


80009 


070-4210-00 



016-0691-00 
016-0691-01 
016-0720-00 
346-0058-00 
346-0199-00 
016-0082-00 
016-0592-00 
016-0566-00 
016-0792-00 
070-3831-00 



B010100 
B022830 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

B022829 RACK MOUNT KIT.2445/2465 

RACK MOUNT KIT:2445/2465 
COVER,PROT:NYLON 
FASTENER,STRAP:CARRYING 
STRAP.CARRYING: 
VISOR,CRT: 
VISOR.CRT: 
VISOR.CRT: 

CASE,CARRYING:24.0x1 6.0x9.0 
MANUAL,TECH:SERVICE,2465 OSCILLOSCOPE 



80009 


016-0691-00 


80009 


016-0691-01 


80009 


016-0720-00 


80009 


346-0058-00 


80009 


016-0082-00 


80009 


016-0592-00 


80009 


016-0566-00 


T1336 


2116BE9 


80009 


070-3831-00 



REV OCT 1984 



10-15 






®k ~ 




REV SEP 1984 



2465 OSCILLOSCOPE 



MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION 

At Tektronix, we continually strive to keep up with latest electronic developments 
by adding circuit and component improvements to our instruments as soon as they 
are developed and tested. 

Sometimes, due to printing and shipping requirements, we can't get these 
changes immediately into printed manuals. Hence, your manual may contain new 
change information on following pages. 

A single change may affect several sections. Since the change information sheets 
are carried in the manual until all changes are permanently entered, some 
duplication may occur. If no such change pages appear following this page, your 
manual is correct as printed. 



Tekt 


rnnr 


IT. MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION 


committed to excellence Date: c- 1 w-wn Change Reference 


rc/inoo dd/c 

\J\JI 1 UUU 1 ll_ V c 


Product- 2465 SERVICE 




Manual Part Nn.: 


070-3831-00 












DESCRIPTION 


PG38 








NOTE 






The following changes are in effect for ail instruments serial numbered B020000 and above (unless noted otherwise). 






REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES 






CHANGE TO: 










A1 
A1 
A2 & A3 


670-7276-06 
670-7276-08 
672-1037-02 


CKT BOARD ASSY: MAIN 

(USED WITH OPTIONS 01,05,06,09 OR 1B ONLY) 

CKT BOARD ASSY: MAIN 

(STANDARD) 

CKT BOARD ASSY: LV/POWER SUPPY MODULE 




M52083 
M52083 
PC131 


A6 


672-1038-02 


CKT BOARD ASSY: FR PNL MODULE 


B013850 


M52774 


A1C102 
A1C203 
A1C203 

A1C513 
A1C537 
A1C660 
A1C731 
A1C912 


290-0973-00 
281-0862-00 
283-0811-00 

283-0479-00 
283-0479-00 
281-0851-00 
290-0944-00 
283-0421-00 


CAP,FXD,ELCTLT: 100UF,20%,25VDC 
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.001 UF, + 80-20%, 100V 
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.01UF,20%,100V 

(OPTIONS 01,05,06,09 OR 1B ONLY) 
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.47UF, + 80-20%,25V 
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.47UF, + 80-20%,25V 
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 180PF,5%,100V 
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT: 220UF, + 50-10%,10V 
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 


B010250 
B020115 

B010250 


PC93 

M51124 

PC20 

PC131 

PC131 

PC131 

PC93 

PC131 


A1L403 


108-0578-00 


COIL,RF: FIXED,45NH AIRWOUND 




M51213 


A1Q624 


151-1025-00 


TRANSISTOR: FET,N-CHAN,SI 




PC131 


A1R155 
A1R194 
A1R456 
A1R461 
A1R462 
A1R463 
A1R622 
A1R743 
A1R805 
A1R941 


321-0206-00 
315-0103-00 
321-0329-00 
321-0139-00 
321-0201-00 
321-0193-00 
321-0255-00 
315-0102-00 
311-1242-00 
315-0561-00 


RES,FXD,FILM: 1.37K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES,FXD,CMPSN: 10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES,FXD,FILM: 26.1K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES,FXD,FILM: 274 OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES,FXD,FILM: 1.21K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES.FXD.FILM: 1K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES,FXD,FILM: 4.42K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES,FXD,CMPSN: 1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES,VAR,NONWW: TRMR.200K OHM,0.5W 
RES,FXD,CMPSN: 560 OHM,5%,0.25W 




PC131 

PC131 

M51124 

M51124 

M51124 

M51124 

M51124 

PC131 

PC131 

PC131 


A1U500 
A1U950 


155-0239-01 
155-0242-01 


MICROCKT,LINEAR: TRIGGER 

(OPTION 01 ,05,06,09,1 B) 
MICROCKT,LINEAR: Z AXIS AUTOFOCUS 


B011275 


PC15 
PC111 


A4U2930 


160-1631-02 


MICROCKT.DGTL: 4096 X 8 EPROM,PRGM 




PC 137 


A6DS3329 


150-1105-00 


LT EMITTING DIODE: YELLOW,30MA 


B013850 


M52774 


A6R3350 


307-0695-00 


RES NTWK.FXD.FI: 9,150 OHM,2%,0.2W EA 


B013850 


M52774 


A6S3185 


260-2108-01 


SWITCH, PUSH: SPDT,0.1A,125VAC 


B013850 


M52774 


A6W651 
A6W652 


175-8419-00 
175-8418-00 


CA ASSY,SP,ELEC: 26,28AWG,2.5L,RIBBON 
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC: 20,36AWG,8.0L,RIBBON 


B013850 
B013850 


M52774 
M52774 


A9R1922 


315-0331-03 


RES,FXD,CMPSN: 330 OHM,5%,0.25W 


B011000 


PC 130 


REMOVE: 










A1C303 
A1C312 
A1C450 
A1C454 


281-0547-00 
281-0547-00 
283-0421-00 
283-0421-00 


CAP,FXD,CER Dl 
CAP.FXD.CER Dl 
CAP,FXD,CER Dl 
CAP,FXD,CER Dl 


2.7PF,10%,500V 
2 7PF,10%,500V 
0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 
0.1UF, + 80-20%,50V 




PC131 
P n 1°1 
PC131 
PC131 


A1W194 


131-0566-00 


BUS CONDUCTOR: DUMMY RES,2.375,22AWG 






A3R1101 
A3R1102 


307-0103-00 
307-0103-00 


RES,FXD,CMPSN: 2.7 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES,FXD,CMPSN: 2.7 OHM,5%,0.25W 




PC136 
PC 136 


A6R3327 


315-0151-00 


RES,FXD,CMPSN: 150 OHM,5%,0.25W 

Page 1 of 1 1 


B013850 


M52774 



Product: 2465 SERVICE 



Date: 2-10-84 



Chans-e Reference: C6/1083 REV2_ 



DESCRIPTION 




REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES (cont) 




ADD: 










A1C967 
A1C980 


281-0783-00 
281-0775-00 


CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.1UF,20%,100V 
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.1UF,20%,50V 




PC131 
PC 134 


A1CR503 


152-0141-02 


SEMICOND DVC.DI: SW,SI,30V,150MA 




PC131 


A1R468 
A1 R503 
A1 R504 
A1R901 
A1 R902 
A1 R903 
A1 R939 
A1R942 


321-0275-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0103-00 
315-0112-00 
315-0112-00 
315-0472-00 
315-0332-00 
321-0256-00 


RES,FXD,FILM: 7.15K OHM,1%,0.125W 
RES,FXD,CMPSN: 10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES,FXD,CMPSN: 10K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES,FXD,CMPSN: 1 .1 K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES,FXD,CMPSN: 1.1K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES,FXD,CMPSN: 4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES,FXD,CMPSN: 3.3K OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES,FXD,FILM: 4.53K OHM,1%,0.125W 




M51124 

PC131 

PC131 

PC131 

PC131 

PC131 

PC131 

PC131 


A2J203 


131-2925-00 


CONN,RCPT,ELEC: CKT BD,1 X 6,0.2 SPACING 






A3J303 


131-2926-00 


CONN,RCPT,ELEC: CKT BD.1 X 2,0.2 SPACING 






A3W1101 
A3W1102 


131-0566-00 
131-0566-00 


BUS CONDUCTOR: DUMMY RES,2.375,22AWG 
BUS CONDUCTOR: DUMMY RES,2.375,22AWG 




PC 136 
PC 136 


A6DS3357 
A6DS3356 
A6DS3355 
A6DS3332 
A6DS3328 


150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1109-00 
150-1105-00 


LT EMITTING DIODE: GREEN.30MA 
LT EMITTING DIODE: GREEN.30MA 
LT EMITTING DIODE: GREEN.30MA 
LT EMITTING DIODE: GREEN.30MA 
LT EMITTING DIODE: YELLOW.30MA 


B013850 
B013850 
B013850 
B013850 
B013850 


M52774 
M52774 
M52774 
M52774 
M52774 


A6R3325 
A6R3329 


315-0151-00 
315-0151-00 


RES,FXD,CMPSN: 150 OHM,5%,0.25W 
RES,FXD,CMPSN: 150 OHM,5%,0.25W 

REPLACEABLE MECHANICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES 


B013850 
B013850 


M52774 
M52774 


CHANGE TO: 










FIG. # 


PART# 


QTY DESCRIPTION 






1-7 


101-0082-01 


1 TRIM.DECORATIVE: FRONT.PLASTIC 




PC140 


2-28 
2-34 
2-35 
2-39 
2-109 


131-0608-00 
354-0632-01 
333-2876-01 
386-4713-01 
441-1618-01 


10 TERMINAUPIN: 0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 

1 RING.MOUNTING: 5.41 X 4.18.BRASS 

1 PANEL.FRONT: 

1 PLATE.REAR: POWER SUPPLY 

1 CHASSIS.SCOPE: MAIN 


B013850 
B013850 


M52774 
M52774 
PC143 
PC140 


3-60 


361-1132-01 


4 SPACER,CKT BD: A POLYCARBONATE 




PC143 


ADD: 










3-61 


337-3059-00 


1 SHEILD.ELEC: LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 




PC143 


Under item 2-28, change the quantity of the following parts: 


B013850 


M52774 




Change the quantity of 352-0639-00 to 1 (one). 
Change the quantity of 352-0641-00 to 2 (two). 
Add 352-0692-00 2 HOLDER.LED: EIGHT.BLACK 


B013850 
B013850 

B013850 


M52774 
M52774 

M52774 


ADD the following item just below item 3-65. 








343-1099-00 


1 RTNR, POWER SPLY: LOW VOLTAGE,FRONT 

Page 2 of 1 1 




PC 143 



QQ1-0Q57-Q0D 



Product: 2465 SERVICE 



Date: 2-10-84 



Change Reference: C6/1083REV2 



DESCRIPTION 



DIAGRAM CHANGES 

Contained in this insert is a new layout of the A 1 board (Main Board) along with a new parts locator table which are to be used 
with instruments serial numbered B020000 and above. 



DIAGRAM 



♦ 



FRONT PANEL CONTROLS 



For serial numbers B013850 and above use the partial Diagram \3y contained in this insert 
when referring to the STATUS LEDS. >^ 

Also contained in this insert is a new layout of the A6 board (Front Panel) along with a new parts 
locator table which are to be used for instruments serial numbered B013850 and above. 



rfv 



DIAGRAM <^4> ATTENUATORS & PREAMPS 

Change C203 (location 8M) to a 0.001 nF capacitor. 

Change R456 (location 7S) to a 26.1 KQ resistor. 

Change R461 (location 9N) to a 274Q resistor. 

Change R462 (location 9P) to a 1 .21 KQ resistor. 

Change R463 (location 8P) to a 1 KQ resistor. 

Change the connections of J100-5 and J100-6 to read NC (No Connection) at location 8K. 

Remove C303 (location 11C) and connect R303 to ground. 

Remove C312 (location 10C) and connect R312 to ground. 

Remove C450 (location 2P) from pins 6 & 7 of U450B. 

Remove C454 (location 7P) from pins 1 & 2 of U450A. 

Remove W194 (location 3J) and connect R194 directly to U170 pin 6. 

Add R468 (7.1 5KQ) to U450A pin 1 (location 7P) as shown here. 



R4fc7 C4fl 
3C "5 



r-W\ J( 1 

i— Wv i 



JIOO-I 
10 1 



$-%GND 




q | JPIOODt 



TRIG PICKOFF/fi^ 

TO U500-8 ?£ 
(or 



Page 3 of 11 



M52774 



M51124 
M51124 
M51124 
M51124 
M51124 
M51124 

PC131 
PC131 
PC131 
PC131 
PC131 

M51124 



001-0057-OOD 



Product: 



2465 SERVICE 



Date: 



2-10-84 



Change Reference: C6/1083REV2 



DESCRIPTION 



DIAGRAM 



♦ 



DIAGRAM CHANGES (cont) 



DISPLAY SEQUENCER, TRIGGERING, A & B SWEEPS 



Change C513 (location 8E) to a 0.47^F capacitor. 
Change C537 (location 9E) to a 0.47/uF capacitor. 
Change C660 (location 4C) to a 1 80pF capacitor. 
Change C912 (location 5K) to a O.VF capacitor. 
Change R155 (location 3C) to a 1.37KQ resistor. 
Change R743 (location 4J) to a 1 KQ resistor. 

Add CR503, R503, and R504 to U500 pin 24 (Ication 4F) as shown here. 



PC131 
PC131 
PC131 
PC131 
PC131 
PC131 



PC131 



JI02-I 
5| 



AHO"| 

>.<»! L TO 

*^GNDr OPTIONS 




U500 
Ai/B TRIGGER 



Disconnect pins 1, 2, and 10 of U850B (location 6J) and connect them as shown here. 
Also add R901 (1.1 Kfi) as shown. 



TO U8SOC 



w 



PC131 



-/.25V- 



SELX/Y 



7^ 



37 



l.\K 



'^PROM Ulfb-ll" — 



DR 



•Mm 



BDC 



+SV 



Page 4 of 1 1 



001-0057-00D 



Product: 2465 SERVICE 



Date: 



2-10-84 



Change Reference: C6/1083REV2 



DIAGRAM 



<^> 



DIAGRAM CHANGES (cont) 



DISPLAY SEQUENCER, TRIGGERING, A & B SWEEPS (cont) 



Add R939 (3.3KQ) and R942 (4.53KQ) to U980D (location 6M) as shown here. 
Change R941 (location 7M) to a 560Q resistor and connect as shown here. 



SG 
SG 



U900 



DG 



44 
45 



R943 
■AA/V 



TO SGBZ 
U950-3 



R945 U980D 



R944 



a WV-CJ12 "\ 



R939 
3.3K 



21 
20 

41 



-15V, 



AW 

R941 
560 



R940 



R942 
4.53K 



-15V, 



Replace J 101 pins 9 & 10 with P109 & J 109 pins 1 & 2 as shown here. 
J101 pins 9 & 10 become NC (No Connection). 



TGA 



TGA 



SSA 



18 



U500 
A/B TRIGGER 



R519 



17 



11 



J109 



P109 



2 ^ 
l»i*. SSA 



1 ' n 
>V-^.GND 

id 



TO 
OPTIONS 



DIAGRAM <^b\cHANNEL SWITCH AND OUTPUT AMPLIFIERS 

Change R622 (location 4N) to a 4.42KQ resistor. 



Add R902 (1.1 Kfi) from U850A pin 11 (location 8M) to +5V. 
Add R903 (4.7KG) from U980C pin 8 (location 7H) to +5V. 



DIAGRAM <^V> HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY AND CRT 

Change R1922 (location 7E) to a 330S2 resistor. 



Page 5 of 11 



001-0057-00D 



PC131 
PC131 



U975D 



]2 l21 ^ ;>0 2 1 



PC131 



M51124 

PC131 
PC131 



B011000 



PC130 



Product: 2465 SERVICE Date: 2-10-84 q Reference: C6/1083R EV2 



DESCRIPTION 



DIAGRAM CHANGES (cont) 

DIAGRAM <£> LOW-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 

Replace R1 1 01 & R1 1 02 (location 6P) with W1 1 01 & W1 1 02 (Ofl jumpers). PC1 31 



o 



DIAGRAM ^1 1> POWER DISTRIBUTION A 

Add C967 (0.1 pF) in parallel with C966 (location 1 M). PC1 31 

Add C980 (0.1 /xF) in parallel with C675, C81 1 , C943, and C958 (location 3M). PC134 

Change C1 02 (location 8A) to a 1 00mF capacitor. B01 0250 PC93 



Page 6 of 11 



001-0057-00D 



2465 SERVICE 



2-10-84 



C6/1083REV2 



J2§(4 js|s 

: "* >:-sf(iBm~;.~ 



, *>™|| L1012 

~~: R1018 r 

I; l j 

'%< -;> f i °°f"- 

J2B6 <"-Bl0i3i— J 



.:fRT37B,,.pg 
0S37V T 



<>* «13/«—^ : 



C13<W [ C13M 



..CRT?»,.«2! ! :<« 



^irraras-.': 

* £l2'08U~y 



^ 


1*1 


SHs 


k 


Si 




o 


E; :S 


\ °" 


Si 
Uii 


COi 




"" ? 






ik i 


U1281 


.! V' 





lit? 



*l30or;=jfiij 



*il3S* 



jtCi ! u. j Ai R1262" 



Ijgl'l 



;»- ffl37fe 

*{ " H13721 



f5][s" 






1 ! ^^ Y ; 

S-„.CRT3W,..,';. | 
/™Vg-C8TOkii. | 



" J lis ! ■' ^ "' r 



, jojf&iSiS-^^ , : ~S. I ,.v, LSI s«.cjrrao2,... 



ir-imrass-;- 



j-jgT3B5 Ki : - fa 



,A R13S8 V«i 



fiifn 



HJ5 



1 l 



: 3/ it: 



a-fefe 







A2 REGULATOR BOARD 
(SN B020000 AND ABOVE) 



ifi'iolj 



J303 '" r #l 11021- 

J302 



C1102 j <?R1102 I C1101 i 






a f ? 
...°J 5 



o fl R ! li 



0106© | 


j | ] Q1070 ; 


£R106p> 


.MliiosoT- 


ii IS! 

IBS iCC 

Si 'o- 
T ' 


\\9 : - C10S2 


'"C1065^ 



u 



I 



si^HEM^- 



... 



9J°?2 



\~y ■■■■— siois— ? 



iij 



'SC107.5? 
•H5357<£- ; ifH-V'-T^ :.illS 7 S 

-IrS" -* ..: fjBlS 

! U1066 j -?-m 



M | ^ T10S0 

*-f~R1050"l-; : , ?ffi'' s | C10SO j rpj J; 

fli in r s N. ...f B 

. s«hbj | I ,.::,.. ;-:; : ■ 

m: * ^r J Hilt I ^ 



<HEi 




GR112I 



CR1«i • J233B" 






111 £ @.^& 



'Hwio?|-~ «Hs3eaK.': 



. ,CB102*SS 



CR1124 
CR1132 



^[01120 } j C1130 J 



1 1 [^fifg) I 



/~\ 



_._ .. , , R102f r- 



U1040: ' ^lM>i : ^ !fe<!8104tt? ^ k ^ si •■>BaH;-B«iBia»n:-eSi5i l -!±>VT i 



© 



A3 INVERTER BOARD 
(SN B020000 AND ABOVE) 



Page 7 of 11 



2465 SERVICE 



2-10-84 



C6/1083REV2 



A1— MAIN BOARD 
(SN B020000 AND ABOVE) 



CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 




NUMBER 


MUMBER 


LOCATION 


DUMBER 


MUMBER 


LOCATION 


MUMBER 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


NUMBER NUMBER 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


NUMBER NUMBER 


LOCATION 




C100 


4 


4C 


C650 


5 


7K 


CR358 


5 


7B 


L612 


6 


5H 


R192 


4 


1H 


R490 


6 


3J 




C102 


11 


6D 


C653 


5 


3J 


CR359 


5 


8B 


L619 


6 


6G 


R193 


4 


1E 


R491 


6 


3J 




C103 


4 


5C 


C660 


5 


3J 


CR460 


4 


3E 


L628 


6 


7H 


R194 


4 


1H 


R492 


6 


3J 




C104 


4 


5D 


C669 


5 


2J 


CR461 


4 


3E 


L633 


6 


7H 


R195 


4 


2E 


R493 


6 


3J 




C105 


4 


4C 


C675 


11 


3H 


CR476 


6 


3J 


L644 


6 


6J 


R196 


4 


2E 


R494 


6 


3K 




C106 


11 


5D 


C707 


5 


8C 


CR484 


6 


3K 


L733 


11 


6E 


R197 


4 


3F 


R495 


6 


4J 




C107 


11 


5D 


C708 


5 


8C 


CR485 


6 


3K 


L738 


11 


6E 


R198 


4 


3F 


R497 


6 


5K 




C108 


11 


6D 


C709 


5 


8D 


CR495 


6 


3K 


L740 


11 


6D 


R199 


4 


3F 


R498 


6 


6K 




C108 


5 


6D 


C710 


11 


9D 


CR503 


5 


2H 


L743 


11 


6D 


R200 


4 


3C 


R500 


6 


1J 




C112 


4 


6D 


C712 


5 


9E 


CR600 


6 


6J 


L938 


11 


6J 


R201 


4 


3B 


R501 


6 


1J 




C113 


11 


6D 


C722 


11 


6D 


CR616 


6 


6K 


L973 


11 


9K 


R202 


4 


3B 


R502 


4 


1G 




C114 


11 


5D 


C723 


11 


6D 


CR652 


5 


4J 








R216 


4 


3D 


R503 


5 


2H 




C115 


4 


6E 


C731 


11 


8E 


CR653 


5 


3J 


LR101 


11 


5C , 


R217 


4 


3D 


R504 


5 


2H 




C116 


4 


7E 


C733 


11 


7E 


CR707 


5 


8B 


LR107 


11 


6D 


R218 


4 


3E 


R511 


5 


3H 




C117 


4 


5E 


C735 


6 


7E 


CR741 


5 


6D 


LR180 


4 


4E 


R219 


4 


3D 


R512 


5 


3H 




C118 


4 


7E 


C738 


11 


6E 








LR201 


11 


4C 


R220 


11 


3C 


R513 


5 


3H 




C119 


11 


5C 


C740 


11 


6D 


CR746 


5 


5K 


LR218 


11 


3D 


R225 


11 


3C 


R518 


5 


3H 




C120 


11 


5E 


C742 


5 


6D 


CR747 


5 


5K 


LR280 


4 


3E 


R230 


4 


2E 


R519 


5 


3H 




C121 


11 


5E 








CR752 


5 


7J 








R231 


4 


2E 


R520 


5 


2H 




C122 


4 


5D 


C803 


6 


8F 


CR807 


11 


7F 


P100 


4 


4F 


R232 


4 


2E 


R521 


5 


2H 




C125 


11 


5C 


C805 


6 


8F 


CR811 


11 


7F 


P101 


5 


3H 


R301 


4 


1A 


R527 


5 


1G 




C130 


4 


5C 


C806 


6 


7F 


CR950 


5 


6K 


P102 


5 


7F 


R302 


4 


2A 


R529 


5 


1G 




C175 


4 


2D 


C808 


6 


7F 


CR951 


5 


6K 


P103 


4 


4C 


R303 


4 


1B 


R537 


5 


1E 




C176 


4 


2D 


C809 


6 


7F 


CR956 


6 


7K 


P106 


6 


7K 


R304 


4 


1B 


R542 


5 


3F 




C177 


4 


2D 


C810 


11 


7F 


CR966 


6 


9K 


P107 


5 


6K 


R311 


4 


2A 


R543 


5 


2F 




C179 


4 


2D 


C811 


11 


7F 


CR972 


6 


9K 


P108 


5 


5K 


R312 


4 


2B 


R544 


5 


3H 




C180 


5 


2E 


C817 


6 


7F 


CR987 


11 


8K 


P121 


11 


4J 


R329 


4 


2D 


R545 


5 


3H 




C181 


5 


2E 


C819 


11 


8E 








P122 


11 


4H 


R332 


4 


2D 


R550 


5 


1G 




C184 


4 


2F 


C822 


6 


7E 


DL100 


6 


5F 


P122 


5 


4H 


R334 


5 


9B 


R551 


5 


1E 




C185 


4 


3B 


C850 


11 


7F 


DL10O 


6 


5K 


P141 


6 


9K 


R353 


5 


2H 


R552 


5 


1E 




C200 


4 


3C 


C851 


5 


8E 














R355 


5 


7B 


R553 


5 


1F 




C202 


4 


4C 


C852 


5 


8E 


J100 


4 


4F 


Q130 


4 


7B 


R357 


5 


7C 


R554 


5 


1G 




C203 


4 


4C 


C853 


5 


8E 


J101 


5 


3H 


Q131 


4 


7B 


R358 


5 


7C 


R556 


5 


1F 




C205 


4 


3C 


C854 


5 


8E 


J102 


5 


7F 


Q154 


5 


1E 


R360 


5 


3H 


R557 


5 


1E 




C207 


11 


4C 


C907 


5 


7H 


J104 


5 


5K 


Q155 


5 


1F 


R361 


5 


3H 


R558 


5 


1E 




C217 


4 


2D 


C908 


5 


8J 


J105 


4 


2E 


Q460 


4 


3E 


R362 


5 


7B 


R560 


5 


1F 




C218 


11 


3D 


C912 


5 


9E 


J109 


5 


3G 


Q550 


5 


1E 


R363 


5 


7B 


R600 


6 


6J 




C219 


11 


3D 


C933 


11 


8G 


J10 


4 


5B 


Q600 


6 


4J 


R401 


6 


5F 


R601 


6 


5H 




C220 


11 


3D 


C940 


11 


9G 


J110 


4 


2E 


Q623 


6 


6G 


R402 


6 


5F 


R602 


6 


5H 




C221 


11 


3D 


C943 


11 


9H 


J111 


4 


6B 


Q624 


6 


6G 


R403 


6 


5F 


R605 


6 


5H 




C222 


4 


4D 


C956 


6 


6K 


J112 


8 


7B 


Q645 


5 


6G 


R411 


6 


5F 


R606 


6 


5H 




C223 


4 


2H 


C957 


6 


7J 


J113 


5 


7B 


Q700 


11 


9C 


R412 


6 


4F 


R607 


6 


5G 




C225 


11 


3C 


C958 


11 


7K 


J114 


8 


8B 


Q709 


5 


8D 


R416 


6 


4F 


R608 


6 


4H 




C301 


4 


1B 


C966 


11 


9K 


J115 


8 


8B 


Q741 


5 


6D 


R417 


6 


4F 


R614 


6 


7E 




C302 


4 


3B 


C967 


11 


9J 


J116 


5 


9B 








R430 


4 


3E 


R615 


6 


9B 




C306 


5 


1B 


C972 


6 


9K 


J117 


4 


6E 


R100 


4 


4C 


R440 


4 


3F 


R617 


6 


5G 




C307 


11 


3B 


C973 


11 


9K 


J118 


5 


2K 


R101 


4 


5B 


R450 


4 


3E 


R618 


6 


5G 




C310 


4 


1C 


C975 


8 


7B 


J119 


11 


4H 


R102 


4 


6B 


R451 


4 


3E 


R619 


6 


6G 




C311 


4 


1C 


C980 


11 


6J 


J11 


4 


3B 


R114 


4 


6D 


R452 


4 


3E 


R622 


6 


6G 




C325 


11 


3C 


C988 


11 


6K 


J181 


4 


6B 


R115 


4 


6D 


R453 


4 


3E 


R624 


6 


6G 




C329 


4 


2D 


C990 


11 


8K 


J191 


11 


8K 


R117 


4 


6E 


R454 


4 


3F 


R638 


6 


6J 




C332 


4 


2D 


C995 


6 


7K 


J191 


6 


8K 


R118 


4 


5E 


R455 


4 


3E 


R639 


6 


6J 




C336 


11 


1C 








J411 


11 


1K 


R119 


4 


6D 


R456 


4 


3E 


R642 


6 


4J 




C402 


6 


5F 


CR100 


4 


5C 


J411 


5 


1K 


R120 


11 


5E 


R457 


4 


3F 


R643 


5 


5G 




C403 


6 


4F 


CR101 


4 


5C 


J411 


6 


1K 


R121 


4 


4D 


R458 


4 


4F 


R644 


5 


5G 




C404 


6 


4F 


CR107 


11 


4H 


J511 


11 


1D 


R123 


4 


2H 


R459 


4 


4G 


R645 


5 


5G 




C412 


6 


4F 


CR130 


4 


7B 


J511 


4 


1D 


R125 


11 


6D 


R460 


4 


3E 


R646 


5 


5G 




C415 


11 


4G 


CR131 


4 


7B 


J511 


5 


1D 








R461 


4 


3E 


R650 


6 


4J 




C458 


11 


3F 


CR140 


4 


6B 


,151 1 


6 


1D 


R129 


4 


5C 


R462 


4 


3E 


R651 


5 


U 




C460 


4 


3E 


CR141 


4 


6B 


J512 


11 


1H 


R130 


4 


7C 


R463 


4 


3E 


R652 


5 


3J 




C464 


4 


3E 


CR142 


4 


6B 


J512 


4 


1H 


R131 


4 


7C 


R464 


4 


3E 


R653 


5 


4J 




C466 


4 


4F 


CR143 


4 


6B 


J512 


5 


1H 


R133 


4 


6B 








R654 


5 


U 




C467 


4 


4F 


CR144 


4 


6B 


J512 


6 


1H 


R135 


4 


6B 


R465 


4 


3F 


R655 


5 


U 




C478 


6 


3J 


CR145 


4 


6B 


J9 


5 


2A 


R136 


4 


1H 


R466 


4 


4F 


R659 


6 


6J 




C480 


11 


2J 


CR146 


4 


6B 








R140 


4 


7C 


R467 


4 


4F 


R669 


5 


2J 




C487 


6 


3K 


CR147 


4 


6C 


L101 


11 


6D 


R141 


4 


7C 


R468 


4 


4F 


R670 


5 


1H 




C488 


6 


3K 


CR148 


4 


6C 


L107 


11 


6D 


R142 


4 


7C 


R470 


6 


3K 


R671 


5 


2H 










CR149 


4 


6C 


L113 


11 


6D 


R143 


4 


7C 


R471 


6 


4K 


R672 


5 


2H 




C500 


11 


2F 


CR150 


4 


6C 


L115 


4 


6E 


R144 


4 


7C 


R476 


6 


4J 


R678 


5 


2H 




C501 


11 


1G 


CR151 


4 


6C 


L219 


11 


3D 


R149 


4 


7B 


R477 


6 


3J 


R700 


11 


9C 




C512 


5 


3H 


CR152 


4 


6C 


L307 


11 


3B 


R152 


5 


2F 


R478 


6 


3J 


R701 


11 


9C 




C513 


5 


3H 


CR153 


4 


6C 


L325 


11 


3C 


R153 


5 


2F 


R479 


6 


4J 


R702 


11 


9D 




C520 


5 


2H 


CR154 


4 


6C 


L336 


11 


1C 


R154 


5 


2E 


R480 


6 


4J 


R707 


5 


8C 




C521 


11 


2H 


CR155 


4 


6C 


L403 


6 


4F 


R155 


5 


2F 


R481 


6 


4K 


R708 


5 


8C 




C528 


5 


1G 


CR160 


4 


2D 


L521 


11 


2H 


R156 


g 


2E 


R482 


g 


4K 


R709 


5 


8C 




C536 


5 


1F 


CR161 


4 


2D 


L605 


6 


5H 


R159 


4 


2D 


R483 


6 


4K 


R710 


5 


9F 




C537 


5 


2F 


CR162 


4 


2D 


L606 


6 


5J 


R161 


4 


2D 


R484 


6 


4K 


R713 


5 


9E 




r*cAA 


C 


°H 


CR163 


4 


2D 


1607 


6 


5G 


R162 


4 


2D 


R485 


6 


4K 


R723 


5 


8E 




C617 


6 


5G 


CR200 


4 


3C 


L608 


6 


5H 


R163 


4 


2D 


R486 


6 


4K 






| 




C625 


6 


6G 


CR201 


4 


3C 


L609 


6 


5H 


R165 


5 


2E 


R487 


6 


3K 






i 




C645 


5 


5G 


CR355 


5 


7B 


L610 


6 


5H 


R190 


4 


1G 


R488 


6 


3K 






i 










CR356 


5 


7B 


L611 


6 


5H 


R191 


4 


1G 


| R489 


6 


3K 











Page 8 of 11 



A1— MAIN BOARD (cont) 
(SN B020000 AND ABOVE) 



CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


R724 


5 


8E 


U160 


4 


2D 


R731 


6 


7E 


U160 


11 


2D 


R732 


6 


7E 


U165 


4 


2E 


R733 


6 


7E 


U165 


5 


2E 


R734 


6 


7E 


U165 


11 


2E 


R735 


6 


7E 


U170 


4 


2E 


R736 


5 


9F 


U170 


11 


2E 


R737 


5 


9F 


U200 


4 


4D 


R738 


5 


9F 


U200 


11 


4D 


R741 


5 


6D 


U300 


4 


2B 


R742 


5 


6D 


U300 


11 


2B 


R743 


5 


6D 


U350 


5 


8B 


R744 


5 


7F 


U350 ■ 


11 


8B 


R745 


5 


6D 


U400 


6 


4E 


R746 


5 


5K 


U400 


11 


4E 


R750 


5 


6D 


U450 


4 


3F 


R751 


5 


6J 


U450 


11 


3F 


R752 


5 


6E 


U475 


6 


4J 


R753 


5 


8J 


U485 


6 


3K 


R754 


5 


7J 


U500 


11 


3G 


R300 


6 


8F 


U550 


5 


1F 


R801 


6 


8F 


U600 


6 


6H 


R802 


6 


8G 


U600 


11 


6H 


R804 


6 


7F 


U650 


5 


3J 


R805 


6 


7F 


U650 


11 


3J 


R806 


6 


7F 


U700 


5 


7D 


R809 


6 


7F 


U700 


11 


7D 


R811 


11 


7G 


U735 


6 


7E 


R817 


6 


6F 


U800 


6 


7F 


R820 


6 


6E 


U800 


11 


7F 


R821 


6 


6E 


U8S0 


5 


8F 


R822 


6 


6E 


U850 


6 


8F 


R823 


6 


8E 


U850 


11 


8F 


R850 


6 


8F 


U860 


5 


6F 


■ R853 


5 


8E 


U860 


11 


6F 


R855 


6 


6F 


U900 


5 


8H 


R856 


6 


9E 


U900 


11 


8H 


R858 


6 


8E 


U910 


5 


8F 


R860 


6 


9D 


U910 


11 


8F 


R901 


5 


9E 


U950 


6 


7K 


R902 


6 


8E 


U950 


11 


8K 


R903 


6 


5J 


U975 


5 


6K 


R904 


5 


8J 


U975 


6 


6K 


R907 


5 


7H 


U975 


11 


6K 


R910 


5 


8F 


U980 


5 


6J 


R912 


5 


9E 


U980 


6 


6J 


R924 


5 


7G 


U980 


11 


6J 


R936 


5 


8F 








R937 


5 


8G 


VR125 


11 


6D 


R939 


5 


6K 


VR225 


11 


3C 


R940 


5 


6K 


VR550 


5 


1E 


R941 


5 


9J 








R942 


5 


9J 


W101 


11 


9B 


R943 


5 


9H 


W102 


11 


4K 


R944 


5 


8J 


W103 


11 


7G 


R945 


5 


8J 


W104 


11 


3K 


R950 


5 


6K 


W105 


11 


5F 


R951 


11 


9J 


W106 


6 


7K 


R952 


5 


7K 


W107 


5 


6K 


R956 


6 


7K 


W108 


5 


5K 


R957 


6 


7J 


W109 


11 


9K 


R972 


6 


9K 


W121 


11 


4J 


R973 


6 


9K 


W122 


5 


4H 


R981 


5 


5K 


W122 


11 


4H 


R995 


6 


7K 


W141 


6 


9K 








W171 


4 


2D 


S615 


6 


8B 


W172 


4 


2D 








W666 


5 


U 


U100 


4 


5D 


W677 


5 


2J 


U100 


11 


5D 


W916 


6 


7H 


U110 


4 


6B 


W917 


6 


7H 


U110 


11 


6B 


W918 


6 


7F 


U120 


4 


6C 


W919 


6 


7F 


U120 


11 


6C 








U130 


4 


6C 








U130 


11 


6C 








U140 


4 


66 








U140 


11 


6B 








U150 


4 


6C 








U150 


11 


6C 









2465 SERVICE 



2-10-84 



C6/1083REV2 









n 



u 



.1 



% 



R332 

--:C332.- -* 

R329 
-{C32? : - ;: 
' C176 
-W172 -■• ' 

■ -6m '■■■-" 

■ R163 
R162 ) 

CR162 ; * / : 
CR163 *; 



J511 



R159 
W171 - 

CRief; 

R181 






R155 
R153 ; 



U550 



a it] iS ;*e 3 IS: 



R191 
R190 



R192 
JS12 



in » ; ▼- ;^ : 



E J: CC 



R136 
C223 

R123; 



;i-i 'm: :«: 



U170 



C217 



8 



U200 



*W3 LR201.I- <J2#"C2.22*^*~Ri2l'r 



U100 




So 



o £ *~ Cr °* 
Cj 20 C22t C21& --"= « 



to w *C 



R230 
*R232* * 

CR461 
CR460 •■? 
Q190 



V.i : .%.\§-» x R463 
° ° R43b 

C46 ° R455 

R461 i- 

"W> "VT- 

R460 



;8Ri 



1R197; £ 

" R198 ""'r <■ .1 

R199 ' '8 

pe 

R465 } . 

{^R454 J 
R457 
U450 



-R503 
RS20 


O 




- L521 


CRSC3 


■{«*»'■ 


R353 


4R521 <■■- 




R519 


■O 


R518 
CS13 


w* 1 


R511 




R512 
R513~ 
R544 





J109 



C480: 

R480 



R491 
R477 

'■■ R492 
C47rx:: 
R478 
CR476 

■f*R490 



HW104 

-:CR4?5}' 
R494 : 



R468 
f R458 " 



: \ 
.' \ " "J 



CR484 
R484 



■f R489 

■ JC48SJ- 
R488 

■f R487" 

R470 
R485 

■■iR47l] 
: R486 



Xi107VC1l4 






2 S . 






So j Hjc 72 * aSi«| C7 *t C73 f 



GR131 

R131 



R141 

-iR143; 
R140 
R142 





W122 

•HR808 





I 






x 


< '""■' J... 




f 




o 














s 




«l 


-1 


s 


*'*j* 




s= 


a. 




<r 


™y. 


J 


:«e-:P? 


•>,-^ 


DC 




\^/ 



R724 
R723 
R858 
R856 
. C712 
R713 



R853- 

R8S2 

R902 

■R912' 



R936 
R738 
R736 



"V 





^ 


<C972 




ft 








i L973 >■■ 




-■* 


91 




.R972>- > 


* 




(C 

o 


fOCj *. 


C973 S" 


s 


■■: V# 


> 


C968 


- ( 


) 



A1 MAIN BOARD 
(SN B020000 AND ABOVE) 



Page9 of 11 



2465 SERVIUh 



2-1 U-84 



FRONT PANEL CONTROLS DIAGRAM <£> 
(SN B013850) V 



C6/1083REV2 



ASSEMBLY A6 








CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


CIRCUIT 


SCHEM 


BOARD 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


NUMBER 


LOCATION 


LOCATION 


CR3000 


2J 


2C 


CR3250 


5K 


4D 


DS3391 


7G 


1E 


R3350-10 


7M 


2E 


CR3001 


2K 


2C 


CR3260 


6J 


4D 


DS3392 


8L 


1E 


S3000A 


3J 


2A 


CR3002 


2M 


2C 


CR3270 


2B 


4E 


DS3393 


7F 


1E 


S3000B 


3K 


2B 


CR3003 


2N 


2C 














S3000C 


3M 


2B 


CR3010 


2L 


2A 


DS3300 


6B 


4A 


J601 


5D 


4A 


S3000D 


3N 


2B 


CR301 1 


3D 


2C 


DS3301 


6C 


4A 


J602 


8K 


3F 


S3010A 


3L 


2A 


CR3012 


3K 


2B 


DS3302 


6C 


4A 


J671 


7P 


4F 


S3010B 


3D 


2B 


CR3020 


3B 


3A 


DS3304 


7D 


4A 








S3010C 


3K 


2B 


CR3021 


3B 


3A 


DS3303 


7C 


4A 


P602 


7K 


3F 


S3010D 


3L 


2B 


CR3022 


3B 


3B 


DS3310 


7D 


4B 


P651 


3S 


2A 


S3025 


1B 


4A 


CR3023 


3C 


3B 


DS331 1 


7E 


4B 


P652 


1S 


2F 


S3030 


4D 


3B 


CR3025 


2C 


4A 


DS3312 


7E 


4B 


P652 


7A 


2F 


S3035 


2C 


4C 


CR3030 


5B 


3B 


DS3313 


7E 


4B 








S3050A 


2B 


4D 


CR3031 


5B 


3B 


DS3314 


7F 


4B 


R3021 


3P 


1A 


S3050B 


2A 


4E 


CR3032 


5B 


2B 


DS3325 


8H 


2D 


R3031 


4P 


1B 


S3105 


4J 


1D 


CR3033 


5C 


3B 


DS3326 


8H 


2D 


R3050 


4P 


4D 


S3110A 


4M 


2C 


CR3035 


2C 


4C 


DS3327 


8G 


2D 


R3075 


5P 


4E 


S3110B 


4L 


2C 


CR3050 


2C 


4E 


DS3328 


8G 


2D 


R3100 


5P 


1C 


S3110C 


4K 


2D 


CR3075 


2B 


4D 


DS3329 


10M 


2D 


R3125 


5P 


2C 


S3175A 


3H 


3C 


CR3105 


4J 


1D 


DS3330 


8J 


3D 


R3150 


6P 


2D 


S3175B 


5H 


3C 


CR3110 


4M 


1D 


DS3331 


8J 


3D 


R3190 


3P 


4C 


S3200 


3J 


1D 


CR3115 


4L 


2C 


DS3332 


10M 


3D 


R3200 


6P 


1D 


S3210 


4N 


2E 


CR3120 


4K 


2D 


DS3350 


8J 


2E 


R3210 


6P 


1E 


S3220 


5L 


2D 


CR3175 


2F 


3C 


DS3351 


8K 


2E 


R3300 


6D 


4A 


S3250 


5K 


3D 


CR3176 


2F 


3C 


DS3352 


8K 


2E 


R3310 


7F 


4B 


S3260 


5J 


3E 


CR3177 


2F 


3C 


DS3353 


8L 


2E 


R3325 


7L 


3E 


S3270 


1A 


3E 


CR3178 


2G 


3D 


DS3354 


8L 


3E 


R3326 


9N 


3E 








CR3179 


2G 


3C 


DS3355 


8L 


3E 


R3328 


10M 


2E 


U3300 


8B 


4B 


CR3180 


5F 


4D 


DS3356 


7L 


3E 


R3329 


10P 


1D 


U3325 


9E 


3C 


CR3181 


6F 


4C 


DS3357 


7L 


3E 


R3350-2 


10M 


2E 


U3350 


9H 


3D 


CR3182 


6F 


4C 


DS3375 


9M 


2E 


R3350-3 


9P 


2E 


U3375 


10L 


3F 


CR3183 


6G 


3C 


DS3376 


9M 


2E 


R3350-4 


8N 


2E 








CR3184 


6G 


4D 


DS3377 


9N 


2E 


R3350-5 


8M 


2E 


W651 


8S 


2A 


CR3185 


5C 


2C 


DS3378 


9N 


2E 


R3350-6 


8M 


2E 


W652 


10A 


2F 


CR3200 


3J 


1D 


DS3379 


9N 


2E 


R3350-7 


8L 


2E 


W652 


3S 


2F 


CR3210 


4N 


2E 


DS3380 


9P 


3E 


R3350-8 


7J 


2E 








CR3220 


5L 


2D 


DS3390 


10P 


1E 


R3350-9 


7G 


2E 









B 



R3021 



3 — C 



C 



R3031 



W651 



S3000A 


S3000B 


S3000C 


S3000D 



AfitfiS 

n nor g 

<o \n cojco ico 
ElE KlB OC 

o ooo o 



S3010A 



S3010B 



S3010C 



RCR30109 BCR30129 
8CR3020& iCB30308 
JgCR3021» «CR30318 



S3010D 



0CR3O32i 

©CR3033* 



9 




R3125 



, z\ d 

'CR31798 *CR3176~1 «CR3178!i 



DS3328 

J DS3329 DS33 79 
DS3330 



S3020 




DS3350 
DS3351. 
DS3352 
DS3353 
DS33S4 
DS3355 




fflCR31»1j a CR31 80aBCR3184» CR3260 

\_| |_ g TS CR3075» gCR3050 »r— 

S 
R3050 



R3190 



II 




R307S 



A6 FRONT PANEL BOARD 

(SN B013850 AND ABOVE) 

Page 10 of 11 



2465 SERVICE— C6/ 1083 REV2 



B 



D 



H 



K 



M 



N 



LEO DATA > 

I, 
LED CLK > 



8 



R-iOM 
J&52 

<^>4P 



v ■ 



STATUS LEDS 



10 



AG 



FRONT PANEL BOARD 



R3350-8 
150 



P602 p ■ 



FROM 
OPTION _ (gj 



R3325 
150 
— vv» +5V D 




4 5V r 

ll' 



R3350-10 
150 



TRIGGER COUPLING LEDS 



PARTIAL DIAGRAM <§> 
(SN B013850 AND ABOVE) 



R3350-7 
150 






TRIGGER SOURCE LEDS 



+5V D 



SLOPE VVDS3375 



*5^ D Jz R 



.- 1 5RG 

L^ 
IB y 

be 




"D 

' R3350-3 

: 150 



[qi^(g) PS33BQ. 



\§) 



U3375 

7<h_SI64 



// 



R3328 

150 



// 



R3329 
150 



R3350-2 
150 



2-10-84 



Page 11 of 11